N. MANCHESTER, INDIANA THE HECKMAN BINDERY, INC. JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF ont New Series, Vol. XVIII. Te2z2; SIRWILLAMJONES MDCCXLVI-MDCCXCIV as? CALCUTTA: PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, 1, PARK STREBT. 1923. a MiSS0UR! BOTANICAL GARDEN LISRARY DATES OF PUBLICATION. Nor 1 pp. i— 84 Sept., 1922. eee es 85-220 Oct., _,, ,, 3 (Official No.) = O. 1- 70 April, 1923. : 4 221-268 March, ., aa: 5 269-348 ,. as ma 6 (Science Congress No.) ,, [.S.C, 1-197 June, ,, »» 7 (Philological No.) ay 349-444 Nov.. ,. s» 8 (Bibliographical No.) .. 445-526. 29 es 9 (Numismatic No.) - Ne i 382, ag », 10 (Biological No.) 527-592 ;, ¥ (Volume complete in 10 issues.) DIRECTIONS FOR BINDING. The pages of the Journal should immediately follow the Title, List of Contents, and these directions, in the follow- ing sequence: Nos. 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8 and 10. Then follow the Proceedings contained in the Official Number (No. 3), with separate page-numbering marked with the letter O. (Official). The separate title-page and list of contents for these Proceed- ings should be prefixed to it. Next follow the Proceedings of the Ninth Indian Science Congress (No. 6), and the Numismatic Supplement for 1922, No. XXXVI (No. 9), each with separate title-page and page-numbering marked with the letters LS.C. (Indian Science Congress) and N. (Numismatics). Plates i-ii to follow page - > A b Plate vi-,, face 388 Plates: vii=vili 5 5 Xs AVEO Plate ix 5 sec Al’ ‘ oN ee eae 3 a i si bl The Index is to be bound at the end of the volume. CONTENTS INDEXES AND SYNOPSES Article 10. ar ee VA ANE : Eeocsedinge, Ninth indies Science > Congress: ieee nts, in front ; : Numismatic Nu mber Contents, in front .. PAPERS [JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS] ANNANDALE, N. Bivalve Molluses injuring brickwork in the Caleutta Docks —— AND Dover, CEepRIC. Advances in our knowledge of the Fauna of the Fresh and Bra ae ons waters of India, with a sa ons ds gets for the years 1912- Biswas, K. P. See Briuy, P. Brituu, Paunt, anp Biswas, K. P. On a new species of Cylindrospermum from Bengal --Cyiin: drospermum doryphorum, Briihl et Biswas Born, R. The Machhlidar Sibah Awadh coins Cuatrersi, N. C Primogeniture in Ancient India CHartTerg1, N. N. On the Rationalisation of eee Equations CHopra, B. Preliminary note of Isopoda of the family Bopyridae parasitic on Indian Decapoda Macrura CrecHorn, Mavpe L. megeetrere ni on the Bat-flowers of the Mohwa (Bassta latifolia a ie DayaL, Prayaa. A Nusratabad Rupee of Aurangzeb as ae os j 35 Note on a Silver Coin of Qutbu-d-din Mubarak ge Pa 431 261 Dover, CEDRI mé oF aeont =e in our —— of the Indian ‘Was ps and Bees —— anv Rao, H. Srinivasa A Note on the Diplopterous lend in the veers acem of the Indian Museum —— See also ANNANDALE, N. Gupta, K. M The Dhaes Copper-plate Inscription of Ramasimha.. Harter, A. H. Dibyah al-Kalbi_.. a = os Harrison, E, P., anp noah N. An automatic ‘ma d break’’ Key for actuating 7 Me Ea and high scuiar civouite a a Coolidge X-Ray t Hopivaza, 8. H. See WuireneapD, R. B. Hora, SUNDER ane Homology o shel bea Ossicle Mocdaomton a the = es bladder it in Hill- ‘stream fishes Some observa ner eae spe atus of the tadpoles 0 of Megalo Atenas eras Boulenge Hornet, JAMES. Pear! formation in the Indian pear! oyster ee ar Hostren, Rev. H. Father A. Monserrate, on Salsete, Chorao, and oe Molucus (1579 Father A. Monserrate, Bail:; and Capt. F. ‘Wilford . Ivanow, W. An Old pews Jargon ee ee The Sources of Jami’s Nafahat De A. An Feuinilivie Pedigree ; Ktoss, C. Bopmn. See Ronsinson, H. C. sates N. G. Notes on Kharosthi Inscriptions ates Copper-plate of Govindacandra, V.E. 1183 MaJsumpar, R. C. Dates of the Votive inscriptions on the Stipas at Safichi MANEN, eee VAN . e229 a Bon image pe 4a ooaebavon to the Bibliography of Tibet a Mirra, Haripas A Note on the newly discovered Bogra stone ingcription Page 17 235 195 445 Page MoOOKERJEE, SiR ASUTOSH Presidential cages iy eee mn re ie Oe 16 Muup. IsMainL The Epithet used on copper coins by Ibrahim Adil Shah II of Bijapur es ea ie es WN. 36 NEtson Wricut, H. Ujhani as a mint town is sd % Pe Pe PRASHAD, B. Observations on the luminosity of some animals in the Gan- Revitcn of Kabelt's ’s Nomenclature of the ‘Indian Ampullariidae pee PRAYAG Davat. See Dayat, PRayaa. Rao, H. Srinivasa. See Dover, CEDRIC. Ray, H. C. Madra .. Lala—A Note ont bo ww or Raycuaupauri, H. C. The Mahabharata and the Besnagar inscription of Heliodoros 269 Rosinson, H. C., anp Kuioss, C. BopEN. Some remarks on Mr. C. Stuart Baker’ s new volume on the Birds in the ‘* Fauna of British India 559 Sen, N. N. See Harrison, E. P. Sinnwa, Kumar GANGANANDA Discovery of Bengali (?) dramas in le ae : . a eae A Note on the Jangala Desa oS Pe ac StrapLeton, H. E Contributions to the History and Ethnology of North-eastern India eS as es - es es WuirrHeap, R. B., anp Hoprvaui, 8. H. The Coins of Muhammad Akbar as claimant to the Mughal thron +“ “ we ae Be a Bae: WaHitTteL, H. M The Claas of the Sharqi Kings of Jaunpur ne sa. IO Wooptanp, W.N. F. On the ‘‘ Renal Portal’’ system — venous —— and Kidney excretion in Vertebrata Vili [PROCEEDINGS] z Proceedings, Annual — 1922°: = a Annual eet: for 1921 we Annual Address, 1921 Election of Officers and Members of Council for 1922 Receipts and Disbursements for 1921 OFFICIAL MATTER s | . PBDXReARwWBWAWDA PDN — i Members ie = List of Officers aud Members of CBane il Be Le List of at ead Centenary Members .. y List of Honorary Fellow =e List of Fe stn Ss : oy List = yome ats Members. pe = see t members ay - ze3 25° pe oe a6 Ec Lr} eeo 209090009900 OCMNIAMWDAP RTO — Oe 29000 Loss of Members, 1921 Blliott Gold Medal and Cash Barclay Memorial Medal fir Note on Procs. of the Ordinary General Meetings, 192k ae 0. 70 -. TS.C. 1-198 Proceedings, Ninth Indian Science Congress a NI I NI SP PRIA FP INDEX JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL VOLUME XVIII (New SERIES) 1922 INDEX A Abii Bakr met lah b. Muham- mad Raz Abu’I- Qasim Dusting! of Nohapos: i Sa: nd, pia ae a ene Acromitus rabanchat ea, 5, Aegithina tiphia multicolor, 563. dpe ostratum rostratum, ATO’ 4 Din Abdu’l-lah b As‘ad Yafi‘'i, 400. Agathokleia; 263. ns ‘Ali b. ‘Uthman "seat al- Hujwiri, 396. gaits oe taped gupta, wi Sar ae (india), 5 atta fantilkidas), inscription of ae “miahe- of the Besnagar in- More 269- Anandapala of Sialkot, "268. Animals, luminosity of, 581. Annual Address As. Soe. Beng., by Sir A. " Mookerjee, 1921, 5 Ansari, 389. Antialkidas, 269. Apidae Apollodatbe:. an Indo-Greek king, ions Dana, Ti ), Aupamanyava of Kamboja, 258. Auran gzeb, Nusratabad Rupee of, ee “make and break ’’ Awadhi Bios t, 3 ‘Aynu‘l Bea Hamadani, works Bahadur Birah, 422. Baker, C. Stuart, irae! on his vo ume on Birds, Baladitya, king of Magadha, 266. Ppattom ni — ngs of Bengal, 408-27. Balit cet, Bassia vagee, S71. ‘ Bat- — of the Mohwa (Bassia deggend ls by M. L. Cleg- orn, 571- Bees, indie. Ti esi Sai during In- endent Moslem rule, 407. “Bengt “ ) dramas in Nepal,” y Gangananda Sinha, 253- Bengali, ol Beroe cucum BB, 583. Besnagar inscr Sription of Heliodoros, Bhagadatta Raja, 417. Bhagavatas , 269. Bhandarkar, D. R., on the origin of the Brahmi i alphabet, 231. poe Pratihara Bhoodev Nripat Bite ae Malla or Bhatgaon, 2 a Bibliography > i Fauna of vane ackish wa of “india asia, Milf es Dover, 5 ay Ced [a Bibliography of Tibet, ° by J. v. | en, 445-525. Birds, volute on, by C. Stuart Ba 559. ** Bivalve ntfoses injuring brick- Bladder i in hill-stream fishes ra stone cawipion. ay aridas Mitra, 439-43. ‘* Bon image,” by J. v. Manen, 195 lla deformans, 70. Bopyrina kossman B lat neinake "teins: 69. —— Stimpson, B us squii 10: Botia almorhae, 6 ymenophysa, 6. Brivehippdtne atriceps cinereoven- oe fusciflavescens, 568. il poles Lash a ees 568. achypodiu Brachypodine aos major, 567. Brahmi alphabet, 23 Brickwork injuring bivalve mol luses, 555. Cc pee aay king of Kanauj, 267. Catho! n Dacea District, num- bar of 5 Catholic Mission at Hashnabad, 40. Ceylon, Soe of, gore Chanda, Ram§aprasad, vs on rahmi east: “otters, 298 Bol: Chalukyas of Badam 267. Chand, a kind of devovornl song earths Awadhi, 345. Chiloropsis Cyanopogan septen- oe ona. “en nas 4. Cho rate on, 349. iehalaer "(Catholic e) of Eastern , 25-60. ngal, origin o Cissa chinensis, 561, ** Coin — of the Sharqi Kings o unpur,”’ by H. M. Whittel, ** Coins ‘of Muhammad Akbar elaim to es Mugh chal ike. - by B. White- head and 5 H. Hodivala, l Colletidae 23, Con ngregation de Propaganda Fide, - Contributions to the History and nology ot Nest Eastern is Bg H. m, 556, eus ochraccus, 5 —- rospermum dorypho- y a ee and K. Fr. as, 57 Cylindrospermam Bes 577. —— tropicum, 578, D Dacea district, Pagia oo in, 59, ainamuxha, Danvjarnanidsns: ere of, 407. Decapoda Macrura, 6' Demetrius, an Indo-Greek king, Dendrocitta htndiné: 561. : | | | | imals in, 58 Sasruing | jousclahag, | 561. Index. Dhanapati, his Mathavanala Kama ndala, 254 Dharmapala, 2 ** Dhupi Copper-plate inscription ef Ramasimha,” by K. M. —79. Divar, Monserrate on, 349. = Dihyah. ee gee cs "by A. H. Harley, 27 Diplopirys siterseon 70. 21 brehitng one in the Soe hes C. Dov and oO, oe Dramas, Bengal 253. Dryonas Chinensia leucogenys, Dye-injection experiments, 89, 92. E Edwardsia tinctrix, 529. Enayetpur, coin from, 416-17. Bakyetieee. an Indo. Greek king, 262. Erpornis Xantholeuca interposita, Erythrocichla semana bicolor, 562. Eumenes a ma, Sauss., 237. sues Seghibeotes Bait nay —— arcuata Fab., 238. —— caffer var. gracilis Sauss., 237. —— —— var. esuriens, Fabr.. 237. Sauss., dim idiatipenni is ye —— edwardsii Sauss. — a icta, mens te eke: aoe letiars var. asinus Sauss., a macillosus, var, petialatus, 237. — rr Sauss., 236. Eumenidae, | Buthydemos, an Indo-Greek king, | Fakbru’d-Din ‘Iraqi, 400. (jeer of the Fresh and Brackish rs India,’’ by pisaesiel sy 527-54. —— Bibliography of, by Cedric Dover, 533-54. Gahadavaia occupation of Magadha, 82. Ganeéa, his Ramacaritra, 253. Gangetic Soaern, ne: minosity of some 5 ;) Index. ill Garr phanes des Beco alis, 56 ridt aieieg Robinson eae Klos s, 561. Cnbcia, in Bou pea Bi 209. Garuda-dhvaja of Vasudeva, erec- of, 2 Bs Gene ad Qua a, theory of, 291. Chivaguadtin be: vehi Shah, 418-26. Gopa-grha, Govir flacandea, eee Copper- plate of, Greek ambassador from Taxila, Greek o oce apation of Madra, 261. Gulgulawali katha in modern Awadhi, 338. Gupta rule in the Punjab, 265. Gurwitsch, oxperiments of, 118. Gypsies in Persia, words used by, 379 H ‘Hala’ or ‘ Hala’, Harpodon ren 581, 583. Hashnabad, Cat aia pr oe at, m Khan, Heiocos an pues Greek king, 263. Heli snagar inscription of, 230, “D39- 33, 2 Hemiarthrus Giard ahd Bonnier, 70. Hill- steauin ti a of the swim-bladder = oe ne Ethnology. of North- stern saiey ang vy. -B- Beep. 4 Hiuen oe ng, his account of the ina State, 2' ‘mnadace of the We berian hey ae by Sunder Lal Hor Hiinas in the Punjab, mig e Ibn Batatah, Tbnu’} * Ara ay Sack Ibrahim ‘Adil Shah tt ied * Bijapte, tent used on copper co . 36. «Indian Wasps and Bees,” by Ced 3. ec Dover, 17-2 ‘* Tsopoda a the family Sate parasitic on Indian Decapoda Macrors, by B. hopra, Tt. “+ Iemailitie reas dae "by W. Iva- Txos, 565. Jaintia kingdom, organisation of, 1 Jalaluddin Mahmiad, 415-16. Jami’s Nafahat, sources of, 385 we a Desa,” by Gangananda inha, 287-89. Faeaper. peg a e the Sharqi kings of, N. Jayapala, “of Sialkot, ‘268. K per abitie 2738. mboja, 258. eae forest, 288-5 tie ae and ees Biilisgtaphy 459-6 Kapya Pageaie name of a teacher of Madra, 258, 260. Karkota dynasty of KaSmira, 267. Karsa apan 78. Ratahit maljub of ‘Ali b. ‘ Uth- al-Jullabi al-Hujwirt, 396 Kasinatha, his Vidya-vilapa, 253. Kasiputra oo name of a ki Katra taka yee coin of the ntia Ries 78. Kedare sviteis of ‘measurement, oy Kharosthi ee ” by N.G. Majumdar cee Khasi Hille, + tapoles fro Kidne tion, neo- se Ladelg diners 31. Swelegenan L soon: of, 267. ** Kobelt’s nomenclature of the Indian Ampullaciidae, Me hs B. OE ae Kysnadeva, his Hn 253. Kuru-J este country, 287-88. Kushan rule in the Punjab, 265. L Labeo rohita, Labus Aaa ae Sauss., 236 **Lakhi — dialect of Modern wadhi,”’ by Baburam Sak- i 3 ‘Lala,’ by H. C. Ray, 435-37. Lama‘ ot of Fakhrud’-Din ‘ Ira- Lataif- dehrali dar biydn-t-siifi, Leander ae 1 ee iiiiers 8, 70. Paes a Tangai et Gs 63. ‘* Luminosity of so the enaetis gad by B. Prashad, 581-8 M oy gan we Siibah Awadh coins,” : Burn, N.. 1-2, date” by H.C. Bey, 257-68. z SOs syoctiews aid usto of, 260; Greek occupation of, 261-64; Saka, usan, Gupta and Hiina occupation , 264-67; ecntact with the Calukyas, 267; an autono- ous trib on Hinder th Muham- n conquest oe tg Sere Jangala,’ mean of, Mal Ped inscription, 65-66. ‘‘ Mahabharata and the Besnaga r inscription of Heliodoros,”’ by Rayciaudturi. 269-71. dragged oy its connection with 271: xila, Monebiarie of Krisnadeva, 253 Maithili ca in Nepalese Pacis 5-5 Malocoesnéla ‘abbotti abbotti, 562. Manaqibw’ 2 arifin of Shamsu’ddin Aflaki, 400. ‘Maner Copper plat of ae candra Maj dar, §l- Mantaigon ala, 82. reid inscript io esia seeps: Blaniora 557. Kama-kandala of ana “ed 24 in old ish argon, 376-77. Mariana: Mmmins lis wo erupinewm 577. Megalophry: ntana, 12. Megalophrys p parva Boulenger, 9. Men an do-Greek king, G2: dats of, 263 ; his capital 64. pos des Dhan ee akala, Microhyls achatina, 12-13. Mihira pion e of a Hina king, ramana, 265-6 Mireadwl- “iba of Aba Bakr *Ab- du’llah b. Muhammad Ra azi, Mixornis rubricapilla connectens, Modification ~ the re Hill-stream by fishes ei ae Lal Hora, 5-7. Modiola ni Aa Hanley, Mohwa t recta bivakes, Index. 571, po , 574. ilford,”’ by H. Hosten, 371-74 Je Monserrate, ae Salsete, Chorao, Div an the Molucus (1579) oa. and trans. H. Hosten, 349-69. | Montezumia ge manica ae 239. | Muham mad Akbar, coins o Mu Scat ibn T 422; Bengal coins of, Mura apara, coins from, 407- 8. Muslim — ag Bengal, 423-30. Mutillidae Mymar eecbaa 20. N Najfahat of Jami, 385. Nandin mily, genealogy of, | 39-40. Nasiruddin pevaid king of Bengal, 408-10 Gypsy-— g Nasiruddin, Sultan a Lakhnauti, Nemachitus vittatus, 5. 1dgwig at Neo-Li eory of kidney secretio 3l. Nepal, Berigatt Gans from, 2538. , 291. Newtonian Motion Nizamu’d-Din rib Jamani, 401. North- Boca bes midis, history and ogy 0 ‘ Nilsen tebe Rupee of Aurangzeb,” by Prayag Dayal, N. 35-36. O Odynerus Prete ay te gat gh 239. | iffine teas 8, Saus bs ——= panel ; 9 “Old Od die dean Jargon,” by nis 83. Olixon solic ‘Oral a een a ‘the ae of egalop. pare oul- enger, oP ‘th Sunder Lal Hore, 9-15. Orbione — 70. — L253; Oyster, see < + Peavt formation.’ Index. it Pachylabra eas (Gray), 5 er —— Com a (Reeve). 590. — var. protien (Nevill, 590. —— ape (Reeve), 5 —~- —— var. We eee (Dohrn), globosa 1 (Swainson), 586. — = target ee var.. 586. —. ee hee ee —— es ), 590. == pataliaosdee (Phill ippi), 587. — deste hens? 589. a rck), 589 s (L . i Padmasaunbhava, 204, 205, 206, 207 Paraicaria pier Grib., Parthian rule over ee oe Patike, Taxila copperplate of, 64. patria postestas, primeval custom SOF Ask, 423, ‘*Pearl formation in the Indian Oyster,” by James , 213-219. ity semisuleata 70. Persia, gypsi 379. Boaitra way aloboea. 581, 583. Pleurocypta Hesse, 71. Po listes adustus, ‘Bide » 247. — é, sp ; suleatue Smith 247. —— prayer s leepel, var., 247. Poh ybia orientalie Sauss., Pompilidae, Portuguese mes borne by the Cat hola: Christians of E Ben al, 26-40. Portuguese in E. Bengal, 41. Prablakaravarddhan Preadhias : avkee capis aera oF a a 563. ‘ Purandara,’ itle Jaintia kins Pusyamitra Sun Pycnonotus assumed by 76. 262. ea blanfordi, brine brunneus, 567: —— robinsoni, 566 Q baie. eden of Abi’l- Qasim Qu shayri, 3 — din Mubarak I, silver coin Ne 36s no | | R | Ramacaritra of Ganega, 25 03, | Risala-i-Iqbaliy 401. Ropalidia She nbeooiete Fabr., , 244 Ramasimha IT, a king of Dae: ‘Sy lhet Ranajit Malla of Bhatgaon, 253. ‘Rationalisation of. Algebraic Equations.” by N. N. Chat- i, 251-52 ‘* Renal Portal System (Renal ous atta and Kid- ney Excretion in Vertebra- tat,” aN ood- land, 85-193. inoptera javanica, 215 rhe ae osoma abnormis, 21. poe Rhopalosomides, 2 sok yya,. 400- Le Redes: in Bon teice. “200. Ruknuddin eset King of Bengal, 410-1 SS) Sabuktigin, 2 pag (Bika i), the capital of dra, 258, 264, 287. Saka ral in the Sialkot region, 4-65. alum tro onserrate on, a | Salya, a king of Madra cuccaieeniinie Allahabad pillar i iption of, 265. Safichi Stipa Feounuana: dates 225. Saikala, a place mentioned by Sanka an, Satganw | nee Muhammadan uest of, 411 Sanngayani, name of a teacher of Madra, 258. Scapula deltae Blentotd, & 556. Science Congress (Ninth Indian), Proceedings of the—Con- tents, iii-xi; ke 1-176; List bers of, of Mem 1.8.C, 177-184; Index, L.8.C. 185-1 sa Scoliidar, 2 Sekandarnagar, 414 Shaikh Talal a, Sylhet, 413. Shakardarra age ogee 61. Shamsu’d-Din ,4 Shamsuddin Firiz, bar Pak of Bengal, pee Ae vi Shargqi Kings of Jaunpur, coinage | Shihabuddin Baghrah § Shah, 418. Shi’ism, syst Sialkot 288 Sthavahu, king of Lala, 435, «* Source WwW. Sphegidae Stegias pare foe Stegophryxus Thomson, 71. Stenogaster bicarinata, sp. nov., 242. 7s sp. nov., 240. er Bing, 240. a assamensis, ciple nov., 240 Pte : oe Syne IT, 263 8 gigas, Sultan yo att os. Swim- beet ot Hill. oe fishes, ific of, SyIhet ‘inseription Soa the t Muslim conquest, 413. fs Tabagat “ ‘Abdu’! lah gp 389. Tadpoles from Khasi hills, Takai in the Mitepueee, 270- Tanjur and Kanjur, of, 459-62. long ig ove plate of Patika, hae. us untonifactor, 215. Thakkiya family, 268 «Theory of Genera slised Quanta and the aN ig New tonian Motion $. C. Kar 1- Diringorhina striolata guttata, 562. Thynn ee Tibet fae toetiairs of, 445-525. Tibetan book- ere tions, 467. — oak lis 8. — booksellers, 4 469. literature, extra-canonical, —— presses, 472-74, Toramana, founder of the Hina kingdom of Madra, 265. Trachycomus J Traniv 62. Trochalopterum erythrocephalum, 561. Teeh-kia, the Hiina (or Chih-ka) State, 266. 437. | es Saal ee aiabet, Moby | —— 5-40 2. TN | Uttara-M SSeS Index. rates see pirum, 213. ee: Annandale and Pra- iad, 591. a (Ree ve), 591. Turdoides polioplocamus polioploca- mus, 56% striatus, "562. U Udd “era ovigiee — ** Ujhan x min — son Wriznt, N. 2 ag V. irajya, pret of, 257. —— germanica var. Havi-ceps ith, 249 soaiee etal 249. Vespidae Vaiolape 2 ee am 253. . Vijaya, 4 bibliography | conqueror of Ceylon, 35-36. WwW Wardak vase inscription, 6 sa Sa dian, 17; igus We betas ‘Ossicles, homology of, Wilford, Capt. F., 371 Wima Kadphises, a Kusan king, Wise, Fast es, his account of t Portuguese in E. Bengal, a. x Xanthixus flavescens pallens, subsp. nov., X-Rays, 221. ee Yafi'i, works of, 400. YaSodharman, 266. yona, ‘a Greek,’ 269. Z Zafar Khan, Zethus do. is Bice. 236. Zia-ud-din Barni, 418. Page 27. ies YE ‘tee ye oe oe yp i 40 5 ‘oe a oe a ee 33 59 OO e's Jl. Asiat. Soc. CORRECTION SLIP. Line 8, for in, read into. 2nd line of foot-note, for Pewsha, read Peshwa. Line 8, for 41, read 56. Poe. reese aE read oe o. Oe i, p48 3, p.é Bottom, atts te & sifs fira a oe faa & aif faa. Line 18 of foot-note, for 14, read 25. Insert al bottom ‘‘ Plate I (1) shows the appear- ance of the Hashnabad Church at the present dav.”’ Line 20 of foot-note-for 1841, read 1641. Lines 13, 15, & 28 of foot-note, for (Katrabo), Manaswar & ‘ 4, p.-35’ poapese yey, read (Katrabo ?), Maneswar & ‘ 2, p.5 in * ' Historical Précia *-* * A Bengal ”’ nder ‘ Appendix III’ omit the quotation marks. Line 1, put‘ chiefly ’ between ‘ years’ & ‘ collect- ed.’ Line 4 of last para., for 38, read 54. Lines 8, 13, 14 & 15, for government, govern- ment, christians, ‘and government respec- tively, read Government, Government, Chris- tians & Government. Below “by 5:8 %.” insert ‘‘Recd. May 1921” (with proper date of month). Bengal (n.s.) Vol. XVIII, 1922, No. 1. JOURNAL ASIATJTIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. New Series. Vol. XVIII. —1922. sissies: 1. The Homology of the Weberian Ossicles. By Sunprer Lat Hora, M.Sc., Assistant Superintendent, Zoological Survey of India. (Communicated with the permission of the Director, Zoological Survey of India.) The work, of which a summary is published here, was under taken at Lahore in 1918-19 under the guidance of my profes- sor, Lt.-Col. J. Stephenson, to whom my best thanks are due. At that time-I was engaged in the detailed morphological study of the Weberian apparatus in Cyprinoid fishes such as Labeo rohita, but my attention was diverted to the study of their homology by finding considerable variation in the struc- ture of the tripus. Since I have joined the Zoological Survey of India, pressure of other work has not left me much time to study this problem further. This short note is published Bridge and Haddon! have critically examined the views held by previous writers regarding the homology of these ossicles and after an exhaustive study of the anatomy of the Siluroid fishes have summarised their own views on the subject. For all previous references, therefore, one has to consalt their valuable paper. In the writing up of my descriptions I have ‘adopted their nomenclature. : | Bridge and Haddon, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, CLXXIY, pt. 1. B., pp. 260-261 (1893). 4 2 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, In Labeo rohita the sides of the neural arches of the first vertebra are incomplete. There is a wide gulf between the paratus—the claustrum and the scaphium—bridge over this gulf and in a dried skeleton almost complete the neural arch of the first vertebra. The scaphium has always been homo- logized with the neural arch of the first vertebra, but the claust rum has been regarded either as a neural spine of the first verte- bra or asa part of the skull. In Labeorohita and also in several other Cyprinoid fishes that I have examined, the first vertebra possesses a distinct neural spine and so the claustrum evident- ly cannot represent that structure. As regards the second view, I have not been able to find any evidence from an exa- ; -FIG. 1--Front view of first vertebra in Labeo rohita showing relative positions of claustrum and scaphium. n.s.! = neural spine of first vertebra; n.a.| = neural arch of first vertebra; ¢.p.1 = transverse process of first vertebra; t.p.2 = transverse process of second vertebra: el. = Claustrum ; sc. = seaphium. mination of the occipital region of the skull that the claustrum once formed a part of it. Iam of opinion that the claustrum is another piece of the neural arch of the first vertebra. Its very position strengthens my conclusions. The intercalarium has usually been regarded as a modi- fied neural arch of the second vertebra, but Sagemehl! was of opinion that it represented the rib of the second vertebra. intercalarium is Serta a part or whole of the neural arch of the second vertebra 1 Sagemehl, Morphol Jahrb. X, p: FT (1885.) ee te et Bee eee ae lr . . sseminamed -_ — OL ee ee eee 1922.]} Homology of W eberian Ossicles. 3 The tripus is by far the largest ossicle. It has been homo- logised with either the transverse process of the third vertebra or its rib.' But I have found it to be a compound bone formed by the coalescence of three distinct elements. The drawings given ae from actual specimens illustrate this clearly. In fig. there is a distinct bony element (t.p.®) which runs from the dorsal aspect of the anterior process of CES. p. art. p. b re TEXT-FIG. pg el a compound bone. Same as seen from above. = me as seen from below rie Bags are not drawn from the same specim ; Ant.p. = Anterior process of tripus; t.p.3 = Per st process o of third macohen ari.p. = articular process of tripus; 7.4 = rib of fourth vertebra; cres p. = crescentic process of tripus; r.3 = rib of thi vertebra the tripus (ant.p.) to its articular process (art.p). Below the articular process it is separated from the main body of the ossicle by two cavities, which when followed in a large series of preparations, become gradually reduced and ultimately vanish altogether. Thus the two distinct elements at the anterior end become fused and indistinguishable. I am of 1 Regan, Ann. Mag. Nat Hist. (8) VIII, p. 14 (1911) 4 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] opinion that this piece of bone represents the transverse pro- f the third vertebra, which has become directed forwards and in its origin corresponds to the other transverse processes. When the transverse process of the third vertebra became directed forwards, its rib was inflected backwards and for some distance lay close to the transverse process. The portion of the ossicle marked r* represents this rib. The crescentic portion bs the oe (cres.p.) is formed by another element as is shown n fig. runs as far forwards as the articular process. This new element in the posterior region of the tripus is the rib of the fourth vertebra, whose transverse processes have been modified to form a platform against which the bladder rests anteriorly. y views regarding the Bite ee of the Weberian ossicles may now be summed up as Claustrum = @& suet ss neural arch of first vertebra. Scaphium = apart of neural arch of sa Intercalarium = _ neural arch of says vertebra Tripus = transverse proc and rib of third vertebra + rib at fourth ae ra. Thus it will be seen that the missing ribs and transverse - processes of the third and fourth vertebrae are accounted for. The first two vertebrae possess well- ‘developed transverse pro- cesses, but apparently their ribs are missing. I suppose that either the ribs of these vertebrae have fused with their respec- tive transverse a en or that they have been lost altogether for want of room, since the processes are greatly enlarged and are directed outw ss aia slightly backwards. mS Se ee SS a a a ee re ‘ eer Decal a Mate Can ee ea Male ho et Lat BMS ae Cement ee ee ee ee 2. The Modification of the Swim-bladder in Hill-stream By SunpEer Lat Hora, M.S8c., Assistant Superintendent, Zoological Survey of India. (Read at the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Indian Science Congress and communicated with the permission of the Director, Zoological Sur- vey of India.) In the taxonomy of fishes great importance is attached to the presence, form and position of the swim-bladder. It is supposed to be a hydrostatic organ and its size and extent, so far as I know in Cyprinoidea, is directly correlated with the performance of this function. In a typical Cyprinoid fish, such as Labeo rohita, the bladder is large and lies free in the abdominal cavity. It is constricted in the middle to form an anterior and a posterior chamber and is joined to the oesophagus through a pneumatic duct which opens in its con- stricted region. In those Cyprinoid genera that live in rapid- running waters and consequently lead a ground-habit of life, the bladder undergoes considerable degeneration ; this consists firstly in the gradual reduction of the two chambers and the ultimate disappearance of the posterior, and secondly in the thickening of the walls. In extreme cases such as some processes of the adjacent vertebrae. In the genus Psilorhynchus, the members of which in- habit the torrents of north-east Bengal and Assam, the pos- terior chamber is greatly reduced and the anterior is covered by a thick fibrous coat. In Nemachilus vittatus, known from the lakes and streams in the Kashmir Valley, the anterior chamber is laterally flattened and covered by a bony capsule, while the posterior chamber is smal] and thick-walled. The pneumatic duct is still present. In Adiposia rhadinaea, the are connected by a canal, while the posterior chamber is minute and bulb-like; the whole of the bladder is enclosed in bone and the pneumatic duct has disappeared. In several specics of the genus Nemachilus the structure is very similar to that described in Adiposia rhadinaea with this differ- ence, that the posterior chamber vanishes altogether. In extreme cases such as Balitora brucei, the two lateral portions of the anterior chamber are much reduced and are somewhat separated from each other. 6 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, The various phases described above represent a conti- nuous series in which the posterior chamber is being gradually eliminated and the anterior greatly reduced and enclosed in a bony capsule. The members of the genus Diplophysa are very peculiar. They inhabit the deep waters of Central Asia and in that situation require a hydrostatic organ. They posses a fairly well-developed bladder free in the abdominal cavity and have in addition a typical bladder of the Nema- chilus type anteriorly. The free bladder has a pneumatic abdominal cavity. To derive a bladder of the Diplophysa type from that of one described for Botia hymenophysa is very chilus there is none. Assuming the close relationship between advanced members of Nemachilus, in which the anterior cham- ber has become divided up into two lateral chambers, and those of the genus Diplophysa, it appears to me quite probable that the anterior bladder of Diplophysa corresponds to that found in Nemachilus, while the posterior bladder is a totally new structure evolved for life in deep waters secondarily. Which of the two propositions is correct, is very difficult to judge Having described some of the types of bladders met with in hill-stream fishes, it remains to account for the modifica- tions enumerated above. The reduction of the bladder seems Ha 1922.] Swim-bladder in Hill-stream fishes. a reduced as the bladder. _ It is possible, gence that a bony capsule is developed round the bladder © provide it with a protection so that it may be able to carry on the function, which it performs in correlation with the ear. Or p erhaps according to the neo-lamarckian school, the reduced binddes caused some irritation on the adjacent bones and er gad a capsule of bone was developed. At present, however, no- thing can definitely be said on this point. The reason for the reduction of the bladder is quite apparent, for in fishes that live in rapid pepe a balloon-like structure is of great disadvantage. hat animals living in mountain torrents require is solidity aa not bouyancy. Si ge Os ln Beas A an ae de ey a A ae 3. Some observations on the Oral Apparatus of the tadpoles of Megalophrys parva Boulenger. By SunpEeR Lat Hora, M.Sc. Assistant Superintendent, Zoological Survey of India. (Read at the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Indian Science Congress and municated with the permission of the Director, Zoological Survey of nal ) During a recent visit to the Khasi Hills I Stolen a large number of specimens of the tadpoles of the genus Me galo- phrys in a small stream at Dumpep. They were F foand in -clear and fairly rapid-flowing water among weeds. The tad- poles were brought alive to the bungalow and were kept under observation for four to five hours. During the short time at my disposal, I could not make extensive observations on the probable function of the float and, moreover, I was then quite ignorant of the literature on the subject. On coming ack to Caleutta and going through the literature, I found that my observations differed to a certain extent from those previously recorded and, I therefore, take this opportunity to place them on recor I am indebted to Dr. N. Annendale for the identification of my specimens and for the great help and valuable sugges- tions that he gave to me in the preparation of this note. It was observed that the funnel only expanded when the tadpole came to the surface. In_ this sia the surface to float even with the funnel folded. The tadpoles under water were seen either lying flat at the bottom, neh obliquely in-a vertical position by resting their tail at the bottom or was always slightly curved to secure equilibrium and stability. By blowing over a tadpole floating under water, I was able to carry it round and round the bowl without disturbing it. was also observed that the tadpole could not lie at 1Gadow, Amphibia and Reptiles (Cambridge Nat. Hist.), p. 59 (1901). 10 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, the bottom for an indefinite period but after every ten to fifteen minutes it came to the surface, remained there with its funnel expanded for a short time and then sank under water with the funnel folded. When the funnel was expanded the TEXT-FIG, 1.—Tadpoles of Megalophrys parva Boulenger. (a) Floating parallel to and in touch with surface film. (6) Floating in mid-water (c) Resting on bottom. tadpoles were observed to give out fairly large bubbles of air and sometimes solid particles were also ejected from the mouth cavity. 1922.] Tadpoles of Megalophrys parva. 11 Great controversy centres round the probable function of the lozenge-shaped apparatus surrounding the mouth of tad- poles of several species of the genus Megalophrys. The follow- ing functions have been assigned to it so far :— (i) Prof. Max Weber,! who observed this interesting struc- r first time, assigned to it the function of. flotat (ii) Dr. Gadow* gga that the teeth on the inner side of the structure-were used for scraping the leaves of water-plants, while Dr. Van Kampen * ae to the teeth the function of rasping the algal slim (iii) Besides the tied functions given above, Dr. Annan- ale* in his latest paper on the subject added two ~ more, firstly, respiration and secondly crawling. (iv) Dr. Malcolm Smit has quite recently advanced the view that the chief function of the funnel is to assist the animal in feeding and has doubted the possibility of its acting as a float during floods. I take up the various functions attributed to this struc- ture one by one and discuss them separately in the light of my observations and also in the light of the evidence afforde by the morphological and histological study of the structure of the float, which is given towards the end of this short note. My observations have convinced me that the oral appa- ratus is capable of acting as an efficient organ of flotation. The very fact that I was able to carry a floating tadpole round and round the bowl by gently blowing over it, is very significant in this connection. Dr. Annandale’s® suggestion that the very action of the folding of the funnel causes the animal to sink is not borne out by my observations. The animal is capable of floating irrespective of the fact that the funnel is sere gee or folded. ugh I have not made any observations on the feeding on algal slime for their existence, the jaws are oe strong and are provided with big sane to work them ! Max Weber, Ann. Jardin Bot. Buitenzorg, Supp. II, p. 5 (1898). 2 Gadow, Amphib bia and Sygate (Cambridge Nat. Hon) p. 59 (1901). 3 Kampen, Weber’s Zoolog. Ergebn. IV, p. “109 (1907). + Annandale, Rec. Ind. Mus. VIII, p. 30 (1912). 5 Malcolm Smith, Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam 11, p. 271 (1917). 5 Annandale, Fascic. Malay., Zool., p. 280 (1903). { 12 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Dr. Annandale’s! suggestion that the funnel is used for crawling over vertical rocks is quite feasable. The muscular energy for this action, as he points out, is provided by the powerful tail, while the role of the oral apparatus is quite passive in the performance of this function. But the study of the funnel shows that that cannot be its primary function. Dr. Annandale informs me that the observations. he made on the habits of these tadpoles in 1906, have recently been confirmed by him by keeping the tadpoles in an aqua- rium. As regards the function of respiration. | am not able to express a definite opinion. The fact that the animal rises to the surface and expands its funnel for a short time when in contact with air, favours the view that the funnel is pos- sibly used as a secondary respiratory organ. Tadpoles of expands when they come to the surface, when, according to him, the purpose of the oral apparatus “ is to act as a funnel, and to furnish as large an area as possible for catching any minute particles floating upon the water, and which are drawn towards it by the strong sucking action of the creature.” The same explanation is offered by Dr. Malcolm Smith for the tadpoles of Megalophrys montana 1 have not made any observations on similar lines and am, therefore, unable to discuss this view. Tagree with Dr. Annandale?’ that the histological struc- ture of the funnel does not reveal any vascular tis:ue of blood vessels and in the absence of such a tissue it seems wrong to assign to it the function of an accessory respiratory organ. It may, however, be pointed out that fishes which live in moun- tain torrents have their gill-openings greatly reduced and have in all probability their paired fins modified for the func- tion of respiration. ! Annandale, Journ. As. Soc. Ben 3 2J as, ; gal (N.S.) IT, p. 292 (1906). 2 Malcolm Smith, J. : AVS At (1916), ourn. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam II, p- 36, pl. 1, figs $ Annandale, Fascic. Malay., Zool. II, p. 275 (1903). 1922.] Tadpoles of Megalophrys parva. 13 formed between them on each side of the funnel, leading from the lateral angle down to the mouth and .both Pr. Annandale and Dr. Gravely have observed a current of water containing minute particles flowing along this groove in the living animal, in which they teli me that the groove is much more conspicuous than in preserved material. If one were to agree with Dr. Malcolm Smith’s view regarding the feeding habits of these tadpoles, the function he assigns to the teeth is quite probable, but for the reasons given above I do not pro- pose to enter into anv discussion at present on this subject. Dr. Annandale, moreover, suggests that the ridges on the float Text-FiG. 2.—Dissection of oral apparatus from ventral surface to show its muscular arrangement (diagrammatic). 14 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVITI, consists of a loose connective tissue, whose main function appears to support the funnel. oe The musculature of the oral apparatus is quite interest- ing. I agree with Dr. Annandale as regards the arrange- ment of the muscle bundles in the funnel itself. My dis- sections show that the muscles are only present in the semicircle appears to be indefinite but the whole system is distributed in a fan-shaped manner. The shorter bundles apparatus. One of these bundles was examined microscop- cially and was found to consist of striped muscles. By pull- LITERATURE. Annandale, N.—The Structure and Mechanism of the Funnel surrounding the Mouth in the Tadpole of .Megalophrys montana. Fascic. Malay. Zool., pt. 11, pp. 272-280, fig. 1 (1903). Annandale, N.—Notes on the Fresh water Fauna of India. o. VIII —Some Himalayan Tadpoles. Journ. As. Soc. Bengal (n.s.) 11, pp. 289-292 (1906 Annandale. N.— Zoological Results of the Abor Expedition 1911-12. Batrachia. Rec. Ind. Mus. VIII, pp. 29-32, fig. 1 (1912). Annandale, N.—Zoological Results of a Tour in the Far East. Batrachia. Mem. As. Soc. Bengal. VI, p. 155 (1917). Boulenger, G. A.—Report on the Batrachians and Reptiles. Fascic. Malay., Zool. pt I, p. 132 (1903). Gadow, H.—T’he Cambridge Natural History VIII. Amphibia and Reptiles, p. 60, fig. 11 (1901). — Van Kampen, P. N.—Amphibien des Indischen Archipels. Weber’s Zoolog. Ergebn. Reise Niederl. Ost.-I nd. IV, p. 409 07 1907). Van Kampen, P. N.—Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Amphibien- larven des Indischen Archipels. Natuur. Tijdsch. Ned. Ind. LXIX, p. 27 (1909). Smith, M. A.—Description of Five Tadpoles from Siam. Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam. 31. pp, 37238; pl. 1, figs. Al, A2, A4 (1916). Smith, M. A.—On Tadpoles from Siam. Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam II, pp 269-270 (1917). 1922.] Tadpoles of Megalophrys parva. 15 Weber, M. Place auffallende Ecaudaten-Larven von 5 aoe va). n. Jardin Bot. Butte itenzorg, Supp. II, pp. 5-10, figs. 1-6 (1898), 4 Es 4. Resumé of Recent Progress in our Knowledge of the Indian Wasps and Bees.! By Cepric Dover, F.E.S. (Read at the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Indian Science Congress.) When Lt.-Col. C. T. Bingham’s volume on the wasps and bees in the “‘ Fauna of British India” series appeared in 1897 about a thousand species were described ; but the stimulus the work gave to the study of the group has caused the number of species now known from the Indian region to be almost doubled (as the writer of the review of the book in Nature predicted), and numerous other additions to our knowledge of 1897 have also been made. Of recent years the fact that this mass of information is scattered through a number of journals no doubt accounts for the general falling-oft of interest in the subject by entomologists in this country, and now the only really serious workers on the group are a few European specialists. It is hoped that this brief review will draw the attention of the Editors of the ‘“‘ Fauna ”’ series to the urgent need of a new edition of Bingham’s volume with all up-to-date informa- tion: This | am afraid would be too laborious a task for one man, so that it would perhaps be best to issue the work in three volumes: Introduction and Diploptera, Fossores, and Anthophila ; each written by a specialist or some one willing and in a position to undertake the work. Of recent Indian entomologists who have done work on the Hymenoptera I may meation Mr. T. V. Ramakrishna Aiyar of the Agricultural College in Coimbatore, who has the wasps and bees by compiling a catalogue of the new species,' which with a few additions could easily be brought up- to-date. Mr. G. R. Dutt of Pusa appears to have confined himself mainly to the biological aspect of the subject, but has also published a few purely systematic papers on the Fossores.’ His paper in the Entomological series of Memoirs of the Depart- ment of Agriculture for 1912 is one of the most thorough investigations into the life-history and habits of the group that has yet been published in the East. Notes on the habits | Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. XXIV-XXV, 1916-17. ; See Rec. Ind Mus. XVI, p. 259, 1919; also Mem, Dept. Agrie. Ind. Entom. Series, VII, p. 29, 1921. 18 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIII, of Aculeates will also be found in Lefroy’s ‘“ Indian Insect Life” and Dr. Gravely has listed a large proportion of the literature in his paper on the habits of Indian Insects, etc., in Rec. Ind. Mus. XI, p. 492, 1915. A number of notes have appeared in the Bombay Journal and the Pusa publica- ticns. The late Mr. C. A. Paiva of the Indian Museum was much Mag. Nat. Hist. and Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. from about 1900-1910. Col. Bingham himself also published ? till 1908, and Mr Peter Cameron’s prolific but none too steady work on Hymenoptera in general is too well known to need mention here. I must not forget to mention Mr. O. 8. Wickwar’s paper on Ceylonese Aculeates in Spolia Zeylanica, II, 1908. e »ecognised specialists of to-day are all resident out- side India. Mr. Rowland E. Turner is the living authority on the Fossores. He has probably done most work on Austra- lian forms, but has also published many papers on Oriental Species in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. and derable work on the bees. Most of his papers on Indian forms = > . . . ” 18 now the chief living expert on the Apidae. The major Forvon of his work on Indian forms is contained in his series : seers entitled “ Descriptions and Records of Bees” in inn. } him relative to Indian Species will also be found in a number 1 Rec. Ind. Musa. VII, p. 75 and p- 443, 1912-14. ? Mainly in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hi . one in Rec. Ind. Mus. 9. Nat. fust., Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., and 1922.) Our Knowledge of the Indian Wasps and Bees. 19 of other journals: Quite recently he wrote me that he is contemplating a classification and check-list of the bees of the world showing in what museums various species may found This would certainly be a very valuable contribution to Apidology and one to which every entomologist will look forward, We cannot overlook the work of Mr. Ashmead on the classification of the Hymenoptera, but unfortunately the material at his disposal was not extensive and as a conse- quence his work is open to much criticism. His papers appeared in the Canadian Entomologist from 1899-1903 and Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 1903. The Rev. F. D. Morice and Mr. J. H. Durrant a few years ago reproduced a long-lost paper by Panzer in T'rans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1914 and treated it as if it were valid. The ‘ Erlangen list’ as it is called has, I think, only added con- fusion to an already somewhat confused subject, for opinion is divided as to its validity. Mr. Morice is a well known autho- rity on Hymenoptera. own studies have so far been only of a preliminary on synonymy, ete , culled from the literature. An annotated list of the Hymenoptera of Barkuda, an island in the Chilka been published in Rec. Ind. Mus. XX1V, 1922. With regard to the genus Xylocopa, | would draw the attention of Indian Hymenopterists to a paper by Dr. H. Brauns which gives some interesting notes on the wintering habits of South African species. Similar work could perhaps be done here by’ patient investigators.' At Professor Cockerell’s suggestion Mr. 8. H. Ribeiro of the Zoological Survey and I are at present drawing up an annotated and synonymic catalogue of the bees of India, Burma and Ceylon, and he has promised to edit itand to incorporate a number of MS. notes that he on a recent visit to Europe. It is probable that we will also catalogue the Diploptera and the Fossores. At the risk of being guilty of a slight digression I would ! I believe this paper will be published before long in the Journal of the Biological Society of Willowmore, Cape Colony. I hope shortly also to publish a note on the life-history and synonymy of Xylocopa aestuans. 20 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, like to inake a few remarks on that most interesting little group of the Parasitica—the Mymarides. It is regarded by some as a distinct family, while others place it in the Procto- trypidae. In Genera Insectorum, 1909, it is classed as a sub- fessor Westwood in 1879 in Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. CED 1. Mymar has been taken by sweeping among low herbage, and Dr. Annandale has described! anew species of Alaptus® which dropped into clove oil while he was doing microscopic work Recently I found Mymar taprobanicus, a Ceylonese species of which many specimens were collected about fifty years ago, in a collection of insects which I received from Mr. C. N. Barker of the Durban Museum. So far as I know the species has not been taken lately in Ceylon and as no species of the genus has ever been taken in any part of Africa, the record is of con- siderable interest. Unfortunately the slide of the insect has been damaged, but Mr. Barker has promised to send me specimens should he ever obtain any. It might now be useful to give a few comparative notes with our knowledge of 1897 under each family. For conve- nience I have adopted the arrangement given by Bingham. Family MutiLuipae. Ent.. Mag. 1889, p. 228. The majority of Cameron’s species have been described in Mem. Manch. Phil. Soc. from 1896- species from Ceylon. Bingham reports on a collection from the Indian Museum in Rec. Ind. Mus. II, 1908. Species of Odon- tomutilla, Rhopalomutilla, Spilomutilla, Promecila, and Da labris have also been described from within our limits.8 a ge ee l Rec. Ind. Mus. III, Pp- 299 (1909). might be of interest to note here that Signoret, Ann. Soc. Ent. 21t France (4), VIII, p. 371 (1868) r Al : enemies of the Abwirodas ) records Alaptus as one of the chief 3 Cf. Ann. Soc. Ent. Pranee. 1903, pp. 426-27; Spol. Zeyl. VIII F 141 and 151, 1911; and Deute. Ent. Zake 1907, pp. 262 and 283, 1922.) Our Knowledge of the Indian Wasps and Bees. 2) Family THYNNIDAE. e genera and species are listed by Turner in Genera Insectorum, 1910. Iswara, a genus closely allied to Myzine of the Scollidae, is now placed in that family. Many new species from the Indian region have not been described. Family ScoLipar. This group has been split up into a number of subfami- lies, many changes have been made in the generic names, an about fifty or more new species have been described since 1897. Turner has some important papers in Ann. Mag. Nat Hist. 1908-09, and in Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1912 he deals with the species of the genus Elis as understood by him. Family PomPiLIDAR. the paper previously mentioned Morice and Durrant showed that the typical genus Pompilus was found a few years earlier to have been called Psammochares and the family should therefore be called Psammocharidae. This is yet another instance of one of those unfortunate changes which are the result of a strict appliance of the rules of priority. The family is now one of the most difficult for the beginner to tackle and a definite concept of each of the numerous genera has not yet been published collectively. Over a hundred new species have been (often vaguely) described. The majority of the descriptions have appeared in Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. and Rec. Ind. Mus. from 1900-08. Family SPHEGIDAE. Modern authorities regard sections of this group as distinct families. = aoe 300 or more new species have been described and so genera. The literature is rather _ seattered. Full sort will be found in Aiyar’s catalogue. Family RHOPALOSOMIDAE. The position of this family has always been a source of contention among fy yubed heer a Morley in desc oe I Tre Ent. Soc., 1910, p. 386. The Indian Museum has the fe- male type cis Calcutta. 22 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, himself thought it an Aculeate closely related to the Scoliidae. In 1917 Turner and Waterson! added the genus Olixon Cameron, which had been placed by its author in the Braco- nidae to the family, and remarked that the genitalia showed a very close relationship to that of the Eumenidae and was male and female prove), in certain respects related to both the Fossores and the Diploptera. But even if we grant this we can do little more than say with that great hymenopterist, Frederick Smith :—‘“ Place Sibyllina (= Rhopalosoma) in any group of the Hymenoptera and it will as it were stand alone ; it has little affinity that I can discover, certainly it has no I The Rhopalosomidae is widely distributed and consists at present of two genera : Rhopalosoma , of which two species are known, ¢.g., R. poeyi from Cuba and R. abnormis from Calcutta and Ceylon ; and Olizon, the type of which is O. testaceum Cam., from Panama. Judging from the description and Cameron’s figure this species seems to be abundantly different from Rhopalosoma. Family Eumenras. About 80 new species and a new genus have been de- scribed since 1897. Meade-Waldo’s papers on Oriental forms will be found in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1910-14. The other papers are scattered and Mr. Aiyar’s catalogue should be consulted, magnificent monograph of the Kumenidae and by Dr. J. Bequaert in Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. XXXIX, 1918. This paper contains a classification of the diplopterous wasps with notes on specific characters and a list of Ethiopian species. Some notes on Indian species are given, the generic name of his Icaria been changed to Ropalidia, and Rhyn- chium is sunk as a subgenus of Odynerus. Family VEsprpag. More than 30 new species have been added to the Oriental fauna. Du Buysson monographs the family in Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1904. The genera and Species are listed in Genera ' Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. XX, p, 101, 1917. 1922.| Our Knowledge of the Indian Wasps and Bees. ae Insectorum, as are many other groups of the Hymenoptera ; but the articles are mostly written by foreign authors an their ideas on classification are very often not coincident with our own. In Bequaert’s monograph the name of the interest - ing genus Ischnogaster is changed to Stenogaster, but without comment. Mr. Rao and I have been able to prove that this change should be maintained. Families COLLETIDAE and APIDAE. Many Soe or groups of genera, of the bees are now given family rank. Numerous new species have scribed since 1897. and in a new edition of the “ Fauna ”’ the bees alone would probably number a 1,000 or more species, in contrast with the 295 recognised in Bingham’ s volume. It is impossible to mention here the many papers that have been published on the group. Mr. Aiyar has listed the literature fairly completely. The most work has been done by Professor Cockerell, who writes me that the chief difficulty in dealing with the Himalayan forms is their relationship with the species found in Turkestan and adjacent localities, the descriptions of which are published i in foreign languages, and the types them- selves are in most cases pat available, so, as Nurse found, there are uncomfortable possibilities of making synonyms. Important contributions to the subject have also been made by Strand, Friese, Nurse, Bingham, Cameron and Meade- j . Friese has monographed the leaf-cutting bees in Das Tierreich, 1911. In concluding this review I would like to avail myself of the opportunity publicly to express my thanks to our Presi- dent, Dr. N. Annandale, for the repeated favours I have received from him aad for his encouragement and advice in my zoological studies. To Dr. S. W. Kemp I am also indebted for much advice and criticism while the valuable help 1 have received roi my two friends Mr. H. Srinivasa Rao and Mr. Sydney Ribeiro must not pass unmentioned. I must also thank Professor T. D. A. Cockerell, Dr. J. Bequaert, Mr. R. E. eee Dr. H. Brauns, Mr. T. V. Ramakrishna Aiyar, and Mr. G. R. Dutt for the unfailing courtesy I have receiv their han ais in the course of my studies on the Hymenoptera, while for miscellaneous entomological favours I am indebte : particular to Mr. C. N. Barker of the Durban Museum and o Mr. T. Bainbrigge- Fletcher, the Imperial Entomologist. Spee Bes is 5. Contributions to the History and Ethnology of North-Eastern Iridia—III ! By H. E. Srar.eron, 1.8.8., Special Officer, Dacca University. THE ORIGIN OF THE CATHOLIC CHRISTIANS OF EASTERN BENGAL (Together with an Appendix on the History of the aman in Eastern ug by the late Dr. JAMES 3 il Surgeon of Dacca). (Plates 1 and 2). Little hitherto peppeges fp to have been published regarding the origin of the holic Christians in Eastern Bengal who bear Portuguese names, and Dr. Wise’s researches on the sub- ject have, up to now, only bere available in the extremely rare volume entitled ‘‘ Notes on the Races, Castes, and Trades of Eastern Bengal.” of which twelve copies were privately print- ed in London in 1883. Owing to the fact that these Firingis (as they are called by their Hindu and Muhammadan neighbours) bear Portuguese names. it is generally supposed that they are descended from the Portuguese pirates who infested the Delta of the Ganges in the 16th and 17th centuries. The Portuguese annals constantly refer, however. to the baptism of Indians Lats Portuguese names, and it is noteworthy, as I pointed out in 1907 in a Monograph published in the Quinquennial aici on Education for Eastern Bengal and Assam, that their own priests do not regard these Christians as anything else but Indians. They speak usually nothing but Bengali ; they are indistinguishable from Bengalis in dress and means of livelihood ; and until quite recently they made no claim to be of Portuguese descent. The following notes on the names in common use amongst them attempt to deal with the sub- ject from a point of view which, I believe, has not hitherto been discussed. uring a visit in 1913 to a school for these eee? children that is attached to the Portuguese church at abaid (locally pronounced Hashnabad) in the Ravabgant Thana of Dacca District, I was struck, firstly, by the absence second paper in this series is to be found in J.A S.B., Vol. | vi (1910), ries 619-648. th internal evidence will suggest to the reader the materials of the present paper were chiefly collected before the war but the enforced delay i 0 ite publiantion has enabled much further infor- mation to be incorporated, especially in the historical portions of the writer’s own paper and in the notes to Dr. Wise’s account of the Portu- 26 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, of Portuguese names from the register, and, secondly, by the apparent occurrence of strictly Bengali names among the Christ - ian boys. The Pandit, who was himself called Gabriel Gomez, explained that in addition to the Christian surnames, most of the boys have Dak-nams or customary names of address which are often recorded in the register ; and even surnames are gene- rally replaced—Welsh-fashion—by the name of their father’s bart (homestead). Father Menezes, the local Goanese Vicar, who was present during my inspection, further explained that of dak-nams is that, following Muhammadan custom, boys are often called after their grandfather, and as any direct mention of the father-in-law’s name by a daughter-in-law habit of viving their sons nick-names to avoid mention of the their first child is prevalent at Hashnabad, e.g. I noticed in the records of the adjoining church that one woman was calle = = = 8 e ° a. 2 B ° ec ey g TR 9°) @ . 5 ge cot al o Cy a hom ba ~ m ho =) et ie) = ie) wu pat ® Qu = . of Dacea’s Mission at Bandura, a village close to Hashnabad. I have also availed myself freely of criticisms by educated Hindus and Muhammadans who have seen this paper in proof. _ lL. Asin NipHan.—The latter is evidently the Bengali fa, poor. 2. Domingo Latmon.—Lalmohan is a favourite Bengal Sweetmeat: but is also a common name amongst the lower classes in Eastern Bengal. M ely suggested to me that cne possible reason for the suppression of the vs tian surnames among the Dacca Christians may be that they regard em in somewhat the same way as a Hindu does his ras-nam. 1922.) History and Ethnology of N.-E India. - at Dominco Muxta.—The latter is the Bengali 4& ‘ free ’ or it may be the corruption of another word meaning pearl, a (a) ALBERT | AUDARBARI.—Several explanations were b) Axois given for the name of the -boy’s house, none of which can be regarded as altogether satisfactory. The first was that, the name of his great-grandfather was Adu, which was said to bea corruption of Antony. The possessive form of Adu has been corrupted in Audar. “Father Altenhofen later informed me that this explanation was not, in his opinion, correct, and that Adu was a corruption of Adari, ‘a common Mnssalman name.’ Educated Hindus on the other hand pre- fer to look upon Adu as a corruption of Adarini—a female name meaning ‘ beloved,’ which is sometimes given to children whose predecessors have died in infancy, and. ‘who, to avert the evil eye, are deposited for a short time after birth, near a latrine, or chital (rubbish pit ) . An entirely different explanation is that given by Father Menezes, viz. that Audar is short for Havildar after one of the boy’s ancestors who served the mission as tax-collector. A more possible alternative to this latter explanation would seem to be that the name is a corruption of Howladar, the common term for a petty Talukdar in Eastern Bengal. Atots, the name of the second boy, is nother form of the Christian a ‘Aloysius’. ny Pocua.—This latter word is a well-known nick- name in Bastar Bengal both amengst Muhammadans and Hindus. Itissimply the Bengali %5\( ‘sick’ or ‘ rotten ’) and is given to a boy whose elder brothers have died in infancy, toavoid the further influence of evil spirits. The Hashnabad Christians who were present all admitted that the boy’s parents had previ- ously had children who had died in infancy, but denied that thev believed in evil spirits. That they do, however, is beyond question, and those who know them best agree that they often show themselves to be still as superstitious as the most ignorant among their Hindu or Muhammadan neighbours. 6°) ace ag PESHKARBARI.—Father Menezes in- ie ormed me that the first Christian name is a an of Callisthe while Trinatus is the Latin- ised form of T'rindade—the Portuguese for Trinity. As for the house name, the priests in the Christian settlement at Nagori (near Kaliganj on the Lakhya River) still employ a servant called a Peshkar, or Dewan, in Zamindari matters. This man acts as a sort of confidential clerk or secretary.! The name of the boy’s house seems therefore, to show that a similar officer was once used in the Hashnabad Zemindari. Or, ‘* Peshkar: is one who puts up papers — a king or Court. tues has the same meaning ”’ (M.M. H. P. Shastri). 28 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |{N.S., XVII, alternately, he may be descended from some immigrant from Nagori. 7, Pau Gopau.—The latter is a common Hindu name. 8. Martin Gomez.—This is one of the few instances found in the register, of the use of a Portuguese surname. It was found on enquiry that the boy came from Dhana Khalifar-bari, “ the house of the cook ! (called) Dhana.”’ This latter is a favourite name amongst Hindu mothers, being the Bengali **| (rich). JosEpH Narpeari.—An interesting story was told me in connection with this name. The house is called after the boy’s great-grandfather who was the Manager of the Hashn- abad Estate in the middle of the last century. It was decided by the Mission authorities that two priests who had just been appointed to Hashnabad should manage the Mission Estate themselves. The Naib resisted, and a “ Battle” took place in 1274 B.S. (1867 A.D.). Both the Naib and the priests were imprisoned in consequence of a man being killed in the fight. The priests were released after six months by the direct inter- vention of the Viceroy. When the Naib was subsequently let out of prison, he asked pardon from the priests and became their Dewan. € was a very strongly built man, and, as a it in the field under dispute. The next morning, standing on this earth, he swore in the presence of the rival Zemindars that to his knowledge the land on which he stood belonged to the Mission, in consequence of which it was handed over. to the resident priest. 10. (a2) Monts \ Havus-Mustipari.-—Father Menezes said DHANA the first name was a common Portu- guese one. The second, Dhana, has already been referred to under No. &. ‘ Haus’ is the local name for a place where fresh water can be constantly obtained, like a pucca well, or reservoir (Yate) for ablution before namaz. As for ‘ Musti,’ I was informed that it was probably a corruption of Muchi, one of the lowest of the Hindu castes, as the family in question occupies a very low social rank among their fellow Christians (cf. also No. 44 infra); but other explanations were that it is a corruption either 1 The honorific title of Khalifa. which really means ‘‘ Successor”? is also applied to tailors. It was used in the first instance to indicate the successors of Muhammad, and is still found’ among the Faraizis of East- ern Bengal (a Puritanical sect of Muhammadans) as the title of their panchayat. M.M. BR. P. Shastri points out that by similar misuse of honorific titles cooks are called Maharajas in the United Provinces, and 1. 1922.) History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 29 of Musjid (the entire house-name in this case suggesting that the bart was originally built on the disused site of a mosque) : or, less probably, of Mutasaddi, the title of a Treasurer or Cashier in Muslim times. Avucustin Mott —The latter is a common Hindu and Muhammadan nic -name, meaning ‘Pearl.’ It is used by Hindu boys and Musalman girls. It may however also be a corruption of Matthew.! 12. Fraxots SHopan.—The latter is either from the Bengali (14) wine or a corruption of the common name “ Madhu Sudha i ee | para “Mistrrpart.—The latter name does not mean, as might be thought, that one of the boy’s ancestors was a carpenter, but that he is descended from a Mestre—the pee oe for a catechist or sacristan. 14. (a) Batat | Marsar-Barr.—The name Balai may be ) Monan J acontraction of the Hindu name Balaram, while Mohan is a common Hindu name. The name of the homestead shows that the family descended from a former Headman (a{54%) of their village Nayansri—a mile away to the west of Hashnabad. ManueL Raza.—The latter was said to be either a corruption of the Hindu name Rajendra, or more probably a mispronunciation of Raja (King), a name often given to an only son. 16. “Nimts StmarnBaRi.—The former is either a corruption of a Latin name Nimesius or, more probably, of Nehemias. Simar, the local Christians considered to be a corruption of Simon. The Simars belong mostly to the Jola caste (vide No. AUGUSTINE wee. oe second name is said to bea corruption of the name Gas 18. JosmpH Boita SH aiwane BARI.—This boy is said to be descended from a dwarf (21331, baitta) whose dak-nam was shona ww golden 1 (a) AssIs reer ages —Assis may either refer (b) Janu o St. Francis d’ Assisi or is a cor- c) LAURENCE : cata of the Muhammadan name Aziz.” Janu is said to be a Muhammadan nameand not, as might be supposed, a corruption of John. The villagename Imamnagar ! Other corruptions of European names a among a aha are: Giri—Gregory; ‘Cufan ni—Stephen ten -—Benedic ——Er- ate and Ambo—Ambrose. Tufanii ng ain a name co oe ‘toaka mongst Namasudras, and may frags parts rb ‘the fact that the person who hens it was born during a stor 2 Father Hosten prefers ike first explanation of Assis. He writes: “« Assis should be considered as a Portuguese f of ‘ de Assisi.” There =~ a Fathe rd‘ Assis at the Boytakhana eusehe Calcutta, for many 30. — Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVEIT- also seems to point to a Muhammadan origin for this family. Tt is situated on the opposite side of the small river _Ichhamati to Hashnabad. 20. (a) SHUKU |) SxikpaRBari.—Shuku is from the Ben- (6) Nagar \ gali 2%, happiness; Nagar is said to (c) NaLMon be a corruption of Nagen, or it may simply mean ‘ town’ as in Nagarbashi—a fairly common name amongst low caste Hindus;! and Nalmon is a corruption of Lalmohan (vide No. 2). I was told that the homestead name indicates that the boys are descended from the petty village pleader who used to appear in disputes before the priests, and that the family came from Malikanda, near Narisha, before it was cut away by the river. The ancestors of the family held good positions when indigo was still largely grown in Eastern — Bengal. It may, however, be noted here that in Bikrampur , Shikdar is the usual name of the nafrs (or former slaves), who now hold land from Zemindars on condition that they perform certain menial duties when required, e.g. they clean the cook- ing utensils of the household, and at weddings they have to carry the bridegroom and bride in procession.’ 21. Senny Bitu-Sapu-Bart.—This extraodinary name (4{{)--this word in turn is derived from Sadhan (intensive meditation) —or whose father was called Sadu—a corruption of the Muhammadan name Saadat Ali. It was suggested that Bilu is the equivalent of William, but Bilu is a common Hindu and Muhammadan name. It isa corruption of Bilva, the Bel tree, which is regarded as sacred by Hindus. as it is supposed to be the favourite tree of Mahadeva (Siva): no Hindu puja can be performed without its leaves. : In this and other similar cases, the Christians present free- ly admitted that they were descended from Bengalis, and in illustration of how Portuguese names do not imply descent, - that all but those whose Surname was ‘Gomez’ had been ac- ee Sa Sa a ht ag Ses ! If pronounced Nagar, it means ‘Lover *, as in Sri Krishna’s name ‘* Nagar yam Rai.” 2 This 1s another instance of the sarcastic use of high titles that has been previously referred to in the note on No. 8 supra In the time of Muslim rule in Bengal, the officers in charge of Revenue divisions termed anais were given the title of Shiqdar, c}. Blockmann, Geography and History of Bengal, J.A.S8.B.., 1873, pp. 214 & 273 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 31 cepted, the reason being that this name is Scag by the Fiingis as the usual synonym for ‘ native Christia 22. GoLAP SHARPARBARI.—Golap is a Hindu name mean- ing ‘ Rose.’ I was told at the time that Shardarbari meant that the family is descended from a leader of the village Paiks, the militia of the middle ages in Bengal ; but I have subsequently learnt that the title of Shardar was formerly given to the Headman or President of the guild of ‘ Pobres’ (undertakers) or Church servants in Calcutta. This title of honour is still used by descendants of these men in their native villages I may add that the Church at Bandura is sometimes ref- erred to in the Catholic Herald about the middle of the 19th century as the‘ Pobries’ Church, presumably because it was from this neighbourhood that Calcutta then drew ‘‘ its inexhaustible stock of cooks and ‘ pobrys’ ” (idem, Dec. 15, 5). 23. Muxra Katvu Surkarrpart.—The firstname has al- ready been mentioned under No. 3 I was told that the boy’s grandfather, who was called Kalu (‘‘ Blackamoor’’) was a hunter of pigs on the Faridpur chars (sand dunes), Another homestead in the vicinity is also known as Bagh Shikaribari, “The house of the Tiger hunter ‘alu is a name used both by Hindus and Muhammadans, and in the case of Hindus is an abbreviated form of Kali Mohan (‘‘ the charmer of Kali, ”’ i.e. Siva). It was suggested, however, by one of my informants that among the Christians it- might also be a corruption of Carolus. 24. Apu DavrisoLa-Bari.—For Adu cf. No. 4 above. Dauri at first was said to be a Muhammadan name connected, possibly, with ‘‘ Dari,’ beard. It is, however, a common name among the lower Hindu castes, and as the word is used as an peat in the sense of ‘ wet and rainy ’ it may refer to the boy born on a stormy day. Another explanation is that it is derived from the Bengali #i$#1 a man who does not stick to his word,’ ‘an untrustworthy person.’ Jol& means that this fami- ly is descended from Musalman ~oldine (cata). 25. (a) Maneat ) PaRAMANIKBARI.—Mangal is a Bengali ) Janr name ene both by Hindus and Muham- madans, and means ‘fortunate. Jani is a Muhammadan name meaning ‘beloved.’ Paramanik probably shows that the family is descended from a Hindu barber, but like Shiqdar (vide No 20 supra), it is an honorific title now adopted as a family name in several castes, e.g. the eeeninpanike. I add here a note by Father Sinetan on the precise eatin mean- ing of the word ‘ Firingi ’: ‘‘ Mussalmans call any Christian ‘ Firingi’; bes as the native Christians are bla ck compared with Europeans, they ealled sometimes ‘ Kala Firingis.’ In the Muffusil they are simply galled gg agg angen: there are no white Christians there. That Firingi is more the name for ‘ Christian’ than ‘ European ’ is shown by the expression still in in eg Firingt pd ee to ik needle 32 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengai. |[N.S., XVIII, 26. JosepH Arar Kanturart.—Kantu is said to be a Musalman name (? Kandu). Atdai signifies that the boy is des- cended from a man who was an eight months’ child. 27. Pocua Kuatraspart.—For Pocha vide No. 5. Khaita is the Bengali (41261), a dwarf Locally it seems to be used, like Pocha, as a charm against the evil eye. 28. Fetvu Kortasart—Felu isa Musalman name Koila is a nickname meaning ‘ charcoal,’ or ‘a coal-black person’ (ef. No. 23). 29. Martin Saumastisart.—The boy’s homestead is said to be a large one and the name may therefore mean simply ‘big house,’ (Bengali 74%). 30, Joun Turkucr.—Turkuli was alternately said either to be a Musalman name; or ‘a big worm that lives in mud.’ My Musalman servants did not however recognise either, nor had the local Sub-Inspector of Schools ever heard before of such a word as ‘Turkuli. Father Altenhofen subsequently wrote: ‘The question of Turkuli I solved simply by telling the school children to bring me that ‘worm.’ I got a number of a very common insect, which always flies round the lamp in the evening, especially in January and February.” 31. Mott TateasiyaBart.—For Moti vide No. ll. The homestead name signifies that formerly a big palm tree (ofa 18 Tal gach) stood near it. A similar name is seen in the next boy in the register Laurence Tetulgasiya-bari, whose home is near a big tamarind tree (cS¥ai +12). 32. Kana Buocatrpart—Kanai is a typical Hindu name, being one of the names of Krishna. ogai was said to be a corruption of Bhagirath, the name of a Hindu ancestor. 3. Fetv Kuavpartapart.—Felu is a Musalman name vide No. 28. Khalparia bari is so called because the homestead is situated on the bank (par) of a Khal (water channel). 34. Juma DunDaRrBari.—The first name is probably a Mu- salman name, though if it representsa Christian name it stands forJames. The Christians suggested at the time of my inspec- tion of the register that Dunda was from the word meaning the scoop (made from a hollowed-out palm tree) that is employed to lift water from one field to another (<7t¢ donda). I after- wards learnt that dunda is the local name for a quarrelsome woman. As the joint family system is still observed by these Christians, there are often many women in one bari, and if they habitually quarrel, neighbours soon get to call the house Dunda-bari, the bari of the quarrelling women. 35. SnuKu- Narrasart.—For Shuku vide No. 20(a). Nairabari is said to be derived from Nar, a Musalman name. - Francis Dayat Duxnatpart.—The boy’s grand- father who was called Dukhai (from 3:4 sorrow) is said to have become a disciple of a Fakir and when he returned to the Christian fold, the priest is said to have suffixed to his name ae ote we se ane Oe eh ee 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 33 Dayal elie meaning “the too-broad-minded one’’ by way of punishmen 37. Ni IpAN BakTaBari.—For Nidan vide No. 1. Bakta is the Bengali S@, ‘ Religious.’’ Father Menezes was inclined to agree ‘with Dr. Wise’s remark that it was a name originally “ given to the Secretaries who also acted as catechists in the absence of the Pastor.” For further information on Bhaktas vide p. 41 of the reprint of Dr. Wise’s POEs and note (2) on the same page. 38. SHvuKkar DacaitBaRi.—tThe first is a Hindu pet name from the same root as Shuku, vide No. 20(a). As regards the homestead aah the Christians declared that the boy’s ancestor was not a dacoit, but that his ancestor was given the name because he killed ‘several buffaloes who stra ayed on to his land. In Bikrampur generally, Dacait is colloquially used for a. rash or headstron 39. JosEPH KaNsHABARI.—-Kansha was said to be the Bengali ‘‘ 4#1”’ “ Khancha,’ a large wooden plate; but it seemed to me at the time more likely to mean that the ances- tors of this family were braziers (#1, brass). Subsequently I learnt that the true derivation was quite different. An ances- tress of the family had given birth prematurely to a child on the edge of the slope (Kansha, #177) of the earthen mound on which the house was erected. The child was given the name Kansha with reference to this incident, and it has been kept by his ayes ts. Lu Davipari.—Gulu is a Musalman name but the Christians said that it is a corruption of Golap, vide No. 22. The name of the homestead would appear to imply that the boy’s ancestor was a shield-bearer, (5tf4, Dhalt) ; especially as a leather shield and some old Ramdaos (sw ords) still so te in the anteroom of the Priest’s house and are taken o Go ¥riday for use in the procession on that day. The Christians, however, asserted that the name showed that the boy was descended from a Dali (ttf), the local name for a superior kind of sweeper who supplies plantain leaves for a feast, and clears away the refuse afterwards. In poorgreeead yee is identified with Beldar (@e"ta), or Muhammadan 41. Antony AunJu.—Father aiiees informe me that the latter was a corruption of the Portuguese name Dos Anjos. 42. Frextu Karikarpari.—For Felu, hs No. 28. The homestead name shows that the boy is descended from a Jola or Musalman weaver. Karikar is a title used by men of this caste. 43. Moxra Dart SHANERBARI.—For Mukta, see No. 3. Dari Shaner was explained by the Christians as being derived from Darikandi (a village name); but it appears more ee. to be a compound ~~ the word Dauri that occurs in No. and Shona, vide No. 1 34 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 44, Paut Must Marsarspari.—Although the Christians denied the derivation, the name Musimatbar appears to show that the boy is descended from a Headman of the Muchi or cobbler caste. The appellation Musi (Muchi) may, however, be derived from the low-caste nickname given to a child by parents, whose previous children have died, to ward off the effect of the evil eye. The procedure is to sell ‘the child to a very low caste man for an insignificant sam—even a broken cowrie will do--and then to redeem it for a much larger amount, say Rs. 2. Once this is prams and the child given the name of the low caste pur- chaser, the superstitious parents believe that the child will survive the evil spirits not caring to waste their time in harm- ing any one of apparently such a low caste. In this case, therefore, a Muchi may have been the purchaser of the child, while the child’s descendants probably retained the name from similar motives. Uually, however, in Hindu circles, the parents do not go so far as to change the family name, but only prefix a name indicating the price for which the child was sold, e.g. ‘‘ 'Tinkari”’ Banerji. Whatever be the true story, the family to which this boy belongs ranks among the lowest grades recognised by Firingis and. = it difficult to obtain bridegrooms for its girls. ANIK FaktrBari.—This is an altogether Hindu name. Manik means a Jewel (ruby), and the original ancestor of the family appears to have been a converted Fakir. 46. Moti Kata-Bota.—This would also appear to be an entirely Hindu name. Kala-bola is said to be a corruption of Kalu Bholanath ; but may also come from Kala Balaram, the oe a name of Krishna, and the latter that of his elder ro 47 AGAR GAYANBARI.—This ra is altogether a Muhammadan name. The homestead name shows that the family is descended from Musalman singers (are, 8. (a) SHona ) Boparsari.—For the two dak-naims see (6) Janz Nos. 18 and 25 (b) respectively. One of their ancestors was either dumb (Bengali cata), or received the nickname Boba. . S#HopAN OrparBaRt.—For Shodan vide No. 12. Oiba is said to be a corruption of ener and indicates descent from a Muhammadan of that nam 50. Simon Dominco.—This shows =e the boy Simon is the grandson of a Christian called Dom Francis DaGaRBari.—His prandtather was called by the Musalman name Dagu which may be derived from t the Bengali #1, to scratch. is concludes the list of names found in the school register; but the following additional names that are in use in the locality may also be briefly referred to. They are chiefly 1922. ] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 35 pent from the Parish Registers which are very excellently pt and deserve more careful study re I was able to give air during my short stay at Hashna 52. AMRABAZIYIA Bart.—This is anid to be derived from Amirabad, a Bikrampur village near Narisha, which has now been cut away by the Padma. When this happened the people migrated to Hashnabad. The name of the village first appears in the Hashnabad Registers in 1780, and in 1844 there were still 25 Christian families there. It is evidently a different place from the ‘ Amidabad’ mentioned by Rennell in his Journal Rajabari (Memoirs A.S.B., Vol. III, No. 3, 1910, P. 38). In proof of the dialectic change of a terminal ‘d’ to ‘2’ (or ‘j’ in Dacca District, I may mention that when subsequently visiting a girls’ school under P.O. Amirabad, Thana Raipura, IT noticed that the girls wrote the name of. the post office as aifaatare 53, S1taBaRI.—This is a nickname given to a man who was so lazy that he would not plant onions proper!y, one by one, but scattered them over the field and then went hom expecting that they.would grow. It is from the Bengali fe Chhita (pronounced aioe a careless sowe 54. MuLxuar Barr.—This is wine after Muluk Chand. an ancestor of a family sailed Rozario. The homestead is other- wise known as Jaishariyar bari as Muluk Chand’s father came m Jessore. These names at first suggested to me the pos- sibility that this family might be connected with the son of the Zemindar of Busna, one of the Twelve Bhuiyas of Bengal, who was the chief agent in the success of the Augustinian Mission in the 17th century. Under the name of Don Antonio del Rosario he had joint charge in 1679 of the Parish of Noricol. This place was a little to the east of the present Janjira on the southern bank of the Padma. Don Antonio is not, however, recorded as having had any children (though he had a wife) and Hs probably ended his life as a monk at Nagori (vide note ,p. 4, infra). Some waneee seem to have remained behind at Nor dca after the exodus to Nagori in 1695, and it is said that it was their migration to Hashnabad that led to the erec- tion of the church at Hashnabad. Another homestead is ealled Bhuyarbari which also sug- 1 cited notes in his Journal on the 14th February, 1765: «‘ The 14th e which is situated on the south side of the iMultatgen}] Wieck: Lainie. once a remarkable village, lies almost half way betwixt ye Ganges and Megna, is about 28 miles 8.4W. from Dacca and 3 ESE from Rajanagore. Here are ye ruins of a Portuguese Church and of many Brick Houses.’’ (Memoirs A.S.B., 111, p. 39.) It would be The ruined buildings remained visible til! 1880 when the spot was swept away by the river (idem, p. 135). . 36 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, gested, at first sight, some connection with the former Twelve Lords of Bengal. On the other hand a simpler explanation might very well be that the original owner was a taluqdar, as, in Bikrampur, cultivators still address their immediate landlord as Bhuiya. Further enquiries showed as a matter of fact that the original ancestor of the family was a Muhammadan land- owner called Muhammad Ali who lived at Dapari (near Nawab- ganj) and Masurikhola (near the western mouth of the Buri- ganga) about seven generations ago, i.e. c. 1700 A.D. The first Christian of the family settled in Bandura. 55. PAaLTaN SHIKDARBARI.—No. 20 may be seen in connec- tion with the homestead name. The first name indicates that some member of the family was a soldier, employed in guarding the old military road from Calcutta to Dacca. After crossing the Padma near Moinat steamer station, this road reaches the Ichhamati River at Nawabganj. There are still numerous ‘‘ Paltans” in the villages of the Nawabganj Thana. 56. Forrapaziya SHONARBARI.—This is called after a man Shona (vide No. 18) who came from Fathabad, the old name for the present districts of Barisal and Faridpur. The Bengali poet Vijay Gupta mentions ‘‘ Muluk Fateabad”’ in 1494 A.D. (cf. Dinesh Chandra Sen—“ History of Bengali Language and Literature,” page 279; also Dacca Review, Notes and Queries No. III, March, 1913, p. 457). 57. Tarka Bast Bart.—The first dak-nam of the man was Basi (aii), which means “stale.” As however he was in the habit of talking too much at meetings, he was given an additional nickname Tatka (%ise\) which means “fresh.” ! The name is in phonetic accordance with certain Hindu names, e.g. Nadiyarbasi (47131411) inhabitant of Nadia: and Mohan- basi ( 4124141, melodious flute ). 58. (a) Aur Costa.—These two names supply an ex- (d) Mri ample of a Muhammadan name being used in the same family as a Portuguese name, Minga being said to be a corruption of Domingo. Ali may however be short for Ali Chand, the usual Firingi corruption of Alexander. 59. CHANDI AkaLtaBart.—A former owner of the home- stead was originally called Akalia because he was born in famine time. en, afterwards, he went to Calcutta, as many of the Christians do, to serve as a cook, he worked with Maghs, amongst whom he was known as Chandi. The name stuck to him on his return. (a) Rant Baparpari) The first two supply instances (6) JAMAILARBARI of : (c) HIRARBARI ) while Hira isthe Hindu name Hiralal. Rani Badar refers to a man called Badar (after Pir ' This explanation seems rather far-fetched. 1922.] History and Ethnology of N. E India. 37 Badar, one of the Patron saints of boatmen, whose shrine is at Chittagong). The man’s mother was so fair that she was ey called Rani. Jamail is a corruption of the Musal- name Jamal. sgn sixty items appear to show fairly sscaanenrat that in the great majority of instances the Christians of Hashnabad are not descended from Portuguese at all but are merely con- verts from Hinduism and Islam. Additional proof of this is afforded by the fact that all the Christians near Hashnabad belong to one or other of four sub-castes between which little intermarriage has hitherto taken place. These, in approximate order of social standing, are :— (1) CHAsHa ( cultivators ) ; (2) JoLA or JoLAHA ( weavers (3) NrKkA (descendants of a ‘chattel widow ) ; (4) CHardt (Chandals, who now call themselves Namasudras). The first two chiefly claim to he of Mussalman descent though some of the Jola class are known to have been Hindu in origin. Father Altenhofen informed me in 1913 that the proportion of Musalman to Hindu Feringis at Hashnabad and the neighbouring Dacca Mission station of Golla is roughly 3 to 1. Though in no way superior in character to the Christians of Hindu descent, the Musalman Chasha Christians consider them- selves much superior in social status and only for a third or — fourth marriage, if no other woman can be obtained, will one of them condescend to marry a Hindu Chasha Christian. Jolas marry ia more frequently with Charal Feringis ; but absolute- ly arriage is said to occur between the Nikas and other Christian castes. The name Chasha suggests that even this class may have been originally Chasi Kaibartta (the Hindu caste which now prefers to call itself Mahishya ) and that before Hashnabad Kaibarttas became Christian there was an inter- mediate stage of Muhammadanism. The inclusion of persons of both Musalman and Hindu descent among the Christian Jolas also points to the accuracy of Dr. Wise’s remark that even the Muhammadan Jolahas were probably once low caste Hindus, though the classification adopted by the Hashnabad Christians seem to indicate that their original caste must have been of somewhat higher status than Namasudras All this tends to support the evidences of hist ory it affirming that the Portuguese missionaries of the 16th and 17th centuries did not chiefly deal, as Dr. Wise seems to have con- cluded, with the descendants of Portuguese, but dist their main work was to minister to converts from both the Muhammadan and Hindu fold. Prior to the advent of the British, Musalman converts were compelled to remain ‘ Hidden Christians,’ as open conversion involved the capital penalty both for convert 38 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{N.S., XVIII, With extremely few exceptions, none of the existing Catholics, who reside in Mofussil villages of Eastern Bengal, make any claim to be of European descent : they all freely admit that they are descended from either Muhammadans or Hindus. The priests unanimously agree that their flocks still follow the same customs as their Hindu and Muhammadan neighbours, and are only slowly dropping those observances that are not in accordance with Christian teaching ; while the emphasis that is still laid upon caste bears a Strong resemblance to the Indian converts of Antonio del Rozario. We thus arrive at the conclusion that the Catholics of Dacca District who have formed ctices were retained by Don Antonio’s converts from Hinduism at an earlier date, cf. Father M. A. Santucci’s letter to the Rt. Rev. Father roz, Patriarch of Ethiopia, dated January 1683—the portions he Is of relief and incidentally made m nverts. They followed up the work of conversion by making provision for the English education of the converts’ children; and ultimately a Brahmin’s son passed the B.A a as served. Hearing this his father became very angry. He said: ** There was famine and food was not available ; the Padri Saheb gave us food and made us Christians. What if we were made Christians! Did we give up our caste? Are we like Bengali Christians, eating chicken and beef and giving up our caste ?” I quote the story below in all the vividness of the original Bengali :— sree ALA Givata alsiaq ea) cate NARS ATA M—aewaqcs Ala} AW! f Fast ACASCH ECs cae Btelwa Berg WiPSs Seq 1 Seta ceracaae Ratey Peta Sta sia cat) aah gracta cara fa, a, ATH Sta | CT BRA TH UNS ME cH) cH PLB gata atm aasty za | S88 OR Stara Pel awe OBR ata) ferh aaa“ atata Rea, Wie 7 Nea, ates ANT aifs fea) feaete sfi—fezata aaa S fe gen gfe Sife fr) a fe atch feaeta co gah MFI, TF tS, otis faa” 1922. | History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 39 by the prolonged influence of Portuguese Catholicism on Eastern Bengal—they would probably never dream of alleging that they have any admixture of European blood. T add as an Appendix (I) the introductory note that is found in a register belonging to the Hashnabad Mission, in which some account is given of the origin of the Mission. As it was only written in 1880, it merely embodies current tradition, but Portuguese. No earlier documentary evidence regarding the history of the Mission appears to be available at Hashnabad. I also reprint as a second Appendix (II) Dr. Wise’s histori- cal essay on the Portuguese of Eastern Bengal that was men- tioned at the beginning of this paper and to which reference has been made more than once in subsequent pages. This I do, not only to rescue it from the ill-deserved obscurity in which it has hitherto remained, but also because, in addition to supplying an excellent summary of the early history of the Portuguese in Bengal, the author is inclined to adopt a some- what different view of the origin of the Catholic Christians from the one T have been led to by the facts stated in this paper. It is reprinted from a copy of Dr. Wise’s volume on the Tribes and Castes of Eastern Bengal that was presented to me by the late Mr. Harinath De, I.E S., when I first came to Dacca in paper up to “date, and to correct any inaccuracies that crept r. Wise’s account, and for these I have to st my special indebtedness to the Rev. Father H. Hosten, A third Appendix has been added which summarises the work of the Propaganda Mission in Eastern Bengal. The figures. by comparison with those quoted by Dr. Wise, will furnish some indication of the progress of the Mission during the _ forty-five years. annot bring this paper to a close without a few words of farther acknowledgment of the help that was so freely given me in 1913-15 by the late Father Altenhofen, C.S.C., when the materials on which the paper is based were being gathered and sifted. Just as the present edition of Dr. Wise’s remarkable essay owes any merit it may possess to the generous assistance 1 have received from Father Hosten, similarly 1 would have hesitated to publish my notes on the origin of the oe Christians of Hashnabad, if Father Altenhofen had n available to supply the many additional details of pee that. only one living in the vicinity of Hashnabad could ascertain. Born an Alsatian, with his home close to “ the starting point of the German army marching upon Longwy ”’-(letter of Aug. 10th, 1914) he came out to India in Gotober, 1907, and from 40 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |N.S.., XVIII, 1911 to February 1915, he worked at Bandura and the neighbouring mission at Golla. Had he lived, there is no doubt that Father Altenhofen would ultimately have published much useful work on the origin and customs of the villagers amongst whom he laboured; but this was not to be. For some time after the outbreak of the war, he was preserved from intern- ment by the intervention of friends who stood surety for him. When at last this was no longer permitted, and he was about to be sent to Ahmednagar, he fell seriously ill and after an opera- tion in the Mitford Hospical, Dacca, he died on November 23rd, 1915. He is buried in the Catholic church at Tezgaon. Re- quiescat in pace ! APPENDIX I. “ Agour THE CaTHoLic MISSION AT HASHNABAD. ”’ (A prefatory note in one of the Mission Registers : written about 1880.) It is more than 300 years ago that some natives of different parts of Bengal were converted to the Roman Catholic Religion through the efforts of the Portuguese missionaries. Rev. Fr. Raphael! was the first priest who came to Hashna- bad, and establishing himself in various places, converted a good number of people to his religion at Noricul, now attached Furredpore, and thence he passed to Hashnabad, Gollah, Malikanda, Solepore, Ikrashi and Bandurah of the District of Dacea. Dos Mahomed Osman of Hashnabad, being enraged ! As Father Hosten has pointed out to me, the Rev. Father Raphael here mentioned , is probably the Fray Raphael das Anjos who was Annuario da Archid de Goa, 1897, pp. 193 and 194 (quoted by Father Hosten in his notes to Archdeacon W. K. Firminger’s translation of Pére Barbier’s letter of 1723—Bengal : Past and Present, Oct.—Nov., 1910), the a : 80 Rennell’s statement in 1765 that the church at Noricul was alreadv in ruins (vide supra, p. 14, ote), I am inclined to doubt this local tredition i i i a rom Nori- cul or of Father Raphael’s alleged connection with that place. "he towzi number in the Dacca collectorate office of the estate held by the Portuguese Mission of Hashnabad is No. 1288 Taluk Padrean : but no reference to Dost Muhammad can be found in the cellectorate papers regarding this estate. 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-B. India. 41 at the conversions of his tenants to Christianity, ordered that Fr. Raphael should be arrested and his hands and feet being tied up should be thrown into a ditch or well. “He defied the new ae a saying: ‘‘If your priest is a true minister of Almighty God let us see whether he dies or not.’’ And after a ond time hoping Fr. Raphael was already dead, he ordered the Christians to take out and bury him, but to the great glory of God, to the extreme joy of the Christians, to the immense confusion of [the] heathens, Fr. Raphael was taken out alive and found unhurt. Then Dos Mahamed Osman asked pardon of Fr. Raphael and offered some landed proper- ties for [the] establishing of his mission and his disciples. Hence Fr. Raphael built his church about 300 years ago, converted many more people, and brought for missionary work another priest named Fr. Johu. When the English dominion was established in India, Dos Mahomed sold his Zemindary to Fr. Raphael and went away. The official documents of the Zemindary exist in the name of Dos Mahomed Osman. There is no difference between the Christians with regard to their social intercourse and they constitute and consider themselves as one family and they make a weak distinction in respect to marriages only ; those who descend from Mohamedans, weavers, farmers, etc., want to have marriage with those of the respec- tive origin ; but at present this distinction is getting vanished owing to many mixed marriages. All documents of the former times are destroyed by white ants. APPENDIX II. PORTUGUESE IN EASTERN BENGAL. By the late Dr. James Wise, M.D., of Dacca. [ p. 409] ‘The first Portugall,”’ as far as Antonio Galvam knew,! “ which drunke of the River Ganges was a knight, called J. Coello. ” In 1516, Fernando Perez de Andrada was sent with a letter to him, but the credit of having discovered and ob- served the country is due to Don John de Silveira, who was conimissioned in 1518 to negotiate with the King of Bengal. The by the gov r ‘‘Chatigan,”’ but a quarrel arose, and though speedily quelled, broke out again, and with great difficulty a treaty was conclud- oss a Discoveries of the World.’’ Reprinted by the Hakluyt Socie- t ne * Haccoraing to Pére H. Josson op. cit. August 1913, p. 285) Coello nt by d’Andrade to the Ceart “of Bengal—then under Sultan Husain si aah, e Portuguese Viceroy of India at the time was the famous Alphonso oe (1509-1515 ): and he was succeeded by Lopez Suarez. H.E.S. ] 42 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, ed. "The governor, however, was only dissembling. The Portuguese vessels were attacked by a swarm of war boats, which they repulsed, but were obliged to retire to Ceylon in a very crippled state.! Another account is, that Silveira, being sent to establish a factory in Bengal, met with a most unfriendly reception owing to a rumour that his fleet was a piratical one. The ex- pedition passed the winter amid great hardships, especially from famine, and the crews would have perished miserably but for the opportune arrival of another flotilla under Juan Coello.” It is in connection with this expedition that Dacca is first mentioned in history. Fonseca refers to a governor of the city of ** Daracea,’’ and Castanheda styles him “‘do Sefior da Cidade Darracao. ’”* In 1527 a Portuguese vessel was wrecked on the coast of Chakaria, south of Chatigan. The crew on reaching dry land were ill-treated by the inhabitants and one of them killed.* s early as 1528 the Emperor Baber casually mentions that the Bengalis were famous for their knowledge of artillery, ac- quired, there is reason for believing, from the Portuguese. few years later Mahmdd Shah, king of Bengal, hard pressed by the Afghans under Shir Shah, applied for aid to the Viceroy at Goa [Nunode Cuna}. In 1537 a small force was sent under Martin Alfonso de [p. 410] Melo, but before it could reach Gaur, that city had been taken by the Afghans. The Portuguese soldiers were at first ill-used, but their bravery in holding the pass of Taliagarh gained them better treatment, and permission was granted to build a fort at Chatigan. The Portuguese had no established government, settle- ment, or fortress in Bengal at the end of the sixteenth century. As a writer remarks, having no laws, no police, and no religion they lived like the natives. A lucrative and thriving trade, however, was carried on at Hughli, or, as it was then called, Golin and Porto Pequéno, as well as at Chatigan, or Porto Grande. i urthermore, numerous Portuguese adventurers resided with their families in Bandels 5 trading in salt and cotton goods, which were shipped in “ Foists,” or Jaleas, to Dianga,® and the = ee oe da Fonseca,” p. 412; ‘*Lopez de Castanheda,” Lib. iv, : = aie eee r= i, 220. 8 ** Fonseca,’’ Lib. xi, 413; ‘‘ Castanheda ” I : ten notes that Dr. Wise is at fau mnt se teenies of Dae le reference is to Arakan— Racad in Portuguese. | ( 41. tom Persian ‘‘ Bandar,” an empori : he site of Dianga is still doubtful. ‘‘une ville sise en ce port de Chatigam, mouillent lanchre.” aven van Chatigam Dianga is near the mouth of the Karnafuli River, on the left bank. um, mart. Du Jarric (Liv. vi) says it is : am, ou les nefs qui viennent de I’Inde, oy an der Heiden describes it as ‘‘ eene Stadt in de 1922. ] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 43 Portuguese settlements on the Malabar Coast. Others took: service with native princes and fought bravely against Mughal and Afghan. These mercenaries were regarded as rebels (levan- tados del rey), because they neither assisted their countrymen nor paid tribute to the Goa Government. Their character was infamous. The majority was composed of military deserters, ruined traders, renegade priests, and spendthrifts of all ranks and professions, who, resorting to Bengal, led scandalous lives, without any religion or law. The dishonour brought on the Christian name forced the Church to interfere and at the end ot 1597 [ May, 1598] a deputation, consisting of two Jesuit fathers from Goa and one from Dianga, was sent by the Arch- bishop of Goa to preach the gospel in Bengal and minister to the Portuguese settled there. ! In 1598, the fathers arrived at Hughli, where many Portu- guese and native Christians resided. The number of professing Christians far exceeded what was anticipated, and at © Ciande- can ”’ or Jessore, the mission baptised two hundred free and bond men. The toleration of the native rulers and officials is most surprising. When the fathers left Hughli, after founding a school and an hospital, the first in Bengal, the Mungif did not exact the customary fees. At “‘Ciandecan” they were given a piece of land rent free on which to build a church, and got permission to preach and convert at pleasure. At Sripur the same liberality was shown. Six hundred pieces of gold were Ruins of a church, etc., are said to nh still visible there. Three miles to the north on the ag bank, half way tothe present town of Bi is Angaracole, which had also an Aisestiisians Church when spa sr visit- ed Chittagong in 1630. In 1843, Father Barbe, the Vicar of Chittagong, wrote to the Bengal Catholic pukg: es V, pp. 268-271) that 12 Christian : Deke faciiling still lived at hat h ad been told ‘* by a Mosulman, 1 0 years old, eh e recollected the time when villages close to that place were ot Heung by ist i h a are gone to , some to Neacolly ( Noakhali ) ilies na the remainder are in iaect eae s of the Chittagong District.” (ch. Father Hosten’s notes to Pére Barbier’s letter (loc. cit , pp. 20 and 21) H.E.S. | [There were, however, priests in Bengal proper before 1597, to ae ministrations the oceurrence of the Christians referred to in the par fs, S was ey du from Go ae Pedro Dias) are mentioned in 1576 as having visited Bengal. Soke. priest of Satgaon, called Julian Pereira journeyed to the Court of Ak in 1578; and the impression he made on the Mughal Emperor Seitittedl Montserrate (Josson, op. cit., pp. 289, 290 a he names of the two priests (not three, as Dr, Wise states), sent by Father Nicolas Pimenta, Visitor of the Society of Jesus, gal from 5 were F: s Fernandez and Sosa. ey were joined in the following y v w Bowes and Melchior - Fonseca ; but Father Hosten doubts whether either of the latter ca Dianga. Fernandez died in prison at Chittagong in 1602 from ill sreatiient at the hands of the Arrakanese King. (Josson, op. cit., pp. 290 and 291 ; Beveridge, Bakarganj, pp. 28-34.) H.E.S.] la 44 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIU, assigned as an annual contribution; while at Bakla the salary of two priests was paid by the Raja. [p. 411.] In 1601, the Jesuits had two missions in Kastern Bengal, one at Jessore, the other at Chatigan. Owing, however, to disturbances, the Jesuit fathers were withdrawn, and the Church of Eastern Bengal was transferred to the care of August- inian monks from Goa. At the end of the sixteenth century there were churches at Jessore, Bakla, Dacca, Sripuir, and Noricol,! supported by Portuguese settlers and native converts. * Very little is said of the internal condition of the country. Dakafts infested the tidal branches of the Ganges at that time, as they did two centuries later. The country generally was remarkably fertile, and the abundance of corn and fruit almost incredible. Wherever they went the Hindu and Muhammadan inhabitants treated them with marked respect and kindness. Father Pimenta has left us the following charming description of the scenery of the Delta. ‘‘ The route from Bakla to Jessore [Ciandeca] is so agreeable and picturesque that 1 have not seen its equal. Plains irrigated by numerous rivers whose banks are adorned with the most beautiful trees. On the one side you perceive large herds of deer, on the other flocks of cattle. I forbear mentioning the luxuriant fields of rice, the thickets of sugar-bearing reeds (Arundineta calamis mellifluis redundantia), the hives of bees, the monkeys bounding from tree to tree, and such like objects that afford pleasure to travellers. Tigers and crocodiles that feed through our neglect, or fault, on human beings, are common. In the woods rhinoceroses are seen, but this far I have met with none.” 4 In 1602, the Portuguese of Chittagong, being harassed by attacks of the Arakanese, made Sondip their chief stronghold. This island, situated in the estuary of the Ganges, is probably the oldest and most permanent of the group which the mighty river is for ever building up and destroying. It had belonged to the Rajah of Bakla, but the Muhammadans took possession, and when Le Blane and Caesar Frederick landed, between 1565 and 1586, the Moorish inhabitants were most friendly and courteous. The fertility of the island was unparalleled, the population large and prosperous, and the cheapness of food extraordinary, The manufacture of salt and the trade of ship- building were carried on with great energy and success. | In Rajnagar, on the right bank of the Padma. * For further particulars regarding the Jesuit Mission, see R.P Petri Jarrici, ‘*‘ Thesaurus,” jii, 2,c. xxix; ** De rebus Japonicis, Indicis, oN _A Johanne Hayo, Scoto S.J.P., 809; ‘*Exemplum Epi tolae P. d wae Pimentae.”’ _,Romae, 1602. [Also Josson, passim. ] a *Exemplum,” p. 91. (Father Pimenta is quoting from a letter written in January, 1600, from Ciandeca by Father Melchior Je Fonseca. The original Italian of this passace may b. 39 of Beveridge’s Bakarganj. HES] g y be seen on pp. 31 and 32 « 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 45 The Portuguese, under command of Dominique Carvallho, a vassal of the Bakla Rajah, and Manuel de Mattos, from Cha- [p. 412] tigan, seized the island, but before they could secure a red ‘“‘ Kosahs’” from Sripir, sailed for Sondip. The Poréugiices joined battle and were victorious, capturing over a hundred war boats, so many of their own vessels were but disabled that they hastily evacuated the island and retreated to Bakla, Sripdr, and “Ciandecan.” The King of Arakan having recovered Sondip. invaded Bakla, threatened Jessore, and boasted aia he would conquer the whole of Ben y, 1603, Carvallho was at Sripur, a city belonging to the Bhitya. Kedar Rai, superintending the equipment of thirty “ Jaleas,’’> whena fleet sent by the viceroy, Rajah Man Singh, and consisting of one hundred *“‘ Kosahs ”’ under “‘ Mandarai, ’’ hove in sight. Carvallho, hastily disposing his ships, engaged the enemy, and after a stubborn fight captured several vessels, and put the rest to flight. Mandarai was slain, and Carvallho severely wounded. The Muhammadan historian § givesa very different account of the battle. Kaid RAi Zamindar of Bikram- confederates. were defeated and many boats ‘aban. The narrative, however, ends with the suspicious statement that the ajah was compelled to entrench himself in front of the imperial troops to provide safety against their attacks. Carvallho proceeded to Hughli to have his wounds treated, and on his recovery, being invited by the B tiya of Jessore to join in a war against the Mags, he proceeded, in spite of many warnings, to that court, where he was made prisoner and put to death. Although the Portuguese were turbulent and lawless, pillag- ~ ing Mags, Hindus, and Muhammadans without distinetion, they were sometimes entrusted with high military comman Bengal. For instance, Pyrard de Laval mentions one ‘ ‘Je ean Garie,”’ who had under him ten thousand of the Bengal troops. 1 ** Rex hig Para gee et Bengalae, Pegusii dominus.’’ De Jarric, tom. iii, lib. 3, 2A‘ ‘Kosah” ies aw ar Dont driven by oars, but having one mast. 3 A ** Jalea,”’ from Sanskrit « ‘** Jala,” water, was a name applied to —— genera rally ; : “Vie impiger et tota Bengala ese ernment De J cabins Pi acsatron was ths title given by the Portuguese to any governor, or ¢ the East. Itis derived from “ Mandar, ” tocommand. The English title. Mandarin, for a Chi nese official, is the same w _— t’s ‘* History o: of India,” vi, 109. Vag age de Frangois Pyrard de Laval,” p. 239. [ ** Pyrard de ia left tt for Europe in 1610. He had been several years in the 46 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (N.S., XVIII, In 1607 the Mag Rajah made war, captured Dianga, and [p. 413] drove the survivors to the islands of the Meghna. Sondip, which had fallen into the hands of the Mughals, was held by a force under Fath Khan, who had put to death all the Portuguese and the Christian slaves in the island. A few escaped with Sebastian Gonzales Tibao, and became pirates, plundering villages and conveying the booty to Bakla, where they sold it. Fath Khan having equipped a fleet, set sail to extirpate these pests, but Sebastian Pinto attacked his vessels off Dakhin Shahbazptr, destroyed a great number, and killed Fath Khan. In March 1609, the Portuguese, supported by troops from Bakla, laid siege to the fort of Sondip, held by the Mughals under a brother of Fath Khan, while the Hindu population looked on with characteristic indifference. The fort was stormed and taken after a gallant defence. The garrison and all the Muhammadans in the island, a thousand in number, were in retaliation massacred in cold blood. Gonzales perfidi- ously broke the agreement made with the Baklaé Rajah, and instead of paying him half the revenue obtained from the island, refused to come to any understanding. The adjacent islands of Dakhin Shahbazpir and Patelé-bhanga were annexed an having in this lawless manner acquired possession of a small territory, Gonzales ruled both with wonderful tact and sagacity. Trade flourished, and the Portuguese became the envy a dread of the neighbouring princes. Good fortune also favoured them. A brother of the Mag Rajah, expelled from his country, sought shelter at Sondip. Gonzales married his sister, and after exacting a large sum of money, is suspected to have poisoned his brother-in-law. _ The unsettled state of the eastern frontier, and the devas- tation of the Delta by the Portuguese, forced Jahangir to trans- fer the seat of Government from Raj-Mahal to Dacca, In 1608, settled portion of the Empire, but farther south Mughals, Afghans, and rebellious vassals! contended for power. In 1610, the Mag Rajah made a treaty with Gonzales, in which it was agreed that the latter should command the allied fleets and act In concert with the Arakan army as it marched along the coast, and that all territory conquered should be equally ; ' In a mosque at Farridpur is an inscription of the date A.H. 1013 ( 604), preserving the name of one ‘ Ajab Bahadur Khan Sultdni, but omitting all mention of an Emperor, which could only have been erected 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 47 divided between the two contracting parties. The campaign began, Lakhipar and Bhaluah were overrun, but on meeting the Mughal army the Arakanese, owing to the shameful defection of the Portuguese, were totally defeated. Gonzales, a witness of the disastrous battle, [ p. 414] fled to Sondip, after putting to death all the captains of the Mag fleet. The Mughals re- occupied. Bhaluah without opposition, but did not follow the fugitives to Chétgaén. To consummate his villainy Gonzales waged war against his late allies, plundered and burned their villages, and, sailing up the Arakan river, attempted, but un- successfully, to capture the vessels anchored there. ! p to this time Gonzales had refused to obey, or of Arakan. A fleet was accordingly sent under command of D. Francis de Menezes Roxo. It sailed up the Arakan river on the 3rd October, but the Mags, assisted by some Dutch vessels, offered a stubborn resistance, and obliged the Portuguese to retire. In November, Gonzales arrived with fifty sail, when a combined attack was made, but De Menezes being killed, the assailants fell into disorder and retreated. Gonzales returned to Sondip, but his power and popularity were gone, and his dispirited followers quarrelling among them- selves, allowed the Mags to take the island. After ruling nine years, Gonzales was stripped of his possessions ; ‘‘ his sovereignty passed like a shadow, his pride was humbled, and _ his villainies punished. ”’ * e Portuguese never recovered from this defeat, although their flag waved for many years unchallenged in the Delta, and Allg 1H, Pei, Ch. IX, p. 179 of the Spanish edition. There is an English translation of HH. ria y Sousa Gonzales took refuge at Sriptir, and sent George de Sousa, accompanied bv the Superior of the Sondip Mission to obtain the permission of the Nawab of Dacca, to regarded as the original Catholic missionary in Dacca. Katrabo, on the Lakhya River, is also mentioned about the same time (1616) as a Christ- n the news of the capture of Hughli in 1632 reaching Dacca the local Maulvies beat Father Bernard of Jesus so severely that he died a few days later. Another Bengali Christian of SripGr by name Garcia was taken prisoner to Agra where he died in 1634. (dosson, op .cit., pp. 322, 323, 363 and 364). I aa also informed by the late Father Altenhofen that Zaleski in Les Martyrs del * Inde ( Lille 1900, p. 340) records othe instance of the ; pries ac e was beaten by Maulvies so severely that after two days, he died of his wounds. ‘ P. Manuel das Chagos, August- inian parish priest at Dacca, dies a martyr in this town, when visiting some Christian prisoners of the infidels in order to hinder their apostacy on Dec. 5th 1650.” 8.] : _ 48 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, the imperial Nawarah dared not meet their “ Galliasses ' in fair fight. Bernier,* however, makes mention of another Portu- guese adventurer who acquired temporary power. ‘It was ” he says, ‘“‘who at this time took Sondip, Fra Joan, acted the petty sovereign for several years, having managed, God knows how, to get rid of (se defaire) the command- ant of the place.”’ For the next fifty years the Portuguese lived by piracy, and by making raids upon the peaceful villages of Bengal. Some entered the military employ of the Arakan monarch, mene commanded expeditions sent against Bengal, Pegu, and Siam ; others joined the oe artillery, and Jahangir was wont ae say that one Portuguese soldier would beat tite of his own people. [p. 415] ee — Shah Shuja in his ill-starred rebellion of 1660, and w is cause was lost became Dakaits infesting the Sunderbuns, cad lying i in ambush i in a creek nea Sagar, still known a8 ** Rogues’ River,” waylaid vessels beat- ing up the Hughli. In 1662, the Saree crew of the “ Ter Schelling” ° arrived at Bhaluah, where they found Muhammadans speaking Portuguese, and the Moorish commander protected by a body- guard “consisting wholly of Christians negro-born, and sub- jects of the King of Portugal,’ who were treated with especial honour on account of their valour. Other writers, however, give a different estimate of these ‘“‘ negro-born” Portuguese, and in the te century their usual sobriquet was judgment, and, except under very exceptional circumstances, the Portuguese Eurasian has never proved himself a valiant soldie | Tavernier describes the ‘‘Galeaca”’ as a long swift boat, often with fifty oars a side, and two men to each oar. It was generally gaudily painted and ornamented with blue colours and gold foi 2 ** Historie de la minlp or ‘ -dkomriges des Etats an Grand Mogol.”’ esas 670. The incident is not mentioned by Faria y Sousa, whose his- y ends with 1640; and as ee rnier left Tndia in 1668, it must have meres between these dates. [if it ever rp vate als Bee 3 ** Voyagede Wouter Schouten, ” ii, 168. [Josson records (op. ctt,, PP- O [This pry fort at Saugor was first established ‘after the fall of oa in 1632 (Josson, ae cit., p. 363) A Relatio ling under het | landt ~ par Amsterdam, 1675, 4to. The author is Frans van der Heiden. 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 49 The capture of Hughli in 1632, and the slaughter of its brave defenders, was the death blow to Portuguese prestige in Bengal and in 1666, when Shayista Khan determined on annexing Chatgaon and the islands at the mouth of the Meghna, he threat- ened the Portuguese with the fate of the Hughli garrison if they an. The Imperial army, while a settlement at Farangi Bazar was established for the old and physically unfit. p. upon Chittagong, the island of Sondip was occupied by Dilawar, a Muhammadan, and troops in league with-the Mags. A detach- December [Nov. 1665] a larger force occupied the island, and held it. The main army then advanced along the coast, meet- ing with little opposition. Letters were sent to the Portuguese in the Mag service offering advantageous terms on submission. Several of these letters being intercepted, the Mag Rajah tried to induce the soldiers to remove into the interior of Arakan, but refusing to do so, they finally left in a body for Bengal. On the 18th December, 1665, they arrived at Nawakhali, and ved by the Viceroy. Some were enrolled as volunteers under an Englishman named Captain Moore, and joined in the expedi- tion against Chittagong. |. Nothing further has been learned regarding this soldier, but at the present day a small ‘* Tapp&” or division, in Bikrampar is named after him. [As Father Hosten points out, Dr. Wise has strangely misinterpreted the : n be 0 Shiltabuddin T4lish ’s account of the conquest of Chittagong (J. N. Sarkar, A 4 50 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |N.S., XVIII. On the 26th January, 1666, the garrison of that town capitulated and the Portuguese soldiers who had distinguished themselves in the campaign received grants of land.! With the capture of Chittagong and the pacification of the Eastern frontier the history of the Portuguese, as an inde- pendent and aggressive power, terminates. Throughout the uese Christians are still to be found, but none can oes relationship with the soldiers of the seventeenth century. * ollowing sketch of the Portuguese mission since its foundation in Bengal embraces the origin and history of these settlements. he Portuguese mission in Bengal was founded in 1599, by the Augustine, Archbishop of Goa. On arrival at Hughli ‘the surah and dedicated to “‘ Nuestra Senora del Rosario.” The first ‘‘regent’’ was Fre Bernardo de Jesus, and to this church all the other parochial churches in Bengal were affiliated. Since the beginning of the seventeenth century the Bishop of 8. Thomé, or Mailapair, in Madras, has been the head of the Bengal Chureh. In 16 606, Pope Paulus V made 8. Thomé an episcopal see and by consistorial letters ainaea to it the pro- vinces of Bengal, Pegu, and Orissa. The special mission to [p. 417] Bengal was vested in the Augustinian monks of Goa, upon one of whom the title and prerogatives of Vicar General were conferre A tradition is preserved by the mission, that in 1599, one of their number, Fre Luis des Chagos, was stopped on his way to Silhet by certain Christians who besought him to relieve them from landlord tyranny. On his return he bought the villages and lands of Nagori and Bhagori in Bhowéal, settling in them —— families of Christians, including a converted Brahmin. * A piece of land was also purchased at Narayan- dih, a ch of Dacea, which still 25 aan to the mission. ! [For a fuller account of the conquest of Chittagong ve Shihabuddin Talish’s continuation = the Pathiyyah-i-ibriyyah Seaways y J. N. Sarkar in J.A.S.B., 1906, pp. 257-260, and translation in J.A.S.B -, 1907, referred, to in Ep ione note). H.E. If Dr. Wise had inserted the heat Massie before ‘* Portuguese Cheisteane, © this sentence would hav mn much nearer the truth, But apparently, from what he says later ae possibilty that the possession of a Portuguese name did not necessarily involve the owner’s descen H. [As Father Hosten points out, the date of 1599 is impossible. The real name of Fre Luis das Chagos (of the 5 wounds ) was Luis dos oO 1867, Vol. II, p. 58 ) quoting from a report of the Father Provincial of the Augustines dated 1750. Fre Luis had bought land at Nagori to settle 1922. | History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 51 The church ee Nagori, however, bears the date 1664, and is dedicated to St. Nicola da Tolentino, ' the patron saint of the Augustine order uring the seventeenth century the success of the August- ine monks was most extraordinary. In 1602, three years after its foundation, the Hughli mission. consisted of over 500 persons, among whom were ma ny ‘* grands seigneurs.”’ and by the end of the century the cooannant was administered to 10,000 converts. The parochial church of Dacca, dedicated ‘‘a la Assump- cion de nuestra Senora’’ was at Tezgaon on the north of the city, and its graveyard still contains the oldest tombstones and epitaphs in Eastern Bengal.” The early history of the mission is very interesting. Its success was chiefly owing to the conversion of a member of a distinguished Hindu family. The son of the Zamindar of Bosnah,’ one of the twelve there the remnants of the Christians of Don Antonio de Rozario, the con- verted son of the Raja of Busna ( vide infra ). This settlement, accor- ding to the same Next akaae took place in 1695, sa i the date Maar MY Dr. Wise in his ragraph for the foutidatio of the Nagori Chu viz. 1664, agrees ceri that quoted "hy vit Bosten from the yasricten a Archid. de he for age : pp. 193--194 ): é his notes on Archdeacon Fir- minger’s translati ére B cuted atte of 1723 (Bengal: a and Present, 1910, p: 293). Bho agori’ may be the village of angers r to Nagori; and the eae oe a ae Brahm rae is presumbly a ileress to ee Antonio who d to this Sige E.S. ] cola da To ner died A 1308, and was canonized by e eyelical iste of Pope Eugenius Wei n 1446. [The Nagori Church was appar the ‘ bye oo ae ch’ of the echohcen Migeiey 2 by Bishop Laynez in nthe spring of 1714, on his return towards a from Ranga- i es m) and Husainpur (Mymensiagh) 3 ed oe oe 1914, pp. E. 2 [Accor rdin ng to the marae da Archid. de Goa for 1897) (quoted Father Hosten on p. 23 of his notes on Pére Barbier’s letter mova referred to) the church of ie sa aati from 1714. The earliest monum tal inseription noticed by me in the chur ppg the 3 1913, w: ab cuted 1725. As noted by the late Father Altenhofen, Dr Wise here dcin figs ses two churches. The original parochial church in Dacca was dein ae ii Our Lady’s Ass Shinn than: that at Tezgaon to Our r Lady of the Rosa The present Portuguese chur ‘ch in on a (which was only built in 1815) bears i. E.§.] te Don Antes del Rosario, CB del Rey de Busna, a ele no pace he Brctees ea nostros religiosos sinoque le redimio del pba kara el BF ae Manuel del Rosario, ie 24. ‘* Christiandad del Japan.” Su El P. M. Fr. Joseph Sicardo, En Madrid 1698 fol. [For full ave of this convert of Busna (N.W. Faridpur) c/. Josson, op. cit., pp. 375-381 and Hosten in the Catholic Herald of India—weekly 7. i is Hindu name is 70 he uce time over 30,000 persons to embrace the Christian faith; but the allegi- ance to Christianity of the Kumar’s people at all events seems to have 52 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Bhiyas, moved by the preaching of the monks, was persuaded to become a Christian. Being baptized as Don Antonio del ene he induced his wife and brethren to follow his exam Gees eae a Spanish Augustine monk, describing Dacca in 1641, mentions that families of Christians resided in. the suburbs, at Nardyandih, “ Manaxor,” and “ Pulgari,” sank that a handsome though small, convent, as well as a good church, eating animals slaughtered in an unorthodox way. The Nawab, Noricol.2 In [p. 418] 1679 the converts in Eastern Bengal been largely nominal and Don Antonio had constantly to be rescued ise the debtors’ prison at Dacca where he was consigned for debts, said ave been contracted in path aes 2 his ryots e Christianity. A 168 85 the Provincia al of Goa ‘“‘ ne tarda pas a retirer ses missionaires de ce champ i d,’’ and Seatty in 1695, the sNinty remnants of the 30,000 with some others whom ather himself had converted to the faith i) , ti ceo by Father Luis dos Angos to Nagori which had been bought s Father Asse) his Saat from being molested by non- Christian lasiiet on Antonio is said to have gone there too. and died in the end a goo fyi ti From a list of ear given in Father saa da Magalhais’ letter of paid Big thigh the vey BR! sh: nted by Father Hosten in the Catholic t October 17th, 1917, it appears thay. Don Antonio’s work of ot in h Sagordi, Simulia, see oe and Dugduga). From a mention of Sirot .E.S. Manrique s work in Bengal: Past and Present for 1915-1918.) . __* [In order to amplify Dr. Wise’s excerpt from Manrique’s Chap. v uo passages from Father — Cardon’s translation Bengal: Past and Present, 1916, and afess XIII, pp. 2 and 3). ‘* The Cit “Bengal ck, or Daca, as they say in Portuguese, is the largest of all shiz. cities of Bengala....It is situated in a beautiful and very extensive plain on the bank of the famous and, at this place, fertilising Ganges. It extends for over a ng its t league and a half alo banks as its ornaments oth ds the ous suburbs of Manaxor, on one side, and of Narandin and Pulgari on the burbs are inhabited by Christians, and it is there my holy Order Jspwerr i a pretty, though small, Convent with a g that the inhabitants of this Gangetic emp: and at nadeudad amounted to more t uwo hundred thousand, without co g the strangers. They come hither he tho } ntin bers interests of their trade, to avail themselves of the e great opportunities the city affords them; Psst the sons of Mars, come to enjoy on these. 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 53 were estimated at 30,000, and Don Antonio, attached to the Church of Noricol in Rajnagar, had joint charge with the ‘* rector ”’ of 1,000 Cuitit nai At the end of the seventeenth century the Portuguese churches i in Eastern Bengal and Assam w ere those of ‘‘ Chand- pur” in Tipperah, Banja,' Pippli, Balasor, ‘‘' Tambolin’’-(Tam- luk, Midnapore], Jessore with 300 Christians, Hughli, Tezgaéon, Dacca, and ‘‘ Arrayal de Bencamatis,” or Rangamati in Assam. In 1713 Laynez, Bishop of S. Thomé, visited Bengal. He found Christian congregations at Hughli, Pippli, Chittagong Dacca, Husa —— in Mymensingh, [Nagori? ] and Rangamati, in 8,000, and that in other parts of Bengal there were 25,000. Monsignor Cerri,’ secretary of the congregation De propaganda fide, writing about 1680, estimated the number at 22,000 divid- ed into eleven parishes, each of which had a vicar and a curate. It was, he admits, hard to find any adult converts save Portuguese slaves, who had been bought and made Christians. In 1840, according to Mr. Taylor,‘ the number belonging to the eatables. Anything man’s desire can wish for is to be found there, especially in the numerous Bazars or markets (Placas). I would wonder there at the sight of the quantity and variety of fowls and wild birds, all of them sold alive, and so ap that it was like giving them away forn hing ess t a silver real (four annas), in fact, one could very often get twenty turtle-doves or fifteen big wild ong sb ean all the other things went for the same price, more or less The wealth of this city is greatly due to the fact that it has in “its neig raccenend the fertile and delightful kingdoms of Bacala (North Bakarganj), Soli- esent cca District). !n this city (Katrabo) the first Religious built another Church and Residen nce, and a litt le after two others in the Bandels of Siripur and 1 Both are ancient settlements, post Gupta coins pada. ! been discovered at the former, while at Narayandia there is still a e with inscription dated 861 A.H. (1457 A.D.: vide J.A.S.B "1910, op: i41- 145). eet as Father Niard has already suggested to “Father Hosten, may be Phu baria, a mile to the N.W. of Narayandia, near the present railway station. Some Feringi Christians still reside there. H.E.S. 1 [Dr. Wise adds in the text ‘‘ perhaps Banga in Farridpur”’; but engal : »?P and 20. ) shows that it was dike ‘Pippi ‘en Balasore) not far from Tam- lok-—probably on the Haldi River.] 7. Note 4, p. 3 “An account of the aoe Catholic ee throughout the world ” onyeens by Sir Richard Stee omg 1715 * Topography of Dacca’’, ie 2,020 Sualpur ) a [600? | [4060] The total number of Dacca Farangis may therefore be estimated at 8,500, but nearly 2,000 under the French fathers, being converted natives, have no right to be called Farangis at all. [p. 419] The system by which the Portuguese made converts was not one that could prosper. Children of both sexes, either kidnapped or purchased, were made Christians, while girls after baptism became concubines and their offspring Christians. At one time this trade flourished to such an extent that the slave dealers boasted of having converted more Hindus in a year than all the missionaries of India did in ten. When the Portuguese power in the Delta was overthrown slave-catching ceased, and a final blow was dealt to this novel plan of converting the natives. With the seventeenth century the Portuguese mission ceased to triumph, and during the last century and a half it has not held its own against Muhammadan aggression. Many reasons for this failure are assigned, but Monsignor Cerri refers it to the immorality of the priests and laity, the former leading loose lives, exhibiting great ignorance and extreme avarice, and retaining large staffs of servants given up to all manner of vice and lewdness. The Goa priests, to whose care the Christians of Bengal were confided, have for many generations been half- castes, born and bred at Goa. Each parish church, moreover, is endowed with rent-free land, or with property held and man- aged by the vicar. Communication with S. Thomé being irregular and uncertain, the internal economy and discipline of the pari- shes are not interfered with as long as the annual donation is sent to Goa. An illiterate priesthood, a rich isolated establishment, and a simple credulous laity, was a combination of evils sufficient to ruin any church. No one who has given a thought to the 1922. | History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. 55 Portuguese clergy of Eastern Bengal can wonder that they, inheriting a faulty system from their predecessors, have fai lec to instil new life among their flocks. Occupied as they generally are with the management of valuable church property, an law suits inseparable from the possession of land in Bengal, little time, and less zeal, are expended on the spiritual welfare of their tenantry. A school is always attached to the church, but the instruction ati is of the most negroes reso and no attempts are made to raise the standard of educ Such being the actual state of matters, it is oa ae aint that the congregation De propaganda fide has for long been striving to gain possession of the churches and endowments of the Portuguese mission. Various law suits have been instituted, and in several instances, as at Dacca and Chittagong, the deci- sion of the courts has been in favour of the congregation.'! The French mission, guided by the able and benevolent Monseig- neur Dufal has within the last fifteen years [i.e. prior to 1875! infused new spiritual life among these neglected Christians. The good bishop, assisted by an admirable staff of clergy, devote themselves to improving the people, and their schools are crowd: ed with hundreds of [p. 420 D) boys eager for knowledge. The nuns of the “‘Sacré Coeur” are ‘engaged in an equally bene- ficient task. To them is confided the religious and moral train- ing of the girls, and ei schools conducted by them are models of ee and propriet Two centuries ‘ago the Portuguese Christians were divided into sss classes ‘“‘reynol,”” including those born in Europe, ‘“eastico.”’ those born in India of Portuguese parents, and of their Raroiedsl parentage. Here and there a face charac- -terised by large and rugged features. strikes a stranger accus- tomed to the regular and more delicate lineaments of the st hpi Bengali. but in complexion the Farangis are as swarthy as a Chandal. The distinctive and favourite appellation of tess Christians is Farangi, but the natives nickname them the “‘ Kala Matti,’’ earth coloured Farangis. "The Fara rangi peasant dresses exactly like rage Hindu or Muhammadan ryot, but on gala days, especially among the wealthier classes, the peculiar costume, still worn at C naan 1 [The only case known to me in Eastern Bengal was that regarding the right to appoint to the living of Padri Sibpur, Bakarganj, which e they amb 27 be jurisdiction of the Bishop of Deacon: H.E.S. | 56 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. N.S., XVIII, is put on. It consists of striped drawers, a shirt, or cloth doublet, a skull cap with flaps fastened behind, and slippers. The women on festivals wear a white lace veil, or mantilla, covering the head and shoulders, while the common dress is a ‘many young men go to Calcutta, taking service as cooks, or undertakers (‘ € peasantry are industrious though poor. They culti- tia Hor further particulars regarding the *Feringhees,” see ‘* Cal- cutta Review.” Vol. liii, for 1871. [F i ad Pl. T, (3), and Pl. 11. H.E. 8, [For the clothes worn at weddings vide ee — Barbier, however writing from Chittagong in 1713, says: Les Chrétiens du dedans des terres, nommés Boctos.” se gong, but they have lapsed to a sort of Hinduism. ey claim to be Kshatriyas, but communication with them is regarded as polluting by orthodox Hindus. Most of them serve as musicians and singers at fest- ivals, though of late some have taken to business (Letter from Father Rice en tar quoted by Father Hosten in Bengal: Past and Present, 1910, __ [This paragraph certainly gives a wrong impression—at all events of things as they now are. The Mission under the Bishop of Dacca has of other missionary enterprises. I am extremely doubtful also of the accu- me i ES]. paragraph, save possibly in a few isolated cases in the ~J 1922.] History and Ethnology of N.-E. India. | 5 The majority of Farangis read and bien write Bengali, which has become the vernacular of all classes. Each indivi- dual is given at Baptism a Portuguese er but an assumed Bengali one is commonly u A few Portuguese words are still spoken, and the names * ol festivals and religious cere- monies are the same as in Europe. Yet, strange to say, Lent is called “Roza,” the Persian she of the Ramazan fast. No Farangi possesses a Bible! but each one wears a rosary and a crucifix. On Fridays they eschew flesh and during Lent ob- serve a strict fast. In most houses a recess, containing an altar, or ‘‘ Prie-dieu,”’ is found, before which a lamp is lighted every evening, and on which flowers are arranged on Pete am geye pee to pes, the Pacangis are on a par with their neighbours, but in their intemperate habits, against which the pulpit fulminates a vain, they sink below the non- -Christian races around them APPENDIX ITI. ‘“*HIstoRIcCAL PRECIS OF THE CONNECTION OF THE CONGRE- GATION DE PROPAGANDA FIDE witH EASTERN BENGAL.’ (Together with recent figures relating to the number of I ndian Catholics in the Dacca District). Through the courtesy of the Rev. Father A. E. Blin, C.S.C., Vicar of the Cathedral, Dacca, I am enabled to add the follow - ing notes on the Propaganda Mission to Eastern Bengal during PIR Stele Tet CC cele mace Deon crm ee eee ‘‘'There was no translation of the Bible for Catholics till lately ak the Bishop of Krishnagar published the New Testament ; Wise’s time there were catechisms, prayer-books and man, _ things Dr. Wise did not know that the three first books ever published in Bengali, dating from 1743, were published by the Augustinians. he Je- suits who laboured among the Christians of Don Antonio had been active too at preparing vocabularies, a grammar, a catechism, ete. pen ae Pb sei are no longer kept, so this trade has ceased. H.E.S. ] in the case of most other Bengalis of the present day, snbenrcated to is certainly a he past and the com- mon complaint of the priests is the refusal of their flock ten to reasonable advice or admonition. In the case, however, of intemperance distinct change for the better is said to be perceptible. H.E.S 58 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, the last 85 years, collected from two volumes of typewritten, transcripts from the Catholic Herald and Indo-European Corres - pondence (1845-1912) in the Library of the Bishop of Dacca. From 1834, when the Rev. Dr. St. Leger was appointed by the Propaganda Vicar Apostolic of Bengal, till 1845, East- tern Bengal formed part of the Vicariate of Calcutta. In the latter year steps were taken to erect this portion of the Pro- vince into a separate Vicariate, the first acting Vicar Apostolic being the Rt. Rev. Dr. Thomas Olliffe.'| During his time, in 1847, the first Sisters (of the Loreto Order) came to Dacca and established the Nazareth Convent in the house next to St. Thomas’ Protestant Church. On the death of the Most Rev. Dr. Carew in November 1855, Dr. Olliffe assumed charge of the Western Bengal Mission and for the next five years Eastern engal was under the charge successively of the Very Rev. A. Goiran, Vicar General (till 1857) and the Rev. L. A. Verité of the Congregation of the Holy Cross (Pro-Vicar Apostolic). This Order of Priests, whose mother-house was at Le Mans, France, had first come to Eastern Bengal in 1853. On the death of Father Verité in 1859, Dr. Peter Dufal of the same Congregation, who come as a Missionary to Bengal in 1857, was appointed in July 1860 as the second Vicar Apostolic and Mission in Dacca was again placed in the hands of Fathers of the Order of the Holy Cross. The final settlement of the dispute between the Propaganda and Padroado (Portuguese Mission) was arrived at in 1886 when a fuller concordat than that of 1857 was drawn up and a Bull (‘* Humanae Salutis Auctor,” | Sept., 1886) was issued to give force to the settlement. At the same time, the Indian Hierarchy was established, and the whole of the country divided into provinces, Dioceses, and Prefectures Apostolic. ' Dr. Olliffe was confirmed as Vicar Apostolic by a decree of the Sacred Congregation de Propaganda Fide, dated 15th February, 1850. * Mer. Dufal, who held the title of Bishop of Delcona, i.p.i., died at Neuilly-sur-Seine in 1898, aged 76. 1922. } History and Ethnology of N -E. India. 59 Mgr. Ballsieper became the first Bishop of Dacca.! On his death in April 1890, the aged Mer. Augustin Louage C.S.C. was made Bishop (in 1891), and when he, in turn, died in June 1894, he was succeeded by the Rt. Rev. Father F. 3. Hurth. In 1898 Sister Catechists of the Order of Mary Immaculate, Paris, arrived in Dacca to take the place of the Sisters of the Holy Cross who had withdrawn the previous year. Bishop Hurth continued his work until 1909, when he resigned ow ing to ill-health, and the Rev. Father F. F. Linneborn, C.S.C., coals i — Bishop of Dacca. Bishop Linneborn died in Jul and was succeeded by the present (fifth) Bishop, the Ree. Dr. Joseph Legrand, C.8.C. one allusion to Nuns of the Sacred Heart of Jesus at Chittagong in the Indo-European Correspondence for Dec. 29th, 1886, I have been unable to bpd the reference by Dr. Wise to Nuns of this Order carrying on work in Eastern Bengal. the present time (1921) the nuns both in Dacca and Chittagong belong to the Order of Our Lady of the Missions. They suc- ceeded the Sisters of Mary Immaculate in 1912 As regards the present number of Indian Catholics in the Dacca District the subjoined table gives the latest figures recorded by the missionaries themselves. The Portuguese Mission figures are quoted from the Catholic Directory of 1914; while those under the Dacca Mission give the result of a Mission Census in 1911. Name of Parish. Number recorded. Portuguese Mission LH abad ashn 3,202 2. Tutail 912 3. Dacca 6 4. Tezgéon oe 225 5. Nagori = a ot 2,054 Tora (P.M.) 6,489 Dacca Mission 6. Bandura Golla 2,211 ig Spur a5 8. Tumilia : 3,973 9. Maaulsaid 280 19. Bagunbari (now removed to Kamala- ur and other villages near Sabhar) 150 Torat (D.M.) 7,565 The grand total is therefore 14,054, or an increase of about 5,500 (or nearly 65%) during the 35 years that elapsed between 1878, the date of the collection of the figures given in the last column of the table on p. 38, and 1913. The Dacca Mission is meni at nearly twice the rate of the Portuguese Mission revious Bd tera a, eshte had only held titular Bishoprics in partibus infideliu 60 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922. the proportions being 86%, to 46°... Thisis due almost certainly to emigration from churches under the Portuguese to ar under the Bishop of Dacca. The total rate of increase is about 1-9°%, per annum as compared with 1.4%, the rate of increase recorded in the Census for Dacca District generally between 1881 and 1911. It is only right to add that a considerable discrepancy exists between the figures stated above and the government census figures of 1911 and 1921. The 1911 census gave 11,468 as the total for the Indian Roman Catholics in Dacca District. _ It may very possibly be the case that the Mission census included family members who were away on service in ~ ens taken: while, on the other hand, some of these christians may have returned themselves on the government forms as Anglo- Indians. The preliminary figures at the eas 1921 census (for which I am indebted to Mr. J. H. Lindsay, C.S., District Magistrate, Dacca) showed a total of ee sae increase over the 1911 total of 1103 persons, or 9.6%. The total popula- tion of the Dacca District increased during the same decade by 5.8%. H. E. S. ee ere te eee Journ. As. Soc. BENa., VoL. XVIII, 1922. Pirate I. ~ % Pe ee “| ROMAN CATHOLIC CHRISTIANS OF DACCA DISTRICT: II. PLATE 1922. 7 Journ. As. Soc. Benea., Vor. XVIII, ROMAN CATHOLIC CHRISTIANS OF DACCA DISTRICT. 6. Notes on Kharosthi Inscriptions. By N. G. Magumpar, M.A. (Plates III-V),. 1. Shakardarra Inscription of the year 40. This inseription comes from a place called Shakardarra near Campbellpur on the North-Western Frontier, where it was discovered in an ‘ old well’.! It was first brought to notice- in 1908 by Mr. R. D. Banerji who published it in Indian Anti- quary, Vol. XXXVITI, p. 66 and plate. In 1916, Professor Sten Konow utilised the record in his le arned paper on the Indo-Scythians,* where incidentally in a footnote he gave his own reading and translation of the inscription, which are, it is worthy of notice, materially different from those of Mr. Banerji. I now edit it from two excellent ink ts gee kindly placed at my disposal by Professor Bhanda The inscription is now in he Lahore Museum. It is incised on a stone slab and measures 10” x 74”. The size of the letters is between 2” and 3”. It consists of 4 lines and is slightly damaged at the right end. ‘The characters are Kharosthi of the Kusana period as portrayed by Buhler in_ cols. X-XII of his Tafel I.—The language is a form of Prakrit, but it does not contain, as Mr. apa wrongly thinks, ‘a strong mixture of some foreign. ialect o far I can see, it does not possess any foreign aleaeits 2 all being the same as the Gandharian rakrit, so familiar to us from other Kharosthi documents. The follow- ing Sintec tsrbtibe may be noted: The, is retained in grou in all words except Pothavadasa (1. 1). The nominative donno (l. 4). In nekame (1. 3), we have a hardening of ( There is only one case of assimilation, viz. of sth into th in "Pothaiwaee (1. 1) —In respect of Orthography, the only interesting point to note is ie. the renal afferent vein blood is ap; B stronger in nitrogen than the renal artery blood by P. Now if we assume that P and B are proport tional in value to the as roughly correct), all that we have to do in order to ascertain the relative strengths of renal artery blood and renal afferent vein of one rebel that peptic appeare to the eye to ained a dense blue-black, but if i ed in alcohol n be seen that the dye has in reali ardly affected at all the colour of the mass of dney tissue, only e sinusoids being This effect may in part 5 re =r = 3 Ro > > 3 ey oe > ® parts of the nee cre On the other hand ; rrorahos a eat ser is ligatured and the two renal afferent veins much m lood than usual, the kidneys become markedly darker i in colou 1 If saline — erfused through the limbs, the saline returning via the eae afferent (or antes abdominal) veins will be found to contain an reased percentage of nitrogen. 96 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, vein blood in excretable nitrogenous matter is to weigh, in individual frogs, the masses of tissue which produce P and B respectively, viz. the weights of (1) the legs, medio-dorsal trunk muscles and skin, and the posterior part of the vertebral column; and (2) the rest of the body. These two weights— (1) and (2}—were approximately determined in eight normal P+B 3 2P+B™ 46 female Rana tigrina, with the average result that through the renal afferent vein or veins was made osmotically equal in strength to the 46 fluid by the addition of a little times (90) as great as that of the arterial fluid (30), though the urine was produced in greater quantity when the nitrogen all these experiments, with the “ pressure head” in the arterial perfusion bottle at 24 cms., the urine contained a greater percentage of nitrogen than the arterial] fluid (proof that the ** urine 2 was nota mere filtrate). In one experiment I lowered the aortic bottle to 18 cms. and obtained urine of a nitrogen strength of 0-000253 gm. per | c.c., the arterial fluid having a nitrogen strength of 0-000093 gm. and the 46 fluid in the renal afferent veins of 0-000193 gm. The nitrogen strength of the urine is thus (other things equal) purely a function of the fluid ing experiments at length x an yasiftl, sities. nmgth as examples of the methods adopted 2 Ascertained by Gulick’s method (Jour. Biol. Chemistry, Vol. 18, 1914, p, 541). Details of the method are also given in Plimmer’s ‘‘Practi- cal Organic and Bio Chemistry”, 1915 p. 557. The late Dr. E. G. Hill of Allaha : brought this method to my notice and assisted me in practical details. ' In Appendix B I have supplied some details of these and peigetek 1922 } « Renal Portal” System. 97 pressure in the intertubular plexus, being inversely propor- tional. In another series: of experiments (Appendix B) I ascertained that 0°025% of potassium ferrocyanide present in the renal afferent vein fluid alone did not appear in the urine, and that with ferrocyanide present in both arterial and renal afferent vein fluids, excess of strength of the latter up to three times that of the arterial fluid had no effect on the urine.'! In a final experiment in which the following three fluids were employed :— Aortic aaa gad 8 apm o oa urea, 0° arate ferro. , 0° mae KI. *46” i ge , 0°00958% 0-0 i a 602 2 ae a ze vote, , 001259, -—s * 0.02 ye ie the aortic fluid perfusing the vealed arteries during the whole experiment, and the three fluids being successively perfused through the ‘Wo renal afferent veins, the three samples of urine obtained were identical in composition. in this as in all other series—the renal afferent vein fluids being perfused via the aorta instead of via the renal afferent veins—and in all these control experiments the urine composi- tion corresponded in strength to the fluid perfused. These results thus afford conclusive evidence that the arteri- al fluid in the intertubular plexus is the only ‘one concerne with the secretion of urine and that with correct (i.e. nor- mal) flows, the venous fluid in the renal venous meshwork does not enter the intertubular plexus. On the pee of a slight Increase of Pressure* above the Normal n the Fluid in the Renal epee Veins ply) has nothing to do with the secretion of urine. The case is very different however if, in these experiments, the renal afferent vein perfusion bottles be raised from 1 em.—3 cms. in height (according to the amount of deficiency of flow in the renal afferent veins below normal, relative to the arterial flow), thus increasing the flows of fluid in the renal afferent veins, both absolutely and relatively to the flow of fluid via the renal arteries. The flow of fluid in the renal afferent veins being above normal relative to the flow in the renal arteries, indigo- Ferrocyanide estimated colorimetrically by addition of equal guantities of a stock solution of ferric chloride. 98 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII. t to the excess of pressure in the renal afferent vein, and therefore renal venous meshwork, causing the venous fluid to penetrate to some extent into the intertubular plexus via the openings of the latter into the meshwork and so lead- ing to admixture of the venous fluid with the arterial. This supposition, besides being the only possible one to account for the facts, is confirmed by the results of dye-injection experi- ments carried out with excess pressure in the renal afferent veins—the dye can be seen to have penetrated into the inter- tubular plexus under these conditions. Another result of ex-— cess of pressure in the renal venous meshwork fluid, which I may mention here, is that the arterial flow is retarded, and if the renal afferent vein pressure be raised to about 20 cms. the arterial flow is stopped altogether. e case of indigo-carmine injected into the renal after- ent vein and appearing in the urine, the intensity of colour of the urine is, so far as I have ascertained, directly proportional to the amount of excess of fluid pressure in the vein, but the proportion is not a simple one—the urine increases in intensity of colour at a greater rate than the excess of pressure in the vein. This is possibly due to the dye behaving like common salt, the percentage of which in the urine is directly propor- tional to the fluid pressure in the intertubular plexus (vide sure in the intertubular plexus diminishes the percentage of nitrogen in the urine (vide Part III) and the percentage of nitro- gen found in the urine in these experiments is the balance struck between the increased percentage due to admixture of the ven- ous and arterial fluids and the diminished percentage due to the increase of pressure of the fluid in the intertubular plexus. it be argued that these facts do not constitute evidence for the venous fluid entering an intertubular plexus separate from the renal venous meshwork, because it may just as well be supposed that the excess of pressure in the renal afferent vein 1922.] ‘* Renal Portal ”’ System. 99 drives the venous fluid from the intertubular plexus (which, according to current opinion, is sacar ass by both the arterial and the venous blood or fluid) into the glomeruli, the reply is that this alternative cuppomeets is rinipoaslbts when the consid- erable difference of pressure which exists between the blood in the glomeruli and the blood in the intertubular plexus is taken into account. As J shall show in Part III, even the slight increase Of blood pressure and flow produced in one renal afferent vein by the ligaturing of the companion renal afferent vein in a livin ng frog is sufficient to increase the nitrogen-con- tent of the urine secreted by the kidney retaining its venous supply, and in this case (and in many of my perfusion experi- ments) it is incredible that the blood in the intertubular plexus (usually said to be at about half the pressure in the glomeruli, i.e. about 10 cms; in reality it is much lower than this) could the increase of blood pressure above normal in the renal afferent vein amounted to as much as 2 cms. No physiologist has ever suggested that glomeruli can be injected with a pressure of 2 cms. above the normal (say 12 cms.) from the renal afferent veins while the arterial circulation is in full force, and indeed it requires at least 10 cms. pressure to effect this when the arteries are empty (4). The suggestion then that excess of nitrogen or because the venous blood or fluid has begn forced into the glomeruli cannot be entertained for the simple reason that it is physically impossible. Apart however from the impossibility, examination of sections of kidneys perfused with indigo-carmine via the renal the urine was a distinct blue, the kidney was found to Ke well injected with the dve, but this was restricted to the renal 100 Journal of the Asiatic Seciety of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Similar results were obtained in another experiment in which the relative flows were as 112:259 and the urine was a distinct sky—blue, and in two others which I need not record. These facts then prove, beyond possibility of doubt, (1) that the dye was secreted by the kidney tubules and not the glomeruli, and (2) that the intertubular plexus is normally intertubular plexus. The theory of kidney secretion which states that the urine is secreted by the tubules alone, the glomeruli taking no share save in the capacity of pressure- reducers and flow-retarders, I propose to call the Tubule cum Rete theory (to be discussed in Part IV) in order to distinguish it from the Bowman—Heidenhain theory which assumes that the glomerulus secretes most of the water of the urine. Additional Evidence for the Structural Separateness of the Inter- tubular Plexus from the Renal Venous Meshwork derived from Perfusion Experiments under Abnormal Conditions of smotic Pressure. In the experiments already alluded to in which I found that the urine secreted by a kidney with 30 fluid in its renal afferent vein was identical in amount and composition with the urine secreted by the companioa kidney with 46 fluid in its renal afferent vein, I found it necessary, in order to ensure equal rates of flow through the two renal afferent veins, to add some additional salt (0-037%,, e.g. added to the 0°6%) to the 30 fluid (which contained 4 smaller amount of added urine), the 46 fluid, like the arterial, consisting of 0°6% saline. In osmotically the greater proportion of urine in one fluid by a greater Proportion of salt in the other. After completing er if I could balance osmotically the whole of the urine in the be produced on the urine excreted. In most of these experi— ments I perfused 40 fluid (i.e. 0°6% saline plus 40 c.c. fres urine added to each 2000 cc. of the saline) through the aorta, - of the urine being added instead of 40 c.c.) through one renal afferent vein and 0-7% saline through the 1922.] *“ Renal Portal ’’ System. 101 weaker in nitrogen than the kidney with 61 fluid in its renal atferent vein, and that (2) the 0°7% saline in the renal afferent vein caused the flow of urine from that kidney to decrease and ultimately to stop,' the other kidney continuing to secrete freely. Further experiments proved that the 0°7% saline solution in the renal afferent vein actively abstracted nitrogen from the arterial fluid in the intertubular plexus of that kidney, and thus led to the nitrogen-weaker urine. The data of the preceding experiments provide another very powerful argument in favour of the separateness of the renal venous meshwork from the intertubular plexus. Thus, to take a typical experiment, the arterial fluid was of a nitrogen strength of 0-000180 gm. in | c¢.c., the fluid in one renal afferent vein was of a nitrogen strength of 0:000326 gm., and the fluid in the other renal afferent vein contained no nitregen (pure 0°7% saline). The urine secreted by the kidney with the renal afferent vein fluid containing nitrogen was of a nitrogen strength of 0°000253 gm., and the urine secreted by the kidney with pure 0°7% saline in its renal afferent vein was of a nitrogen strength of 0:000180 gm., i.e. the relative nitrogen strengths of the two samples of rine w pelotenctnte verage relative strengths urine were a8 Foopigo and the a g g 0°000193 in six experiments were as 0000172" venous fluid mixes with the arterial fluid in the intertubular plexus, this means that three volumes of 0°7% saline are mixed with one volume of 0°6% saline plus 0°018°% nitrogen, an this should result in the kidney supplied with pure saline via its renal afferent vein, secreting urine at least four times weaker in nitrogen than the urine secreted by the kidney which does not have its arterial fluid diluted (in nitrogen) in this way but, on the contrary (according to the hypothesis), strengthened by admixture with the nitrogen- stronger renal afferent vein fluid. Thus, assuming that the Now if we assume that the ' Perfusion with saline alone, even through the renal arteries, wires in all cases a very scanty output of ‘‘ urine.’ e 6.8 — ts Appendix H; Also see Experiment 4, Appendix C, in illustration of the | statement in the text. 102 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{N.S., XVIII, rogen) is perfused through the renal arteries and saline plus nitrogen is perfused through the renal afferent veins, nitrogen is found to pass from the renal venous meshwork into the inter- tubular plexus, and the urine contains nitrogen. In other of substances occurs between the two systems of sinusoids in motic tensions evoked by the abnormal conditions permit diff- usion to occur. nother series of facts affords equally forcible evidence, both in favour of the separateness of the intertubular plexus and renal venous meshwork and of the view that it is the tu- bules which produce the urine and not the glomeruli. If saline plus nitrogen be perfused through the renal arteries, while the renal afferent vein is ligatured, secretion proceeds apace, but if pure saline be then perfused through the renal afferent vein with correct relative flow, the arterial flow is retarded and secre- tion at once becomes diminished. Apart from the abstraction of somenitrogen from the arterial fluid, attribute this result mainly to the pure saline (a fluid of relatively low osmotic pres- sure ) in the renal afferent vein causing constriction of the inter- tubular plexus capillaries. On the other hand, if a fluid of low | In view of the theoretical im : ; portance of these facts (Part IV) I have noe the details of a few of these experiments in Appendix C. Even if we assume that it can do so and that it produces an in creased glomerular filtrate, this filtrate will be different in composition y but in my experiments, wit one as the composition of the increased volume of urine remat 4 *red, whatever substance was employed in the renal afferent vein fluid Beare als as ter Gh ee Se een a pe trent ee tie Wd os keep oe ocean 1922.] Renal Portal’’ System. 103 ing increased rate of flow of the arterial fluid through the glomeruli would soon stop the penetration), it is evident that if, us I maintain, the high osmotic pressure of the renal affer- ent vein fluid dilates the capillaries of the intertubular plexus, then, on account of the resistance of the intertubular plexus becoming reduced, the pressure in the glomerular capillaries creased osmotic pressure of the renal afferent vein fluid causes di- latation of the intertubular plexus capillaries and so increases the volume and rate of flow of the fluid in it—with a resulting increase of urine of the same composition as that obtained with renal afferent vein fluids of lower osmotic preasure : that produces the opposite effect by constriction of the intertubu- lar plexus capillaries ; that the intertubular plexus is physiologi- cally and structurally separate from the renal venous mesh- work, and that the tubules secrete the whole of the urine, the glomeruli taking no direct part. Conclusions and Brief Review. I have, in the preceding abstract, stated five a priori reasons, all of considerable weight, for regarding the “ renal portal’’ system (renal venous meshwork) as devoid of any function. If these reasons be accepted as valid, it is practical- ly certain that the renal venous meshwork (which after all is only a broken-up portion of a purely extraneous structure—an adjacent vein returning blood from the hind limb and pelvic region) can have no physiological connection with, much less form part of, the intertubular plexus of the Amphibian or other ‘“portal’’ type of kidney. This conclusion is also in accord- ance with such well-known facts and considerations as that (a) the kidney is in the whole Vertebrate series constructed on to raise its osmotic pressure. If it be argued that the high osmotic pres- sure of the renal afferent vein fluid dilates the glomerular capillaries in the way as I suppose that it dilates the capillaries of the intertubular plexus, the reply is that such dilation will reduce the fluid pressure in the glomerulus and should therefore, on the hypothesis, diminish the glome- rular filtrate: it certainly cannot increase it. 104 Journal of the Asiatic Sociely of Bengal. |N.S , XVIII, a uniform plan, viz. a system of tubules each supplied a branches from the efferent glomerular artery, and = Pp -“ would hardly undergo such a SoS ar eo egrenen ie ple: i i + tubu vapil- tion in certain groups as the filling o the pints with a veliiiie of venous blood three times the — of the arterial; (b) purely venous blood invading the intertubu- CURRENT THEORY ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION TEXT-FIG 2. Diagrams illustrating the current theory (A) and the actual constraction (B) of the Amphibian kidney. In h capillary plexus (ICP) is shown to from the renal venous meshwork (RVM te tubular plexus would naturally open. , : DA, dorsal aorta; CP, inter-tubular capillary plexus; G, gome LPV, left pelvic vein; PCV, Ppost-caval vein; RRAV. right renal afferen vein; RVM, renal venous meshwork. lar plexus as a consequence of the cutting-off of the arterial blood flow and of raised osmotic pressure due to diuretics (as in Schmidt’s and Beddard’s experiments—vide 36, 8) is delete- rious to the tubule epithelium, causing the cells to degenerate, and though the venous blood! is supposed to be diluted with ' As 1 have already pointed out, Cushny (7) colors the blood in ne “* renal portal ” vein of his figure 14a bright scarlet and purple in his. 1922.] “ Renal Portal’”’ System. 105 one quarter of its volume of arterial blood! in normal animals, yet it is very doubtful if active glandular cells would, under these circumstances, obtain sufficient oxygen, since we know that the oxygen consumption per gram of kidney tissue is cer- tainly not less than in other organs; and (c) ‘‘when the same kidney is perfused at different times through the aorta, and through the renal portal system, there isa greater consump- tion of oxygen in the former case than in the latter (double to treble in four experiments)’’? (10), a fact which it is impossible to explain on any other theory than that the ‘‘renal portal ” sys- tem does not come into physiological contact with the tubules, since the Bowman capsules (supposed to be mere filters) cannot be supposed to absorb oxygen to any appreciable extent. s we have seen, the evidence advanced by physiologists in favour of the view that the renal venous meshwork and the intertubular plexus proper form one common system of sinu- soids supplying the tubules, is invalidated by the lack of precautions to secure correct relative rates of flow of the aorta, and it is most essential in double dye-injection and other perfusion experiments that these relative rates of flow should be reproduced, since if, as I contend, the intertubular plexus and the renal venous meshwork constitute two separate systems of channels (the former only opening into the latter at points where the blood is near the efferent renal veins). any departures from the normal relative rates of flow will cause either the arterial or the venous fluids to penetrate into channels which the blood they represent in the living animal never enters. J have referred to numerous perfusion experi- ments conducted by me, the results of which prove that under v normal conditions the fluid in the renal venous meshwork has also, the venous blood in the renal venous meshwork, under normal conditions, does not affect the kidney secretion. Under re 15. I need hardly say that there is no justification for either of these colors. The blood in the renal afferent veins is as blue as that in the post-caval. | It may also be recalled to mind that, owing to the heart of the frog only possessing a single ventricle, the blood in the aorta is not purely arterial as in higher Vertebrates but is already mixed to some extent with venous blood. 2 The smal] amount of oxygen which is absorbed on perfusion via the **renal portal’? sys is probably due to the fluid penetrating into part of the empty intertubular capillary plexus, 106 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, abnormal conditions however, whether of excessive flow in the plexus, the fluid in the renal afferent vein can and does influence the arterial fluid in the intertubular plexus, the amount and composition of the urine varying in consequence, but these abnormal conditions of course never occur in nature. The value of these experiments under abnormal conditions however is that they afford additional proof of the two pro- positions which it is the object of this memoir to substantiate, viz. the non-functional character of the so-called “ renal portal” system (and therefore the separateness of the renal venous the whole of the urine by the urinary tubules, the glomeruli taking no direct part (a subject which I shall discuss more fully in Part IV). I should like here to express my indebtedness to the late Professor E. G. Hill, D.Sc., Principal of the Muir Central College, Allahabad, for his very kind assistance in connection with chemical work. Though in failing health at the time he Sircar, I should have been severely handicapped in my ies. I also wish to offer my sincere thanks to Sir Arthur Keith, F.R.S., for very kindly sending me a full abstract of the paper by Gurwitsch (discussed in Part III) and for aiding me in other ways, and to Professor W. M. Bayliss, F.R.S., for the large amount of time he has generously devoted to reading through the manuscript and supplying advice and criticism. [ also wish to thank Professor E. H. Starling, »R.S., and Professor J. P. Hill, F.R.S., for similar assistance kindly given. Professor R. Moody, M.A., has also kindly aided me in connection with certain calculations. Finally, 1 wish to express my great indebtedness to Dr. 8. W. Kemp for his assistance in the publication of this memoir. PART. IL. KIDNEY SECRETION WITH AND WITHOUT THE RENAL AFFERENT VEIN SupPLy in Livine ToaDs AND Frogs, AND IN PERFUSION EXPERIMENTS the meshwork) in the substance of the «« portal” kidney is distinct and separate from the true capillarization of the efferent glome- rular arteries round the tubules—the intertubutar plexus—, save ine ese Nake tit sie aig 2 Pas ee | A ete eis cn eg Se ee a er SPR a oe ala ae ee WN Aceres a | Be Aieleees 5 ieee iar eee Seeing ae ee age ee She igre 1922. ] “ Renal Portal ”’ System. 107 where the latter enters the distal portions of the former for the exit of the arterial blood ; and (2) that the venous bloo takes no part in urine secretion under normal conditions. It is obviously important to check the second conclusion by experiments on the living animal, and during the years 1915- 18 inclusive, I carried out a large number of experiments which consisted of ligaturing both or one only of the two renal afierent- veins in specimens of an Indian toad—Bufo stomaticus (Liitken)! —common in the United Provinces (India) and of observing the effects (especially on the composition of the urine when compared with that of the urine of normal control toads) produced in those animals which survived the operation. I may add that I selected toads in preference to frogs for these experiments es a 3(x 2). The regenerated renal afferent veins of the Toad J the ventral aspect. RRAV, right renal afferent vein: LRAV, py eka afferent vein, The epee veins differed from normal renal afferent veins in being plastered, speak, against the dorsal peritoneum—they did not stretch pes Mie body-cavity like normal veins. because the former can be kept under relatively dry conditions een occasional moistening of the belly skin being alone neces- sary) and hence sepsis of the wounds is far less liable to occur. The mina of Both Renal Afferent Veins in Bufo stomaticus. nine toads, which I will designate A, B, C, D, E, F,G, H, and i I r ligatared (from the dorsal surface) both renal afferent veins ® (each vein being li — in two places and cut 1 Dr. fist Annandale informs me that this i is the correct naming of the B. Ander. of the ‘‘ Fauna of British In — 21 nye not ligature the dorso-lumbar ns—an omission of no conse quence in view of their small size. The canal afferent veins were expose ica Se eae a 108 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, _ between the ligatures), and the toads survived for the following periods :— Toad A died after six weeks. Toad B was killed after eight weeks (thin but healthy inside and out). Toad C was killed after twelve weeks (health vy save for cysts present in the liver and mesentery). ; Toads D and E died after three weeks and three days. x Toad F died after five weeks and four days. Toad G died after five weeks and six days Toad H died after twelve weeks and four days. : Toad J was killed after one ear, nine weeks and two - days (perfectly healthy inside and out). In all the toads which died and in Toads B and C no signs of regeneration of the cut renal afferent veins were apparent at the post-mortem, but in the Toad J, I found that both renal afferent veins had been completely regenerated ( text-figure 3). The significance of this fact 1 shali refer to later. In all the toads except J, the kidneys had become appreci- : . Total weight of body at time of ably enlarged (le. the ratio oi Scone the tes tine pore was greater in these experimental toads than the corresponding average ratio determined in 56 normal toads).! This subject also will be discussed later. The liver did not ~~ in size, though it obviously received more blood than usual. : The total nitrogen output in the entire amount of urine of : the Toad F (body-weight at time of experiment = 29'7 gms ) ue excreted during five consecutive days was 0:05047 gm.,? while = those of two normal control toads (weighing 24-5 gms. and 347 ) during the same period and under precisely the same conditions were 0:04125 gm. and 0°05790 gm_ respectively. . Thus, relative to the weight of the body, the amount of nitrogen = | excreted by the Toad F during this period was certainly not 2 less than the corresponding amounts of nitrogen excreted by : he two control toads. The similar total nitrogen output of the Toads G and H ( placed together in one jar: G weighed at Poa ee io 2 aig ea Br sey ne ee Ee oe a a ee by lifting out the hind ends of the kidneys through slits made in the dorsal muscles. The g lowest ratio being 143-7 and the maximum 335'7. In Toads A, B, C, D,E, F, G, H, ratios were respectively 165-7 (and probably smaller owing to Tge coelomic effusion being included in the body-weight), 137°6. 149°6, Rar (a coelomic effusion included in the body-weight). The whole of the urine excreted during the five days was carefully collected and separated from faecal matter by filtration. Total nitrogen determinati ‘ns by Gulick’s method. 1922.) “ Renal Portal ’’ System. 109 — time of the experiment 17:0 gms. and H 22°5 gms.) during x days was 0°01879 gm.,' while that of one pair of control ree (body- -weights at time of experiment = 17:0 gms. and 20-2 gms.) during the same period was 0:°01100 gm., and that of another pair. of control toads OST: weights at time of experi- ment =17°2 gms. and lL ms.) during the same period was 001822 gm. Thus, again, the ieee of the Toads G and H (deprived of a venous supply) each excreted as much nitrogen in a given time as each of the kidneys (retaining their venous supely): . four control toads. ing one month I estimated the nitrogen strengths of phe pais es of urine* (volume of an average sample =0°35 .c ) obtained from the Toad G, which were 0:00046 gm. in 1 c c., 0:00093, 000506 and 0-00220, the average nitrogen strength of which is 0:00216 gm. in 1 c¢.c. The corresponding nitrogen strengths of eight samples of urine (volume of an average sample = 0°55 c.c.) obtained during the same period from the Toad H were 0°00106 gm., 0:00180, 0:00100, 0°00276, 0:00071 0:00114, 0°00256 and 000393. the average nitrogen strength of which is 0°00187 gm. inl c.c. And from the Toad J (about three weeks after the operation and therefore long before the two renal afferent veins could have been regenerated) the nitrogen strengths of ee samples of urine (volume of an average sample=0°68 c.c.) during the same period were 0:00094, gm., 0°00075, “0-00128, 000053 pos 0°00106, the ~ average nitrogen strength of which is (-00091 gm. in | c.c. In one normal control toad the nitrogen strengths of five obtained during the same period were 0:00096 gm., 9°00156, 000084, 0°00088 and 0-017, the average nitrogen strength of which is 000119 gm. in 1 c.c., and the nitrogen strengths of single samples of urine (average volume of which=0°47 c.c.) obtained from nine other control toads (kept under precisely the same conditions) were 0:00130 gm., 0:00120, 0:00072, 0:00012, 0:00068. 000100, 00026, 0:00030 and 0°00080, the Toads G, H and J (with kidneys deprived of a venous supply) were neither less in volume nor deficient in nitrogen s —— lit will be noticed that this quantity is considerably less shan: poe quantity excreted by the asngie toad F in five days. The difference is due to the fact that the Toad F and its controls were fed on house-flies (a highly nitrogenous diet), while the Toads G and H and their controls mples of urine from toads and frogs can easily tained by iain a & nimal over a funnel and saleiag a the belly gets a dilute acid, when urine is almost immediately squirted, the bladder being it emptied. With ordinary toads and frogs : Sess one dilute sulphuric but this injures the skin in time: with experimental toads I use nos juice, which however is not quite so effective. 110 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, when compared with samples of urine obtained from control toads (with kidneys retaining their venous supply). These facts once more prove that the venous supply of the‘ portal” kidneys is of no consequence in connection with urine secretion From the Toads A, B, C, F, Hand J, I carefully removed the renal arteries and compared them (average diameter) with the arteries of twelve of the normal control toads. The conclusion J arrived at from these few data was that the renal arteries of the toads deprived of a venous supply to the kidneys are not so large, relatively to the body-weight, as the arteries of many RLNPRAY ..- ---LLNPRAYV v 4 D _ TExt-FicurE 4 (x 2). The two persistent posterior cardinal veins in the male Rana temporaria labelled OD contest tapect: Sig sal — RLNPRAV, right large non-portal enal afferent vein i PRAY, left ditto. The small size of the right ; kidney is noticeable. External diameter of the a ‘‘ renal afferent’’ vein (posterior to the kidneys was 0°883 mm. an the portion ae to the ki iaday 1033 mm. The external diameter of the — ‘‘renal afferent’’ vein was 0°930 and a Mes Sere _ the kidney 1:085 m The external diameter of ihe Pepisine abdominal vein was 0-775 mm. The left kidney (with the oR = renal afferent” vein) weighed 0:072 gm., and the right kidney t 3 * i i = —a Spas gms.) was 149°8, whereas the kidn ney ratios of six norm al m temporaria were 147-7, 121-9, 137°4, 138-5, 195° 4 and 163°3—the duet therefore were not larger than usual. normal toads, but are perhaps slightly larger than those of the average normal toad. I arrived at a similar conclusion from the measurement of the tat arteries of an abnormal specimen of Rana temporaria (which I labelled OD,! text-figure 4), both kidneys of which were naturally devoid ot a venous supply ow- ing to both renal afferent veins (persistent posterior cardinals) maintaining a direct connection with the two pre-caval veins, ! I am indebted for ss rar O’Donoghue who sent it to e specimen to the kindness of Dr. C. H.- 1922 .] ‘ Renal Portal” System. 111 and comparison with the arteries of six normal control R. tem” poraria of the same size and sex. If hypertrophy of the rena! arteries of the experimental toads has occurred, it is evident that it is so small as to be devoid of any significance if regarded a compensation for the elimination of the venous supply. This will be the more easily realized when we remember that the venous supply (as ave determined in the frog Rana tigrina (see Appendix A, Part I) to the kidneys is about three times the volume of the arterial supply, from which it may be deduced that if this venqus blood is of use to the kidneys in producing secretion it would need a very considerable amount of hypertrophy of the arteries to compensate for its loss. The Cause of the Death of the Majority of the Experimental Toads and the Regeneration of the Renal Afferent Veins in the Toad J Ligature of both renal afferent veins in the living toad (or frog) necessarily involves considerable perturbations in the blood supply of the body. In the first place, since the anterior abdominal vein has to convey to the heart all the blood re- turned from opi legs and oa ts region : (1) the liver receives nearly 3 times |! as much blood as is normally the case—a quan- tity which, though vastly in excess of the normal, is yet less than the entire quantity of blood normally transmitted to the heart by both renal afferent veins and the anterior abdominal, owing to the relatively increased resistances offered to the flow of the in- creased volume of blood by the distended walls of the anterior abdominal vein and of the capillaries of the liver. Again, the rate of outflow of blood from the legs eae therefore decreased , h veins of the hind legs will, with the anterior abdomina 1, become greatly Sinise with blood (forming reservoirs), and therefore e is so much the less for the heart to receive and therefore to pump Soran result being a considerable deficit of blood in the whole of the arterial system and therefore a paucity of supply to the body in general; (3) the hind legs will receive even less fresh blood than other organs owing to the increased resistance ue by their already partially-blocked venous system ; and (4) the arterial supply to the kidneys will be dim inished, as to all other organs, but the kidneys will suffer more than other organs because not only are they posteriorly more than other organs on a 5 Aree blood #1 sup pply This esti ~~ is iecindod on the relative areas in transverse section ies from the external diameters) of the renal afferent veins com - pared with the iiseriee abdominal (see j ieee D). 1}2 Journal oj the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIL, rally more dilute than normal urine, period, when the wound has almost or quite healed and the animal is as lively as the control norma] toads. the urine exereted is, as we have seen, as plentiful and as strong in contents (nitrogen) as that of the normal toads. We must therefore conclude that during this convalescent period the body has produced an additional quantity of blood sufficient to make up for the quantity lying useless in the enlarged anterior abdominal and leg veins, and the organs in general will then receive as much blood as formerly. But there are two excep- tions to this statement, viz. the liver which, until the re-forma- tion of the ligatured renal afferent veins, will receive more than its normal quantity of blood, and the legs which, for the reason already given, will continue to receive less. The toads (not enumerated) which died in less than two or three weeks subsequent to the operation probably died from the effects of the operation ; Toad J, on the other hand, not only survived the operation but also the physiological disturbances which must ensue in connection with the liver and legs due re- spectively, as already stated, to too large a supply of venous blood and too small a supply of arterial blood. These disturb- ances are evidently quite sufficient by themselves to account for the re-formation of the two renal afferent veins, without assuming that the renal afferent supply of venous blood to the kidneys is in itself essential to the health of the toad. The facts already recorded that toads can live three months in an apparently healthy condition without a ‘‘ renal portal’’ system is sufficient to prove this, and it is therefore practically certain that if we could perform the operation of making the two renal afferent veins open directly into the post-caval or other large vein, thus eliminating the “renal portal’? system and at the same time avoiding excess of blood supply to the liver and deficient blood supply to the legs,' the toads would after the operation resemble normal toads in every respect and the renal afferent veins would not re-form so as to re-establish connection with the kidneys. Additional proof of this is afforded by the discovery in a male specimen of Rana temporaria (the frog OD. the renal arteries of which I have already referred to—text- figure 4) of practically the condition of things which would exist if the supposed operation I have just described were possible in practice. ! In all those abnormal frogs which have been described in which one of the kidneys is deprived by nature of a “ renal portal’”’ supply, the renal afferent i Agpne rbot directly into the post-caval or into a pre-cava i stent posterior cardinal, thus 7. idi excess of blood supply to the liver. ; ee ee 1922.] ** Renal Portal’? System. 113 Toad B and possibly Toad C might have emulated Toad JJ in surviving long enough to allow of the regeneration of the two renal afferent veins had they not been chlornformed. Toads D E, F and H apparently died from the effects of the excess of venous blood supply to the liver (liver unhealthy and contain- ing many cysts full of granular matter, swollen gall bladder and coelomic effusion) and the deficient arterial blood supply to the legs (discoloration and sores on skin of legs due to gan- grene), and es in some cases ineffective sterilization of the wound (Toad G ?). I have already provided evidence to show that the ligature of the two renal afferent veins--the elimina. tion of the “ renal Lies ” system—was not per se the cause of death or even dise n these toads; the kidneys can gine quite efficiently hee “deprived of their venous blo sup- On the Hh norease in Size of the Kidneys in Toads ie tei ed nui Afferent Veins. The Ligature of one Renal erent Vein in Living Toads. It may be argued that the enlargement of the kidneys in toads with ligatured renal afferent veins is an indication that (supposed aera venous te cut off, but, as we have seen, the renal arteries do not become enlarged. Moreover, that this kidney hypertrophy is of no significance in connection with the problem of the “renal portal ” ae is clearly shown by the fact that in the abnormal specimen of Rana temporaria, referred to above as having been ike of a ‘renal portal”? system from birth (the frog OD), the kidneys were slightly below the average in size (when compared with the kidneys of six normal R. temporaria ). In this connection it is further interesting to note that when one renal afferent vein is ligatured in a living toad, one kidney therefore being non-portal and the other “ por- tal,”’ the non- Laat kidney does not increase in size compared with the “ portal” kidney, though both may perhaps enlarge equally to a ary small extent. In 1915, Thi ligatured the right renal afferent vein in four toads. One died after three weeks and three days, one after seven ag and six days, and the other two I killed after seven weeks, six days (perfectly healthy, in- side and out) and eleven weeks, ais days (bealthy save for a few cysts in the liver) respectively. In the first toad the two kidneys were exactly equal in weight (each=0°60 gm.) ; in the second, the left “ portal” kidney weighed 0 352 gm. and the right non- portal 0°315 gm.; in the third, the left ‘‘ portal” kidney 114 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, weighed 0:126 gm. and the right non-portal 0°133 gm.; in the fourth, the left “portal” kidney weighed 0-123 gm. and the right non-portal 0°:101 gm. In these four experimental toads therefore not a single non-portal kidney shows appreciable in- crease in size compared with the ‘‘ portal,’’ and only in one case (the second) is there any marked difference of weight be- tween the two kidneys, and this is in the reverse direction, the ‘‘ portal”? being the larger. O’Donoghue (31), on the other hand, maintains that in the few known examples of abnormal frogs (&. temporaria) in which the kidney of one side is naturally deprived of a venous supply, the “ portal’ kidney is always the larger, and he considers this as evidence of the functional importance of the “renal portal”? system.! Before describing these few examples I may remark that one conspicuous differ- ence between these natural examples of one-side-‘‘ portal ’”’-one- side-non-portal frogs and my experimental toads is that in the former the abnormal ‘renal afferent’’ vein, instead of being ligatured (and thereby increasing the quantity of venous blood in the anterior abdominal and the other renal afferent vein), is merely continued either into a persistent posterior cardinal vein on the same side of the body or directly into the post-caval vein, thereby not increasing the quantity of venous blood in the normal renal afferent vein or anterior abdominal. To be brief, I may say that O’Donoghue’s contention is an impossible one to maintain, as he himself would doubtless admit had he studied the facts more in detail. In one of the abnormal frogs figured by O’ Donoghue (his figure 1), the normal left “ portal’’ kidney weighed 0°105 gm. and the abnormal non-portal right kidney weighed 0:088 gm.—a difference of 0:017 gm.; and in another frog figured by O’ Donoghue (his figures 2 and 4), the normal right ‘ portal” kidney weighed 0-031 gm. and the abnormal left non-portal kidney weighed 0-026 gm.—a negligible differ- ence of 0:005 gm. In a more recent specimen labelled CH kindly sent to me by Dr. O'Donoghue (text-figure 5), the right ef ** portal” kidney receives much less venous blood than usual—a fact in itself of considerable significance {see text-figure 6). eed Pte). ee 1922.] “* Renal Portal’ System. 115 a he PN CARD. RSPRAV --- “LSPRAV RSPRAV- --LLNPRAV / A 6 B TEXT-FIGURE 5(x 2). The ree left —- cardinal vein in the frog, (R. temporaria.) labelled CH. V, ventral as: aepect ; D, dorsal aspect. RSPRAV, right small ‘portal ”’ renal ‘aierent vein; LLNPRAYV, left large non-portal renal afferent vein. The right ‘enertal ” renal afferent vein only measure sera 0-341 mm. in external diameter, while the left non- portal renal afferent vein measured 0:852 mm. The external diameter of the anterior aden vein measured 0°930 mm. and was therefore gee GuRE 6, A. Persistent right posterior cardinal vein in a frog ala Wosdland; 43). Persistent left posterior cardinal vein in a frog (after O’Donoghue, 33). The difference of calibre of the ‘‘ portal ” vr non-portal renal afferent veins is conspicuous. PPC, posterior cardinal vein: RLNPRAV, right large non-portal renal afferent vei: : R small ‘‘ portal” renal rent vein; RSPRAV, right small adr renal por affe afferent vein: LLNPRAV, left large non-portal renal afferent vein 116 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVII, ences of kidney weight found in the three abnormal frogs are of no significance. ! The Comparison of Samples of Urine excreted by Frogs (Rana tigrina) with Both Renal Afferent Veins Ligatured, and by Frogs with these two Veins Unligatured. Since we have scen that ligature of the two renal afferent veins temporarily causes a diminished blood supply to the kidneys via the renal arteries, it is useless to compare the urine sacput of frogs with the veins ligatured with that of frogs retaining their renal afferent veins, since the former must. under the conditions, necessarily be less during the 24 hour over which the experiment extends (for the method of experi- ment see Part III). The nitrogen strength of the urine of the frogs with ligatured veins will also probably be less because of the restricted circulation through the legs (which together outweigh the rest of the body). In the toads with both renal afferent veins ligatured, on the other hand, both of these deficiencies must, as we have seen, have become remedied during the several weeks over which the experiments extended (probably by the genesis of additional blood and by enlargement of the leg veins), but in the decerebrate frogs of these experi- ments this is impossible. I confirmed these conclusions when I compared the urine output of six frogs with ligatured renal afferent veins with the output of urine of five frogs with intact renal afferent veins (the two series of frogs being treated exactly alike in all other respects) and found that on the average the urine of the former was both less in amount and weaker in nitrogen compared with that of the latter, though individual frogs with ligatured renal afferent veins may excrete more and nitrogen-stronger urine than individuals with the veins intact. Perfusion Experiments on Frogs’ Kidneys respectively with and without the Renal Afferent Vein Supply. in connection with these experiments was to perfuse 0°6% saline y confirmed by the kidneys of the frog OD, in which, though the two kidneys possess similar blood supplies, the differ- ence of kidney weight was 0-033 gm. See text-figure 4. 1922.] “© Renal Portal’? System. 117 plus 40 c.c. fresh human urine added to each 2,000 c.c. of the through each of the two renal afferent veins at correct relative flows. In one part of each experiment urine was onllocta while the renal afferent vein perfusion was in force ; the other part of each experiment urine was collected hile the renal afferent vein perfusion was stopped. These two samples of urine were compared as to quantity, and nitrogen and chloride strengths, due account being taken as to whether the experi- ment was commenced with the renal afferent veins open or close The results I obtained, after the most careful elimination of all factors which might defeat a true c comparison, were that (1) the amounts of urine secreted during the two conditions (renal abe veins open and renal afferent veins closed) were on the average equal; (2) the nitrogen strengths of the urine hike were the same under the two conditions ; and (3) the chloride (as NaCl) strengths of the urine samples under the two conditions were also identical. This last result contradicts the statement of Bainbridge, Collins and Menzies (4) that ‘‘a simultaneous arterial and venous perfusion, however seems to be more conducive to the formation — a very dilute! ure than is arterial perfusion alone.” Sin weer: the quantities of urine examined (by the sctacsauians by these authors were rarely more than 0°1 ¢.c., while my quantities © (Mohr method) by an independent professional chemist (Dr. Sirear), and since these authors give few or no details respecting the conduct of their experiments, especially from the point of view of the relative flows in the aorta and renal afferent veins—in other words, the shutting-off of the renal afferent vein perfusion may have, by restricting the outflow from the aorta, raised the pressure of the aortic fluid and so have increased the sara onfirmation). Many of the conclusions of Bainbridge, Collins and Menzies (4), as of other authors, are vitiated by the idea that the renal afferent veins supply the kidney tubules, and I demur entirely, e.g. to such assumptions as that when the aorta is perfused with boiled Ringer’s solution only the glomeruli are affected, and that the ‘My italics. The term ‘‘dilute’’ here refers to sodium chloride, the chief solid gusts ent. These authors aiso state that “ 3 urine obtained on a taneous arterial epee venous perfusion does not, so far as we could = cikiohias differ in amount from that obtained onan seein perfusion alone,” and Miss Cullis (16) comes to the same conclusion 118 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, : tubules can be killed (except at great venous pressure) when al afferent veins are perfused with 1/10,000 mercuric chloride. eee The facts supplied in the present Part II are then corroborative of the conclusions reached in Part I. For the most part they merely confirm, in the living animal], what has already been demonstrated by, or might be inferred from, the results of perfusion experiments. This confirmation however is, quite apart from the value of the new facts described, of considerable importance in view of the slur so often and undeservedly cast upon the results of perfusion experiments on the kidney. In Part III further confirmation by experiments on the living animal of the results obtained from the perfusion experiments of Part I will be supplied. PART IIT. REPETITION AND EXTENSION OF THE EXPERIMENTS OF GURWITSCH AND INTERPRETATION OF THE RESULTS. THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS. Previous Experiments. normal kidney, i.e. with the renal afferent vein intact. Gur- witsch wisely exposed the kidneys of the frogs he experiment- ed on from the dorsal aspect and ligatured on one side the “ reno- portal” vein and its confluent the dorso-lumbar (and in the female the small oviducal veins were cauterized with a red-hot needle), leaving these veins on the other side intact. Urine 2 . . * or urea solution was injected into the intestine at the time ligatured kidney 0°8-1:0 c.c. in two hours), and, so far as samples of urine so obtained. ferring until later consideration of Gurwitsch’s state- ments of results obtained by him on injecting dyes into the and quality of urine derived respectively from kidneys with ligatured renal afferent veins and from normal control 1922. ] * Renal Portal” System. 119 kidneys with veins intact, in specimens of the common Indian tog, ana tigrina—a very large species (some specimens weighing over twelve ounces—over 340 gms.—i.e. some ten In water was placed in the dish to enable the belly-skin to absorb what it required, and whenever possible I endeavoured to collect samples of urine of at least 1 c.c. Repetition of Gurwitsch’s Experiments. Only in four (out of fourteen attempted) experiments was 1 able to obtain sufficient quantities of urine for total nitrogen estimation. The results were not satisfactory, being contradic - tory for the most part, the only certain result being that the urine of the kidney with the ligatured renal afferent vein (the “ ligatured” kidney) is never stronger in nitrogen than that of the kidney retaining its venous supply (the ‘ normal”’ kidney). Improved Experiments to Determine the Amounts and Total Nitrogen Strengths of the Samples of Urine. ts sec kidneys 54 c.c. in the same time) but weaker in nitrogen (add- ! Full details of the mode of preparation of the frog are supplied in Appendix F, 2 Details of these and following experiments will be published in the Indian Journal of Medical Research: January, 1923. 120 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, ing together all the nitrogen strengths of the urine samples of the two kidneys respectively, the average strengths were in the ratio of 07: 1) than the urine of the normal kidney. The fact that the quantity ratio of 1:4: 1 was identical with the nitrogen strength ratio inverted (1:4: 1 = 1: 0°7) was doubtless a coincidence, but it proves that on the whole the amounts of total nitrogen excreted by the ligatured and “‘ normal’ kidney respectively were equal (the ligatured kidneys excreted a total of 0:033474 gm. and the ‘“‘ normal ”’ kidneys a total of 0°033750 gm.). In other words, the ligaturing of the renal afferent vein in each of these frogs makes practically no difference to the total amount of nitrogenous matter which these ligatured kidneys excrete as compared with the ‘‘ normai’’ kidneys, despite the fact that the ligatured kidneys are, on the current view, deprived of three-quarters of their total blood-supply by the ligaturing oj the renal afferent veins. These results, obtained in 15 out of 18 ex- periments must be regarded as the normal results, and the three abnormal results must be regarded as having been due to the preponderance of a particular factor, such as, e.g. the well- known alternation of activity of the kidneys (e.g. at the commencement of the experiment when secretion is most vigorous the ‘‘normal”’ kidney may have been at the “ flood tide” of its activity and, if the experiment was brief, may have therefore secreted more than the ligatured kidney for this reason) or extra active absorption of water by the belly skin (the influence of which will be appreciated when I have ex- plained the cause of the normal results). Further Experiments to Determine the Amounts and Chloride (as NaCl) Strengths of the Samples of Urine. Twenty-three experiments were attempted altogether (simi- lar to those already described save that the urine was estimat- ed for chloride by Dr. A. P. Sirear, instead of for total nitrogen), of which fourteen were successful. Out of these fourteen experiments, ten gave as their result that the urine of the ligatured kidneys was greater in amount (the total amount of urine secreted by the ligatured kidneys=18°15 c.c. and that by the “ normal ” kidneys= 10°65 c.c., the ratio therefore being 17 : 1) and contains a lower percentage of chloride as com- was obtained : in all the four experiments with abnormal results, water was in the dish beg The normal results confirm me in my denial that the results obtained by Bainbridge, Collins and Menzies (see Part IJ, p. are true. It will be remembered that these authors maintain that, with a venous supply, the kidney secretes urine weaker in 1922.) ** Renal Portal”? System. 12] chloride compared with the urine which is secreted when the venous supply is eliminated (the contention being that the venous supply enables the tubules to absorb more actively). The results just recorded, on the contrary, prove that a nate venous supply than usual adds chloride to the urine. The Interpretation of the Preceding Results Since it appears to be still a matter of dispute as to whether quantity of urine depends on the rate of flow or on the pressure of the blood or other perfusing fluid, and since I fact that the composition of the urine depends, other things equal, solely on the pressure of the blood supply, and since also the acceptance of the truth in these matters is all important not only for my explanation of the results described in this Part but for the appreciation of the arguments to be advanced in the next Part (Part IV) I have found it necessary, even in this Abstract of my Memoir, to quote the experiments described in Appendix G in full. The results of these experiments make it quite clear and beyond dispute (1) that quantity of urine is, is ss aera other se mar on shin pressure of ibe perfus- ing blood or fluid— the greater the pressure the less the percent- age of nitrogen and the greater the percentages of chloride and water, and vice versa. Thus quantity of urine is. other things equal, dependent on rate of blood flow and not on blood pressure, and quality of urine is, other things equal, dependent on blood pressure, and there is every reason to believe that all other glandular secretions conform to these rules (see Part IV). king these truths as granted, the explanation of the results of the preceding experiments is quite simple and cones Gane with that of all other results described in this Memoi n_ these recedin experiments, it has first to be rec ognined that the “normal” kidney retaining its venous supply not normal in the sense that its venous supply senemailia closely that of a kidney in a frog which has neither of its renal afferent veins ligatured. On the contrary, owing to the ligature of the renal afferent vein of the ligatured kidney. the venous blood from the legs has to return to the heart via abdominal) instead of three, and the remaining renal afferent vein Laeger bese apprec reciably more blood than usual. blood pressure in the renal afferent vein of the “ normal ” idney t is responsible for all three results rec corded in the preceding experiments, viz. the greater quantity of urine 122 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII secreted by the ligatured kidney and the greater percentages of — and chloride in the urine secreted by the ‘‘ normal’ idney. The excess of blood in the renal afferent vein of the ‘“‘normal”’ kidney raises the pressure in the renal venous mesh- work and this retards the flow of the arterial blood in the inter- tubular plexus,' and since quantity of urine is strictly depen- dent on the flow of this arterial blood, the quantity of urine secreted by the “normal” kidney is in consequence less than the quaiitiey of urine secreted by the ligatured kidney,” which is altogether devoid of a venous supply.* Again, the excess of stom ye in the renal afferent vein of the “normal” kidney ses the venous blood to mix to a slight extent with the seen blood in the intertubular plexus (vide Part I on the results of a slight excess of venous pressure in perfusion experiments) and this venous blood containing a greater percentage of nitrogen* than the arterial blood, the result is that the urine secreted by the “normal” kidne ey is slightly stronger in nitrogen than the urine of the ligatured kidney. It is true that the increase of pressure in the intertubular _ | This retardation of the arterial flow by see hm ol a pressure in the renal afferent vein I have proved on m perfusi \ ore d su Ppos intertubular ¢ he than the ligatured kidney can surpass the ligatured kidney so little in its powers of absorption of water from the glomerular filtrate as to reduce the output of urine only by i ——. If quan- tity of blood counts, the reduction in urine output should be ; e ascertained in a number of careful ——— that the ssi tng of the renal aed vein does not accelerate the flow of the arterial blood in the intertubular plexus and — oes not increase the preps of urine produced b kidne venous blood in these experimental frogs is schon richer in nitrogenous material relative to the arterial blood than n 0 eo the former P (see Part I,p. ) becomes artificially ; greater i proportion to B owing to the latter ssaliaa lowered in value by es removal of tissue in the prodaratien of the frog. 1922.) * Renal Portal’ System. 123 plexus will lower the percentage of nitrogen in the urine but this lowered strength in nitrogen is masked by the raised strength due to the admixture with the nitrogen-rich venous agit ie Part aE Tes regards the superior chloride strength the ‘‘normal”’ kidney urine, since this probably has no Sinceman with og mixture ae the venous with the arterial ood, it can only be due to the increased pressure of the arterial blood in the asectabulat plexus (Appendix G). The few exceptional results whic have described in connection with nitrogen and chloride strengths I believe to be due to the belly-skin absorption factor. Though the absorptive area of belly-skin ! presumably pours the absorbed water into the anterior abdominal vein, the blood in which does not supply the kidneys directly, yet ‘small ventral absorp- tive areas of skin on the thighs are drained by factors which open into the renal afferent veins and so do “ supply” the kidneys, and it is evident that if either water or salt is ab- sorbed by the skin, this would reach the kidneys sooner via the renal afferent veins than that absorbed by the belly skin. Marked absorption of water will dilute the venous blood and when this admixes with the arterial blood in the ‘‘ normal”’ kidney, the result may occasionally be that the ‘‘ normal”’ kidney secretes urine weaker in nitrogen and chloride than res, the frog’s skin behaves as a semi-permeable membrane which permits water to leave or enter according to the hyper- or hypo-tonicity of the solutions—hence water may occasionally enter in great quantity. On the other hand, according to these authors, ‘substances, like sodium chloride, dissolved in the water, are always absorbed, and in the case of those frogs which were placed in saline during the experiment, it is not surprising that the “‘normal’’ kidney always secreted urine stronger in chloride, because the venous blood probably contained more chloride than the arterial blood. These are the only explana- tions I can offer in order to account for the few exceptional results which I pbteia ed. That the above explanation of the main results is the true one is proved by the results of the perfusion experiments ic b ose which hb reted by nitrogen strength (‘‘ 30 fluid ’’) as the arterial fluid in its renal This area can be well demonstrated i in Rana tigrina by im mersing an animal for a few — in ammonia or acid solution, when it assnmes a di ees red colou 124 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, afferent vein. On the other hand, I showed that a very small excess of pressure (flow) in the renal afferent vein causes the 46 fluid ” to affect the urine secreted by the actual penetra- tion of the renal afferent vein fluid into the intertubular plexus. The explanations of the differences in the amounts of urine secreted and in chloride strengths are also, as I have already stated, in accordance with the results described in Appen- dix G. explanation which I have provided to account for the results I have described in this Part ITT. Repetiticn of Gurwitsch’s Experiments on the Excretion of e Respectively by K tdneys Deprived of their Renal Afferent Venous Supply and by «* Normal”? Kidneys in the same Frog. ; Gurwitsch states that in frogs operated on as usual from the dorsal surface, with dye injected into the blood, the urine of the ligatured kidney becomes only slightly coloured whereas into the arm muscles several] ¢.c. of a solution of 0:2 gm. of sodium sulphate dissolved in 100 c.c. of 0°5% saline as a diuretic, and later, when urine was being excreted, several ¢.c. of a deep-blue solution of indigo-carmine in 0-5%, saline, also i The ligatured kidney urine of the first experiment was, in intensity of coloration,' to that of the > 1. The samples of urine were i i I : Placed in narrow tubes of equal calibre and their depths adjusted until they were of the same codeceanl verti cally over white paper . : 1922.] ‘« Renal Portal’”’ System. 125 “normal” kidney as 5 : 6; in the second experiment as 4: and the third experiment as 45:6. These results saeeticken are similar to the chloride strength results and doubtless the same explanation applies to both—indigo-carmine dye apparently. acts like chloride, increase of fluid pressure increasing its percentage in the urine. Some Theoretical Considerations. In Parts I, II, HI I have proved conclusively both that the so-called “ renal portal ”’ system is devoid of function and that it is distinct and separate from the intertubular plexus. It previous paper (44) a raison d’étre for the ‘‘ renal portal system. This, stated briefly, is to e found in the confingd active and like all other capillarizations, penetrates the tissue of the organ “a be supplied for functional purposes, but in the case of the “‘ renal portal ” system the blood tissue is passive and itself bencinas: fenaetcated by the adjacent organ apparently for mechanical reasons only). The successive antero-posterior dévelopients of the kidney (pro-, meso-and meta-nephroi) relatively far apart anteriorly and near the median line posteriorly, and the kidneys thus apparently select the site of the veins because et | is most easy in this position— there is more s In the Mammals and Birds, on the other hand, with ‘iieeeta hind limbs, the limb veins need direct and easy access to the -caval, and the kidneys in such active e post animals become greatly enlarged relative to the rest of the body, ! and for both these reasons the development of << renal portal * system is impossible. We conclude then that the vascular supply of the kidney is identical throughout the Vertebrate series and that it is the arterial supply alone which is utilized for urine secretion. This . : Wt. of Body. } I have determined the ratio Wt. of both Kidney e — of all classes of Vertebrates. The prin’ fo will be published ae a _ 2 large numbers 126 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIUHBH, conclusion however, while it clears the ground of a misconcep- tion which has hitherto misled experimental effort and vitiated inferences drawn, does not by itself assist us much in connection with the larger problem as to whether the urine is rival modified theories of Ludwig and Bowman, since it is now useless to say, e.g. that a kidney with a ligatured renal afferent vein is thereby deprived of three-quarters of its total blood supply and that since its tubules evidently cannot excrete as much urine from the intertubular blood under these conditions as the normal kidney with a venous supply, therefore the excess of urine excreted by the ligatured kidney in the experiments described above is definitely in favour of the n (the artificial >? tular-filtration and tubule-absorption theory of Ludwig (the neo-Ludwig theory as I shall call it), so ably put forward by Cushny (17), the mere facts that dye, potassium ferrocyanide veins at normal pressure without appearing in the urine (Part I) prove nothing, because if the tubules are absorptive, the presence of these substances even in the intertubular plexus will not affect the urine filtered from the glomeruli, provided that we assume, as Cushny assumes, that the absorp- tive activity of the tubules is independent of the constitution of the blood supplying them. Now we have seen that this ' We can hardly calla theory which regards the glomerulus as a mere rete mirabile devoid of any filteri ; " . : an ; on the other hand, neo-Lu preferable : the expression ‘‘ modern” coined by Cushny for his modification of Ludwig’s theory. since the latter term begs the question. The eo-Ludwig theo - pie that of wig in assuming that the tubule cells absorb ke's re ool the Tubule one bc - ry. on the other hand, differs from that f Bowman itting one half of *si nism for the pecdaction of urine. Den ee eee ae 1922. ] ** Renal Portal’’ System. 127 assumption is untenable. We have shown repeatedly in Part I and in the present Part III that when the fluid in the intertubular plexus does become changed as the result of excess of fluid pressure in the renal venous meshwork, causing actual admixture of the venous blood or fluid with the arterial blood or fluid in the intertubular plexus proper, then the urine immediately indicates the admixture by an alteration in co result of such admixture between the blood in the renal venous meshwork and the lexus, because it is impossible, with such a Pentel high pressure in the glomoruli, for the venous fluid affect the blood or fluid contained in the glomeruli (Part I). Ohne of we of the blood or fluid in the intertubular plexus does then affect the composition of the urine secret and this i is proof that the tubules secrete the urine, because no in the venous blood but absent from the arterial blood (dye and ferrocyanide present only in the renal afferent vein supply e. ” That the tubules can and do secrete urine, has already injecting strong diuretics into e sacs) urin measurable quantity (ie. at least 0°5 ¢.c.) in 11 out of 22 experiments. This urine was found to contain “‘ most of the normal urinary constituents ’’—all that care tested for. Since in these experiments an arterial Sieh was absent, it was niles from the point of view of deciding whether the urme excreted was tubule or agecleely ived, to determine whether or not the blood supplied by the two renal afferent veins ever intruded so far into the intertubular capillary plexus as to reach any glomeruli. This necessity was apparently complied with when, at the end of each ut (from the aorta) with saline “‘ and then thoroughly injected with a saturated solution of soluble Prussian blue ” (presumably at a pressure not less than normal arterial pressure). This injection was made ty the authors apparently solely in order to be certain that all the branches of the renal arteries been severed by cautery and they did pier recognize the souaiiey of the dye reaching the glomeruli from the intertubular capillary plexus; nevertheless the injection served both purposes, provided that the dye was injected at a pressure not less than the normal arterial pressure. In 6 out 128 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, > . of the 11 successful experiments, the authors expressly state tnat ‘‘no glomeruli were injected” and that the tubule probable that this was due to influx from the intertubular capillary plexus rather than to some twigs of the renal arteries having remained uncauterized, ' since we have seen that Nusshaum’s and Beddard’s statement that ‘“‘it is impossible to inject the glomeruli from the renal-portal vein ”’ is untrue, provided that the pressure in the vein be sufficient. These experiments on the whole therefore (and possibly those of Nussbaum (30) and Halsey (21) who similarly obtained urine from frogs with cut-out renal arteries, after injecting diuretics directly into the blood—which, as Cushny points out, alone secrete the urine, the function of the glomeruli being altogether different (see Part IV). ; Bainbridge, Menzies and Collins (5) maintain, however, despite the conclusive evidence to the contrary provided by the control dye injections of Bainbridge and Beddard, that urine formed by perfusion through the renal afferent veins, the arteries being ligatured, is always produced by the fluid perfused reaching the glomeruli, because whenever, in their experiments, urine was secreted as the result of very high pressure in the perfusion fluid, subsequent injection of Berlin blue always result- ed in the dye being found in the glomeruli, whereas when, wit low pressure, urine was not secreted, few or no glomeruli were found to contain the dye. This, I may remark without dis- respect to these authors, is an admirable practical illustration ! Each operation however was done from the ventral side, when it is not so easy to be certain that every arterial twig has been severed as it 18 in a dorsal operation. 1922.] “ Renal Portal’ System. 129 two dsaras were apparently the only pressures emplo these authors, and it is evident that in order to onablidh: their conclusion tcieatie: the possibility of perfusing with a pressure of intermediate intensity which might have resulted in urine secretion without the glomeruli becoming injected should not have been excluded. In other words, it is to me certain that the not evident to Bainbridge, Menzies and Collins because they did not recognize the separateness of the intertubular plexus from the renal venous meshw: he proof that this interpretation of the results of Bain- bridge, Menzies and Collins is the correct one is to be found in the results of five of my own experiments on dye injection already briefly referred to in Part I . In these experi- ments the dye was injected via one renal afferent vein at a pressure of not more than 3 or 4 ems. above normal, the arterial circulation being in full force, and I obtained distinctly blue urine, xamining sections of these kidneys, dye was always absent from the glomerular capillaries and capsules though present in some of the intertubular capillaries, in the renal ven- ous meshwork and in tubule lumina. These results prove con- clusively that the tubules secreted the dye, and are much more reliable than the experiments of Bainbri sage eae and Collins, to when iter orig six ot thes experiments similar to ore of Bainbridge, Menzies and Collins and found, as these authors say, that almost invariably, when urine was Ae y a few It is also probable that when the narrow sinusoids or rather — of < intertubular plexus are empty ae probably contracted, it uch more for open ll th oh thea | it does to cause vaihen fluid to penetrate into them when y ope Hyrtl’s description (26) of the mech openings of the intertubular plexus capillaries into — large channels of the renal venous meshwork must be borne in min 130 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, glomeruli (a very small percentage of the total number) showed traces of the dye. PART IV. THE TUBULES VERSUS THE ENCAPSULATED GLOMERULI—A BRIEF CONSIDERATION OF THE PROBABLE FUNCTIONS OF THESE TWO PARTS OF THE VERTEBRATE KIDNEY. CONTENTS. other Perfusing Fluid (Volume x Rate of Flow) traversing the Inter ubular Plexus and not on Fluid Pressure in the Glo- meruli. (2) Reversal of the Current of Perfusing Fluid through the Kidney. (3) The Quality of the Urine is dependent on Fluid Pressure. the Pressure in the Arterial Fluid. (5) The Increase and Decrease of Urine due to the Increase and ecrease of the Osmotic Pressure of the Fluid traversing the Renal Afferent Veins. Alternative Hypotheses to account for the Enclosure of the Glome- : : rulus in the Capsule. A Consideration of some other Arguments used in support of the neo-Ludwig Theory. In Parts I-III of this Memoir it has been necessary on several occasions to refer to current theories concerning the mode of function of the kidney, since our interpretation of the Bowman-Heidenhain theory, the second the neo-Ludwig theory (the “ modern theory ” of Cushny, 17), and the third that which tubule are of essentially the same order (17, pp. 40, 56) 1s : : development of “this very special apparatus,” the capsule with its glomerulus? There remain then the neo-Ludwig theory, which as is well known, assumes filtration through the 1922. ] ‘** Renal Portal’? System. 131 the filtrate most required to be retained by the body——,and the Tubule cum Rete theory, which is the very antithesis of the neo-Ludwig theory in that it assumes that all the constituents of the urine are secreted Ay the tubules.! The function of the glomerulus, according to the Tubule cum Rete preenies is that which i is probably to be attributed to most or all other forms of retia mirabilia, viz. the reduction of the arterial pressure (since high blood pressure in the intertubular plexus means excessive loss of malt and deficient elimination of nitrogen, i.e. the reversal of the result demanded by the body) and the retardation ( => flow in the intertubular plexus involving un- due loss of water from the body) and making continuous of the iieial flow, while maintaining a large volume of blood. e way in whi ch the glomerulus produces these effects will be explained below, and suggestions will also be offered in expla- nation of the well-known but little understood fact that the glomerulus, unlike most other retia mirabilia, becomes en- capsule For the sake of brevity I shall not attempt to discuss the relative values of these rival theories from every point of view : all that I shall undertake is to state certain facts, mostly de- rived from my own work, which I believe to be fatal to the neo- Ludwig theory, to reconsider some pat facts which are either for or against this theory, and t er certain objections which have been or siabauiy will net levelled again the theory which I believe to be the true one. Some Facts subversive of the see Theory oj Kidney Secretion {1) Quantity of Urine is dependent _— the Quantity of Blood or other Per- fusing Fluid A Volume x "Rate 0 of Flow ) traversing the Intertubular Plexus luid Pressure in the eruli. If the ae walls of the glomerulus and the capsule wall filter off only the non-colloid constituents of blood, then both blood pressure and blood flow must be important factors in filtration, but in perfusion experiments in which the whole of the circulating fluid is filterable, fluid pressure can be the only factor concerned. If glo merular filtration be a fac t, quanti- ty of urine in perfusion peg erat 2 s will. other things equal, he solely determined by fluid pressure in the glomerular capillaries, and rate of flow of ihe fluid will be of no account. This conclu- sion is directly contradicted by the facts which prove beyond doubt that in perfusion experiments quantity nd at eo is, so things equal, directly dependent, not on rate of volume of the perfusing fluid alone, but on both eBoy ery te The only authors known to me who have previously advocated this hear are Lamy and Mayer (28). 132 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, of flow, i.e. on the quantity of fluid which flows through a given length of capillary in & given = d has no connection with fluid pressure! save in so far as pressure encreases rate of flow. In instore G (Part II) I have given the results of nine per- ments (six described in some detail and three radnskicived). in proof of the statement that quantity of urine depends on rate of flow of the perfusing fluid and not on fluid pressure. In Exp. Ser. A. I. P. increase of pressure occurs in the aorta and this produces an increase of rate of flow in the intertubular plexus, and the increased rate of production of urine must be due to one of these, though even here there is more proportionality between the initial increases of rates of flow and the increased quantities of urine than — is i these latter and the increases of pressure. In t xp. P.C.I.P. the increase of pressure occurs in the post- oral and this pressure must to a large extent be transmitted up the peti tubular plexus to the glomeruli, so that in this series we agai obtain increase of pressure in the glomeruli but selena with a decreased rate of flow in the intertubular plexus. Since in this series the quantities of urine produced show no relation whatever to the increase of pressure, it follows that the former must be a consequence of the rates of flow, since, like these latter, they fluctuate about a common level. Thus in the A.I.P. series increased output of urine may be correlat- ed either with increase of pressure or increased rate of flow; in the P.C.I.P. series, on the other hand, the output of urine is evidently correlated with the rate of flow, and, we may therefore conelade, is also correlated with rate of flow in the series A.I.P. ? usa (19), among others, has come to identical cone 1 De So regarding | ithe relations between quanti ty of urine and rate of blood flow an onducted on the living ina 2 I give the data in st ag Beckie A.LP. and P.C.1.P. for comparison. Series A.I.P. Iner of Aortic SraccesaaS nc cms., 30 ems., 40 ems. foo a Rate of Flow = ii, 1) 17°3 ¢.c.—50 c.c.—115 c.c. (Amounts perfused per Sars 2 it - ¢.¢c.—82 cc; poor | 30 minutes) Rap: 3) 1s 7 c.c.—47 Increase of Urine Output res ‘D) 08 too c.c.—1°25 ¢.c. (Amounts secreted in (Exp. 2) 0:18 c.c.—0° 85 c.c.—1°2 ¢.c- 30 minutes) (Exp. 3) 0°38 c.c.—0 7.6 .c.— 0°05 poi 2) 0¢ em.—5 ems. —T-5 ¢ Rates of Flow (Exp. 1) 76 c.c.—94 ¢.€ —115 ¢.c.—I31 ¢.¢ eS iy yeas aril xt eee chee ay ernest Maer aR eg eet IG nee 1922.] * Renal Portal’’ System. 133 Cushny suggests that one reason why, when pressure in the glomerular capillaries is raised by increased resistance in the post-caval, the output of urine is not increased (when in living animals the arterial flow is retarded by constriction of the renal vein the urine decreases in quantity) is because the capsular epithelium becomes asphyxiated by the retardation of the blood flow, and he adds that the capsule epithelium ‘responds rapidly” to such asphyxia. ‘To this suggestion I may reply that, as shown by the well-known examples of the frog’s lung and the abdominal skin of the frog, the more mori- bund an epithelium the more easily it filters, and Cushny himself (p. 101) refers to Sollmann’s demonstration that the “dead” kidney can produce a plentiful “exudate”? when the pressure of the perfusion fluid is raised ; moreover there is no evidence tion of the colloids remaining in the blood and therefore to an increase of the osmotic resistance offered by these colloids to further separation from the non-colloids, but this given such a pressure producing swollen veins, the tubules cannot only secrete urine, but can secrete urine at a much greater rate than when the veins are not swollen, provided (Amounts perfused per (Exp. 2) 56°5 c.c.—71 c.c.—66 c.c. 30 minutes) (Exp. 3) 35°5 c.c.—42°5 C.c. —102 ¢.c.—100 c.c. Rate of Urine Output =(Exp. 1) 0°87 c.c.—1-4 (Amounts secreted in c.c,—0'5 c.c.—0°33 c.c. 30 minutes) (Exp. 2) 0°72 c.c.—1°4 e c.-—1°25 c.c. - (Exp. 3) 0°7 c.c.—0°75 ¢.c —0°41 ¢.c.—0°36 c.c. (Exp. 4) 0°75 c.c.—0°62 e.c.—0°55 c.c.—0°62 e.c. 134 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, that (in the total absence of diuretics) the fluid in the swollen veins flows. This condition of things can be brought about by perfusing the kidney in the reverse direction to the normal, ie. through the renal vein or veins to the artery or arteries instead of vice versa. I performed five such experiments on the frog and four on the rabbit, the results of which are given in Appendix H, and they provide a sufficient disproof of the suggestion put forward by Ludwig, and, at the same time, and in conjunction with the results of Appendix G (Part ITT), a sufficient demonstration of the truth of the view that quanti -ty of urine is, other things equal, dependent on rate of flow and volume (i.e. on the flow) of the perfusing fluid, and that hydrostatic pressure in the glomerulus (except in so far as if is a cause of flow) and absorption in the tubules have nothing to o with urine production. Some rate of flow is, under most conditions,! absolutely essential for secretion, but the amount of secretion will be small or even nil unless there is also volume (well shown when, the renal nerves being stimulated, the renal capillaries contract and the urine output is diminished, though the blood pressure remains unaltered and the rate of low must be increased). Additional confirmation of this view is afforded by the familiar fact that in both the salivary gland (Starling, 40, p. 668) and the liver (Schafer’s “‘ Text-book of Physiology,” Vol. I, p. 565) blood flow is the chief factor concerned in quantity of secretion, and not blood pressure, and the same fact doubt- less holds for the pancreas (27) and all other glands. In all these glands increased output of secretion? always, other conditions being the same, follows dilatation of the gland capillaries, and though it is sometimes assumed that this dilatation is solely due to a local increase of blood pressure (even when, as in the case of the kidney with the splanchnic nerve branch cut, the pressure in the artery remains constant) yet it seems quite as feasible to assume that the dilatation 1s due to relaxation of the capillary walls. the resulting lowering of resistance facilitating inflow of blood and thus producing that volume of blood which is so essential to secretion, even though the rate of flow be slightly reduced. gain, the results of the experiments described in Appen- _! Urine can also be produced from practically stationary bleod oF fluid in the intertubular plexus. provided that there be a sufficient volume of blood or fluid and that this contains sufficiently strorg diuret- les, 1.e. diuretics can take the place of flow. . __® As also increased absorption in the gut or placenta, or, as in in flammation absorption of toxic or useless matter, and all other forms of blood activity. ei Si seat Sey isa iieranaee ee omer ty om, eb Ses ser ity ube 1922. ] ‘“* Renal Portal”’ System. 135 (though the arterial “ head of fluid ”’ pressure remains con- stant) and cause increased output of urine, provide still fur- ther proof of the statement that fluid pressure in the glome- rulus is not concerned with the production of quantity of urine Si ince the results of experiments dealing with filtration through animal membranes prove that the quantity of filtrate ‘rises with the pressure (though in lower ratio in most cases) and that with a fluid devoid of unfiltera ble constituents, rate It may however be objected that Gltration by the midney, ; i.e. the production of urine more or less identical in composi tion with the perfusing fluid, or at least the portion of it cathe. ed, undoubtedly does occur under certain conditions, as e.g. Ww quantities as to render mae insignificant the colloid content of the blood, or when Ringer’s fluid or simple saline is perfused through the kidneys at a certain pressure, but to admit this is a that this filtration, like all other forms of kidney pBke ea occurs through the walls of the tubules, which, un peculiar conditions, fail to modify the composition of the per- fusing fluid. Filtration in the dead kidney certainly occurs through the tubule walls, as may be seen when a kidney is first perfused via the artery with say chromic or picric acid fixative (the filtrate exuding from the ureter being small in quantity and soon ceasing) and afterwards perfused in the reverse direc- tion via the renal vein (when the filtrate is large in quantity and continues for along. time), and if this be the case in the dead kidney. what reason is there for Tia daa that it is not the tubules which filter when the same results are ica in & similar experiment with saline on a living kidney ? ! It has been argued that the ee that the dead kidne: ney can pass fluid from the vessels into the tubules is ee thatthe *‘ urine ”’ of ordinary saline — usion wi penn one oa mere filtrate, and nota true secretion. But, a cording to o Cus me eo t 1 ict nas d urine i- itself only a filtrate (modified by ption) and rt ithe neo-Ludwig the result f perfus ion experiments on that score, What sie have. failed to ecognize is that the — comes from the tubules and not the sna The chief point to notice however is that what is sole a aap (i.e. passage of substances without con- centration) does occur under abnormal conditions even in the living organism (as when the blood con raged: be great excess of water) ‘and. af = dead kidney is proved to filter the living kidney almost certainly does likewise. To argue that the anid y the ureter in saline perfusion secretion n the sense that ast a urine is, is to suppose that the kidney is 136 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVI, (2) Reversal of the Current of ne fluid through the Kidney. In nine experiments (five on the frog and four on the rabbit—vide Appendix H) | sareitty compared the results of perfusing the kidney via the renal arteries (the ordinary direct current) and perfusing in the reverse direction, i.e. in at the renal veins and out by the renal arteries. In the case of the frog I perfused 0°6% saline plus 0°05% urea at 24 cms. pres- sure at room temperature first through the aorta (the systemic and iliac arteries and the renal afferent veins being ligatured) and then through the post- are (the renal arteries being cut) at the same pressure. In the case of the rabbit I perfused 0°9% saline plus 100 c.c. fresh human urine added to each 2,000 c.c. of the saline at 100 cms (water) pressure at about blood tempera - ture first through the renal arteries of both kidneys and then through the renal vein of one kidney, the other kidney continuing as before as acontrol. In the first frog experiment the reverse current (R.C.) gave eight times the amount of urine obtained by the ordinary direct current (D.C.) in coat same time and of a nitro- gen strength of 0-000140 gm. per 1 c.c. as compared with the 0:000193 gm. of the direct current (the sectiaua fluid was of a nitrogen strength of 0-000153 gm. ). In the second frog experi- ment R.C. gave 8°5 times more urine than D.C. the R.C. urine nitrogen strength being 0-000153 gm. and_ chloride (as NaCl) strength being 0:006154 gm., as compared with the D.C. urine nitrogen strength of 0- 000215 gm. and chloride strength of 0°005406 gm. Hence, as usual, the increased pressure in wholly Bea ae to the nature of the fluid aid perfusing its a. or capillaries. t this is mS When the blood in a living animal con- cess ps tc the first thing - kidney does is to ‘get rid of “the depends upon no such special chemical m s and its activity xe st aa Biotic by the nate of the i heen: fuid. which, to it, is sufficient indication of the needs of the body. To zie emn saline perfusion experiments on the mammal’s kidney, e.g. on the ground that it is necessarily dead under these conditions is an argument only rendered possible by the fact that cs verybody’s mind is obsessed by the idea of Fe ates r filtration. Glandular epithelium in general (including that of the tubules) is pyres develo oped when secretion occurs (ie. when the substances extracted from the blood a differ in con- centration from those in the blood, and perhaps also when only a selec yo is made) but this does not inhibit, glandular epithelium playing more t less the part of a filter when conditions demand that it should. 1922. | ** Renal Portal”? System. 137 the intertubular plexus diminishes the nitrogen strength and in- creases the chloride strength of theurine. Similar results were obtained in three other similar experiments. In the first rabbit experiment,'! with D.C. through both kidneys, the left kidney secretvd 5-0 c.c. urine in 30 minutes of 0:00054 gm. nitrogen strength, and the right kidney 2°6 c.c, urine of 6-000373 gm. nitrogen strength. The R.C. through the right kidney produced in 28 minutes 31°8 c.c. urine, while in the same time 1).C. through the left kidney produced 4°75 c.c. urine, i.e. R.C. produced 6°6 times as much urine in the same time. The R.C, urine (two samples) was 0.000453 gm. and 0:000546 gm. nitrogen strength while the D.C. left kidney simultaneously secreted urine 0-000693 gm. nitrogen strength. In the second experiment R.C. produced 5:6 times as much urine as D.C. and similar results were obtained in the two other similar ex peri- ments. The significance of these results in connection with the intertubular capillaries. Now in these reverse current experi- ments, the fluid pressure in the glomeruli, when the current is reversed, is less than that during arterial perfusion because the fluid has first to overcome the resistance offered by the inter- intertubular capillaries during the reverse current contain a vastly greater volume of fluid than they do during the arterial perfusion and they should therefore be more activel absorp- tive, and on this account also a less proportion of urine should be secreted during the reverse current. But we have seen ! Both kidneys had had all nerve connections severed so that this factor, as regards quantity of wine, was absent. All the renal nerves in the frog experi ts, on the other hand, were left intact. nother objection which may urged against these experiments on the rabbit is that ‘* failure of absorption from overflooding is espscial- ly liable to oceur in the rabbit in which absorption is peculiarly ineffec tive at the best” (17, p 59). Even allowing for this factor, the excretion of the vein-perfused kidney in these experiments should still have been ins of more owing to the decreased pressure in the glomeruli, but tes an experiment on the rabbit in which, during sulphate ed at the rate of 5 c.c. per minute, ven a is rate, according to Cushny, the tubules absorbed 40%of the water passing through the kid- neys, i.e. t idneys excreted 0°26% of sulphate while the serum only contained 0°15%, so that in my experiments absorption should certainly have occurred on the neo-Ludwig view. 138 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S8., XVIII, that the reverse current produces a volume of urine five to eight times as great as that produced by the direct current, and the facts. I venture to prophesy that when this experiment is repeated on the living animal, i.e. with blood as the medium, identical results will be obtained. ' (3) The ee of the Urine is dependent on Fluid Pressure. e experiments recorded in Appendix G (Part IT]) afford ates proof of the statement that i increase of fluid pressure versa—a statement which is also confirmed by the results of many other experiments. Now supporters of the neo-Ludwig view explain the nitrogen-weakness and chloride- strength of the urine obtained by increase of blood pressure in the aorta (hence weaker nitrogen) and chloride (hence stronger chloride), despite the fact that increase of aortic blood pressure implies a correspondingly increased blood flow through the intertubular aie supplying the tubules. If we adopt this explanation! r the excess of urine produced by aortic pressure, when pres- sure in the intertubular plexus is relatively low, and the glo- post-caval vein, when pressure in the intertubular plosae is relatively high* and the glomerular filtrate scanty, ? should, according to the line of argument assumed in this explanation, be characterized by great strength of nitrogen and paucity in chloride. But the experimental results recorded in Exp. Ser. the case—the urine of the post-caval pressure experiments is qualitatively identical with that of the aortic pressure experi- ments, being like it weak in nitrogen and none in fie ‘ 1 The present writer of course surplalite the nitrogen deficit (and chlo- ride excess) of the urine of this pressure diuresis as being due the excessive excretion of whee’ bar salt) by the kidney tubules, cust aa as the 2 The cuit illaries being eg swollen, i.e. in the same — as _ ne “ yrs illi when intestinal a absorption is a = ctive 1922] ** Renal Portal”? System. 139 In other words, increase of pressure, whether it arises in the aorta or the post-caval, always has the same effect on the urine.' This easily demonstrable fact proves conclusively “that (1) absorption in the tubule does not take place; that (2) glome- rular filtration must, on this account alone, be deemed a myth ; and (3) that therefore the whole of the urine is excreted by the tubules—the only possibility left. (4) The Secretion of eo bseioy solely is esent or present in Excess in the a fen boson Vei rh the Frog when the Fluid Pressure — A fferent V eins t8 sinadion relative to the ressure in the Arterial Fluid. As I have nae in Part I, it is possible with correct relative flows in the renal afferent veins and the renal arteries to perfuse indigo-carmine dye, potassium ferrocyanide and other substances through the renal afferent veins without these substances appearing in the urine, but if the renal afferent vein p e pressure (relative to the pressure in the pa adaaet ad come these substances at once begin to appear in the urine. We hav also seen in Part II] that the slight excess of Asis in the renal afferent vein of one kidney due to the ligaturing of the other renal afferent vein is also sufficient to cause the nitrogen - richer venous blood to produce urine stronger in nitrogen. Since the pressure in the glomeruli cannot be much less than 29 ems. and if we assume that the pressure in the renal venous meshwork and intertubular plexus is as much as 10 cms., it is impossible to suppose that a rise of pressure in the renal venous meshwork and intertubular plexus of 1-3 ems, is sufficient to force the venous blood into the glomeruli (and so to cause the dye, ferrocyanide and excess of nitrogen to be filtered from the glomeruli) in view of the fact that the patch Reade tion remains in full force and at a pressure at least s. (of per! higher than that in the intertubular vateth oer if his be an impossible supposition, the only alternative is to peer that the tubules secrete the urine. I can conceive of no possible answer to this argument (more iad stated on (12) state ans when the ureter is slightly constricted the urine excreted also contains excess of water (less nitrogen) and salt, but this secretion urine resulting is as rich in nitrogen as normal urine, and this is of co due to the pressure (the arterial blood supply being esse) in the ner tubular capillaries being as low as in the normal kidne 140 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, p. 15 Part 1) by supporters of the neo-Ludwig theory—it appears to me to be conclusive by itself. (5) The Increase and Decrease of Urine due to the Increase and Decrease of the Osmotic Pressure of the Fluid traversing ins. nal Afferent Veins to hasten the flow of the arterial fluid through them, because the glomeruli are shielded not only by the inner and outer capsular walls but also, according to the neo-Ludwig view, by a film of filtrate. It is also inconceivable that, with correct only alternative then is to assume that the high osmotic pressure of the renal afferent vein fluid in some way causes the intertubular plexus capillaries to dilate, and the additional more cannot possibly be held to account for the facts Once more I may say that it appears to me to be impossible for sup- Porters of the neo-Ludwig view to explain these facts in accord- ance with that view. 1922.] ‘** Renal Portal”? System. 141 Since in my opinion the evidence submitted under the preceding five headings constitutes absolute proof of the truth of the Tubule cum Rete theory, I do not propose to offer further original evidence nor to call to mind the large volume of other evidence which has already been advanced by previous investigators Alternative Hypotheses to account for the Enclosure of the Glomerulus in the Capsule, From the standpoint of zoo-physiology there is but little need to adduce evidence in support of the assertion that, while the large diameter and short length of the renal artery allows a large volume of blood to supply the kidney at high pressure and rapid rate of flow, the function of the glomerulus is to reduce this pressure and retard this rate of flow to appropriate values, while maintaining a volume of blood which is relatively large compared with that supplied to other glands. Glands far removed from a seat of high pressure are usually intermittent in action and when functional depend for a temporarily in- creased volume of blood on local vaso-dilatation, the length of artery separating them from the aorta ensuring low pressure and slow rate of flow. But the kidney, on the other hand, is continually and intensely active and thus needs a constant large volume of blood in its vessels and this can best be secured by proximity to the aorta provided that it is shielded against t i ) proximity involves. The glomeruli are thus to be regarded as the physiological equivalents of the length of artery which separates most glands from the seat of maximum pressure and this is the normal function of most kinds of known retia mirabilia, of which the glomerulus is but one example. In short the glomeru lus is the equivalent of a wateriall in the course of a large river near its mouth, the fall obliterating or minimizing the ‘‘ pressure head ”’ and the rate of flow, while maintaining arteries which s supply other glands are comparable to small tributaries of the river near its source in w ich the volume of water is small and the “‘ pressure head ”’ and rate of flow not necessarily very large. In both cases the pressure and rate of flow may be about the same, but the volume of water at the base of the fall is enormously greater than the volume of water in a tributary, and the latter can only be increased in the tributary i the widening of the bed to form a pool. e glomerulus differs from ail other known retia shakes in that it becomes encapsulated in a glandular tube, and it is this feature alone which, not unnaturally has origi- nated the idea of the blood in the ‘glomerular capillaries part- ing with a portion of its water and some other constituents to 142° Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, regarded as performing the function of excretion in precisely the same way as the urinary tubules of Leeches or Arthropods. Now, quite apart from the experimental facts which disprove the idea of glomerular filtration, there exist other considera- coele or cavity con taining water which receives excretory matter and is drained off to the exterior? either by the nephrostomes to be the precursors of a haemocoele (eg. the parenchymal spaces of Helminthes and Nemertines and the blastocuele of Rotifers. Entoproct Polyzoa and many larvae) or are haemo- ceoles (e.g. the perivisceral sinuses of Arthropods) are provided respectively with nephridia with closed inner extremities provi- ded with flame-cells® and with renal tubes also closed inter- nally and devoid of flame cells ;+ that is to say, the fluid in nephrostomes or any other outlets. Further, it is extremely significant that when the coelom, drained in most animals by nephridia with nephrostomes, becomes secondarily connected Or the urinary tubules of Loph saa oo have no glomeruli in conne obranch fishes, which, according to . B ith them. y friend wg assistant in Allahabad, Dr. Karm Narain Bahl, has ( : : of t ) conserving the water which would otherwise be lost by drainage of cuelomic fluid 1s good evidence that the capillary pl xus round the nephridial tubules has in earthworms nothing to do with absorption. Seealso the preceding : P = nf. Uame-cell”’ flagella of course play the part of the collar-cell flagella of Sponges, which is to drive fluid in the required direction mag 3 he a ] cilia in the Malpighian capsules of the frog and other lower Vertebrates) sta i oO ee Ee ee ee ie 1922.) ** Renal Portal”’ System. 143 with the blood system, thus assuming the function of a lymph which the restricted coelomic spaves have become secondarily continuous with the blood channels, and once in the lower Vertebrata, the kidney nephrostomes all disappearing when the coelom assumes the functions of a tit space (9). It is also significant that the lymph never has any communication with any space of whatever kind until this is completely shut off from the external world, instances of which, in addition to the coelom already named, are the brain-cavity and the cavities of the eye-ball and auditory sac ; also that in every part of the body at which the lymph does, on behalf of the organism part with water and at $5 the outside or a _ continuous wit the outside, the cells concerned are, with one exception! under strict nervous control, It follows then that if glomeru- lar filtration be a fact, it is the unique instance in the entire animal kingdom of blood freely (very pitins filtering off into a space continuous with the outside of the Another consideration is the very fondle fact that no other capillaries in the body are known to filter off the non- colloidal constituents of blood, leaving the colloids behind: even the most watery kind of lymph? contains 2% of proteids. Moreover one of the conditions of lvmph formation is the “ chemical ”’ influence exerted by the tissues traversed by the blood—an influence entirely absent in the case of the glomerular. capillaries: nor are the liver or limb ies under the necessity of forcing their exudate through any membrane resembling that ef the capsule—many such cr indeed effectually prevent fiyeeion (e.g. the lining epithelium of the frog’s lung, the membrane of Descemet covering the cornea. the lining oop ee of dinnd ducts and in all probability the outer wall of the glomerular capsule itself). Again, the development of such special structures as encap- sulated glomeruli —_— to produce water and salts is so ig superfluous when we remember that the lungs and in, the salivary pose the pancreas and the liver can all ! The one exception is the liver, and in this case the cepa pe is not et seo — rial blood under high pressure but from v ood w pressure, and, mr - the 1 cee the quantity of Means is e pr as rr the contained ee of nce is from £35 8% Pro: essor Bayliss has however referred me to the paper by Scott (Jour. Physio- logy Vol. 50, 1915, p. 15.) in lara “it is “topes that fluid devoid of colloids, can re-enter the capillaries from the tissues and it would therefore appear to be possible for fluid, devoid of eullnide. to leave the cariilanien. 144 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |N.S., XVIII, eliminate water (and the salts) in equal or greater quantities in the absence of these structures. If it be argued that the water is required to “ flush” the tubules (5 or 6 cms. in length, 13) either by setting up a “ pressure head ”’ (11) or by acting as a pump, the needlessness of the glomeruli to effect this object is evident when we call to mind the facts that the semi-solid non- motile semen can travel down 50 cms. of a testis tubule, the narrow passage of the rete testis and some 600 cms. of coiled epididymis duct without any such aid. and that bile traverses channels fully as narrow as and much longer than those of the renal tubules in order to reach the gall bladder. Finally, there is the possibility of alternative explanations of the raison d’étre of the encapsulated glomerulus, and if there be any evidence in support of these, then, in view of the objec- tions to the current explanations and indeed their final dis- proof, there is good reason for accepting any one or more of them as working hypotheses. 1 propose to offer three explana- tions, cach non-contradictory of and to some extent supplemen - tary to the others, for which I think there is much to be said. The first explanation is based on the fact that most or all thin- illari ymph and since the glomerular capil- laries are known to be ‘extremely thin’? and the blood suppose that they exude lymph or would if they could, despite the absence of a ‘“‘chemical’’ factor. Now if the glomeruli merely lay between the tubules, adjacent to but not in contact with them, this lymph would freely escape from the glomeruli into the intertubular spaces in such quantity as to lead to an enormous excessive production of urine and so to defeat the main purpose of the glomeruli, which, as we have seen, is to limit the output of water and salt while ensuring the due elimination of nitrogenous matter. To obviate this escape of lymph, the glomeruli become encapsulated, or, in other words. completely surrounded by a thin non-permeable ! portion of the tubule wall which effectually returns the exuded lymph to the glomerular capillaries (or rather prevents its exudation) and so maintains - the distended condition of the tubular capillaries which is so es- sential to secretion. The inner capsule wall, according to this view, is then for the purpose of preventing that very exudation a peculiar form of which many physiologists assume to oceur-* Sei ioane ane —_—— 1 If it be urged that it is difficult to imagine one part of the tubule wall being impermeable while the remainder is remarkable for its permeability, the anal gous case of the physoclist gas bladder may be quite impermeable to the cont B, smal the ‘* oval freely permits the oxygen to pass through into the blood. 2 ave not yet had a portunity of meeting with a detailed description of the exact way in which the encapsuluted supposed to ‘‘ filter.”” To me it is difficult to imagine that filtration only 1922.) ‘ Renal Portal”’ System. 145 substances. This will be more easily realized when it is remembered that high blood pressure, from the standpoint of economical excretion, is a most unfavourable condition, since it involves an excessive loss of water and salt, which are the substances most necessary to be conserved, and a deficient elimination of the substances (¢.g. urea) which most require to be eliminated (Appendix G, Part III). It is therefore evident that it may be necessary for the kidney to possess, on behalf of the organism. an automatic mechanism for regulating the e other hand, if it be assumed that the capillaries exude lymph into the in- tercapillary spaces of the glomerulus and that the inner capsule membrane lets the water and salts through while retaining the colloids, it is not easy aA rat. M4 4 $. ' z co @ ct = @ 5 o 3 © $c oe @ 4") 5 is} a Q. ° 3 ] o & S e come to the capillaries. The only way out of the difficulty is to assume that colloid matter does not leave the capillaries (see footnute 2 on p 59) ! In e ti other words, just as the tissues are relieved from receivin ma, ae of their waste matter (which after all attracts the lymph with food and oxygen) but of other substances useful to them by the mediation of some other organ. 146 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, may not serve for moderate control of the excretion, since, as is well known, the kidney can function efficiently when all its nerve connections are severed; moreover, itis equally well known that only strong stimulation of the splanchnic contracts the renal capillaries and this by abolishing or seriously diminish- ing the excretion would not remedy matters; on the other hand, weak stimulation allows the few dilator fibres to have effect and matic regulation of the blood supply in relation to the secre- tion pressure—the latter can never much exceed the former because the act of doing so reduces the latter by diminishing the blood supply. In short this conceivable réle of the encapsulated glomeruli somewhat resembles the regulation of temperature employed in connection with embedding baths and incubators—the temperature (=urine) becomes excessive, eXx- pands the mercury (=urine in the capsule) and the expan- sion of the mercury diminishes the temperature by cutting down the gas supply (= blood). : There is some evidence that this suggested réle of the ! As Brodie(11) says, ‘* \ pressure within Bowman's capsule greater than the blood pressure would at once lead to the closure of the glome- rular lo ” The expansion of the tubules will first compress the adjacent intertubular capillaries and therefore cause the glomeruli to swell, but the limit to the distension of the tubules s soon reached and consequently to the compression of the tubular nephritis and by the exp2rimonts of Bro lis and Mackenzia (13), there is no limit - the compression of the glomeruli when the output of the urine * A i ‘ ae 1922.] ** Renal Portal” System. 147 encapsulated glomerule occurs in actuality. In the experi- ments referred toonp 5 ,in which | first perfused saline plus urea via the renal arteries in the frog and obtained a profuse secretion and then filled the perfusion bottle with chromic acid fixative, so fixing the tissues of the kidney in the act of vigorous secretion, | found, on subsequently macerating and teasing up the kidney (in Marcace/’s fluid = equal parts of nitric aci(l, glycerine and water) that in all cases the glomeruli com- certain value, the urine becomes forced back into the capsule and the glomerulus becomes contracted.? Brodie and Mackenzie (13) come to the couclusion that whenever a kidney is active, a space always exists between the inner and outer capsule walls, representing, in their opinion, the urine which is being exuded from the glomerulus, but this spice, observed by these authors, is due either (a) to differen- this was the case in my chromic acid experiments) or (6) it is due to the fact that these authors “‘ were never able to kee the blood in a kidney that was excised at the height of activity. At the instant of excision such a kidney is hard and tense, and Instantly becomes soft when the first ligature is tied round the pedicle. This is even the case though the vein be first ligatured...... ven then there is a distinct escape of blood through the Capsule [enclosing the whole kidney] and the cortex rapidly pales in colour as the tension falls.”” “In other words, at excision, while urine secretion by the tubules continues, the blood pressure inside the kidney falls and the urine secre- tion pressure automatically becoming greater than the reduced blood pressure, the urine is naturally forced back into the cap- sule.? The int psular sj observed by Brodie and Macken- 1 The condition of the glomeruli in this latter experiment also shows that the swelled condition of the glomeruli of the first experiment was no the macerating fluid, as my friend Mr. R. H. Whitehouse su : eee its 2 The contraction of the glomeruli in these reverse current experi- ments probably also in part explains why only a proportion of the perfusing fluid made its exit from the renal artery or arteries and not the A ; oO . 8 Brodie (11, p. 581) admits the possiblity of this explanation and in- 148 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, urine produced, whence it is obvious that if the glomerular blood pressure is to be controlled the glomerulus must be available for the urine pressure to act upon, i.e. the glomerulus communicating with the tubule. A similar condition is demand- ed by the pump theory. If the glomerulus or glomus contracts previous to each heart beat, then, in order to act asa pump, urine must immediately flow into the capsule or other cavity from the tubule and the secretion pressure in the tubule being temporarily lowered by the capsular inflow, more urine must be formed in the tubule; when the glomerulus expands it will expel the recently formed. The pump theory therefore demands a residual amount of urine which flows to and from the capsule 3 and which is only used in expelling urine more recently secreted, deed both authors (13) furnish evidence of its probability when they state that the capsules (and tubules) of an active obstructed (ureter constricted) kid e more distended with accumulated fluid than those of an i ul i iv transposed at the head of the measurements supplied by these authors). 1 Brodie and Mackenzie state that in the inactive kidney ‘‘ the glomerular surface always lies in contact with the capsule wall ”—the ex- planation of which is that the glomerulus and capsule are already s¢ shrunken that heat and aleghol have not much power to produce diffe - = 0 1922.] ‘* Renal Portal ’’ System. 149 Personally I do not accept the pump theory for reasons already Stated (absence of suitable pulsation, no necessity, no evidence for intracapsular space). The third and last explanation of the Encapsulation of the glomeruli is based upon the fact thatall organs developed at the sides of the vertebral column, between this, the stout peritoneum and the powerful myotomes, are subjected to considerable cons- tant and intermittent pressures, due both to the small amount of available space and to the contractions of the myotomes in- Volvedin locomotion. It is to escape these pressures, or at least Pa: hout interfering with p in the other parts of the kidney. If the space between the inner and outer capsule walls of each glomerulus Were & vacuum, then at each contraction of the 2,000,000 odd glomeruli of the human kidney, e.g. 2,000,000 capsules would contract, and this change apsules co i i nsid to and fro movement of a amount of urine, the cap remaining constant in size, the perturbations referred to would be avoided ne the capsules (34). In Amphioxus the erulus is represented by a small reticulation of the artery lying above and not in contact with the nephridium. 150 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, not expand unduly and secrete too vigorously, and I suggest that it is this pressure which has led mechanically to the encapsulation of the glomeruli and so provided the kidney not only with an additional means of limiting the output of urine but also a means of avoiding all possibility of extravasation through the thin walls of the glomerular capillaries. The pro- truding of ‘‘ external glomeruli,’’ and glomi in some Fishes and Amphibia into the coelomic cavity instead of into the tubules is but an additional illustration of the pressure I have predicat- ed. The encapsulation of the glomeruli then may be regarded as but one of several of the results due to the development of the kidney in a confined space under intense pressure, and may therefore be a purely mechanical product initially devoid of any physiological significance. have in the preceding paragraphs suggested at least three explanations regarding the origin of the encapsulated glomerulus. all of which are possible in the present state of our knowledge and perhaps probable and are at least free from the objections which apply to the current hypotheses of glomerular filtration or secretion. A Consideration of some other Arguments used in support of the neo-Ludwig Theory. tee re) 1922. ] ‘* Renal Portal”’ System. 151 ] stances, it is necessary to concentrate or otherwise alter the composition of in-coming substances, then the kidney is not an isolated exception but is, on the contrary, an excellent example of conformity to rule, and the only exception to this rule would be the renal tubule epithelium if, as Cushny assumes, it absorbs unchanged the Locke’s fluid portion of the glomerular filtrate. We further object to the additional supposition—advanced with the same object in view—that because the gland cells of the kidney differ from all other gland cells in being developed ! See the author’s papers published in the Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 19°1, p. 183, and Anat. Anzeig. Bd. 40, 1911, p. 225, 152 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [N.S., XVIII, in the walls of mesodermal coelomic tubules, there is therefore still more reason for assuming that their mode of function differs from that of other gland cells. So far as I know gland cells can if required be developed in any duct, passage or position in any germ-layer of the body—in the brain ventricles and buccal cavity (ectodermal), in the gut and its outgrowths (endudermal), in the genital ducts, urethra, supra-renal bodies, and on blood-vessels (mesodermalj—and I am not aware that difference of locality of development has in any of these cases ever previously been advanced as a reason for assuming that their modes of producing secretions must therefore differ in principle. The kidney again is said to differ from all other (Hg) below that in the aorta, whereas the secretion pressure of origin and function which are said to distinguish the kidnev gland cells from other gland cells as an excuse for interpreting from that of the latter are non-existent. _ 4 proceed to the consideration of some of the remaining preces of evidence advanced in favour of the neo-Ludwig 1922.] ** Renal Portal’’ System. 153 theory. The fact that Ene diuresis the urine comes to ygen consumption) shows no signs of increase ove the normal during diuresis due to injection of Ringer’s fluid, though the output of urine is greatly increased therefore the energy expended in secreting this extra output of urine must be due, not to the activity of the kidney (tubule) cells but o an external source of energy, viz. the blood pressure in the glomerulus, of more value as evidence for glomerular filtration, since, as Cushny himself admits, the energy of the kidney is devoted to the concentration of the urine constituents and not to their mere passage into the lumen of the urinary tubules,' the ee process being ci even when the tubule epithelium is as shown by the experiments with chromic and picric acids D. 51). All the facts in short point to the process rer large- ly one of filtration under the conditions named, but it is fil- tration through the tubules, not the glomeruli, since no fil- tration occurred when the chromic and picric acids were per- fused via the aorta. ‘ The energy spent on excreting water must be very rare since iid the CO, output of a a fasting oy was found increased by giving it much water, nor was the Oy, intake child influenced by an attert of diabetes Pape gy during which she ak eight litres of water a day (24, p. 262). P The rfusion experiments of Miss Cullis (6-) on frogs are some- times referred to as affording definite evidence o cidtipesbnes of water by the glomeruli. Thus she states, ‘‘ There is no doubt that under all ordi- , , h 154 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Finally, apart from it being an attempt to explain the encapsulation of the glomerulus, the neo-I.udwig theory is supposed to be superior to all rival theories in its simplicity. This simplicity is supposed to lie in the statement that if we assume glomerular filtration of the non-colloid portion of the blood and tubular absorption of Locke’s fluid, a key is thereby provided for the interpretation of all the data of kidney activi- ty. But, quite apart from the question as to whether this is blood only receives rather than to the numerous other kinds of glands in which, as in the kidney, the blood chiefly relinqgaish- es. I contend moreover that a theory which assumes that the kidney is an organ which devotes about 99% of its substance to returning to the blood £¢ ths of what the 1% has abstract- ed from it is anything but simple. Cushny however argues (p. 53) that although for the daily excretion of 35 grams of urea the neo-Ludwig theory requires 70 litres of glomerular filtrate to be separated from the blood colloids and 68 of these to be re-absorbed through the tubule epithelium, yet the Bowman-Heidenham (Tubule cum Rete) theory likewise re- quires 70 litres of plasma to exude into the lymph spaces round vessels, and therefore ‘‘ the two rival theories... ... both require about the same amount of fluid to come into contact with the e pithelium”’ and therefore ‘‘ the difficulty is almost equally great in accepting either theory.”’ ; But this is not a valid comparison between the require wall of the tubule, whereas, on the Tubule cum Rete theory, the 68 litres would only be supposed to be separated in the a ey ee ———— tubules, either of these structures may have supplied the water: the sr me for glomerular secretion or filtration is therefore worthless. the bloo which traverses its blood vessels. It is quite evident that, des- P 7 Cushny’s comparisons between the two, there can be no real likeness whatever between the functions of the villus epithelium and that of the kidney tubule. EE ty a eet Se i ge | es 1922.] * Renal Portal’’ System 155 sense that lymph is separated from the blood in os ee nate — the term “ re-absorption”’ has not the sam ng i twocases. On the Tubule cum Rete theory, Skee is no more re- absorption i in the kidney (in the neo- Ludwig sense ) than there is in the salivary gland. Further we may well enquire from supporters of the neo-Ludwig view in what way they suppose glomerular filtration and tubule absorption per se to be superior to the more simple, or at least more usual, process found in all other glands? Nobody will deny that glands in general can (and do) abstract as much water and crystalloid substance from the blood as the kidney does, or that the ordinary type of gland could, if the organism required it, concentrate urea, sulphate other substances to the required degrees by ‘the usual process (and even on the neo-Ludwig view it is the glandular tubules which effect this concentration—not the capsules or an All that such an ordinary gland would require ould be an abundant ae supply. ie. it would have to be a near the aorta, and some device for protecting it a excessive pressure and 6 of flow. But the Vertebrate kidney exac oe answers to these requirements in both particulars. again contends that ‘‘ the Bowman-Heidenhain qeaey, faind therefore the Tubule cum Rete theory]... amounts to little more than the statement that the kidney secretes the urine by the vital activity of its cells’’ —and is therefore “a nebulous statement of the renal function,’ but the same may be said of any existing theory of secretion applied to the 9 eng : pancreatic or other gland. Further, if this statement ‘ defensive position... ig impregnable ”’ in virtue of its ‘ re losity,” the same may equally be said of a large part of Cushny’s defence of the neo-Ludwig theory. For example on page 41 it is stated as a “ grave objection’’ to the Bowman theory that ! See the a account by Benjamin Moore (24) “ what may be alled the ‘‘ electr ’ theory of secretion and absorption—a theor whieh largely obviates the assumed ission peters of water to and from the lymph for the conveyance of sufficient quant of subst eted or ab . £e ot aw hat } quantities of water are assumed to be absorbed and elimina in th absorption of oxygen and fresh-water by the external gills n from of Fishes and Urodeles, nor from the blood by the oxygen gland of the bladder ot th many teleost fishes, and I do not understand why it should be assumed that the kidney sho — need to adopt what Starling ——. sc such ‘‘a clumsy way Of arriving at a urine, whose comositio adapted to the needs of the casteaal (40 p. 1288). When it is sala on gland cells can do in extracting substances from the blood, in concentra- ing them and in manufacturing new substances all precisely adapted to the requirements of the body as a whole, the crt that in the case of the kidn 1 hould have to exude the fluid part of its su in- toas continuous with the outside world a t a special gl d hould have to be developed to cate uch of this exuded h fluid as is of value to the st the 7 co rato of escape of the fluid allows, cid grotesque to say the | 156 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, it “endows the renal cell with powers of discrimination of a very high order’’ being ‘“ capable of detecting, and is aroused to activity by, quantitative aberrations in the composition of the blood,” and that (p. 56) ‘“‘ the modern [neo-Ludwig] view dispenses with the power of the kidney to discriminate between minute changes in the composition of the blood, and this ren- ders it superior to the rival view of specific secretion,”’ whereas on page 144 it is argued, on neo-Ludwig lines, that the inabili- ty to detect dilution of the blood by ordinary methods of blood examination “‘ merely demonstrates the extreme sensitiveness of the kidney (and the epithelium of the tubules in particular) to changes in the concentration” ' of the blood!! Again p- 48) ** the absorption [by the tubules] of the optimal fluid [ Locke’s fluid] is due to unknown forces.” ' Again, when the question is raised as to why, on the absorption hypothesis, tubule cells should absorb a useless pigment, the reply is (p. 64) that these cells “are no longer quite normal at this stage”? \—a mode of defence which amply justifies Starling’s criticism that the neo-Ludwig ex- planation of the presence of dye in the kidney cells is ‘‘ somewhat forced”’ (40, p. 1282). Again, when masses of secretion are found in the lumen of portions of tubules devoid of glomeruli (in the lamprey and snakes), it is replied (p. 68) that the argu- ment is unconvincing because these kidneys are of a “lower ground that “ the frog’s kidney is a very small object, and there 18 no security that a fluid perfused through one part of it may regarded as in any way capable of such activity as the normal filtration still continues possible.” This last statement is not at all intelligible. If it be meant that the mere act of excision in all cases the kidneys worked as well as before. If, on the other hand, it be meant that the fluid usually called “ urine” ! My italics, 1922.] ‘* Renal Portal’’ System. 157 is not secreted when the kidneys are perfused with Ringer’s or other solutions, I may say that no one acquainted with the facts would expect the fluid normally excreted from blood to excreted by the kidney from the fluid in the intertubular vessels and if by ‘‘urine’’ we mean fluid formed by the kidney, then the secretion of perfusion experiments is as much urine’? as that micturated by the living anima]. If, on the aaa hand, we restrict the term “urine” to that which is micturated, then neither can the term “ filtrate’’ be generally applied to the fluid secreted in perfusion experiments for the simple reason that only very rarely is the “filtrate ’’ isotonic with the perfusing fluid, and then it is due to the same condi- tions which cause the living animal to secrete what is practi- cally Ringer’s fluid after a copious injection of it into the blood. But I have quoted sufficiently to prove that the neo-Ludwig mode of interpretation is fully as elastic as the theory which it proposes to supplant. I will only add that if the renal func- tion could be fully explained on quasi-physical lines, it would, so far from assisting us to understand the mechanism of secre- tion in general and of the organism as a whole, only place one more difficulty in the way by adding the problem as to why such an unique organ as the kidney should exist. Summary of some of the Principal Conclusions contained in Parts I-IV. All true, i.e. functional, portal systems are known to be developed by activity of the vascular tissue; on the other hand, the ‘‘ renal portal” system is solely due to the encroachment on and mechanical subdivision of the posterior cardinal or other adjacent vein by the serene hy Mo tubules, and on this ground alone, cannot be regarded as a true portal system (Part I). O ther a priori stapes against the idea that the ‘*renal portal ’’ system is functional are summarized in Part I. Frogs and toads can live as well without as with a venous supply to the kidneys, provided that other conditions remain the same (Part II), and the kidneys of frogs deprived of the ven- ous supply can, ~ provided that other conditions remain the same, excrete urine equal in quantity and strength (nitrogen and chloride) to that excreted by normal frog kidneys (Part a ese results are confirmed by perfusion experiments (Part IT Gurwitsch is mistaken en he asserts that in a frog ee kidney deprived of its venous supply excretes less urine than the “ normal ’’ comparison kidney ; as a soi of fact, si vein- deprived kidney excretes more urine because the ‘“ 4 idney is hindered by diminished flow in its guten capillaries due to increased pressure in its renal afferent vein. 158 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, The perfusion and dye-injection experiments of previous investigators have failed to detect the essential fact that the the kidney (renal venous meshwork) is distinct and separate from the network of much finer arterial channels known as the intertubular plexus, owing to the non-employment of correct relative rates of flow of the fluids in the renal arteries and renal afferent veins respectively (Part I). The non-recognition of this fact has not only led to wrong individual conclusions but has greatly confused the discussion concerning the respective functions of the tubules and the encapsulated glomeruli. The results of many perfusion experiments confirm and ex- tend the results of experiments performed on the kidneys of the living animal which indicate that the glomeruli neither filter nor 1922.] “ Renal Portal’’ System. 159 ing in full force); (6) allowing for the nature of its réle in the bodily economy, the kidney functions in the same way as all other glands, and there is no justification for the grotesque idea that the kidney glomerulus filters the non-colloids from the blood into a space continuous with the outside world (a supposition without analogy in any other part of the body in any organism) and that a special gland is developed in the walls of the tubule to catch as much of this filtrate as is of use to the body as the rate of escape of the filtrate allows. The glomeruli are simply retia mirabilia, the functions of which are (like those of the excessive urine output) and to eliminate the heart beat, and which at the same time allow the kidney to be supplied with a volume of blood which, relative to the mass of the kidney, is probably larger than that supplied to any other organ in the body—a supply which it owes to the large calibre of the renal artery and its proximity to the aorta. e enclosure of the glomerulus by a portion of the tubule wall 1 have suggested two other purposes which are possibly served by, and a proximate cause of, the encapsulation of the glome- APPENDIX A. ‘On the ie of Flow of Fluid through the Renal ebay the cone rere Afferent Veins, the Dor. ad Aorta and the a or Abdom Vein in Rana tigrin The frog in each of the five eligatrecpery conducted to ascertain the facts indicated by the above title was as usual pre epared in a manner to that described d in Ap mai Nj Part t1f A large-bore cannula ti dan sed at 24 cm on the right side of the body into the eee — a free or other factors were not available as avenues of escape for the fluid. The ureters were cut off close to the kidneys so that excretion might have free outflow Experiment 1. fo oon (made with tap water) was the perfus- xperiment set going at 9-40. Be- Gaui 10 0 and 10: 15 the aortic flow (A.f.) was 271 ¢.c., and the outflow during the same period from the post-caval cannula (P.C.f.) was 125 ¢.c., which pos with the walls 7 the vein. First daira 10-20-10°35 10°40-16°55 11°0-11°15 r.a,V. open. A.f.=202 c.c. A.f.=176 c. e. A.f.=175 c.c. POL =1800rc. P.C.f.=135¢.c. P.C.F.=—134c.c At 11°15 I ligatured both the r.a.v. and cut both veins posterior to e ligatures. Both r.a.v. anterior to the Faas became very small, jak later filled out Second Phase : 11°20-11-35 1140-11-55 12°0-12°15 r.a.v. shut. Afi=l74ec Af.=l74e0. A.f£.=175 c.c. P.C.f.=20¢.c. P.C.f.=22¢.c. P.C.f.=24 c.c. 12-20-12-35 12°40-12-55 1-0-1°15 A.f.=177¢0. A.f.=173¢.c. A.f.=168¢ (r.a.v. NOW P.C.f.=28 c.c. P.C.f.=32c.c. P.C.f.=35 c.c. _half-filled) 1-20-1-35 ied 2°0-2°15 A.£=163¢.c. Afi= cc. A.f,=161 c.c P.C.f£.==35 c.c. POfas oc P.C.f.=:31 cc. ince in se the flows of the two o phases of the experiment ! it is desirable to select for phoma the flows ace hose periods in which the aortic flows were as nearly as possible identical, we will select the flows of the last two periods of the first phase and compare with them the flows of the 4th, 5th and 6th periods of the second phase, since gh GLE = esi yagi al aka Ineo Ns ROO aed cae eas gina nl 1922. ] ‘' Renal Portal’ System. 161 maximum—in other ee e fluid supplied by the rena! arteries has penetrated —_ densa empty channels of the ‘‘renal portal’? system as much as it ever will do, and therefore, in these three periods, the post- caval flow neneets the full outflow from the renal arteries, no flui iti retained in order to fill out further the empty renal venous mesh- Now the ti flows of the two ee = isin Peli phase are :— average aortic low=175 rage post-caval foe c. a in 15 ilies and of te Aieadt pha verage a ithe. flow=173 c.c. in 15 minutes average post-caval flow=32 c.c in 15 minutes from which we may conclude (1) that of the 134 c.c. which escape via the post caval oa the first phase, approximately 32 c.c. are supplied by the. renal arteries, and the remainder, viz. 102 c.c t B w * es renal arteries, ie. the venous supply to the frog kidney is 8 approximately 3°2 times as great as the arterial supply ; (2) that the flow in the aorta is To2x 1/2 ? the flow in each ra.v. ; (3) that the- flow in the renal arteries is approximately Ge) 1/5 of the total flow in the- approximately 3°4 times ( aorta ; and (4) that the flow in the cetectar abdominal vein is approxi-. mately 3 times that in each r.a.v. I performed ge other experiments similar to the above which, to CEE as space, I will ne record in detail. These only differed in the bore of the aan ha used, in human urine being added to the perfusing zip or Be the heart being cut ou oe mpa one < the results of these five experiments, I found that, viiaetts the volume of the v Spas: “sapply to the kidney relative to ‘the volume of the arterial supply, Experiment | Oe the former r as 3 times Fiend ae the latter, and in the other fou 5 times, 3 tim times, and 5 times respectively from which we may c conclude that the —— supply to the frog’s kidney is normally at least 3 times as- great as the tal a regards the volume of flow in the dorsal aorta Telative to _the tion ir the conduct of perfusion experim ts—Experiment | gave re former as being 3°4 times as great as the sabia, and the mor four expe- 1/3, to wioovie the a of excess of pressure, ceca . /4 of 4 the rate ne flow in the aorta. m the results of three of the experiments we may also state tha 1/5-1/6 of the total blood in the aorta is passed through the kidneys (the _ of Exp. 3 in this connection was unreliable and the value of 1/10- of Exp. 5 is —- aberrant to be considered). Finally t sins petaalon experiments (excluding ae A a res- vectively that the flow in the anterior abdominal vein is Bl’ 38° 63” and 0-9 1°8 1-4 1-4 ea times that in each of the renal afferent veins, or oe 7 and ee There is thus ue asege great variation in the volume of fluid passing through the an abdominal vein vaste to that passing through. 162 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIII, each renal afferent vein. I obtained the same variations in results on attempting to estimate the wlativs dimensions of the anterior abdominal : 2 . : er n R, tegrina. te) s for each vessel: (1) I calculated the area of the lumen in transverse rity rom the i nternal circumference (when x 103 diameters and drawn tol board) and multiplied this into the average thickness of the ee (; x 103) ; (2) the weight of the substance of the wall when magnified 103 diameters and drawn on Brist ol board of uniform thickness; and (3) the squaring of the external diameter of the vessel. In two female R. tigrina, the first method gave the size of the anterior abdominal vein rela- tive to that of each renal afferent vein as ra and a in five R. tigrina, the second method a the following values : =<, , =, Soa a “é oe ro , the average of which is NE and the third method gave the values ie the cases of two frogs) of a 2 and ns There is thus some evidence for assum- ing that in R. tigrina the size, i.e. the blood-carying capacity, of the anterior abdominal vein is normally only a little greater ( — ) than that of each renal afferent vein. In the Indian toad, on the sii hand we shall see (Appendix D) that the anterior abdominal vein is about three times as —— as each renal afferent vein, and in R. temporaria about twice the siz APPENDIX B. Some peasant recorded to one the Statements p. 12, 13 of the Tex Ex i renal pico and renal afferent veins, easiationd of the nitrogen inaigel enoe i t h n this pri ge stren gths of 30 and 46 wate Garkaled through the two renal affere ns successively, i.e. both renal afferent Seni contained the seade ed id. et the same t ae 5 pass cannula (tied into the poehane ne ery and the two systemics ligatured) had an outflow -c. per minute at 24 ems. pressure, and the two Sana afferent nto ° Fr nitrogen-strong perfusion fluid (stronger in nitrogen compa ared with the aortic fluid in the ratio of 46: 30) used for the pertesios of the two r.a.v. consisted of 0°6% saline (Nfdw), 46 c.c. of the same stock of human urine being ed to each 2000 c.c. and Escred, I shall call this the 46 fluid. The nitrogen-we eak pet- | At this time (1918), I “nitro. 2h d ; — ted rfusion fluids adding definite quantities of fresh hum of uniform eerie because I was unable to obtain urea Ey 1922.] ‘* Renal Portal’’ System. 163 (a little extra salt being added to make the osmotic pressure of this fluid approximately equal to that of the 46 fluid, and, _ the 46 fluid, stronger than that of the aortic perfusion fluid !), Bins oe this the 30 fluid. Tn = experiments I always endea- collect at least 1 c.c. of each sample of urine for nitrogen oe sites estim ones ion Two r.a.v. bottles at 6c ure. Experiment set going at 8° 50, the mt es i "ihe en r.a.v. in the first phase of Fey Beebe aol rot ‘collecting tubes from 9-0-9 30. First left (IL) tube contained 1°6 c.c. urine. Not Phase: 9-0-9:30 va estimated 30 fluid Ist right (IR), +3 a 1°65 ,, [N.E.] in oe 2nd pair tubes from 9: 30-10-15 (by which time the ment was in good working order (I eet or2 5 minutes) = ‘* 30 e.” Aorta perfused 571 c.c. Balan a r.a.V pases 137 c.c. ¢ = 4°5: 1 flows. ht r 1l5c T then cae the aibbet tubes of ‘the two r.a.v. cannulae, siphoned off most of the 30 fluid contents of the two r.a.v. rubber tubes, was perfusing on ‘as wo r.a.v. by Put 3ed at tubes from 10°30-1 Second ase: IIIL + I1IR = 2°95 c.c. [N.E.] 46 fluid in r.a.v. Soe 4th Essai a from 11:0-11 45 VL+1VR= = ‘* 46 urine. Aorta “perused 497 c, 110-1145 L.r 135 wilde 1 flows. R.f ra Ys (j bi 115¢.c. ro stopped oe ne SE aod 0: ener - Nitrogen. i c.c a 0:000160 g os lL ¢.c. a fluid = 0:000133 gm. na loc. 4 ,, x 0:000200 gm. oe Tn this ex pelment therefore, the 30 urine and 46 urine samples were pe in acne strength. The decrease in output of urine during e peri of 30 minutes each during the course of the eepevinient is mocewentie 3°25 ¢.c., S4¢¢ 95 c.c., and 19 c.e seven other experiments similar to this and obtain performed wit — — re en in which with 40 fluid (i.e. 0°6% saline r +40 cc. rine successively filled is aires ~ pattle with the e same solution, with 50 fluid and with 61 fluid, and obtained samples of urine of increasing nitrogen riments in which the r 30 perfusion fluid was not made eadtedty stronger than the aortic “quid (by the addition of sodium egies e) the 46 urine (i.e. the u uced du perfusion with the id) er ae to a4 appreciably stronger in nitrogen than the 30 253 gm 000186 compared w oie ie. g. 0 ith 0-000173 gm. and 0-000133 ere jenpentive el te This is but one of several of the various ist between the renal osmvtie pressure relationahipe which I found to ex meshwork and the intertubular plexus. L hope to publish an pa venous account of these in a wbenyeent 164 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, -_ ength : thus in one experiment I —— urine say on “i = follow- ng nitrogen ee 0-00001 0140 gm In of the seven other experiments referred to, ceed of excising the packs T tie a into it a wide-mouthed cannula with a short piece of rubber tubing attached. So oes as this heart cannula and rubber tubing abe “© 30 fluid” o nde streng - 000046 gm. and ‘‘ 46 flui a nitrogen at ag 2 0: 73 gm. = eee urine of a nitrogen strength of 0-000073 gm.) but on ome: “the en ee = a cannula rubber tubing, at the — 46 fluid + was being perfused, to from 2 to 4 se above the cael of ‘he ro at once obtained urine of a arbi nd strength of 0:000106 gm. and, when indigo- carmine was added to the v. fluid, of the color of Sack blue ink ! These results show clearly that when the outflow is rringerraeee and the pressure in the post-caval, renal ven = eshwork and renal ee. vein ae fore increased above scmatat e 46 fu id sees its pre actually penetrating ink an abciae, so to speak, the aiorial full in the intertubular plexus, with the result that the urine increases in nitrogen strength and, when dye is present, becomes dark ave We shall see cat oe: (Part III) that increase of pressure ict the i tortabulae plexus by itsel} causes nitrogen-weakening of the urine (if the 30 fluid had been in the renal afferent vein when the heart cannula tubing was raised, the urine would have become pore itis sam sone — “ the nitrogen-stronger (and dye-containing) nal affere in fluid i the intertubular plexus which produc the Ponder vast paeiet: all of these experiments, the urine ot hae pm a greater percentage of nitogen Reel = arterial fluid when the latter was at 24-26 cms. pre experiment I lowered she pdioen bottle to 18 cms, and socaiae urine eri a nitrogen strength of 0-000253 gm., the arterial fluid being 0-000093 gm. and the 46 fluid 0 0000193 gm. Decrease of pressure therefore of nitrogen in the urine. ese fact effectually dispose of the notion that ei ‘* urine ’’ of these pine wetha is a mere gious and not a true secretio In a second Experimental Series ie experiments only differed from and ds the preniiiies} in that the 30 46 fluids were perfused simultaneously, each a —_— one renal afferent vein, and the results erm se experi ts) were identical, the sam bee of urine jeer from the t kidneys eiag in all cases equal in strength. Experiments performed to determine if Potassium ferrocya- ide and Potassium iodide behave like the Nitrogen (and Indigo-carmine) is the preceding experiments, EXPERIMENT 1. The aortic perfusion fluid eee of 0°6% saline abt 40 c.c. recesarines urine being added to each 2000 c.c., per- at 26 cms. pressure, ide — eee the same as those pra in the last Series. . were a Faeroe . 0°00625% The e oxperians was set going at 8-45, and I put Ist a pair tubes from 8°50-9°5 These samples, when mixed with equa IL=1°4 e.c. —s volumes of the stock ferric be IR=1-3c.¢ solution, were pure yellow in color. 1922.] “ Renal Portal’”’ System. 165 Put 2nd aes tubes from 9:10-9:25 IIL=1 c + ferric chloride =yellow coloration only. TIR=1 ee, (15 ™-) — b ecsdorprg 247 c.c. ) | oo. —9'25 1. oeabins Sai 1 fows, | POV 50 e.e. as ae I clamped both r.a.v., siphoned off the contents o o bottles and substituted i si pahie we (in 0°6% saline) of °K Fe(C N)s- The on Pb -started at 9°34, and I put 3rd pair tihen fron 9 9° aed 0125% ferrocyanide i TITL + IIR = 1°8 c.c. (30 m. e + ferric chloride ellow coloration paly. — psec 448 c.c. Ms . 4 E 40-10-10 1. 79 e.c. ee te: i; piped is 83 c.c. At 10°12 I substituted in both r.a.v. bottles a 0-025% solution (in 0°6% saline) of KyFe (CN), and sevseavted perfusion at 10-21. 0°025% I put 4th pair tubes from 10°25-10°55 ferrocyanide i IVL+IVR =0°8 c.c. (30 m.) + ee chloride=yel- w coloration only. aries —— 424 ¢.c.) __ 53:1 | 10251035 Keay ro M1 00. | : | a.v. samnple = = pale transparent bluish-green maa nd ** 46 ish-green = 1:2 SEO — - canintaae 1-2 All three urine canner were then identical in color (and a little deeper than the aortic perfusion erry rik despite the rise in strength e KyFe (CN), in the I took six more similar samples aan "added ‘the six soy exactly equal quasieies : Gibeairsked covepaie sublim solution: this produced in each case a pinkish Salaacercs or amples and tested for f nitrogen strengths, and aaa “that t rratare were in the ratios of 20, 30, 40, A s all these re ah pw ae that 2 ne thegind the flows are correct, _ substitution of the stronger fluids in the renal afferent veins makes o difference to the KFo(CN),, KI or icone: strengths of the urine I performed two ore experiments (one is described in Experiment 1, Appendix C) in both of which I tae tees: psi of KyFe (CN), and urea strengths of the ratios of 30, 60 and 90(!) thr ough the renal afferent veins and obtained results identical with those just described. ConTROL EXPERIMENT. This experiment was Ap ger with Experi- ment 2 just described save that the ‘‘ 46” 0077 - ids were perfused tabs ed the aorta fovea of areiick the r.a.v. The flows varied between 3-7 and 4°5: the flows in Ay ‘two r.a.v. bei 30 fluid IL+IR=0-1 c.c. (15 m.) [N.E.] in aorta IIL+IIR = 1:1 c.c. (45 m.) = 30 urine. 46 fluid IIIL+IIIR = 04 c.c. (15 m.) [N.E. J in aorta IVL+IV eo I'l c.c. (830 m.)= 46 urine. 60 fluid VL+VR= 0-2 c.c. yrds A bas =| in aorta VIL+VIR= aries. (75 m.) = 60 urine. I pers exactly equal igen ax oe rs the three *‘ 30"’, << wid ** 60” samples from the three perfus fluids and added to eac Pi “ grea sual bere _ stock ferric chloride solution, the results being as follo If we denote the colorations of the ‘*30”, “46” and ‘60’ perfusion ae samples, as in the last as ASD vg by the figures 1, 1°5, 2, then the color of the #s ‘30° x ' urine — was about 11 We i ae ef », between 1-3 and 1-4 : ime >» between 1-6 and 2 Precipitating the KI with Giiaatesbe corrosive sublimate gave ilar results. 7: The « nitrogen strengths of equal ap oes of os “30”, “ 46” and ‘* 60” perfusion fluids and the ‘:30” and ‘*60”’ 168 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, the K, Fe (ON), , and KI, increasing with the premeirar of the — oo sapceneet fluid, thus contrasting with perfusion via the APPENDIX C. = Increase of Osmotic Pressure in the Renal Afferent Vein Fluid auses Increased Flow of the Arterial et — lta bs increased Rate of Urine Excr 18 I have stated that the substitution of fluids of increased osm tic preavure in n the renal afferent veins accelerates the flow of the actaeta id in the intertubular plexus and therefore the production of urine, pro” iti mit. i e viding that other conditions per e as well if I now addue ome concrete evi e in sup this assertion. ‘T perime referred to on page 83 in eterna of the fact that even when solutions of K,Fe(CN), and urea three times as stron ng in these eoggetege 9 as the sets fluid are perfused through ‘at renal afferent veins, no diffusion or esmosis of these substan occu fford some of the svedence now re I s rs, @ quired. I will describe the one which I first sect ae ExrERiMEent |. In this experiment + made three perfusion fluids, each consisting of 0:6% saline (N fdw), and with the following unts © ea amounts of zane ferrocyanide dissolved respectively in 2000 c 30 fluid. 1 gm. urea pe - nt = i Fs Ye 60 fluid. : — »» and 0°2500 g 90 fluid. ms, 3: aioe 3750 ee! The 30 ace was perfused through sin aorta throughout the ex- periment and at first through the two r.a.v. also Bc, — followed by the 60 and 90 fluids thiech apg hee already stated in the text, the four samples of urine esha in this experiment were indentical in rose 2a and ferrocyanide strength, tibcehe rer set going at 9:1 30 fluid 9°40-10°10 T.a.v. bottles 1°85 c.c. urine at6e in 3 St vaannten. wae Lente 483 c.c. lk Cc.ec. r ad. = 110 c.c. =49: 1 flows. 60 fluid 10°40-11-10 r.a.v. bottles 2°0 c.c. urine at 10 ems. in 30 minutes. — ported 565 c.c. i Ped Ud Bi A a vie ae 117 c. ec. =48: 1 flows. 5 ee 11°15-11-45 r.a.v. bottles 2-0 c.c. urine at 12 cms. in 30 minutes. pipe 8 salsa = C.c. i, 3: G.c, S . eae Hl ¢.c. oe 4 flows. 90 fluid 12-15-12°45 r.a.v. bottles = 1 c.c, urine at 12 cms. n 30 minutes. aorta perfused 570 c.c 1. £.8.¥. C0, 1922.] * Renal Portal’’ System. 169 Y The preceding data show (1) that the higher the osmotic pressure of the renal afferent vein fluid the greater the relative and absolute flow o ; : 2 flow from 3 n thirty minutes toe sti in She same time (!), hough the rates of owt in the r.a.v. remained unchan ged. EXPERIMENT 4. In this 0 cae *¢ 6% saline with 30 c.c. human urine added to each 2000 was throughout perfused through the aorta and I snuneasively gr ert pure 0°6%, 0°7% and 0°8% (Vs wo saline through the r.a.v., the two bottles remaining at say, with saline only in he cnrsraptc id uri as very small 208 the supply soon cease 0°6% saline in the r.a, ut was cena plage with the 0° 7% and 0°8% hief purpose iment is earner the acceleration of flow r the sisectat fluid caus ie e high osmotic pressures of the 0:7% and 0:8% ais 0-6% 0 Ok ak 15 —-11°0-11-20 (20 m. ‘2 c.c. urine. gies Sngigoeee 148 c.c. series 888 c.c.in 120 m. (90 minutes) Il. 40 c.c. x6=240 c.c. ee pee 62 ¢.c, x 6=372 «.c.) =2°9 - ows. at ee Sed 11-20- 1-2 0 (120 m.) cir — perfused 709 G.c. ab ciiains ie ANi 4; 39 c.c. ae Pe 314 c.c. path | flows 0°7% “ 30-1°45 1 drop urine (15 m.) Page 1-50-2°50 (60 m.) cir. 0°2 aorta rasa oo et Do in 120 m. urine (60 ta,) Ls TOs, 132 c.c. x 2=264¢ . r.8.¥. si 160 c.c. x 2=320c. re ) 0.8% tog es 3-20-3°50 (30 m.) cir. warte peetasid: 279 c.c. (x4= a in 120 m. rine 180 a} = — er Flee x4= i 69 ¢.c. x4=276 0.0.) 89: 1 flows. res given (483. 556, 570) represent the rate of out flow from the wane ia pated Tato is: ih the increased rates of flow occur through the renal arteries fapesd (see Exper. 3) and the effect of the raised osmotic pres- sure in the r.a.v. fluid is to be Farge not only by the increases shown by these figures but also by the absence of decrease of aortic flow which occurs in rsapinnieke in which the perfusing fluid remains constant in quality. 170 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, ae if we take for each of the three r.a.v. perfusing fluids the ount of arterial fluid — was “A would be perfused in hie. space of two hours, t amounts are byeiee ts: 709 c.c., 864 c.c. and 1116 c.c.! Both the 0 7% and the 0°8% sake stimulated the kidneys somewhat but the ‘* = ” induc the 0: 6% fiuid needs a nt diuretic than osmotic weer before this can be over See also peiebacicaaes 10, Appen- dix E, Part IT. APPENDIX D. On the Relative Sizes (Areas in transverse section) of the Anterior Abdomina? and two Renal Afferent as in the Normal Control Toads etoisece wet in the Text, and opel tx Normal Control peshitich ns of R poraria. The paises offered to the Passage of Vescial Blood via the Renal ayeren ee eins & the Pata rior Abdominal Vein espective hese toads and R. temporaria were preserved for a time in form- alin (body ceriy well exposed), and the veins (and other vessels) cut out, d dehydr and mounted in balsam with pieces of glass to prevent the wens ers distorted by the pressure of the pays - all s of measurement Idid my best to estimate the external diameter of each vessel, since the veins were ali ‘ak tes in thickness The following lists give my results (a) (b) (c) Toad. Ext. Diam. of Ext. Diam. of yn Diam. (a) 2 x 0°7854 Ant. Abdom -V. One Ren. of Other Aff. V. Ret en. Aff. V. (b)2 x 0°7854 “ (c) 2 x 0°7854 1 Normal Control 0-466 mm, 0248 mm. 0:248 mm. 0°56 Toad. l Another Normal 0-684 mm, 0-713 mm. 0-666 mm. 2-03 Control Toad. (very small) 1 Control Toad U 0: 341 0-341 mm. 0-372 mm. 2-18 pestle: atbatt) ; Control Toad W 0-558 mm. 0356 mm. 0°356 mm. 0-81 1 Control Toad 0-620 mm. 0°232 mm. 0:155 mm. 0-19 No. 1 (swollen) 1 Control Toad _—0-883 mm. 0-232 mm. 0-201 mm. 0-11 No. 3 (very swollen) ss Toad 0°620 mm. 0:356mm. 0°310 mm. 0°57 Oo, 1 — becca Toad 0°755 mm. 0°341 mm. 0°465 mm. 0°58 oO. Me 1 —o Toad 0-620 mm. 0-403 mm. 0°403 mm. 0°84 oO, 1922. ] ** Renal Portal ’’ System. 17] 1 Control Toad 0°542 mm. 0310 mm, 0248 mm. 0°58 No. 10 Toad J 0°697 mm. 0:387 mm. 0°387 mm. ae (regenerated 0°61 r.a.v.) If we leave out of cioer mare the aberrant ratios = the ** Another Normal Control Toad,’’ Toad U and Toads Nos. | and 3 (in the first two of which the ante aioe a ‘bdominal is geen wel abnormally small vei in the latter two abnormally swollen), the mean maining normal contro] toad ratios = =0-63 —® ratio (practically identical with that of J) which we may take as bein ng the normal one in res 5 acer a “4 Toad (B stomaticus). In other words, in ise per the anterior abdominal is a trifle more than three times as large as either of the renal apeeal via found in the same toad. n the six oe control specimens of R. temporaria, the figures were as follow (a) (b) (c) Frog Ext. Diam. of Ext. Diam. Ext. Diam. (a) 2 x 0°7854 Ant. Abdom. V. of wr Ren. of Other ff. V. Ren. Aff. V. (b)? x 0°7854 (c) 2 x 0°7854 1 Control Frog }-209 mm. 0-821 mm. 0°790 mm. 0°88 No. | é. Control Frog 1-224 mm. 0-682 mm. 0899 mm. 0°84 No. 2 1 Control Frog 1:085 mm. 0306 mm. 0-713 mm. 0°98 0. 3 as Control Frog 1:348 mm. 0°558 mm. 0°527 mm. 0°32 No. 4 oe Control Frog 1-085 mm. 0-775 mm. 0651 mm. 0°86 No. 5 1 Control Frog 1317 mm. 0-852 mm. 0-806 mm. 0-79 No. 6 If we omit the aberrant ratio of No. 4, we shall find that the average of the five remaining ratios =9-91 in other words, the anterior abdominal is on the average, a trifle more than twice the size of each renal afferent vein and is therefore smaller in proportion than the anterior abdominal vein of the toads. The ratio of the abnormal frog OD = =5 the anterior abdominal —— being about equal in size to each renal afferent vein, and therefore uch smaller in proportion than the anterior abdominal of normal R. rap Te Since, in the normal Indian toad and in Rana temporaria, the eaeigmar’ abdominal vein is respectively about 3 times and 2 times, as large as each 172 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Of the renal afferent veins, we may a that in the toad about 3/5 of the venous blood flows to the heart via the anterior abdominal and liver capillaries and 2/5 _ = renal venous Piasakee Gee of both kidneys, and in Bee: the two rou opening directly into the main venous system ; and t eat is con- firmed by the bn of the abnormal frog CH (text ‘igure 5), the sectional area of the lef a ** renal pany > vein (posterio sole of the posterior pngeanl being 0-570 sq. mm. and th tof _ anterior abdominal eing 0°679 teri al From these data then, we may conclude that the anterio P abdominal vein and liver capillary system offer only a little more pest es e to flow of venous blood into the heart than a persistent posterior cardinal vein open- ing directly into a precaval vein, but that, on the other hand, the renal venous meshwork of one kidney offers a resistance two cB. ‘fenaparaniaa or three (Indian toad) times as ta APPENDIX E. Details of the Perfusion Experiments on Fro ogs’ Kidneys eee with and without the Renal Afferent Vein Suppl I supply the pater of these experiments because my results, as venaida the saline strengths of the sam sia of urine, are distinctly con- radictory of those of Bainbr ridge, Collins and Menzies (Proc. Royal Soc., Vol. 86, 1913), and because it is important that the data on rebeece I have ased the conclusions stated in the text sho uld be availa EXPERIMENT 1.—In this se pegre only one cannu a (74 ¢.c. per minute at 24 ems.) was use d (inserted into the coeliaco pe ge 3 Mp? fluid ghee 0: 0% saline + 40 c.c. human urine added 2,000 c The going at 9-0, both the renal afferen _— (r.a.v.) being left open. Put first pair of ‘urine oe tubes bai 10- Open. IL + IR2 3°75 (30 minutes) = open vein urine [L c.c. = Oj] [10° 15-10- 45 sorta a oe 363 ¢ At 10-461 a the twor.a.v. between ven — of oes Piceke silciaias are of course only ri Cija omer meee sufficien for present purposes. I attem pted to as experimentally the ke saa tafe of perfusion fluid via trent sess vom he anterior abdominal an & he ae with equal nozzle bores (i.e. with equal rates of flow at the same pressure d Insert tw into the t nt veins connect both to the branches of a forked tube connected wit er- fusion bottle ; the third cannula would have to be i ted into the poste- rior end of the anterior abdo ars vein and connected with a second per- veer ~ joa with a “ head” uid equal to that in the other bottle. +IR = Ist left re Fon tube urine contents + Ist right ditto. se ee Wee line ye 1922.] ‘“* Renal Portal’’ System. 173 tied eect and Sree laterally by pads of putty, SO I ow. we heiaiianaiis hecnatecaged the post-caval in order to fill out the two r.a.v. anterior to the _ slips, i.e. to re- pea cape the rk. -By,41* former fluid Big marin in the renal venous meshwor 10 the two r.a.v. looked n pete in size. I put second ae tubes 120-115 “BO Shut. 11L + OR = = 2: 1 c.c. (30 m.) = shut vein urine (Ist sample) 1 c.c. [11°20_-11 50 aorta oboe te 350 c.c. ]. Put third pair tubes fro 55—12°25. ITIL - a = 1°65 c.c¢: "(30 m.) = shut vein urine (2nd sample) [le {11 5-129 25 aorta Lachine? 279 c.c rogen Strengths. Of = Rens in lec 5; = 0-000066 os Py a S, = 0:000066 ¢g lec, phetoaing fuid = 0-000073 gm. in 1 c.e. 8, providing ee the pressure in the post-caval and connected ns ome approximately constant, the presence or absence of the venous supply to the iedaaye pry a no difference as regards the nitrogen strength of the urine. Nor so far is there any evidence that the rate of excretion of urine is affect ExPERIMENT 2,—Identical with the last save that t the r.a.v. were piahghir and cut behind in the ‘‘ shut vein’ ” part of the experi- that the cannula was smaller in bore (58°5 c.c. per minute re “ ems, ) and that ge aortic bottle was lowered to 25 cms. casi eut out. Twor . left open at commencement of experi- O aft |+1R = 0°35 c.c. (30 m.) [N.E.] ) Aorta perfused at Pen) IIL +IIR = 1°85 c.c. (90 m.) [1 ¢.c. = O} rate of sas ¢.c. pe nutes. Shut { TIL + TITR = 0°35 c.c. (13 m.) [N.E.] - ? Aorta perfused at IVL+IVR = 2:1 c.c. (90 m.) [l ¢.c. = 8] of c.c. nee 30 cialis. ee et LS paca. Low inle S = 0°004930 1 c.c, ccastcman A fluid = 0:005848 gm. in |] c.c. Nitrogen Strengths. From — was left of the ‘‘ shut” and ‘* open mples of urin ok equal quantities and frand that io nitrogen reagiis were in the ratio of 19 (‘‘ open’’) to 10 (‘*shut’’). I cannot rere for this difference EXPERIMENT 3.—Iden gots _ Experiment 1, save that the aortic bottle was at 25 Oo ofr nee 05 c.c. 130 1m.) [N. E.] Aorta perfused at Pe) TIL+1IR = 1°7 cc. (60 m.) [l ec. =O7 } rates of 183 c.c. ( & 161 ¢.c. per tes. Sera END ES ees 0-7 c.c. (15 m.) [N.E.] ta perfused at ( IVL+IVR = 2-25 c.c. (60 m.) [1 c.c. ee ates of 223 o. 222 c.c. per so cite nutes. oO VL+VR = 0°77 c.c. (15 m.) [N-E.] Aorta perfused at pen { vit, VIR — 21 e.c, (euties =O) | Fates of 213 c.c & 208 per Ace stiraad 174 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, hak VIIL + VIIR = 0°45 c.c, (15 m.) [N.E.] [rs Aorta perfused —_ { VITIL + VITIR = 1°8 ¢.c. (60 m.) [1 ¢.c. = Sy] = pagent 139 265 455 C.C. - () hg 30 Excretion seme vigorous when experiment stopped. com oe Ce: pentaiag aiid = = 0°005848 gm. The Nitrogen Strengths. of equal quantities of O), 8), O,, 8, were in the ratios of 2,8, 13, 13, Oy and 8, therefore baing equal in strength. EXPERIMENT ERE Ge es with the last, save that the smaller can- nula a was used (58°5 c.c. per minute at 24 cms.) and the twor.a.v were shut to commence with. IL+IR =1+1 c.c. (30 m.) [N. Aorta perfused at Shot{ TTR = 172 2.0, ae at 85] pth the rate of 324 c.c. IML +1IR = 0-7 c.c. (15 m.) |N.E pee perfused at Open | WE TIVRE =2-4 c.c, (60 m.) [} ce. = 6, } the rates of 288 ¢.c. per sy aii ae VL+VR = 0-4 e.c. (15 m.) [N.E. >) Aorta perfused at Shut { vit VIR< tae c.e, eg a sti ~s,)/ ~ ce hes of 1 & 186 c.c. per 30. ar Chloride Strengths. S; = 0-004794 gm = 0°005440 gm. e Nitrogen idence of equal quantities of S, and O were in the ratios of 80 and 73, and were therefore jituotically equal, EXPERIMENT 65, BP ge sae with i ‘ra save that the larger can- nula was used - per min at 24 cms.) and that a wide- mouthed cannula was tibd into the. Bree oa of the heart 3 IL +IR = 1°45 c.c. (30 m.) [N.E.] Aorta perfused at Shut} IIL +IIR = 2'5 c.c. (45 m ) [l'¢.c. = 8)] the rates of 422 or c.c, per 30. ‘min TIIL +ITIR = 08 ce. (15 m.) [N. Aorta att a at Open { vn +IVR = 2-45... aban siiea: ee be he rates of 313 c.c. & 294 c.c. per 30 minutes. VL+VR = 06 cc. (15 m.) [N-E.] Shei) i. Vig ee °. (45. mm.) [1 ce.= $) the naps of po c.c. & c.c, minutes beac Strengths. S$; = 0°005168 Gack “005542 © vay S2 = 0:005406 gm. A Al ort oo Aorta perfused at. 1922.] “ Renal Portal’? System. 175 The Nitrogen Strengths of 8; and O tae in each case 0:000313 gm., both being therefore exactly equal EXPERIMENT 6.—Identical with the last save that the heart was cut out. Shut { IL+IR = 0:15 c.c. (25 m.) [N.E ] Aorta perfused at IIL+ITR = 1-0 c.e. (60 m.) [l ec. = 8)] = rates of 323 c.c. per 30 minu Ss. ig nae { ITIL +IITR = ? (15 m.) [N.E.] Aorta perfused at P IVL+IVR = 0°8 c.c. (90 m.) [l ec. =O} the rate of 406 c.c minutes on Cie re .) [N.E.] = ates : VIL+VIR = 0:7 (90 m.) [1 c.c. = 8] recorded. Chloride Sirenaeh T took exactly equal amie of S|, O and 8, and found that their ee strengths were respectively in the ratios of 6'1, 71 and 7°5 One possible defect in all i b wiiesitar experiments is the fact that while the renal afferent veins are open they are filled with fluid which comes from the legs, but when aay are closed they Sieh filled with a ‘ a seisecanie ® considerable excess in the nitrogen contents of the pa in 0 way affects the nitrogen si bow th of the urine, this ‘¢ defect” c n be but of little or no consequence Another and perhaps more ‘serious defect is that on the closure of the two renal afferent veins, all the blood item! — the legs must i escape via the anterior abdominal veinalone. Sin channel resistance than three channels, thee tik means S that less fluid wi ill 2 r the legs by the iliac arteries in a given time, that the fluid domes in the aorta will thereby be raised and that therefore urine excr under such increased pressure will be hie" in nitrogen (and stronger in chloride) than that ogi when the two renal afferent veins are open (Appendix rt I o obviate any pobalbsitiy of this defect being of — ance I anidea te in ihe remaining experiments now to be described to inse canals into both renal afferent veins, cutting both of these behind the cann EXPERIMENT sho fStosohens cannula had an outflow of 74 c.c. per cpored at 24¢ and the two cannulae for the r.a.v. had pra sally tee equal abhor of ll c.c. per minute at 24 cms. pressure Aortic fluid consisted of 0°6% saline (tap water), 40 c.c. human urine being added to each 2,000 c.c., and was perfused at 25 cms. pressure; r.a.v. fluid was similar save that 61 c.c. human —_— _ do gate! Two r.a.v. bottles at 6 cms. pressure. Heart d two r.av. cut ind cannulae. The experime cited with the two r.a.v. shut (i.e. the tubing was a = j IL+IR = 2-0 c.c. (30 m.) flee. = SN] Bbut | TIL+IIR = 2-5c.c. (45 m.) [1 ¢.c. =o 1 the the rate of 301 c-c. per 30 minutes. Open § HUIL +IIR=0'4 c.c. (15 m.)[1 ¢ e.= ON]) Flows sing as 4) PeP LIVL+IVR = 1 2c.c. (119m.) [lc.c. =O]| :1, the aorta per- using at sg rates of 37 nd 366 c.c. ner 30 minutes. 176 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Shut. VL+VR= 2'l5c.c. (120 m.) [1] e.c. = Sq] her —_ —— at of 378 c - 372 c.c. per ) 30. minutes. Nitrogen Strengths. SN =0 73 gm. S$, = 0-:000073 gm ON= 0:000106 gm. = N.E. (insufficient after 1 c.c. set aside for chloride). So = 0°000073 3 gm Chloride iecamarms (determined by Dr. A. P. Sircar). 8S; = 0:005627 g O = 0:005899 a S2 = 0°006086 gm. Quantity of Urine. Since while the veins were shut during the first phase of the experiment 4°5 c.c. of u urine were excreted in 75 minutes, while e omg 8.—Identical with the last a io save that the a.v. were open to commence with. Twor.a.v. bottles at 6 cms. elaine: IL+IR = 0:2 ee, (15 m.) [N.E.] Flows varied _be- Open { TIL + TIR = 2-45 c.c. (75 m. ) [l ee. . =01] tween 3°8 to 5-4 1; aorta perfused at a avera rate of 336 c.c | per 30 minutes pe Shut th te 0-2 c.c. (15 m.) [N.E = Aorta IVL+IVR = 1°25 ce. (120 m.) [le.c. =S]{ at an 200 ex e isco: ne O = 0:0050: oo poet: hence as in the first two mes 7igeia determinations of the la hd experiment, the ‘ open urine is slightly stronger In | . this is the more nd thus i a a and increase of fluid pressure in the kidney is always correla mn n increase of the chloride content " the urine (see Part oe Quan oe of Urine. Phi experiment furnishes no evidence in support of the view xi the sleiars of the r.a.v. accelerates the production of — 9.—Identical with the last experiment in all respects. 1922.] “ Renal Portal”? System. 177 One { IL+IR = 0°35 c.c. (15 m.) [N.E.] Flows varied be- poem LIIL+IIR = 1-4 c.c, (90 m.) [lc.c. =O]] tween a bs") °o 2 > Pw wo @O lar | Lcd =] Dm ® for 30 minute Shut IIL + IIR = 2 drops (15 m.) [N.E.] Aorta sabe {i IVL + IVR=1°45 c.c. pees! ta per 30 minutes. Chloride Strengths. O = 0°005066 gm. S = 0:005644 gm. Quantity of Urine. L: soe c.c. was excreted in 105 minutes with the veins open. 1-4 , 150 shut, Bxrmenceer 1 10.—This experiment was pri moe devised to ascertain when the r.a.v. are shut, the flow through the renal arteries he last i ” thereby increased. e experiment differs from the last in that both the iliac a were ligatured and the goes bottle lowered to 18 cms. pressure, when the aorta looked normal in size. In all other Fespectst = se eeenent was identical with the last and served t O IL+IR 0:25 c.c. (18'm.) [N_E.] ] Renal arteries per- pen {in tik 2-0 ¢.c. (60 m.) [1 ¢.c. = O} ne ee ae Sane I = ! | r | ¢c.c, and 179 c.c. Shut {+ IIL +IIIR = a drop (15 m.) [N.E.] Renal arteries per- IVL+IVR = 0:4 c.c. (60 m.) [le c.c. =S$]{ fused at the rate ad La per 30 Open. VL +VR = 1 drop (60 m.) [N.E.] ] ey Sota per- | fused at the rate aps being 193 I vir bree go the be ze a.v. tubes, fee off. the fluid in the v. bottles ‘and replaced it with 0-6% saline+90 c.c. human urine to bah 2000 c.c. (ie. a fluid of greater osmotic pressure) and then reopened the Wo I.8.Vv on VIL + VIR = 0°6 c.c. (120 m.) [1 oe =0}) Re mal arteries ith rfused at the evan! | rates of 51 c.c fluid, & 44°5 c. in r.a.v. t 30 minutes and | the two r.a.v J at 197 c.c. and ©.€. Chloride Strengths. = 0°005134 gm = 0°0 ae 9 O = 0:006141 gm. 178 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, ff = ea which means that the fluid: Rakrousn? in the renal venous meshwork must be nor ery low ; (2) a fluid of Snel Osmotic pressure in ea r.a.V. in- creases the of flow through the renal arteries and the rate of output of urine (and percentage of ghlveide ?)—vide Part I.1 To consider the ct mamta er may be drawn from the results of the ete g te periments. irst, as regards t xt eg Phew of urine excreted respectively (1) ie kidneys with the renal a eins intact, and (2) by kidneys with the venous es ut ot, er in 1,168 minutes; or, in other words, with a veno ous Penn the kidneys excreted at the rate of 35°69 c.c. in = 168 minutes, and, with this venous the preceding ten peel ont only four ice. 4-7) were comme enced with the veins closed, hence the above comparison must be qualified by this consideration —a qualification which makes otcbvord that the rates ‘et er th dition tory activity of the kidney in sulphate diuresis”’ is my. Cone ot (though T should omit the “ ghar erg § ”) and agrees 6 with ‘ie conclusion ed i pe te he aor performed especially for the paves the ili bei mater gatured Vand all — taken to avoid leakage. This ‘ae experiment also showed a be res Sie of a venous “‘ supply” of fluid of an osmotic — of 46 as ¢ He with the osmotic strength of 30 of the renal artery fluid do not affect the flow of flu id thro ough the teteceabutar gir and therefore the output of urine, yet changes in the osmotic pressure of the ' Conclusion (1) is founded upon this and two other — experi- ments; conclusion (2 based upon the results of at least a dozen exporiments with different perfusing fluids (some recorded in oncteat e8 C) 1922.] “ Renal Portal”’ System. 179 renal afferent vein fluid outside certain limits have considerable effect both on the rate = flow of fluid through the intertubular plexus and on the output of urin The opening and geet - the renal afferent veins in the preceding periments cannot bes to have any definite e, if any, effe ct on n the Bt e ete the nitrogen stren gths : Losi samples were estimated, the samples were of equal strength in three comparisons (Experiments I, 3, 5) and in the re- maining fo comparison s (Experiments 2, 3, 4, 7) the ‘‘ shut vein’’ and oe one vein’ urines were alternately > stronger Finally, it is of some ini ance t sagictedy carefully the chloride (as NaCl) strengths of the samples of « aheit ein’ open vein”’ urin respectively in the prec seine: experiments 0 on ‘oleate of their theoretical significance. In making these comparisons however it is necessary, in orde n vein ne sa Experiments 7-10, in which, owing to aon ‘sie renal afferent veins being cut behind the cannulae, no such difference of Somer occurred in the aorta when ni venous supply to the © kidaoys wa t off. Comparing so craparci strengths of Ex Sictiroete 2 and 3, in which the veins were a t open, with those of Experiments 4 5, in which the veins we a gon shut (85 in both of these last experi nts is Omit- ted because Shees.a is no O, to balance it), we see that in iapecicnetts 2 and 3. the average sr ee of ‘‘ open vein”’ urine was 0-004261 gm, sampl (three and », ** shut vein’ re »» 0°005077 gm. (thr ree » samples) and in Experiments 4 and 5 the ea pita of ‘‘ shut vein” urine was 0-004981 gm. (two samples) rr >» ‘‘ open vein’ 7 >, 0°005491 gm, ( two sample es) We thus see that it solely depends on whether the experiment is started with veins open or sht “A Be: to whether or not the ‘‘ shut vein 2 and ei mc than the ‘open vein” urine not only because of the change from the one condition to the other but because of the increase of flvid Seale in the aorta due to the shutting of the veins;! . Experi- ments 4 and 5, on the other hand, the ‘* shut vein” urine is already relatively strong in chloride owing to the se fluid ———. in the aorta and when the veins are opened, the only access of strength which the urine undergoes is due to the change of cence dion: hence the in- ! Possibly this factor accounted for the results of Bainbridge, Collins and es s (4). 180 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, crease in chloride strength is less marked than in Experiments 2 and Similar comparison of chloride strengths in Experiments 7-10 ¢ firms this explanation. Thus in Experiments 8, 9, 10 (veins at first ones the average chloride strength of ‘‘ open vein’ urine was 0°005077 gm. akay samples) ; and ap * sub vein 5, at 0:005334 gm. (three » samples) and in Experime pe the shiehie strength of * ae vein ° > urine was 0:005627 gm. open 0°005899 gm. The ie nen - Secaah batven ge ‘open vein ”’ and ‘‘ shut vein” urines of Experiments 8, 9,1 s 0000272 gm., and that of Experiment 7 was 0:000257 gm., these fo ec therefore being eaotialle equal. oe conclude from these sige that the presence or ab- sence of the kidney venous supply makes eee to the chloride strength ot the rape excreted, a con a exo = have already loa from the toad experiments descri bed in Part II, and which will be ther confirmed by the pene of experiments on the Mola frog dese vibed in Part IIT. This conclusion however is opposed to that of Bamnbedee, Collins and — tts p. 359) who maintain that ‘‘ ‘ the urine obtained on a simultaneo al and venous perfusion does not, "9 far as we could e more conducive to the formatio y dilu tel. eee gtr is arterial perfusion alone.”’2 It is impossible “ae me to arte what I consider to esis parodies. gaat the experiments of t authors (and they quote no experi s at all. similar to those I ies ‘aseccthe d) b »ecause, from my PRE rs oe (as well as those of their later paper, 5 are nearly all vitiated by the idea that the renal afferent veins supply the kidney tubules, and f demur entirely to each assumptions that, e used wi Ol nly the these sesh Page of the nevessity.. jet maintaining correct relative flows and i pressures in the renal afferent veins and aorta, and on this pons unt alone most of the. results given are devoid of value from the nesta point of vie APPENDIX F. Mode of Preparation of ‘ Poli pie a le eaneeron of Gurwitsch’s (V.B.—The following ie also applies, with modifications, to - nts - the preparation of frogs for the perfusion experiments per formed by me.) The frog (alwa ays a male, so avoiding the oviducal veins, oviducts and — ovaries) is first deeply anaesthetized with ether, and, when ' My italics. The term ‘‘ dilute” here refers to sodium chloride, the os hopes constituent ti not. = is that = and water usually go ‘together, i, a Bescon a eak in salt, it is also relatively strong in nitrogen, or, in other 2 words, Salieiee i in aekee (see Appendix G, Part III). Bree it Nr NOG EN ple ROR IGE AES OES SESS es alae SO ee Sit en ah ae ST eeeate ett 7? SI 1922.] ** Renal Portal ’’ System. 181 well under, it is stretched vt dorsal side upwards in a large dish with a cork or wax bottom means of cords attached anteriorly to one or two sa of the arms and secs pea to one or two of the digits of the hind limbs (thus es pani little = coer ems in the limbs). The poe ebrum and o of the cere optic lobe then quickly removed (the longitudinal ec sepals ¢ veins “ytog! ‘underneath the 7 Fagor aca not be cut, since loss of blo od fro every 8 t t be avoided, low P being ligatured. Next the urostyle is cut through and raised so that the muscular body wall can be cut along _ side of the vertebral column ed apts (external to the Phe cant: a ow All the seiner bar veins (varying from two to fi mber his species) and small arteries ome shee the dana: ‘iias of the aor ite (all visible ae the vertebral olumn ise en liga ec n the distal side of the lig pe xt the vertebral column is cut through at about the second Or genet sri ay and rem from here to the urostyle (thus effecting the extirpation of the nce hearts which Cushny (17) considers so desirable), with the u Loh parts of the ilia (beware of small branches of the iliac arteries) and the po ortions of muscular body wall at the sides of the body. The stump of the vertebral column I tied to both sides of t dissecting dish to prevent oo movements. The kidneys, the two d con u ear its opening into the rand to its attachment to the kidney, ss it, rapelton’ the iliac artery of that side and allow its extrem nity to rest inside the edge of a glass collecting ny supported in a convenient posi- i t rti no need whate a to serted the ureter—the urine flows quite gr so long as the ureter is not damaged in any way: at the same time it is mehr wai to watch the ureter when secretion has lis oe in order to remed obstruction which ‘om of th wo pairs of awls connected with ee stretched across Pi vaieat lid wall under and anterior to the kidneys, and over the cut ends of 182 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVITI, e e he aac i un wire g "Fina ally, I placed : ihe water in the dish to enable the ven- tral body wall to absorb this. Many frogs o ceaaad on as described lived for more than twenty-four hours, breathing a heart pulsation continu- ing until —- nd. All my experiments were carefully watched and if p a nuch more ifficult to sliuteot these operations from the ventral side of the frog, and I may add that had certain previous mortiantors performed their éx- Aes from the dorsal side ins = d of from the ventral, there would ve been no dispute as to whether they va or had not failed to ligature ail the renal arteries 8 supplying the kidneys, since by the dorsal metho all are eon d plainly visible when the aorta is raised and they are put on the tch. APPENDIX G. Experiments on the Frog ——_ the —— that (the Venous Supply of the Kidneys being eliminated) I e of Pressure in the Aorta (4.e. Greater Pressure and aches a pe flow) yields Urine weak- er in Nitrogen, stronger in Chloride and greater in gy Sao tity, w — Post j a 8. )y stronger in loride but less in Qua : tn other words, the pe of the —— depends on the se the Quantity on the Increase of Pressure in the Aorta (Exp. Ser. A.I.P.). EXPERIMENT 1 — —— strengths of ur urine). Perfusion fluid sop ay 1 gm.! urea crystals dissolved in 2000 c.c. 06% e (tap. —— perfused through a large-bore cannula (out- 20 sera ies Ist tubes from 9°15-10°45. IL + IR = 15 c.c. (90 m.) = Ist 20 ems : te of flow =178 Be. CG; rea per 30 minutes. | At 10: perfusion bottle raised to 30 ¢ 30 cms. Put 2nd pair —— from 11-0-11 30. IL + IIR 30 m. ITL + IItR = 1-25 ce. (30 m.) = #40 cms. urin [11-45-12-15 renal artery rate of es = 115 c.c. per 30 minutes. } It is evident that 30 ems. gave the ptiniite flow for meré excretion in this experiment. Though the flow so sd = su ceed : Same, as will be seen, poe S decidedly weaker in nitrogen. This result ——- not occur if the excre- tion were a mere glomerular filtra ! Experiments in which stronger soluti t ; eatdet not give gach 6 clear results. eis utions than this were tv FU eal Sige ee ee ea ect OL ae aes 1922.) Renal Portal’? System. 183 At 12: “ks I Si baht the perfusion bottle to 30 cms. 30 ems. 4th pair tubes from, 12-30-1-30. IVL+ VR = 17 c.c. (60 m.) = 2nd 30 ems. urine [12°30-1°30 renal artery rate of flow = a 5 c.¢, per 30 minutes. ] At 1°31 perfusion bottle lowered to 20 c 20 cms, Put 5 ir tubes fro 2: VR = 1°05 c.c. (60 m.) = 2nd 20 ems. ae A *45-2°45 ronal artery rate of flow = 46°5 c. per 3 minutes. ] At 2-47 I raised the perfusion bottle Fas ad 40 ¢ Ocms. Put 6th h pair tubes from VIL+ VIR = 1°35 c.c. (30 m photon ‘0 ms. u [3-0-3°30 renal aneey. rate of flow = 159 c.c sia "30 minutes. | Nitrogen Strengths. hs an urine show clearly the effect of the prev 8. pressure—kidney cells, like other living tissues, one well the Hae a habet ( Adami) or law of inertia ( an se 1896) —** tinue that once a cell is stimulated to perform a e he Sa has e in| operation ’’—a law which is quite oe able on the rer pet view of the mode of Sanativt: of the kidne EXPERIMENT 2 (for nitrogen strengths of paps Bg as with the 1 milar ast experiment The results, as will be , the ~_ difference Se that the maximum 40 ¢ P eianets "had re effect in increasing the quantity or urine ‘ciwate d. 20 cms. urine (0°9 c.c. in 150 m.) = 0:000361 gm Ist 30 cms, urin - in 60 m.) Ist 40 cms. (1-2 ¢.c. in 30 m.) = 0000213 gm 2nd 30 c¢ a ee ta n a oo 2nd 20 cms. e2 pal ¢.c.in 60 m.) = 0:000280 gm. de zee fluid = 0-000233 gm. ie fi d other e to the above, sy cones in the fluid escaped v a the cut spohamice (the heart not bein, who and Page 0- a saline frsfine ater), 4 c.c. human urine being — a a 2000 e.c he perfusion fluid, and obtained the same "t will Tnpenne one more experimen viata Aaentennal ae fact that ase of fluid pressure in the in the chloride strength of the ee excreted (thus havin’ ‘so opposite ‘effect to that just described for nitrogen Usiatibees 3 (for gs pestis ie of urine). Identical ila Experiment 2 usion fluid was the same, but I mu remark that, shiscahe labelled 0°6% saline, it was probably Heat to the salt being moist when weighed) of lower strength than 184 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVII, ware a neglected to ascertain ue exact chloride strength of the ing fluid in this experim Queenie — a ‘Strengths (Mohr method d). Ist 20 cms. e (15 c.c¢ 20 m.) Aree 5202 gm. in 1 c.c. Ist 30 cms. urine (1-7 c.c. in 60 m.) = 0-005950 gm. ,, Pe Ist 40 ems. urine (1°9 c.c. in 60 m.) = 0006154 ZMc,; 2? Thus increase of pressure in the arterial fluid increases the chloride strength of the urine—a conclusion I have confirmed in many other exper imen Ps AP. Sircar in all cases estimated for me the chloride strengths. Increase of pressure in the Post-Caval Vein ( Exp. Ser. P.C.I.P.}. geomet 1 (for nitrogen stren ngths of urine). pein fluid and ¢ ceding can- experiment = 0 cm pressu i ed he set going at 8°45. 0 cm, 0-15 10°15 465 Te = 1956. c. (60 m,) = ** 0 em. urine.” [ fe renal artery rate of perfusion = 76 c.c. per 30 ia heart cannula rate of outflow = 71 c.e. Pee 30 minutes. I then raised the end of the heart cannula tubing to 2°5 cms. above the level of the heart, at which height the escaping fluid dropped into a measuring tube. 25 ems. 10°30—11-°0 TIL +IIR = 1-4 ¢.c. (39 m. ) = ‘‘ 2-5 ems. urine.’ ‘ renal ey rate of ean we = 94 c.c. per 30 mi inute - heart te rate of outflow = 82 c.c. per ot minutes. i At 11:2 I raised the heart cannula pays toiec 50 ems. 11°15-12-15 IIL + IMIR 1-0 c.c. (60 m.) =* ay 0 cms. Papoaet Ss renal artery rate of perfusion = = 115°5 e.c. per 30 minut na ane cannula rate of outflow = 59 c.c. per oe 90 utes At 12°17 I raised ‘the hear cannula tubing to 7-5 em 7'5ems. 12°30-2-30 IV + IVR = 1°35 cc. (120 m.) = 7-5 oms. see ( =e renal artery rate of perfusion = 131 c.c. (!) per 30 i | hea: saneuel rate of outflow =nil (!) a postal the aortic tae @ as lost by extravasation or by rupture of a vein under the fap pressure in the post-@aval. i * 5 ae em. 2°45-2-30 VL + = two small drops (45 m.) : +i renal artery rate of perfusion = 167 c. c. per a min | ” hear cannula rate of outflow = 125 c.c. per 30 [ he leakage balay ‘the results of the previous high pressure. N a a **0 cm. amgpen = = 0-0001 126 ** 25 cms. ed = 0001 3; gm. ** 50 a FP °» 0000110 gm. 1922.] ** Renal Portal”? System. 185 75 urine ”’ = 0:000080 gm. Ec.e. sertoting fluid = 0: 000233 gm. Thus, though the Anica’ = the heart cannula pressure from 0 cm. to 2°5 cms. did not lower the of flow of fluid through Fag kidney, this with the rate “a excretion, slightly sgeeteasiba. nit t e 2nd sample of (2°5 cms.) urine in nitrogen compared with pi first. Subse quent samples vot ayilng “exhibit Sepa ies ini in page strongth and rates of excretion of the samples consequent on the raising of the thuid — in the post- cecal vein (and ace capillaries g EXprrRiImMent 2 (for es me chloride strengths of ur ae Identi- cal with, re last Aes nt. Experi iments set 9°30. Ocm. 100-11°0 IL + th ute ak token pote urine.’ ue renal artery rate of tion at = 56°5 c.c. per 30 minutes 5% io cannula rate of outflow = 62 ¢c.c. per 30 At 11-1 I raised the heart cannula tubing to a height of 5 cms. above the ety of the heart (at 11°5 both the ligatured r.a.v. are well filled 0 50 coms. “11> 20-1 60 LL perrieteg ‘4c.c. (30 m.)=** 1st 5:0 ems. urine,” nal ar rate of perfusion = 71 c.c. per 30 eas + heart cannula rate of outflow=48°5 c.c. per 30 Ty es. t 11°52 I raised the heart cannula tubing to 7°5 cms, 7:5 a 12°5-12°35 eae IR = .1:20.¢,c. (30. m.) — ‘7°65. ems. re renal artery rate of perfusion = 66 c.c. per 30 nutes. al rt cannulae rate of outflow = nil. At 12°36 I lowered the hear t cannula tubing to 0 cm, again (when i ae of fluid flowed viet = the tubing). 0 cm. 50-135 =IVL =ietoes (45 m.) = cyst glies jen NAVE contains about 3 times as mu ct as IVL: IIR shorates pir a alight excess over ITIL). [ - ren =o — rate of perfusion = 86 c.c. (!) oft 30 m es. Ps heart “cannula ‘rate of outflow = 78°3 c.c. per | 30 minutes. At I|- o I — the hese cannula ones again to 50 cms. 50 ems. 1:50-2- VL + VR = 1°35 c.c. (30 m.) =“ 2nd 5:0 c¢ urine.” (VR cuinhaicied only a little more dietiie than VL. ( * renal artery rate of perfusion = 79 c.c. per 30 3 minutes, [ - — a rate of outflow = 33 c.c. a At 2 gee i at gag the. pa cannula tubing agin t 0 cm, 0 em. peal VIR Tl c.c, (30 m.)= ok 6 oni drins [ os ee perfusion = 90 c.c. ee 30) utes. [ is hear — rate of outflow = 81 ¢.c. per ‘ of min : Nitrogen iad Chloride Stren hs. ‘Ist Ocm. urine’? = 0000166 gm. Nitrogen, and Chloride in the eigen of 1-9. These chloride quantities are only expressed as ratios because the samples of urine for chloride estimation were in each case taken up 186 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, ‘Ist 5-0 cms = 0000153 gm. Nitrogen, and Chloride in the proportion of 2°0. toT5 . urine” = 0:000126 gm. Nitrogen, and Chloride in the ite pomibel, of : 2-1. **2nd 0 em. urine’? —0-000080 gm. Nitrogen, and Chlocide in proportion of 2: ** 2nd 5:0 cms. urine ” =0-000180 gm. Nitrogen (Chloride N.E.). ** 3rd 0 em. urine ’’= 0-000100 gm. Nitro, gen (Chloride N.E.), Allowing for the unaccountable oliguria of the a Penge: in the middle of the experiment and the natural decrease of r, of 6 Bnd EXPERIMENT 3 (for —— on of urine). Identical with the last experiment. Ex xperiment going at 8°55. Oom. 9-25-1025 IL + IR= 1-4 ce. (60 m.) = ‘*0 cm. urine.’ a renal oe rate of perfusion = 35°5 c.c. per 30m me heart annul rate of outflow = 35-5 ¢.c. per 30 At 10°26 I raised the aes cannula tubing to a height of 2°5 em: 2°5 cms. 10-40-1140 TIL +11R = 1°5¢. c.. (60 m. = ** 25 « ea rate of perfusion = ie cm nie ¢.c. oe pr sti ee heart cannula rate of outflow = 35°5 c.c. per nutes. 0m 1-41 I raised the heart ae apd rage to 5-0 ¢ 50cm 1:25 IIL + WIR = 125 ce. (90 m.) =“ 50 erik urine ( ¥ renal. artery rate of perfusion = 36-3 c.c. ane 30 — tes. | a heart cannula of outflow = 6 c¢.c. per 30 | minute (at 11 vrs the os r a.v. were ‘both well ~~ 1:26 I raised “the Sees cannula tubing to a height of 7°5 8. te alan ee IES Re l:k «. c. (90 m.) = ** 7°5 cms. urine.” nal sory rate of perfusion = = 33°3 c.c. per oa minut es. heart cannula rate of outflow — = At 3: rich I lowered ee Pept cannula tubing to 0 ¢ 0 em. 5-3°55 = V& R = 2 small deta (20'00.) )N i renal artery rate of perfusion = 35 c.c. see 30 minutes. { te a cannula rate of outflow = 33 c.c. per 30 J utes. Chloride 8 deine, 0 ~ urine 0-005678 gm. 2-5 em 0:005848 gm. ce ms. >> 0.005940 gm 75 cms, 0-006124 gm These results confirm those previously obtained. I performed one cer er ken similar to this and obtained similar results, which I not to a mark on the pipette, and the volume up to this mark I did not potatoe ese and all other chloride determinations were made b irca 1922.] — “ Renal Portal’ System. 187 The results of the preceding nine experiments (six recorded and three menti 2) as explained in tho text, that quantity of urine is, 0 depends upon the ‘bre ssure ohaih iis comes from the aorta or the post-caval. The reverse current pasinuaeh described in Part IV fur- ther — 8 ae ntity of urine also depends, other things equal, upon : ns ; : : ae fails—the pressure is not s t to for cigar” Hea ie gh acM di of fluid through the efferent Bi ni $j; on af x other hand, fluid under a very low pressure perfused via the nal vein, and therefore traversing no glomeruli, gives an ample supply. od rg and likewise volume without flow is equally a as is i y the experi- ments of ae Ser. vik C.T.P. On several occasions T nia in “Ale frog the experiment of perfusing saline and ta via the aorta at 40 cms. pressure and then texting the post-caval, the aorta behind the a and the renal afferent veins, but in each case there was so much extravasation e Sel ca arently compensate for lack of flow to a very large ex chant. perhaps altogether vide e.g. the experiments of Bainbridge and Beddard (3), and other thors). APPENDIX H. Reversal of the Current of Perfusing Fluid through the Kidney. pee imenic! Series 1. tee through the frog’s kidney in the e direction to the normal. OP 1. [In this experiment I first attempted t sample of urine with 0°6% saline (tap een —— in the aorta (a rid 2 mats | aocomgp the tubing of the cat ae nts the two r.a.v. _— clamped. The | soy cut cut and the two ra.v. cut behind the. cannulae. The experiment | ins 6 70 po | being im iately after insertion. Be- 1 ween 9°15 and 10°10 less than 0:2 ¢.c. urine r.av. Mics J hg — although between 9°20 and 10°10, of fluid had perfused through the aorta. | Saline + ears At 10- 2 A substituted in the aortic bottle 0°6% in aorta _ ne (tap apitriitg each 2000 c.c. containing closed. human Put collecting echen from 10 30-11: 30 and. collected l c.c. urine [1 ¢.c. = DC {direct current urine) }. [10-30-11-30 ae perfused 695 c.c. (increased flow due to increased osmotic pressure) ]. A fact also ‘usa oo by the ae of the actual flow — te increase of os c pressure in the renal afferent vein (see p. 18 art I). 188 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII; ; 80 fluidin ~ [At 11-30 I clamped the aortic bottle tubing and so | : pe op ed on arterial supply, and opened the two arts. closed. av. nulae <5 perfused the fluid, lately in the sickens ge the r.av. at first at 6 cms. and 1°45 ape one drop of urine obtain [1° ated 45, l.r.a.v. perfused 747 c.c. ‘and the 764 c.c.] ]. Reverse hea Vas 1 opened the aortic cannula and lowered current of the aortic bottle to 9 ems. below the level of the 30 fluid. heart, and ligatured the post-caval vein, so fore- in uid to make its exit from the kidneys by the renal arteries, i.e. reversed the eurrent; I also raised th r ottles 10 24 ‘48 — Between 1°45 and 2-15,4 c.c. (!) of deen excreted [1 c.c. = = RC (re everse joieied [l 45-3 15, 1. r.a.v. perfused 205 e.c.; r. r.a.v. per fused 171 c.c. (the flows between 1-0 and 1°30, i 8. before the r.a.v. fluid -was compelled to meres via the renal ielation; were 215 c.c. and 210 c.c. respectively) ]. pO rp gm. Nitrogen. RC = 6-000140 gm. is 1 ee. oS fluid = “ 000153 gm. Y __ Thus wit e direct Poe current fluid flowi ing through both kidneys ight of about 7i) ¢ r 30 minutes (ie. 1/5 of the total aortic flow—see Appendix B, Part I) at 25 cm ns. pressure via the be ut s derably in the intertubular plexus, while in the rena sa afferent vein the abet m the veins was much higher than ormal, see the RC urine is weaker in nitrogen than the DC urine (vide AhaeG ndix G). EXPERIMENT 2. In this experiment I first perfused 0- 8% saline - water) + 0-05% urea through the aorta at 24 The he eart in th fluid. Both iliac arteries and r.a.v. ligatured. ; Experiment set going at 10°10 anh first pair tubes Arterial put from 10-40-12 perfusion. IL + IR = 1°65 ce. (99 m.) [l ec. = DC}. 10: 40-12°10 renal arteries perfused about 16) o -c. (by an oversight I omitted to note the exact quantity). 1922. ] ‘* Renal Portal’’ System. 189 At 12-15 1 inserted the same cannula under the it Post-caval second pair tube perfusion. L+IIR = 4°65 e.c. (30 m.) [1 rags { 12°30-1-0 the post caval vein pect 1187 ‘nels i {!) most of which was doubtless lost by extra- | ugh t lls of self and the intertubular capillaries or pa ag via the nephrostomes which open into the veins DU 4 ‘000215 gm. ae sae RC = pie rod 1 c.c. perfusing fluid = 0 0001 DC=> ‘005406 gm. "Chloride as NaCl. RC = 0-006154 g ve ual, of pressure ety aes the urine in nitrogen and “ énaiens it ix in onal (Appendix G). The pthiee results are as in the ment (E uring arterial perfusion cats. of flow = 61 ce. per 30 minutes) _ reduced to 15°5 ems. during emcees’ 9p (rate of flow 67¢ per 30 minutes) I obtained “4 0¢.c doe 066 gm. nitrogen s absent P e fusion than during the arterial perfusion, much of the fluid during the former ijoreneed extravasating and therefore not reaching the plexus. t ad oo = gave similar results. experiments the quantities “of urine bore no relation at all a seat elinet ths glomeruli or in the Startabilar plexus: on the other pond, though no strict proportionality apparently existed, et there was a ways some relation between hah volume and rate of flow Experimental Series 2.—Perfusion of the rabbit’s kidney via the renal vein got Ai saline seme ing e.c. human urine in each 100 ems. (water) pressure. jes aaaaueal Female ire The atichpataigs fluid - sorb eager s kept at an almost constant te of ney C Pook arying more than 1° by vi ca of boiling water circulating through a coil of rubber tu placed inside the bottl rature of the fluid in kid of sever lo with two cannulae. During the first of can two renal arteries of the two kidneys, the ren vein of each kidney being lestuoed and a slit 190 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, made in each for escape of fluid. During the d part of the experiment the left kidney xperiment set going at 10°50, both ureters excret- ing freely. Put lst pair tubes from 11°30-12°0. Artery perfusion IL = 5-0 c.c. 30 [1 ec. = DCIL] in both IR = 26 cc. °9™-) flee. = DCIR] kidneys. 11-30-12°0 bottle perfused 110 c.c. = 18°3¢.c. per 5 minutes. At 12-01 inserted the cannula of the right kidney int e al vein and ligatured and slit the perfusion was 28:3 c.c. per 5 minutes, i.e. one- third faster than during the first part of the experiment. Artery Between 12°39 and 12-58 I had collected pe usion in left kidney ; from left kidney 4°75 v.c. (28 m.) [1 c.c. = DCIIL] enous from tie right kidney 31-8 c.c. (28 m.) [lee. = RCITR} usion in right Thus the reverse current in the right kidney kidney. produced 6°6 times as much! urine as the direct : : i owing to the cannula having a larger orifice). = 0°000546 gm. Nitrogen. DCR =0-000373em.__,. DCTIL = 0°000693 gm. RCIIR (1)? = 0000453 gin. res RCTIR (2)3 = 0-000546 gm. ' Both kidneys had had all nerve connections severed so that this factor, as regards quantity of urine, was absent. All the renal nerves in the frog experiments, on the other hand, were left intact. Another objection whic ay be urged against these experiments e excretion of the vein-perfused kidney in these experiments should still have been less instead of DQ 5 3 g S gg et ° = fe) : & fa) g : = Lox J oO 5 ct the serum only contained 0:15%, i i con t ©, so that in my experiments absorptio should certainly have occurred on the neo-Ludwig view. : minutes. * Second sample taken during the first four minutes. Se 1922.] ‘© Renal Portal’ System. 191 Thus the left kidney urine in fete parts of the experiment was stronger in trogen than the right kidney urine, but the air urine strengths were more nearly equal towards the end of the experiment. EXPERIMENT 2. Mole rabbit. The experiment was similar to the set going at 1°40 and put tubes from 2-17-3°30. Artery perfusion IL =7°9c.c. (73 m.) [1 e.c. = DCIL] in both IR = 1°3 c.c. (73 m.) [1 ¢.c. = DCIR] kidneys. (Soca oft be: Ae on perfused 135 c.c. = 112 ¢.c. per At 3 301 a wea the current in the right kidney. Artery perfusion 3°55-4-10, 35 c.c. perfused = a > : c. per 5 minutes ; in left (41 c. per 5 minutes, 4 kidney ; so the rate of perfusion in iy poe p part of aa venous [22 the rte was about the same asin the first part. pestusion Between 4°17 and 4°45 I had collected in right kidney. from the left kidney 1-5 c.c. (28 m_.) [1 ¢.c. = DCIIL} from the right kidney 8.5 c’c.(28 m.) [l c.c. = RCIIR} Thus the eh sie di current in the right kidney pro- ie ae in the second part of the fhe ase 5-6 ie nica as the direct current in the left kidney, hough in the first cre of the experi- ment t t kidney ex anew over 6 times as much settee as the right kidne Der. = 0°000186 gm. Nitrogen. gm. DCIIL = 0:000226 a = RCIIR = 0:000186 gm ‘i 1 c.c. perfusing fluid = 0000213 gm. Thus the reverse current urine is not much weaker than the direct current urine. I performed eee other experiments similar to the above and with similar results. In one of them the urines of both kidneys with arterial perfusion n were exac ratte ss: in strength ‘ 000320 gm.) and nearly equal ~ pethenss A ene cx 3. 75 ¢.c.;: DCIR = 3°9 c.c.) but ae gee was as us es it artry-perfased soon All someralar ce capillaries contain dye ye no trace of capsules. Large space rior inner and outer capsule walls. Dye here and there in intertubular capi in lumina of col and convoluted tubules. Lumina of tubules very wide. In certain small 192° Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIII, reas the nuclei of the convoluted tubule cells x ere stained blue and re ea us blue ae in cells bat i in most areas I could detect no d Right ii etalon ‘idee Little or no dye to be pals in the glomeru ide capillaries but in a few places the capillary epithelium was stained blue, also the - Ne cot & = 3 e B cA J E @ 3 oe 5 S les e many areas the nuclei of the pratorn H tale cells were stained blue and the cells contained granules I give these facts for what they are worth, The most significant of them are that dye is never to be found in the. capsule cavities, where, of all places, nondcding to the glomerular filtration theory, it should be found, and that the areas in which the convoluted tubule cells were stained blue are much greater in the vein-perfused than in the artery perfused kidne LITERATURE REFERRED TO IN PARTS I-IV. 1. Bahl, K. N. Quart. Jour. Microscop. Science, Mo 64 (1), 1919, p. 67. 2. Barcroft. Jour, Se hag Vol. 25, 1900 3. Bainbridge and Beddard. s Ohecital Jenceal: Vol. 1, 1906, p. = 4. Bainbridge, Collins and hae ies. Proc. Royal Soc. Lond., Vol. 5. Bainbridge, Menzies and Collins. Jour, Physiology, Vol. 48, 1914. 6. eg W. M. ‘* Principles of General Physiology ,” 2nd edition, 7. Becker and Ludwig. Zeit. f. rat. Med., = Aide 1851. 8. Beddard, A. P. Jour. Phy siology, Vol. 9. Bles. Proc. Royal Soc. Lond. , Vol 2 (By 1897 1898. 10. British Association Repo rt. + On ‘the gg oe ca Balance Sheet’ of the Individual Tissues,’ 427, it 1] die. Proc. Royal Soc. Lond VoL S aro 1914, p- phe 12 Brodie and Cullis.. Jour. P Physiology. von 34, 1906. 13 Brodi as Mackenzie. Proc. Royal Soc. Lond., Vol. @ (B), 1914, p. 5$ 14, amerer. Zeit. f. Biol., Bd. 23, 1901. 15.- Collinge. Tous Anat. Ph ysiology, Mo 50, p. 37. 16. Cullis. Jour. Physiology, Vol. 3 17. Cushny, A. R. The § Satie s - onal 18. Dahlgren and Kepner. © Princ ciples My Animal Histology ,” 1908. 19. De Sousa. Jour. Ph hysiology, Vol. 24, 1899 20. Gurwitsch. Pfluger’s Archiv. f. d. s Physbiogte Bd. 91, 1902. 21 y. Amer. Jour. Physiology, Vol. 6, 22 cronies ** Stud. <1 Ms iol. Inst. zu str Leipzig, 1868. bo Bd SE oy oO 5 = 2 ® ice ay : 5 n ** Han idtaek der Physiologie, alee Ba 24. Hill, ‘f aL De, ** Recent 26. aes l’ Acad. des S 26. pars ny Kaiser Akad, eget obra peta sete Wien., Bd. 47 27. Kolin and ‘Lea. Verh. d. naturhist.-med. Ver. z. Heidelberg, Ba. 28. Lamy and Ma ayer. aoe ology. Path. gen., Tome 8, 1906. pub. by Macmillan}. er 1913 (inglish trans. Advances in Physiology and Bio-Che- ho ad — R=) 22.] “ Renal Portal’? System. 193 iSpy sath Pfluger’s Archiv. f. d. ges. Physiologie, Bd. 17, 1878 nat. Anzeig. Bd. 1,1886. OtDehegban Anat. Anzeig., Bd. 36, 1910, p. 355. oo hte sueciee Bd. 3t, 1911, p. 36. O’Donoghue. Anat. Anz Bd. ae 1913, p. 135. Regaud atid Policard. ©. R. Soc. de Biologie, inary 55, 1903, p. 1028; also ‘‘ de Histologiques ”’ in same ame volt Rosenberg. Arch. f.d. ges. Physiol., hewn: Bd. 4 46, 1860, p. 355. Schmidt. Pfluger’s Archiv. f. d. ges. Physiologie, Bad. 4 , 1891. Shore. Jour. Anat. Physiology, Vol. 34 (N.S. 14), 1900, p. 398. Shore. Ibid., Vol. 16 (N.S.), 1 Sollmann. Amer. Jour. Physiology, Vol. H Starling, E. H. ‘+ Principles of Human Physiology,” 1912. Vernon. Jour. Physiology, Vol. 35, 1 more a - R. Hebdom. des Séances oe la Soc. Biol. Paris, Tome Woodiana.. " Zool. Anzeig., Bd. 28, 1905, p. 737 Woodland. Proce. Zool. Soc . Lond., Me Pe 886. Woodland. Nature, June 13th, 190 Woodland. Zool. Anzeig., Bd. 35 1910. 6 Woodland. Quart. Jour. ite tl Vol. 39, 913, vee Meese ngton. Annals Trop. Med. and Pacasit te *s, 1912, Nees eee —_ aod mae CO a Ee Oe gnas. 11. Concerning a Bon Image. By Joan van Manen. It is not generally known that members of the Bon-frater- nity may be met in easily accessible places like Darjeeling, a current—not to mention manuscripts—which continues to be published and sold in the Bon-po religious centres. Data furnished on this point by Rockhill and Grenard endorse such szaufer’s work itself. 2. By the same Author: Ein Siihngedicht der Bonpo. Mewoirs of the Imp. Ac. of Sciences, Vienna, XLVI, 1900. 3. The same: Uber ein Tibetisches Geschichtswerk der Bonpo, T‘oung-Pao, Second series, Vol. II, No. 1. Leyden, 1901. 4. Sarat Chandra Das, The Tibetan Text of the rGyal Rab h ? Bon Kyi Jung-nas, of which No. 3 is a review and discus- sion Concerning this last publication it is a curious detail that my copy bears the imprint ‘‘ Calcutta, Bengal Secretariat Book Depot, 1915,” whereas Laufer, in 1901, refers to it in the following terms: ‘‘ Vor ciniger Zeit iibersandte mir der Indi- sche Pandit Sarat Chandra Das den in der Presse von Darjeeling hergestellten, 61 Octavseiten umfassenden Abzug eines tibeti- schen Werkes, das den Titel fiihrt: rgyal rabs bon gyi hbyung Laufer’s book and the copy sold by the Calcutta depot 196 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, seem identical; the bibliographical puzzle involved is imma- terial for our present purpose. 5. e may expect that Hastings’ Cyclopedia of Religion will soon bring some further valuable matter on this subject, but the references to it will find a place under the heading Tibet, and the volume containing T is not yet out. 6. It may be noted that in Rockhill’s edition of Sarat Chandra Das’ Journey to Lhasa and Central Tibet, new edition, London, 1904, though it gives on pp. 271-276 some interesting details about the Bon-pos, the editor states on p. 284 in a foot- uote that he has there left out ‘‘ several pages of text on the ethics, etc., of the Bonbo, but they are so technical that I have been obliged to omit them.” The original edition of pees Das’ record is very difficult to obtain or even to con- sult. Lastly, mention may be made of L. de Milloué, Bod-Youl - ou Tibet, Paris, 1906, Annales du Musée Guimet, Bibl. d’ Etu- des, Vol. 12, Ch. VI, Religion, pp. 153-162, which contains a summary, mainly based on the data of Sarat Chandra Das, without furnishing essentially new information. _ So much as to the literature. Three descriptions of Bon deities have been published to my knowledge. The first again by Sarat Chandra Das, in the J .A.S.B., Vol. 50, Part I, No. IM. The second in J.B.7.S., Vol. I, passim, 1893. It is not expressly stated whether Sarat Chandra Das is also the author of this contribution, but that seems likely. It is richly illustrated, presumably, as to the great majority of the gods represented, from pictorial representations, not images. Yet the data furnished by both pictures and description are con- fusing and vague, giving little definite information. The third contribution to the subject, first in point of time, is by Hodg- son, who gives the pictures of the “ chief deities’’ of the Bon- pos in the J.R.A.S. for 1861, Vol. 8, p. 396. This volume has not been within my reach as it is lacking in the Imperial Lib- rary set and the copy of the Asiatic Society was out on loan every time I asked for it. The reference is taken form Schlag- intweit’s article Uber die Bon-pa Sekte in Tibet, in the pro- ceedings of the R. Bavarian Ac. of Sciences, Philos.—Philol. Section, 1866.2 Hodgson’s illustrations were also based on we ! This was written before the last volume, completing the work, had en issued; and e hope was inspired by a cross-reterence justifying ? Through the courtesy of the Secretary the volume was recalled for me after I read this paper before the meeting of the Society. The plates 3 4 4 i I Bd 4 ie a 1922. ] Concerning a Bon Image. 197 pictures, not on sculptures or other plastic representations. The pictures in the J.B.7.S. are exceedingly crude and undistine- tive. That me Bon-pos possess, however, a rich variety of idols in plastic form is evident from the information quoted by Schlagintweit (op. cit., ig a p. 9) from the Annales [de la propagation. ae la foil, Vo 1. He he Pca found in the monastery they vai a which had been denuded of its ‘ Gétter- schmuckes,’ a great number of plastic representations, whilst the walls were covered with frescoes Desgodins (Le Thibet, 2e ed., Paris, 1885, p. 202) laments : ‘The learned Pon bo say indeed that their Kuntu-zang-po (Supreme Spirit) is inmstate absolutely perfect, and they concede him even a certain eternity during which he created all beings. If they only yee there, one could, by means of a certain amount of explanation, arrive at some silabiaad- ing; but then they give their immaterial god a wooden or brass _body, in which they make him oa whom they wor- shi It is then evident that Bon-po idols must exist, but in the fliestere I have accessible I have found no authentic descrip- ti idol 911, described as ‘ Divinité Bon-po’ and ‘ Image Bon-po.’ No. 316 is of ‘bois peint sculpté, cavalier vétu a la chinoise’; No. 317 ed by animal-headed other garudas, ‘trés grossiérement traités,’ with an image of Gshen-rab-mi-bo in the upper part As Bacot’s collection numbers over 300 items and only three Bon-po images form part of it, one Chinese i in treatment, and the two others of rough w orkmanship, the inference is that truly Tibetan Bon-po images of good workmanship must be very rare. Grenard, in his Tibet (English translation, London, 1904), which has a valuable paragraph on the Bon religion n in chapter IX (Religion), states, on p. 325: ‘‘They profess a profound veneration for an idol called Kepang, made of a mere block of given do not furnish material throwing much light on the subject dis cussed as ere. From the brief accompanying text I quote only the follow- ing pass _ Teen Vihérs are still numerous and wealthy in Tibet. ignorant as his fellows, give one word of information as to the origin of is er etc, But Hodgson thinks that ‘‘ there can be no doubt it is an integral art of Buddhis 198 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, wood dressed in bits of stuff.’ (Is this Sarat Chandra Das’ Pehar ? From all the above it will be understood that I felt con- siderable satisfaction when some time ago a Bon idol was offered to me for sale by its owner, a local Bon “lama” in Ghoom. All the more so as the image was of excellent work- manship and decidedly better than many of the modern Darjeeling Bazar shops. As the original owner is himself a some collateral matter connected with Bon problems. What I submit here is the result of extensive inquiries amongst all the Tibetans I consulted as likély to be able to throw light on the matter. The name of the god was given as TINC'A", gsang ba, which seems to mean The Secret One, or, perhaps, the Mystery God, the god of mysticism, though the word in the ordinary language has only the meanings ‘ secret,’ or ‘ mysticism ’ as a substantive and ‘to secrete’ as a verb. As we shall see it seems a Bon equivalent or counterpart of ANNO AAAT gsang- > bdag, an epithet of Phyag-rdor, BAT ER, or Vajrapani. he image is made of brass, exactly 6 inches high, and 54 inches in width at its widest point, from crown to crown of the two prostrate figures bearing the god. The workmanship is good, though not extremely delicate, and the lines are pure with fairly refined details. The bottom of the image is closed by a sheet of copper on which a double or crossed dorje, Feqyy, is engraved. Probably the hollow foot contains some auspicious material, as usual in Tibetan images. When shaking the image, some- thing rattles inside, perhaps some grains of rice. At the back a small square piece is let in, slightly under half an inch square. This has in all probability served to allow of the inser- . . ces ? bese, cal = = tion either of the “life-tree, AF] Ac’, or of a mantra, SA", which properly consecrates the idol. On a base (AS54F, pad-gdan, lotus-seat), the traditional lotus stool, two figures lie on their backs. On them stands the god in fierce” form, wide-legged and with arms extended. In the 1922.] Concerning a Bon Image. 199 two other snakes. In that case the necklace itself would prob- ably also be a snake, and then there would be three snakes bered as to the length of the hair worn by Bon-po lamas. The Nying-ma-pas also wear their hair long when becoming hermits, SAA, and Percival Landon mentions in his Lhasa (p. 123 of the one-volume edition, p. 227 of Vol. I in the two-volume edition) that long hair is the mark of the immured Nyen-dé- kyi-buk hermits. (According to oral information this is the name of a monastery, ATIF HVAT, the happy caves of upper Nyang.) 200 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{N.S., XVIII, On the head there is.a diadem bearing five skulls, topped by ornaments, probably representing jewels. The ears have long earrings. The image is in its natural metal but the hair of both the god and the garuda are painted red. Though the god is of the fierce type his expression is fairly natural and not as hideous as in most Lamaistic ‘ fierce’ gods. He has a third eye, the so-called fierce eye, Raye a RAT or hon. al in addition to the definitions given by Griinwedel, Mythologie des Buddhismus, Leipzic, 1900, p. 100, I am told flat palm of the hand, exhibits the dharmadanamudra, SAY a a4 STF; the finger position of religious gifts, the bestowal of religion. The figure to the tight holds up the arm ata right angle at the elbow, and joins the thumb and the middle finger, slightly bending the remaining fingers so that the hand is not perfectly flat. This seems the abhaya mudra, QEAIAT mA, the sign or gesture of fearlessness, safety or pro- tection. This is the opinion of some of my Tibetan friends. But some European friends disagree and name the two the vyakhyana and bharada mudras. Experts in iconography may perhaps be able to draw conclusions as to the identity of the figures from this detail. It should be considered whether there is a significance in the fact that these mudras are shown not in front of the figure, but hidden at the back, behind the legs, so that the act of service is evident and the symbol of religious action hidden. The two mudras seem the same as *) 1922.] Concerning a Bon Image. 201 those in several images of Tara in my possession. I am told that often the temple gods" = modern Hinduism also exhibit these two particular mu The two figures are cake save for a loincloth. They may wear earrings, but this cannot be said with certainty for it may be that the lengthening of the ears is meant as in the flesh itself. The hair is done up in a top knot, is otherwise short without tresses, and shows no ornament. This t top knot may, however, represent the ushnisha. Both figures seem to represent males, and the total absence in either of them of female-breast indication has its value in connection with what follows. Finally, both Desi stretch out one leg with a slight bend upwards (not flat) and cross the other leg over it, showing that they are copra as alive. The attitude of the two bearing figures i is far more one of adoration, worship and self-humiliation than one of aaiton or defeat. It seems less as if the god tramples them down than that they support him with their bodies out of their own free will. One of my consultants describes their attitude as one of venera- = ite eat ton, SIRTGAAT BS SEN The whole type of the — is, however, hiovegeginenats that of the Lamaistic chos-skyong o nda Lamaist - whom I asked whom he thought the j image epic’ answered at once Phyag-rdor, bb ee oa as and then, as a second guess, Hayagriva, Rta-mgrin, Staley As remarked before Vajra- pani is also called RING'S], gsang-bdag, the Lord of Mys- ticism or Secrets, the Secret Lord Getty, in The Gods of Northern Buddhism, P. 134, states under Beg-tshe, potoeging to the Dharmapala clas “Little is known of the ferocious warrior- ok 1, Beg- -tshe, who seems to be San neaen by the Northern Buddhists with ite whom some of the sects also call ‘ Protector of Horse ips ording to Getty, p. 50, Vajrapani has several Dharma- pala forms such as Vajrapani- Acarya and Acala-Vajrapani, as well as a Garuda form. As to the name ANC q, gsang-ba, I have not been able to trace any authentic and satisfactory quotation illustrating it. Yet Sarat Chandra Das, J.B.7.S., Vol. I, Pt. I, appendix, p- 2, mentions ‘the mystic god called Sangspo,’ whom Gshen- of occult powers of Bon mysticism’, and in ibid., Pt. If, ap- pendix IT, p. 13, he refers to a god ‘dPal mgon gsang va lag- 202 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, chen,’ who may or may not be the same. In the Rgyal rabs bon gyi hbyung gnas, the name seems not to occur. Ina little manuscript Bon treatise in my possession, called NN iesia ~~ na ~—_— . 7 7 . . —- Ld . ce \ = ANS AJAY Ag ad Axe ley 34 AJR] ; (Taken) from the be ginning of the precious garland of murder,” the name is men- tioned several times without any further explanation, but in ‘the form of ANAS, gsang-ba hdus-pa, the united, collective, concentrated, Secret One. Another name occur- ring in the same book, &" "Zar sku- -TSy g ook, al AAA A a sku-gsum khro-rgyal, Three-body-anger-king, Angry-Trinity king, is said to be a synonym for the same god. S.C. D. mentions, in his diction- ary, a Drag-gsum AAI, “ the three fierce ones (the Bon trinity).” For the interpretation of the image I was first told the popular version based on the antagonism between the Bon- chos and Lamaism, namely that the two prostrate figures represent the Buddha being trampled underfoot by Gshen-rab, ee Annales, Vol. 37, p. 415): ** His feet trample down human elngs, often only two in number, and then Shakyamuni and fe Later on I had an occasion to discuss the image with m riend the Lama Padmacandra who made several interesting observations concerning it. He, too, holds that the two pro- strate figures represent the Buddha and Padmasambhava. In Support of this opinion he quotes a significant shloka from the Bon rituals, the invitation or citation of the god, AF Rag, spyan-hdren, which runs as follows :-— J act wagglt Wagar aqa's ae ’ Agr TETRA RASA SF RAA STA TART RA | “ From the seat formed by t : and Shakya Thubpa med by the prostrate Padmasambhava Pe ee eee 1922. ] Concerning a Bon Image. 203 We beseech the Bon god Flaming-Fierce-Power to come here.” [ Hara, snol-ba, here rather stretched out, ly ing down, than locked together. | According to Padmacandra Fierce-Power, or Strong-Fierce, is a name for Tamdin, ERIS, or Hayagriva, and he calls our image a Bon-no Tamdin. Hayagriva is said to stand on Ba AeA, Vishnu, and qaS Sy Ishvara or Mahadeva. I append here the following observations all furnished by Padma- candra. The Bon religion possesses all the gods of the Vajrayana, =" EMA", Padmasambhava’s ‘ religion,” BN Moreover, Padmasambhava's reform or mission was in the nature of a compromise between Buddhist and indigenous, AR, practices. He left three forms of worship untouched :— —_— ON ~— 2! eee Se ee | “Padma did not subdue three Bon practices.” These practices are :— L easier, devapuja, worship of deities, with refer- ence to the gods. 2. ANS ey, siddhikarana, producing success or for- ~~ tune, with reference to human beings, ourselves. ~— ~~ 3. RAN a5 y, with reference to the demons. For the meaning of mdos see the detailed article s.v. in 8. C. D’s dictionary. A good picture of an exceptionally large mdos is to be found in Customs of the World (London, Hutchinson & Co.), Vol. I, p. 569. The mdos is a kind of artificial spider’s web, made of coloured threads, and may be often found near Tibetan habitations, together with rejected torma cakes. There is also another Bon practice, Egy, ju-thig which, according to the dictionaries, is a drawing of lots by threads of different colours. In Lamaist rituals and worship coloured threads play an important part. Other practices, such as 204 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, yea" protection (by amulets), need further investigation. > ~ There are three forms of Bon worship, NY BSAA AS | They are :— 1. ATR ET, white, 2. anya, black, 3. BS, mixed, grey (lit. variegated, piebald, many- coloured) 1. ARATSTAC., unsuppressed. : FAN SF ARINC’, completely suppressed. . Ray ARITA, half suppressed. The white and grey varieties are stil] practised but of the black variety only books are to be found, and the practice is forbidden and made penal _ ,~e preservation of the above three practices is summat- ised in the saying :— "rT vais . pa ae 5 BAS AN AISA A535 ARAS | “ Except the three practices connected with the gods and success, all (others) have been suppressed (been put a stop to).” [AN in the above saying, is ‘‘concerning,” but not the substantive ANAT, “circumambulation ” or “ turning round ”’, which includes also the turning of the prayer wheel. nother saying, embodying a command of King Tisrongde tsan, Aar3e o85, alludes to this :— N13" ZT ARS Wayay'9= WA 3515 | “Let no Bon-po come to (the monastery of) Samye; let them leave (expel them from) the country.” [ AIC", imperative of QaTa = NCAT J It was mentioned above that the Bon religion possesses all the gods of Padmasambhava’s religion. It is even held that the true Af 5 2 Ssraqensr is essentially the same as SANE ISH oS en 1922.] Concerning a Bon Image. 205 Padmasambhava’s Tantrism. I suppose that this statement as to be interpreted in the sense that the compromise effected by Padmasambhava has resulted in mutual concessions and adaptations which make it difficult to say where, in present practice, the purely native and the Buddhistic foreign elements begin and end. So it is said that in the 4 RE there are nine progressive vehicles, ATTASTTAAY, and that also in the Old Sect, that of the Nying-ma-pas, there are nine succes- + . s pny Bony . 7 ° _ . oad 7 meee rere! sive vehicles: SA] 5° RZ] ayg5] frac] gs bea | Each ceremony or cho-ga, Sy, is divided, in both religions, into three parts. NAAR’, beginning, prologue — ~ 2. acaTala’, substance, essence, body. 3. Bar ay, winding up, final, epilogue. These three divisions are sub-divided under nine heads : iL HAN AT, refuge. 2. qx QRS", blessing, consecration. 3. HFA, invitation, citation. 4 RARE puja, worship. 5. qss4', praise, invocation. 6 Aa, japa, repetition, recitation. 7: WAAAY confession. oe, eee Se 8. ETA or as ES. : meditation. 9. ATA, mangalam, benediction. These nine together constitute one complete ritual or ceremony, 4 SNSAC | The similarity in terminolgy, doctrines and practices of the two religions is explained as follows. The history of reli- 206 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, gion in Tibet knows of two periods of religious persecution and eclipse, the BVABINAA SST and the Aa AN’ ria’ssr The obscuration period of the (Buddhist) religion ae was under the reign of Langdarma, O|C°RR"S]" and the Bon- gn of Langdarma, AIES<’51, : aa a ‘ eclipse was under that of RNC Tisrongdetsan. In olden times the kings of Tibet had two ministers (or perhaps this was especially so for Tisrongdetsan and some others), namely a profane minister with nationalistic leanings in religion, a ‘‘bad’’ one, and a (Buddhist) religious one, or “good” one. The bad minister is called 4 can ° Sod . See ~ . Bp FNS ST BSNS TAS | ARIA Ry aaa RAS ATTA Taga AS | 09 tal ala em | n'y" rn ee tenement crag pe cp apere TSLAFAIAGSL SN] ASAT ARTA DAN GAA rae le nA Lain, ms, uae ve ae NAFANY SHAS | naar . Q "zy" Ray “SAT SARA CRBE, BSO ea liale ar RAAT] AST V SPAR Aa aaESN TAR] 35 BRC SRT TAS OUTER | “He who is called the Secret One, after having taken form as the Fierce Teacher Gshen-rab, is also called the Rta-mgrin— Phyag-rdor—Garuda Trinity. Those who are trampled under his feet are the male and female Black Devils. These two [Lexicographical note. S37 657145" is a ARS AT, bsdud tshig, abbreviation, ellipse, for ERS | ZT EA | 1922.] Concerning a Bon Image 209 Sis | ANS, the three, or trinity of, Hayagriva, Vajrapani ~ ~~ and Garuda. | That the Garuda plays an important part in the Bon teaching is well known, and the kinship of our image with Hayagriva and Vajrapani i is already sufficiently proved by the incident quoted before, of the identification of the Bon god with the two Lamaistic divinities by a Lamaist friend. There demoniacal or mythological at all. Iconographically it is difficult to believe that they either represent the Buddha and noted, however, because it may prove to furnish a clue to the solution of the problem. The tigure to the right has a little circle engraved between the eyebrows, or rather above the nose on the forehead, It isa perfect little circle and does not look like a third eye, oblong. The other figure lacks it. One of my informants says that this is the Urna or apanga, called in ‘Tibetan Ex" * which sends out the marvellous ray of light ses, | called sIEt "IQR! . See J.’s dictionary under this word. ayaa. The Tibetan belief is that this is not a circle of hairs, but one single hair curled into a spiral. This mark, my informant holds, indicates that the figure showing it is indeed meant for the Buddha. Padmasambhava would be naturally without it. If the circle represents an ordinary tilaka, faa, then no inference can be drawn pee it as to the sex of the wearer, s both men and women wear tilakas. Who the Rutas are (55, elsewhere written = ), has also to be determined. An obvious nee might suggest the Indian Rudra (Griinwedel, Mythologie, p. 180). Sarat Chandra Das also lets the Rudras play an enpartbie part in the Bon hierarchy of superhumans. The important place they occupy in Lamaist tantrism may be learned from Sir John Woodroffe’s Shakti and Shakta, or Avalon’s Tantrik Texts, Vol. VII, a Shrichakrasambhara. Padmacandra says that Ags 210 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, ~~ aC“ says = x52) = rakshasa. We leave this question open for the moment. Cf. Getty (op. cit.), p. 65, on this matter, and also 8. C. D., Dict., under the various combinations of drag-po, pinind We have now considered the subject from all sides and have to sum up. Our conclusion is: that the Bon character of our image is well established, that the name given to the god, ANS’, is authentic, that his prototype is the Lamaistic chos skyong, dharma- pala, more especially Vajrapani, that he is allied to Rta-mgrin and also connected with the Garuda, but that the character of the two figures which support him needs further determination. one of the explanations of these figures given above quite tally with their expression as sculptured. Nevertheless, he Bon-po owner’s indications cannot be summarily rejected because the legend told by him might, if elaborated and cor- rected, after all prove to contain a satisfactory solution of the apparent difficulty. Whilst wishing to reserve the Black shown by his attributes. A wider and deeper question is raised by the query whether in general the “fierce” forms of the Lamaistic pantheon are original, that is to say, have naturally the origins of the skulls, blood, skeletons, intoxicating drink, daggers, flames and other “angry ” paraphernalia of Lamaism, and incidentally of much, especially is Bengal, connected with the wider subjects of Tantrism, Kali worship and the like. To me it seems that in Lamaism we find a fusion of two distinct EEE ee 1922.] Concerning a Bon Image. 211 though apparently similar elements, namely Hindu Shivaism and Mongolian Bonism, which for want of a better word may be provisionally called Seaiaataits. In conclusion, having had to say a good deal about Mick pani, “thik incidentally remark that the Raja of Sikkhim held be his incarnation, though Amundsen, Primer of Standard Tibetan, p. 85, states that it is ‘ the Abbot of Trashi- lunpo’ who is his ‘incarnation. And now, may god Gsang- ba be lenient to us and forgive the sinner who wrote this PLATE VI. VOL. XVIII, 1922. As. Soc. BENG., JOURN. Mls ry ‘H9OVWI NOG ‘O1OUd BAVA * Suis v¥weeesttevescsss.,, Silo is Hi era Pia od a we “Nt "aR Pips. rs ab Wai (faa # 12. Pearl Formation in the Indian Pearl Oyster. By JAMES HORNELL. recent results obtained by others, to stand by themselves as strictly conformable to the actual facts. Pearls in the widest sense may be defined as more or less rounded masses of shell substance made up of concentric layers laid down around a nucleas. The shell substance may e of any one of the four layers normally present in such shells as the pearl oyster or two or more of these may alternate in the layers. Some pearls consist wholly of periostracum ; these are brown and on account of the lack of lime in their com- sometimes found in the edible oyster. Hypostracal pearls are, in my experience, the most numerous of all in the local pearl Many of these become the pseudo-nuclei of nacreous see pearls, the real nuclei being of course the nuclei of the calco- spherules themselves. Not infrequently contiguous pearls of this nature fuse into a compound mass 0 irregular shape, one form of the baroque pearl, useful to the imaginative jeweller for 214 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, the production of quaint pearl ornaments. One such compound mass I have seen worked into the form of a mulberry fruit, mounted with a spray of golden leaves. Other artists have utilized such masses in the production of grotesque figures when from time to time jewellery of this design is fashionable. True gem-pearls are those composed of lustrous nacre and of symmetric shape, round or pear-shaped preferably. These As will be seen later, these gem-pearls have frequently some foreign intrusive body as the nucleus, whereas the less valuabie pearls found in and around the muscle insertions have some particle produced by the oyster itself, as the centre of deposi- In all cases an envelope of secreting tissue—the pearl sac—surrounds the developing pearl. Inthe case of gem-pearls this arises usually as an invagination of the external epithelial layer, for the intrusive foreign body is generally found in th first instance between the inner surface of the shell and the secretory surface of the mantle. The latter being delicate ___ Uyst-pearlsin number are relatively very scare as compared with muscle pearls, and large cyst pearls, the true gem-pearls, are again relatively much scarcer than small sizes. The former constitute the so-called Orient pearls, pre-eminent above all for their lustre and purity of colour and for a peculiar suggestion of translucency not seen in other pearls. : € origin of these pearls has been a battlefield of theory in the past ; the resultant confusion appears to me to be due in large part to the lack of recognition that there are these two main categories of pearls, differing in origin, and that in the 1922.] Pearl Formation in Indian Pearl Oyster. 215 tods worm (Jameson and Boutan), and in certain fresh-water mussels in one locality this is replaced by a little commensal mite (Kiichenmeister). In the case of the Ceylon and Indian pearl oyster, Prof. Herdman and the author found it in many cases to consist of the dead body of a larval Cestode. To this we gave the name TJ'elrarhynchus unionifactor, and we correl- lated it with an advanced larval presence of typical form found commonly encysted in the walls of the oyster’s intestine. At a later date we pean that the adult of the latter worm is found in the sexually mature condition in the intestine of an oyster-eating ray, Rhinoptera javanica. At one time we intercalated an intermediate host, one of the file- Fic. 1.—Three cestode larvae extracted from i found i idee Ps ‘the pearl-oyster (Gulf of Mannar). A. is the youngest phiaee found; B. is an elongated form (older) occasionally foced. while C., seen of a vascular aga as also a terminal excretory pore. Note in all the minutely spinous of the collar sins the multitude of sis calcare- ous ated dennaes filling the body reg fishes (Balistidae) but eventually the species found in the file- fishes was found to be of a ——— species, not parasitic in the larval condition in pearl oyste 1 have, however, come now to the conclusion that the sphenionl cestode larva found in abundance in the tissues of the pearl oyster and ee. as a nucleus in cyst pearls from the same mollusc, is a younger stage of the undoubted Tetrarhynchid larvae pines n its intestine. Possibly it is the larva of some species of Velicehaians or other closely related genus, but this is a subject for further investigation. arl oysters are free from this parasite. Usually the gills contain hundreds, often very minute and never differ- ing in any appreciable degree from those shown in figure | 216 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |N.S., XVIII, where three larvae, freed from their cysts and in different stages of growth, are seen in optical section. The digestive gland is another favourite location for these cysts, opalescent white spheres conspicuous in the dark green of the gland. In figure 2 (A. and B.) are drawn two nuclei which I obtained by decal- cification of small orient pearls; there can be no question as to theiridentity with the spherical larvae found alive in the tissues. Neither Prof. Herdman nor I ever claimed that all cyst pearls have such nuclei; we recognized that other foreign bodies, MiG, 2-4, by decalcificatio shown. In A.some of the m } tinct yielded nucleus B; n spherical larva shown in D, (ef Fig. 1,A). Ne be factor and become pearl nuclei. We have also even ound a small nematode worm, coiled upon itself, forming notably grains of sand, occasionally function as the intrusive ere ee ee ee ee a ee eae a ar 1922.] Pearl Formation in Indian Pearl Oyster. 217 class comprises according to my investigations, the majority of the larger cyst pearls, the latter of the smaller ones of this des- cription, which, as I have indicated above, constitute by far the larger proportion of cyst pearls. This conclusion to our local researches disposes satisfactorily of certain objections levelled at the cestode theory and places the latter in its proper perspective ; we see that cestode larvae though less frequently the cause of pearl formation than was at first believed, us now see how pearl formation proceeds,(a) in cyst pearls formed around intrusive foreign bodies; (b) in those with a fragment of periostracum as nucleus, and lastly (c) in muscle pearls. f my earliest experiments made in Galle in 1902, have direct and fundamental bearing on this problem. These were in respect of the power of the oyster to repair injuries to the shell. They resulted in demonstrating that epithelial cells are capable, at least over the nacre-secreting area, of an altera- tion in the character of their secretive power upon emergency. - Thus I found that if a fragment of shell in the centre of the valve were removed, exposing the mantle which previously had been engaged in secreting nacre, the first repair substance formed was not nacre, but a yellow parchment-like material apparently identical with periostracum. Only after a stiff layer of this was formed, was there a resumption of nacre secretion. Now in all the pearls I have examined and notably in button pearls formed after the old Chinese method, and within recent years refined and extensively employed on a com- f 218 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, lime salts, but continue the secretion of conchyolin thus giving a periostracal appearance to what would normally be a nacreous layer (conchyolin + carbonate of lime). Another deduction which I have made from the investiga- tion, is that only dead or dying parasites excite an irritation of the character necessary to induce pearl formation. A living parasite does not irritate the tissues in the same way ; indeed it merely induces the formation of a tough connective tissue sheath or cyst enveloping it wherein it lies quiescent and harmless, giving no further irritation. But in the case of a parasitic larva that arrives in the epithelium in a dying con- dition, exhausted or perhaps smothered in the secreted fluid poured out by the epithelial cells, a different situation is found. Instead of being within a layer of connective tissue, it lies in a depression of the epithelial layer of cells and these act different- y from connective tissue cells—with a correspondingly diver- gent result. In regard to the second and more numerous class of cyst pearls usually however much smaller in size than those of the first class, decalcification shows no definite nucleus other than a tiny amorphous scrap of brownish refractive substance, simi- lar apparently to periostracum. Rubbel of Marburg has in- vestigated the origin of pearls with a similar form of nucleus obtained from freshwater mussels. He showed that granules of the same appearance not infrequently appear in the secret- ing epithelial layer of the mantle. These at times appear to cause an irritation that induces the adjacent cells forthwith to begin the deposit of nacre upon these refractive bodies; later by radial division and multiplication these cells form a minute pearl-sac around each nuclear body, which continues the deposit of concentric layers of nacre and thereby produces a pearl. The same sequence of events occurs in the Indian pearl oyster eventuating as above stated in the production of the majority of cyst pearls found in the mantle. The irrita- tion produced is so slight that no shock is experienced and therefore no periostracal repair substance is deposited prior to the first nacreous layer. e third class, muscle pearls, remain for consideration. From their place of origin being invariably close to the inser- tion of muscles attached to the shell and from the columnar foreign body or an unwanted particle of periostracum does and with similar effects : &@ minute pearl sac is formed, enveloping the particle, which however in this case begins by secreting 1922.] Pearl Formation in Indian Pearl Oyster. 219 pearls. This is exactly what we would expect reasoning from layer to which they are attached and disturbance of the cells secreting this substance are more frequent than in smaller and weaker oysters, where muscular force is distinctly weaker. ee Notice, AVIS. : Les Sociétés étrangéres qui honorent la Société Asiatique de Bengale de ses publications, sont priées de les envoyer ou directe- ment a l'adresse de la Société, 1, Park Street, Calcutta, ou a Vavent de la Société a Londres, Messrs. Luzac & Co., 46, Great Russell Street. ANZEIGE, Ausliandische Page ear a welche die Asiatische Gesell- schaft von Bengalen mit ihren Publicationen beehren, werden hierdurch ersucht dieselben waeoeaes direkt an die Adresse der Gesellschaft, 1, Park Street, Calcutta, oder an den Agenten in oS Messrs. Luzac & Co ., 46, Great Russell Street, zu senden Proceedings of the Annual Meeting, 1922. FEBRUARY, 1922. The Annual Meeting of the Asiatic Society of igi was held on Wednesday, the 2nd February, 1922, at 9-15 p.m The Hon’ste Justice Sire Asutrosa MooKEeRJEE, KT., CS.I., D.L., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.A.8.B., President, in the chair. The following members were present : _ Babu Chotilal Jaina, Babu Hem ees Ray Choudhury Khan Saheb Moulvi Abdul wee Babu Ramesh Chandra Majumdar, Mr. H. Bruce Hannah, Rev. E. Francotte, Rev. Fr. H. Hosten, S.J., Mr. M. J. Seth, Babu 8. N. Bal, Dr. P. Brihl, Major R. Knowles, Khan Bahadur Said Abdul Latif, Babu Spee Chandra Kar, Dr. Upendra Nath Brahmachari, Bae N. Banerjee, Babu Rama Prosad Mookerjee, Mr. ache Mr. S. EK. Belvalkar, Babu S. K. Mitra, Babu ‘resin Chandra Chatterjee, Babu Pramatha Nath Banerjee, Mr. Johan van Manen, Mr. H. W. B. Moreno, Dr. W. A. K. Christie, Major T. C. Boyd, Col. T. W. W. Megaw, Dr. Napier. The President ordered the distribution of the voting papers for the election of Soar and Members of Council for 1922, and appointed Mr. R. C. Majumdar, Mr. Ray Choudhury and Dr. L. L. Fermor to be scrutineers. The President announced that the Elliott Prize for Scien- tific Research for the year 1921, would not be awarded as no Essays had been received in competition. The Annual Report was then presented. part ANNUAL JEPORT FOR 1921. The Council of the Asiatic Society of Bengal has the honour to submit the following report on the state of the Society’ s affairs during the year ending 31st December, 1921. Member List. he number of Ordinary Members at the close of 1921 was 359 as against 368 at ‘he close of 1920. The number of 2.0. Annual Report. [February, 1922. Ordinary Members elected during 1921 was 27, of whom 5 have not yet paid their entrance fees; the name of one mem- ber was transferred from the Ordinary Member list to the list of Hon. Fellows. The number of Ordinary Members thus added to the list is therefore 21. On the other hand 14 with- rew, 6 died, 6 were struck off under Rule 38, and 4 were struck off under Rule 40. The number of Ordinary Members in the past six years were as follows :— PayIna. Non-Payina. A a Po oad = Year. - ~ Sire S| re z = on iS 3 ee ee ‘s < Se bgt OE eee cae | ina] : & a H | < aes Se 1916 | 45 159| 18 | 322] 25 | 60 | 85 | 407 1917 150| 144; 165 309] 24 | 45 | 69 | 398 1918 me 0S Tk IB | es | oe 67 382 1919 141 | 128! 15 | 984| 25 64 89 373 1920 rr isa) 18 | Slo} 26° |} 32°| 88 tee 1921 .. --| 160] 132] 16 | a08| 25 | 26 | 61 | 360 —————— ficelamiades! vi See ai a The following members died during the course of the year :— Shaikh Laiq Ahmad Ansari; Dr. Suresh Prasad Sarvadhikari ; and Lieut.-Col. C. T. Peters, M.D., 1.M.S. (retired). There was one death among the Hon. Fellows, viz. :— Professor E. B. Tylor, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. During the year we have elected Dr. F. W. Thomas of the India Office an Hon. Fellow. The number of such is now 28. The number of Special Honorary Centenary Members» Temained unchanged, viz. 2. There was only one Associate Member elected, viz. Prof. Shahay Ram Bose. The number now stands at 12. Fellows of the Society. _ At the annual meeting held on the 2nd February, 1921. gig ar F. Wall, C.M.G.. I.M.S., U. N. Brahmachari, Esq-, pa ne ta + M.A, Ph.D., and B. L. Chaudhuri, Esq., D.Sc. F.B.S.E., were ee Fellows of the Society. n the recommendation of the Fellows resident in Cal- February, 1922.) Annual Report. 0. 3 cutta, the following additions to the regulations regarding the election of Fellows were accepted by the Council of the Society (1) That i in Rule 2 o ip following words be added at the end e the first senten “One at least oe ie om shall certify that he is personally acquainted with the scientific or literary work of the can- didates he proposes and is in a position from his own knowledge to express an opinion on its value.”’ (2) That the following be added as Rule 2 B:— ‘“* Any candidate who canvasses for support in his candida- ture ae = disqualified for election. e of one Fellow viz :—-Dr. M. W. Travers, F.B.S.. has been seein feo the list of Fellows in accordance with Rule 40, being more than 3 years absent from India, and he has ceased to be a Fellow under the Society’s Rule 2 The list of Fellows, now stands at 4 Office Bearers. In February, 1921, Dr. S. W. Kemp reported that he would be absent from Calcutta for about six weeks and Dr. Baini Prashad officiated during the period as Biological Secretary of the Society. In pahae 1921, Prof D. R. Bhandarkar left Calcutta, and Mr. Rama P rasad Chanda acted for him as the Joint Philological Bacsstary, and continued to perform his own duties as Anthropological Secretary. Major R. Knowles -- India for eight months and Dr. U. x Brahmachari acted for Mr. O. Martin continued as the Honorary Treasurer shecuchnas the year until the 24th Meccdibee agreed to carry on the work until a successor was appointed. Mr. W. W. K. Page has consented to stand for election as Honorary Treasurer at the next annual election. Mr. A H. Harley continued, as Honorary General Secretary throughout the year with the exception of one month when Dr. W. A. K. Christie took charge of the wor have been no changes among the officers of the Society since the last annual election. Office. Mr. J. H. Elliott continued as Assistant Secretary during the year and gave prompt attention to the duties of his post. Pandit Mathuranath Majumdar, Resident Pandit in charge of the Government MSS., was granted leave for three months on full pay from Ist April ‘to 30th June, 1921, on the ground of ill-health. In November, 1921, he made another application for leave for another six months on the ground of ill-health, but Council refused further leave until he had checked the Govern- 4 O. Annual Report. [February, 1922. ment MSS. collection under the supervision of the Joint Philological Secretary. Maulavi Hafiz Nazir Ahmad, First Travelling Maulavi attached to the Arabic and Persian Search Department, has been granted an extension of leave for another three months in continuation of the year’s leave granted to him from 14th December, 1920, and Maulavi Shah Moinuddin Ahmed is still acting for him. Maulavi Asaduzzman Khan was granted leave from November, 1920 to February 21st on full pay. He returned October to December, and three months’ leave has been granted tohim on half pay. He has not yet returned to duty. For the Department of Search for Arabic and Persian MSS. the Council has apointed Maulavi Nuruddin Ahmad and Maulavi Abdul Hadi Zahoorul Hug on probation forsix months. Certain leave rules affecting the Society’s staff and recommended for trial for a year by the Council were placed before the Monthly General Meeting in December 1921, and passed. ; Society’s Premises and Property. The Council has received the following reply from the pith cat of India as regards the clear title to the Society’s and :— “With reference to your letter No. 205, dated the 18th the Government of India’s buildings in Calcutta for the Society. and the matter will be duly considered six months later. Indian Museum. No Presentations were made over to the Indian Museum. The Director of the Zoological Survey of India was granted February, 1922.| Annual Report. 0. 5 permission to send in exchange to the Lucknow Provincial useum certain duplicate specimens from the ethnological collections belonging to the Society in the Indian Museum, During the ied there has been no change in the Society’s Neda Bh the H ee Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, Kt, C.8'1., D Be. R.A.S., F.R.S.E., F.A.S.B., continuing to be a member of ihe Board of het on behalf of the Society under the Indian Museum Act X of 19 Indian Science Congress. The Eighth Annual Meeting of the Indian Science Congress was held in Calcutta from January 31st till February 5th, 1921, under the presidency of His Excellency the Rt. Honour- able the Earl of Ronaldshay, G.C.I.E., Governor of Bengal. The abstracts of the scientific papers communicated to the Congress are in the press and copies will be sent to the members when publishe t was arranged that the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Indian Science Congress should be held in the Medical College, Madras, on January 30th, 31st. February Ist, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 1922. His Excellency the Rt. Honourable Baron Willingdon of Ratton, G.C.S.1., G.C.L.E., G.B.E., Governor of Madras, consented to be Patron, and C. 8. Middlemiss, Esq., C.LE., .A., F.A.S.B., F.R.S., was appointed President, and J. L. Simonsen, Esq., Ph: D., F.1.C., F.A.S.B., and C, V. Raman. sq., M.A.. PRD. Honoraty General Secestadied and Capt. C. Newcomb, M. D., A.1.C., I.M.S., Chemical Examiner, Mad- ras, and Khan Sahib Md. Azizullah Sahib Bahadur, B.A., M.B., CM., Chemical Examiner’s Office, Madras, Local Secre- taries, and the Honourable Sir Lionel Davidson, K.CS8.L, [.C.S., Chairman of the Local Committee. Meetings. The Society’s General Meetings have been held regularly every month with the exception of the month of November when those present did not constitute a quorum. No meeting was held during the recess month of October. Deputations. The Society received a communication from the Joint Secretaries, Second Oriental Conference, intimating that the Conference will be held in Calcutta from Saturday, 28th Janu- ary 1922 to Tuesday 3lst January, and inviting the Society to send delegates and representatives to the Conference. The Council appointed all the officers and members of Council as its representatives. 6 O. Annual Report. [February, 1922. Agencies. In succession to Mr. Bernard Quaritch, the Council has standing accounts amounting to Rs. 1,823-8-10 are settled. The Society is in correspondence with the Controller, Local Clearing Office (Enemy Debts Department), Simla, for the recovery of the amount. firm the Agency for one year for the present, on condition that the firm furnish the Society with a reference to a business rm in America. The manager of the ‘Orientalia’’ was written to but no reply has yet been received. Barclay Memorial Medal. : On the recommendation of the Barclay Memorial Medal Special Committee, the Council awarded the medal for 1921 to Lieut.-Col. Sir Leonard Rogers, F.R.S., ©.L.E., F.R.C.S., M.D., B.Sc., F.R.C.P., I.M.S. (retired). Elliott Prize for Scientific Research. , rhe subject selected for the Elliott Prize for Scientific Research for the year 1921, was Geology and Biology (including | | February, 1922. | Annual Report. CO, 7 made, and no prize for 1921 will therefore be presented at the annual meeting of the Society in February 1922. The subject selected for the Elliott Prize for the year 1922 is Mathematics. This notification will be published in the Calcutta Gazette in January 1922. Finance. The Appendix contains the usual statements showing the accounts for the year 1921. Statement No. 19 shows the Balance Sheet of the Society and of the different funds admin- istered through it. The credit balance at the close of the year is Rs. 2,14,171- 0-4, against Rs. 2,04,902-6-5. Of this amount Rs. 1,71,600 be- longs to the Permanent Reserve, the working balance, exclu- sive of funds administered for Government, being Rs. 42,571 as against Rs. 33,902 at the end of 1920. __ The Society has received the usual grants of Rs. 20,800 and Rs. 5,000 from the Government of Bengal and India re- spectively :— From Government of Bengal— Rs. Vide Statement Anthropological Fund r¢ 2,000 MO, 3 Bureau of Information a 1,200 ” 5 Oriental Publication Fund No.1 —- 9,000 peed No. 2 3,000 Pee oO. oO. Sanskrit MSS. Fund for catalogu- ing and preservation of MSS... 5,600 gee TOTAL .. 20,800 From Government of India— Rs. Vide Statement Arabic and Persian MSS. Fund.. 5,000 No. 12. Statement No. 13 contains an account of the Society's investments in Government Securities which are held in de- posit by the Imperial Bank of India. We hold 3}% Govern- ment Promissory Notes of the face value of Rs. 2,74,200 They cost Rs. 2,73,206-3-10, the average purchase price being Rs. 96-1-6. The market price at the time of writing this report is nominally Rs. 59-4. We also hold 4% Government Terminable Loan of 1915-16 of Rs. 10,100 purchased at par. Statement No. 16 gives an account of the amount due to and from the Society by way of subscriptions, publications and contingent charges. a with In statement No. 17 is shown the sum reserved, 8 O. Annual Report. [February, 1922. interest thereon, kept in deposit with the Chartered Bank of India, Australia and China, London, for printing the Kash- miri Dictionary in London. The Budget estimates for the year 1921 were :—Receipts Rs. 25,203, Expenditure Rs. 23,002. The actual receipts are Rs. 32,171-6-0, including the ‘‘ admission fees,’”’ and the actual m clothing” and ‘‘furniture” which were not provided for in the Budget estimate. The financial position of the Society therefore shows an improvement of nearly Rupees nine thou- sion fees, and as usual the Permanent Reserve has been in- creased by Rs. 600 (face value) transferred from the Tem- porary Reserve. The Permanent Reserve now stands at Receipts es ‘ie .. Rs. 26,264 Expenditure. is atic: gy cee BUDGET ESTIMATE FOR 1922. Receipts. 1921. 1921. 1922. Estimate. Actuals. Estimate. Rs. Rs. Rs. Members’ Subscriptions . , 9,000 9,309 9,000 Subscriptions for the So- clety’s Journal and Pro- ceedings and Memoirs 2.040 1,944 1,944 Sale of Publications 1,260 4,751 1,700 Interest on Investment, . eo 213 12,769 10,870 Rent of Room Sy 600 650 Miscellaneous és 100 142 1u0 Government Allowance— for publication of papers / in Journal .. 2,000 2,000 2,000 Admission fees 3 De 656 oe Toran .. 25,203 32,171 26,264 Expenditure. Salaries a oe 7,998 8,502 Commission . = a 600 618 600 Carried over a ee ee ee February, 1922.] | Annual Report. QO. 9 1921. 1921. 1922. Estimate. Actuals. Estimate. Rs. Rs. Rs. Brought forward Stationery .. > 150 153 150 Pension % vs 180 180 180 Light and Fan CS 200 268 200 Taxes og 21 1,495 1,495 1,495 Postage 500 82 800 Freight a > 200 166 200 Contingencies ay 400 429 400 Books ve ee 600 1,200 800 Bindin 600 643 600 g e cs Journal and Proceedings, and Memoirs es Indexes = ea 200 = 200 Printing (Circulars, etc.).. 500 427 500 Auditor’s fee.. ms 250 250 250 Petty repairs “ 25 80 50 Insurance... A 344 344 344 epairs =t Ss 400 ue Summer clothing = i 94 Furniture... y 75 ToTaL ~. 23,002 21,809 24.271 Je therefore anticipate a saving of nearly Rs. 2,000. Any expenditure for which provision has not been made might be met from the above surplus. a Library. The total number of volumes and parts of magazines added to the Library during the year was 2,674, of which 303 were purchased and 2,37] were either presented or received in exchange a During the war a large number of Societies, Institutions, etc., ceased to despatch their publications to theSociety. Every effort is being made to complete the Society’s sets, and in return the Society is sending as far as available the Journal and Proceedings and Memoirs wanting from their sets. Publications. Five numbers of the Journal and Proceedings (Vol. Aes 1920, Nos. 6-8 and Vol. XVII, Nos. 1 a 2) — er u- ring the year containing 423 pages and 6 plates In al. One number of the Memoirs was published, Vol. VI, Part VII, containing 40 pages and 3 plates. 10 O. Annual Report. [February, 1922. One Numismatic Supplement, No. XX XV, was published under the editorship of Mr. W. E. M. Campbell, I.C.S. in the Society’s Journal and Proceedings, Vol. XVII, 1921, No. 1, con- taining 184 pages. he Philological portions of the indices to the Society’s Journal and Proceedings, Vols. XI-XIII, 1915-17 and the Memoirs, Vols. IfI and V have now been examined by the Joint Philological Secretary and are being systematically arranged, and will be sent to press at an early date. Exchange of Publications. During the year the Council accepted six applications for exchange of publications, viz. from (1) The Department of Industries, Government of India—the Society’s Journal and Proceedings and Memoirs in exchange with Journal of Indian Industries and Labour: (2) The Instituto General y Técnico de Valencia—the Society’s Journal and Proceedings and Memoirs Journal and Proceedings and’ Memoirs for their publications ; (6) The Academy of Abo, Finland—the Society’s Journal and Survey, Washington, ha ving enquired whether it should supply Philology, etc. Mr. W. Ivanow has contributed a paper entitled ‘‘ Further Notes on Gypsies in Persia.” It is supplementary to his paper “‘ On the ee of the Gypsies of Qainat (in Eastern the Gypsies of North-Fast Persia and is accompanied by notes on Gypsy Language, and also remarks on the conditions ie | February, 1922.] Annual Report. 0; i The works of Jean du Bec. and Sieur de Saynleon on Timur, alleged to be based on an Arabic original, are spurious. The account of Timur by Abu Talib al-Husaini is fictitious, Shah Jahan caused it to be harmonised with the Zafarnamah of Sharafu-d-din. The premature death of Dr. L. P. Tessitori is a grievous loss to scholarship. Vol. XVI, No. 6, of our Journal contains the last Progress Report of this young Italian scholar on the work done in 1918, in connection with the Bardic and Histori- cal Survey of Rajputana. The report gives an account of the manuscripts he received or purchased in the territory of Bikaner, the works he edited and published for the State, and his antiquarian researches. Many other interesting papers have been contributed by Dr. R. C. Mujumdar, Mr. H. C. Ray Chaudhuri, Mr. 7, is Deb and Mr. N.G. Majumdar. Perhaps the most important of these is ‘The Gupta Empire in the Sixth and Seventh Cen- turies” by Mr, Ray Chaudhuri. In it an attempt has been made to give the general outlines of the history of the Gupta Empire from the death of Skandagupta to that of Jivita- gupta IT. Anthropology. Only one paper of Anthropological interest has appeared in the Journal and Proceedings during the year, viz. Mr. Hem Chandra Das-Gupta’s paper On the discovery of Neolothic Indian Script. In this paper Mr. Das-Gupta contends that as the neoliths that are alleged to bear writing have not been found in situ, embedded in natural deposits, the markings on these neoliths do not prove that writing was known in India in Neolithic times. Biology. Four biological papers were published in the Society's Journal, and two in the Memoirs :— : Yotes on Persistent Oviducts and Abnormal Testes in a Male Rana tigrina.—By D. R. Bhattacharya. Journal, Vol. XVI, No. 7. : Preliminary Observations on Cocoon-formation by the com- mon Lahore Leech, Limnatis (Poecilobdella) Granulosa (Sav).— By G. Matthai. Journal, Vol. XVI Records of Agaricaceae from Journal, Vol. XVI, No. 8. : ; The Genus Cerebella in India.—By L. S. Subramaniam. ournal, Vol. XVII, No. 2. bg oological Results of a Tour in the Far East.—The ote parous Water-Snail of Lake Biwa, Japan. si fe a ts rst Mysidacea, Tanaidecea, and Isopoda.—By W. M. Tatter- , No. 8. Bengal.—By S. R. Bose. sall. 12 QO. Annual Report. [February, 1922. Physical Science. Two papers on Chemistry have been published by the Society during the year. The first of these is on the prepara- i Dr. U. N. Brahmachari. When excess of solid urea is added to a very concentrated acqueous solution of hyper-acid-antimony] tartrate, and the mixture concentrated by heating on the water bath, and then alcohol added to the mixture, crops of prismatic crystals are obtained. This new compound is being used by Dr. Brahma- The second paper dealing with the recent advances in stereochemistry by Prof. B, K. Singh was originally an ad- dress delivered by the author at the Nagpur Session of the Indian Science Congress. The subject of optical activity has furnished several important discoveries, which have materially contributed towards the development of modern chemistry and this forms the subject matter of the author’s address which he discusses at some length Medical Section. During 1921, three meetings of the Medical Section were held. Dr. U_N. Brahmachari, M, at. A: D., F.A.S.B., read 3 on “A new bracelet stethoscope for estimating systolic attacks of blackwater fever by intravenous injections of an anti- haemolytic quinine solution.” Dr, K. K. Chatterji read papers . : i by plication and overlapping of the externus obliquus abdo- minis,’ and ‘On the radical cure of hydrocele by plication and overlapping of the tunica vaginalis.” Major H. W. ons I.M.S., read a most interesting paper “ On the Parasite-ridden Population of the Tropics,” and aes a Major F. P. Mackie, F.R.CS., LMS. and De J. © Gupta, M.B. The Medical Section is now an important section of the Society's activities. af International Catalogue of Scientific Literature. The Committee of the Royal ‘Society in charge of the publication of the International Catalogue of Scientific Litera- ture have decided owi i i i ee ee eee ee February,. 1922.] Annual Report. GO. 13 off, and have communicated their decision to the Society with a view to wind up this part of the Society’s activity. The Government of India grant to the regional bureau was not sanctioned this year on account of the application made by the Society having been received by Government after the preparation of the budget. The part time clerk employed by the Society discontinued his work and no fresh appointment was made in his place. Owing to the decision of the Royal Society to discontinue the publication of the Catalogue, no index slips in addition to those sent last vear were forwarded to the Central Bureau during the year under report. Bureau of Information. There is nothing noteworthy in the work of this depart- ment. A few minor queries only were received. Search for Sanskrit MSS. The search for Sanskrit MSS. having been terminated by order of the Council, no purchases have been made during the year under review. Three volumes of the Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit MSS. are in course of being printed. Three Presses have been engaged. The Baptist Mission Press has printed off 736 pages, and set up about 200 pages more of the second volume on the Vedas. The Hare Press has set up 45 pages of the third volume on Srrti. In order to expedite publication, the Banerji Press has recently been engaged. It is hoped that the work will now make satisfactory progress. Arabie and Persian Manuscript Search and Catalogue. During the year 1921, nineteen Arabic and Persian MSS. were purchased on behalf of Government. The First Travelling Maulavi was on leave throughout the year. During his absence the work of the department was carried on by the Second and Third Travelling Maulavis and the two Additional Travelling Maulavis appointed on probation since MSS. in various parts of India. These notices, prepared on the lines of those published in the J.A.S.B. (Vol. XIIT, 1917, No. 2 on. : During the absence on leave of the Resident Maulvi, the 14 O. Annual Report. [February, 1922. Acting First Travelling Maulavi was deputed to do his duties for about six months. Bibliotheca indica. Of the Akbaranama of Abu’l-Fadl—A history of the reign of Akbar including an account of his predecessors, translated from the Persian by Mr. H. Beveridge, I.C.S. (retired), Fasci- culi XII and XIII were published. Of the Odes of Shaykh Muslihu’d Din Sa‘di Shirazi, edited by Sir Lucas White King, Kt., CS.1., LL.D., the second fasci- culus of the first part (Tayyibat), containing odes 154-312, was published. Of the Muntakhabu’l-Lubab of Khafi Khan—A general history of India from the Muhammadan conquest to the reign of Muhammad Shah, Emperor of Delhi, edited by Lieut.-Col. Sir T. W. Haig, K C.1.E., 1.S.C., M.R.A.S., the fifth fasciculus of the third part was printed off. e non-Islamic publications have been as follows :— _ (1) Siva-parinaya, a poem in the Kasmiri language, by Krisna Rajanaka (Razdan), with a Chaya or gloss in Sanskrit by M.M. Mukundarama Sastri. Fasc. Ill. Edited by Sir George A. Grierson. (2) Yogasastra,—A work on Jain Philosophy,—with the commentary called ‘Svopajnavivarana’ by Sri Hemachandra- charya. Fasc. VI. Edited by Castravicarad Jainacarya Cri Vijaya Dharma Sart. __ (3) Sadukti-Karnamrita, by Sridhara Dasa. Fasc. II. Edited by Pandit Ramavatar Sarma, M.A. _ (4) Nyaya-varttika tatparya-parisuddhi — by Udayana- charya,—with a gloss called Nyaya-nibandha-prakasa, by Varddhamanopadhyaya. Fasc. VII. Edited by M.M. Pandits Vindhyegvari Prasad Dvivedin and Lakshman Sastri Dravida. : (5 ritva-ratnakara.—A treatise on Smriti by Chand- e8vara Thakkura. Fasc. I. Edited by Pandit Kamal Krisna Smrititirtha. ; _ , (6) Mahabhasyapradipoddyota, or a commentary on Pa- nini Grammar, by Nageca Bhatta. Vol. IV, Fasc, IV and V. Edited by Pandit Bahuballabha Castri. Coins, During the year the work of Honorary Numismatist was tr. W. E. M. Campbell, 1.0.8. During . é t Demecenag between the Sultan Firoz Shah and Zafar Shah is February, 1922.] Annual Address. O. 15 Nevill has also discovered the coinage of a new Sultan, Mahma bin Sikandar Lodi. These seven articles with Major H. M. Whittell’s “The Coins of Muhammad bin Tughlaq,” give an exhaustive account of the coinage of Dehli from the reign of Ghiyasu-d din Tughlagq to the end of the so-called Pathan period. BF. Dad Firoz Shah Zafar (his proper title) is demonstrated. Colonel d Another noteworthy contribution is Mr. F. D. J. Paruck’s Bibliography of Sasanian Numismatics. It is preceded by a short historical account of the study and investigation of this important series. Professor S. H. Hodivala contributes two Half-Rupee of Charles IT, and the other on a seal of A’zam Shah by Mr. R. B. Whitehead. —— Annual Address, 1921. GENTLEMEN, It is not incumbent on your President to deliver an address at the end of the first year of his term of office, and it already had the privilege to address the Society at the annual meeting in recent years many more times than any other member. But I could not afford to forget that you did me signal honour, when you chose me your President for a second term, and I felt convinced that if I kept altogether silent, my attitude might be open to misconstruction. I trust I may slight diminution in the number of members need not give rise to serious misgivings. Amongst the members whose loss we lament, stand pre-eminent Babu Pratapchandra Ghose and 16 O. Annual Address. [February , 1922. to require detailed statement here. Our finances also are in a sound and stable condition, and during the year about to commence, we anticipate that our solvency will be amply maintained. I emphasise this point, as our scheme for a new building is about to materialise. It is really a matter for con- gratulation that the doubt which at one stage was raised in official circles, as to the nature of our title to the present site which has been occupied by us for more than a century, has proved to be entirely illusory. We have at length secured from the Government of India a declaration that the land on which the present premises of the Society are erected must be regarded as the absolute property of the Society, subject to the payment of an annual rent which, however, is remitted while the Society actually occupies the land. This view renders it possible for us to raise the requisite funds by hypothecation of the land and the proposed buildings. I am hopeful that this work will be taken in hand without further delay, though I do struction ; we have not yet been able to arrange for temporary accommodation elsewhere, and the problem does not at present appear to admit of an easy solution, as there is no prospect of help from the quarter where we had confidently looked for et me pass on now to the work which engaged the atten- tion of our members during the last twelve months. I venture to think that judged both by quantity and quality. the out- turn will be found creditable in every direction. Take for instance, a glance at the antiquarian side Dr. Rameschandra Majumdar discussed with much learning the history and chronology of the J mperial Gupta Dynasty after the death of Kumara Gupta the First, maintaining, contrary to the opinion of Mr. Radhagobinda Basak and Mr. Nalinikanta Bhattasali was the son and successor of Narasingha Gupta. Mr. Panchanan attempted to show how it steadily gave way to the prevalent — rule of equal distribution of property. Mr. Narendrakumar February, 1922.| Annual Address. O. 17 century before the Christian era. In two other papers, he discussed the readings of three Kharosthi inscriptions, namely , the Shakardara inscription of the year 40, the Mahaban inscrip- tion of the year 102, and the Loriyan Tangai inscription of the year 318. He also re edited the Sue Vihar copperplate which which has an important bearing on the history of Bihar towards the close of the Pala rule. But the paper of Mr. Majumdar which attracted the most attention was that on the Indian literature. O rs contributed by veteran mem- bers of the Society we are proud to welcome two which repre- sent a good dea borions research, namely, one by Sir Mr. Pargiter on a vocabulary of current Bengali words not included in ordinary dictionaries. Mr. Stapleton found time amidst pressing official duties to carry on his important researches on the History and Ethnology of North Eastern India, while Mr. Seth gave an account of the oldest Christian tomb with bi-lingual inscriptions, which stands in the Arme- nian cemetery at Agra. Mr. J. van Manen carried us beyond the limits of India and discoursed with characteristic erudition on Tibetan repartee songs and on the relation between the 2 18 O, Annual Address. [February, 1922. siderable importance. h I venture to hope that I shall not lay myself open to pe charge of partiality towards our Society if I maintain that the activities of our members justify a hope that its reputation will be well-maintained in the future. But 1 have heard it the State; many again are supported by liberal aid from public funds, while others flourish by reason of private munl sical, Geological, Zoological and Botanical, whose poles have attained a Teputation not surpassed by that of similar pu ‘ lications in anv civilised country. If we confine our attentio Annual Reports, distinct progress has been made with hice Memoirs, In that series, the one which arrests attention fo February, 1922.] Annual Address. O. 19 across a valuable monograph by Mr. Duroiselle on the Talain Plaques in the Ananda temple at Pagan, which was erected towards the end of the eleventh century and abounds in orna- mentation of special importance, as well from the artistic as from the philological standpoint. The Epigraphia Indica continues to furnish most important materials for the reconstruction Delhi. If we travel further southwards we reach Travancore, where the archeological work commenced by the late Mr. Gopinath Rao has been carried on vigorously by his succes- the Bhadrabahu Samhita, which gives an authoritative account of Jaina jurisprudence. But the event of the year is the completion of the fiftieth volume of the Indian Antiquary which has, for half a century, been the recognised medium of communication of researches in every branch of oriental scholarship and constitutes a mine of invaluable information. If we pass on for a moment from the record of original investi- gations to the rescue and publication of oriental works, we cannot overlook that our activities in the Bibliotheca Indica Series have been supplemented in a striking manner by the several well-known series published in Bombay, Poona, Mysore, Trivandrum and Baroda, even if I leave for another occasion the splendid achievements for the promotion of ee me refer as an illustration taken at random, to a recent volume of the Gaekwar Oriental Series, designated the Kavindracharya 20 O. Annual Address. [February, 1922. Suchipatram. Kavindracharya was a famous South-Indian ascetic who lived at Benares in the middle of the seventeenth recently as the end of the seventeenth century can no longer be traced. { have not yet. however, turned your attention nearest heme, because it is always darkest under the lamp. To my mind, the most hopeful augury for our future progress is the creation of living centres of oriental studies in connection with the Indian Universities, amongst whom the University of 8 Raychaudhuri, Mr. N anigopal Majumdar, Mr. Hemchandra Ray, Mr. Masuda and Mr. Kimura. They have proved themselves able and willing to enter the field along with scholars of estab- lished reputation like Prof. Bhandarkar, Mr. Herbert Bruce February 1922.} Annuai Address. O. 21 long intermitted, and it would die away if they should entirely cease. Let us be thankful to Providence that there is now not Jones has so vastly extended in amplitude and character that it is likely to pr¢vide engrossing ae to devoted bands of investigators for generations to c ——)— The President announced the election of Officers and Members of Council for the year 1922 to be as follows :-— President. The Hon’ble Justice Sir Asutosh een Kt., C.8.1., D.L., D.Se., F.R.8.E., F.R.AS., Vice-Presidents. Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C.1.E., M. A., F.A.S.B. P. J. Briihl, Esq., 1.8.0., D.Sc., F.C.S., F.G.S., F.A.S.B. Lge Fermor, Esq., O.BE.. A.RBS.M., D.Sc., F.G.S., F.A.S.B. Upendra Nath Brahmachari, Esq., M.D., M.A., Ph.D., F.A.S.B. Secretaries and Treasurer. General Secretary :--W. A. K. Christie, Esq., B.Sc., Ph.D., F.A.S.B. Treasurer :—W. R. C. Brierley, Esq. Philological Secretary :—Dr. Bhandarkar, Esq., M.A., Joint Philological Secretary :—A. H. Harley Esq., M.A. ( Biology :—N. Annandale, Esq., D.Sc., Natural History ) C.M.Z.S., F.L.S., FA SB. ecretaries:— / Be — -—E. P. Harrison, Esq., F. Inst. P., F.R.S.E. Anthropological Seon :—Ramaprasad Chanda, Esq., B.A. Medical Secretary :—Major R. Knowles, I.M.S. Honorary Librarian :—S. W. Kemp, Esq., B.A., D.Sc, F.A S.B. Other Members of Council. 22 O. Annual Meeting. [February, 1922.] A Leigeorttg Esq., Iftikharul Millat, M.A.,Ph.D., A.S.B. sees ar-at-Law. ton D: Dun n, Esq 7ena;. D. Vitt. S. Khuda Bukhsh, Esq., M. Oe, Cs The preeidea also announced the election of Fellows to be as follow E. H. nee Esq., M.A., D.Sc., F.G.S Ramaprasad Chanda, Esq., B.A The Meeting was then seistved | into the Ordinary General _ Meeting. pec inc (a ela ta este gk eg og ge ~~ { APPENDIX,] ABSTRACT STATEMENT OF RECEIPTS AND DISBURSEMENTS OF THE PSIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR THE YEAR 1921, STATEMENT 1921]. Asiatic Society Dr. _ To EsTaBLIsHMENT. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. Salaries .. ~e 2 o_o ,uery 14. 4 Commission ; au - 618 5 9 Pension .. ee = es 180 0 0 8,796 3 10 To ConTINGENCIEs, : Stationery E ne soe 152 13 0 Light and a ne a a 267 9 9 raat fo ey oe 1,495 0 0 Postage . re £% ne 27 3 0 Freight .. : 165 14 3 Auditor’s fee es <5 ee nm. 0.0 Petty Repairs a ve is 79 15.0 Insurance ee ss a 343 12 0 Re : 400 0 0 Summer clo othing a oe 94 0 0 Mlsselladoous ne r es 429 0 ll a: 4,605 3 11 To Liprary anp COLLECTIONS. ooks 1,200 2° 0 | indin E ., i 3 8.0 | Furniture. oe a 5 75 5 3 1,918 15 3 To Pusrications. Journal and Pr, roceedings, and Memoirs .. 6,162 0 9 To printing charges of Circulars, ete. mo 427 2 0 ncihiidinteaaaits::: O00 e - To Personal Account (Written. off) ae ye 503 8 4 Balance : 2,14,171 0 4 Toran Rs. a 2,36,484 2 5 Rey ted = Sane : No. 1. of Bengals: | 1921. Cr. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last Report i ae 2,04,902 6 5 By Casu Receipts. nterest on Investments oe . 12,768 8 4 “perraga = for cash 7 620 nto 0 0 Government ‘glicwadah-tct publicatio ion of apers in Journal. i 25 Fund.) . : 62 2 000 30 0 iieoaticasoias as a6 os 143 °.2.7 : 15,628 0 11 By PERsonaL Account. Members’ Subscriptions 9,012 0 0 Subscriptions to Oe Rapes and Proceedings, and Memoirs 1,968 0 0O Admission Fees ae se 656 0 O ale on credit 4,159 9 1 Miscellaneous 158 2 0 16,963 11.14 Toray Rs. = 2,36,484 2 5 A. H. Harber, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. 26 O. STATEMENT 1921. Barclay Memorial Fund in Account From a sum of Rs. 500 odd wee in 1896 by the Surgeon RE of Medical Dr. To CasH EXPENDITURE. Rea. As. P. Rs. As. P. Cost of Medal a ee ae Ng 12: 102%) To Balance— GT. oy tee “e sis 500 0 0 Accumulated i oe i 92.3. 'S8 592 3 8 Tora Rs. a 604 13 8 STATEMENT 1921. Servants’ Penston Founded in 1876 as the ee Pension Fund, Re. As: 2: Bank’s Commission . . 2 a ; . ee ee Balance... 1,662 7 10 Toray Rs. - 1,662 11 10 citiamaiaalailaaa ae . . Now 3. with the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 1921. General, I.M.S., for the st erepscwte of a medal for the en- and Biological Science Cr. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last es geahaes G.P. Notes (f value) : Se 500 0 0 Accumulated canaade ae vis 89 4 4 panel ee reset 589 4 4 By Cash REcEIPT. Interest .. 15 9 4 Torat Rs. 604 13 8 A. H. Harury, Calcutta, 3lat December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. No. 8. Fund. 192]. with Rs. 500 odd from the Pidding Fund. Cr. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last Report .. + “* 1,613 11 10 By CasH REcErIPt. Interest .. s5 BS as =~ Tora Res. 1,662 11 10 A. H. Haruey, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. STATEMENT 1921. cee From a sum of Rs, 40,000 given by the Government of India portion of a Dr. To CasH EXPENDITURE. Bank’s Commission .. - ee a | Wag) & ae, To Balan G. P. Notes (face value) ae -- 40,000 0 O Treasury Bills ‘pron net ela oe -- 65,000 0 0 Accumulated i ne -«> 17,448 12° 0 sciinainclpagisiiancincom | OO BAB ih ee Tora Rs. pe 1,22,445 7 0 STATEMENT 1921. Bureau of Information in Account From an annual grant of Rs. 1,200, made by the Govern- SRE alee Oe Ee ee ees es ay eee Dr. . To Cash EXPENDITURE. Rs. As. P. Re. As. P. Government allowance (2 years’ salary of eng eae — for pentane Notices of Sans 2,400 0 0 Salary - a 500 0 0 ~ ae 2,900 0 0 aa Balance .. 1,600 0 0 = ag s Tora Rs. me 4,500 “Ne, 4. wards the rebuilding of the Society’s Rooms, and from the sale of a Society’s land. Cr. Rs. As. P. Ra. As. P. By Balance from last Report— . P. Notes (face value) vc: AAO 02 Treasury Bills (face value) -- 65,000 0 0 Accumulated interest 4 Po eel a 117,797 2 0 By Cesk ore TIntere ‘ sis es .3 4,648 5. 0 Torat Rs. oe 1,222,445 7° 0 A. H. Harury, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. No. 8. with the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 1921. ment of Bengal for the salary of the Officer-in-Charge. Gr. Rs. As. P By Balance from last Report .. 3,300 0 0 By Cash Receipt Government Allowance aS 1,200 0 0 Torat Rs. ee 4,500 0 0 A. H. HaRLey, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. Treaaurer. STATEMENT | 1921. Anthropological Fund in Account This sum is set aside for the purchase of — Dr. Rs. As. P. Re. As. P. To Balance ns “ i x 968 4 3 Toran Rs. ~ 968 4 3° ————_——— STATEMENT 1921. International Catalogue of Scienti- : Asiatic Socvety From the subscriptions of subscribers, and from a sum of Eis Gates : incurred in connec-_ i Rs. As. P. Rs. As. — “2 = oe aS WOOT s — ae Se “ 0 Rares ane reeling - hind ee oe 5 ll 9 ; Summer . He 13 0.90 oe a 225 : Balance... P 5,163 10 | No. 6. with the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 1921. Anthropological books from the balance of 1918. Cr. Rs. As. P By Balance from last Report .. = s 968 4 3 Torat Rs. “s 968 4 3 2 A. H. Harney, Caleutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. MO: a. jic Literature in Account with the 1921. of Bengal. 1,000 given by =e Government of Bengal for expenses ib. with the Burea Cr. Rs. As. P By Balance from last Report .. oe ee 4,688 3 0 By CasH RECEIPT. Subscriptions 4 we < = 700 14 0 Tora Rs. «* 5,389 1 0 A. H. HaRLey, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. — STATEMENT 1921. Indian Science Congress in Account From the pba of Dr. To CasH EXPENDITURE. Rs. As. P. Bes. As. P. es -* 7" ie 600 0 O Contingencies we me a 1,561 9 9 Postage .. 2% a ae 227 6 O Printing .. is: ez i YS ) Be ae Blocks .. ae EL ce 97 14 0 Stationery 2% i 8 so 2 0 Bonus ., és ee ee 1383. 0.0 Salary .. a os ca 25 0 0 Light = = oe ae 200 0 O ieee eae 5,014 4 9 Balance ea me 1,362 6.4 Torat Rs. re 6,376 no" 4 STATEMENT 1921. Uren ies Publication Fund, No. 1, in From am ily grant made by the Government of Bengal for the publica- (Rs. 500), and for the publication of Sanskrit 1K. To Casa Expenpirure. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. Commission é 69 0 mae Fees 576 0 0 Salar. A 3 ot 2A 6 Contingencies “ = re 67 14 3 Posta ; , j ate kr 6 Stationery 16 0 nting . 3,969 3 5 Fan and Light 31 6 Binding . es ne ne 25 4 0 Summer Clothin en ne : 0 g ; 13-0 7,407 11 1 Personal Account (written-off) . . a ve 232 9 6 Balance Ce is 60,743 14 7 Tora Rs. i 58,384 ee O. 33 No, 8 with the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 1921. meinbers of the Congress. Cr. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last Report .. pe oe 2,808 13 4 By Casa Recerrts, Subscriptions, etc. .. os -» 2,967 14 0 Advance .. ts 34 rs 600 0 0 3,567 14 0 ToraL Rs. a 6,376 11 4 Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. A. H. Harury, Hon. Treasurer. No. 9. Acct. with the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. 19217. tion of Oriental Works and Works on Instruction in Eastern Languages Works hitherto unpublished (Rs 250). Cr. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last Report .. = se 46,019 13° I By CasH RE&cEIPTs. Government Allowance = a 7 0 0 Sale of Publications =o us 347 4 3 Advances recovered ae ae ta 9,469 ll 9 By Prrsonat ACCOUNT. Sale on credit 3 a ee 2,894 10 4 Torat Rs. oe 58,384 3 2 Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. A. H. Harteyv, Hon. Treasurer. 3 . STATEMENT 1921. Oriental Publication Fund, No. 2 ik From a monthly — sanctioned up to March 1922, by oo rite Historical Interest Dr To CasH EXPENDITURE. Rs. As. P. Re. As. Fy Printing Charges .. a is 2,322 4 0 - 18,989 9 0 Totat Rs. iy 21,311.43. - STATEMENT _ 1921 Sanscrit Manuscript Fund in Acct. From an annual grant of Rs. 3,200 mad. e by the Government of catalogu ired oguing of Sanskrit Minaseriper w equ by, the same Government for the Dr. To CasH ExPENDITURE. Rs. As. P. ries. ; ee. 3 OME oS josey a $e ; S 8x2 ta oT aS ae ‘ 9-7-6 : 3 a 180 0 0 Fan and | Light os a ta 31 9 6 Ins i pe He te! Be Printing ¢ Ciljaegee a 2% ; E,731-:2 30 Me a AS 40 14 0 Summer Clothing ., ce ; 3 0 Balance aa .. No. 10. Acct. with the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. 1921. of Bengal of Rs. 250 for the publication of Arabic and Persian Works of (without remuneration). Cr Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last Report .. os 18,311 13 0 By Casu REcEIPts. Government Allowance es i os 3,000 0 0 Torat Rs. 58 21,311 13 0 Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. A. H. Haruey, Hon. Treasurer. NO, 11, with the Asiatic Soe. of Bengal. 1921. Bengal and at present meer ygpete to no 31, a for the the Society for Govern and Rs. 2,400 fro soos A of the Officer-in- “Charge By Balance from last Report . +. 13,209 6 3 By Case Recerrts, ~ se Allowance for Sans. MSS. Preserva- ,200 0 0 Gov “e Allowance for Cataloguir ng -. 2,400 0 0 Govt. Allowance (2 years’ omen He of O in-Char, Be, allotted for bein ing Notioes of Sans. MSS.) .. ve 2400-98-08 Sale of P a is +? 13 2 eo ahivation 8,013 2 0 By PERsonAL ACCOUNT : Sale on credit ue oh oa oe ik 0 0 Torat Rs. re 21,233 8 3 Caleutta, 31st December, 1921. A. H. Haruey, Hon. Treasurer. : STATEMENT 1921. Arabic and Persian MSS. Fund in From an annual grant of Rs. 5,000 oe Eby the Government of India and and oS es of Arabic and P. n Manuscripts acquired by the or the eee ote at hotioss of Arabic and Persian oF, To CasH EXPENDITURE. Re. As. P. Rs. As Salaries ay + 4,614 9 9 Purchase of f Manuscripts -- 1,406 0 0 Contingenc os ae Wide ae | Stablonshy ae os : 17,130 Postage . as se , 65:0 a ig dig ot ee is 1 en. = 6g Balance — es 8,199 3 4 Tora Rs. i 14,280 5 4 STATEMENT ive 45 3 | Invest- Dr. Face Value. Cost. : . Rs. As. P. ‘Rs. As. P. To Balance from last Report ., . + 2,84,300 0 0 2,73,206 3 10 Torat Rs. 2,84,300 0 0 2,73,206 310 | | Temporary RESERVE. | ‘| PERMANENT RESERVE. FUNDS ELS : } Face Value, Cost Face Value. Cost. ee reek jety gy ' + Be Rs, A.|P. Ratlding Fund eo 0385 % ‘ es ‘a ot Pape 7 : Servants’ Pension Fund! 0 - } io 0 | 1571,684 15)» S 2300 o BBA oe 1,399) io BS het g Toran Rs. 0 Tu 4 42 No. 12. Acct. with the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. 1921. sanctioned from April 1919 for another five years, for the sneer, Society for Government, for the purchase of further manuscripts manuscripts found in various libraries in India Cr Rs. As. P Rs. As. P By Balance from last Report .. on a 9,280 5 4 By CasH RECEIPTS. Government Allowance os 23 ne 5,000 0 0 Toran Rs. es 14,280 5 4 A. H. Hartgry, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921, Hon. Treasurer. No. 18. ment. 1921. GP: Face Value. Cost. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Balance Sh oy i 2a e 0 O 2,73,206 3 10 Totat Rs. 2,84 300 0 0 2,745,206 3 10 A. H. HaRLey, Calcutta, 31st December, 192). Hon. Treasurer. 38 O. STATEMENT OSI : Dr. : s Face Value. Cost. ae Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. To Balance from last Report .. -. 655,000 0 0 56,002 14 1 ,» Purchase a = -» 30,000 0 0 30,690 13 9 Tora Rs. 85,000 0 0 86,693 11 10 oe STATEMEN 192], BE Rs re ee te 4 Dr. Face Value. To Balance from last Report :— ox = ie Blue for Sramathe eos 14th October, 1920 65,000 0 0 61,750 0 0 Bills for 6 months from 29th October, 1921 65,000 0 0 63,862 Toras: Re: 1,30,000 0 6 0 1,25, 12 No. 14. Bond. 1921. Face Value. . Cost. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Imperial Bank of India lance re 5,000 0 0 5,000 0 0 By Balanc 80,000 0 0 81,693 11 10 ToraL Rs. 85,000 0 0 86,693 11 10 A. H. Hartey, Caleutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon, Treasurer. No. 18. Bills. 1921. Cr. Face Value. Cost. Rs. As. P. As? By Imperial Bank of India .- -. 86,000. 0 0 61,7600 0 0 By Balance ae +s .- 65,000 0 0 63,862 8 0 Torat Rs. 1,30,000 0 0 1,25,612 8 9 A. H. Hartey, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. STATEMENT Personal 192], Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. To Balance fr om last Report = ys % 3,906 11 4 eden for Eostage ee “= = 242 12 9 Asiatic Societ: Or'ental Pek. Fund, No. 1 8 953 11 1 1 anskrit Manuscript Fund 15.9: AP 2,894 4 1 ' oe ; —ne 18,850 08 Toran Rs. yey 23,008 13 STATEMENT £921. Fixed (Chartered Bank of int, Dr. : Rs. As. P. Pet at Pop : incipal 56 5-0 Interest £16- me : = No 16. Aecount. 108 1: Gr Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. se Cash vig ke sig ie os a 19,028 9 4 ,, Asiatic Soc ai 503 8 4 , Oftental Poke as Fund, No. ia Jao: 8 6 Reine anes Sea 736 #1 10 By Balance. — to othe. Due by the . Rs \s.| F Ks P shen Breet To Es Bl eis ee Ye et lee Subser se poe 7v |} 11 “ urj rs ail vei Collector) “a Wi jian on} O} 0 Miscellaneous ge BO7 1 BS 258; 0| 8 3,807 ig Peay 563 BEE ore 3,244 ae Toran Rs. Re 23.008 13° 6 A. H. Hartery, Caleutta, 51st December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. « NO, 17. Deposit. 1921. Australia and China, London.) GP: Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. By Chartered Bank of India. Australia and China (£92-14-9) >» Balance ( .:,138-19-2) *f os Toray Rs. Calcutta, 3\st December, 1921. 1,980 4 5 8,619 11 7 10,000 0 0 4A. H. Harwey, Hon. Treasurer. 42 Q. STATEMENT 192/. Cash. Dr. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. To Balance from last Report .. ee = 18,623 5 7 ,, Asiatic Society : 15,628 0O 11 . Barclay Memorial Fund 5 9 4 , Servants’ Pension Fund ee 49 0 0 +» Building Fund . es 8 of Inform 1,200 0 0 as Intonational coal ar Scientific Litera 700 14 0 . Indian Selesne Congress sc 3,567 14 0 ra eet Publication Fund, No. l i 9,469 11 9 o. 0. 2 3,000 0 0 Ae + Sanskrit MSS. Fund = 8,013 2 0 ic and Persian MSS. Fund ae 5,000 0 O ’ 5,000 0 O ., Trea: 61,750 0 O rsonal see es 19,028 9 4 ., Fixed Deposi 4 5 1,38,451 6 9 Torat Rs. - 1,57,074 12 4 STATEMENT 1921. Balance LIABILITIES. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. Asiatic Society 2,14,171 0 4 Barclay Memorial Fund 592 Serv > Pension Fund 1,662 7 10 Building Fund ; al = ,443 12 0 Bureau of Info ion a 00 0 90 Anthropological Fund 568 4 3 oe — of Scientific Litera- 5,163 10 O Mimi Sei nce ngres oy 1362 6.7 Oriental Publication Foal. No. | wa 60,788 14? Do. io . Noe .. 18,989 9 0 Sanskrit MSS. Fund. 16,058 10 9 Arabic and Persian Mss. Fund 8,199 3 4 Z 401,908 3 +3 Torat Rs. 441,955 2 2 4 ee We have examined the above Balance capes and — ° ee tit Accounts with the Books a: nd Vouchers presented t: and certify pg the iS In accordance therewith correc ectly setting forth thie position ot + Society as at 31 December, 1921. Caleutta, PRICE WATERHOUSE PEAT & Co., \ Auditors. 12th July, 1929. Chartered Accountants . QO. 43 No. 18 : Account. 192i. Or: na, Ae ek. Rs. As. P. By Asiatic Society is ces 4 Pb! ee eae , Barclay Memorial Fund 5 1210 0 ;, Servacts’ Pension Fund us O.4.0 ;, Buildin .: nd ae Pt.) ,, Bureau of Inform 2,900 0 0 »» International sorerwint of Scientific iterature. = roy ae feed ,, Indian Science Congress oo. 0,0I4 ao pee Publication Fund, "No. ; Hiss 7407 31 Fee No. 2 ace, 4 0 os Sanskrit Mss. und ca 5,174 13 6 and Posse MSS. Fund 5 6.081: 52° 0 agg tee oa o, 0,000 138-9 3 Treasory Bills ee besos Oo UO sonal Account _ ay ae 242 12 9 : iieeipe ae SAAD A gy By Balance e ee 11,328 12 9 Torat Rs. ap 1,57 57,074 2.4 A. H. Harter, Calcutta, 31st December, 1921. Hon. Treasurer. No. 19. Sheet. 1921. ASSETS. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P *Investments ats as ~. 2 dayeue 2 10 War Bills a ae co 781608 11-10 Treasury Bond Pe ee «, 68,862 8 © Personal Account ae ,244 2 4 Fi Deposi »9 185456 “ ve 3} 99 ced 3° 2° 18 * nd = 34 2° o> Pr) o? 1879 ee « . . Shs a9 as se . . - 9° 1896-97 oe oe Terminable Loan of 1915-16 as .- & eee Sone ds, 1926 we . 53". a, War Bonda, 1928 ae oe vot Indian Treasury Bill ey 0.1.8.) °"T-As; Chief of Hoti. WFP. Mohammad pirat itive M.A. The Madrasah, Calcu Mohammad, Hinge Khan, Khan Bahadur, O.R.E., Hon. Nawab, Talug- dar. Aligarh Monahan, Penns o L.C.8. Mansions, Calcut More, Major a ' Carmichael. 51st Sikhs. Kuwait, Persian Gu Moreno, H. W. B., B.A., Ph.D. 12, Wellesley Sisset: Calcutta. Muhammad Kazim Shirazi, Aga. 23, Lower Chitpur Road, Calcutta. j Ramaprasad, MA Bd Harrington nipore. Mukerjee. Subodh chante 97/2, Mus- jid Bari Street, Calcutta. Mukerjee, Brajalal, m.A., Solicitor. 12, Old Post Office Street, Calcutta Mukerjee, Jotindra Nath, B.4., Solicitor. 3, Old Post Office Street, ‘Caleu Mukerjee Prabhat Kumar, ae at Law. 144, Ramtanoo Bose Lane, Calcut Mukerjee, Sir R.N., K.c.1.B. 7, Ratigion Street, Calcutta. Mukerjee, Sibnarayan. Uttarpara, Bally. Mukerjee, Taraknath. Falka Colliery, Nirshachate P.O., Manbhum '*Mukhopadhyaya, The Hon. Justice Sir sh, Kt., ©.8.1., M.A., D.L., D.Se., S.E., F-R.A.S., F.AS.B. 77, Russa er (N orth), Bhowanipur, Calcutta. ee a Girindra Nath, B.A., M.D Haris M ~ Road (North). Bhcoaiipae Calcu Mukhopadhyay ie ve Chatterji’s Street. Calcutta. 46, Bechoo Nahar, Puran Chand, Solicitor. 48, Indian Mirror Street, Calcutta Narayan, mang Roshanpura, Egerton R ; Narayan, Prince Victor N. Cooch Bihar. 58 O. Date of Election, 1916 July 5. R. | 1914 Feb. 4.| R | 1901 Mar. 6. | N.R. 1917 Mar. 7. A. 1889 Aug. a Be | 1913 July 2 NR. 1915 April7. A. | 1907 July 3. | R. 1920 Aug. 4.| N.R. 1920 Jan. 7. 1904 Aug. 3. 1919 Nov. 5. 1910 April 6. 1906 Dec. 5. 1888 June 6. 1889 Nov. 6. 1914 Noy, 4. 1904 June 1. 1910 Aug. 3. 1920 April 7. 1918 April 3. 1914 Mar. 4. 1880 April 7. 1895 Aug. 29. N.R. N.R. R. A R. L.M. L.M. A. R, R. A. | Naseer Hosein Khayal, Prinsep St., Calcutta. Nawab Ali Chaudhury, The Hon. Nawab Syed. 27, Weston Street, Calcutta. Nevill, Lieut.-Col. He enry Rivers, Cranagh, Simla. Newton, Rev. R. P., m.a. pe. Nimmo, John Duncan. c/o Messrs. Wal- ter Duncan & Co., 137, West George Street, Glasgow. Gorakhpur, U.P. Norton, E. L., I.c.s., District Magistrate. Syed. 78, 1.C.8. Europe Otani, Count Kozui. (c/o Consulate-Gen- eral of Japan, Calcutta.) Page, William Walter K., Solicitor. Europe (c/o Messrs. Pugh & Co.,Calcutia). Panikker, N. Padmanabha, Inspector of Fisheries. Travancore. Parameshara Aiyar, 8. ra Parasnis, Rao Bahadur, Dattalrays Bal- want. Satara Pascoe, E. H., , D.Sc., F.G.8. Geolo- gical Survey of r wala, Calcutta. Patuck, Pestonji Sorabfi, 1.0.8. Hurope (c/o India Office). Peart, Major Charles Lubé, o.1.., 106th Hazara Pioneers. Europe (c/o Board of Examiners). Pennell, —— Percival, B.A., Bar.-at- | Law. Rangoo *Phillote, fio, Cannel Douglas Craven, Ph.D., .8.B., Indian Army (retired). The Bury, Felsted, Essex, England. armed Alfred Donald. 2, Hare Street, Calcu Pilgrim, ate E., D.sc., F..8. Geological Survey of India, Calcutta Podamraj Jain, Raniwalla. de Joggomo- han Mullick’s Lane, Caleu Pradhan, Hariprasad. ruben ~ Darjeeling. Calcu Prashad, Baini, p.se., Indian tis Raffin, Alain. Hur [pu ey Bepin peat weg “Giridih, Chota Wag: i Chaudhuri, Jatindranath M.A., B-L- ire se ng Taki, Jessore. O. 59 Date of Election. 1920 Mar. 3 1920 May. 7. 1921 Dec. 2. 1908 Feb. 5. L917 June 6. 1905 Jan. 4. 1921 Jan. 5. 1890 Mar. 5. 1917 May 2. 1920 Mar. 3 1918 April 3. 1900 April 4. 1920 Mar. 3. 1901 Dec. 4. 1918 July 3. 1921 Sept. 7. 1903 July 1. 1915 Oct. 27. 1920 July. 7. 1910 Sept. 7. N.R NR. a2 N.R. Raj, B. Sundara. Madras. eee aoieawige Dat. 21, Clyde Road, Beicng “Catone, Geo. S., o.m.a. U.S, Club, Cal Randle, Herbert Neil, B.A. Europe (c/o Queen’s College, Benares). Rangaswami Aiyangar, K. V., Rao Baha- dur, Prof. of History and Economics, H.H. The Maharaja’s College. T'rivan- drum. Rankin, seer et — 1.0.8., Commis- sioner. Dac Ray, Maharaja Tagadianath, Maharaja of Ray, Kumud Sankar, M.A., B.Sc., ch.B. (Edin.). 44, European cake Lane, Calcutta. Raye, Narendra Nath. Bhagalpur. Robinson, Herbert C., Director of Mu- seums and Fisheries, Federated Malay tates. Kuala r ees Lieut.-Col. Sir Leonard, Kt., 0.1.E., BS... 9RUOP., FROS.; F4.8.8., “9 R. a I.M. 1s Europe (c/o Medical Col- lege, Caleu Ronaldshay, The Right Hon. the Earl of, Governor of Bengal. Icutta ./*Ross, Sir Edward Denison, Kt., P F.A.S.B., Director, School ie Oriental Studies. London. Roy, Dr. Bidhan Chandra, M.D., F.R.0.S., M.R.c.P. (Lond.), Lecturer, Campbell Medical School. 36, Wellington St., alcutta. Roy, Hem Chandra, 76/14, Upper Circu- lar Road, Calcutta Roy, Maharaja Sesuit ddrkonth, Bahadur. 6, Lansdowne Road, Calcutta. Roy, Kaviraj Jamini Bhusan, M.A., M.B., Calcutta Roy-Chaudhuri, Hem Chandra. 43/2, ‘alcutta, Roy, Kumar Sarat Kumar, m.a. Daya- hahi. rampur, Rajs. 60 O. Date of Ble Election, 1919 Feb. 5. R. | | Roy, Srijut Sasadhar. 31, Haris Muker- | | jee Street, Bhowanipore, Calcutta. 1921 Feb. 2. R. | Roy, Khagendra Bhusan. 6/3, Ramdhan | _ Mitter’s Lane, Calcutta. 1916 April 5. |N.R,| Saha, Radha Nath. 16, Lachenikundu, Benares City Sahay. Rai Sahib Bhagvati, M.A., B.L., Ofig. Inspector of Schools. Bhagalpur. 1919 Sept. 3. pes | Saksena, Debi Prasad, Offg. Dy. Inspector 1913 Apl. 2. |N.R. : St. 5.| R. | Sarkar, Ganpati. 69, Baliaghata Main | Road, Calcutta. [Cuttack. Sarkar, Jadunath. Ravenshaw —_— 1916 July 1898 Mar. 2. — 1909 Mar. 3. Sarvadhikari, Sir Deva Prasad, kt., } 2, Old Post Office Street. Cal. cu 1917 Dec. 5.| R. | Sastri Ananta Krishna. 56/la, Sri utia. 1915 Feb. 3.| A. | Segard, Dr. C. P. Europe. [| Calcutta. 1919 April 2. 1902 May 7. Wit a4 or > w Zs S $ x8 is 2 S z, 5) Wa a 28 a Sen, Jogendra Nath, Vidyaratna, M.a., 31, asanna Kumar Tagore’s Street, Cal- aa. “ 1914 April 1. N.R. | Sen-Gupta, Dr. Nares Chandra. Dacea | 1897 Dec. ‘e R. | Seth, Mesrovb J. 19, Lindsay Street, Cal- é | cutta. 1911 July 5. A. | *Sewell, Major Robert Beresford Seymour | M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., LM.s. Europe (c/o | Indian M useum, Calcutta : s 1921 Nov. 2,/N.R.| Shah, Emdadul Haq, u.t.c. Vill. Bhowk- 7a sar, P.S. Chandina, P.O. Dist. Muda- a jargar, Tippera 1909 Jan. 6. ie Shirreff, canes Grierson, B.A., 1.0.8. Europe (c/o India Office). 1913 Dec. 3. | R. | Shorten, Capt. James Alfred, B.A., M.B-, B.Ch., 1.M.s. Medical College, "Calcutta. 1908 Mar. 4. R. Shujaat Ali, Nasirul Mamalik Mirza, Khan Bahadur, Acting Consul-General ae —— 10, Hungerford Street, Cal- 1916 Aug. 2.|N.R. Shukla, Ashwani Kumar, ” Revenue Officer, utes Saba " doipae 1902 Feb. 5. N.R.| Shyam Lal, Lala, .a., LL.B., Deputy Col- i : 1913 Mar. 5. L.M. | *Simonsen, O. 61 Date of Election, 1909 April 7. 1918 Feb. 6.|N.R. 1894 July 4.| N.R R 1912 May 1. 1899 Aug. 29.) N.R. singh, H.H. The 1909 April 7. 1899 Nov. 6. 1913 July 2. 1894 Feb. 7. 1919 Nov. 5. 1918 Feb. 6 1918 April 3. 1921 Feb. 2. 1912 Sept. 5. 1913 July 2. 1920 June 2. 1926 Mar. 3. 1901 Dec. 4. 1904 Sept. 28. 1908 Dee. 2. 1916 July 5. 1921 Mar. 2. A. N.R. L.M. N.R. N.R. N.R. R. N.R. N.R. N.R. N.R. R. N.R. N.R. Po mb *Simpson, George Clarke, D.sc., F.A.S.B. a € c/o Meteorological Dept., mila.) Singh, Badakaji Marichiman. 38, Khicha- pokhari, Katmandu, Ne oot Singh, Raja Kushal Pa l,m Narki. a Roy, Rai Lalit Mohan, Bahadur. 5, Lansdowne Road, Cal Mahala “Sir Prabhu hdc: Bahadur, @.c.1.£., Maharaja of | nares. Ramnagar ort, Benares. Singh, Raja Prithwipal, Talukedar of Su- District Baraban udh. | Singh, H.H. The Hon. Maharaja Sir | — ara, Bhahadur, K.0.1.E r- | bhang [now Singh, nr M.A., LL.B., Vakil. Luck- Singh, H.H. The Maharaja Vishwa Nath, Bahadur. Chhatiurpur, Bundelkhund. Singh, Shyan Narayan. Under Secretary Oo Government of Bihar and Orissa. Paina, BIR. Singha, Kumar Arun Chandra, M.A. 120/83, Upper Circular Road, Calcutta. Sinha, Raja Bahadur Bhupendra beat an, B.A. Nasipur Rajbati, Nasipur P.O Sinha, Gopinath, B.A., M.R.A.S. London), is. Mohalla, Qua- BF eg Fe. Belinawe Singh. Azimgunj, Mur- shid Sivaprasad, g.A., Offg. Junior Secretary to the Board of Revenue, U.P. A bad. llaha- Skinner, S. A., Engineer and Director, Messrs. Jessop & Co., Ltd. 93, Clive Street, Calcutta Smith, P. Boreal Oorgaum P.O. *Spooner, David Brainard, B.a.. Ph.D, F.A.S.B. Simla. Beaplotsa. Henry Ernest, 8B.A., B.Sc. Ranna, Dacca Steen, “Major Hugh Barkley, M.B., I.M.S. pper Wood Street, Calcutta Street, W.S. Messrs. Shaw Wallace & Co., ‘alcutta Stuctock,- Liewt,-Col. G. ~C., 14, Park cee Calcutta. I.M.S. 62 O. Date of Election. 1907 June 5. 1920 Jan. 7.. 1916 Sept. 27. 1919 June 4. | 1909 Jan. 6. 1914 April 1. 1898 April 6. 1904 July 6. 1893 Aug. 31. 1906 Dec. 5. 1878 June 5. 1909 Aug. 4. 1904 June 1. 1921 Dec. 7. 1861 June 5. 1917 Dec. 5. 1894 Sep. 27. N.R.. N.R. FM. N.R. R. N.R. L.M. N.R. R. *Suhrawardy, Abdullah Al- a mun, Iftik- ha rul Millat, M.A. D.Litt., LL.D., F.A.S.B., Bar.-at-Law. 56, areaibis Street, Cal- _Suhrawardy, Hassan, M.D., F.R.C.S.I., L.M. | (Rotunda), F.m.s., London, r.c.u., Dis- | trict Medical Officer. | Sutherland, Rev. | Universities Mission. jeeling Dist. D.D., Scottish Kalimpong, Dar- Tacchella, C. F. H. Europe (c/o Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore Tagore, Prafulla Na th. Tagore Street, Calcutta. Tagore, The Hon. Maharaja Sir Prodyat oomar, Bahadur, kt. Pathuriaghatia, i Darpanarain 1910 Aug. 3. NLR. / be &Co. 9, Pall Mall, London, .| Talbot, ‘Walter Stanley, 1.c.s. c/o Messrs ' HOS: King S.W. Tancock, Major Alexander Charles. 31st Punjabis, Nowshera, N.W.F.P. Tate, George Passman. Bareilly Tek Chand, Dewan, B.A., M.R.A.S., 1.C.8., oak Commissioner. Cupanumle 56, Cantonment, ae Colonel Sir Richard Carnac, Bart., .1.E., Indian Army. 9 Pall Mall, Lond. Thompson, John Perronet, M.A., I.C.S. Chief Secretary, Govt. of the Panjab. hore. ne George Howlett, M.A., F.G.S., A.S.B. (c/o Geological Survey of i ndia, Calcutta Telang, P. A., Prof. of History. Benares Hindu U niversily, Benares City Tremlett, James Dyer, M.A., 1.0.8. | (rotizedl Dedham, Essex, England. Tripathi, Ramprasad, Reader in Modern Indian History. The University, Allaha- bad. Vasu, Nagendra Nath. 20, Visoakosh Lane, Bagbazar, Calcutta. O. 63 Date of Election, 1901 Mar. 6. 1894 Sept. 27. 1902 Oct. 29. 1907 July 3. 1918 April 3. 1911 Feb. 1. 1909 Dec. 1. 1913 April 2. 1915 Jany. 6. 1906 Sept. 19. 1915 May 5. 1919 May 7. 1906 Mar. 7. 1908 April 1. 1894 Aug. 30. 1911 Aug. 2. 1906 June 6. 1910 April 6. 1919 Feb. 5. 1919 July 2. F.M. L.M. F.M. N.R. N.R. N.R.| *Vogel, Jean Philippe, Litt.p., F.4.s.B. The University, Leiden, Ho Vost, Lieut.-Col. William, a M. s., 26, Crystal Pa la ace Rack Road, Sydenham, Londo n, *Vredenburg, Ernest, B.L., B.Sc., A.R.S.M., A.B.C.S., F.G.8., F.A.8-B., Europe (c/o Geo- logical Survey of India, Calcutta), Walker, Harold, A.R.0.S., F.G.S Assistant Superintendent, ndia. Calcu C.M.G, OM Za. ae Sind Club, Karachi. Waters, Harry George, F.R.1.P.H., Chief E.R. Allahabad. , A.M. Inst.M., Geological F.L.S. . Sylhet, Assam. White, Bernard ‘Alfred. Chartered Bank Bui iIdings, Calcutta. Whitehouse, Richard H. (1.£.s.). Training College, Lahore. Whitehead, Richard Bertram, Rupar, apenas Punjab. Williams, L. Rushbroo k, B.A., B.Litt. Europe (c/o Ailahbad University) Wills, Cecil Upton, B . Nagpur. Woolner, Alfred Cooper, M.A. University, Lahor Central I.C.S. i a Wordsworth, ‘William ronissaninte Presi dency College, Calcu Wright, Henry Seles. ‘B. A., 1.0.8. Dist. udge. Bareilly Young, Gerald Mackworth, B.A., Lo.s. Europe (c/o India Office). Young, Mansel Charles Gambier. Khagaul P.O. Dinapore, BIR. Young, Capt. Thomas Charles McCombie, M.B., 1.M.S. Shillong, Assam. Yazdani, G. Hyderabad, Deccan. Zafar Hasan, Archeological Survey of India, Delhi. 64 0. SPECIAL HONORARY CENTENARY MEMBERS. Date of Election, 1884 Jan.15.| Revd. Professor A. H. Sayce, Professor of Assyriology, Queen’s College. Oxford, Eng- and. 1884 Jan. 15. | Monsieur asanas Senart. 18, Rue Frangois [er, Paris, Fra HONORARY FELLOWS. Date of Election. 1879 June 4./; Dr. Jules Janssen. eee d’ Astronomie Physique de Ziska Franc 1895 June 5.' Charles H Tawney, Esq., M.a., 0.1.E. c/o India Office, Lo ey 1896 Feb. 5.| Professor Charles Rockwell Lanman. 9, Farrar Street, Cambridge, Massachusetts, US. America. 1899 Dec. 6.| Professor Edwin Ray Lankester, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. British Museum (Nat. Hist. ), Orem: well Road, London, S.W. 1904 Mar. 2.| Professor Sir Ramkrishna Gopal Bhandarkar, 1904 Mar. 2.| Sir George Abraham Grierson, K.C.LE., -, ©.1.E., 1.¢.8. (retired). Roth farahane Camberley, Surrey, England. 1906 Mar. 7., The Right Hon’ble Baron Curzon of Kedleston, M.A., D.C L., F.R.S, 1, Carlton House Terrace, London Nn, 1908 July 1./ Lieut.-Col. Henry Haversham Godwin-Austen, ~-KRS, ¥F.z.S., F.R.c.s., Nora Godalming, Surrey, England. 1911 Sept. 6. Lieut.-Col. Alfred William Alcock, 0.1.E., M.B-; “-LLD., O.MZS., F.R.S., IMS. (retd.). Heath- lands, Erith Road, Belvedere, ‘Kent, pee 1911 Sept. 6. Prof. Edward Gente Browne M.R.C. ne L.R.C.P., M.R.A.S. Panties ‘College : Cambri 1911 Sept. 6. | kta takes Kamakhyanath Tarka- vagisa. 111/4, Shambazar Street, Calcutta. 1915 Aug. 4.| Prof. Sir Paul. Vinogradoff, F.B.A.. D.O.L. : ~ 1915 Aug. 4.! Sir Patrick Manson, G.c.M.G., ., LL.D., F.B.C.P- 21, Queen Anne Street, Cecile. pa London a e O. 65 Date of Election. | | 1915 Aug. 4. Sir Joseph John Thomson, &t., 0.M., M.A., Sc.D. 4 | -D.8e., LL.D., Ph.D. Trinity College. Canibriaae | England. 1916 Dec. 6.| Dr. G. A. Boulenger, ¥F.R.S., LL.D., British | Museum (Nat. Hist.). Cromwell Road, | London, S.W. 1917 May 2.,| Herbert A. Giles Esq., Lu.p., University of | Cambridge. Cambridge. 1920 Feb. 4. | Sir Charles Eliot, «.c.M.@., 0.B., M.A., LL.D., D.c.L. H.M. Ambassador at Tokyo, 1920 Feb. 4.) Prof. T. W. Rhys Davids, t1.p. , Ph.D., D.Sc. University Collars. London 1920 Feb. 4. Prof. Sylvain Lévi, Collége de France. Paris. 1920 Feb. 4.| Sir Aurel Stein, K.c.1.8., Ph.D., D.Litt, D.s8e. | Srinagar, Kashmir. 1920 Feb. 4. | ry of. A. Foucher, D.titt., University of ae 1920 Feb. 4 | pane ‘Keith, Esq., M.D., F.R.C.S % | Royal College of Surgeons of eatin cei: | coln’s Inn Fields, W.C. 2. 1920 Feb. 4. R. D. Oldham, Esq.. apse F.G.8., F.R.G.S. 1, Broomfield Road, Kew, Surrey, England. -1920 Feb. 4.) Sir ‘David Prain, Kt., C.M.G., ©.1.E., M.A., M.B., | LD FRS.E:, FL.S;, PRS. ¥.2.8.,o MBDA, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, Surrey, Eng- | land. 1920 Feb. 4. Sir Joseph Larmor, kt., , M.A., D.Se., LL.D , | D.C.L., F.R.S., F.B.A.S. * Cambridge. 1920 Feb. 4. ae James Frazer Kt.,° DiO.L. LL.D.,. litt.D , Brick Court, Temple, London, ; 1920 Feb. 4. | Prof. J. Takakusu. Imperial "University of Tokyo, Japan. FELLOWS. Date of Election. 1910 Feb. 2.| N. Annandale, Esq., p.sc., 0.M.Z.S., F.L.S. 1910 Feb. 2.| The Hon’ble Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopa- po Kt., 0.8.I., M.A., D.L., D.Sc., F.B.A.S., .R.S.E. 1910 Feb. 2.| I. H. Burkill, Esq., m.a 1910 Feb. 2 | Mahamahopadhyaya Bact Shastri, 0.1.E., ee 1910 Feb. 2. | Sir Thomas Holland, k.c.S.1., K.C.1.E., D.Se., A.R.C.S., F.G.S., F 66 O. Date of Election. 1910 Feb. 1910 Feb. 1910 Feb. 1910 Feb. 1910 Feb. 1910 Feb. 1911 Feb. 1912 Feb. 1912 Feb. 1912 Feb. 1912 Feb. 1912 Feb. 1912 Feb. 1913 Feb. 1913 Feb. 1913 Feb. 1915 Feb. 1915 Feb. 1915 Feb. 1915 Feb. 1916 Feb. 1916 Feb. 1916 Feb. 1917 Feb. 1917 Feb. 1918 Feb. 1918 Feb 1918 Feb. 1919 Feb. 1919 Feb. 1919 Feb. 1919 Feb. 1921 Feb. 1921 Feb. 192) Feb. rs 2. Capt | Charles Stewart Middlemiss, Esq., B.A., F.G.S. jor Lieut. Col F. Wall, UB. Brahmachari, Esq., M.a., Ph.D., T. H. D. La Touche, Esq., Lieut.-Colonel D. C. Phillott, ‘Sa ae Indian, Army (retired). Sir Prafulla Chandra Ray y. Kt., D.Se. Lieut. -Col. Sir Leonard Rogers, Kt., €.1.E., M.D., B.S., F-R.C.P., F.R.C.S., F.R.S., LMS. sir E D. Ross, Re., Cl. ESS Pin. M. W. Travers, Esq., D.Sc., F.R.S Sir H. H. Hayden, kt., ¢.s.1., o.1 E., D.Sc:, Beds, Hk; B-.A.1.) F.G:8., F.R-.s. H. Beveridge, wrt 1.C.3. ae prise Sir J. C. Bose. — , M.A., D.Sc. P. J. Brihl, ieee ¥.C.S. a a eecisplans I.M.S. Lieut.-Col. A. T. Gage, 1.m.s. [F.G.8. E. Vredenburg, Esq., B I., B.Sc., A.B.S.M., A.B.O.8., J. Ph. Vogel, Esq.., Ph.D. Litt .D. Pr. 8. W. Kemp, s.a. Major E. D. W. Greig, c.1.8., M.B., G. H. Tipper, Esq., M.A., F.G.s. D. B. Spooner. Esq., Ph.D. H. H. Haines, Esq., ¥.c.H., F.L.S. Lieut.-Col. C. Donovan, M.D., 1.M.S. R. Burn, Esq., ¢.1.£., 1.0.8. (mie Fermor, ag A.R.S.M., D.Sc., F.G.S. G. C. Cae I.M.S. B. Sey mour Sewell, I.M.S. C.M.G., 1.M.S. M.D. B. L. Chaudhuri, Esq.. B.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., F.B.S.E- ASSOCIATE MEMBERS Date of Elections 1875 Dec. 1885 Dec. 2. | a AS : Revd. J. D. Bate. 15, St. John’s Church Road, Folkestone, Kent, En gland. Fiihrer, Prof. of Sanskrit, 5, Dorenbach- strasse, Binningen, Basel, Switzerland. Q. 67 Date of Election, 1899 Nov. 1902 June 1908 July 1910 Sept. 1910 Sept. 1910 Dec. 1915 Mar. 1915 Dec. 1919 Sept. 1921 Jan. I, 4, i; cs 1 2} mere . Francotte, s.s. 30, Park Street, Cal- cu Reva ne H. Francke. Euro Rai Sahib Dinesh Chante ‘Sen, Bias 1h; Visvakos Lane, Calcut Shamsul Ulama ene “Ahmad Abdul Aziz eccan. E. Brunetti, Esq. 27 , Chowringhee Road, Cal- cu Posie Jainacharya Vijayadharma sera tiga Yasovijaya Granthamal Office, Benares City —H. Bruce Hannah Esq., Bengal Club, | Oaloutte. s. Professor Shahay Ram Bose, M.D., LIST OF MEMBERS WHO HAVE BEEN ABSENT FROM INDIA THREE YEARS AND UPWARDS.* * Rule 40.—After the lapse of three years from the date of a member leaving India, if no intimation of his wishes shall in the interval have been received by the Society, his name shall be removed from the List of Members. following members will be removed from the next The mate List of the Society under the operation of the above Lieut.-Col. C. Donovan, M.D., 1.M.S., F.A.S.B. sig EE Hope, Esq., B.Se., Ph.D. ton, M.A. . New Peston Sorabji Patuck, Esq.., Dr: . Segar Harber Neil Randle, Esq., B.A. — LOSS OF MEMBERS DURING 1921. By RETIREMENT. Ordinary Members. C. A. Silberrad, 1.0 Mr. Rev. —- Dharmapala Mr. G. R. Kaye, F The Hon. Justice .. W. ’ Richardson, 1.¢.s. 68 O. Lieut.-Col. E. H. Brown, M.D., I.M.s. (retired). The Hon. Mr. W. W. Hornell. The Ven’ble W. K. Firminger, M.A., B.D., F.R.G.S. Mr. W. E. Andrews, 8.4. (Oxon) Sir J. G.. Cumming, &.0.1.8.; 0.8.1., 0.1.5., TOS. (retired). Dr. Gopal Chandra eat M.B. Sir Edward Gait, x (OSs. 6..5., 9.45.8, 105 . D. Hope, B.Sc., as Lt.-Col FP. O’Kinealy, MRCS. (Eng.), L.R.0.P. { M.S. ee. Lala Sita Ram, B.a. By Dratu. vee Members. Babu Roormall Goen Babu Pratapa re vsiriks Ghosh, B.A Shaikh Laiq Ahmed Ansari. Dr. Suresh Prasad Sarvadhikari. Mr. Jogendra Nath Das Gupta, B.A. (L.M.). Lieut.-Col. C. T. Peters, M.B., I.M.S. (retired). Hon. Feliow. Prof. E. B. Tylor, D.0.u., LL.D., F.B.S. Rue 38. Abul Kalam Mohvuddin gett Azad. hann Rabu Daya Ram Sahni. Babu Kashi Nath Das. Rexre 40. Capt. F.T. P. Ebden. 73rd Carnatic Infantry. Dr. A. M. Meerwarth. . tev. R. Oka. Alain Raffin, Es Morris William Travers, Esq. ELLIOTT GOLD MEDAL AND CASH. RECIPIENTS. 1893 Chandra Kanta Basu. 1895 Yati Bhusana Bhaduri, M.a. 1896 Jnan Saran Chakravarti, M.A. 1897 Sarasi Lal Sarkar, M.a. 1901 Sarasi Lal Sarkar, M.A. 1904 | 1907 1911 1913 - \ QO. 69 Sarasi Lal Sarkar, m.a. Surendra Nath Maitra, m.a. Akshoyakumar Mazumdar ( Jitendra Nath Rakshit. ( Jatindra Mohan Datta. Rasik Lal Datta. Saradakanta Ganguly. Nagendra Chandra Nag. a Nilrabake Dhar 1918 1919 Bibhutibhushan Dutta, M.sc. Dr. Jnanendra Chandra Ghosh. BARCLAY MEMORIAL MEDAL. RECIPIENTS. EK. Ernest Green, Es Major Ronald Ross, P.R.C.S., O.B., 0.LE., F.B.S., I.M.S. (retired). Lieut. -Colonel D. D. Cunningham, F.R.S., C.L5., I.M.S. (retired). Lieut. Colonel Alfred William Alcock, M.B, D.; O.LE ee David Prain, M.A., M.B., LL.D., , EMS. Soa Dr. Kar 1 Die Major William "Glen Liston, M.D., C.I.E., I.M.3. G.s. N. Annandale, Esq., D.Sc., ©.M.Z.S., F.L.S., Liouk: “Col, Sir — Rogers, F.R.S., C.1. Ww B.O.P 4 108. (retired). oe been see ae » Volume XVII, 1921 pp. p cealn-clsy No 13. An Automatic ‘‘make and break’’ Key for Actuat- ing the Heating and High Potential Circuits of a Coolidge X Ray Tube. By E. P. Harrison, Ph.D., F.B.S.E., F.Inst.P. and NARENDRA NATH SEN. In using a Coolidge tube for operations (such as photo- graphy of a Lane diffraction pattern) in which the tube has to be “run”? for considerable periods with currents greater than 3 milliampere and during which the anticathode may become seriously overheated it is convenient to allow the tube short periods of rest for cooling. To eflezt automatic © make “break” of the three circuits (heating, interruptor and coil- wort cincUtT eeu INTERRUPTE SEATING CIRCUIT ae con, PRIMARY cracuit ip ce mes : : been devised. primary) the apparatus described below has j By its use it is possible to run a Coolidge tube carrying & rage current without attention for an indefinitely long time a with no risk of overheating. ya oS . uppose it is desired to run the tube for 5 ee cool it for 10 minutes; run it for 5 minutes, once mor it for 10 minutes, and so on. 222 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, The problem resolves itself into— (1) “Making” the 3 circuits in the correct order with an interval of (say) 5 seconds between each ‘‘ make.” (2) Keeping the circuits ‘‘made”’ for 5 minutes (ist stationary state). (3) ‘‘ Breaking ’’ the 3 circuits in the reverse order. (4) Keeping them “ broken” for 10 minutes (2nd sta- tionary state). An American clock (Fig. 1) with an alarm system is employed to actuate the various keys. The axis 00’ (which is the axis of the striking system in the clock) and all wheels and cams on it (P, Q, R, 8, e) remains stopped or can be rotated by the clock: if free to rotate 00’ makes one revo- lution in a few seconds, during which, (i) Excentric cam Q actu- ates a lever L which depresses D into its mercury cups « makes ” the heating circuit ; (ii) The contact piece m bi (iii) Excentric cam P actuates a plunger F which“ makes’ the coil primary circuit and starts the tube. According to the angular adjustment on the axis of the two cams P and Q and the contact piece e the order of the above operations is determined. The order of contacts is actually that described above. The process by which the motion of the axis 00’ is started and stopped so as to produce 5 seconds intervals between the 3 contacts and 5 and 10 minute stationary states, 18 7° : follows :— The axis 00’ is set in motion by a double release system *— (i) by the lever M disengaging from the slots r of r’ on the wheel R, in which case the axis is free to rotate ie through 180° unless prevented by ; (ii) the catch N which engages with a pin on the wheel C and stops the motion of 00’ even if M is raised. (Figs. 1 and 2). 1922. ] Automatic “ make and break.” 223 Suppose now that setpepee state II is just over and it is necessary to ‘ make” the c The following pate Rae occur :— The lever M is raised by one of the teeth on the wheel A (minute-hand axis, period 1 hour). The axis 00’ is however still held in check. by the catch N!; 5 seconds afterwards, under the influence of the teeth of the, wheel B (period 20 seconds) N releases C and allows rotation of the axis through 60°; then re-engages with C? and stops the motion; after another 5 seconds a new tooth in B causes N to release C again, allowing a further rotation of 60° and no more. After still another 5 second interva] N prepa ) a third time, sabteben a third rotation of 60° and no mo this stage after rotation of 3 x 60°= 180° the lever M dein ss into the slot r’ and stops the axis for 5 minutes. this stoppage to occur at the right moment, A must be correctly adjusted on its axis Pig. RF Lea rat =z e 3 connections D, E and F all being ‘‘ made” the Coolidge “runs”? for 5 minutes, At the end of 5 minutes M again rises and catch N actuated by B proceeds to permit three 60° revolutions as before, during which, the cam P raises F and breaks the coil primary; the contact piece e actuates the peed (Fig. 3) and peer ee 220 volt circuit; the cam “ 232 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, had not yet reached its next definite stage of development. It is always a difficult task to determine the duration of one alphabetic epoch—if one might use the term—and it might be anything like a hundred to a hundred and fifty years, or even more. In the absence of other evidence, therefore, the Safichi in- scriptions might have been roughly assigned to the period 250 to about 100 B.C., but a comparison with the inscription of Heliodorus seems to carry back this lower limit This inscription seems to usher in the next stage of development in the Brahmi alphabet. It shows distinctly the beginnings of the principal characteristics of the later period in the advanced forms of individual letters as well as in a marked tendency towards the angularisation of the letters and the equalisation of their verticals. Cf. e.g. v in déva (1. I), vadhamanasa (1. 7), and s in va(sudé)vasa (1. 1) Diyasa (1. 3), dasémna (1.7); angular h in maharajasa (1. 4), Héliodorena (1. 2); and the equalisation of the verticals of s in pul(r)asa (1. 6), and tratarasa (1. 6). The presence of so many decidedly later characteristics in a short record of seven lines marks it as belonging toa later epoch. It is true that the beginnings of the tendency towards angularisation and the equalisation of the verticals are just perceptible in a few inscriptions from the railings of Stipa I and II at Safichi and also possibly in those of Asoka. (Cf. e.g.hin No. 4, pl Ill; s in Nos. 6 and 8, pl.. IV; Bihler’s Table II, Col. V. 39, and Col. VI. 40.) But a comparison of these letters with those of Heliodorus’ inscription referred to above would at once reveal the fact that the forms in the latter are far more advanced. ‘This fact together with the other advanced forms such as the triangular v and angular s, which are practically absent in the former group, point to the Heliodorus’ inscription as marking a new stage in the develop- ment of the Brahmi alphabet.. If it is ultimately proved, when the impressions of the whole series of the Safichi inserip- tions are available for comparison, that all these characteristics are altogether absent from them, it would follow that the original construction of the railing! was separated by a pretty ! The massive Stiipas like those at Safichi and Bharhut were con- structed, as the short donative inscriptions conclusively prove co-operation of a number of individuals. Now the different ind eee . over which their names are engraved or they could pay an amount of money sufficient to cover the expenses of building them. The : try of the different parts of the building is, however, incompatible with the first view, and makes it almost certain that although the donors refer to their gifts of the different parts of the building, they reaily paid their cost. This again, could have been done in two ways:—(i) by collecting subscriptions for the structures and engraving, as so hey W completed, the names of the subscribers over the different parts selected 1922 | Dates of the Votive Inscriptions. 233 long interval from sere eb ly gat an interval which can be hardly set down as less n fifty years, considering the long series of inscriptions Hes were engraved therein. As Antialcidas must be referred to the latter half of the second century B.C., the railings of Stipa I at Safichi can hardly be brought dawet to any date later than 200-150 B.C. In any case with the evidence available at present, it does not seem possible to come to any other conclusion. with ite vis to the amount they waia’ (ii) By £ first seahing them and then asking the public to contribute towards the expenses in the ate ans of paying the costs of their different parts which could be easily calculated in this case. It seems, however, to be almost certain or, i at cas Id ney paid by them would be sufficient to cover their cost. According to thi ni ethan it auld naturally take a number of yeare to realise the amount, and it may be, that the whole amount could never be aid at ae a fact testified to by the absence of the donors’ name in eee : for the engravings would then be a matter, more ess, of private concern, and extend over a pretty lon 7 pai with ineartata intervals, so as to make it impossible for any gon ie body to adopt a definite i donors. judgi mple, we should be guided by the more archaic characters rather the more advanced form =f which might have been —— on the ee long after ips was constructed. In any case the prese of advanced forms in on two in ee shou id not be a bowed a modity: the view about” thie dee of t he building which may re formed by a careful consideration of the generality of the inscriptions. ed gar ioe aE 15. A Note on the L[viplopterous Wasps in the Collection of the Indian Museum. By Crepric Dover and H. Srintvasa Rao. (Published with the permission of the Director, Zoological Survey of India.) In the present paper descriptions of seven new forms of Vespidae, and new records of the majority of the species of diplopterous wasps described by singham in his first volume on the Hymenoptera in the “ Fauna of British India” series are given. Some of the species of which new locality records are given here have been identified by the late Col. C. T. Bing- ham and Mr. ©. A. Paiva. Valuable notes on the taxonomy of the Vespidae are given by Dr. J Bequaert in his memoir on the Vespidae of the Belgian Congo, published in Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. H ist. Vol. XXXIX, 1918. In this paper reasons are given for reducing the genus Rygchium (= Rhynchium) to a sub-genus of Odynerus and for changing the well-known name I[caria to Ropalidia. The name Ischnogaster is also changed to Stenogaster, but with- out comment. After a study of the literature we find that this change should be maintained, for the text of Duperrey’s Voyage de la Coquille, Zoology, Vol. If, in which I schnogaster ibed lished long before this. In a foot-note to p. 271 of the text Guérin himself says that plates IX and X, on which J. fulgi- pennis is figured, were published in December, 1831. The generic name of fulgipennis was here given as Stenogaster and this therefore establishes its validity. In the text the author changed the name Stenogaster to Ischnogaster as he believed it to be pre-occupied in Coleoptera, but this was apparently a misapprehension, for according to Agassiz’ N omenclator Zoolo- gicus the Coleopterous genus Stenogaster was described in 1833, and Guérin’s genus was certainly prior to this. It will be seen that we have, therefore, no option but to adopt the change from the well-known Ischnogaster to Stenogaster, but we consider the case (like that of Jearia) yet another instance of 236 Jcurnal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, the unfortunate changes sometimes necessitated by a strict appliance of priority rules. ! In Dr Bequaert’s paper (pp. 12-17) a new classification of the diplopterous wasps is proposed. We are of opinion that it is more satisfactory than previous systems ne have therefore adopted it here. In the preparation of this note we have received much help from Mr. G. R. Dutt of Pusa who looked over the rough ia and suggested es emendations and also added me notes based on specimens in the Pusa collection. To hire our sincere thanks are 2 Family VESPIDAE. Subfamily ZerHinas. Zethus dolosus Bing. Sikkim ; Pashok, Darjeeling District. Labus humbertianus Sauss. Kangra Valley ; Sikkim; Kobo, Abor country, 400 ft. (S. W. Kemp, 2 Sur £4): Mergui, L. Burma Snbfamily EuMENINAE. EHumenes greene Sauss. Nilgiri Hills, 2,50) ft. (H. @. Andrewes, vil0). Repre- sented inthe Pusa collection Hout Mavmyo, Burma, =. 500 ft. (viii 14) and Margherita, Assam (19°v-20). Eumenes architectus Smith. Sikkim : pierce sty of E. Himalayas, 500 ft. (N. Anan- dale, 1-vi'08); Sadi N.E. Assam: Calcutta; Mergui and Dawna Hills, MN orastoelas: We have specimens under the name rufipes Ritsema, which is undoubtedly the same as this — from Bangalore, Poona and Calcutta. ' The synonymy of the genus is as follows :—- Genus Stenogaster acon Méneville. 1831. Stenogaster Guérin in Duperrey’s Voy. de la Cog. Ins., pl. es 1838. Ischnogaster Guérin in Duperrey’s Voy. de la Cog. Ins. IT, pt- 1853 Toshnogarier Bon , Mon. Guep. Sociales, Bs 6, pl. ii, fg. la-I/- 1897. Ischnogaster idee a ’ Faun. Brit. Ind. Hym 1904. Tochnogaste Dalla Torre, in Wytsmant 8 Genera Insectorum, _ 83, pl. 6, on Type: Sten ides ter full ‘ pennis Guéri Range: Australian and 0 Oriental pegidid. 1922. ] Diploplera in the Indian Museum. 237 Eumenes affinisima Sauss. Mussorie, 7,000 ft. (#2. Brunetti, 20-26-v'07); Simla Hills, 9,000 ft (N. Annandale and S. W. Kemp, 18-21-vi06); Raj- shahi, E. Bengal (N. Annandale, 1- 6'ii'07). Kumenes punctata Sauss. This is apparently acommon insect in Sikkim. Dudgeon’s E., subtestacea (? MS. only), the type of which is in the Indian Museum, is undoubtedly a synonym of this species. Humenes mazxillosus var. circinalis Fabr. Perak, Malay Reninaale: Eumenes mazillosus var. petidlotad| Fabr. Widely distributed in the Oriental region, extending to Austrajia. Bingham remarks that the form does not extend to the hills above 2,000 feet, but from conus in‘ the Museum collection we see that it has been taken at consider- ably higher altitudes. In the Pusa collection there are speci- mens from Naduvatam, Nilgiris, 7,000 ft. (v'04) ; Santikoppa, North Coorg (v. 14). Eumenes mazxillosus var. dimidiatipennis Sauss. This is a fairly common Oriental and N. African wasp. Cretin (Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. X1V, p. 820) gives some interesting notes on the habits of this form. The above three orms were regarded as distinct species by Bingham, but Bequaert has recently shown! that they are really varieties of E, peeeet: which is a common and widely distributed African specie Eumenes caffer var. esuriens Fabr. This is a common Indian wasp which has been taken also d. in N. Africa and Queenslan Eumenes caffer var. gracilis Sauss. This form has a somewhat similar distribution to the previous one, but Mr. G. R. Dutt tells us: that it-is a very | Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. XXXIX, pp..856-69, 1918, 238 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, lectors, he was not able to find more than two specimens. In the Museum there are twelve specimens ; two from Tibet, one from Samarang, and the remainder from Singapore and Yoko- hama. This and the above form were also regarded by Bing- ham as distinct species, but we have followed Bequaert in placing them as varieties of H. caffer, a species which does not occur in India. Eumenes conica Fabr. This widely distributed Eumenid is one of the few Indian species of the family whose habits are well known. Notes have been published by Bingham in Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., X11, p. 538, and Ramakrishna Aiyar, ibid., p. 243. A good account is given by Dutt in Mem. Dept. Agri. Ind. Ent. Series IV, p. 231 (1913). Paiva records an aberration of this species in Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. (n.s.) 1; p. 349 (1906). Eumenes edwardsit Sauss. Sikkim; Satara District, Bombay Presidency ; Calcutta; Kumdhik, Nepal Terai. Represented in the Pusa collection from Pusa (vi'07); Gorakhpur (xii08) and Trichinopoly (G. R. Dutt “bred from sohtary mud cells attached to grass blades; the shape of a cell is roundly oval and it is 14 mm. along the major axis and about 10 mm. along the minor one’’) Eumenes flavopicta Blanch. Bangalore; Nilgiris, 9,000 ft.; Satara District ; Khempsa, W. Ghats; Nedumangad, 10 miles N.E. of Trivandrum (N. Annandale, 14°xi‘08); Cacara Bay, Portugese India (S. W. Kemp, 15x16). In the Pusa collection from Matheran, 2.500 ft. Bombay (iv'08); Kannirode, Madras (vi'17) ; Coorg ; Sidapur ; Sudaganga and Matale, Ceylon (iii'19). — ! Humenes arcuata Fab. _ According to Bingham this species does not extend up the Himalayas to any great height, but there is a specimen in the Pusa collection from Lebong, 5,000 ft. collected in September, 1908 ) “In September, 1914, Mr. T. Bainbrigge Fletcher found a nest of this species at Moulmein (Burma), which was made of mud, round the stem of a creeper, the nest hanging like 4 fruit. The mud used was reddish yellow in colour. The nest , | | 1922.] Diplopiera in the Indian Museum. 239 ten wasps emerged up to 9th October, 1914, seven through cir- cular openings made on one side and three on the opposite side. The eleventh cell was opened i in pe deed 1915, and was found to contain a dead pupa.’ (G. R. Dutt). Eumenes lepeletiert var. asinus Sauss. This form! is not recorded in the ‘‘ Fauna.’”? The Museum possesses an example identified by Major Nurse and taken by him in April, 1901, in Deesa, a cantonment in the Bombay Pre- sidency. Bequ uaert considers asinus a varie ty of EH. a. which is widely distributed in the Ethiopian region, while form under consideration was previously known only imi Senegal. Montezumia burmanica Bing. Sikkim. Meade Waldo has shown? that Cameron’s M. bi- sulcate from the Khasi Hills is a synonym of this species. er ages abdominalis Bing: Odynerus (Rygchium) nitidulum Fabr. Cal “Pusa; Bangalore; Lucknow; Kashmir; La- hore, Punjab ine 08, Pusa coll.). Odynerus (Rygchium) metallicum Sauss. Represented in the Pusa collection from Pusa; Bhilsa, C.P. (iv 08); Surat, tone (v'04); Lyallpar (ix: 21) ; Bur- nihat, Assam, 800 ft. (x°20). Odynerus punctum Fabr. Calcutta ; Siliguri; Purneah District ; Lucknow. Odynerus miniatus Sauss. Meade-Waldo has shown’ that Smith’s Pterochilus pul- chelles dsuoribed by Behan in the “ Fauna” volume on 1 Cf, Mon. Guep Soc. 1852, p- 59, ae xi, fig. 1, and Bequaert, loc cit., p- 2 Ann. A lg Nat. Hist. (8) V, p- 47 (1910). 3 Ann. Mag Nat. Hist. (8) V, P- 101 (1910). 240 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, wasps and bees is the same as this species. The Museum has examples from Sikkim. Odynerus diffinis Sauss. Dhikala, Garhwal District (R. Hodaart, 9 v-09). Odynerus guttatus Smith. Calcutta ; Bangalore. Subfamily StENOGASTRINAE. Stenogaster fraterna Bing. Perak, Malay Perinsula; 10 miles south of Kuching. Sarawak, Borneo (C. W. Beebe, 25-vi'10). Stenogaster scitula Bing. Sikkim; Pashok, Darjiling District, 2,000 ft. (L. Hart- less, 11-v-16); Sinla, Darjiling District, 1,500 ft. (Carmichael Collection). Stenogaster scitula var. assamensis nov. This is a colour variety of S. scitula differing in that it has a dagger-shaped ochraceous marking, not a small central yel- low spot on the clypeus; there is a small ochraceous spot on each side of the scutellum anteriorly ; and a roughly triangu- infuscate above. Pronotum reddish on anterior and posterior margins. 1922. ] Diploptera in the Indian Museum. 241 lateral margins. Post-scutellum impunctate, a posteriorly striate, a distinct median furrow and two small, more or less triangular, reddish marks on each side of it at apex. domen uniformly shining black. Legs brownish, from the femora outwards with golden pubescence; outer side of coxae of first pair ochraceous, and three-fourths of femora, tibiae and tarsi ochraceous ; coxae of second and third pairs with an ochraceous marking on outer- side, and extremities of femora ochraceous. Wings semi-hyaline, iridescent; stigma brownish-black ; an ovate spot on sides below base of forewings, a lunate mark- ing below this. and a spot below hindwings, reddish g m.; expanse: 21 mm. Habitat: 10 miles south of Kuching, Sarawak, Borneo (C. W. Beebe, 20-vi-10). : Type in the collection of the Zoological Survey of India, - Indian Museum, Calcutta : This species is allied to S. rufomaculata Bingham, but in our species the mesonotum is grooved and the abdomen is immaculate, while in Bingham’s species the mesonotum is not reddish colour of the markings of our type may probably be due to discolouration by the action of Cyanide. If this is so the original colour was probably ochraceous. Stenogaster nigrifrons Smith. more conspicuous. We assign these specimens to the above species, Stenogaster eximia Bing. Kandy, Ceylon (F. H. Gravely, 13-v'10 and iv-10). 242 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Stenogaster extmiotdes sp. nov. A deep, brownish-black species. Male: Head with very fine pale pubescence; vertex rather finely punctured ; face to a little beyond the antennae yellow ; a distinct median groove extending from the anterior ocellus to a little beyond the antennae; eye incisions yellow. Clypeus yellow, closely pubescent ; long, somewhat convex ; a prominent median carina anteriorly. Antennae brownish; scape and tip almost yellowish brown. Pronotum with a broad yellow stripe, posteriorly narrowed to a point at base of forewings. Mesonotum closely punctured and very finely granular. Scutellum distinctly convex, pubescent; a promi- nent median carina and two large semi-circular yellow spots on each side of the carina anteriorly. Postscutellum finely each side. Petiole of abdomen ferrugineous-brown, blackish at base and apex ; rest of abdomen blackish ; a yellow semi-circular band on base of second segment ; remaining segments similar- ly but less conspicuously marked ; abdomen with pale, golden pubescence. Legs brownish; femora, tibiae and tarsi of first pair yellow on outer sides ; pubescence on tarsi more abundant than other joints. Wings flavo-hyaline; forewings somewhat dark along costal margin ; a small yellow marking on tegulae; a yellow spot on sides below wings, and a lunate spot of the same colour below this. Length : about 19 mm.; expanse: 32 mm. Habitat : Nadgani, Nilgiri Hills. 2,500 ft. (H. 2. Andrewes, iv’10) ; forest tramway, 10 to 14 miles, 0 = 300 ft., Cochin State (PF. H. Gravely, 28-ix:14). Type in the collection of the Zoological Survey of India, Indian Museum, Calcutta. Described from three specimens. men is blackish at the base and apex, whereas in S. eximia the Stenogaster bicarinata sp. nov. A black species. : Male: Head finely punctured; a groove from anterior 1922. ] Diploptera in the Indian Museum. 243 ocellus to the raised inter-antennal Space; a semi-lunate yellow spot just above antennae, and two large, circular, yellow spots below ; eye-incisions yellow ;_ two circular yellow spots on vertex behind eyes. Clypeus sparsely punctured with rich silvery pile; pentagonal, long, slightly convex, apical portion elongate and acutely pointed. Mandibles dark-brown, base somewhat yellowish. Antennae dark-brown ; underside of flagellum lighter. omen shining black; finely and somewhat sparsely punctate; thinly palely pubescent; a circular ochraceous marking on each side of second segment; at base a narrow, medially interrupted, ochraceous marking ; and two distinct, parallel, elongate, ochraceous markings ventrally. Legs brownish ; coxae yellow on outer sides ; underside of femora yellow; covered with pale golden-yellow pubescence which is abundant on tibiae and tarsi of first pair, slightly less so on second and third pairs. 7 ings semi-hyaline; nervures brownish, darker along costal margin ; stigma dark-brown; a minute yellow spot on tegulae ; a large spot below forewings, a lunate. marking below this, and a small spot under hindwings, yellow. ength: 21mm.; expanse: 18 mm. (C. W. Beebe, 25-virl0). ake e in the collection of the Zoological Survey of India, Indian Museum, Calcutta. Subfamily EPIPONINAE. Polybia orientalis Sauss. Sikkim ; E. Himalayas from 500-5,000 ft.; Kumaon,4,000- 5,000 ft.; Margherita, the Lushai Hills and Yambung, 1,000 ft. Assam ; Burma; Hong-Kong. presen in_ the Pusa collection from Maymyo, U. Burma (viii'14); Khasi 244 Journal of the Asiatic Sociely of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Hills (iii'09), Barapani, 3,100 ft. (vi'lS), Gauhati (x11) and Margherita and Lebong, 5,000 ft. (x°08). EK. Himalayas. A variable species described by Cameron under various names. ! Polybia stigma Smith. Sikkim ; Pashok, Darjiling District, 2,500 ft.; Rangoon; Perak ; Dawna Hills, L. Burma, 400-3,000 ft. ; Hills near Tai- ping, Perak. Subfamily RopaLIDINAE. Ropalidia ferruginea Fabr. Bengal; Orissa; N.W. India; Karachi; Portuguese India ; Pusa, Bihar; Akru, Bengal; Minba, Burma; Coimba- tore: Travancore; Poona, Surat, and Ahmedabad in the Bombay Presidency (Pusa coll.) A widely distributed species. Cameron describes the male in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. VI. p.- - 495, 1900. Ropalidia marginata Lepel. Sikkim ; Margherita, Sadiya, and Shillong, Assam ; Ram- nad, §.E. India; Bombay: Hoshangabad, C.P.;: Bassein Fort (x'09), Surat, Nadiad, Ahmedabad and Poona in Bombay ; Coimbatore (Pusa coll.). Ropalidia variegata Smith. Sikkim; Siliguri; Calcutta; Allahabad: Simla Hills; Nepal; L. Burma: Ceylon; Java ; Andaman Islands. It is also widely distributed in Assam. Ropalidia gravelyi ap. nov. gin ochraceous; posterior margin sinuate. Mandibles dark- brown, a yellow spot at base, three large teeth and one small one. Inter-antennal space raised, carinate down the middle ; a large reddish spot on frons above antennae; eyes not deeply incised ; a reddish stripe alongside inner orbits extending to eye-Incisions ; a similar stripe behind eyes. Antennae brown- ish above, ochraceous below, scape somewhat lighter. Pronotum somewhat coarsely granular ; anterior half eS So Ree De eebsehe se obec = ! Cf. Meade-Waldo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) XIV, p. 406, 1914. 1922.] Diploptera in the Indian Museum. 245 dark, and posterior reddish with a dark marking on inner angle. Mesonotum closely and coarsely punctured ; a distinct median groove anteriorly ; a short slightly curved groove close to each tegula. Scutellum roughly rectangular, broader than long, punctate and immaculate. Post-scutellum less closely ly grooved and obliquely striate ; a pale yellow, pubescent, cir- cular spot on each side posteriorly close to median excavation : pale silvery pubescence posteriorly and on sides. Abdomen dark-brown; petiole with a broad shelf-like Apex of coxa of first pair of legs yellowish below; tro- chanters and femora dark; tibiae and tarsi brown; covered with pale silvery pubescence all over. Coxae of second and third pairs with an oval yellow marking on sides ; femora dark . with ochraceous patches above ; trochanters dark ; tibiae and tarsi dark-brown above and lighter below, and closely pubes- cent. Wings hyaline, iridescent ; costal margin, stigma, and a small circular spot near apex fuscous. Length : 9 mm. ; expanse: 17 mm. Habitat: Kavalai, Cochin State, 1,000-3,000 ft. (F. H. Gravely). Type in the collection of the Zoological Survey of India, Indian Museum, Calcutta. Dr. Gravely also obtained two nests together with laryae in various stages of development, and pupae. The nests are small and of a dark-brown colour ; one is roughly circular, the other elongate ; the stalk is short and attached excentrically. Each cell is hexagonal and the larva lies in it head uppermost. The smallest larva is about 3x2 millimeters the largest 8x3 millimeters. They are of a dirty cream colour ; hea brown, more or less pentagonal, obliquely finely striate with a pale longitudinal median line extending from the ver- tex to the anterior margin of the clypeus. Clypeus approxi- mately as broad as long, finely transversely striate. stout, more or less cylindrical in general appearance, but square in section, slightly flattened below, gradually tapering towards anus ; the first three segments in the form of deep folds, narrower than the rest; a median groove on dorsal surface. First visible segment below broad, more chitinised than the rest, with minute, black spinules. No legs : The pupae are about 9 mm. long, and enclosed in the pupal skin. General colour yellowish or cream. Head yellowish 246 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, brown ; vertex with a median pale yellow line extending on to clypeus. Clypeus convex, roughly pentagonal, anterior end acute, yellow, with a pale band on anterior margin and a median whitish line. Mandibles yellowish with four sharp denticulations. Eyes dark-brown; ocelli elongated, anterior vertical and lateral oblique. Antennae pale yellow, arched near eyes. Pronotum with thickened posterior margin. Meso- notum roughly pentagonal, anterior margin rounded ; a pale yellow median line, and an elongated median, yellowish-brown marking continued anteriorly to the lateral margins. Scutellum, post-scutellum, median segment, and abdomen yellowish ; paler below; median segment excavated medially. Legs pale yellow. folded close to the body ; tarsi of third pair that there are two central, black, uniform markings. The species differs markedly. in colouration especially, from any other species that we know, Ropalidia krishna sp. nov. An almost uniformly black species. Female: Head punctured. Clypeus with a few, very fine, scattered punctures ; pentagonal, convex ; posterior mar- gin slightly sinuate, apex produced into a blunt tooth; a yellow band on anterior margin, and ciliated with ferrugineous hairs ; sides covered with pale silvery pile. Mandibles with a yellow spot at base. Inter-antennal space raised, with an in- distinct grove from this to anterior ocellus ; eye-incisions not deep. Antennae uniformly blackish. Pronotum, mesonotum, scutellum, post-scutellum, and median segment closely punctured and granular ; an indistinct ; carina anteriorly on mesonotum ; a distinct carina on scutellum median segment divided by deep median groove ; each al convex. Petiole of abdomen, and second segment closely punctured and granular; remaining segments less so and covered with fine silvery pubescence. Legs uniformly black with very fine, pale pubescence. Forewings flavous; apical half with the exception of @ small spot at tip, and costal margin dark-brown. Le : m.; expanse: 22 mm. Habitat: Calcutta and environs (C. Dover, xi'20). Type in the collection of the Zoological Survey of India, Indian Museum, Calcutta. ‘ Its uniform black colour, except for the yellow marking on the clypeus, and its small size make this a distinct specie>- 1922.} Diploptera in the Indian Museum. 247 Paraicaria bicolor Grib. Margherita, Assam; L. Burma. Subfamily Poxistinas. Polistes schach Fabr. Sikkim ; Kumaon ; Kashmir; Nepal Terai. Polistes sulcatus Smith. Tibet ; Shillong, Assam; Kashmir; Nepal; Batavia, ava. ss Polistes tenebricosus Lepel. var. This form! is not noticed in the “Fauna.” It is repre sented in the Indian Museum collection from Sikkim, Dehra un, and various localities in Assam, where it seems to be a fairly common insect. Polistes sagittarius Sauss. Probably distributed throughout India and Burma ex- tending to the Malayan sub-region and China. It is mainly a hill species. Polistes stigma Fabr. Widely distributed in India, Burma and Ceylon extending to Malaya. This species generally builds its delicate paper combs on trees overhanging a river or a pond. On the island of Barkuda in the Chilka Lake it nests along the shore, chief- ly on the southern end, but never in the interior. In a visi paid to Barkuda in the middle of April, 1922, several indivi- duals of this form were seen hovering just a few inches above the mud at the edge of a small pond that has been dug on the island. They would, not infrequently, venture out further and sip at the water. : Polistes maculipennis Sauss. This is almost entirely a hill species. Sikkim ; Mussorie ; Simla Hills ; Kumaon ; Nepal; Kashmir. It also occurs in South Africa. Three specimens in the Museum collection named P. marginalis shaitan Bingham are remarkably similar to this species. Polistes adustus Bing. Sikkim ; Darjiling District from 400-6,000 ft.; Kumaon; Nepal. : 1 Cf. Sauss. Mon. Guep. Soc. p. 51, 1853. 248 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, Polistes dawnae sp. nov. A black species. Female: Head rather closely punctured with very close silvery pubescence. Clypeus approximately as broad as long, strongly convex; posterior margin sinuate ; sparsely punctate, covered with close silvery pile; anterior margin obtusely angled with a few golden hairs; an ochraceous stripe along inner orbits, and another on vertex behind eyes ; inter-anten- nal space raised and tuberculate. Antennae uniformly black ; lum narrow, triangular, almost impunctate ; two transverse, yellowish, elongate markings anteriorly. Median segment flattened with a deep, median furrow; distinctly transversely striate; a large yellowish marking on each half; closely pubescent on sides. Abdomen pruinose ; basal segment transversely suleated across the middle; yellow, excepting a black almost triangu- lar mark at the base; vertex of the triangle reaching about the middle of the segment ; an ochraceous narrow band along the apical margin and sides of the second segment ; apical margins of fourth, fifth and sixth segments faintly testaceous. Legs blackish with fine silvery pubescence ; sides of tibiae with an ochraceous line. : Wings hyaline, brownish yellow along the costal margin ; radial cell slightly fuscous. Length: 10mm.; expanse: 21 mm. Habitat: Dawna Hills, 2,000-3,000 ft., L. Burma. (4. Annandale, 2°iii09). ree ype in the collection of the Zoological Survey of Indian Museum, Calcutta. Near P. adustus Bingham, but distinct. Subfamily VESPINAE. Vespa dorulloides Sauss. Widely distributed and fairly common in the FE. Hima- layas, in Assam, Burma, Borneo and Sumatra, It has also the Malay Peninsula and Java. Mr. T. Bainbrigge Fletcher ried us that this species flies by night and is often attracted to ight. : | Vespa ducalis Smith. Sikkim ; Nepal; U. Burma. Also common in Assam. 1922.] Diploptera in the Indian Museum. 249 Vespa orientalis Linn. Widely distributed. Various localities in Bengal; Ranchi; Persia ; Baluchistan. Vespa basalis Smith. Sikkim, 4,000-6,000 ft.; Assam: Dehra Dun. Vespa bicolor Fabr. Darjiling District ; Mishmi eduntry, Assam Frontier. Vespa germanica var. flaviceps Smith. Mussorie; Kumaon; Simla Hills; Nepal. Bingham re- garded this form as a distinct species, but Du Buysson ! right- ly considers it a variety of V. germanica, which together with V. rufa was a few years ago, recorded from India by Cameron.® Vespa auraria Smith. Sikkim; Shillong, Assam ; Kashmir; Nepal. ! Ann, Soc. Ent. France, 1904, p. 6 2 Zeits. Hym. Dipt. 11, p. 317, i908. mr 16. On the Rationalisation of Algebraic Equations. By Nrivenpra Nata CHATTERJEE. In continuation of a paper read on the same subject before the Asiatic Society of Bengal on the 3rd September, 1919!, a new method is proposed for rationalising algebraic equations. Let the equation to be oe sed be eee eee (nm an integer) which can be put under the form pw z 1 n—1 oA oe +s cib Age; p*)=0,; Ao, A,,...An-1 being rational. If we put y= —x + A,, the equation becomes n—1 .+4,1p " =0 (1) 2 2 Pee ee + Ap" + —) 2 n= multiplying both sides by P, LP tw 5 Oe 1 2 n—-1 PB + PB, p" + P,Bp" +...+ Pi Bap ” = ven k2) 1 2 PC) + P,C, p? + P,O,p" +...+POr1p" =0 ...(3) ; oe : “ P1V 9+ yal S + P,_-1V gp" cee ete Py Vegi? ge! Bee (n) where By, B, B gee C); Crs oe + Sas sve Vi; ee ee are rational functions of y, p, A,, Ay... 4n-1; and P,, P,,. -; being as yet undetermined coefficient 8. | Midge the above equations, we get y+P,B,+P,C, +---+Pa-1V,=9 (A) if A,+ PB +P, «4 Poli =0 (1’) A, + P,B, + PsC.+- +++ Pa-1V_=0 (2’) Agi +P.B ~1+P,C Bee sha oF. .V,-1=0 Gi 1 Cf. Journ, Asiat. Soc. Beng. (n. 8.) XV, pp. 305-307, 191°. 252 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] which equations are sufficient for the unique determination of gS Tee ger a Substituting these values in ey and putting y= —x+A,, we get _ rationalised equation in uation in its lowest disseastone must be of the né degree as Shéewine proved. The same method is also applicable to the rationalisation of the equation Saye race boy where e ,qg”,r",... are not rational. 17. Discovery of Bengali(?) dramas in Nepal. By Kumar GANGANANDA Stnwa Seven years ago four arama were discovered in manu script form in Nepal. These a AMAT Ha ets 2. RMST HI ASAIea 3. Wai aa carafe and 4. waufa Bal ATTAAT AAARAAT — All of these were written in Newari script. They are of great importance in more than one way. ‘The exact nature of the popular plays in the 17th and the 18th century as revealed vy these compositions is worth considering. Here, however, I confine mvself to the discussion of the question of the language of some of these dramas. The Bangiya Sahitya Parishad has baplshed them in Bengali script and the collection is called “auTe ager aizH ” (Bengali dramas in Nepal). f these, the first two were written under the auspices of Bhipatindra Malla, the last but one of the Malla Rajas of Bhatgaon. His reign of 34 years, as we know from the His- tory of Nepal (written in Parbatiya language by Munshi Shew- sanker Singh and Pandit Sri Gunananda and translated by D. Wright), included the years 817 Nepal Samvat (1697 A.D.) to 841 Nepal Samvat (1721 A. Pie nana last two were written in the reign of his son, Ranajit A careful examination of thede plays will show it beyond doubt that the language of ta¥yfta by wae differs from that of the other three works. For example, I give the following extracts culled at random from the above mentioned books. n aIMtaTy wa faaifaam we have (at p. 7)— “Vea ue oy af wea wea fra(a)e at arm sitte ca atte (eifa) arte Fa Hee ATT” In ABTHTEA of HWST we have (p. 43)— “aqaq taa tha qa ale (Ata) WA WaT STA Ta HT TE TT | 254 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIII, In ATaatas RARE of AWAUA we have (p. 219)— “fam (un) faarea aia aefa-aa-aaa afa sae yam fears” But in the TATA of AWW we have (p. 155)— “qeafa, cacy fewa ua | yaa aufa at(s)4 atTete fata | ata RAAT ale atetaa AF | gama afaa ait, wea GET | at tata aa feaa fata | qa ated aif sat yam i” This fact attracted also the notice of Mr. Nanigopa, Bandopadhyaya, the cditor of this collection. But he believed them to be the specimen of old Bengali, with admixtures of foreign tongues, In the preface of the book he says :— “geet AY usa ata art F agree Sar, & faut HAST ATE | TSISL IGT AMMA Ala, TABTA STA, WILITS St MARTE MTETRE Ha; Aa Da Ta UE BTS | FE TACT fata aus nS; fate fearfaata at aeTaay aU” | I wonder why he leaves out of account the last book, viz. ararraaraaset. It has greater resemblance to faerfaery and aerica than tragfcs has. Asa matter of fact faerfaary, 4¥T- vita and wyaaeawaze are written in one and the same language which is different from that of the trate - The language of traafes is distinctly Bengali and Mr. Nanigopal Banerji rightly points out some of the peculiarities that distinguish the language of crafca from that of the remaining works. In faeprfrerg and aera he finds that & is added to a word to make it a Genetive case, a€ to make it an Ablative case, and fe to make it a Locative case. His atten- tion was also drawn to the words ¥a@, each, ate and at - But curiously enough, all these peculiarities in case-endings and words, which appear to the learned editor as old forms of Bengali, are really forms of Maithili. These peculiarities are met with in the current specch of Maithils. They even n0W use the words, mentioned above, in their ordinary conversation as well as in literature. Apart from these, it would appear quite clear to even a 1922.] Discovery of Bengali (?) dramas in Nepal, 255 superficial observer that the following words which are selected at random from faenfaery, aenita and ayarreaamazer are not Bengali but Maithili. They are used by Maithils in the ho qaady very same form ia which they appear in the above-mentioned oks meaning ‘ near.’ meaning ‘to wash.’ —an idiom, meaning ‘Excessively.’ Literal- it means ‘covering the ankles’ and probably it had its origin from the mode of wearing clothes top to toe. -Sometimes the idiom qualifies friendship. —These words are used as Participles. meaning ‘ what.’ meaning ‘as if.’ meaning ‘ Let us go.’ meaning ‘ You should (or let us) worship’ formed by the additionof#. They are used in Potential mood ; second eS Words in this form signify respect meaning ‘ there.’ meaning ‘here.’ meaning ‘ daughter.’ meaning ‘ You have done’—used in Perfect tense; second person. This form is use in addressing the inferiors or persons near and dear —meaning ‘ ‘Save me.’ —meaning ‘ learn this’ ee by adding 4¥ used in Potential mood; second person. This form is used in addressing the infe- riors or persons near and dear meaning ‘ in a nice way ’—used as an Adverb. meaning ‘ took place.’ meaning ‘ belonging to sister.’ meaning ‘ everywhere,’ ‘ whole,’ ‘ entire.’ meaning ‘ your.’ meaning ‘ attached.’ meaning ‘ Came.’ meaning ‘ that.’ meaning ‘ shall go to do.’ meaning ‘ will occur.’ 256 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] arxa meaning ‘will kill’ or ‘ will hurt’ used as simple future by adding 44 Ziga meaning ‘ Let it be —Potential mood, second person. azfsey meaning ‘I tell you —Present tense ; second person. This form is used when addressed to inferiors or persons near and dear. =ufyare —a colloquial term meaning ‘ to show one- self to be a great man.’ In this form it is addressed to inferiors. But tliere is such a close resemblance between Bengali and Maithili that one should not be surprised that the editor has fallen into such an “error as this. Not to speak of the old forms of these languages, even a piece in modern Bengali can pass as Maithili, if only some changes are introduced into it. Both these languages stand to each other as uterine sisters. But the points noted above, which are points of difference leave no doubt as to the language of three of these dramas being Maithili and not Bengali. INNIS A I NIE NSRP AOSD 18. Madra. By H. ©. Ray, M.A. Madra has been generally taken roughly to ela ate to modern Sialkot and its adjacent districts to the west of the Ravi in the central Punjab. But according to Ase it once extended from the Beas to the Chenab and even to the Jhelum. ! Its capital was Sakala or Sagala-nagara, modern Sialkot. In the general history of ancient India. Madra has played not an unimportant part; yet up to the present no systematic attempt has been made to write out a connected narrative of it by joining together the many scattered pieces of information. In writing this article my humble aim has been to try to present such an accoun In the Vedic literature Madra denotes a people and appears to have been divided into two sections. The southern Madras lived in the Punjab while the northern section—the They are mentioned in the Aitareya Brahmana® as living beyond the Himalayas (parena Himavantam). According to some scholars the Uttara Madras had a non-monarchical cons- titution. They refer to a passage* in the Aitareya Brahmana which mentions that among the Uttara Kurus and the Uttara Madras the whole community (janapadah) was consecrated to rulership and their institution was called Vairajya. M. Haug i.e. people in opposition to the king mentioned as abhishikta, i.e. inaugurated, whilst in all other passages - this chapter, we find instead of them the rajanah or kings. He has of late been followed by Mr. eee § and Dr. R. C. Majumdar.’ But Dr. Raychaudhuri points out that Vairajya does not necessarily mean ‘ kingless t is derived from Virat, a designation applied to great kings, as well as to the conse- crated rulers of the northern Janapadas. In the Utkrosana { Cun nni Bi ad Bey, Ancient Geography of India, p. * Altindisches Leben, p. 102. bs dic Index, Vol + pp. 84-85. probable ‘aa the Uttaramadra countr ry formed the "cradle land af the ras from bea they subsequently migrated in the Punjab, 8 Vill, 14, 5 M. Haug’s reins: of the Pye Brahmana, p. 8 An Introduction to Hindu Polity, Modern pale. Vel, XIII, 1913, U Corporate Life in Ancient India, |st ed. p. 89. 258 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, passage of the Aitareya Brahmana' the king consecrated with the Aindramahabhisheka is called Virat, worthy of Vazrajya. The rendering of Vairajya by kingless would make according to him a king worthy of a kingless State Madra was once a centre of learning and noted for refine- . ment in manners. e have mention in Vedic literature of two celebreties of Madra viz. (1) Kapya Pataiichala who_is repre- sented as a contemporary and teacher of Uddaiaka Aruni the veteran Vedic scholar and philosopher of Kuru Pavichala® and (2) Saungayani another teacher mentioned in the Vaméa Bra- hmana*® whose pupil was Aupamanyava of Kamboja. Zimmer Panini mentions a place named Sankala® which according to some is to be identified with Sakala the capital of Madra. . But Sir R. G. Bhandarkar adduces good grounds for believing that it should rather be traced to Sangala of the historians of Alexander, a city which is quite distinct from Saka a.b The Maddas and their capital city Sagala are often men- tioned in the Jataka and the Epic stories... In a verse of the Vidhurapandita Jataka the Maddas are mentioned with lofty Paficala, Surasena, Macchas and Kekakas.* The Birth Stories and the Great Epic represent the Madras as living under @ monarchical constitution and we read often of matrimonial al- liances with the neighbouring rcyal families. In two of the Kasiraja of Benares was a daughter of a king of the Maddas. oO was Subhadda the queen of another Benares king.!° In the Kusa Jataka" princess Pabhavati the eldest daughter of the i VIEL PS, 2 Brih ny 37,1. 8 Indische Studien 4,372. Wedic Index, Vol. II p. 149. + Altindisches Leben, 102; Vedic Index, Vol. II, p. 123. 5 IV, 2. 76, 8 Indian Antiquary, Vol. I, p. 22. 1 The Jataka Trans. Ed. by Cowell; IV, 479. V, 514, 531. VI, 538: 545, 547. Mbh. VIII, 40-45. — 8 VI, 545, 9 VI, 538. 10 V,514. It is to be noted that in both the cases the Benares ssed 16,000 wives. This is interesting in view ot ee ong oe Okkaka is also said to have possessed 16,000 wives , 531. This story al ‘ : Senart, IT, 441 et seq. y also appears in a variant form in | 1922 ] ~ Madra. 259 Madda king is married to the ugly prince Kusa, son and heir of the Malla king Okkaka, who is said to be the “chief king in. all India,’ while in the Kalinga-Bodhi' and Vessantara Jatakas* similar alliances are reported with Kalinga and Sivi kingdoms respectively. It is curious that in all these mar- riages the Maddas always supply the brides—a fact borne out by the Great Epic and the Mahavamsa. Inthe former princess Madri is married to Pindu of the House of the Kurus and in the latter the queen of Sumitta king of Lala (Radha) is the daughter of a certain Madra king.’ According to a Buddhist tradition one of the principal queens of Bimbisara king of Magadha was Khema a Madra princess.*+ The reason why the Madra princesses were in such great demand in the royal families of India was probably their exquisite beauty. The demand for ideal beauty of a Kusa could only be satisfied by a baer te Se the land of the Maddas. Pabhavati was said to be so fair that from her person ‘‘ Stream forth rays of light as it were of the newly risen sun. When it is dark in her closes measuring four cubits there is no need of any lamp, the whole chamber is one blaze of light. 6 In the Mahatharata Madra women are mentioned as gauri,i.e. faircoloured,® while in the Mah@vastu Avadana’ the daughter of a Madr aka king is described as one who in beauty had no He in the whole of Jambudvipa. In the Harivamsga (11.50. 2) we are told that the Madra princess Lakshana was the sixth of the eight Pattanayikah or chief queens amongst the 16,000 wives of Sri-Kris shna. Madra has no place in. the ‘stereotyped’ list of the Solasa mahajanapada, i.e. Sixteen Great Couutries which occurs in no less than four places of the Angultara Nikaya,’ or in the slightly different list of the Jaina Bhagavati Sitra.* ‘The early custom or employing the name of the people to denote the country Pieri is in evidence in the list of the mahajanapadas in the 1 IV, 479, 2 VI, 547. ’ Mbh, I, 113; P.T.S. Trans by Geiger; p. a Lila is sometimes taken ‘to correspond to Lata ie Gujarat. See The Cambridge History of India, Vol. I, p. 606. But Radha seems to better sane with the geogra- phical data contained in rans. p, 38n nite mother a rete of ; The Jataka Vol. V, pp. 6 Mbh VIII, 44, 16-18. Madra women are still reget for the i, ci of their features and comparatives a of c T Le ahavastu, Senart, II, 441 et seq. e the carious statement is made that a Madraka king ruled in the city of atau in the na Janapada. It isp , however, that there w Kanauj in the extended their sway or it might as well be that the Sidrasena territories had oxi nded so far as to include andi uj. 3 I, 213. IV, 252, 266, 260. Rhys Davids, Buddhist India, p. 23 » Hoernle Uvasagadasao Vol. II, App. pp. 6-7. Pi aegis sae aioe i, : 260 Journal of the Asiatic Society 6f Bengal. [N.S., XVIII. : Anguitara Nikdya' is also evident in the Jatakas and the rulers are generally designated ‘‘ King of the Maddas.” The reason probably for the absence of Madda in the above lists is that in the period represented by the Nikaya and the Bhagavati Sutra, it was annexed to one of the neighbouring ‘“‘ Great coun- tries” probably Gandhara whose king Pukkusati in Buddha’s time maintained diplomatic intercourse with king Bimbis6ra of Magadha. In the Jatakas we do not get much about the manners aun customs of the Madras. This is supplied by the Karnaparva | of the Mahabharata. The Madra country in the period which saw the composition of this portion of the Great Epic, was looked down upon by the orthodox communities of the ‘ middle- country’ watered by the Sarasvati, Ganges and the Yamuna. This is clearly revealed by the sharp passage at arms between : the Madra king Salya and Karna. Though some allowance must be made for the fact that the description and epithets were used in a quarrel, there can be no doubt that there is a substantial basis of truth in the remarks. Karna here poses as the champion of the orthodox community. Thus he says :— ‘There is a town of the name of Cakala, a river of the name of Apaga® and a clan of the Vahikas known by the name of the Jarttikas. The practices of these peoples are very censurable. They drink the liquor called Gauda and eat fried barley withit. They also eat beef with garlics.... of righteous practices they have none Their women intoxicated with rink and divested of robes, laugh and dance outside the walls of houses in cities, .... Maddened with drink, they call upon one another, many endearing epithets.’”* And again :— “How indeed would the Madrakas and Sindhu-Sauviras know anything of duty, being born, as theyare, in a sinfu country, being peecien, ve their practices, and being totally regardless of all dut : The above qasteeons fully illustrate the contempt and aversion with which the Land of the Five Rivers was held at this period. This attitude of the Middle Country is a bit peculiar and demands explanation. In the Vedic period Madra was surely not a seat for unorthodoxy for we know from the Bihalanaiguks Upanishad that Képy ya Patanchala was then living among them. In the Jatakas we find the Madra prin- cesses much in demand in the Eastern countries while in the Great Epic itself a princess (Madri) of the House of Madra is 1 Carmichael Lectures 1918, p i ree _3 Identified by Pi iackontg with the Ayak Nadi, a small streain which has its rise in the Jammu hills to the north-east of Sialkot. The wages Geography of ah p. 185. » Mahabharata, Trans s. by P.C. Ray, C.I.E., VIII, XLIV, 10-18. ’ fdid., Viti, ZL: 1922.] Madra. 261 accepted in the Kuru family, which, whatever might be said against it, was never famous for heterodoxy. Had the Madra country been so black as Karna paints it, such matrimonial alliances would not have been possible. Moreover we have already seen that Madra at least in the period represented by Panini was used as a synonym for bhadra and mangala ; how shall we then explain Karna’s attitude ?-—We know that the Great Epic grew gradually and it might be that by the time this Parting of the Karnaparva was being composed there were some foreign invasions and settlements in the Punjab by caste- less barbarians such as the Greeks, Sakas or Pahlavas who often make their appearances in the Mahabharata, and served to lower the position of the once hallowed ‘ Sapta sindhava’ in the = es bog the orthodox communities which lay further east. ! have we any sure data to prove that the region round Sakala was a centre of barbarian invasions? In the Milindapatho we read:— ‘Athi Yonakanam nanapuiabhedanam Sagalan-nama naga- ram*... Jambudipe Sagalanagare Milinda nama raja ahosi.’ * The identification of Milinda with Menander the Greek king is no longer doubted and this helps to corroborate our proposition. Bat the question is how did the Greeks come to occupy Madra? The invasion of Alexander must neve effected edicts of Asoka recognised the existence of Greek principalities on the northwestern fringe of his empire and we have reason to believe that soon after the ‘Sun of the Maurya Rawirs had set,’ these principalities gradually advanced their domi- nions and some of them at least occupied the Madra country. Towards the close of the 3rd century B.C. the Bactrian throne was occupied by Euthydémos a native of Magnesia. His son esnese succeeded him about the beginning of the ! Of course it can be contended that the peculiarities in the traits of fluences. But then they e due to the survival of the traits of th peop mp early vedic community in the Punjab, while a different standard of morality and orthodoxy grew up urther —_ thus creating a gu tween the two sections of the Indian commun! be by Trenckner, p. Ae of Classical writers _ however a identical with Sakala ; Sangala was situated to the east of the Rav , while Sakala was -" Loe west. Ind. And, Vol. I, p. 22-23 V. Ataith, Barly History of India, p.7 nee 5 The Madrakas under the Mauryas appear to hav e been an nomous rajasabdopajibi Sarngha. A autilya, p. 378. 262 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVHUI. 2nd century B.C. and is said to have invaded India and pene- trated far into the interior. From Strabo it appears that he nquered aconsiderable portion of Northern India, presumably including Kabul, Punjab and Sindh. He is also credited with founding a city named after his father Euthydémos which ac- cording to Ptolemy! is the same as Sagala (Sakala). After he was driven from Bactria and other Western pile by arin ay city perhaps continued to be the stronghold is dynasty which we shall call the hihi oneadl line of Baas The abate of this dynasty seems to have a long and illustrious career and, besides Euthyvdemia, is credited to have founded several other cities.” He has been supposed to Chaucer’s Knightes Tale® and to be identical with the Yavana King Dattamitra mentioned in the Mahabharata* There is also the greatest amount of likelihood that the Greek invader mentioned in the Mahabhasya of Patafijali and in the Malavikagnimitram of Kalidasa whom the Sungas claim to have encountered and routed was Demetrius as Professor Bhandarkar and Dr. Raychaudhuri suggest and not Menander. : the synchronism of Demetrius with Eukratides who was himself a contemporary of Mithridates 1 (c. 171-136 B.C.) that Demetrius was a contemporary of Pushyamutra Sunga (c. 185-149 B.C). Now the invasion took place surely during the early period of the reign of Pushyamitra when he was still a sendpaii and when he had not vet performed his Agvamedha sacrifice—possibly before 150 B.C. But, there is no place before this date for Menander in the Sakala region as we shall see later on. This finds additional support from the testimony of the Milindapatho that the Yona king Milinda flourished in the 5th century after the Great Nirvana (parinibbanato patcavassasate atilkante).7 pollodotos was probably the second king of this dynasty. We aes that Eukratides and Apollodotos were contemporaries from the ss of the latter’s Kapisa coins by the former.” | Ind. Ant. Vol. XIII, p. 350. The city was called Euthydemia. mun and other texts give the apparently erroneous reading Eu thy- 2 JRA A.S. 1915, pgs Ind. Ant. Vol. XL, Foreign Hlements 7 Hindu Population, p. 12. In my treatment of the History of the House ms Eu’ hydemos I have mainly accepted the views of Dr. H. C. Raychaw- uri. 3 Rapson, Ancient India, p. 123. + Mahabharata I, 139, ee 6 Smith, Early History of tille.: App. I, p. 213. Ind. Ant., Vol. XL p-ifn 6 Strabo, (Falconer’s hart Book X1, section xi. I, : Edited by Trenkne 8 Rapson, Ancient fadia, p. 133; J.R A.S. 1905, p. 785. 1922. ] Madra. 263 These coins are also an evidence of the transfer of the North- western frontier of India from Apollodotos to the family of Greek princes founded in Bactria by Eukratides. Coins of Apollodotos bearing the figure of the Greek goddess, Athene, hurling the thunderbolt which is a characteristic of the Euthy- demean line are found inthe United Provinces and all over North-Western india. The wide distribution of his coins which suggests a rule over extensive territories finds a corroboration from the statement of the Periplus that the coins of Apollodotos were still current at the port of Barygaza (Broach).! On his coins Apollodotos bears the title Philopator. He must have been an early if not the immediate successor of Demetrius as the interval between the two could not have been long both being contemporaries of Eukratides.? His coin legend seems to indicate that he was a scion of the royal “ees of Euthy demos though the exact relationship is not certai The next rulers of this dynasty appear bas be Strato I and Agathoklen whose coins are of the Demetrian type. he- Heliocles*® the son of Eukratides. Agathokleia is taken by Gardner to be the wife of Strato I but by others she is regarded as his mother who was regent during his minority. In the later portions of his (Strato se reign he was associated in govern- ment with his gra andson Stra o Il+ All t region and so Men ander has no place in the long chain a by the four reigns from se to Strato Il. Now if De- metrios flourished c. 200—171 B.C., Menander possibly could not have flourished before oe raetoe of the Ist century B.C. This finds additional support from the passage of the M ilinda- panho already quoted which says that king Milinda flourished in the 5th century after the Great Decease. Menander seems to have been the next king in this family. That he was a scion of the House of Euthydemos is indicated by the similarity of the coin types, his close association in litera- ture with the Ruthydemean kings® and lastly silts the situa- ! Edited by Schoff, 1e assumption ore Sm Snaith ie Apollodotos was the son 4 aia tides and a parr rricide seems to be a gratuitous supposition. V. sinc a, of India, 1914, p. 224. J.R.A.S 3 Thi » PP: inferred from the frequent restriking of the coins of Agatho- pve season and Strato Ib —— Rapson, J.R.A.S. , p. 165. coins m4 the two Stratos have been found. Whitehead’s Catalogue wi the coins in the Pom jab Museum, Lahore, p. 8 Ip. 42 S.B Vol. XXXV, p. 6. . 42, 6 Sisko (Faiconer’ ’s Geeta) XI, xi, 1; The Periplus. Ed. Schoff. 264 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, tion of his capital in Sakala. He must have been a great ruler. His coins were found in circulation by the author of the Peri- plus (c. 80. A.D.) in Barygaza. Strabo in his Geography! mentions Menander as one of the two kings who were instru- mental in spreading Greek dominion farthest to the east in India and as one who conquered more nations than Alexander. He crossed the Hypanis (Sutlej) and penetrated as far as the ‘Isamos (?). Plutarch? tells us that he was as a ruler noted Yavana rulers of Madra. The identification of Menander with king Milinda is now no longer in dispute and Milindapanho was surely based upon the tradition that lingered and kept alive the memory of the great Indo-Greek king who was also an admirer of the Law of Buddha. From the same book we know that the king was born in the island of Alasanda.? Madra attained great prosperity under the Euthydemean line. There is a vivid description of the prosperity of the city of Sagala in Milindapaiho from which we shall quote a few lines :— ‘There is a country of the Yonakas a great centre of trade, a city that is called Sagala, situated in a delightful country .... wise architects have laid it out and its people know of no oppression.... Brave is its defence with many and various strong towers and ramparts .... well displayed are the innumerable sorts of costly merchandise with which its shops are filled ..... Its streets resound with cries of welcome to the teachers of every creed.. ... Shops there are for the sale of Benares muslin .... and other clothes of various kinds ea Gy guilds of traders in all sorts of finery display their goods in the bazars.... So full is the city of money and of gold and of silver ware, of copper and stone ware that it is a very mine of dazzling treasures .... In wealth it rivals the Uttara Kurus and in glory it is as Alakamanda, the city of the gods.’* With Menander probably passed away the glory of the EKuthydemean House of Madra and the Sialkot region gradually passed in the hands of the Sakas who about this time poured into the Indus valley possibly from Sakasténé (mod. Sistan). Two Satrapal families of these Sakas ruled at Taxila and Mathura. The seat of the imperial power probably lay some- where south of these settlements on the Indus. The P eriplus mentions Minnagara on the Indus as the metropolis of Scythia.’ The identification of this city is not yet certain, The Saka ! Ed., Falconer. XI, xi, 1. 2 Num chron, 1869, p. 229. 8 Alexandria; S.B.E. XXXV, p. 127. 4 S.B.E. XXXV, pp. 2-3. 6 Edited by Schoff, p. 37. Be erie en ls Lboys ao eS pasa Panniers hai tempeh da IEA Asc \\ Pk TR eae rae renal 1922.] Madra. 265 satraps of Mathura ' who imitate the coins of the Stratos prob- ably extinguished the Euthydemean line. After the Scythians Madra probably passed into the con- trol of the Parthian kings, who ruled in the lst century A.D. After their rule Panjab was gradually annexed by Wima ee ees the king of another horde of casteless barbarians, viz. the Yue i. How Jong the Kushanas controlled Madra we are not sure; but their rule over Madra must have ended early in the 4th century A.D. From Ptolemy* who wrote in c. 150 A.D. it appears that the immediate possession of the Sakala region was held by the Pandoouoi identified by McCrindle with the Pandavas. After the Great Kushanas the Madras must have asserted theirindependence. For next we hear of them in the Allahabad Pillar Inscription of Samudra Gupta (ce. 330-375 A.D.) as an autonomous frontier tribe ‘‘ giving all (kinds of) taxes and obeying (his) orders and coming to perform obeisance.”’ The ‘‘ Madrakas”’ probably formed at this period a tribal republic and as such are differentiated in the inscription from the list of frontier kings and countries and associated with the Mala- vas, Arjundyanas, Yaudhéyas. Abhiras, Prarjunas, Sanakani- kas, Kakas, Kharparikas and other tribes. Madra remained under the Gupta power till the che iy power. Hiuen Tsang informs us that‘ some centuries ago’ a king called Mo-hi-lo-kiu-lo (Mahira or Mihira-kula) established his authority in the town of She-kie-lo (Sakala) and ruled over India. He was quick of intellect and naturally brave and subdued all the neighbouring provinces without exception+ The founder of the Huna kingdom of Madra was probably Toramana the father of Mibirakula and a leader of the Huna invaders. His date is established by his synchronism with Dha- nyavishnu the brother of Matrivishnu. His rule extended to Arikina Vishaya in Malwa after Budha Gupta (485-86 A.D).° Sakala to Malwa passed to his son Mibirakula. From the testimony of Hiven T'sang it is apparent that Mihirakula was a very powerful prince. He must have ruled at ent fifteen years and his dominion included the Gwalior region.’ East o this however he could not proceed. The Parivrajaka Maha- rajas the feudatories of the Guptas seemed to have successfully withstood the onslaught of the Hina from Central India. The family of Rafijubula. Geography of Ptolemy. Ind. Ant. Vol. XIII, pp- 349-340. Fleet, Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, P. 14 Beal, ” Buddhist Records Vol. I, pp. 167-1 Fleet, Corpus Inacripiionum Indicarum, p ob. 90 and160, 62. Ana eA KH 266 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIII. The glory of the Hina dynasty of Madra was however short Magadha defeated and captured Mihirakula.! The credit of defeating Mihirakula is also claimed by Yasodharman (532-33 A.D.) in his Mandasor Pillar inscription.” There is a good deal of controversy about the agent who really defeated the Hana king. V.A. Smith identifies the Baladitya of Hiuen Tsang with Narasimha Gupta Baladitya the grandsor of Kumara Gupta I andthe son of Pura Gupta.? But Hiuen Tsang himself says that this Baladitya was the grandson of Budha Gupta (Fo-to-kio-to) and son of one Tathagata Gupta (Ta-tha-kie-to- kio-to) and so the Baladitya whom the pilgrim meant cannot be Narasimha Gupta*+ This Baladitya must apparently be identified with a Gupta sovereign who flourished after Budha and may be identical with the nameless Gupta king of the re- cently discovered Damodarpur plate dated in the Gupta year 214 (A.D. 533-34). Our assumption finds some corroboration from the fact that this inscription is dated nearly in the same years as that of the Mandasor inscription of Yasodharman (533 A.D.) and it is probable that the Huna chief fell to a double attack from both his flanks.® If we are to believe Hiuen Tsang, Mihirakula fled to Kash- mir after his defeat where he repaid the hospitality of the king by treacherously murdering him and usurping his throne.’ The throne of Madra, during the absence of Mihirakula in the wars with Baladitya, was seized by his brother. The Hina power probably continued in the Sialkot region for a long time even after this serious reverse. In the Harshacharita, Prabhakara- vardhana is called by Bana ‘a lion to the Htna deer.’ Where could the Hina power possibly lie during this period ¢ 1t could not be in Malwa where lay the remnants of the Gupta power; it had also no place in Rajputana where the rising power of the Gurjaras of Bhilmal held its sway. But it was probably in the Sialkot region just to the north-west of the Pushyabhitis of Sthanegvara that the Haina stronghold was situated and it is quite natural that they should come in hostile conflict with each other. It was probably this Hina state which Hiuen Tsang calls Tseh-kia or Chéh-ka the capital of which was an unnamed city about 20 li in circuit, and — ! Watters’ Yuan Chwang, pp. 286-291. 2 Fleet, Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, pp. 146-47. 8 V. Smith, Early History of India, p- ‘ _ * Raychowdhury, The Gupta Empire in the sixth and seventh centu- ries A.D., J.A.S.B. 1920, p- 315. ° Ibid., p. 317. Prof Raychowdhury identifies Baladitya with “ the glorious Bhanu Gupta mentioned in the Goparaja dated in the year 191 (511-12 A.D.).” Fleet, Corpus Ins ——— ws . 93. atters’ Yuan Chwangq, pp. 288-289. 7 Cowell, Harshackara, svi ran Stone Pillar Inscription of Inscrip- — 1922.] Madra. 267 situated about 14 or 15 Ji to the north-east of the old capital Sakala. Sakala was then in a decayed —_— its walls being throwndown. The pilgrim, however, saw a little town about 6 or 7 li in circuit within the old walls of . city, the people of which were rich and prosperous. The capital was probably removed from Sakala after the defeat of Mihirakula. Hiuen Tsang provides us with an account of the Hina kingdom. e informs us that the “soil is suitable for rice and produces much late sown corn. It also produces gold, silver and stone called teow, copper and iron. The climate is very warm and the land is subject to hurricanes The people are quick and violent, their language coarse and uncultivated. For clothing they wear a very shining white fabric eis they call kiau- anges ions 4 silk), and also morning re loth (chau hia) and other kinds. Few of them believe in Sade many sacrifice to tig caven. ly spirits (Devas and Spirits). There are 10 Sangharamas and some hundreds of temples. There were formerly in this country many houses of charity goodness or happiness (Punyusalas) for keeping the poor and the unfortunate. They provided for them medicine and food, clothing and necessaries, so that travellers were never badly o uring the last quarter of the 6th century the Madras seem to have come in contact with the rising Chalukya power of Badami. The Mahakita Pillar Inscription of Mangalesa inal to Kirtivarman I wide conquests including Anga, anga, Kalinga, Magadha, Madraka, Kerala ete.,? In the first half of the 8th century Madra probably often felt the weight of arms of the Kashmirian kings of the Karkota dynasty specially of Muktapida and Jayapida. In the inscriptions of the Palas of Bengal Madra appears in connection with the installation of Chakrayudha on the throne of Kanauj with the assent of the neighbouring powers enumerated as the Bhoja, Matsya, Madra, Kuru, Yadu, Yavana, Avanti, Gandhara and Kira kings.’ It is possible that Dharmapala in his bid for the overlordship of Northern India came in contact with these kings and by defeating them succeeded in forcing his nominee on them.* After Dharmapala the Pratihara power saw palmy nail pee under Bhoja (Mihira ; 840-90 A.D.) extended its power even to the gates of Kashmir. We read in Kaihana’s Rajalarangint that king Sankara varman (c. 855-83 A.D.) caused - the sovereign power which the adhiraja Bhoja had seized, to eal, Buddhist Records, Vol. 1, pp. 165-166. Also Watters’ Puan Chwan, p. Vol. I, 4g 3 5 Sen as her dited by A. K. Maitreya, p. e , tk. D. Henson a: The Palas of Bengal, Pa SB. Vol. V, p. 51. It is curious that Mr. Bannerjee is of opinion that Madra ‘meant some part of Afghanistan.’ 268 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIIT, 1922] be given up to the scion of the Thakkiyva familv who had become his servant in the office of Chamberlain. The verse runs as follows ! :—- Hritam Bhojadhirdjena sa Samrdjyam addpayat. Pratiharataya bhrityibhite Thakkiyakanvaye. There is some controversy about the identification of this adhiraja Bhoja. But as at this period we find no other king of the name Bhoja who is powerful enough to be called adhiraja it is better to identify him with the great Pratihara emperor. lt seems therefore that Madra at this period was under the suzerainty of the Pratiharas though it often became the bone of contention between Kanauj and Kashmir.’ About the history of Madra after this period little is known. Just on the eve of the Mahomedan conquest we find the Sialkot region under a family of kings two of which Jaya- pala and his son Anandapala were worsted in war by Sabukti- gin (986-997 A.D.). Jayvapala ruled over most of the Punjab to the north of Sindh. Madra with the rest of Punjab seems to have been annexed to the Ghazni Sultanate by Sultan Mahmiid (997-1030 A.D.) son of Sabuktigin. The history of Madra attempted in this paper is no more than a mere account of an ancient tribe conquering and conquered who having descended into the Panjab from their mountain fastnesses on and beyond the Himalayas gradually the political and social history of the Hindus. The Madras build up India what it is to day. ener TT 1 Ra@jatarangini, V, 151. ® Dr. Smith, however, is of opinion that ‘ therule of Parihars never xtended across the Sutlej, and the history of the Panjab between the nd ies i ely ate SS 1920, pp. 189 and 183. * Kasika while commenting on Panini IV. 2. 108. mentions Paurod This seems - But Kasika is very late and it is difficult to locate the twoset po gaa aeons Benares ed. p. 325. Otto Béhtlingk, Paninis’ Gramm tr, p. - Notice. Foreign Societies who favour the Asiatic Society of Bengal with their publications are informed that t ey may be sent either to the address of the Society at Caleutta, or to the Agents of the Society in London, Messrs. Luzac & Co. , 46, Great Russell Street. AVIS. Les Sociétés étrangéres qui honorent la Société Asiatique de Bengale de ses publications, sont priées de les enyoyer ou directe- ment a l’adresse de la Société, 1, Park Street, Calcutta, ou a agents de la Société A Londres, Messrs. Luzac & Co., 46, Great Russell Street. ANZEIGE, Auslindische Gesellschaften welche die Asiatische Gesell- schaft von Bengalen mit ihren Publicationen beehren, werden hierdurch ersucht dieselben entweder direkt an die Adresse der Gesellschaft, 1, Park Street, Calcutta, oder an den Agenten in London, Messrs. Luzac & Co., 46, Great Russell Street, zu senden. 19. The Mahabharata and the Besnagar Inscription of * Heliodoros, By Hemcnanpra RaycuAupuurt, M.A., Px.D. The Besnagar inscription records the erection of a Garuda- dhvaja of Vasudeva, the god of gods, by the Bhagavata Helio- dora (Heliodoros), the son of Diya (Dion), the Takhkhasilaka (native of Taxila), a Yona (Greek) ambassador, who came from Maharaja Amtalikita (Antialkidas) to Rajan Kasiputa Bhaga- bhadra the Saviour (tratara), who was prospering in the four- eee year of his reign. As this inscription is one of the earliest records of the Bhagavatas, i.e. the followers of Vasudeva-Krishna, it is in- teresting to inquire in what relation it stands to the Great Epic ee calls itself the Karshna Veda (Mbh. I, 1. 268; XVII a 41), 8 outset, I beg to draw the attention of scholars to the cma passage which forms the second part of the famous epigraph. It runs as follows Trint amuta aie anuthitant Nayamti svaga dama chaga apramada “Three immortal precepts when practised lead to heaven —Restraint, Renunciation, and Rectitude. So far as I know no serious se has yet been made to find out eis source from which these precepts are taken. In my Early History of the Vaishnava Sect 1 pointed out that dama, aoe, and Apaisunam are inculcated in the Gita xvi, es rei bain! can ha ste be regarded as equivalent 0 apramada. Ther , however, a few verses in the Stri pa (7. 23-25) of the ‘Mahabharata ‘ota show a closer resem- blance to the i of the Besnagar inscription. The verses are quoted below qneeniicrnes a Sat AeaTeat: wiette aaa: featat arae 2 but agrees other- wise ; see also de Perceval’s Essai sur’ hist. d. Arabes, Tabl. III, and ‘Umdaiw'l-Qari,’ p. 93. is name is usually pronounced Dihyah, accepted as the better form, but the word dahyah is also well-known (Nawawi, Tahdhibw’l-’ Asma’, 239), and his name is occasionally so written, e.g. Tab., I, 1741, and alternatively in Tbn Hisham, 685, 758, Tab., I, 2093. He was of the Kalb tribe which early moved north out of Yemen, and settled in the north of the peninsula close to the Syrian frontier (Perceval, I, 214; Nicholson’s Lit. Hist. of the Arabs, 199, n. 2; also Caetani, Carta, II, 1, 464, of the Annali). The place and year of his birth are not stated, but it is probable that he was born in the settlement of his tribe near the border of Syria, for though Sam‘ani says he settled in Egypt, and though his tomb is said to be at Al-Qarafah there, it will probably be concluded from the facts of his life-history and from the consideration of the fourfold tradition, Syrian, Egyptian, Palestinian and Persian, as to his last resting-place, that as the northern half of Arabia and later Syria were the ee of his activities his connection with them was life- ong. He was a prominent Companion of the Prophet, but probably his junior in years, for it is asserted that he long survived him, and died in the reign of Mu‘awiyah (r. 41- A.H.). he events of the early period of his life are unknown ; for chroniclers his history begins with his declaration of adher- ' Occasionally appears-as al-Khazraj, e.g. Ibn Sa‘d, VIII, 114; ¢/- Tab., III, 2349, n. f. 274 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |N.S., XVIII, ence to the new faith, or more exactly from a time slightly subsequent. There is general agreement that he was an early convert (Ibn. 8., IV, 1, 184, Tab., III, 2349; cf Ibn Hajar, I, No. 2378), and that he was not present at the Battle of Badr 2 A.H.); it has been said that his first engagement was Khandag (5 A.H. ; Ibn Hajar, ’Jsabah, 1, No. 2378), but usually it is stated that he was present in battlefields subsequent to Badr,—‘ all of them’’ adds Nawawi (Tah., 239). It is said by Al-Baydawi that vv. 9-11 of Strah LXII were revealed on an occasion when Dihyah al-Kalbi entered adinah on a Friday, before his conversion, for ‘“ while Muhammad was preaching, a caravan of merchants happened to arrive with their drums beating, according to custom ; which the congregation hearing, they all ran out of the mosque to see them, except twelve only.”’ If Dihyah was thus reprehended, the passage may well be set down to the year 2 A.H. (Wherry’s Comment. on the Quran, IV, 144-6; cf. Rodwell’s Transl.. Everyman’s Libr. Ed., p 374). e was evidently engaged in trade between Syria and the took place shortly after the conversion of Rifa‘ah b. Zayd al- Judhami, i.e. by the Second Jumada, 6 A.H. (Caet., I, 697). The acquaintance with the Prophet may have sprung up in the course of caravan trade with the north ; at any rate it may well be set down to a date prior to the engagement at ’Uhud (3 A.H.). ‘Mahomet, the Koran tells us, was inspired by the Holy Ghost, whom he held to be an angel, and who n he called, in later chapters, written at Medina, by the name of the Areh- angel Gabriel, which he pronounced Jabril. During the fits of ecstasy in which the inspiration came to him, he believed he beheld the archangel’s face, and when he was asked what he was like, he always mentioned a young man of the tribe of Kalb, named Dihyah ibn Khalifa” (Huart, Arabic Lit., 34-5). awawi declares he was one of the handsomest of men cB a 28 K's ab tte. 1922.] Dihyah al-Kalbi. 275 relations with Dihyah led to a yet more intimate union. < she is said to have been divorced (p. 157). On her death he married Sharaf, daughter of Khalifah and sister of Dihyah (Ibn S., VIIT, 115) ; in the V'a’rtkh-i Guzida her name is given as ‘Isaf (cf Tab., 1, 1776, n. a), and it is recorded that she died in Mu- hammad’s lifetime (pp. 160-161). Another sister is noticed by Ibn 8. (7b.) ; the foster-mother of the afore-mentioned Khaulah was her maternal] aunt, Khirniq, daughter of Khalifah. descendants in the male line two are mentioned at some length. Of these one is Abi’l-Khattab ‘Umar b. al- dasan b. Dihyah al-Kalbi, who was born at Valencia, in Spain, about 544 A.H., and ‘was surnamed Dhii’n-Nasabain (With two Genealogies), because he was descended on his father’s side, from Dihya al-Kalbi, ...... and, on his mother’s, from (1198 A.D). He sojourned some time in Egypt before starting on pilgrimage to Mecca, and, on his return from the Holy ‘ity, made a long detour, lasting over several years, by Syria, Chaldea, and Persia. On his return, Al-Malik al-‘ Aziz chose him to be tutor to his son Al-Malik al-Kamil, and when that prince succeeded to power he built his old master the Madrasah Kamiliyya, where he taught the traditions. He eventually fell into disgrace, was dismissed, and died on 30th October, 1235.” (Huart, Ar. Lit., 173). The names of five of his works are given in Brock., I, 311. In 126 A.H. the Khalifah Yazid b. al-Walid desiced to appoint a descendant of this family, ‘Abdu’l-‘Aziz b. Haran b. ‘Abdi’l-lah b. Di (or a) hyah b. Khalifah al-Kalbi to the governorship of ‘Iraq, but whereupon Yazid let him go in favour of another (Tab., ik 1836), for such a stipulation was not likely to commend itself to a ruler styled Al-Naqis (the Retrencher) because of his policy of retrenching the allowances of the troops (Suyiti, Ta'rikhw’l Khulafa’, section on Yazid b. al-Walid). According to a tradition ascribed to Ibn Shihab az Zuhri Gabriel came to the Prophet one day at noon in the year A.H., wearing a turban of embroidered silk, and riding on a she- mule with a saddle over which was velvet brocade. Gabriel ex postulated with him on having laid aside his arms, and declared 276 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, it the bidding of God that he should proceed against the Jew- ish Bani Qurayzah, and added that he himself was making his way thither. ‘Ali was given the standard of the Muslims and was dispatched against them. The Prophet followed later, and as he passed by his companions (Najjarites, Caet., I, 627) in As-Saurayn before reaching the Banu Qurayzah he asked whether anyone had gone by that way. They answered that Dihyah b. Khalifah al-Kalbi had gone past on a white she- mule, with a saddle on which was velvet brocade. The Prophet said: ‘‘ That was Gabriel, who has been sent to the Bani Quraizah to shake the fortresses in their midst, and cast terror into their hearts” (Tab., I, 1485-6). In a tradition of ‘A’- ishah it is the Bani’ Ghanam whom the Prophet passed on his way; here it is incidentally stated that the features and beard of Dihyah used to be likened to those of Gabriel (Tab., I, 1487) The following tradition of ‘A’ishah is another instance in which Gabriel was mistaken by the beholder for Dihyah. She relates: ‘The Prophet started up violently ; I looked and, lo, there was a man standing with him, on a riding-beast, and wearing a white turban, the end of which he had let hang down loose between his shoulders, and the Apostle of God ( p#le ) had his hand on the mane of his riding-hack. I said: ‘‘ O Apostle of God, your starting up made me afraid of him!” He asked: “Did you see him?” I replied: “ Yes”? He asked: ‘‘ Whom did you see?”” I answered: “1 saw Dihyah al-Kalbi.” He as “That was Gabriel,—Peace be on him,” (Ibn S., IV, I, _ Another form of the tradition makes it a case of deliberate impersonation of Dihyah by Gabriel: Gabriel used to come to the Prophet in the form of Dihyah al-Kalbi (Ibn S., ib., 15-18). _ There is another variety of tradition in which the onlooker likens the apparition, subsequently known to be Gabriel, to Dihyah. ‘A’ishah says : I saw Gabriel standing in this room of The tradition takes yet one more form. The Prophet said : The likest I have seen to Gabriel was Dihyah al-Kalbi (Ibn S., IV, 1, 184, 1. 15). te He appears to have been yet more distinguished as a diplo- mat than as a soldier, for the Prophet entrusted to him two 1922.] Dihyah al-Kalbi. 277 commissions, both to the Emperor Heraclius. In the former instance it is not clear why he was sent, but it is likely that he of the 6th Hijri year (Tab., I, 1555). he above narration is supplemented by one purporting to proceed from certain well-informed persons of Judham (Tab., I, 1740, 19 ff.), according to whom however the scene of the dis- aster that befell Dahyah was the Valley of Shanar or Shinar, in Yaqut given as Shinan. Here he was looted of all his posses- sions by Al-Hunayd and his son ‘Us (‘Arid, in Caetani’s Annali, 697; see Tab , 1, 1741, n. /), of the Dulay‘, a branch of the tribe Judham. News of the unfortunate assault reached a small party of the Bani Dubayb. another branch of Judham, whose chieftain Rifa‘ah b. Zayd al-Judhami had re- cently had a personal interview with the Prophet, and on his return had won his tribal subdivision of Dubayb among others to Islam; in this matter Dihyah had played a part, though a minor one, inasmuch as he is said to have befriended one of meet Al-Hunayd and his son, and fought them and those with them for the restoration of the looted property. In this they were successfal, and made it over to Dihyah. He still dissatisfied, and went off in high dudgeon to Madinah, where he sought out the Prophet and demanded the lives of the two leading miscreants. His suit prospered, for Zayd b. Harithah was told off with a force against them, and in the ensuing en- counter Al-Hunayd and his son lost their lives (Ibn H., 976; Tab., I, 1742). His second commission was to the same quarter as the first, but its object was of an entirely different nature. In Dhu’!- Hijjah of this 6th year of the Hijrah six envoys were sent to the rulers of neighbouring lands inviting them to acceptance of the new faith. Three of the six were of the number of them that ‘‘ companied with” Muhammad, and Dihyah was one of these three intimates (Tab., J, 1559). He was entrusted 278 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.8., XVIII, according to this account with the mission to the Byzantine ruler, Heraclius; the missive he was charged to deliver was sealed, it is said, like those to the other potentates with the silver signet-ring of the Prophet which Gabriel had appro - re- jecting previous patterns in iron and copper r (Tab., 857). The narrative of the circumstances of its delivery as ieee in Tab., I, 1561 //., with but slight differences in Al-Agham (VI, 94), is all nee if not veracity: Abu Sufyan b. Harb is is ee ed to have said: ‘‘ We were a community of traders, and the feud eles the Prophet and us had so straitened us that our possessions were exhausted. When the Truce (of Al-Huday- biyyah) ! was concluded between the Apostle of God and us, we were not without fear that we would not find security, but I proceeded with some traders of the Quraysh towards Syria, our trade-objective there being Gaza (Ghazzah). We came to it at the time when Heraclius had proved victorious over the Persians within his territory, and had driven them out of it, and there had been wrested from them for him his Holy Cross, which they had plundered. When he heard this news s (of their expul- sion} and that his Cross had been rescued for him, he set forth restoration he had made, from Hims where he then had his quarters, in order to pray in the Holy City (Jerusalem), carpets being spread for him (in his path), and sweet-smelling flowers cast on them. When he reached’ ‘Iliya’? he offered there his prayers, his generals and the Byzantium nobles accom ng him. e appeared next morning careworn, and kept tu —_ his glance heavenwards His generals said to him: “ Majesty is verily careworn this morning.” He answered: “ Yous ; I was shown yestreen the dominion of the circumcised trium- phant’” Theyre plied; ‘‘ Weare not aw are of any nation that practises circumcision save the Jews, and they are under your eaty between Muhammad and the people of Makkah, conelud- ed i “= BF Sed Qa‘dah, 6 A.H. (Caet., I, 706 /f.). 2 *Tliya’, actually Aelia, was the name by which the peace a had chosen to designate Jerusalem in che following circums stances: «« About A o believe more successful than that described by Josephus; and, after i PE sion, Jerusalem was turned into a Roman colony, called Aelia Capitolina with a temple to J vies Capitolinus on the Temple area pade-pant Aelia dephlented the time-honoured name, which pe awhile belon god a clusively to the a city of devotional faney, which the fall of Jeru- salem under Ti vis had caused to be painted in more gorgeous colours than befor Even now Aelia is with Moslems the alternative a appellation = 2 the Holy City ” and figures on the —— of — printed at salem ” (Margoliouth’s Cairo, Jerusalem 8, p. 190). a 8 considers it very probable t that this se of the story _ have fee suggested by the fearful slaughter of the Jews which seems 1922. } Dihyah al-Kalbi. 279 authority and in thrall to you; wherefore send unto all over whomsoever you have authority in your realm instructions to cut off the heads of all Jews under their control, and so have peace of mind from this anxiety.” They were, I swear, en- gaged in working him round to this view of theirs alee there arrived a messenger from the Lord of Busra, !—for the rulers used to mutually apprise each other of any news, leading in an Arab, and the message he delivered was: “O Kin ng, this man of the she eep- and camel-rearing Arabs tells of a curious matter, that hath occurred in his country; interrogate him re- garding it.” When the mess senger of the Lord of Busra brought him to Heraclius, the latter said to his interpreter : ‘Ask him what this affair is that has happened in e country.” So he asked him, and the man replie Ther appeared in our midst a man calling himself a prophet, ‘ibd some followed and believed in him, while others opposed him, and in many places there have been fights between them. Such was the state of affairs when I left them When he had im- parted to him this information, Heraclius gave the order: ‘Strip him,”’ and when they stripped him he was found to be circumcised, whereupon Heraclius exclaimed: ‘‘ This, I swear it, is what I was shown; itis not as ye do say. Give him his se otaas Take yourself off” (addressed to the man; see ’Agha- , VI, 94). Then he summoned his Chief of the Guard and aoiiended him: ‘* Search Syria alee te and pus lh till you Bring me a man of the same people as this,’’ i.e. the Prophet. Vow I swear I was in Gaza when his “Chiet of the Guard burst in on us asking: ‘‘ Do you belong to the same people as this person in the Hijaz?’? We fe iach “Yes.” Then he said . * G Lg we ing him he asked : -« Are you of the same tribe as this 1?” We said: “Yes.” He next asked: ‘‘ Which of you is is olosest elated to him?” I answered: “I.” Aba Sufyan Heraclius).’’ Heraclius next said: ‘“‘Approach.”” Then me before him and my companions behind me, he said: ‘I will question him, and if he — refute him.’’ Now I could swear would be that they would remember it against me, and cite it ofime,—so why should I speak falsely to him ?—(or, so 1 did not vim been decreed by Heraclius after the restoration of the empi ire, to ish them for the aid they had given, or were alleged to have vaipead the Persians (I, 733 n. 1); this massacre is said to have taken place in n ” 8, or the begin re. a a pot cena Sar mid-way between Damascus and Jerusalem 280 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, speak falsely to him). Heraclius said: ‘ Tell me of this man who appeared among you making the said claim.”’ I started be- littling to him his position, and making light of his prospects and saying: ‘‘ O King what is there in this affair of his to give you anxiety ? His position is less than has been reported to you.” But he began not to heed my words and said: “ Give me information about his position in reply to what I am going to ask of you.” I answered: ‘‘ Ask what seems good to you.” He enquired : ‘‘ How stands his lineage among you 2?” I said : ‘Pure stock; he is of our best line.” ‘Tell me,’ said he, ‘used any of his kin to utter such things as he, so that he is now imitating such a one?’ I replied: ‘‘ No.” He asked ‘“ Has he any property among you of which you have robbed him, and he has devised this tale that you might restore him his property ?”’ I answered: ‘‘ No.” Henext said: ‘“‘ Tell me of persons of mature age and of degree among his people, none of them has followed him.’”’ Then he said: “ ‘Tell ‘me, do his followers love him and cleave to him, or do they hate him and forsake him ?”” I answered: ‘‘ None that does follow him after forsakes him.” ‘Tell me,” he asked, ‘‘ how stands the feud m. ously ?”” Abia Sufyan here interposes: I found nothing in his interrogatory I could find fault with him for save this. 1 answered: ‘ No, and we have a truce with him, and are t secure against treachery on his part.” Now I swear Heraclius did not heed these last words of mine, but repeated Oo me our conversation as follows: ‘‘I asked you how stood his lineage among you, and you said he was of ‘ pure stock, of your best line’ ; and thus it is God takes his prophets; when he does take one, he takes him only from the best line of his poeple. And I enquired of you whether any of his kinsmen used to utter such things as he, so that he is now imitating him, and you answered “ No.’ And I asked you whether he has any 1922.] Dihyah al-Kalbi. 281 stand on, and I would feign be with him and wash his feet. Go now your way.” Then I rose up-from beside him, beating my hands together (in woe) and saying: “ Ye servants of God, the affair of the son of Abu Kabshah (i.e. Muhammad) is grown a matter of dire import, for the kings of the Banu’l-’ Asfar (i.e. the Byzantines) have come to hold him in awe in their own bearing the load of such sin); (Tab. I, 1535: ef. ’Agh., VI, 95); it is taken to mean that the responsibility for the non- conversion to islam of the subjects of Heraclius would be on is head. their steadfastness in their Christian faith (Tab., I, 1566, ‘Agh., VI, 96) ; it is also said that he declared to Dihyah his belief in Muhammad as the prophet of their expectations, men- tioned in their Scriptures, but from fear of his own Byzantine people he could not follow him; he referred him however to Bishop Daghatir,! whose influence and power were greater than his own. When the latter learned oralHy from Dihyah of the missive sent to Heraclius and of the faith to which he called him, he said: “‘ My oath upon it, your master is a prophet sent (of God): we recognise him from his description, and find him mentioned by name in our Scriptures.” Then declared : “ O assembly of Byzantines, a missive is come from Ahmad in which he calls us unto God,—Be he exalted and glorious !—and I do witness that there is no deity save God, and that Ahmad is his servant and his apostle. ” Whereupon, it is recorded, they sprang on him as one man, and beat him ' Daghatir or Dughatir has not yet been identified. In a collection of letters of Muhammad made by Ibn Sa‘d there is one purporting to be i im ir hi ini declaration of his belief in prophets sent in time past, etc. It is said to have been deli- vered to him by Dihyah b. Khalifah al-Kalbi (Caet., I, 733, n. 2). 282 Juurnal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, to death. Dihyah returned and related the incident to the Prophet (Tab., I. 1567). Apparently soon after Heraclius set out from Syria for Constantinople (Tab., ib.). e narrative lacks little in verisimilitude ; the first, and perhaps the only serious, question that suggests itself is whether it is likely that Heraclius flushed with triumph and controlled by an impulse of gratitude to his God who had led his armies to victory, is likely to have been so sorely shaken by a report that as yet threatened no peril to his empire newly confirmed by the sword. But unfortunately for the plausible tale it has to contend with two difficulties, of a narrative order and of a chronologi- eal. e account in Ibn Sa‘d, e.g. varies almost in toto from that given atlengthabove. It is very brief. merely informs us that the Prophet wrote to the Emperor calling him unto Islam, and sent his letter by Dihyah al-Kalbi, bidding him make it over to the Lord of Busra, who should then make it over in turn to the Emperor, and the Lord of Busra duly fulfilled his charge (Tabaqat, IV, 1,185). 1n another tradition it is further stated that he made over the letter to the Emperor in Hims in Muharram of the 7th year of the Hijrah (i.). The narrative as found in Bukhari (I, 7-9, ed. Krehl) is somewhat similar in its account of the summons before the Emperor in ‘Iliya’ of Abi Sufyan and his fellow-traders of Quraysh, who taking advantage of the Truce had resumed their interrupted calling, and also in its interrogatory to the story as given above by Tabari; Heraclius was, it is added, an astrologer and the stars in their courses had been the source of his anxiety and alarm in ’[liya’ (Bukh., I, 9). The remainder of the story has closer affinity with Ibn Sa‘d, inasmuch as the letter com- mitted by the Prophet to Dihyah had been made over to the Lord of Busra, who made it over in turn to Heraclius; the tenor of the letter is much the same, but the wording is differ- ent, though here notice need be taken only of the form ‘akk@rin occurring in the phrase “the sin of the tillers of the soil be on your head,”’ a word which had evidently trouble the copyist of the ’Aghani who read it as ’akabir, and is various- ly reproduced as harrathin, jallahin. and rakusiyyin in other writers (‘ Umdatu ’l-Qari’, I, 103, Const.), and is here given as yaristyyin (Bukh., I, 8), and ’arisiyyin (ib., 11, 235). A narrative of this embassy to Heraclius, based on the various sources, with a bibliography of the latter, is to be found in Caetani’s Annali dell’ Islam, I, 731-4, in n. 3, p. 734 ° which the date of Heraclius’ pilgrimage to Jerusalem is give? as the spring of 629 A.D., whereas Dhuw’ l-Hijjah of 6 A.H. give? in the Muhammadan records quoted above as the date of the despatch of Dihyah and the other envoys falls in April of 628 A.D., ie. there is about a year’s discrepance in the corres- 1922.] Dihyah al-Kalbi. 283 world. The historical sources are as always uncertain and inadequate ; Ibn Hisham gives a list of these embassies, but doesnot base them on the authority of Ibn-Ishaq ; Tabari, it is true, quotes Ibn-Ishaq, but it is noted,—and this creates doubt within us, that the redaction of Ibn-Ishaq which he has used is more recent and richer in apocryphal traditions than that of Ibn Hisham (Hist. d. Arabes, I, p. 154). Probably in the course of Muharram (Caet., II, I, p. 9) of the 7th year of the Hijrah commenced the cainpaign of Khaybar, and of the fortresses which there fell into the hands of the victo- 7 we approached the Prophet in that connection, but yielded her up to the latter on learning that he had reserved her as his own, and received instead her two cousins (Ibn H., 758). : After the demise of the Prophet he again figures in the list of warriors, though he never rose to a superior command. When Damascus had been added to the number of Muslim victories (14 A.H.), Yazid b. Abi Sufyan was installed there as military commander, and from that centre sent out expedi- tionary forces to the neighbouring districts not yet under sub- jugation. Dihyah was placed in charge of a force of cavalry and dispatched to Tadmur (Palmyra), which readily accepted the same terms of peace as those with Damascus (Tab., I, 2154; Caet., IIT, 498). Yet again he appears in the role of a junior commander; at the Battle of the Yarmik in 15 A.H., he was given charge of one of the squadrons of cavalry which under Khalid b. Sa- ‘id had fled at Marju’s-Suffar (Muharram, 14 A.H.; Tab., J, 2093 ; Caet., III, 567); for the fixation of the latter date, see Caet., ITI, 32v. 284 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N\S., XVIII, He is stated to have survived till the days of the Khalifah Mu‘awiyah (r. 41-60 A.H.; Tab., ITI, 2349; Ibn. S., IV, 1, 185), but of the details of his latter days nothing is preserved. The possession of his mortal remains is disputed by four lands. Nawawi says that he settled in Al-Mizzah, a village in the vici- nity of Damascus (p. 240). Yaqut (Mu‘jamu I-Buldan, IV, 522) mentions it as a large and populous village, situated in the midst of gardens, at a distance of half-a-parasang from Damascus, and that it is reputed to contain the grave of Dihyah al-Kalbi, the friend of the Prophet; the village is known as Mizzatu-Kalb, and its name has been preserved in the lines of ‘Ubaydu'l-lah Ibn Qays ar-Ruqayyat :—! Jolly my night in Mizzatu-Kalb, _ The bores clean vanished from me! ? T was plied, in company of Masad, —Leal friend of gentlemen and me-—— With Maqadi,*—a beverage God lawful Made, wine being forbidden me. Gracious daughters of men beside, Love for Ibn Qays their guide to me.* Ash-Shajarah, Yaqit states, a village in Palestine, likewise claims to have the grave of Dihyah al-Kalbi, which is said to be in a cave where rest eighty martyrs for the faith, but waives responsibility by adding ‘‘ God knows best’? (ib., III, 260). s already stated, Sam‘ani is authority for Dihyah’s resi- dence in Egypt ; tradition goes further and assigns to him a grave in Al-Qarafah (Yaqit, 1V, 555), a quarter of Fustat (ib., p. 48). The latter place is two miles south of Cairo, and ‘ had been the capital of the country from the time of the Mohammedan conquest. Its name is the Latin word Fossatum ‘‘ an entrench - ment,’ and it was the camp of the conquering army which, under Amr son of al-As, had wrested Egypt from the Byzantine empire, and which was made the seat of government because the Caliph of the time would have no water between his capital, Medinah, and any Islamic city ’’ (Margoliouth’s Cairo, etc., p. 2). The fourth tradition has little to support it. The Haft Iqlim, the topographico-biographical work of Amin Abmad of Ray (Haft Iglim was completed in 1002= 1593 A.D.) categori- cally declares that the “ grave of Dihyah al-Kalbi, by reason of whose efforts much of Fars was conquered, is in Darabjird, ' For his Diwan, ed. and transl. by N. Rhodokanakis, see Sitzb, d. Akad, d. Wiss. in Wien, B. CXLIV (1902). : ? Cf. Rhodo., ib., No. LVII, p. 245, v. 3; ‘« wo der Teufel das Heizen geholt hatte.” 3 Said to be a preparation of honey. * Rhodo., ib., p- 246, v.6, reads lad > rodt» which has the advantage of being idiomatic. 5 Haft Iglim, under section on Fars. 1922.] Dihyah al-Kalbi, 285 a town near Persepolis. It is not impossible that Dihyah should have gone thither with “the armies of the Khalifah Uthman (r. 23-35 A.H.), and been present when Darabjird was taken (27 A.H.), but evidence is wanting. The following hadith are quoted from him :— (a) The Apostle of God (pale) brought pieces of fine Egyptian linen, and gave me a piece saying : “ Tear it in two, and cut out a tunic of one for yourself, and give the other to your wife to make into a head-covering.’’ As he turned away he said: ‘‘ Bid your ti put rgbeey cloth under it so as not to ag # her ”’ "(Aba D *ud, ibas (6) Another is ett in ‘ahiviad b. Muhammad b. Hanbal’s Musnad (IV. 311, Cairo) :— KQadm Jt wr yee ie) SAAS Oy) Demo lis gg’ (om ali onc ihe: we fylea SHS demi yf al} Jo~) lL ols ye ! fsa w* os pet We Ud # wyeles Y wd! IS ees LS) JU Was yis da. 6) ee! wy? POON LR LON ON S ee 21. A Note on the Jangala Desa. By Kumar Ganaananpa Srnna, M.A, Numerous references are found in the Epics to Jangala and to the people of Jangala (Jangalah). But it is yet to be Pan articles in the Nagari Pracharini Patrika (Vol. II, Part 3), entitled tisqata & faq ‘fra fart A srgia ara (Ancient names of the different parts of Rajputana), contends that this name was applied to the modern Bikanir State and the northern part of Marwar, including Nagour and other Pergannas, But T am afraid that his contentions do not bear scrutiny. Let us first examine what the word ‘‘ Madreya-Jangalah ” means. There can be no two opinions as to the fact that it means the people of Jangala belonging to Madra. The Madra country had its capital at Sakala, which is admitted by scholars to be the same as modern Sealkot (in North Punjab). Now i we agree with the learned Pandit and take Jangala to mean Madra who occupied a country far towards the north. As a matter of fact they were so wide apart that they cannot have a contiguous countries milarly a careful study of the Epics will show it beyond double that “Jangala” in ‘‘ Kuru-Jangalah”’ would never have been the Bikanir and Marwar States. Describing the route from Ayodhya to Kekaya (beyond the Beas) the following verse (13) of the Ramayana occurring in the Ayodhya Kanda, Chap. 68, seeks to locate the Kuru- Jangala country. oe Hastindpuge GaNGAM TIRTVA PRATYANGMUKRA AYUH Piwtomita DESAMASADYA MADHYENA KURUJANGALAM. (Trans.—They went westward after having crossed the Ganges at Hastinapura and after having passed through (literally—reached) Panchala Desa, and Kuru-Jangala in the middle.) The Kuru-Jangala country must — have been be- tween the Panchala Desa and the Gan Again, the following references to the Mahabharata none takably show that the Kuru-Jangala country formed a of the Kuru kingdom. 288 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, TESHU TRISHU KUMARESHU JATESHU KURUJANGALAM. KurvvotHa KURUKSHETRAM TRAYAMETAD AVARDHATA. Adi—Ch. 109-1, (Trans —By the birth of the three princes all the three, Kuru, Kurukshetra, and Kuru-Jangala, increased. This clearly shows that the Kuru kingdom was divided into three parts of which Kuru-Jangala was one. VirastnAM KAsisvre DESANAM KURUJANGALAM. SARVA-DHARMA-VIDAM BuHISHMA PURANAM GAJASAR- VAYAM. Adi—Ch. 109-24. (Trans.—Of the progenitors of heroes the daughter of (the king of) Kasi, of the countries Kuru-Jangala, of all the people versed in righteousness Bhishma, of all the cities Gajasahvaya.) Kuru-Jangalam will be irrelevent in the above verse if it does not mean a country under the Kurus. To substantiate my statement further I shall quote one of those verses that are cited by the learned Pandit in support of his contentions. Tatan KURUSRESBTHAMUPAITYA PAURAH PRADAKSHINAM CHAKRURADINASATVAH TAM BRAHMANASCHABHYAVADAN PRASANNA MUKHYASCHA SARVE KURUJANGALANAM. Vana— Chap. 23-8. (Trans.—The citizens, rich in might, and all the principal persons of the Kuru-Jangala people then cheerfully encircled the head of the Kurus, who was being greeted by the Brah- manas. ) Why would the people of the Kuru-Jangala country have paid homage to the Kuru chief if they had not been his subjects. Again, in the Vanaparva we find the following verse :-— TIRTHAYATRAMANUKRAMAN PRAPTOSMI KurRUJANGALAM YAaDRICHCHHAYA DHARMARAJAM DRISHTAVAN KAM- YAKE Vana-Chap. 10-11. (Trans.—Going on pilgrimage I of my own accord reached the Kuru-Jangala country and saw Dharmaraja in the Kamyaka forest. It signifies that the Kamyaka vana was in the Kuru- Jangala country. ow we find the location of the Kamyaka vana from the ‘ following verse :— : TataH SaRASWATIKULE SAMESHU MARUDHANYASHU KAMYAKAM NAMA DADRISHU VANAM MUNIJANAPRIYAM. Vana—Chap. 5-3. 1922.] A Note on the Jangala Desa. 289 (Trans.—Then on the bank of the Saraswati near the barren waste —? saw the forest named Kamyaka which was liked by hermits.) It signifies that the Kamyaka forest lay just on the bank of the Saraswati. The Kuru-Jangala country therefore ex- oO k not beyond it. The ‘‘Marudhanyashu”’ of the verse cannot be taken to mean the whole of the deserts of Rajputana includ- ing Bikanir. As a matter of fact the Kuru country lay far to the north-east of Bikanir. The learned Pandit further wants us to believe that the capital of Jangala Desa was Ahichchhatrapur and he identifies it with modern Nagour (in the northern part of the Jodhpur State.) But unfortunately the evidence which he has adduced is not at all convincing. he mere fact that both Nagapur (which the Pandit derives from Nagour,) and Ahichchhatrapura denote ‘the city capital of the North Panchala. Jnanachandra, ‘ the guru of Col. Todd,’ whose index of 25 names, among which Ahichchhatra- pura is spoken of as the capital of Jangala Desa, has been relied upon by the learned Pandit, can never satisfy a critical mind. We know that Jnanachandra belongs to a very late date and taken alone, his account of something belonging to antiquity cannot be deemed trustworthy. Apart from these facts we cannot admit that Jangala Desa of the Epics was modern Bikanir State and Marwar, merely by the fact that in their family ensign the Maharajas of Bikanir style themselves ‘‘ Jan — Badashaha. what appears to be a fact is that we should not take Jangala Desa to mean a particular tract of land. We should rather take it in its literal sense signifying Jete~s settlement in —— In Bate’s Hindi ec ** Janga means a forest, wood, waste, desert, weeds. These “ txticals settlements ”’ were sometimes named differently to ae ochre a ee a eS | | | ) 22, On the Theory of Generalised Quanta and the Relativistic Newtonian Motion. By 8. C. Kar. ing to Planck a volume equal to h/, where h/ is Planck's constant. Rules are also given depending on what Planck has called coherence or incoherence of co-ordinates which determine the splitting up of the single quanta condition respecting the volume of the cell into f different conditions respecting the } (q, p)-planes. In the next volume of the Annalen? somewhat different conditions are laid down by Sommerfeld. According to Som- merfeld the elementary volume J nde, ... dg¢ dp, of phase- space may be regarded as determined by the f-projections J aa.av,, | 4a.dr., ne | dar dry on the f (q, p)-planes. Each of these integrals is then integrated with respect to p and then Sommerfeld proceeds to write— [ridq— | rota=t | pylg — i pidq=h, | eda ee | Prrda a h, | (pn—P }dq=nh. Assuming now that of the group of curves on the (q, p)- planes a path may be obtained such that along it | ~4q=9, Sommerfeld gets the simplified form d p,dqg=nh. For the limits of integration he gives the rule that it should be performed over that length of the orbit which brings up fresh phases in phase- 1 Ann. d. Phys. L, p. 385 (1916). 2 Ann. d. Phys. LI, p. 1 (1916). 292 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, space so that in periodic orbits the integration is over one com- plete cycle. In Newtonian orbits of the relativistic type or other quasi-periodic orbits, where there is a regular forward or back- ward motion of the perihelion, this means a path of integration for | Pdr from Pin tO Tain through fnax, Of What amounts to the same thing, double the path from Ppp tO finaez. For the azimuthal phase-integral } pyip the path is taken to be just one cycle of 27 and not from Prin tO fin through free. The reason for this variation, as given by Sommerfeld, seems to be that attention should be directed not so much to the : It is at once possible, however, to raise certain theoretical objections to Sommerfeld’s theory. In the first place the elementary volume | dq,dp, .. dq,dp, which is h/ after Planck cannot be represented as J dq.dp, . J dq,dp,... J dqydpy. This objection is met partially if on the authority of Epstein and Schwarzschild—and to this Sommerfeld agrees—the choice of the coordinates is determined by the possibility of separation of the prdr. On the other hand having in view the concepts of the time-total (Zeitgesamtheit) of phases and of the space-total (Raumgesamtheit) of phases employed in statistical mechanics and the proposition ! that the time-total of phases of a single | Ganz und Weber: Repertorium der Physik, p. 455 (1916). 1922.) Theory of Generalised Quanta. : 293 orbit is equal to the space-total of phases of all similar orbits we should rather have the path of integration extended over the complete cycle from ryj, tO Min through nae, seeing that al- though p, is constant the phase-point in phase-space does not come back to itself until starting from rp;, we come back tO Tain through Pnow- ; A third objection to Sommerfeld’s treatment of the relati- vistic motion is that advanced by Planck and Schwarzschild also in regard to the azimuthal phase-integral. According to Som- merfeld himself the integral [aap is reducible to the form i pdq= nh only when a path may be obtained such that along it a, J pdqg=0. This however is not vossible owing to a minimum the relativistic Newtonian ellipse. While they meet all the objections stated against Sommerfeld’s theory they give results identical with those of Planck and Sommerfeld in the first three cases. The results obtained, however, in the case of the relativistic ellipse are at variance alike with those of Planck and of Sommerfeld as well as with those which Sommer- feld would have if he took the path of integration for the azimuthal phase-integral (as he at first did) from 7p, to Tnin through re. The central idea in this investigation is still that of Planck namely the structure of phase-space must ONE DEGREE OF FREEDOM. LINEAR OSCILLATOR, ROTATOR. We may write the quanta condition in the form [fae.a=nh ox | TeH=nb where H is the energy and T is the periodic time. 294 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, od (a) Linear oscillator. The equation of motion is t+px=0; .. 2 + px*=const. ; ; 2 = 2H (twice the energy) =a” when a is the amplitude. 7T’= arg to variation from one oscillator to another. e therefore have 7(H,—H,) =nh orif H,=0,TH,=nh. In the usual nota- tion «, (the energy) = m= ahy (where v is the frequency). (6) Rotator. The integral of energy is }Jw*=H where J is the moment of inertia and w the angular velocity. pa 2 tv 2d ® H? \ ran a/2J .2.H=nh; if H,=90, 0 0 272 we have <_< a 82 J TWO DEGREES OF FREEDOM. THE -ORDINARY NEWTONIAN ELLIPsE. We may write the quanta condition in the forms [pa .6H=nh and [$apdpy=n'h or in the alternative forms \ TsH=nh and \ Ddp =wnh, 0 where p, is the angular momentum and @ is the azimuthal period which, in the present case, is equal to 27. Th “ cs - eco “ e energy H= —H=} { m(r +76 y=} and the angu r lar momentum = p= mr’ >. The periodic time 7 is obviously a function entirely of the energy because both are functions of the major axis. It may however be conveniently found directly in terms of the energy: a St Senin iy 1922.] Theory of Generalised Quanta. 295 rdr Be rdr ne mad 0 = 0 mans 7) = 1 min B ) Vener ee 1 n cols n E ne m= rata -se.,/™.| et en ac. 2 E? 0 ee 0 H, = —E,= = which is in perfect accord with Sommerfeld’s expression BE niin if it is noticed that the (n + n’)*h® single number n really absorbs n’ and stands for n +n’. For the azimuthal phase-integral | Bip we have 2n Pn’! = nh. THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS UNDERLYING THE PRESENT MODE OF WRITING THE QUANTA CONDITIONS. (i) One degree of freedom; phase-integral :— I$ dt. 8H. In integrating with respect to ¢ over the whole period it is evi- ent that we are taking account of all phases through which a particular system passes with constant energy and in so doing we are also taking the space-total of all phases which all systems with a given energy siege in phase-space. In subsequent integration with respect to H, therefore, we om accounting for the whole of phase-space corresponding to every variation of the energy. The poem cell in this phase-space having a volume equal to h we [fusn or [T8H=%. The phase- -space and the cell may be represented on a plane a oN I for the oscillator and by Fig. II for the rotator as oll Sse 296 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Fig.l. ——a £-axis Hy A H- axis Fig Hl. f- axis Hy, Hy H-axis (ii) Two degrees of freedom ; ordinary Newtonian ellipse: phase-integrals :-— Ig dt. 8H=h:; {¢ dp.Sp=h. What has been said respecting the case of one degree of freedom will apply equally in this case to the phase-integral [pau Hak But fresh phases come up by reason of the fact that, keeping H and T constant, we can vary p or the azimuth. The phases bronght up by variation of azimuth have no necessary relation with those depending on time-difference, for although in this case f dp is an absolute constant, in the case of the relativistic ellipse it is a function of p while 7 is a function of H. Having regard therefore to the proposition that the space-total of phases of different systems having the same p, 7, and H would be equal to the time-total of phases of a single system we inte- grated df over the complete period. Subsequent integration with respect to p, therefore, accounts for all phases which can arise through these causes. | | 1922.] Theory of Generalised Quanta. 297 - The observation nay be made that the canonical coordi- determined by the system of coordinates (p,, g,, Ps, Ys - The elementary volume of this space would be : dq,dp,dq,dp,..dtdH. In the present case this volume= [dsopateH which can be re- presented as J dddp . J adtsH because p and H are independent constants while ® and 7' are functions of p and H respectively This volume, therefore, is equal to h? as Planck should have. POSSIBILITY OF REDUCTION OF THE pec QUANTA NTEGRALS TO SOMMERFELD’S FOR Writing the Hamiltonian equations of motion in the bilinear ao we (dgip — dpéq) = dt. dH. where d refers to a variation with the time and therefore _- the orbit and 8 refers to a ~ independent of the time In the particular case before ( dq,3p,— dp, 3q, ) + dqgSp,=4 . 8H because, Po being constant, apy ace @) This may be put in the form (2, dq, ee a(», 84, ) + dq,dp,=dt . dH. Integrating this form over a complete cycle we have 8 [¢ P, ia, |- £ »,%, | + 2rdpy =T7 . 3H. Since dp, ia, | —Q-—and this may be easily verified—there- fore we may write a[ ¢ a iu, | + 2ndp, = TSH. Integrating this equation from one orbit to another we have [¢ ptt, | + [ 2=r ] 7m , es 298 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, It is now obvious that instead of associating a quanta number with the phase-integral J Té6H we may associate another 1 with the integral P, ia, | which will be the difference of the 1 quanta numbers associated with the former and with the ex- pression 2rp, and this is exactly what Sommerfeld has done. CASE OF THE RELATIVISTIC ELLIPSE. Phase-integrals :— [pa.sH=mh; [fagsp,=n'h Sommerfeld writes £ (mz) =— cos ; “( j)=-© sin ? wt «5 ior” tnadk J sop where m=mo// 1 — BP and B=- Putting K = — mc? 1— BP we have OR Pe Bee ; L=mz dx a/1—P and oe oy The equations of motion are therefore deducible from F 2 ) | (K~V)dt=0, where V is the potential -= . The angular momentum sions a .Pb6=mrg=p. a6. 4/1 —# The integral of energy re be found oct sf V) dt= \ Gia) Regarding upper limit variable and 4 a variation along the orbit we hav -OK OK K—V=x — +4 —-—const. (energy), dx Yay -OK OK or A= Pa =" os + Voy K+V m c e evieg F. 1922.] Theory of Generalised Quanta. 299 For the ee form of the Hamiltonian equations we proceed as follo 2 Let \ (K-—V)dt=8 1 OK 2 ‘i . 88— | (K—V)at= | 3 Ox 1 1 . ok = Bt) oes (Bay oe OSL (Be — abt) +5 (by ge!) 6 being any arbitrary variation, 2 $9= | {or be + So by Hat Ox oy 1 2 m | (Sp8q— H®), 1 if A be another arbitrary variation {3 (Aq8p — apdg) }' = { AtsH — Ait}. If the variation a represents one with time and if the tre my refers to a definite epoch we have in the case befor (dq, 8p, — dp, dq,) + dqpdp, = didH. i.e. 5 (p,4q,)— Up, 84,) + ddy . 'py =at . 5H. Now, the differential ete of the orbit os been deduced by Sommerfeld i in the for Po yes 6.) Met = oad air eal Gar Y and the equation to the orbit in the form o=A(1+«cos y?), where o=~ “lea ye ¢ is given by the relation which is easily deduced Le ok eo 2 H ES whee P=—. Moc en ~ 300 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, The azimuthal period Peat therefore the phase-integral Y n! - Qn p dpdpy= 7 op 0 0 mM > n =2r) EP = | on/p=p,? Ae ee 0 0 Ie /p?—p2=wh. For the phase-integral | $ dtsH we integrate the bilinear form over the whole orbit and obtain 2r TSH = p, da, ~ b v.24, | — . dp P SRC OM Oc sat bA P “Hate But b p81, |=[ av) a Tae A*(1 + € cos ae de Cos yo « sin yp a A(l+e cos yp)? A(l+e cos ver Tso = al of 7. +20 V/ p— At Sommerfeld evaluates § 7,00, =220/P BH) Ff T3H = Aye Pm |, a pp es p=ene from ick. we obtain Py. Ae, = (say) T= fog: So” ae _ ses nh { 00- 2e(pag) am See 0 . Pr nh n a eee eee een Moe J/ nth® me 4n*p* 1922.] Theory of Generalised Quanta. 301 It will be seen that the energy thus depends on a single quanta number and the doublets and triplets of the Balmer series would receive no explanation. COMPARISON WITH THE QUANTA PROPOSITIONS OF PLANCK AND SOMMERFELD Sommerfeld writes 1 ie and 2rp=n’h, while with Planck the latter would be in the form 2n(p—p,)=n’h. According to Sommerfeld’s original view of the wa of ee for the azimuthal integral the latter would stand in the for yee pan. ASP = De All these relations are therefore different from the relation Qa v/ p?— p2t=wh proposed in this paper while if the present relation is admit- ted then the radial quanta number of Sommerfeld would —— with the time-energy integral and with the azimuthal ntegral. : It is obvious that i dpspdtsH = } dp8p.j di8H since the d in » is a function solely of p and the period in ¢ function of H. Thus the volume of the elementary cell in phase-space is equal to h®. It will also be seen that the least value of p which is p) cannot be passed in quanta changes. COMPARISON WITH PASCHEN’S EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS ON THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE RYDBERG NUMBER IN THE BALMER SERIES. H nh We have metho —— MC a/ nth? + 4p, nh = Pw f n*h? + 47%e* c But e=4:7, 10-": A=65. 107"; c=3. 10” aa is of the order of 107°. 302 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengai. {N.5., XVIII, Therefore °. See 1 pe gee of Antes 1 ze enh? 27 et 67*e8 t = nth? = cinth* ire H,,—H,, mc ( Drees DAnret Grte® Gate’ : oot.) +s ——_ - 7 Ct Oe: h ee: en eh? c'n,*h® ctnht cin,th' =e (4-5 1-25 2(— +23) rete. f hs Ne ny) ¢ eAt in, «aS 7 tee | orev. t pee | Tce ak aa eractc\ Kebect Re (as aap} oh witaz)te ms where N is the Rydberg number. The corrected Rydberg number N’ therefore c 374 1 l mt rT, (stax)? for the hydrogen lines. According to Sommerfeld a dt ee aes | nd =¥)1 tala i It will thus appear that the order of the correction pro- posed agrees with that of Sommerfeld’s formula. : There is however a difference in sign. If we observe however Paschen’s experimental values! for H,, Hg, H. y? Hs H H H H 3 a B y Nn’ | 109678:205 | 109678-164 | 109678°167 | 109678198 | it will be noticed that apart from H, the successive numbers show an increase and not a decrease and this fact is more 10 harmony with the negative sign than with the positive sig of Sommerfeld’s form which by making AN positive would necessitate N decreasing down the series. ConcLUSION. The extension of the theory of the present paper to a casé of f degrees of freedom may be made provided we are able to find the f first integrals of the motion of which one is neces sarily the integral of energy. If the corresponding positional a ee See ee ee hee = Pet saat Ee aan 1 Ann, d, Phys. vol. 50, 1916, p. 935. 1922.] Theory of Generalised Quanta. 303 co-ordinates are known the quanta-integrals may be written in the forms age n! +n! | ron=nn \ Bip, =Wh, | Wop =n"h, ete. 0 0 0 It is evident that a quanta-integral would tend to become infinite if the periodic time or the period of the positional coordinate is infinite, i.e. if the motion of the system in respect of that particular coordinate is not periodic. It would thus appear allowable to suggest that quantaic changes of energy- or momenta are a property of periodic or quasi-periodic mo- tions and that in cases where there is no periodicity the energy- changes or momenta-changes must be gradual—a fact which ensures finite values for the quanta-integrals. SumMMaARY. In this paper the suggestion has been made on theoretical grounds of statistical mechanics that the quanta integral in the case of one degree of freedom should be written in the form a \ TsH = nh 0 and that in the case of Newtonian elliptic motion both of the ordinary and the relativistic type quanta-integrals should be written in the forms | Td3H = nh, \ Dip =n'h 7G lines of hydrogen and it is shewn that while the doublets and triplets receive no explanation, the behaviour of the Rydberg number may be regarded as equally satisfactory if not more so. 23.. Lakhimpuri—A Dialect of Modern Awadhi.' By Basuram Saxksena, M.A. CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTION. § 1. The following paper treats of a’dialect of Awadhi, spoken round about Lakhimpur (Dt. Kheri) of which place the writer is a resident. The dialect possesses no literature. It is reduced to writing only in statements recorded Ge babar? ome we Judiciary and in written ssages fro illa another. The educated classes generally ater’ Hieeasy Hindi in writing and sometimes even in speec 3. The transliteration used in these pages is that of the Royal Asiatic Society ak Great Britain and Ireland with the following modifications : é (short) as in pryen, é sdéng) as in dékha, o (short close) as in roiba, 6 (long close) as in rowat', a {very short a) as in de khatiu, ‘,“ and °¢ (above the line) represent very short 7, u and ¢ respectively as in bipat', kuch", kahe s*, above a vowel denotes nasalisation as in bhawir, y for 'g as in ghora, rh for ~ w (and not v) represents 4 asin kauwa. The sounds are generally those of literary Hindi. ~ Notes ON PRONUNCIATION. S 4. 7, u, e if found at the end of a word = generally pronousced: very brief almost like 2, ‘,¥,¢. Words which end in consonants generally add a, ‘ or * at the end, specially when hy pronunciation is not rapid, e.g. ghar: ghara, caddar : caddar' sukh : — : No —" is generally sou to sing. dir., a to sing. obl. and to blue. and 7 to fem. bas Intervocalic hf is pronounced very = so much so that sometimes it seems to be absent, e.g. the end of a word is, however, fully prononnced, e.g. thandh. lf ha appears in two adjacent syllables it is pronounced very Hendy x in one of them, e.g. rahihat > rahiat or rathai. 1 The writer is indebted to Prof. R. L. Turner under whom he has worked as a Researcher for his kind guidance and helpful suggestions. 306 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, y § 6. vowels if one of them is 7 or é €.g. piyau : piau, gaye : gae) and w if the first vowel is % or 6 (e.g. chuwai: chuat, rowal' : roat'). Intervocalic y is inserted optionally between two ( § Any vowel which is-long in a base or root is shortened if it is more than two syllables from the end of a word when declined or conjugated. This occurs only when one of the two syllables is — or both being short, the word ends in a consonant, e.g. 2 + that > dekhihai, dekh + iba > dekhiba, but dékh + Pe > dékhib; dtkh + aten > dekhaten but dékh + e& > dékhet —When once the shortening of a vowel has taken . place according to this rule it remains in spite of the condi- tions being disturbed on account of a later elision of a vowel, e.g. man + atiti > manatit ; in spite of the elision of a the first vowel remains short in mantii me postpositions have two forms!—short and long. The es form is used afte (1) —e ca. nal long vowel, e.g. (b) a a short ook whether follow edior _ - one onso e.g. da ka acchar*, ghar (2) Jenin cecitainins two pol slice ‘a a final sho rt vowel, a kehi : The short form is used afte (1) monosyllables containin (a) a aes vowel followed by a consonant, e.g. (6) a aoee — followed by two consonants, e.g. m e; (2) dissyllables roses ng short avilable of which one, ends in a consonant, e.g. phanti ka, ahir s (6) one or more a syllables, e.g. hia s > hias', (3) all polysylabes e.g. senate s°, kaharan s°, nau- Note 1 ai. A last vowel of a word preceding a short postposition is long it is pronounced short, e.g. ghora + 8 7 ghora s°; nant + 8° > nani s° ote 2.—If the word after which a long postposition is used, is lengthened, by adding a termination or otherwise , the long postposition can no longer be used after it, e.g. ghar sé 5 but gharahe s°,i ka but 7 ma § 9. The following sandhis have been observed :— (1) if ¢ or w comes between two vowels of the same ee 1 Vide Chaat V1§ 91 aaa ts Chap. VII §§ 135-138. - 1922.) A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 307 quality it becomes y or w respectively, e.g. lai + Gd = layao, gau + ai = gawai; (2) if a short vowel occurs at the end of a word and stands between two consonants having the same place o articulation it disappears, e.g. bhaji + jau = bhaj jau, bhags + gawa = bhaggawa, sini + déu = sandéu, cali + diha = caldiha, mili + jat' = mil jat' but mili ga; (3) & breathed consonant at the end of a word is assi- milated with a voiced consonant of the same class, coming after it, e.g. sat + dai = saddai ) a nasalisation + a breathed consonant becomes a full nasal before a consonant having the same place of articu- lation, e.g. pahiici jau = pahiic jau = pahuhjau, pac + cha = pane cha : (5) h coming between two vowels of which the first is short and is preceded by an unaspirated breathed or voiced stop, has a tendency to be combined with that consonant so . that an aspirated consonant results, e.g. kab + ahi = kabhaii, jat' + hai = jathyat, paca + hattari = pachattari, ke + hia = khia but kehi, mahi ; (6) rorr + a short vowel at the end of a word is assi- milated with a following d or I, e.g. cor + dariga = arsga, cor + lihis' = cdllihis', mari + dariba = maddariba, nikari + leu = nikalléu. : § 10. Stress accent seems to play no part in this langu- age. § 11. Words very frequently used have a tendency to eo their last syllable, e.g. 30 > jo, tau > ta,ki > ki, ka > Limits oF THE DrALect.! § 12. The boundaries of Dt. Kheri are :-— Ripe he mvs Terai, east—Dt. Bahraich, south—Dts. Sitapur and Hardoi, west—Dt. Shahjahanpur and north- west— Dt. Pilibhit The dialect is ; surrounded by Népali on the north, by Awadhi of = raich on the east and by Kanauji on the west and neber The following are the chief points * of difference papa the dialects of Lakhimpur and Bahraich :— Bahraich. ) Lakhimpur. (1) Gen. mase. sg. postposi- | (1) kai and kar entirely ab- tions, kai, kar, ka, ka; sent ; ts : ) gen. m asc. obl. ké al- (2) this use of ké is no most a general obl. post- — found at all ; Pe ee 1 My pre sce on this oe ee VI and IX. « Vide L.S.1., VI, pp. 44-45 and 49-54. 308 Journal of the Asiatic Sociely of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Bahraich. | Lakhimpur. position, e.g. wahi ke—to him (due to influence of Bhojpuri); (3) imperf part.in—at; = —_ (3) corresponding participle | in at’; (4) kéu (some one) ; (4) kor (some one); (5) final —A in verbal forms, —_ (5) correspondin —u in e.g. dawah, diheh. | verbal forms, e.g. awau, diheu. : The dialect of Sitapur! is practically the same as that of Lakhimpur. § 14. Forms of Kanauji begin to be found at Gola Gokaran Nath which is in Kheri District and at a distance of only twenty-five miles from Lakhimpur. The chief points of difference between Kanauji* and Lakhimpur Awadhi are :— Kanauji. | Lakhimpur Awadhi. (1) Nom. postposition n2. (1) Nom. postposition ab- sent. (2) hatdé and thd forms ab- sent, the only forms are rahai, ete. (3) Fut. Ind. -had or -g6 | (3) -ha&i forms for all ex- forms for all persons. > (2) Past Ind. of hob—hato tho. (4) Noun, adj., perf. part. | (4) The same noun, adj., or verb ends in -d, e.g. | perf. part. or verb ends ghoyo, accho, awd, gawd. in -a, e.g. ghora, accha, awa, gawa. 15. Kheri is one of those districts where Awadhi and Kanauji meet. Therefore the Kanauji of Shahjahanput * acc. -dat. postposition) and the Lakhimpur dialect with the Shahjahanpur dialect (e.g. mahiya —an alternative loca- tive postposition). COMPARISON WITH THE LANGUAGE OF THE RAMAYANA. § 16. The language of the Ramayana of Tulsidas which broadly represents forms of the Awadhi of the 16th century eats sate ieoae) _— __,_| The specimen given on L.S.I. VI, p. 91 does not represent the dialect of Sitapur town but that of the western portion of the district. he town rahai, sz, chot, are used for the forms hata, t2 and chwat ree pectively. ; 2 L.8.1. IX, Part I, p. 85. 3 L.S.1.1X, Part I, pp. 398-400. 1922.] A Dtalect of Modern Awadhi. 309 resembles generally the dialect of Lakhimpur. The chief points of resemblance are : Ramayana. ee (1) Noun sg. ob]. ends in -é. (1) Noun (2) Noun pl. obl. in -ana or -anha., (3) Adj. obl. mase. in -é. (4) Pronouns generally a- ’ gree. (a) Gen. mor, mori, more, tor, tori, toré conn with others méro, térd, (5) Ist pl. Imperative ends generally in -iya, e.g. diya, kahiya, bédhiya. (6) Past Indic. trans. verb oe, ee balaka anha- (7) Past Indic. 2nd sometimes ends in e.g. sundyesi. (8) Past Pe intrans. in -a,7 an (9) Past Cont, in sg. -est, -e, ehu o na (karana, hasana). (12) Sometimes dative post- position badi found (bip- ra badi). . obl. ge screen lost bat remnants found specially in loc., e.g. sapné, yas ant jane. (2) in (3) 1 (4) Tasik that obl. of Ist and 2nd person pronouns 8. (5) in -2, e.g. at, kahit, bedhi. (6) mb Sees agrees ss the subject, e.g. janant bala- kan ka ‘heise (7) ends always in -is’, e.g. sunayts'. (8) similarly. 9) = “tt, iu, eg. hotia, (10) * form only in Ist pl. and -h forms for the rest. e.g. chitrihat, bihathau, sunthat (11) dir. in -ab; obl in -at (karat, hasa sai). (12) bad one of the regular dative postpositions. 310 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVITI, CHAPTER II. Nouns. Gender. Nouns have two genders : masculine and feminine, e.g. bamhan, diya, dhobi, gau, nau and bajar, debiya, Grati, naddt. Some nouns form the fem. regularly by adding terminations to the masc. . uns ending in consonants add either -7 (e.g. suar: sort < suart, bhatij: bhatijt); -in (e.g. camar: camarin,) or -ain (e.g. pandit: panditain, thakur: thakurdin). Those ending in -@ either substitute -7 for -@ (e.g. bakra: bakrt), -in for -@ (e g. bania : banin) or -int for -a (e.g. larika: larikini) or add -in to -4 (e.g. lala : lalain). Those ending in 7% substitute -in for -i (e.g. mali: malin). Those ending in -% either add -ain (e.g. guru: gurudin) or substitute -wni for -% (e.g. naa: nauni). Case. $1 There are two cases: direct and oblique, e.g. ghar : gharan, kutta : kuttan. § 20. The dir. is used in the singular to denote the sub- ject (e g. kutia mari ga—the dog died), the vocative (e.g. ghost —O milkman) or the inanimate direct object (e.g. lahasi phuki déu—burn the corpse). In the above cases it is used without any postposition, but to denote all other cases of the singular it is employed with the various postpositions (enumerated in Chap. vii §§ 134-140). In the plural the dir. is used either as a subject (e.g. sab kutta mari gé—all dogs died) or as an inanimate direct object e.g. (sab birwa kati darau—cut all the trees down). I : other words, there is only one case as far as the singular 1S concerned.” It is employed as a subject optionally in ere where a transitive verb is in the past based on the ancient perfect participle (e.g. bamhanan or bamhan sab kam bigar’ dihin'—the Brahmans spoiled everything). Except when used as above, the obl. has always a postposition with it. 1 Vide Chap. I §7 for vowel-shortening in the first syllable. 2 But see § 4 note. 1922.j-°: - A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 311 Like the dir. in the singular, the obl. in the plural is in a few expressions used as an instrumental, e.g. tum hamka lathin mareu—you struck me with sticks. § 22. The obl. is formed from the dir. by adding (a) -an if me noun ends in a consonant or U, e.g cor : coran, gau: gawar b) -n if Be noun ends in other vowels fshorten ing, a vowel, if it is long, before the termination), e.g. tarwari : tarwarin, diya : diyan, ghost: ghosin, Hindi: Hindun. Other Cases. § 23. There is a Specks case for the vocative plural. It is formed by adding -aw to a noun ending in a consonant (e.g kaharaw ré) or -u to a noun ending i in a vowel (shortening. it t it is long), e.g. meharuau ri. This case is, however, rarely employed. The ect ré (masc.) and ri (fem.) are often added after the full form m. and acc. es in -ai occurs in some words, €.g. barsai (years), spar (books), bajarat (market s). n instrumental ending in -en is found in such adverbial Fe IE as piyasen, bhukhen, daren (out of thirst, hunger or fear) alone, e.g. ham piyasen maré jail’ hai—we are dying out of thirst; 6¥ followed oy mare, e.g. wui daren mare bhag gayé—he fled away out of 26. A case expressing ie towards and ending in -a is found in such usages as bajarat gaye—went to the market. sone gharai, madarsai, gawat. 27. cative ending in -2 is found in duéaré (outside, on the door), sande (before, in front). These are used without the postposition. Ghamz,kamé, caumas@, sapné and others are generally employed with the postposition. Form. § 28. Many nouns have two forms: one short and the other long, e. g. naddi : nadiya, ghora : ghorawa, nau: na nauwa, nauni: nauniya, kahar: kaharwa. Some nouns have only what seems to be the long form. e.g. bilaiya : cf. Hin. bill, debiya : cf. Hin. dibbi. They have lost the short form short form is more generally eos ‘The lo ong one is used only familiarly and is never used of oe It is also used in calling the younger, e.g. babua, nauwa Emphatic | Forms. § 29. ‘To denote the sense of also (inclusive) -aw is add- ed to a noun dir. or obl. if it ends in a consonant o rin -u- and raeetnuiess amt maa ant 1 Em ¢ added to s (Chap. V § 63), adjectives RChap. Int, T, 3.43) oarnaiglos and ives (Chap. VII § 133) as well. 312 Journal of the Asiatic Scciely of Bengal. |N.S., XVIII, -u if it ends in any other vowel (shortening it if it is long), e.g. kitabau behi gai—the book also was lost, gawau jari ga—the village also was burnt; mardan ka tau maddareu ab ka meha- ruanau ka marthau—you have already murdered the men, now do you propose to kill the women also ? To denote the sense of definiteness or of emphasis -d@/ is added to a noun in a consonant or in -w and -i to a noun ending in a vowel (shortening it if it is long), e.g. kumharai girt ga—the potter himself fell down, kuttai bhagi ga—the dog fled away. Note 1.—These terminations may be added to the nouns or pronouns or instead of them to the postposition following them if it is long and not short, e.g. -au added to ghar sé be- comes either gharau s* or ghar seu. ote 2.— -ahi (instead of -au or -u—inclusive) and -ahé (instead of -ai or -i -definitive) may be optionally added to nouns consisting of one syllable or of two short syllables. If a dissyllabic or a long mono-syllabic word ends in a consonant -ahi and -ah@ cannot be added, e.g. gharahi, gharah@; but corau, corar. Pertphrastie Plurals. type. To form the obl. the termination -an is then added to these words and not to the noun which they follow, e.g. kurmt log bartan nat majat' hai—the kurmis—the kurmi class—do not clean utensils ; kahar logan ma pancait k’ ritt hai—the Pancait system prevails amongst the kahars ; ham pane cord nat kav sakit’ hai—people of our sort cannot steal: ham pancan ma parda ka calan hai—the purdah system prevails amongst our people. Note.—painc, however, is used generally only with Ist and 2nd pers, pronouns (ham and tum). CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES. Gender. § 31. Adjectives as a rule have two genders : masculine and feminine, e.g. nik: niki (good). $ 32 e fem. is formed by (a) adding -' to the masc. if it ends in a consonant, €.8- patar: patar' (thin), gil: gil’ (wet), thandh : thandh' (cold); _ _ _ (b) changing -a into -7 if the masc. ends in -@, e.g 9474 bart (big), thora: thort (little) ; 1922.) A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 313 (c) adding -? (after shortening @ to -u) if the masc. ends in a, e.g. kart: karut (bitter). Note.—Adjectives ending in -@ change only optionally for the fem., e.g. garté or garut baltt (a heavy bucket). . The following adjectives do not change for gender : layak (able), sapét (white), kharab (bad), ujar (desolate), lai (red), karia (black), badi! (useless), bhart (huge), jarav (inlaid). Case. are unmarried, wui larikan ka kua@r—or kuare—batawat' hai— they say those boys are unmarried) or (0) if it ends in a vowel the noun with which it agrees is used with a postposition (e.g. wui larikan ka bhala—or bhai?—batawat' hai—they say those boys are good). § 36. Attributively the obl. is used to qualify a sg. noun followed by a postposition (e.g. wui kuareé larika ka—or kuart latria ka—sab jane dekhini—everybody saw that unmarried boy—or girl) or to qualify a pl. noun, e.g. wui kuaré (or kuar’) larika hua hai—those unmarried boys are there; wui kuart latiria hia hat—those unmarried girls are here. Predicatively the obl. is used always with a pl. noun, e.g. wui larika kuaré (or kuar?) hat. ; Note.—If a sg. noun is used as a subject of a pl. verb, the adjective which qualifies that noun must be plural, e.g. baréliwalé caca aye hat; Rameandra bare acch® raja raha ; ? thanedar bare hat wui chot hat. Form. § 37. The masc. obl. is formed from the mase. dir. (a) by adding -2 if the dir. ends in a consonant or in -&% shortening -% to -u), e.g. dubar: dubaré, kart: karué ; (b) by substituting -é i | badi is used only predicatively. 2 For the optional use of the direct see above § 35. 314 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, for -a if the dir. ends in -@, e.g. bhala: bhalé. TU the dir. itself ends in -é no change is made, e.g. kett2. The fem. obl. is formed from the fem. dir. by lengthen- ing ‘ to 7, e.g. gil’: gilt. If the dir. itself ends in 7 no change is made, e.g. bhali: bhali. ote.—Fem. dir. is never used with a plural noun. § 38. Adjectives which do not change for gender do not change for number and case either, and those which change optionally for gender change optionally for number and case also, e.g. sapét: sapét, karu: karti or karué 39. If an adjective is used as a noun, its obl. form (or the dir. itself if there is no obl.) serves as the sg. obl., e.g. acche ka rakhi léu—retain the good (boy), but it forms the pl. obl. by adding terminations like ordinary nouns! to its obl. form or to the dir. if there is no obl., e.g. hia kharab au acché dinau tana k¢ admit hai—here are boys of both sorts, good and bad, accha acchen ka rakh' leu kharaban ka bahira nikari déu— all right, retain the good but turn the bad out. Degrees of Comparison. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. Cardinals. § 42. The following are the cardinal numerals :— | Vide Chap. II; 22, ese Ser Wie 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 315 eS | 35 paitis. 69 onhattari. 2 duit. 36 chattis. 70 sattart. 3 fini. 37 saitis. 71 ekhattari, 4 cari. 38 aratis. 72 bahattari. 5 pac. 39 ontdlis 73 tihattari. 6 cha. 40 calis. 74 cauhattari. 7 eal. 41 ekatalis, 75 pachattari. 8 ath 42 bayalis | 76 chiyattari. 9 nau 43 tétalis | 77 sathattari. 10 das 44 cauwalis | 78 athattari. ll géra 45 paitals | 79° onnast. 12 bara 46 chiyalis | 80 asst. 13 téra. 47 saitalis | 81 ekkyasi 14 cauda. 48 aratalis. 82 bayasi. 15 pandarah 49 ojficas. 83 tirast 16 50 pacas. 84 caurasi 17 sattara 51 ekkyawan 85 pacasi 18 athara 52 bawan. 86 chiyast 19 onais 53 tirpan. 87 satiast 2 54 cauwan. 88 atihast 21 ekais 55 pachpan 89 nawasi 22 bais 56 chappan. 90 nabbé 23 téis 57 sattawan. 91 ekkyanbé 24 caubis 58 atthawan 9 25 pacts. 59 onsathi 93 tiranbé. 26 chabbis 60 sathi. | 94 cauranbé 27 sattais 61 ekasathi | 95 pancanbe 28 atthais 62 basathi | 96 chanbé 29 ontis 63 tirsathi 97 sattanbé 30 th 64 catsathi 98 atthanbé 31 ekatis 65 patsathi 99 ninnanbé 32 battis 66 chachathi 100 sau. 33 tétis. 67 sarsathi 1,000 hajar. 34 caiitis. 68 arasathi. 1 00 000 lakh. Ordinals. § 43. These ably two genders, masc. and fem. The following are irregular :— Ist pee 2nd ddsar 3rd tisar. 4th cauth 6th chattha, The above five form their fem. “like adjectives (Chap. III § 32). Other ordinals are formed by adding awa (mace-) or ai (fem.), e.g. pic: pacawi: pacai, bais: baisawa : baisa Note.—11th to 18th, rapa insert a short ‘ in the termination, e.g. géra: gerah rahi. 316 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{N.S,, XVIII, Multiplicative Numerals. § 44. There are no special numerals of the type of twice, thrice, etc. The sense is, however, given by some resolved to ‘two times’ dui dai, thrice to ‘three times’ tini da. For instance ham sab jané din bhare ma ékai dui dai khart' hai, saheb, log tau pac pac chaccha dai tipan urawat' hai —-we eat food only once or twice a day while the sahebs eat tiffin five or six times. The following words are used only for the multiplication tables :— Ekkan (once), dint (twice), tiya (thrice), cakku (four times), pancé (five times), chaka (six times), sat@ (seven times), atthé (eight times), nawa (nine times), dasawan (ten times). The following are the most common fractional numerals :— + pauwa 2 paunu 1i derh 4 adha or addha 1} sawau 24 arhar Definite and Indefinite. 45. To add the sense of definiteness to a number -au is added to it if it ends ina consonant or in -u and -w if it ends in some other vowel, e.g. duiu—both, cariu—all the four, nawau—all the nine. To express the sense of indefiniteness -an (if a number ends in a consonant or in -u) or -n (if it ends in any other vowel) is added to it, e.g. bisan—scores, pactsan—fifties, haja- ran—thousands, CHAPTER V. PRONOUNS. § 46. A pronoun is always followed by a postposition except when used as a subject or as an inanimate direct ob- ject. The oblique, wherever it exists separately, is used with a postposition. Pronouns which have separate genitive forms are never followed by genitive postpositions. The genitive form has oblique and feminine forms like ordinary adjectives, e.g. ™0r ghora—my horse, méré ghora ka—to my horse, mdr‘ ghoria— my mare, mori ghoria ka—to my mare. a pronoun has separate forms for singular and plural, the plural is generally used for the singular person also, e.g. I said—ham kahen (mai kahe& less frequently). _ _ Sg. 2nd pers. (tui) is used only for the younger, chietly children and the servants. It expresses either deep affection or contempt. A father for his grown up son or daughter will always use the pronoun tum—you. 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 317 Personal Pronouns. § 49. Ist pers. sg. pl. mar, mahi ham. Gen. mor —masc. dir. (my); posi a i), €.g. mar gayet- os went, ham gayen—we went; ma give me, ham ka déu—give us: mor kitab—my Week, hom lartka ka—to our son. § 50. 2nd pers, tur, tuhi. tum. 1. 6r—mase. dir. (thy); twmhar— mase. dir. (your), e.g. tur ns or tum gayeu—you went, tui ka or tum ka mariba— I shall beat you ; toré or tumharé larikawa s° —- rig your son. Note.—mahi, tuhi are very rarely used; in the obl. of hamar and tumhar the second iilebis Esccnies’ aes hamare, hamazvi, ete. § 51. 3rd pers. sg. pl. dir. masc. wi, EE out fem. a, wah obl. wut, wahi un, unh. e.g. wi or wahu kahis'—he said, wa or wah kahis'—she said, wut kahin'—they said: wui ka or wahi ka dekhen—we saw him (her), un or unh ka dekhen—we saw them. Demonstrative Pronouns. § 52. The forms of the Remote Demonstrative are the same as those of the 3rd pers. pronoun. Those of the prono- minal sii that are also the same except that obl. pl. has three un, unk and wui. For instance :— wi or wahu larika, wa or wah lauria, wui larika or . ria, wut or wahi larika ka or lauria ka; wui, un or unh lapikan a; wut, un or unh latrian ka. § 53. Proximate Demonstrative Pronoun. .. masc. yé, ee : ge fem. ya, ya oe obl. a, ehi - in, nh, the same The forms of the pronominal adjective this are as above except that obl. pl. has three forms: in, | inh andi & e.g. 7, in or inh larikan ka marau—beat these boys, t, in or in latirian ko marau—beat these girls. 318 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, § 54, Relative Pronoun. dir. j0, jaun j0, jaun, it. obl. jt, jehi jin, jinh. Correlative Pronoun. dir. 80, taun 86, taun, tt. obl. tt, tehi tin, tinh. e.g. j6 or jaun jais kari sd or taun tais pai—as one will do so one will get. The pronominal adjectives of these have the same forms except that ji and #7 are the more usual forms than jin, jinh and tin. tinh ,in obl. pl. jt and #7 also replace j0, jaun and 86, iaun of dir. pl., e.g. 77 larika dundu macawat' rahai ti sab bhag gayé—all those boys who were making noise have run away These pronouns also form their pronominal adjectives on jaun and iaun by taking the terminations of ordinary adjec- tives :— masc. fem. dir. jaun, taun jaun', taun'. obl. jaune, tauné jaunt, taunt. § 55. Interrogative Pronoun. sg. pl. dir. ko, kaun kaun. obl. ki, kehi kin, kinh. e.g. kd or kaun hai—who is there? hud taun rahai—who were there ? , ki or kehi ka mareu—whom (sg.) did you beat ? kin or kinh ka mareu—whom (pl.) did you beat ? e pronominal adj. kawn—mase dir is declined like ordi: nary adjectives. In addition it has the alternative forms , keht in sg. obl. and & in pl obl., e.g kawn admi mari ga— which man died? kaun' meharua mari gai—which woman _§ 56. The adjectives of manner : ais (of this sort, such), wais (of that sort, such). jaistais (such a-) kais (0 wha 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 319 phirt nat mili—never will a book of that sort be found, etté ata s* hamar' bhikh nai jati—my hunger will not be satisfied with so much flour, ham offi rott khayen—I took that much bread, tum ketta kam kiheu—how much work did you do?; tumharé ketté larika au ketti latria hai—how many sons and rs cle have vou got ?, jetté larika tumharé hai telte hamaré have as many sons as you have, jettt ladria hamaré hai letti koi k* nat—no one has so many daughters as I have Indefinite Pronouns. Aur. § 57. This pronoun expresses the sense of ‘ more,’ ‘ other’ (else) and i is indeclinable, e.g. aur ka cahi—what more is re- quired? , aur kaun sahar jat—who else will go to the city, thore admi hid hat aur hua baith hai—some men are here, others are seated there. an adjective takes the ordinary terminations for Seite the oblique and the feminine: aur, auré, aur’, auri § 58. Kot means ‘some one’ or ‘ any one’ and is indeclinable, e.g. kot rahai—there was some one, kot nai rahai—there was wees kot rahat—there were some » pesule. koi ka marau na—do n beat anybody. Koi does not change even as an adjective, e.g. kot admi or meharuad—some man or woman, két admi nat ayé—no man came, koi larika ka na méarau—do not beat an y boy Like ka, kuchu refers to an inanimate thing. It means something or anything; kuchw-—dir . kahew—obl., e.g. ham kuchu nat kihen—I did nothing, ham ighen s¢ pet bhari lihen— I filled my belly with somethin The adjective based on kuchu has the same form as k@z. 9. The pronoun sab (all) has one constant form for both genders and cases, e.g. sab kihin'—all did ; sab sé. ee = or whole) as an adjective also does not change, e.g. sab a s* ham sé kot matlab nai—I have nothing to do with all on sab duniya matlabi hai—the whole saala 3 is selfish. Compound Pronouns. § 60. 76 koi (whoever) and 76 kuchw (whatever) are the only compound pronouns an used only in the direct, e.g. j0 kot maris' hoi so bakwri dei—whoever may have beaten, admit, j0 kuchu bhawa so bhawa—whatever happened, happened, =. ere ge has the ordinary jt, jehi with or without the wor , €.g. cahai jt kt rota hoi ham khaib jarur—whomsoever r the ieee may belong to, I shall eat it. 320 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, § 61. apna. Genitive—apan—mase. dir. This pronoun is used to express (a) saga (b) reflexive sense ; or (9 the lst and 2nd persons togethe (a) J may be combined with any noun or pronoun to express aes e.g. Ram apna ban ka calé gayé, Dasarath ka rowai ka ghar chairi gaye—Ram himself went away to the jungle but left Dasarath at home to weep; tum apna calé gayeu—you yourself went away ; ham apna rupaya corayen au tum ka cort lagayen—I myself stole the money and attributed the theft to you bits regret and rebuked himself very much; tum apna sahat' rahen tum sé kuchu nai kahen—I went on putting up with troubles but never said anything to you (c) This pronoun expresses the speaker and the person spoken to together, when used absolutely, oe apna s° kaun matlab-—what have we (you and I) to do wit e genitive ie is declined like nage adjectives denotes the sense of ‘own’ when used with a noun or pronoun and of ‘ our’ (yours “end mine) when used absolutely, e.g. Gopal apan' gaiya béci daris'—Gopal sold away his (own) cow; tum apan birwa katau hamar kahe katat' hau—cut your own tree, why do you cut mine; apan bakera kaha gawa—where is our goat gone ? _ § 62. There are no honorific pronouns like Hin. ap or Bih. rauwa. _ When honour or sd ag is to be shown to any Emphatic Forms. § 63. Some pronouns form the emphatics irregularly as shown below :— inclusive. definitive. mai, mahi maha mahée ham hamahi hamahé tua tohit tohé tum tumahu tumahé wi, wahu, wa, wah wahau wahatr wut waht wahe un or unh unaha unaheé yu, yahu, ya, yah yahau yahar 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 321 inclusive definitive D yahi yahée in or inh inahau inahé jt, jehi — jehé tt, tehi sr tehé Other pronouns make their emphatic forms with the or- dinary terminations (Chap. II § 29), e.g. sabai, koiu CHAPTER VI. VERBS. § 64. The plural form of the verb is used Sariglen fi even with a singular noun, specially when respect is intended to be shown, e.g. Ram ban ‘kat gayé—Ram went to the jungle ; caca bajarai gaye hat—my uncle has gone to the market. There are no special honorific moods or tenses. Root. § The root form, for the purposes of this grammar, can be obtained from the dir. infinitive by cutting off—wab, a fairly large number of them end in—a@. Those which end in other vowels are very few. , Imperfect and Perfect Participles. § 66. The imperf. part. has three distinct forms: (a) in —al', e.g. parhat'—reading, dekhat'—seeing ; (b) in—il', e.g. part ered (c) in—ala, e.g. parhalt, dekhatt. (a) in—at' is used for the singular of both genders and for the smemili plural, e.g. mai dékhat' hai—I see, wui dekha id (6) in—il' is used a the Ist ri of both genders, e.g. ham ser han—we (ma ase. or fem.) se = in—-alt is used pie the meharua dekhat tai—these women see; ham dekhatt (or sein) han—we (fem.) ee. § 67. The perf. part. has four forms: (a) in—é, e.g. parhe (read), dekhé (seen); (6) in—is', e.g. parhis', dékhis' ; (c) in— tn', e.g. parhin', dekhin' ; (d) in—en, e.g. parhen, dekhen (a) in—2 is used for both numbers of Ist and 2nd pers., = mat ajodhya aun hai—I have seen Ajodhya, tum dekhé u—have you seen (5) in iat for ae 2nd and 3rd sg., e.g. tui — khais' hai —thou hast eaten curds, wi or wa dahiu khais' 322 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, (c) in—in' for the 3rd pl., e.g. wut dahiu khain' hai and d) in—en is used as an alternative form for the Ist pl., e.g. ham ajodhya dekhen hai (or dekhé han)-—we have seen Ajodhya. Auxiliary Verb. § 68. hdb—to be, root ho—. Present Indicative ‘8g. pl. Ist pers. (maz) hai (ham) han, haz. 2nd pers. (tut) hai (tum) hau 3rd pers. (wi) hai (wut) hai Past Indicative. rahai rahan, rahai rahai rahau rahai rahat Fature Indicative. hoithaa hoiba, hoib hothai hothau hor hoihat Present Conjunctive. hot, hoi hoi hou hoi hor Past Conjunctive. hotin hoten, hoit' hot' hotiu hot* hott The Imperative has the same forms as the Present Conj. except In 2nd sg. where it has ho for hdi. _ Note.—Of the alternative forms given above for Ist pl. hat, rahai and hoi are used only with—it' (imperf.) and—en (perf.) forms of the participles and not with others. They are only used in periphrastic tenses. The alternative forms han rahan and hoi are alone used independently. CoyjuGation oF dékhab—to sx, root dékh— (1) Simple Tenses. 69. These are formed by adding various terminations § (e.g.—ed) to the root and without the help of the auxiliary- They are six in number. snc aes coe aE q | EOE 1922.) A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 323 § 70. Present Indicative. dékhat dékhi détkhai dékhau dékhat dékhat. This tense is no longer used in common speech (except that of the auxiliary hdb) and has been replaced by the Present Imperf. Indicative, e.g. I go—mai jat' hat, not mai jaa, but I am—mai hai. It, however, still survives in songs (e.g. sdwau ki jagau mort Gdhi bhawini,....bali jaui '—are you sleeping, revered Bhawani, or waking, I bow to thee) as the Pres. Indic. and in stories as the Habitual Past or historic present in vivid description (e.g. mahtari rdju chappan parkal k* bhojan banawai*—the mother used to prepare food of fifty- six varieties daily; raja kacehari s* ayé dekhai ka koi ke juta dharé*—the Raja returned from the court and what does he see— that somebody’s shoes were there. § 71. Past Indicative. dékhet dékhen dekhz, dékhis dekheu dekhis* déekhini This tense refers toa momentary action which happened in the past, e.g. jab mai hui s¢ caled tab tum hua nai rahau— you were not there when I left the place. If a continuous action in the past is meant a root indicating continuous action is combined with one expressing momentary action, e.g. mar baith rahei—I remained seated. The difference between this tense and the Pres. Perf. Indic. and the Past Perf. Indic. is chiefly that the effect of the last two lasts after the action while it does not last in the case of this tense. The Past Indic. may, arrived. Thus, here, the momentary action of ‘ arri mart ki tumhar har pijar tati jai—all right you'll see, I shall beat you so much that all your bones will be broken ; i Vide Appendix (6) 1. _ 2 Vide Appendix (a). 324 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, § 72. Future Indicative. dekhthat dekhiba or dékhib dekhihat dekhihau dékhi dekhihat This tense simply refers to a future action, e.g. ham mithai khaiba —we shall eat sweetmeats. As compared with this, the Fut. Imperf. Indic. refers to an action which will be in the process of being acted (jab tum aihau tab ham parhati hoib —when you come, I shall be reading, i.e. you will find me reading) and the Fut. Perf. Indic. refers to an action which will have been completed (e.g. jab tum athau tab ham parhe hoiba —when you come, I will have finished reading). The simple Fut. Indic., however, refers (in the case of ‘continuous’ roots) to an action which will begin (eg. jab tum aihau tab ham parhiba—when you come, I shall read, i.e. I shall begin reading after your arrival). § 73. Present Conjunctive. This tense has exactly the same forms as_ the Pres. Indic. (§ 70 above). It is used in conditional clauses (jo mat tum ka dhokha dé tau kaheu—blame me if I deceive you) or in clauses denoting purpose (e.g. wui aist batai kihin' ki ham hua s* bhagi jai—he spoke in such a manner in order that I should go away from there). A clause with this tense (as also every other conjunctive tense) is also preceded by some such word as 6 (if). jab (when), ki (that), j2 ma@ (so that). 8 compared with the Pres. Imperf. Conj. (e.g. jo mat dekhat' how tau mai ka mareu—beat me if I am looking) and Pres. Perf. Conj. (e.g. j6 mai dekhe hoi tau marau—beat me if I have looked) this tense denotes only simple and indefinite conjunctive sense, e.g. jo mai dékhati tau mareu—if I look, beat — me, i.e. beat me even if I begin looking whether I am in the state of looking (Pres. Tmperf. Conj.) or I have finished looking (Pres. Perf. Corj.) § 74. Past Conjunctive. dekhatia dekhaten or dekhit' dékhat' dekhatiu dékhat' dekhatt 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 325 from home at eight ; tum ais kam kartiu ki ham ka hui s° + tarkak ka mauka mil jat'—you should have acted in such a manner that I should have oe time to — from there. et w ith process of talking—to Ram I would have done like that) and Past Perf. Conj. (e. . 96 tum apnai ais kam kihé hotiu tau ka na bant'i—if you yourself had acted in such a way—i.e. finished acting—would all have not been well ?) this tense refers not to completion or incompletion of = action but simply infers that it did not take place in the past § 75. Imperative. This tense has the same forms as the Pres. Indic. except in 2nd sg. where it has dékhu for dékhai. The subject in the case of the 2nd pers. is generally understood while in other cases it is generally expressed, e.g. karu—do (sg.), karau—do (pl.), mai karati—let me do, wi karai—let him do. The forms of this tense are distinguished from those of the Pres. Indic. and Conj., by an emphatic intonation of the voice. Similarly questions are distinguished both Se the Imperative and other ea, e.g. mat karati—shall I do (2) Periphrastic Tenses. § 76. These are formed by aoe (a) the Imperf. Part. and (b) the Perf. Part. with the various tenses of the auxiliary. The auxiliary is, however, “ibteiad with much less emphasis than the principal verb, e.g. in mai jat' hai—I go, haw is uttered very indistinctly so much so that it seems some- times to be absent. (a) Tenses with Imperf. Part. § 77. Compared with the Simple and Perfect tenses, these © lay special emphasis on the continuity and incompletion is an action present, past or future. They are five as shown belo § 78. Present Impertect Indicative. sg. pl. masc. x5 fem. aed dékhit' Ist pers. dékhat' hat { aekhat ik hereto hon 2nd dekhati hai —- dékhat' hau = dekhatt hau 3rd puck dékhat' hai dekhat' hat = dekhati hai This tense refers to an action which is taking — in the present and has displaced the Pres. Indic., eg. mai jal’ haai— 326 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, means ‘I go’ and not necessarily ‘I am going.’ It also refers to a future action about to take place, e.g. (hua kawn jai—who will go there ?) mai jat' hai—I am going. Note.—The alternative form in the Ist pl. in—it' hai is much more frequently used than the forms in—at' han and— att han. § 79. Past Imperfect Indicative. sg. pl. mase. pl. fem. ree i dékhit' rahai dekhat' rahat | akhati rahan dekhatt rahan dékhat' rahai dékhat' rahau dekhalt rahau dékhat' rahai dékhat' rahai dekhatt rahat ote.—The alternative form in the Ist pl. in—it' rahat is ees more frequently used than the forms in—at' rahan and—ott rahan. § 80. Future Imperfect Indicative. Sg. pl. masc. pl. fem. 5 a dékhit' hoiba ONE NeNOS. -) -pinas koten da ae dekhat' hoihai dékhat' hoihau dekhatt hoihau dékhat' hot dékhat' hoihat —_ dekhatt hothat This tense refers to an action which will be in the state of duration at some particular future time, e.g. jab tum aihaw tab ham khat' hoiba—t shall be eating when you come. § 81. Present Imperfect Conjunctive. ekhat' hoa { dékhit' hor arelgpilieces: } dekhat' hoi deKhali how dekhat' hoi dékhat' hou dekhatt hou dékhat® hoi dékhat' hoi dekhatt hor This tense refers to a continuous conditional action present or future, probable or improbable, e.g. j6 tum jhat bolat' how tav cam ka kari—what shall I do if you are (or were) telling a lie, }0 ham kahit saité sowati hoi tau ham ka mareu—beat me if you find me sleeping to-morrow at this time. 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 327 § 82. Past Imperfect Conjunctive. sg. mase. pl. fem. pl. b , eesce ( dékhit' hoten mantieteieta yf kg dékhat* hot‘ déekhat' hotiu dekhatt hotiu dékhat' hot' dékhat? hatt dekhatt hot' This refers to a continuous action in the past which might have happened but which did not happen, e.g. wui sail’ 76 tum sé ham batlat' hoten tau tum ka wa bat jarar batauten—if I had been talking to you at that time, I would have told you that thing. (6) Tenses with Perf. Part. § 83. These lay emphasis on the completion of an action, whether it be in the present, past or future, having special re- ference to the effect of that action at the time of speaking, or at the time referred to in the speech. They are five in num- ber as shown below. § 84. Present Perfect Indicative. 8g. é pl. dékhé hat dekhé han or dékhen hat dékhé hai or dé&khis' hai dékhé hau dékhis' hai dékhin' hat The difference between this tense and the Past Indic. is that this refers to an action the effect of which lasts up to the present while the Past Indic. refers to an action which has no effect at present, e.g. mai kua&i ma giri ga hai—I have fallen into the well, i.e. I am still there while mai kua ma giri gayet refers to the momentary action of falling but does not show that I am still there. _ Compared with the Past Perf. Indic. this tense refers to the recent past while the Past Perf. Indic. to the remote past, e.g. mai gawai gawa hati—I have gone to the village, refers to nearer past than that referred to in mai gawai gawa rahai—I had gone to the village. § 85, Past Perfect Indicative. dékhé rahaa dékhé rahan or dékhen rahat dékhé rahai or dékhis' rahai dekhe rahau dékhis' rahai dékhin' rahar The difference between this tense and the Past Indic. is that while the effect of the action denoted by the agp — not last beyond the time when the action took place re . the Past Perf. Indic. lasts. Moreover, the Past Indic re ms nearer past time than the Past Perf. Indic. does, e.g. mar gawar 328 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, gayeti—I went to the village and mai gawai gawa rahati—I was gone to the village. Note.—The English Past Perf. (e.g. I had gone) requires s comparison with another past verb, but here it is not neces- § 86. Future Perfect Indicative. dékhé hoithau dékhen hoiba or dékhé hoiba dékhé hothai or dékhis' hoithai dékhé hoihau atkhis' hor dékhin' hothait This tense refers to an action which will be necessarily completed by some particular time in the future, e.g. jab tum hamka bolawai aihau tab ham roti khai lihé hoiba—I shall have dined when you come tocall me It may, however, sometimes denote a possible but uncertain action of the past, e.g. (kalhi ka iumi kurst par baithé.rahau) ha baithe hoiba—(was it you who sat on this chair yesterday ? ) yes, | may have sat on it. § 87, Present Perfect Conjunctive. dékhé hoi dékhe hot or dékhen hoi dékhé hoi or dékhis' hoi dékhé hou dékhis' hoi dékhin' hoi This tense refers to a conditional action, completed in the past or the future, e.g. 76 ham ya kitab chuyé hot tau marau—beat me if I have touched this book, or 76 ham ya kitab chuyé ho sate oo” me if you ever find that I have touched this ook. § 88. Past Perfect Conjunctive. dékhé hotit dékhé hoten or dékhen hoten dékhé hot’, dékhis' hot’ dé&khé hotiu dékhis* hot* dékhin' hott This tense refers to a conditional completed action in the past which did not occur, e.g. jo mai chuttin ma sabai kilabar par hi daré hotit tau aju cain karti hotii—if 1 had finished reading all the books during the vacations, I should have been enjoying this day. Infinitival Forms. § 89. The infinitive has two cases—direct and oblique. The dir., e.g. dékhab—to see (ghar ki dasa dekhab ka rowab hai— to see the condition of the house is to weep; khab ka pet" bha- rab hai—it is not eating but filling the belly). The obl., e.g. 4 thai (yu larika dékhai sunai ma nik hai—this boy is said to good, lit. this boy is good in seeing and hearing, abhat pans bar- eed ma — din aur baki hat—there are still some days before ‘ains). Sete a OS a TS 1922. ] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 329 § 90. The noun of agency ends in -aiya, e. .g. dekhaiya (one who sees) ; hasaiya (one who laughs); kt pani bharaiya milai tau layaiwo—bring a drawer of water if @ tea find one, kdt sahar jawaiya hai—is there any one who is going to the city? § 91. The Conjunctive Participle i is formed by aalditig i to a root and using the form with ka or! kat. e.g. dékhi ka—having seen, hasi kai—having laughed, wit sab din hasi kai bat kahat' hai—he always smiles before speaking (lit. having smiled, he speaks). Note.—The simple Conj. Part. in t (without ka or kat) is used ae in periphrastic formation . The imperfect pti adjective pear ser eink first form of the participle and does not chan for number, person or case, e.g. ee ek ural’ kauwa dithenat saw a crow flying, ham @k urat' ciraiya dekhen : ural’ kabutaran par goli na ses ear not shoot at flying pigeons. When used with a fem. obl. noun, however, attributively it has the—aft (third form of the participle form, e e.g. uralt ciraiya (or cirai- yan) par golt na calao—do t shoot bullets at the bird which is ee (or the birds ani’ are flying). ote.—This part. adj. is used predicatively when emphasis is laid on the action denoted by it (as distinguished from the substantive which it qualifies), e.g. ham ek kauwa ural’ déekhen. Here 8 emphasis is on urat’ and not on kauwa. § 9 Below is given a complete scheme of the conjuga- tion of ‘dekbab. only the Ist pers. sg. of tenses being shown. Indic. Conj. Imperative Simple : Present dékhai dékhau déekhau Past déikhet dekhatia Future dekhihaa Periphrastic (a) with the Imperf. Part. Pres. Imperf. dékhat' hati dekhat' hou Past Imperf. dékhat' rahat dékhat' hotia Fut. Imperf. — d&khat' hoihat (6) with the Perf. Part. Pres. Perf. dékhé hat dékhé hou . Past Perf. dékhé rahai dekhé hou Fut. Perf. dikhé hoihat . dekhab; Obl. Inf. d@khai; Noun of Ageney— dekhaiy oes Part. dzkhi ke; Imperf. Part. adj. dekhat’, ekhatt eo a \ Vide Chap. I § 8 2 Vide below §§ 116-117. 330 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S , XVIII, Transitive and Intransitive. § 94. Verbs are either trans. or intrans. Some trans. V verbs can, however, be also intrans., e.g. khab—to eat, gawab —to sing Similarly some intrans. verbs can be also trans., €.g. haisab—to laugh at § 95. The intrans. verb, e.g. marab (to die) differs from the trans., e.g dékhab in the Past Indic. and Perf. Part. as shown below :— Past Indicative. sg. masc. sg. fem. pl. masc. pl. fem. maret marit maren mara mart mareu mariu mara mart maré mart Note.—mara, mart sometimes are employed in the Ist sg. also. Perfect Participle. The perfect pane has four forms: (a) in -@ (e.g. mara) used as masc. sg ; (4) in -@ (e.g. maré) used as mase. pl. ; (¢) in + (e.g. mari) used as fem. sg. and pl. and (d) in-en (e.g. maren) a common nade alternative form of Ist pl. General Rules of Conjugation. § Subject to the general rules given below.all tran- sitive roots are conjugated like dékhab and intransitive like mara § 97. All roots ending inr,/ or n a elide initial -@ or -a of terminations e.g man- + ati = nat or mant', § 98 Intrans. roots which contain a long syllable (eg. lag-, baith-. sarma-) optionally elide the terminations -@ and -é and substitute * for i (in fem. sg) of the Perf. Part. and Past Indic., e g. laga: lag, ba. thé: haith. lagi : lag’, baitha: ba ith’. lote. —roots in -4 before accepting the above change insert n- in between the root and the termination, e.g. sarma@nd : sarman, sarmani : sarman . Trans. roots in -a-, -@- and -é- add -w- before @ termination with initial a- or @- (e.g. kurawat' kurawa; baja- wat’, najawa ; khéwal’ khéwa) and snbstitute u- for initial a- (e.g kurauil, sp tess _kheuti) ; Pres Indic. 2nd pl. ends in © side -au, eg § 100. rian roots in -a- ond -a- add -w- before @ termination with initial -@ (eg hhawa, gawa, sarmawa) and combine final @ 0: tle root with initial -a- or -a- of termina: tions (eg sama‘, sarmai) he however, add -w- before -aiya (eg sary awiiya) Note. — All intrans. roo's in 7 except monosvllabic ones (e.g. na—to pour, 4 to cone) 1 nally insert -n- between the 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 331 root and a termination of the Past Indic. and Perf. Part, e.g. sarmana: sarmawa, dekhani: dekhai, lonaneu: londeu, but nNawa, Nat, naeu. . All roots in -i combine their -i with i- or 9- of dissyllabic terminations into, €.g. jt + att = pili, jt + that = jihad; but ji + ib = jiid, ji + iti = jiit’, § 102. All roots in -w combine their final -u with initial a- or u- of terminations into @, e.g. chu + alt = chilli, chu + u = chu. § 103. All roots in -d substitute u- for a- of terminations, €.g.76 + att = rout. Irregular Verbs. § 104. kar- (karab—to do) has an alternative root kih- for ! es Indic. Perf. and Passive Participles (e.g. kihé) ; conj. part. 8 kai. i a- (awab—to come) takes -w- before a termination with di lyahat léba, léib lyahai lyahau let lyahat Similarly de—-: conj. part. lai and dai respectively. For the rest all roots are regularly conjugated. PASSIVE VOICE. § 105. The active voice is more generally used than the passive. If the latter is used it mostly lays emphasis either on the object of the active construction (e.g. sab dakiu maddaré jaihat-—now all the robbers will be killed) or its attri- bute (e.g. ya dhol phiti janat' hai——this drum appears to be broken) or on the action itself (e.g. mai sé cillawa nai jal’ hai —— I cannot cry out), It almost always ignores the agent which if expressed is given only a secondary importance in a en i lly expressed by combining 106. The passive is genera Pp 7 the oro et 2 with the forms of jab—to go. There are three forms of this participle: (a) in-@(masc. sg.); (6) in- é 332 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [(N.S., XVIII, (masc. pl.) ; (c) in -2 (fem. sg. and pl.). Fer Reneninle the forms of Passive Present Indicative of dé@kha sg. masc. sg. fem. pl. masc. pl. fem. dekha jaa dekht jau déekhé jai dekhi jat dékha jar dekha jar déekhé jau dékht jau dékha jai dekhi jar dekhé jai dekht jar ] The impersonal passive of intrans. verbs is formed by combining form (a) in -@ of the pass. part with the forms f jab, e.g mai sé khawa nai jar hai—lI ene eat, tum sé tharh tharh dékha jat' hai hit s° jawa nai jat' standing from there but you cannot go from N re. ote.—This construction expresses ability or inability of the agent to do an ac § 1 A kind of intrans. passive is formed sometimes by adding -a@ to certain trans. roots and then conjugating them like intrans. roots, e.g. yi admi andha dekhat' hai—this man seems to be blind, yu tamasa pache s° —— tana dekhat‘ hai—this show can — well be seen from be Note 1.—This construction is cued only with a definite number of verbs—those which denote perception or knowledge, e.2. igcontin be seen or to appear, suna@b—to be heard, janab —to seem. No ote. 2—The same construction applies in the case of denominative verbs, e.g. lonab—to taste saltish, mithab—to taste sweet, khatab—to appear to be sour, hariyab—to become green. Note 3.—Termination -@ is common both to this construe- tion and to the causative; but the former is conjugated as an intrans. root, the latter as a trans. one. 109. A common periphrastic passive is formed by using the forms of a@wab—to come, after the loc. of the inf. and the gen. of the agent if eguacees. e.g. 10 ya bat tumharé sunai ma awai—if this is heard by § 110. Another passive sometimes used is formed by combining the simpl- conj. part. with parab—to fall, e.g. ats sunipart’ hai ki pancha bars badi larai phiri sé hor—it is heard (i.e. men say) that war will again break out after five or six years. 111. The passive participial adjective takes the ordinary terminations of the adjectives, e.g. dékh—masc. dir., dekhé— masc. obl., dékhi—fem. dir., dékhi—fem. obl. For instance yt cbieagen hamiir dekh hai—this show is one that I have al- ready se Causative. § 112. A causative is generally formed by adding -@ to a simple root and then conjugating it like the regular trans- root in -@-, e.g. hisab: hisawab, khab : khawawab. 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. - 333 113. There are some verbs, abhor which form their causative by modifying the vowel of the root :— (1) bv ity Meron it, e.g. pasar-: pasar-, ukhar-: ukhar-, nikar-: nikar-, khic : khie-. Similarly badh.. oe mar-, kat- ; (2) by cheapie i and u into 2 and o respectively, e.g. ruk-: rok-, khul-: khol-, ghur-: ghor-, jur-: jor (3) some verbs modify a consonant as — as the vowel, e.g. phat-: phar-, chit-: chor, jut: jor-, phiit-: phor-, tut-: tor- ohal: ghor-, bik-: béc-, rah-: rakh-. ote.—All these (except nikar- : nikar- > mar-, ruk- : rok-, rah-: rakh-) are sets of arsenate pots ‘rather than simple- causative, e.g. katab—to a cut, katab—to cut, birwa kati gawa hai—the tree has been A double causative is ue by adding -wa to the simple causative and then conjugere it like ordinary trans. roots in -a-, e.g. haisdwab: haisawawab. Roots in -a@-, é- and -0- (which add -wa to form the ante causative) do not take any termination to form the double causative. Their simple and double causatives coincide, e.g. khawa-, sarmawa-, léwa-, rowa-. 115 ere a double causative exists the simple one is used generally when the remote agent actively helps the immediate agent to do the action, e.g. gopal rammu pant piyais'—Gopal caused Rammi to drink water (i.e. Gopal ac- tively helped Rammi—perhaps by giving him water) ; and the double if the remote agent does not actively help but only directs the action to be done, e.g. gopal kallu s° rammu ka pani piyawais'—Gopal directed Kalla to cause Rammi to drink water. In other words, while there are only two agents with a simple causative, there are at least three for a double one. Note 1.—The difference between the two causatives is not generally eg ta however, and either can be used. ot 2.—Verbs which form the causative by rap the vowel have in effect four forms, e.g., kat-: kat-: kata katawa-. Compound Verbs. os Compound verbs are more commonly used than simple verbs and they express various shades of meaning. There are three different forms of the principal verb with which other verbs are So ee (a) the ner conj. pa in -1, €.g. girt para. (6) the obl. inf. in ae ne girai déu. (c) the ie pass. part. in -4, e.g, gira karau. § 117. Form (a) is combined with (1) jab, cukab, léb and darab to express definite stg at burnt down, jab mai khai cukai—when I finish dining, es mai kasi ai lea tab tum hua s° jayeu—you can leave when | 334 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, have actually reached Kasi, wu cari gilas pani pt daris'—he drank up four whole glasses of water. Of these cukab expresses an additional sense of thorough- ness and completion, and darab that of unexpected completion of a difficult task; (2) parab, uthab, baithab to express suddenness or sur- prise, e.g. wii pagal agi ma kidi para—that mad man jumped into the fire, tum etté jor s* boleu ki larika jagi utha—you spoke so loudly that the child woke up, @ju mai pacai bajé uthi baithei—I got up at five this morning ; (3) sakab and pawab to express ability to do an act, e.g. mai din bhare ma pacts mail jai sakat' hai—I can walk twenty-five miles a day, 76 mat tum ka mari pautii—if I could beat you ; 44) khab and marab to express offence or infliction of an undesirable thing, e.g. wi mai ka dat s* kati khais‘—he bit me with his teeth, ham das pannak’ citthi likhi maren—I wrote out a ietter of ten pages; (5) calab to express the beginning of an action, e.g. wut ham ka dekhatai m@ri calé—no sooner did he see me than he began to beat ; _ . (6) déb to express intensity of an action, e.g. mori bah chart déu—leave my arm. 1 Form (6) is combined with (1) d@b to express permission, e.g. mai ka roti khai déu —let me eat my food; (2) lagab to express inception of an action, e.g. wi ab hamaré hid awai lag hai—he has begun coming to my house c _ (3) cahab to express near completion, e.g. bara bajar cahat' hai—it is about twelve. § 119. Form (c) is combined with karab to denote fre- quentative action, e.g. wui hii Gwa kart' hai—he frequently comes here. § 120. A compound verb differs from the simple inas- much as it expresses a more definite and sometimes a little modified action. Of the auxiliary verbs noted above only cukab—to finish, sakab—to be able to, lagab—to begin and continue, and cahab—to wish, retain their original meaning, others have entirely lost it in helping out the meaning of the principal verb. § 121. The auxiliaries are used with different verbs but being idiomatically used, they cannot be combined with any and every yerb. Their use is limited. 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 335 CHAPTER VII. IN DECLINABLES. Adverbs. expressions (e.g. taht kai—then § 123. Adverbs of Time ased on nouns, e.g. on sail‘ (moment)—? sail’ (just now), ta sit (then), 77 sail (when—relative), kt sait*' (when?), wut sait' (then); jaldt, phurti or catkat (soon); dér s* (late), eltt dér ma (meanwhile), sab din (always) ; (6) based on adjectives, e.g. pahile (first), ag@ (form- erly), paché (after, afterwards) ; (c) other adverbs—aju fee day), kalhi, kallhi (yesterday or to-morrow), parai (day before yesterday or after to- morrow), narad (two days before yesterday or after to-morrow), sada@ (always); ab (now), tab (then), jab (when—relative), kab (when?) ; abhait (even now), tabhat (even then), kabhau (ever), abhayen (just now), oe (just then), jabhayen (just when), tahi kai (then), abhai—yet, now ; abt or abki, this time; jalz —until, hae then, tau—then ; badi or badi ko—after. § 124. Adverbs of Place (a) based on nouns—war (side) combined with the ‘sda nominal adjeotives jt, tt, ete., denotes direction, e.g. t wa (on this side), t%@ war, wui war, ji war, ki war ; bie ma—(in the middle) ; , (6) based on pronouns—hia@ (here), hua (there), jaha. . taha (where. - there), kaha (where ?) ; aist (on this grt waist (on that res jaist..taist (on the side on which), kasst (on which side (c) o ther adverbs—bhitar (within), baher or bahiré (out: side), uppar (above), khalé or nicé (below), agé (before), paché (behind), n@ré (near), dari (at a distance, far), pallé (beyond). § 125. Adverbs of Number. The sense of once, twice, etc., is expressed with the help of some such noun as dai ', e.g. bahut dai or baudha (often) ; kabhau kabhaii (Sometimes—every | rile and then); dosarai ka —second time, tisarai ka—third ti 1 Vide Chap. IV § 44. 336 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVITI, § 126. Adverbs of Manner (a) based on nouns—by combining tana@ (kind) with some adjective, e.g. 7 tana (in this way), accht tana (well), burt tana (badly); halt (rapidly), dhiré (slowly) ; b d on pronouns—aisé (in this manner), waisé (in that manner), jais@.. taisé (in the manner in which) katsé (how 2). § 127. Adverbs of Quantity, e.g. aur (more), bahut or jada (very, much). kam or tanik (a little), kuch” kuch” (somewhat), adha (half); jetta, etta, ete. $ 128. Adverb of Reason kahé—why. § 129. Adverbs of Affirmation or Denial ha (yes), nai or nahi (no, not), na (no, not), birkulli (not at all). § 130. Compound Adverbs, e.g. jaha taha (here and there), jahd jaha (wherever), jab jab . tab tab (whenever..then) ; cf. gaw gaw—in every village; kaiseu (somehow) ; kaisiu (on some side), kahu (anywhere, somewhere) ; with conjunction cahai, e.g. cahai jaha (where- ever), cahar jab (whenever), cahai jaise (howsoever), cahai jaist (on whichever side). 131. Comparison is expressed in the same manner as that of adjectives ! e.g. mai ya kam tum sé jaldi kai sakat' hat -—I can do this thing earlier than you can. § 132. Adverbs of time and place can generally be employed with sé (s°) to denote the sense of ‘from’ or ‘ with’ or with ka (ka) to express the meaning of ‘ of,’ e.g. ab sé ais kam na kiheu—do not do such a thing from now ; hia s¢ calé jau— 0 away from this place ; kahi ka Gm layeu—the mango of 2 bart garut hai—this bucket is very heavy; jais' acchi wa meharua hai tais' 7 sahar ma koi nai—no lady is as good in this town as she is; wui adh@ madé hai adhe nik hai—he is half ill and half well. Emphatic Forms. 1 Vide Chap. TIT § 40, 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 337 Postpositions, § 134. A postposition is generally used to denote a case- relation other than the nominative. It is used with the obl. case if one exists, otherwise with the direct, e.g. raja ka, rajan s°, sab ma, acche 8°, khai ma. § 135. Accusative-dative—ka or! ka, e.g. rami gopal ka maris'—Ramii beat Gopal, hari ica kuch” hai ko déu—give Hari something to eat. 136. Instrumental-ablative—s¢ or! sé, e.g. wi tum ka kt sé pitis'—with what did he beat you ?, badar s¢ bidi bhui par girtt hat—showers fall from the clouds on the earth. 137. Locative—ma or! ma, mahiya: pa, par, e.g. khat ma gai cart’ hai—a cow is grazing in the field, khirkiya par (or khirkiya pa) kawwa baith hai—a crow is sitting on the window. —mase. obl., k' or! ki, kéri—fem. dir. and obl. Note.—The genitive postpositions agree in gender and case with the noun or pronoun which follows them, e.g. hari ka arikawa mari gawa—Hari’s son died, hari k* larika mari ge, hari kt lairia mari qai. § 139. Dative—khatir, badi ; either of these may be used after the genitive of a noun or pronoun, e.g. hari k' khatir ham dudh" liye jait' hai—l take milk with me for Hari, tumhari khatir dadh* liye jait' hai. § 140. Mlative—maré (on account of, owing to) follows @ noun or pronoun in the genitive, e.g. ram k' maré sita ban gai—Sita went to the jungle on account of Ram, tum hamaré mare maru khayeu—you were beaten on my account. : Note.—There is a tendency, however, to use the dative and illative postpositions with a noun or pronoun without the genitive postposition. This, however, does not apply to those pronouns which have special genitive forms—in their case the words khatir, badi and maré follow the genitive form always. § 138. Genitive—ka or! ka, kér—masc. dir., k¢ or | ké, kéré bl CoNJUNCTIONS. i diinau jané § 141. Cumulative—au (and), e.g. tum au ham jane bajarai caliba—you and I both will go to the market, “ dyé au chin bhari baithi ka calé gaye—he came here, sat fo while and went away. ies § 142. Alternative—cahai .. . cahai (either... or), e.g. cahai hit baithau cahai hua—sit either here or there - — : ~ (neither... nor), e.g. na ham hid baithib na a Agen f neither here nor there; nai tau (otherwise, or) a “4 en the déu nai tau ham marib—give me money or I sha set ; ki (or), e.g. sswau ki jagau—do you sleep or are you a | ! For the use of the short or long form see Chap. 1§8. 338 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIU, § 143. ha Ae (but), e.g. wut hat taw amir lékin dét' koi ka ék paiu nat—he is rich but does not give even a pie to any body ae Feith he is rich he does not, ete. 144. Subordinative—ki (that), e.g. ham ka wit batars* ki tumharé cori hoi gai—he told me that a theft had occurred at yours ; wii kahis' ki ham jaldt lautth—he said that he would return scon; #7 ma (so that, in order that), e.g. wa dawai khai lihis' 71 ma catkai nik hor jai—he took medicine in order that he might recover secon ; 76 (if, whether t), €.g. 46 mai sdwau tau mareu—beat me if J sleep; ma@nau or janau (as if), e.g. tum rati ka ais halla macayeu janau daka para hodi—you raised such an alarm at night as if a dacoity had taken place. Note.—All reported speech is direct and is introduced by ki, e.g. gopal hari s° batais' ki sankata tumhar tabka corai lihis'— Gopal told Hari that Sankata had stolen his mangoes. The beginning of the oblique construction may, however, be seen in such sentences as gopal mahi sé kahis' ki tum hamar iabka corayeu—(Hari meets Sankata and says) Gopal told me that you stole my mangoes. APPENDIX (a). GULGULAWALI KaTHA. ék raja rahai au mahtari rahai au dulhin rahai. mahtari roju chappan parkal k° bhojan banawai au apna khai au apne larika ko khawawai. dulhin khatir ék befhari k' roti sekai adhi roti au lonu sabéré déiau adhisafi jha koa wuimare gussa ke roti deharia mo dari déi au lonu gagari mo nai awai. aisai karti kart! bara barsai gudari gai. tabék din barha gulgula kihin’. gulgula jhapi ke dhari dihin' au apna disai cali gai. jat! beria bahu s¢ kahi gai ki: ‘‘dulhin' aisi dékhé raheu.” bahia fale wui lautai talé tini gulgula nikari libis', khais‘ nai dhari ai. talé biirha ai gai kulla ulla kai kai apan arhiya dékhin' jaitau kahin': “dulhin ka 1 ma k® gulgula tum lihé hau.” dulbin boli: “ham bua ham nal lihen hai ka malum bilaiya lai gai hoi gai rahai wui war.’ tau bilaiya kahis': ‘‘rahu tui tui ka mai tini pani | s° na dhdi dét tau mai kahe ki. tui Jihé au mai ka cori fe tahi kai jab sijh bhai tab rani apan' khatiya bichain' dia bari ke dharini. jab raja k° kacehari s¢ lautai mo dér ékhin’ tau kahin': “lao talé soi léi.’’ ya kahi kai sOwai * iagl. bilaiya ka kihisi, koi ki pagia uthai lai au unki khatiya p? dhari dihis! koi ki tarwari lai kaihuai dhar dihis' au koi k* juta uthai lai so palka ke nicé dharis' ai. atta saman dhari kai bilaiya apna cali gai raja jab kacehari s° ayé dékhai ka koi ke juta dharé koi k’ tarwari koi ki pagia. raja man ma afijadé ki koi mardu rani tir awa hai tau dicin' tarwari ki tka maddariba. tau diy® 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 339 bola: ‘‘raja samujhi ko mareu.” “raja tini dai tarwari uthain' au diya tiniu dai tirbacak dihisi. tau raja tarwari dhar' dihin' au Jota lai kai pakhané calé gayé. etti der mo riini jagi pari tau diya barhai dihin'. dia ke darwajje po kua rahai raja hudi kulla kart! rahat jab diya apané ghar pahtica tau mahtari kahis' ki: “ bhaiya aju en jab bhoru bhawa tau mahtari phiri chappan parkal ke raja kahin': “bua parsau.”” wui ék tharia parsin'. raja kahin': ‘ dosaria raja kahini: “rani khau 4i.’’ rani kahin': “ sunau raja bara barsai biti gai tab na kabhai picheu aju ka hai” ya kahi kai deharia ki roti agé kurai dihin' au gagari ke lénu agan me nai dihin'. birha mari ko khisiyai gai au wahé tir mari kai rahi gai. raja rani bahut din raji kihin'. jaisé unké din bahuré taisé sab ké bahurai. Translation. A story about gulgulas.' poured the salt into a jar. In this way twelve years passed. One day the old lady prepared gulgulas. She cnbtver Pie ile go- iene mt nmaineilnitante ! gulgulé is the name of a special Indian preparation made of flour and sugar, it is also called pua@ at some places. : ‘ 2 To go out or to go to the quarters (literary trans.) is a euphemism for attending to nature’s ca § To Wane the mouth, i.e. to wash the mouth, hands and feet. 4 arhiya is a big wooden vessel to put eatables in. 340 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, she said : ‘‘ Daughter-in-law, is it vou who have taken the gul- gulas from this?’ The daughter-in-law replied: ‘ 1, mother I have not taken any. Who knows but that the cat may have takenthem, she has been that way.’ The cat, then, ee ‘‘ All right, you wretch, I am not a cat if Ido not wash y out altogether. ! You took them and attributed the theft ri ‘Thereafter when it became dark *, the queen arranged her bedding and lighted the lamp. hen she saw that there was some delay in the king’s return home from the court she said to herself: ‘‘ Let me sleep for a while.”” Having said so she went to sleep. And what did the catdo? She brought some- body’s turban and placed it on her bedstead and took some- body’s sword and placed it there. She also brought somebody’s shoes and put them under the bedstead. She put these things there and went away. When the king returned from the court he saw that there were somebody’s shoes and somebody’s sword and_ turban. From it he concluded that some man had come to the queen. On this he drew os sword in order to kill her. The lamp spoke out: ‘“O king, learn the truth before you kill her.” The king thrice drew “the sword out and the lamp forbade * him all the three times. He then put down the sword, took the loia* and went away to attend to nature’s call. Meanwhile the queen woke up and put out® the lamp. There was a well before the door (of the house) of the lamp. The king was rinsing his mouth there. When the lamp reached home, his mother said: ‘‘ My son, you are very late to-day, I have all along been sitting with the food ready.” The lamp replied : ‘‘ Dear mother, do not ask anything, great calamity has befallen the queen.’ The king stood there and listened. The mother asked: ‘‘ What is the matter, dear son?” The lamp related everything that had happened. The king heard down came home and having covered himself up, lay own When it became morning, the mother again prepared food of fifty-six- pone and asked her son to eat it. The king asked her to serve She served one dish, He asked her to serve another. She served another. He asked her to serve athird. The old lady said to him: ‘Come, let us take our meal: the daughter-in-law may eat food afterwards.” But the king said. “No, serve a third dish also.’? When the third ——— | tint pani se dhoi dyGhai—lit. shall wash you away with three ——— i.e. mire you | complete tely. he 3 tirbacak dihiti Pg three times, i.e. in a decisive manner. M 16t@ is a small r bronze vessel to contain water & barhai askin (it. insctbend or developed) is a euphemism for extinguished 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 341 dish was also served, he asked the queen to come and eat. The queen replied, ‘‘ Hear, O king, twelve years have passed and never did you ask me (to eat). What is the matter to- day ?” Having spoken so, she brought out the bread from the earthen pot and put it all before him and poured out the salt from the jar in the courtyard. The old lady got very much ashamed and died on the very spot. The king and the queen reigned for many a day. May! everybody's good days return as did theirs. BaHIRAM COTTA K' KATHA. ék raja ke cari larika rahai. 6k din raja cariu ko holai ke ék 6k s® puchini ki: “ bhaiya tum ki ki bhagi s* jiat' hau.” tini larika jo baré rahai so kahini ki: “ bappa ham tumhari hagi s° jiiti hai.” jab choté larika s° puchin': ‘‘ bhaiya Bahiram tum ki ki bhagi s° jiat' hau,” tau wi bola: ‘ bappa sab koi apani apani bhagi s° jiati hai.” raja ya bat suni kai nakhus bhayé, kuchu bolé nai. ae dosaré din jab cariu bhai sikar s° lauté tau sipahi kahis' ki: ‘‘ raja kahin' hai ki jaun hamari bhagi s° nai jiat' hai taun mahal mo na ghusai au jo asil hoi tau hamari raji k* bahiri anna jal karai.”” Bahiram huai apané bhain ko salam kai kai cal diha, : calti calti wi apané bap ki raji ke baher pahtica. dekhai ka 6k naddi k° kinaré cari pac sipabi baccit kai rahé hai catta nau ko rip dhari kai gawa au salam kai kai kahis' ki: ‘* bhaiya hajamati banawai léu.”” wahii kahin': *‘calau mauke po nau- wau ai gawa.”’ jab sab jané hajamat! banawai ke nahai khatir pani mo ghusé tau Bahiram sab ké kapara lai kai cal diha. sipahi jab pani s° bahiri ayé tau dékhai ka ki nauwa kapara lai kai bhaggawa. man ma kahin‘iki: “ bhat din ka nangé jai- hau tau sab jané hasihai rati ke ghar caleu. ee i war Bahiram sipahin k* ghar pahtica au _khabari kihis' ki: ‘‘ wui sab jané larai mo mare gayé ham unké kapara layen hai taun léu.” ya suni kai meharua rowai dhowai lagi. unka ke hua tiki ga. rati ke jab sipahi apané ghar pahtce tau meharua unka bhit jani ke marai lagi jabs man ma pachitani au marab band kihin'. & Bahira sabéré sipahi raja khiya gayé au kahin' ki 3 iy : pe prein cotta awa hai. wuika pakarau nai tau sab ka wu hairan te raja apané dardga ke hukum dihin' ki: “ rata bhare me “ a 46 tau inam mili.” dardga rati bhari dhfrhat' raha. ¢k tir 1 This is the prayer with which every story ends. It — a story may relate unhappy events but always has a happy ene. 342 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, cotta dékhé hai.” Bahiram bola : ‘‘ hi saheb abhai yabé tir rahai.” wajir aisi waist dhtirh' ko phiri ayé au kahin': “ kaha mila nai.’ Bahiram bola: “40 tum hamar kapara pahini ko cakiya pisau mai pakaré lawat' hat.” wajir ka burhiya k® kapara pahinai ke Bahirim un ké pahini lihis' au maust khiya ai raha. jab burhiya jagi tab wajir ke sab nal" malum bhawa. mari ko khisiyai gayé au raja s° jo bhawa rahai sab batain' jai. ab raja ki beti kahis': “ham cotta pakariba.” jab rati bhai tab apani khirki mahiya baithi gai au aisi waist dékhai ag’. Bahiram ka kihis'rahai ki dinai mo koi ghasiyarwa ke dahin hath kati lawa rahai. rati ko raja ki béti ki khirkiya k¢ taré tahalai lag. béti piichini: “‘kaun hai.” wa bola: “ Bahi- — ram,’” raja k' béti socis' ki: “jo halla macaib tau ya bhagi jai a0 i ka koi tana s° phasi.”” boli: “ad ham tumharé uppar bahut khus han jaurt latkaiti hai uppar carhi 406 ham tum biyahu kai léi.’’ “Bahiram accha kahi kai carhai lag jab khirki tir pahtica tau raja ki béeti wai ka ghayel karai khatir tarwari calais' Bahiraém cotta ghasiyarwa wala hath phéki ke nicé utari awa au mausi khiya pari kai sdi raha. : bhor bhawa tau raja ki béeti kahisi ; «‘ bappa ham cotta pakari lihen.” raja bole: «dekhao:” wa boli: “ ya dékhau hath kati lihen hai basi ji ka hath kata hoi wahai Bahiram cotta.’’ raja sahar bhare ma sipahi dauraini au kahi dihin‘ki: “ji ka hath kata pao pakari 146.” sipahi wahé ghasiyarwa ke pakari layé. wii dukhiya rowai lag au sab hal" batais'. _ raja sahar bhare me dhirhora pitawai dihin‘ ki Bahiram ab ai jai ham wui ké sangh bitiva ka biyahu kai déib au adhi raji dai déib. Bahiram ghodra po carhi kai gawa au salam kihis'. raja wui ké sangh apani latiria bihai dihintau adbi raji dai dihini. ee jab Babiram cala awa tau wui ké bap ke bara pachitawa lag k' : * hai ham apané larika ko nikari dihen.” pata laga- wat' lagawati hid awa. kahisi: « bhaiya tumahé saput hau ham tumahe ka raji déba._ sficu kahé rahau ki sab koi apaul apaul bhagi s° jiati hai.” ya kahikai chati s° lagai libis'- Jais unké din bahuré tais sab ké bahurat. 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi, 343 Translation. Story of Bahiram the thief. certain king had foursons. One day he called all the four and asked them one by one: ‘Son, to whose fortune is it due that you live your life?”’ All the three elder sons said: “Father, it is due to your fortune that we live.” When he asked the youngest: ‘‘ Dear Bahiram, to whose fortune is it due that you live ?,” he replied, “ Father, every one lives b means of his own fortune.” The king was greatly displeased at this answer (but) he said nothin The next day when the four brothers returned from the hunt the sentinel said: ‘‘The king has ordered that he who does not live owing to the king’s fortune, should not enter the palace and if he is true to his blood he should neither eat nor drink throughout his kingdom.’ Bahiram then and there said salam to his brothers and started from there. After going for some time he arrived beyond the kingdom of his father. What does he see? He sees four or five soldiers talking to one another on the bank of a river. At once he disguised himself as a barber, went there and gave them aga ing. He said: ‘‘ Brothers, get yourselves shaved.’ also said : ‘‘ Oh, the barber also has arrived at the right time.” When all of them, after getting themselves shaved, entered the water to take their bath, Bahiram took all their clothes and went away. When the soldiers came out of the river they saw that the barber had run away with their clothes. Then they said to themselves: ‘‘ If we go eanet op day time all will laugh at us: so let us go home at n On this side Bahiram reached the home of the soldiers and sent the news in, that they had been killed in war and that he bad brought back their clothes. When the women heard this, they began to lament. Bahiram consoled them and said: * Sisters, care will come to you naked at night as ghosts, do not get afra From a place Bahiram went to a gardener’s wife and calling her his aunt (lit. mother’s roti stayed there. At has just gone this way.” The police officer went mace na thither and coming back said: ‘I have not found h 344 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Bahiram replied: ‘‘ Sir, give me your horse: I bring him immediately.’’ Mounting on the horse he came to his aunt’s and went to sleep. The police officer said to the king: “ He has deceived me, also. I shall not be able to find him.” e king’s minister said, “‘My lord, I shall arrest him this night.’’ At night he began to go the rounds in the city. Bahiram also arrived there. An old woman was grinding corn: he said: ‘ Mother, you must have become tired, go and sleep. Come, let me put on your clothes and grind.” That was the old lady’s wish. Bahiram began to grind the corn. Aftera little while the minister came and asked : ‘‘O old woman, have you seen Bahiram, the thief, anywhere?” Bahiram said: “* Yes, sir, he was here just now.”’ The minister came back after searching here and there and said that he had not found him. Bahiram said: ‘‘ Come, put on my clothes and grind the corn. I will just bring him to you.”” He made the minister put on the old woman’s clothes and himself put on the minister’s and came away to his aunt’s. When the old woman got up, the minister came to know everything. He was very much ashamed and went to the king and told him everything. Now the king’s daughter said: ‘‘I shall catch the thief.” When night came, she sat at her window and began to look this way and that. And what did Bahiram do? During the day, he eut off a grass-cutter’s right hand. At night he began to walk below the window of the king’s daughter. The princess asked: “ Who is it?’’ He replied: ‘‘ Bahiram.” The king’s daughter thought: ‘If I raise an alarm, he will run away. Therefore, let me entice him somehow or other.’ She said: ‘““come, I am very much pleased with you. I throw the rope; you come up; we shall marry.”’ Bahiram said. ‘‘ Very well”’ once threw in the grass-cutter’s hand, came down and went to his aunt’s. There he went to sleep. When the morning came, the princess said to her father: ‘‘ Father, I have caught the thief.” The king said: ‘‘ Show him to me.” She said: ‘just look here 1 have cut off his hand. He is surely Bahiram the thief whose hand this is. The king sent his sepoys throughout the city and asked them to bring every man whose hand was cut off. The sepoys brought the grass-cutter. The poor man began to weep and related everything. , e king proclaimed throughout the city by a beat of drum that Bahiram should present himself before the king now who would give his daughter to him in marriage and give him half his kingdom. Bahiram, mounted on a horse, went to the king and greeted him with salams. The king gave him os pata ce in marriage and bestowed on him half his king- om also. 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 345 When —— went away, his father regretted his action very much. He said: ‘* Oh, I have turned out my own son.’ Searching here ana there, he arrived here and said: ‘‘ My son you are really a noble so shall give you my kingdom You spoke the truth whee you said that every man lives by his own fortune.” Having said so he embraced him. May everybody’s good days sic as did theirs. APPENDIX (6). CHANpD,! 1. “ séwau ki jagau mori Adbi eae bo sspya ? jagat keri rani, Akabar tharhé duar, bali jat.® 2. “ki tum Akabar archan * —e aré parchan ayeu ki tum darsan® ayeu”’; bali ja 3. “na ham mata mori parchan a ayen aré parchan ayen na ham darsan ayen, bali jat 4, “ham tau mata mori larne ko ae aré larne ka ayen, nikari na larau maidan, bali jat a. cena tau Akabar phaujai bahut hai are —- bahut hai hamaré tau negula® akel,’” bali 6. ‘‘tumharé tau Akabar dhal tarawariya aré tobai oat khiya hamaré philan kéri mal,” bali jat. - 7. “jai kaheu wui Durga’? bahinin agé, Angar’ mata age wui satau’ bahinin agé tabuan agi uthawai,” bali jat. 8. “‘jarai lagai tabua katan lagai dori, katan lagai dori tab ham Adhi Bhawani,” bali jati. jarai lagé tabua katan lagi dori, katan lagi dori, ‘‘ ab ham Sear) Biexiale bali jat, ‘‘ab ham jagat haw ’ bali jat 10. Akabar bédhi patiya * larkawai patiya larkawai bibi * > dana darawai, bali jati © chand is the are used for the songs in praise of gods and _necond ses, chiety goddes 2 Adhi Bha wdni—nanne f one of the seven oe bea aon of all ra | bow: this is ct burden of the signifies the apecial rite of the image of a god or god- used only of gods and saints 3 bali jaa— Ta 4+ parchan 2 Naninicsth pra aksalana; t dest vabbecehialy Ganges wanes -aea? 4 “it an < Skt. da —- Mc seeing, and e das to whom res 6 negula—the nam ae wee ee the single boy-defender of the god- desses, who remains always with t 1 The 40d aa are eeven i inn number and all of them are sisters born of the same parents; Durga , Angarmata, Bhawani are ota - Foon oe is the goddess of smalk-pox, Apngarmata burns everything an hawani is die. healin: tiya is the mp ds ages is the — used to Ss ode a sin there are four such in every co 9 bibi—wife, here the Quee co 346 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal [N.S., XVIII, Il. “ham tau jani_mata kakar pathar aré kikar pathar, nikari hai Adhi Bhawani bali jat, nikari hai jagat bakhani, bali jat.”’ 12. “abti bér tum paljhau Bhawani aré paljhau Maharani ab nahi parbat aib, bali jat, ab nahi parbat aib, bali at.” “ sowau ki jagau mori Adhi Bhawani, jagat kéri rani, Akabar tharhé duar ho, bali jaw.” Translation. A song in praise of Bhawani. Note 1.—Bhawani is one of the seven powerful goddesses. She is sometimes also identified with Bhawani, Siva’s wife. Her abode is on the hills. The story goes that once Akbar thought of throwing her image (usually of stone) out and so he went to the temple of the goddess. The present song is the dialogue between the two. N. 3.—The language of songs is often somewhat bor- rowed and archaic. For instance in verse 8 above we have the obl. inf. in -an (katan) side by side with -ai form (jarai), |. “ Are you sleeping or waking, my Adhi Bhawani, queen of the world, Akbar stands before your door, I bow to you.” 2. “Akbar, have you come here for the sake of parchan or for darsan ?,” I bow t you. 3. ‘My mother, I have come here neither to do par- chan, yes to do parchan nor to have your darsan, I bow to you.” é 4. “My mother, I have come here to have a fight with you, ves to have a fight, why not come out and fight, I bow you.”’ _5. “ You Akbar, you have many armies, yes many armies, while I have the solitary Negula,” I bow to you. ; 6. “ You Akbar, you have shields and swords, yes rifles and guns, I have only the garland of flowers,” I bow to you. 7. “Go! before sister Durga, before Angarmata, yes before all the seven sisters and ask them to set fire to the tents,” I bow to you. . 8. “ When the tents begin to be burnt, when the strings begin to be cut down, yes to be cut down, then shall I me Adhi Bhawani,” I bow to you. See 1 Bhawani now sends her messengers to her sisters and it is not long before they arrive to help her. 1922.] A Dialect of Modern Awadhi. 347 9. The tents began to be burnt, the strings began to be cut, “ Now I am Adhi Bhawani, now I am Bhawani of the worlds, ” T bow to you. 10. They bind Akbar to a esc) sind let him hang there and make his wife grind corn, I bow t 11. “Mother, I thought you were sale gravel and stone, yes only gravel and stone, but you have come out to be Adhi Bhawani, yes come out to be the velsieatad: goddess of the world, I bow to yo 12. ‘* Be please d, 0 Bhawani sw time, Cand pardon, 0 Emptess of the world, never shall I come again o the hills, never shall I come again to the hills, I aor to vou.’ ‘* Are you sleeping or waking, my Adhi owes, ats of the world, Akbar stands before your door, I bow to you See Ne Ne 8 re NS Re Re he HS a Proceedings of the Ninth Indian Science Congress. [Journal and Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | Proceedings of the Ninth Indian Science Congress. CONTENTS. Presidential Address. By C. 8. Middlemiss, Esq., C.LE., B.A., F.A.8.B., F.R.S. ; 7: ae “ Section of Agriculture. Presidential Address. By Rao Sahib M. R. Ramaewami Sivan, B.A., Dip. Agri. os a3 f= o ean 1. Sugarcane peng he tudies in development and anatomy. By T.S. Vonkitacnioni & nd R. Thomas . 2. On some inset noted as pests of fruit trees in S. India. By T: V. ar 3. Pollen — in volition to vegetative propagation By P. 8. Jivanna Rao 4, Studies in RE of preventing nitrogen ae sisi Cattle Dung and Urine during storage. By N. V. Joshi 5. Availability of the eerie Phosphate —— as a manure for Paddy. mi Siv : 6. Symbiotic —— PGES = ate: salle as thos of the Leguminoseae order y K. Adinarayan: 7. A historical account of Sou vid Indian fungi Mhan aula reference to — of Coimbatore. By 8. R. Venkata- pete ae lia 2 Uiilistion of the he. Spent Motiwrs (Bassia “latiolia) aaron y D. L. srabu ee and V. G. atw 9. Improved ms method of whens eres * for Conte Tadia By R. J Section of Mathematics and Physics. Presidential Address. By T. P. Bhaskara Shastri, Esq., M.A., FPRAA cs — ‘i ee “* Papers. l. A Statistical Study of some Examination —_— By P. V. Seshu Iyer and S. R. Ranganathan 2. Ona practice in ieaeaaaiin By K. B. Madhava 3. The mired of resistance on eoncrcoel — By K. Madhav: 4. banaviaee of idoesllic Maroené po By 8. ee ve PAGE 1v CONTENTS, 5. Emission and absorption spectra of the halogens in the visible and ultra-violet 7 ons. By A. L. tapes na and unnayya Oa moda se of mer slit spectrophotometer, By A. L. Nar 7. sieiear ti in ie peial By R. Visciieiaibaiwden ae 8. Thunderstorms in Trivandrum. By K. R. Ramanathan 9. On upper air correlations. By P. C. Mahalanobis : 10. On the craig of a coefficient of correlation for hae vati onalerrors. By P. C. Mahalanobis i ll. On the cual error of the component mem ca con- stants of a dissected sign curve. By P. C. Mahala- aie 12. On the pevbalile error of cotiatnaite obeusea by (isle a in- terpolation. By P. C. Mahalanobis 13. An automatic ‘‘ make and break ”’ key for fae’ eethig aid high enamel circuits "of a Cooledge X-ray tube. By E. Harrison and Narendranath Sen 14. On the experim ay demonstration of the Temperature Radiation of Gases. By M. N. Saha 15. Further ees on ery. mth 2's Physical Apparatus By 8. N. Maitra 16, ee Pedal line eT at a triangle By rs Narasingn 17. Some recent eicatehos at & Kodaikusiad. By J. ; ‘Rrerihed. 18. The Albedo of the Earth. By C. V. Raman 19. The Sone aie of — in Gases. ef K. R. Ramana bis Section of Chemistry. Presidential Address. By Dr. N. R. Dhar, F.I.C. Papers. |. Absorption of light by some acids and their salt meeps a new method of determining extinction-coefficient in the alta slst, By J. C. Ghosh 2. West Coast Sardine nt By P. K. Racep: J. J. ihdlbox! ough and H. E. Wats 3. a Note Paes a Chemistry of neem Soil, By P. mi Ayy Psy inven a tlie: composition of neem wit and the detection and removal of the —— By N. A. Yajnik ‘ad Sh. Md. Abdullah . 5. Hydrogenation of oils. By J. W. P 6. The reaction between sodium seinen and sulphur. By H. E. Watson and M. Rajagopalan 7. tae of some reactions. Bs: R. a Bane . 8. The equilibria um between t a snteeane of acetic Pad Sy © — huge ae — - to — 8 CONTENTS. Note on the Weight Curve of p Normal Indian Infant i the first year. By Miss D. J. F. Cur te ne Tuberculosis in India. An outbre of tise: r- ir is among animals in the Bombay “Zoologia Warde. By Lt.-Col. W. Glen Liston and Dr. M. B. Soparkar On some observations on Tubercle Bacilli in culture with special reference to the ——- of an — se, By the Rat sot’ he N niet Contents of certain Dactieiat Suspension obtained by the Haemocytometer method to those obtained with frows s opacity tubes. By Major J. as ngham, I.M.S., and B. Timothy 3 ee ous of formol-gel test for shee aid S. Rama- ishn on iia ot 7 Plagellate seed of Upbeat ideo and mania yrs to the resistant non- Ragollaks eee and 0 bod By Lee on the attempts at the search for the Sanseiibien. t.-Co]. R. Row, IMS. ie - on the cultivation of Leishmania donovani from the ay tet: blood of persons sufferi m Kala-az y Lt.-Col. J. W. Cornwall, I.M.S., ne ML. Tatiau: ae diagnosis of ere by periphernt blood culture. By Biraj Mohan Das Gupt The value of ue of the atonal blood i in Kale diagnostic — e. By T. ee Iyer ond K, V. Krishnan The problem of ead akie’ By ikdjct F. P- Mackio, I.M. s. An investigation into Filariasis at Puri. By P. N. Das .. Bees, - research (Darbh Research =sscarpacaniggr™ a a School of Se iain "Medicine and ae e. a Row Sur tae On the pacoabhage: of fugitive sais on the extremities and trunks of persons suffering from — India By Lt. “Col. Z. W. Cornwall, I.M.S. : +. A filarial survey into a statistical enquiry into the Re- ra aes ip of Filariasis and Elephantiasis. By Major A. Cruickshank, I.M.S., Major J. serous reir _ sat T Sett apathy Iyer Technique of staining and a Helminths in ball By Captain Vishnu T. Korke Mass treatment of Hookworm infeotion. By AK. s. Mhaskar The diagnosis of codweele infection: By K. 8. iitsaaiar A simplified method for the haem of a in ene red Major J. A. Sin M.S. Revie 2 position of t (Cesta ana’ Willy 1904) w y a rica Hasmogotidium 10 se a description of two new tain H. E. Short ee és nes I deficienc so, what is t + Kerfomalacia ney ? By seape 4 Wright, 1.M.S. Rhinosporidum Kinealyi. By — wees | 1.M.S. = Dr. Trimurthi (Madras) - - in culture tubes and its 132 133 133 139 142 x CONTENTS. 23. — of ~ a Naed with Sa oil] and its prepare Ste 24. i te on the seaeniis of vaccine eee elective in a eopleal climate. By Lt.-Col. W. F. Harvey, 1.M.5S. 25. The necessity for a standard for vaccine lym se By Major J. oo I.M.8. and — J. A. Cruickshank I.M.S. . 26. An examination into the degree of efficacy sf Antirabic treatment. By Lt.-Col. Harvey, I-M.S. and Major N. W. on, I.M.S. 27. Cholera and the volume a prophylactic leeeolatiads By Major H. G. Stiles Webb, I.M.S. 28. The dose of prophylactic 908 53-7 15 : |G and N and 8P 68. | 368 56°6 93°4 si } a 16 |G 39 | «(24-6 28°] 527 17. |G ‘ 42. | 247 33°5 58°2 18 |G and 2P 47 265 | 333 | 598 19 |Gand 4P 50 28°] 35-2 63:3 20 |G and 8P 50 32°4 35-1 67-5 Note.—P—250 ib. of Flour phosphate. G—5,000 Ib. of green daincha leaves. cs —400 Ib. of Sulphate of ammonia. of sulphate o ammon It is also is si noted that there is a small increase in the yield of ‘crop with increased application of phosphate, ate — pita sings with the quantity supplie ults obtained at the Manganallur Agricultural ‘Station for enn years had shown that flour phosphate was nearly as good as bone mea ving an increased yield dd The experi in different paddy rete de of the oan A aaa with the te operation of the paty Directors. An appro imately uniform pie and, us : acre, was selected, eve manured with green leaves, and divided into 10 long strips. Altern lots received flour phosphate at the ra 500 nds per acre. There was an average se of b. of grain r acre ate-manured plots, which works to 11% over _ manured with green manure only, as will be seen from the following 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 31 TABLE II. Co-operative Field Experiments in Ryot’s Lands. Seer Experiments with Flour Sree: eres or 6 EXPERIMENTS | (YIELD IN LBS. PER ACRE.) | : | 5 ————_— ——_-—_—_-- -- —_—| Percent- Locality. | | _age of REMARKS, Green nu reigichten” ‘epee _ manure. fe te in grain phat : a ee | R wi ia | ar (Ib.) Ettapur, Salem _Dis- | trict -- (1919); 2,138 2,550 412 19 Ettapur -- (1922)! 3,759 4 060 301 8 Danishpet .. (1922) 3,603 3,879 276 8 Elandangudi, Tanjore | District .. (1922) | 2,102 | 2,440 a88 ..|..°.16 Central Farm, Coim ba-| | tore © District ea 2,013 2,208 19% | 10 (1922) | 2,562 | 2,843 | 281 | | Average -- | 2,696 | 2,907 301 From the ditece dis eietlgutloa the conclusion is drawn that mineral os ound as fin possible, is a suitable phosphatic manure for paddy lands when applied along with rnc ae matter. The residual effect of the mineral phosphate se o be very sensible judged by the experiments at the Government Aerinctniend Stasions, but this is still under investigation. Note,—The paper was illustrated with photographs and lantern slides. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation in plants other than those of the Leguminoseae order.—By K. Aprnarayana Rao. ym mbiotic Nitrogen Fixation is not restricted to Leguminosae dda bat is a widespre enomenon, : : 2. Plants of other orders such as Rubiaceae, Myrsinaceae, Casu- rineae are instances of the above phenomenon in the tropics, and in temperate regions several recap ve nD enumerated as examp 3. ag i or cbltipassivs & tudy. . 4. The leaves of both the species possess on their god 9 aces nodules invariably filled with onan which have been sh to be ca rine of nar atmospheric nitrogen ge : ptionatip existing bene the Bacteria and the plants s to be mutually beneficial and it is perpetuated from peneration ey generation ¢ throvgh the seeds since the Bacteria get — in the ovary itself. n further noted that the plants are ive i whi ve been found at all shoes to n the absen in the life ary of the plant. T.$.C. 32 Procs. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 6. The Ni trogen- Saran — compares very favourably with the observations of previous worker The chie reitey at reas plants lies, in their being available in unlimited quantities from self-sown jungle trees in pleat all the districts of the M re ras tes iden =a and in other parts of India vell. S$. 56 commen practice among cultivators Pe ‘ele cart-loads of *s Sica me “Tan eae - aa ther leaves from long distances for pur- poses of green n-leaf pals g and the same may be resorted to in the ease of Pa avettas and Chomelias with profit. The writer is convin nd of their value as gree en-leaf manures since bulk for bulk _ contin a higher sialon ntage of nitrogen which becomes available to a much larger extent when the leaves are applied to the soil than for instance ** Tangedu’ which is so largely used at present as a green-leaf manure. No. Botanical Names. Telugu. Tamil. 1. Casia Auriculata. Tangedu. Avarai. 2 Pongamia glabra. Kanuga. Pungam. A historical account of South Indian fungi with special reference to those of eae re ae S. R. VENKATA- KRISHNA MUDALIA The earliest ay of the occurrence of fungi in South pees is ni in the writings of J. a pupil of Linnaeus who ca out cad ete - "Danish Settlement in Tanjore, in 1768. In 1779 ree eaved us growing on termite nests, probably Aegerita Duthei Ber a ee 1842 Montagne Suuteiess a paper on Cryptogamae nil- ** Annals eo the The next Eaporas ae tin ungus recor. ied ae South India is is = the edible mush- room ot aa albuminosa Berk) gro rtp in termite n 2. . Lat on, diseases of economic crops of South Tndia attracted the attention gh various workers in South Tndin chief —- them being those of cotton, fags paddy, wheat, pota obac 3. Soon after the organisation of ‘tite Agricultura argc in Goda the tolkoadaa diseases were investigated: Bud-r palmyras in ri y : after the arrival of. Dr. Barber in ‘899. Since that time the collections of diseased specimens sshd increased — — are 73 species of fun ngi Bie on Sone crops grown in Coim alo + sification oF the coma "Tang found in : Coimbatore eis gives ‘the otkcwtne number —42 species of rusts, f smuts and 19 species of origi (oath ser 6. Fungi have been observed attacking scale insects found on coffee a per. In the ati “a medical mycology, Madur fo a disease: ringworm, tuberculosis are know i South “india for a long tim a From above, it is “ent, that fungi have been the subjec investigation for over a century and a half in South India A Note on the Utilisation of the Spent Mohwra (Bassia latifolia} — —By TD. L. SaHasRABUDDHE @ and V. G. Patw HAN _ The s aa ‘i flowers produce insinitary conditions in 3 swighbourhood of the distilleries where the Mohwra flowers are used for py The spent can be utilised by proper treatment (1) a ae ood, (2) for further production of alcohol, (3) for manurial purposes (4) for burning as fuel. 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. 1.8.0. 33 The fresh armas is liked by the cattle and if possible it may be so used but the material becomes mouldy and acid very quickly and there- fore i i as muc a 8- sible and dried a ae sun. The cattle me aie? “ere the dry material in the beginning but soon get secustomed he dry spent Mohwra is as good as dry eeuoes in its fee For the production of pean Be “the dry material has to be treated with sulphuric acid. The cheapest process would be to pons the = with twentieth normal sulphuric acid under the atmospheric pressure The treatment would i ncrease the be of alevhol by 25%. It has been found that if the original Mohwra flowers are boiled with twentieth normal sulphuric acid fot one hour the quantity of sugars increases 16%. These are all laboratory experiments but trials ought to be made on a commercial scale to find out whether the processes indicated would ay f the dry yA cannot. pts —e as —_ food or for production of alcohol it pies well be ure or lastly for burning purposes so that reid ae edine of the » distilleries reals be free from the ins eines conditions caused by the fermenting spent Mohwra flowers. Improved mae of wheat sowing for Central India.—By K. R. Josu In Central India meat and other rabi crops are sown by an imple- ment called ‘* Nai’ which is the same as the gg 3 but with a bamboo sowing tube in addition. With the use of this Nai, an area of 1°50 to 2°00 acres is sown ii day, and hence i nastics where rabi areas pre- whea the y ear a Pe two coultered Drill was "ened for wheat sowing b inquiry into the causes ot — ooh Aenea it was found that — r “anal sowing, o sowing whi e the factors responsible for this result, future rig aoa were 5 tnseatone directed, both for the verification of previous resu ul! well as, for isolating the arkenth which each one of these factors exer- eised on cro The fo olowing table gives the results of 4 years trials with the Drill and ae Table ‘No. . — outturns of wheat in Ibs. per acre with the Drill and the { 1914-15. | 1916-17. “01718 | 1918-19. adinkulil ihe teeaiaseecmwiola eda ager ae eininasncnesitinanifily dehcemapceeiltintthe - < ap if i : 7889 m3. Je ee rh pak deca those obtained with T.8.C. 34 Proes. oj the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [NS., XVIII, vt wing the course of these trials, attention had also been pee ards observing the various characteristics of Drill sowing, and t picid they involved. Asa pret ns ae se abaervatio - Shallow rac poll and ‘‘ Wider yrs ae main characteristics of the s below Shallow a 1. Economy in time or saving in cost.—The Drill — which _ adjusted to sow only three to three ae half inches deep as against 5 5} inches deep as in case of Nai—require less draught, eakenn ss pone the use of an additional coulter without inc creased demand for wer. This evidently results in either 50} p-c. saving in time or cost, 2. Saving in seed.—Deep sowing results in takiae out cleds which while overlying the furrows choke up the young seedlings coming out from below. Germination is therefore adversely affected when the - of g sowing is deep and close. With equal seed rates, th ermina- tion was 74 and = for the a and the Nai respectively. Assuming that the measur d in the 15” Nai plot is the ‘‘ Standard” the seed Aber with 15” arill should be less by 18 lb. to the acre. nereased yield.—This is due to sc fact that the feeding area of sie @ crop is increa by a layer of about 2 which ries 927 seed- ing depths of the two types of sowi on under question. ries rally the shallow sown crop gives higher yields cadies same condition Wider planting. ving in time or cost.—This is oN due to ineveee space oul per oo a —— means 4 savin 20 p.e “ea — with the be in seed —For securing ‘ prioy rd’ stand of whea ag eo Panthees a seed rate of 42 Ib. ver acre saree §2 |b. rogaine ri In neowend i Sil —The results in this respect are as set out in the lowing table able No. 2 showing outturns of wheat in lbs, per acre with 15” and 18” distances between the rows. 1916-17. | 1917-18. | 1918-19. ee age : Ren ie nee = - See meme = 18” Distance — 3 783 768 750 15” do. # 630 78 8 744 J bove figures have varied ocak; oa the Piru: £ 1918-19 a further strengthened by the results a 50 t of the same year. The relative increased raids obtained with different seedrates is as given Seedrate. p.c. of increase of 18’’ over 15’ planting. 70 tb. 7%, 50 19% This tended to show that for — success behagi 18” Lengel what is ment of seedrate this done there equired, is only a careful adjustme a absolutely no harm in adopting 18” planting for seers practice: 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. I.S.C. 35 tages over the local method of 15’’ deep sowing as affected by th i The advantages as calculated in money value are as under ‘hia’ e Nai. Per acre. Rs, As, p. (1) saving in time 50% if O21 2 (2) saving in seed 28 tb. per acre “4 2 0° 9 (3) Increased yield at about 40 Ib. per acre pare sO Total Ra... «4 «#511 8 The principle of shallow sowing as brought out in the paper is also applicable for the sowing of gram and linseed, which are the other rabi crops of Central India. * With the adoption of 18” drill for wheat sowing, it is hoped that the sowings will be Quicker, Cheaper, Timely, and Productive of larger yields than is possible with the Nai. Section of Mathematics and Physics. President :—T. P. BHasKkarA SHasrri, Esq., M.A., F.R,A.S. Presidential Address. SOME RECENT ADVANCES IN OUR KNOWLEDGE OF THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIVERSE. Before opening our proceedings to-day, let me thank the authorities of the Indian Science Congress for the honour they have conferred upon me by inviting me to preside in this sec- tion. I felt some hesitation in accepting this responsible office. for, on the various subjects which generally come within the domain of this section, I can scarcely hope to speak with any claim to authority. So far as I think, there can be only one reason for my being called upon to take this chair, that is I should discharge a part of the high duties connected with this office by addressing you on a few of the problems regarding the great Universe of stars, which are engaging attention in our Section, gave an address which am dealt with the great geophysical problems, Seismology and Terrestrial Magnetism. Last year at Calcutta, we listened to an illuminating exposition from this chair about the object and methods of upper air research which showed what a profitable thin a short distance above our heads. To-day, let me take you to those remote regions of 1.8.C. 36 Procs. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. |N.S., XVIII, have been made in our knowledge of Stellar Distribution and the Structure of the Universe. I realise the difficulties of attempting, in the limits of this short address, anything like a comprehensive survey of the problem and shall therefore con- tent myself with referring briefly to certain of its important features, illustrating the methods of present day astronomical research. . The subject has attracted the attention of astrono- mers from the earliest times; yet it is only within the last few my Progress in the branch of astronomy we are consider- ing, seems to have proceeded slowly for a time on accoun of the want of sufficient data. Recently, however, by the gradual perfection of instrumental methods and appliances a0 enormous increase in the observational material has become available ad investigators so that rapid development has be- m come possible. 6. Two principal features of modern astronomical observ@- 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. 1L.8.C. 37 tions have contributed largely towards a successful attack on the problem of the Structure of the Universe. These (1) The general introduction of photographic methods consequent to the invention of the “ dry plate.” and (2) The application of the spectroscope to the study of the heavenly bodies. oo ad 7. The immense power of the photographie method rests on some of its essential properties. First, the impressions can be accumulated—a fact of considerable importance when faint objects are concerned. The photographic plate enables us to store up the feeble light impressions received through the tele- scope, so that even a small instrument, in these days of dry plate, acquires ‘‘a new dimension”’ and can, in some respects, produce results quite as efficiently as a large one. e second important factor is that by the photographic method large regions of the heavens can be recorded at the same exposure. Prof. Barnard, Max Wolf and others, have thus studied the structural peculiarities of the Milky Way and other special regions which could never have been revealed by the visual method. e accuracy and the facility in manipulation have all added to the importance of this new method. In fact it has enabled progress to be achieved by leaps and bounds especially in directions where only slow headway could be made before. 8 formation regarding its temperature, physical condition and chemical constitution. By the observation of the lines in the Spectra of stars we learn besides, how the stars may be classi- fied, how fast they are moving and in several cases how intrin- sically bright they are. I shall deal with these points later on in this address. The spectroscope in the Slitless form (the . objective Prism) has enabled Prof. Pickering and his col- Secchi’s divisions into Types and is now generally adopted by all investigators. The main classes in the Harvard ee are designated by the capital letters OBAP. while there are a number of sub-classes occupying intermediate positions in this scale. The sequence is in order 0 being the hottest. The designations are f temperature, the O and B stars not in the same order 1.8.C. 38 Procs. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, as that of the alphabet, on account of the readjustment in our ideas owing to accumulation of new facts and the revision which consequently becomes necessary. The Henry Draper Catalogue, now in course of publica- tion at Harvard gives in detail the classified spectral type of about 222.000 stars in all parts of the sky and forms a mine of information on the subject for all investigations. . It will be apparent from what has been said how enormously the work of our astronomical observatories has outgrown, since the introduction of these various methods. Many of the problems require years of continual observation which is surely beyond the means of a single observatory. But, happily, well-planned co-operative methods of attack have proved invaluably useful. Itis impossible to over-estimate the influence of co-operation in astronomical research by means of which results of far-reaching importance are fast accumulating. An undertaking of this kind inaugurated in Paris in 1887 had for its object the systematic mapping of the positions of a large number of faint stars, thus extending the great work of Arge- lander and Schonfeld to stars of much fainter magnitudes. Eighteen observatories (one of which is the Nizamiah Observa- tory at Hyderabad) have joined in the undertaking and are producing by photographic methods, catalogues which will ultimately give the accurate positions and magnitudes of about 5 million stars down to the 12th magnitude. The work is now fairly advanced and some important information has already been obtained. But even more valuable results are expected when the survey is completed and the vast amount of material Form of the System. Considerable information regarding the broad features of ee Universe can be gained from a study of the brightness of stars, 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 39 gions. Extensive researches have been made at the Harvard Observatory for calibrating the scale of these magnitudes. The Harvard North Polar Sequence furnishes accurate determina- tions of the photographic magnitudes of stars round the North Pole, ranging from the brightest by continuous gradations down to the stars of the 21st mag. indicated by a light ratio of one to one hundred millionth. The sequence serves as an ex- cellent standard for comparing the magnitudes of stars in other regions. » Similar investigations have also been made ata number of other observatories notably at Géttingen, Mount Wilson and Yerkes for securing a uniform scale of photographie magnitudes. The difference between the photometric and the photographic magnitude is termed the colour Index; it is re- lated to the star’s spectral type and forms and excellent mea- sure of its colour. Counts of stars up to definite limits of magnitude give much information about the extent of the stellar system. Sys- tematic counts have been made in the vast amount of material Another important feature connected with the apparent distribution of stars is known as the Galactic concentration, i.e. the increase in star-density per unit area of the sky with 1.8.C. 40 Procs. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, decreasing distance from the Galactic plane. Stars of all de- grees of brightness are more numerous in the vicinity of the Milky Way which is thus of fundamental importance in all stellar problems. The crowding towards the galactic plane is however found to be most pronounced for the faintest stars. The results of various researches in this connection by Kap- teyn, van Rhijn, Seares, and Chapmen and Melotte give values for the galactic concentration in substantial agreement with one another. Forming the star ratios for the several galactic belts, it is found that though their decrease is an essential characteristic for all parts of the sky, the regions most affected are near the galactic poles where the ratios are uniformly smaller. The _ Particular areas, as the dark patches in Taurus, the great rift near 6 Ophiuchii have been carefully studied by Barnard 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. T.S.C. 41 searches of Kapteyn on the average mass of stars ! seem how- ever to indicate that there can be no great amount of such dark matter in the Stellar system. Stellar Distances. For an investigation of the arrangement of stars in space a knowledge of their distances is indispensable. The problem presents exceptional difficulties as the displacement in direc- tion when viewed from the opposite ends of a diameter of the earth’s orbit, is so minute even for the nearest stars. Sir David Gill once compared the problem to that of measuring “the angular diameter of a threepenny bit two miles away.” It is no wonder that very little progress could be made at first in this direction. The parallax of 61 cygni was first measured in 1838 by Bessel at the Kénigsberg Observatory. This was soon followed by the parallax measures for two other stars made by Hender- intensity of certain pairs of lines in its spectrum. He und it possible from this relationship to determine directly the i tion of its spectrum, at ! British Association, Edinburgh, meeting 1921. 2 M=m+5+5log a. 1.8.C. 42 Procs. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, the Sun. rof. Eddington has made a comprehensive research of stars known to us in this corner of space, are more lumi- the luminosity decreases with spectral type—from the blue stars down to the red—the stars of late type of spectrum being all dwarfs. has also found a great mean radial velocity for the faint stars in the neighbourhood of the Sun. We shall have occasion to return to this point later. The Motions of Stars. Next to direct measures of Stellar distances, the most valuable data are furnished by their motions, of which our knowledge may be considered to be at present more extensive. The movements of stars are readily resolved into two compo- nents, one in the line of sight and the other in the transverse direction—the two being found by different methods. 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. IS.C. 43 telescope had measured the radial velocities of a few stars and some planetary Nebulae. The first reliable measures of radial velocities were obtained in 1890 by Vogel and Scheiner of Potsdam by photographic methods. The subject has, since been taken up at a number of observatories, the most impor- in the case of B type stars to about 5 Km. per — Sag ably due to pressure effect in the extensive atmospheres : such stars. ‘The radial velocities of a considerable number o faint stars have been observed at- Mount Wilson, and ne Royal Observatory at the Cape has also published some exce ent measures. A consideration of the proper motions of a few stars om not fail to convince Herschel that a part of the motions mus simple graphical process he deduc motion from the proper motions of o 1.8.C. 44 Procs. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. |N.S., XVII, available in his time. Herschel’s position of the Solar apex R.A. = 262°, D=26° is in sensible accord with modern deter- minations. As more proper motions became known, the problem began to engage increasing attention. Two different methods have been developed by Airy and Bessel for determining the direction of the Solar motion assuming the random nature of the proper motions of the individual stars. A large number of investigations based on these methods have been made which have resulted in somewhat widely different values for the position of the apex. The R.A. in all these determina- tions remained very nearly the same while there was a wide range in the values for the declination which seemed to depend on the magnitudes of the stars employed. Recently Weersma of Groningen has found the position of the apex by a method originally due to Bravais, which does not proceed on the sumptions regarding the masses. His result was A=17'51", D=31°'4 which may be taken as the best determination we have at present. Kapteyn has examined in detail whether the different parts of the stellar system are relatively at rest. He finds that the velocity of the Sun is approximately independent of the system of stars whose proper motions are discussed in the solution. Weersma has shown how the position of the apex motions being a much better criterion of stellar distances than magnitudes, he has shown conclusively that the declination of ee e apex does not depend on the distances of the reference stars. An entirely different value for the coordinates of the Solar apex was obtained by Kobold by following Bessel’s mnethad It was found difficult to reconcile the positions obtained by these different methods until Kobold himself pointed out that “the results could be harmonised on the assumption that the motus peculiares of stars take place in the plane of the Milky Way. some in the direct sense and others in the retrograde sense”? This cautious statement was later fully confirmed by the brilliant discovery of Kapteyn that the stars show decided preferences for motion in two diametrically opposite directions. If the stars are assumed to be moving at random and the Sun fixed in space, the observed proper motions will be equally numerous in all directions, so that the velocity diagram W! . | 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. LS.C. 45 be a circle. If the Sun also is considered moving, the velocity diagrams will change into ovals, the elongation of the oval Kapteyn announced in 1905 that the phenomena are satis- factorily explained by supposing that the great majority of relative to the Solar system make an angle of 100° with each other. The speeds are as 1°52 to 0°8 and the numbers of stars in the two systems are as 3 to 2. Further the motion of one swarm relatively to the other is found to be exactly parallel to the plane of the Milky Way. Kapteyn has given the name star- streaming or star drift to this tendency of star to move in y of 1900 stars times the velocity of the Sun, ie. about 48 Km. per second. Schwarzchild has developed another method of represent- ing these peculiar motions which is called the Ellipsoidal hypothesis. In this theory, unlike Kapteyn’s, the stars are all considered to belong to one system and if the components one direction than in any other, these motions may be represented graphi- callv by all the radii of an ellipsoid whose longest axis coin: readily be seen that the principle underlying the two representa- tions is practically the same—@ greate both serve as a good first ap- me results over the limited period of time we can deal with. A closer approximation than the two drift theory was discovered by Halm who pointed out at a certain number of stars form a separate third drift (called by him Drift 0) without seeming to participating 11 the two great —— of Kapteyn. Their apparent motion 1s directed towards t : Solar antapex and thus all stars of this drift would be at os in space if the effect of Solar motion were eliminated. e 1.8.C. 46 Proes. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, early B-type (Orion) stars on account of their small peculiar motions appear to belong exclusively to this drift. Prof. Turner has made an interesting suggestion which seems to offer a reasonable explanation of these phenomena. of 22-73 Km. per second. The Sun’s velocity forms one of the fundamental constants in stellar investigations, as the motion of the Solar system provides a much longer base line than any other available to the terrestrial observer. Moving Clusters. 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. LS8.C. 47 logue. He found that in the region Taurus, there are a num- ber of stars whose proper motions seem to converge to a same linear speed. In the case of such moving clusters, the distances are by an indirect method determined with accuracy when the point of convergence found, and a complete know- ledge of the positions and luminosities of the individual stars can be easily obtained. Another remarkable cluster is the Ursa Major group which was first investigated by Ludendorff. This seems to a highly flattened cluster and includes a number of other stars scattered over a great part of the sky. Herzprung has shown that the star Sirius belongs to the same association. The lateral extent of the cluster is about 50 parsees while the thick- ness may be only about 8 parsees. The velocity is 29 Km. per second towards R.A. 285° Dec. — 2°. Several clusters of a similar character have been detected the 61 Cygni group and the B-type stars in Orion. The motions and other peculiarities of these groups have been thoroughly investigated by Kapteyn, Boss and Eddington. A less impor- tant cluster has been recently added by Axel Corlin Streaming towards 8. Monocerotis. ~ rof. Eddington has drawn attention to the important fact that the chance attractions of stars in the neighbourhood of these clusters seem to have no effect on the motions of the individuals and that the clusters preserve their motion in spite of the occasional disturbance from interlopers (non-cluster stars) in the region they happen to traverse. It is difficult to avoid the conclusion that the stars should be moving under the total attraction of the whole mass of stars and not under the sway of any particular individual or group. As Miss Clerke has said ‘these systems may be described as autonomous demo- cracies.”’ ever a knowledge of Stellar motions is very useful in giving us an estimate of the distances of certain groups of stars which show at least partly, the scale in which the stellar system has been constructed. The proper motions valuable information in this direction. The component of a j £ the Solar motion is due to what is er’s motion through space. a group of stars, may, on the assumption 0 1.8.C. 48 Procs. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, of the motion of individual stars, be taken as exclusively due to the motion of translation of the Solar System. As the latter is known accurately in amount and direction, the mean paral- lactic drift gives at once the distance of the group. The Astronomer Royal has investigated the proper motions of the Groombride and the Carrington Stars and has obtained an ex- pression for the mean Secular parallax of stars of different magnitudes in the region. Kapteyn has in this way made an extensive study of the distance of the B-type stars which are known to have very small individual motions and of groups of stars possessing other peculiarities in common. he radial velocities, when treated in intimate association with proper motions, enable us to make independent estimates of distances of groups of stars. From the doctrine of chances, are deduced the relations between the average speed in space, the average radial velocity and the average of all the trans- verse components. Thus when the average radial velocity of a group, cleared of the effect of the Solar motion, has been found, it is easy to calculate in linear measure, the average of all transverse components. The latter being already known in angular measure from the available proper motions, we have an indirect but effective method for inferring the distance of the group. a comprehensive study of the various problems con- nected with the Stellar system it is found necessary to con- sider how the several observed facts are connected with the star’s spectral type. In the:words of Prof. Kapteyn ! “ the mix- ing up of all the spectral classes must singularly diminish the effectiveness of any statistical treatment. It is as if we inves- tigated statistically the size of all the members of the animal ingdom from the biggest to the smallest. It must be evident how much more effective must be the treatment of smaller groups such as the genera or the species.” : A statistical study of the counts of stars according to their spectra reveals some interesting facts. The stars of different spectral types are not uniformly distributed in the sky. The B-stars, as far as can be made out from the star-ratios, are found to be thinning out very rapidly ; they appear to belong exclusively to a local cluster in the neighbourhood of the Sun, whose equatorial plane is inclined at an angle of about ten degrees to that of the general galactic system. Among stars brighter than 6-5 the rapid increase in the number of the A, F, stars with decreasing brightness is another important feature which shows that stars of these types occur in larger numbers beyond a certain distance from our system. The Milky Way Regarding the distribution of fainter stars according to ices 1 Groningen Publications 29. 1922.] The Ninth Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 49 spectral type. our information is limited; but Shapley has pointed out that stars of the B-type are to be found even below the 9th or the 10th mag. but these should be real Milky least tendency for crowding near the Milky Way. From a tral types, it will be apparent, how for the distant stars the galactic condensation is a good Criterion of the mean distance. A remarkable relation between a star’s peculiar motion and its class of spectrum was discovered by Campbell in 1910, from a study of the residual radial velocities of about a thousand stars. He pointed out that the average linear velocities in- crease with advancing spectral type a result which has also been confirmed by Boss from a discussion of transverse motions A reasonable explanation for such a progression has been offered by Russell from a study of the stellar masses according to spectral Type. e relationship between the class of Spectrum and lu- minosity (absolute magnitude) has been investigated indepen- dently by Herzprung and Russell which has resulted in the important discovery of the existence of two series of stars which have been designated as Giants and Dwarfs. If the absolute magnitudes are arranged according to the type of Spectrum, it is found that in class B, the two series are coincident, but with advancing spectral type the gap between them widens, and in Type M, the stars fall into two distinct groups separate by a considerable interval. Adam’s extensive determinations zero, indicating an average luminosity of about a hundred times that of the Sun. The for type M is as much as Il magnitu The existence of the two series of ; has upset all previous conceptions regarding stellar Perse in strict order of temperature. If Russell’s views : 50 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVII, the life of a star begins as a giant in class M, by gradual con- traction, it gets hotter, changing the spectral type sometimes even up to class B when cooling sets up carrying the star downward to the dwarf stage in class M. Eddington’s famous provided substantial confirmation to this theory which has been deduced by Russell mainly from observational data. A significant relation is found to exist between the absolute mag- nitudes and the linear velocities of stars. Adams and Stromberg have found from an analysis of radial velocities that the speeds increase by 1-5 Km. per second per unit of absolute magni- tude—a result which is much smaller than Eddington’s estimate of 68 Km. from the transverse speeds of the nearest stars; the discordance is due, as Kapteyn has remarked, to the omission in the list of some stars with very small luminosity and proper motion. Further, for the same absolute magnitude the K and M stars seem to have higher velocities than those of F and G types, the reason probably beirg that the linear speeds depend largely on stellar masses. Star-clusters. Passing on, from the individual stars and the esl methods of finding the distribution of the clusters in space are chiefly indirect, depending on the study of the apparent magnitudes and colour indices of the stars forming the cluster. Herzprung has shown how the distances of clusters can be de- duced from the observations of the variables in these systems. He derives that the absolute magnitudes of these variables should be the same as those of the cepheid variables in the galac- tic system and as the mean distances of the latter are known with tolerable accuracy, it is possible to find an estimate of the distance of the cluster. From the Harvard determinations of the magnitude of the variables in the Lesser Magellanic cloud, he concludes its distance to be about 10,000 parsecs. Recent- ly Shapley has discovered some general properties of the globu- lar lusters, which can, with some confidence, be used for esti- mations of their distances. The relation between luminosity and some particular characteristic is first studied tor stars in a known system and if the same characteristic is found to exist in a cluster, the luminosity may with some truth be assumed to be the same as in the comparison system which thus affords a clue to its distance. The variable stars, the absolute magnl- tudes of the 25 brightest stars, and even the simple angular diameter of the cluster have been adopted as criteria of the distance. In this manner, the distances of a number of clus- ters have been estimated which have given us a true concep” tion of the dimensions of these objects and the gigantic scale 1922.] Indian. Science Congress. L$.C. 51 of the system tc which these belong. The nearest cluster w Centauri is deduced to be 6500 parsecs distant, while there are clusters at more than ten times this distance. Our present state of knowledge with regard to these clusters, seems to indi- cate that they are in a way associated with the Galaxy and that the bounds of the Milky Way system are probably more extensive than were supposed some time ago, Before concluding, I wish to take the opportunity of re- marking how important are the theoretical investigations in the solution of these great problems of sidereal astronomy. persistent attempt at the interpretation of the facts gathered forms one of the greatest necessities for the progress of a Science. Schwarzchild’s elegant methods developed in his vestigations on the basis of the well-known laws of gravita- tio to the kinetic theory of gases. The theory of star-streams, the equilibrium of the galactic system, the dynamics of globular clusters, have all received attention during recent ears. Developments in mathematical analysis and dis- towards progress in these theoretical investigations. As Schwarzchild has once expressed it “ athematics, Physics, Chemistry, Astronomy march in one front; whichever lags behind is drawn after. Whichever hastens ahead helps on the others. The closest solidarity exists between astronomy and ittingly by my teacher Seeliger and afterwards was further nou i : y d Astronomy constitute Greek culture, is only to be com- is bri ‘+ has been my endeavour to place n this brief address, 1 x a ot the stellar system have been recentl é ledge. By the gradual ace mulation of observations, — over long periods, a new field of enquiry has been proug 52 1:8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIIT, under ae — which has enabled us to obtain a glimpse of the form dimensions of the vast stellar universe. It A Statistical § weg of some Examination sige —By P. V. Sesuu I S. R. RaAncanatoa ture of (2) Wiscuiane f the pte at ‘the Standard Deviation. Their effect on the pier tray for a pass’ Disadv antages of a fixed minimym. (3) Probable Error in inaskis ng. Edgeworth’s Analysis and results. The margin of Probable Error in the neighbourhood of the minimum for each of the Intermediate s subjects (4) The fixing of the minimum. Its relation to the Mean and the Median. (5) Correlation of the attainments of the candidates = various subjects. The best correlated — ects—Physics and Chemistry. The best correlated fea ad mg Matheclation Fiuctadslincs in the value of the correlation coefficio ae a practice in a —By K. B. Mapwava. Sor yf Serewsscits tions _ regi that generally, in an interpola- tion the "ha t results will not be got by peocennk to the same order of > eases cruel ut; but by studying the character of the differences, : ng in eac h ca se at the point where they decrease to a minimum K. B. AD S sometimes held that the fall of meteors, the Zodiacal light, L., suopest he poselbtity of so of resistance to the planetary and satellite mo cular variations of the elements are studied under this hypothesis; which suggests that, if the eff be appreciable in t tion of a i which hav ll eccentricities in general, it ust be remarkably great for motion of the t his 1s otion is Man small if it exists at all, and the question is raised why it should be ; Behaviour of Metallic-filament Lamps.—By S. NaRAYAN. The paper discusses certain results obtained in the College of Engi- neering Physical Labora tory at Poona with others of a similar character c i i neers. Th current, resistance and light under differ ent circumstances has been considered and the practical aspect of the questions discussed pointed * Castelo and absorption spectra of the halogens in - visible and speci tei regions.—By A. L. NaRaYA and D. GuNNA The emission and mien rpti be eins of Chlorine, Bromine and Iodine, are studied by the photographic method. Emission Spectra were eX je ae te ee ee ee 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.S.C. 53 amined by Geyslar tubes, and other special bg tubes about 25 in length, furnished with snd side tubu ilur 8, sea sh freshly prepare pure and piste silver 8 icone to ust cover the plat electrodes sealed nto seo Pal bes, an = he ahaneevcd cells aed. the study of abso onption were glass tubes of different lengths forolaned “with glass or quartz w The exper mene pelos — (2) eee sso emission spectrum is a line spectrum depending on the e of discharge. As the intensity of discharge increased sate i nes are autos ced while others disappe ( 99 phosphite. aS Sodium sulphite + Ai Sodium nitrite + Air. 2 = oe Potassium oxalate + ., ¥ am +, Ferrous ammon+ ,, sulpha + Oxygen Ferrous hydrox- + Oxygen, ide. 58 LS.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Oxidation reac- tions Primary change Secondary change Sodium sulphite +Oxygen Cobaltous hydrox- + Oxygen. ide a Ee + Nickelous hydrox- + os ide. "3 3 + ‘k Cuprous oxide + 53 Sulphurous acid = + Air Ferrous sulphate + Air. f. 2 eet Stannous chloride + ., ’ Ferrous hydrox- + Oxygen Nickelous hydrox- + Oxygen. id ide. ide Cobaltous hydrox: + 2 ~ a » id ide. Manganous _hy- + droxide. Cevous hydroxide + Sodium sulphite + Air >? z o + » 9 3? Sodium arsenite + Air. ” ” gee Manganous_hy-+ ,, droxide. 2% oS: Sodium thiosul-+ ., . ate. Stannous chlo- + ,, Ferrous ammon + ,, ride sulphate. In all the above mentioned cases at first the primary change, that is, the oxidation of the easily oxidisable substance takes place and this primary change induces or promotes the secondary or the induced change that is the oxidation of the difficultly oxidisable substance. . In several of these induced reactions we determined the in- duction factors, but unfortunately hardly any conclusion could be drawn from these induction factors as to the mechanism of these changes. Oxidation has also been induced in the following substan- ces in presence of sodium sulphite which was itself oxidised by passing oxygen gas through the mixtures. Jrea, starch, grape sugar, cane sugar, potassium oxalate, sodium acetate sodium potassium tartrate, sodium formate, sodium citrate, acetone, chloral hydrate, chloroform, gly: cerol, quinine sulphate, sodium succinate, methyl alcohol, ethyl alco- ol, phenol, glutaric acid, maltose, potassium steerate, chole- sterol, anthraquinone acetanilide, brucine, phenolphthalein and gum arabic. . The oxidation of ferrous hydroxide, freshly precipitated and carefully washed free from alkali, by passing one through it in water induces the oxidation of the following sub- stances :— Urea, starch, grape sugar, cane sugar, potassium oxalate, 1922.) Indian Science Congress. I.S8.C. 59 sodium acetate, sodium potassium tartrate, sodium formate, sodium citrate, acetone, chloral hydrate, glucerol quinine sul- phate, sodium benzoate, sodium succinate, methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol phenol, phenolphthalein and gum arabic. In the following cases of oxidation, either in presence of sodium sulphite or freshly precipitated ferrous hydroxide along with carbon dioxide, the presence of aldehyde (which is an intermediate product of oxidation) was detected by Schiff’s reagent :— Methy] alcohol, ethyl alcohol, amyl alcohol, glycerol glu- taric acid, phenol and brucine. In the case of oxidation of benzyl alcohol, acid test was obtained with litmus. The wide application and the general usefulness of these induced reactions are evident from the fact that these various imagines that such a change is immediate or direct—that every carbon atom simultaneously parts with its attached hydrogen atoms and by combining with oxygen yields carbon dioxide : : e have brought about the : .. and water. : Relation to life same change in the laboratory with potassium Br stearate by inducing its oxidation by the primary oxidation of sodium sulphite or ferrous hydroxide by passing oxygen through the mixture at the ordinary tempera- ture. In the animal body, acetic acid is oxidised with great ease to carbondioxide and water. Its oxidation in the labor- atory has been effected by us with the help of sodium-sulphite or ferrous hydroxide when it is being oxidised by passing oxygen through it. tabolism in the animal Th : ‘ tive meta ism ; e substance undergoing acti tes, fats and their istant to oxidation by tion of the atmospheric oxygen must take place in the body in 60 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, order to account for the observed chemical changes. It is romarkable that a very large number of such biochemical oxi- dations have been imitated in the laboratory by the simple process of induced oxidation as already mentioned. We a now engaged in further generalising this tvpe of induced oxi- dation and in finding out the intermediate products of oxidation in these cases. It has been shown in a previous paper that the oxidising power of hydrogen peroxide is greatly accelerated in presence of ferrous and ferric salts, thus if tartaric acid or starch and hydrogen peroxide be brought together at the ordinary temper- ature hardly any chemical reaction takes place, but as soon as a ferrous or a ferric salt is added the oxidation of tartaric acid or starch rapidly takes place (Dhar Jour. Chem. Soc. 1917, ITI, 94). There is a great importance of reactions of this type in the explanation of oxidations in the human body. The food in the animal body is oxidised by the atmospheric oxygen ¥: food taken up in the body. As we have shown in the laboratory, that iron salts (either f ge ie oxidising power of the peroxide, similarly in salts in medicine, the animal body the iron in haemoglobin resent in the blood catalytically accelerates the oxidation of the food stuff by the peroxide formed in the body from the inhaled oxygen. Now when there is deficiency of iron in the blood, the animal body suffers from anaemia be- cause the amount of catalyst necessary for rapid oxidation falls short. At this stage any iron salt taken in the system will supply the natural deficiency and the necessary amount of oxi- dation will take place. This is the probable mechanism of the internal use of iron salts whether ferrous or ferric in medicine. It has also been observed that induced oxidation can take Negative Cata- ti r hand, a iyi an@ indossa OMT conditions. On the othe reactions. solution of sodium sulphite is readily oxi- dised to sodium sulphate _ Now if we mix the two together both the oxidations go on simultaneously. At the same time a curious phenomenon takes place. The velocity of the oxidation of sodium sulphite becomes very small in presence of sodium arsenite, that is sodium arsenite which is undergoing a slow oxidation acts as a powerful negative catalyst in the exidation of sodium sul- phite. Similarly a solution of oxalate which also undergoes slow oxidation in presence of sodium sulphite, which is itself 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 61 bable therefore that the phenomenon of negative catalysis is possible only when the catalyst is liable to be oxidised. These cases are of great importance in connection with the contro- versial question of negative catalysis. Ina previous paper (Dhar Jour. Chem. Soc, 1917, IIT, 707) it quantity of alcohol. Now all these negative catalysts are good reducing agents, and are themselves readily oxidised. Hence in oxidation reactions the phenomenon of negative catalysis takes place when the catalyst itself is liable to be readily oxidised. If we expose a mixture of sodium sulphite and sodium hich is fai j ld become a slow change, the which is fairly rapid, shou tae equal 60 shad of ths oxidation of sodium arsenite, because the same amount of oxygen will be taken up by the reducing agents in the same time. As a matter of fact hear our a ig somalia b : i rs) jum arseni observed that in presence psy ante hydroxi ie thi 0k08- ity of the oxidation of sodium sulphite by air becomes very f oxygen splits up in small. We assume that a molecule o fly ero one of the ents. reagan than a solution o much more readily oxidised than the other oxygen atom 62 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, instead of attacking the readily oxidisable unacted sodium sulphite attacks the much more difficultly oxidisable sodium difficulty. In this case we shall have to assume that this peroxide instead of attacking the readily oxidisable unattacked sodium sulphite will attack the less readily oxidisable sodium arsenite by preference. It seems, therefore that the only course left to us is to find out the explanation in view of the formation of a complex of sulphite and arsenite or of sulphite and oxalate, and that this complex is oxidised as a whole. It is well known that complex oxalates and sulphites do exist. It has been observed ina previous paper (Dhar, Proc. Akad. Vetensk. Amsterdam, 23, 299, 1920) that in Intermediate the oxidation of sulphite and sulphurous acid compound forma- the sulphite ion is the active agent. On the addition of an arsenite to a sulphite, a com- plex which itself is oxidised as a whole is formed. At the same time the velocity of of an intermediate complex compound. The phenomenon of induced precipitation is of common occurrence. When any one of the phos- hates of iron, aluminium or chromium is . precipitated by sodium phosphate in pre- sence of acetic acid and calcium chloride the precipitate after being thoroughly washed with acetic acid gives test for calcium nduce precipitation. hydroxide in presence of copper sulphate, zinc sulphate, nickel the precipitates even after being precipitate after being thoroughly washed with ammonium chloride shows the presence of magnesium. O_O —— lL <= 4 ee OO EE ee ee — 1922.] Indian Science Congress. LS8.C. 63 Moreover when a little of sulphuric acid is added to a solution of calcium or strontium or barium chloride containing ferric or chromium or aluminium salt the precipitated sul- phates of calcium, strontium or barium contain iron or alumi- nium or chromium. Similarly lead sulphate is precipitated along with barium sulphate even in presence of a large excess of ammonium acetate. Magnesium oxalate is precipitated with barium or stron- tium or calcium oxalate in presence of an excess of ammonium chloride and ammonia. These facts make it clear that the phenomenon of induced precipitation is of very general occurrence. n e copp muc more quickly because the inductor nitrous acid remains in Co .... contact with the copper in the tube at rest, a Nitric J hilst in the other case, the inductor is diluted throughout the whole mass of nitric acid. .g. mercuric chloride, by sodium arsenite. [se gated other changes as for instance the de omposition of un- stable substances. It is well known that Potassium chlo. ammonium dichromate decomposes readily bichro mee ot se otassium chlorate ichr ; tassiom rele that in presence of decomposing ammonium vere dichromate or potassium persulphate the d osition temperature of potassium chlorate is appreciably lowered. In this connection it will oe of interest to investigate whether the presence of an easils decomposable explosive will lower down the ene 8A temperature of a difficultly decomposable explosive, and this investigation will throw light on the velocity of decomposition of mixed explosives. 64 1.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Farmer (Jour. Chem. Soc. 1920, 117, 1603, 1432) has re- ; cently shown that the velocity of decomposi- n chemical tion of high explosives becomes greater in pre- change will either gence of another explosive which is more pelennied a ed ot readily decomposed s far our experi- the same nature. ments go we are inclined to the view that one or induce another chemical change of the same nature. eing occupied so far with the question of acceleration and retardation of the velocity of chemical reactions, it would not be out of place to say a few words about the velocity itself. Within the last few years a great deal of theoretical work in this direction has been done notably by Perrin and Lewis. In a recent article (Ann. Phys. 1919 (9), 11, 5) Perrin shows that Arrhenius’ equation for reaction velocity and temperature Se can be derived from the Planck or Wien Meurer a ae radiation law on the assumption that the cal changes. chemical action depends on the absorption a nearly monochromatic radiation. In other words, these investigators postulate that radiation is the entire Motif of all chemical reactions, as well as of radio Mechanism of che- mical change. ture by exposing it to tropical sunlight even in absence of acids, and the inversion of cane sugar in the presence of hydrochloric acid is markedly accelerated by sunlight (com- pare Dhar Zeit. Anorg. Chem., 1920 It should now be emphasised that there is no fundamental difference between the mechanism of photochemical and ther- mal reactions. Ina photochemical reaction the radiating body is not in thermal equilibrium with the reacting substance as it is in a thermal reaction, and the distribution of energy amongst the different frequencies does not necessarily follow Plancks distribution law. Poi pti 5 15 b ys nN a ee ee et ee ———" Pee —— i ae aeaenel 1922.) Indian Science Congress. L.S.C. 65 m the foregoing remarks it is clear that there i is a lot nature than quantitative, in support of the radiation hypo- thesis which seeks to establish a connection between chemical changes (thermal, photochemical and catalytic) and radiation. Hence instead of discarding the radiation hypothesis we should try to bring fresh evidence both theoretical and experimental, in ee of the hypothesis and try to make it more quanti- tative Absorption of light by some acids and their salt solutions, od of clone extinction-coefficient in the ultra- bce —By J.C. GuosH. ‘beac iuasea abs a on coefticien ae the ultra- s fou change in absorption spectra on salt formation. West Coast Sardine Oil.—By P. K. Kurur, J. J. Sup- BOROUGH and H. E. War30n. This oil (cf. Report. Ind. Sc. Congress 1920) has been examined from the point of view of refining, hydrolysing with castor seed lipase, atin reducing ol cael and sulph g. ea refined —— ed its acid value is no and can hy nalpaed by castor seed lipase, but requires : relatively larger amount of the lipase tt most vegatable oils. omega hardened and gives nearly colourless, odourless products. "lt —porpergag: but the product is dark colo ured compared with rarkey d Oil. Preliminary Note on beng Chemistry of neem oil.—By paren Se ge R. Nee n additio perl rides of fatty acids contains both odoriferons ok costiniia sulphur and a cunstituent witha bitter "Te is shown that the odour of ra oil can al -— by partial bynsoganeteets and that the bitter principle can be removed by 2 ‘set 5 ferably eS extracting the seeds first with eer 1 to remove the bitter principle and then with peat to remove il. he acids obtained from the oil se removal of unsaponifiable matter have been examined. The metho opted was conversion — methyl esters and fractional distillation aie reduced press far pa ne stants and oleic acids have been identified. work is being continu ae The investigation es the et 8 ion of neem oil and 2% detection and removal of the impurities. —By Yagnik and Sh. "ud. ABDULLAH. pane nstants of the oil were ; as a result 0 of ee ao work, the following conclusions were arrived a 1, The + study of the constants of the ” er p us a good deal in the investigation of the composition 0: oil. 66 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, 2. The chief cause of the bad smell is the presence of the ally] radi- eal (unsaturated and hence hydrogenation may remove the bad odou r). 3. The soe cause of the bitterness of the oil is due to the aires wre alkaloids—probably quinine and cinchonine or some The exact alkaloids —_ not be definitely settled. 4. The rok a can eg Habearg: for commercial purposes, by at t through animal charcoal (prev cake heated to ied hot tem pekitare! and follo wed by vi vigorous treatment with K,Cr,07 ssid H,SOy, in the ratio of 0- 750) 1 15 sae Hydrogenation of oils.— By J. W. Paut. ——o ser used was reduced nickel. ade obtained from its oxalate accessful catalyst, — obtained from calcined nitrate was betiec. ar ‘th 1e best Sd Lig as abeete ae oe » nickel carbonate, rey! heating it for about half cu ¢ of pure hy ii ta pepe Sag Ecnsias 215- 18°C. po ‘Coa "ston 8 Sauk The glass of which the tube, for the reduction of the nil salt, is made seems to be largely responsible for the activity of the catalys a should be hydrogenated in vessels in which the oalatyie has been prepared Barra oil was solidified to a jelly-like, light pale-green, transparent substance. Til and Mahua oils were also solidified. The reaction between sodium suleniie and sulphur.—By H. E. Watson and M. RasJAcoPata The aeprepecind > e reaction between oo sulphite and ey in presence of w e been studied. Most of the determinations were made at 60° seg 30° : which hansccnicses the rate can be someone measured. In moderately dilute ret tg Smog meta is alien rapidly: in very concentr wea solutions the what less, but in all peg ~ rate of reaction is very gre atte § incre aed by the alien we lar of sulphur, and = auger? seis sonait ions the conversion to "fhiosulphate is complete in less than Other factors noe as io rate of stirring and the effect of catalysts have been stud ncaa se of some reactions.—By R. ©: Ban The kinetics and temperature-coefficients of the following reactions, which are sensitive to light, have been studied in the dark :— (1) ag uit nd iodic ean rey coefficients were fund eunbuctceity measurements. The reaction was fo cor o be sagen sie Se the temperature-coefficient be eing 3°27 be = 29°C and 59°C ; and 2-96 between 59°C and 69°C ; and Acie . ‘ K) _A (T\—Ta) was A cale. according to the equation log oa +s found to be 5213. 2) J chase werk: +COd. dito } as followed by venermesiisn with alkali, and se me id ae emia ae ving a temperature-coefficient of 4°3 betw Cc we 90°C, a: =a "tones? A=8117. HCl ee H,SO, gradually ae t total acidity of the solution, 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1L.8.C. 67 The equilibrium between a mixture of acetic acid and trichoracetic acid and their esters.—By D. D. Karve and J. J. SUDBOROUGH. The Equilibrium ..C0,H+ +001 3.CO,Et > CH3.CO,Et +CCl;.CO,H. has ey _ d at 30°. At given intervene | of time three titrations were made, each with 1 gram of gt ce ixture 1. Free acid by pie with standard ammonium hydroxide using i ° 2. Titration in the. cold with standard sodium hydroxide with henolphthalein as indicator. The difference between this and te. 3. Bagi ies with sodium Pi leer aes and titration of of caustic soda with standard hydrochloric acid. The cifacaine pation, es total alkali required for saponifica- tion and that used under (2) gives the amount of ethyl ate in the mixture. The results show that equilbrium is attained only after some 170 If equivalent quantities of ethyl acetate and raheagnotergs acid are il acetate to ethyl piprnsrkheo te is always ro any et he values of the reaction Weloatlion for aie chenanen CH;3.CO fcber CO,Et—»>CH3.CO,Et + CCl,CO,H CCl; +CO,H + CH,.CO,Et—»CCl;.CO,Bt + CHs CO,H have also been determined at 30°. Coagulation of manganese qosite sol by different elec- trol ea . GANGULY. sol of manganese dioxide was prepared being stabilised by me of sohatias oat the conguieting * otiecss of about thirty different elee- trolytes were investigated. The mum quantity of electrolyte neces brin i ti many of the ovalent ones. The effe te oF variate of concentration of the sol ata me toa cone and cur t of an electrolyte necessary for coagulation and the c seagate ions of the sol. It has been f i iz first increases and then decreases; in 0 aa soanes & quantity of the electrolyte first increases then tation of th. 06 creases with the continual increase 0 of the concentra . on fe It remains constant in the case of lead nitrate and increases gr in the case of epomene chloride. viz. , eer nitrate the — Alcohol f the menthyl esters of some af-unsa- Ss ‘ eae and of their saturated analogues. —By B. Dasanwactians and J. J. SupBOROUGH. the rates The polarimetric method opted fo rmining id, of slcohotrabs of the menthyl coues of Reavis acid, erotonic act 68 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Ipropionic acid, and cinnamic acid with methyl alcohol and also of. the’ A peeionding methyl eg with menthol. Hydrogen oo as catalyst in of was is fo qelculty constant is much iid than when ethyl esters are us red egal cosh Sood menthy] esters. The effect of the aB-olefine linking in and cinnamate is to reduce the values of K to about 1 hoch 5 these for the corresponding saturated esters. An attempt to prepare ona sulphide dyes from aye ia other groups by replacing the auxochromes by m ae groups.— By E. e Watson and SIKHI Bug wn Dorr. engine oN aphthyl—L-mercaptan, C;H;N =N —C\)H,SH (L pre by Leuckart’s reaction on benzene-azo—L-naphthyl amine ; po PEs kr iisee tinting! oarbonol anhydride Se = ae cet SH C ~ 4 by Leuckart’s reaction on p-rosaniline. The former is coloured and soluble in sodium sulphide but gives very poor dyeings from a sulphide vat. The latter is colourless. This result was unexpected in view of the colour of thioindigo red. An attempt to prepare red sulphide dyes by introducing mercaptan groups into dyes of the azine, on i E Watson and Stxni Buusuan Dott Amido sulphydroxy phenazonium hydroxide N N OH CH has been prepared by diazotisin Safranine B (Apo-Safranine) and sub- jecting to Leuckart’s reaction ake s a sulphide dye but the shade is not interesting, being dull violet. Dimethy! we eee g 407 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 69 prepared by the condensation of nitroso dimethy] aniline and m phenylene diamine disulphide, is a sulphide dye giving reddish brown shades which are however very sensitive to acids and alkalis, Dimethyl amino hydroxy sulphydroxy phenazine N WY SH N(CH,) OH a nf7 prepared from the above by diazotising and boiling with water is a sulphide dye. The shades are similar but duller than those of the above dyestuff and are also sensitive to acids and alkalis. Dimethyl aminoe sulphydroxy naphtho phenoxazime CH)N CR, Ci(?) SH prepared by the condensation of nitrosodimethylaniline and ‘disulphide, is dark blue and insol. in sodium sulphide. B naphthol Dimethylamino-sulphydroxy phenoxazone aN SH | (CH N 3) Ys bos) prepared by the condensation of nitrosodimethylaniline and thioresorem is dark blue and insoluble in sodium sulphide. 0 NO QOH HS SH co prepared by the condensation of phthalic anhy: soluble both in caustic soda and sodium sulphide cotton from a sulphide vat. Thio fluoreacein dride and thioresorcin is but is not absorbed by 70 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Diamido disulphydroxy acridine CH HS SH | H,N | NH prepared by the reaper of formaldehyde and m phenylene diamine disulphide and oxidation of the product with papi arene is soluble in sodium sulphide and area light brown shades on cott Dinitroso prec e , prepared by the action of nitrous acid on thioresorcin is soluble in sodium sulphide with a brown colour but has little affinity 8 silen. The preparation and properties of azo- -dyes containing mercaptan groups.—By E. R. Warson and SiKHI Brusuan Durr parte, uew hydroxy mercaptans were prepared as 3 inte ates my Leuckart’s reaction on the corresponding aminophenols :— m. Hydroxy phenyl mercaptan, C,H, OH(1) SH(3) 1 hs eae naphthyl mercaptan, C\y>H, OH(1) SH(5) and the pe ithe 4 were Seerabed from them: Benzidine disazo-m hydrox zy phenyl mercaptan whi ch is brownish yellow in colour, readity soluble in sodium sulphide and has good affinity for ie heed eigeeeeet disazo- #8 oe -naphthyl mercaptan is red but only sight y sol. in sodium sulphide and . little affinity for cotton. neidine disazon’ 2-hydroxy-7-naphthyl mercaptan is ~ but only slight y so sodium sulphide and ous little affinity for cotton. otineate 8azo- elle: id -naphthyl mercaptan is crimson, soluble he in caustic soda res um nears nd dyes cotton zidine ‘isan naphthol polysulphi ide was ee epared by ¢ te me di snotioedd benzidine with- “Diab thol polysulphide. It has a dull mar colour is soluble in son ium hydroxide and sodium sulphide but only aye 08 light ve on cotto de ne- -azo-thioresorcin prepared by coupling diazobenzene canner and thioncabidt cin is yello he hadnt soluble in soda and sodium sulphide and has good affinity for c i Thiobenzidine. Sooke: bAapeahe 1, prepared by diazotising pap dine and couplin ne with- fon — is scarcely soluble in sodium sulphide and has little affinity for re berggs rutbiaedlaia Aspe. salt has the properties of a direct co Thi jobenzidine- disazo-L-naphthol — is brown, soluble in sodium sy e but has aes B rgewn for on. vehi: 4-mercaptan azo pagar ied phenyl-2-mercaptan CH NO,(3) (SH) —N=N— CH, SH(1) OH(4) “prepared by diazo pore nitro-4 aminophenyl mercaptan and coupling with-m-hydroxy P ey To moreaptan | is brown, soluble in sodium ainkids pat has good affinit cotto Thes ous mercaptan derivatives were prepared i in order to study ag effect 0 of mercaptan groups in the cated 2 to the azo-. — up to the present no such compounds had been prepared and analogy 1922.] Indian Science Congress... ° I18.C. 71 would ane specially fast aves! Hat the properties of azo dyes sete from hydroxy naphthyl mercaptans so that the hydroxyl groups would i o-linkin i i tae”, oun aphthol in alkali, it was hoped that these dyes woul o Bn seems eat: - (3) the ES Ges. of azo-dyes containing mercaptan paraaleee on both sides of the azo- Pade The action of nitric acid on metals and some alloys.—By os C. BANERJI. It has been observed that metals aon copper, silver, lead, nickel and alloys like — silver-oin copper, nickel, ~~ ., dissolve more readily in arn acid in the presence of ferr ous, and ferric salts. his is ae rary to tls accepted v xidising agents exnt MnO, KClOy 'H,0», K,Cr,0;, ete., markedly gene oe stp solut e of alain ‘of ferro-nickel alloy in 20% HNO; isnot uniform, but hee Watiee is periodic Oxidation of ferrous sulphate by air.—By P. x. BANEBJI. The rate of oxidation of ferrous sulphate by air does not pce ex- actly the unimolecular formula, ut the Satine approxim mates t ¥ The — hourly oxidation of a deci normal solution at sbau $2 Cc is bebe tad en the experiments are spread over 1,488 hours. - aofin sulphate, magnesium sulphate, z ulphate, mangane' ammonium sulphate, are slight retarders and sulphuric acid and phat ober sulphate ee great retarding effect. Only potassium sulphate s a slight accelerator. Studies on the Dependence of Optical Rotatory Power on Chemical Constitution, Part IV : The Rotatory a of Aryl Derivatives of Hisimino-and-aminocampho — K. Sinan, M. Stneu and J. Lat. his paper the rotatory power of the se he of condensing causphevantone with the following diamines are descr (a) hydrazine; (6) benzidine ; (c) tolidine ; (d) saitaiaind (e) Pp» P’> ee Lie amine. Benzidine and tolidine giv dine pepe only one. The two forms are re rical isomerides, since in the — oe ett e two precel 9 aleve shor ee arde| as georne ne path’ ae cog give the tive on reduc The effect of ortho- erative on the rotatory power 2 ea Ag diphenylene-bisiminocamphot ([M]p 5432° and 5472° in os Xai he casos of 0, 0! It is accompanied by low ve a, Sort aad 3 407°). sea ( .2003°). The sequence f oF o’," ditolylenebisiminocamphor ( : anes diminishing rotatory 0,0’, of the substituent element or group in ng power in this series is H > CH3> ith he product of condensing camph eames. We ae the highest diphenylamine is remarkable in several ways. 14740° in pyridine), ecular “ power hitherto recorded (Mp. Fanaa ts the mélecalar rotstory power of 1.14 Nepiey O. bia tines oe r (Singh : ane Bin ht. 1930, 117, 1599). *" and Sue ae® pho a har opti Cor, active dyes known. {t is both thermo- Were and phototroet ic. p’, diamido- 72 S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, The ey of acetone from acetates and acetic acid.— Ry M. G. Kexre, J. J. Supsorovucs and H. E. Watson Co wer cheat aan. eal have been carried out on the yields of acetone from m, calcium and barium acetates plas: Cie Barium sara acres nd to give the highest isi a I er of experiments the continuous production of a e from acotio acid by means of catalysts has been studied, the. c catalyst “used being th tates of magnesium, calcium, barium and mangan d pumice. Yields t is r cent have been obtained. The experiments were all ——— in a small iron retort heated by Means of nicrome resistance w Certain observation on a surface-tension phenomenon — By P. B. Ganevty and B. C. Bane It observed that when a —_— of an easily soluble substance was held vertically suspended in water in such a way that only about balf of the stick was under water, a well —— alse was taceas prvi _ o be a gen ral case with sticks and regular shaped solution of metal hae by acids under similar conditions showed the one effect though to a lesser degree. everse effect was “ager whe ena of iron was suspende d in Surface tension of soap solutions for different concentra- tions.—By A. L. Narayana and G. SUBRAHMANYAM. Accurate ocenoree se ecg tension of solutions of sodium oleate, and p astyl s r water analysis, are made by the capillarity method, and by the. bubble metho fin For the accurate measurement of pressure inside a bubble roved man sae is presi sete gene warplane other types both in quickness ad delicacy ve — on. e experiments pro , (t) Surface =m a soap solution is same at all concentrations ‘tween wide limits. ye (it) The angle of contact between glass and the solution in air (zzz) = reliability of the eee method for studying the surface on of soap soluticn Molecular conductivity of potassium sete i 1 sol- By N. A. Yasnixk and B. R. Sos 1. The molecular nope of potassium iodide in (a) a 7 alcohol ; (b) acetone ; (c) pyrid Bose rit ne oa eo: furfural ; ( brenzaldehyde and (g) slianhicackbinb: solve ¢ investiga 2. As aresult of the exper Hiatal: acki rh was found that :— (@ ) In all cases conduc ctivity in ases as w increase the di lution. ‘3 (%#) It ee be held that the prods tative abot of a solvent is t parallelism to the cane consta ol (44) The goles between viscosity and eaaagntii , as poin 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 73 t by certain investigators, was not found to hold good strictly but certain exceptions to the above rule, were ob- ved. Study in viscosities of cobalt, copper and mercuric chlo- rides with a view to find the constitution of the com- plexions formed in the solutions. —By N. A. YasxiK and Ram LAL UBEROY. l. The viscosity of solutions of single salts at different concentra- tions was studied. be salts examined were the alkali chlorides and the chlorides of copper balt and bi ai ry. After the ‘investigation f the viscosity of geen? a single salts, — Tlacouily of the binary pare fess es of chlorides tee = obalt, copper and ercury with sikealt chlorides were studied in two e following conclusions were arrive fo (i) In case of solutions of single argon ne: little relationship was notice tween viscosity and concen ration. (4¢) In case of binary mixtures, uhen the ities in two differ- nt ratios were compared, it was found that the inne of the complexion in case of cobalt, copper mercuric chlorides, with alkali chlorides, was nearer to aes (M'!Cl,) —_ to M (M!Cl,). The slight dev iation may be accounted or by association or r hydration taking plee On the stability of chromates at high acetone M. Raman Narr and H. E. Watson Experiments have been carried out on the equilibrium between Scetbnatge trioxide and bases in presence of air at different tempera nS cae chromate is coe Shi: formed from lime and bepress — at 50° but be egins to decompose at about 7 Excess of lim sek of formation and ince ses the amount of decomposition at higher temperature ure sodi temperature o wie to its fusibility, but a 2 mi I bonate a m trioxide in the equivalent vroportions vr : 0°65: 1 oi a connthadiog yield of chro e in 4 hours at 660° and i t 1050°. Curves showing the pcre cao percentage deco co saition and temperatures for different mixtures 1 e been determin wagers oe of some Indian minerals.—By N. A. YAJNIK nd §. J, Kon 1. ee mparatively nell work has been done, in India, on the ie tant subject of aa sansapreag vity. The radium conten nt of a great rope he . minerals is consequently unknown. It was, therefore, though to jeation in this direction. carry out some invextigalaan in ibe 2 CT ths eaeeat investig ation. three wee in 2. : Joly’s solution metho _ —, cal i e soluti , were kept at least Par cxspiuseee < B Bum “3 mstead Double Electroscope with a sake wiiacation was used. of 3. Out of the minerals sent by the as aga egg active m Ochre and er 74 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, 4. Besides these, some minerals from Travancore and some samples of Bauxite from Kashmir State were examined and were found to show some activity. Poppy petals.— By J. N. Raxsuir and S. N. Sinaua. Poppy petals from several districts of nate United Provinces were examined for ash, ep invert sugar and tannin Note on the Liesegang Phenomenon.—By N. G. CHATTERJI. (1) Page of silver chromate takes place much better when sil- ver nitrate is added to a solution of potassium dichromate in gelatin a the re (2) Peptisation re the eo of cobalt, iron and other metals takes place in exactly the same way i oo of gelatin, agar-agar, i d hat of (3) iodic precipitation was observ aa the case of cobalt. hydroxide _ aoe tin and of mercuric iodide in silicic acid gel. 4) eatin. is an important factor in the phenomenon of periodic paderrpiet n. pa soles fy and_ periodic pee: —By K. R. Krisana Atver and K, R AN. Periodic Cae similar to 3 observed in — (the Liesegang phenomenon) may be bro ought about even in the nce of ed. T t phenomenon is due to 0 spontaneous crystallisation from a supersaturated solution “i the metastable limit is upheld. PHstcarapt are shown In illustratio Some derivatives of carbamic esters. Chlorine as a simul- taneous oxidising and cigensing agent.—By R Datra and B. i “re TTERJE It has been found when chlo isda passed into carbamic = in alcoholic oatiae the alcohol is oxidised to the corresponding dehyde which immediately condenses with the carbamic esters to form dicarbami c esters methyl alcohol and ethyl carbamic ester, methylene diurethane Mss NH Soot i is formed. In a similar manner, the following tee aera have been prepared; methylene dicarbamic methyl estet OSs oar COOGEE » methylene dicarbamic propyl ester, ; CHa < nay. COUGH methylene dicarbamic isobuty! ester, CH < aia NH.COOC.H, methylene dicarbamic isoamy] ester, eer Ni. COOGsH benzylidene dicarbamic ethy! ester, NH.COOG,H,: Tn the case of apr Wai - ethyl alcohol medium, the alcohol gets chlorinated and at the same time oxidised to aldehyde which whic! condenses with omtiane. to toni rm dichloroethylidene diurethane 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.0. 75 CHCl.CH < NH COOH: In the case of substituted urethanes such as phenyl aoe, and a- pig ih -urethane, th type of reaction takes place but ~ = seativity ot oe aromatic groups, they get seipniated a th e With phe urethane in methyl alcohol, methylene ai- Vii tishecoheetaes 6 . i P : C H Cl.NCOOC,H; is formed. With o-naphthylurethane and Cc methyl] alcohol, methylene di-tetrachloro-a-naphthyl diurethane CH,< CO ELCLN, COOCH? is produced. The above type of condensations falls es in the case of secondary alco has also been found in this con ecsncee that ethyl neh ebm sacsaaate ester undergoes ydretyals to a cyclic compound, diethy-4- cloro-methy! cyclomethylene hydrazine imide 1°3- areachuiylots N.COOC,H, CH,C1CH< > NH which form an imide chloride and an acetyl COOC, derivative. Dichlormethylearbamic ester, NCly.COOCH3 has also been prepared for the first time os ing chlorine through an aqueous solu- tion of methyl carbamic ester Purification of crude eet B. GanapatHi Rao, J. J. SupporoveH and H. E. Watson. The refining of crude nitre at temperatures between 55 and 100°C has bee “Wied with the object of obtaining a purified product containing as little sodium chloride as possible. The solubility values of sodium chloride in saturated potassium nitrate solutions determined by Etard Ann, m. P mpera- ture for the dige An efficient method has been worked out whereby, by one crystallisation white crystals of nitre can be o 00m _ containing not more than 0-2 per jcent ium ch] hloride, whi net the amount of potassium nitrate in the residue or ‘sitta’ is recap w 3 per cent which is equal to a loss of 5 per cent of the tota nineties Th De aofubiltiia (in water) of the following three of borg tet cheats 4: (2) NasSO,, KNO3; (3) ape NaCl, KNOg have ; — es ined between the tempe aratures 22° 5°C. The possibility o (a) - a sulphate —- with the eae of nitre and (6) ome . omc rs position between the salts present has been cenbilecell Atten drawn to the capeetestti of the latter in pointer of extraction. The extent and character of the Teh deposits of the United Provinces and the possibilites of - . cial utilisation—By E. B. WaTSON @ pot. MUKERJEF. ae les taken from tho large usar plain Cinmighoes a Loeeee ke was found that not all usar plains contain ence esa na es onal all the main lines of rail in the province and the areas re efflorescence were no 76 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Samples were taken systematically from the largest efflorescent area observed from the r re viz. an area which ora — thirty miles along the E.JI. Railway south of Etawah. Thes mples were analysed and showed considerable variations in cormpesition, the average being about 5 per cent of sol ect salts in Paes first inch of soils and a ratio of 2 : 1 between Sertonete & ulpha It was estimated t. -e this one ae ache supply 37,000 tons of soda ash per annum and the total province five m illio The soluble salts soutaie ed in these reh deposits a are chiefly sodium carbonate and sodium sulphate with some organic matter. Experime nits are © dese cribed to show to what extent it is possible and might be profita (1) oe obtain suites carbonate (of Sg degree of purity demanded the trade) by recrystallisatio (2) To. ‘obtain a better separatio sags passing in carbondioxide to t the carbonate into tioustbeans te (3) To. convert —_ salts completely into carbonate by the black ash (4) To convert “the salts completely into carbonate by a modification he black-ash process (omitting calcium carbonate). The manufacture of trinitrotoluene from Assam and Burma petroleum.— By E. R. Watson Both Assam and Burma petroleums contain a considerable quantity of aromatic hhydroea eit ns. Processes king trinitrotoluene from these petroleums are ng in indian Patanis Nos. 6802 and 7449 of 1921. mportance pe meee 2 secon lies in the — rte they put India in’ a position nufacture all her explosives from materials pect ee tr in oie vithout part at: for the » developement of a large coal-tar and coking bye-product in oratory experiments are now des ecthed show ing that no larger quantities of acids are “i gies for the manufacture of trinitrotoluene by ig B atgeees than in the ord ery process, a the process 1s no being tried on a se sor a scale at the Government explosives factory at Aravekaaie: South India Phototropy of inorganic salts.— By GopaL SINGH. Cuprous riage and bromide in presence of water, have yore found to be phototropic. An attempt has been made to explain this phibtdtropienn: wascairsit ate catalysis.—By A. K. SANYAL. Ferr rric, ag HPC chromium, and cobalt are positive catalysts persia chlorine, bromine and sodium sulphite have been und t Spee O4; Goce: (1) HgC, and (NH,), C,0,; (2) CuSO, and (NH4), C2 ) BON) and (NH,)p C07 (4), (NH) 00, and Ip; (6) ‘Febling® soluti eiahdy iach _ of lead and bismuth were exposed t i. ben sunlight and rved that in general the freshly precipitated “< ones were ten pat repented active than those which h kept for a long time or have been boiled for a long time. South Indian Wattles.— By C. Sxtntvasan. The paper summarises the results of an investigation of the arr content, optimum temperature of extraction and tanning prem 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.0. 77 of he — of ie Acacia Decurrens found in South India, indicates how nnin content varies with age and discusses the question of the aes Tcteast Industry in relation to Wood Distillation in South India A note on some tartrates.—By K. P. CHATTERJEE. my Beant: investigation on the influence of temperature on iaieipitadlen by double decomposition, gee en strong plate are mixed, the following are some of the new tartrates obtaine (1) Two varieties of regents tartrate of the pe, Co(CgH140,), , and also the anhydrous salt Co(CyHyO,): (2) m nesium ‘eetentn MgC, 4 4), 23H,O and also the anhydrous salt ; anganese tartrat n( 40s), 2He t nhydro (4) complex copper potassium tartrate 30u,C,H,O4), TCH 40g), 3H,0 and the anhydrous salt; (5) strontium tartrate Sr(C,H,O,),H,O and the anhydrous salt. The formulae of these salts have been determined by of methods and the properties have been studied. Their ‘acleeuler volumes have also been determined, in which a general confirmation of the accepted molecular volume of water a crystallisation, has been obtained. ages beet dace on indigo Se tbedree poo vat textile —By N. A. Ya D. R. Sarna. JNIK @ 1. It was found by obeys! avetgnton that pure indigotine, the Sy ang pepe sats oe atter ral and synthetic indigo, extracted after neko: sa be Pat reduced, with N.F. hydrosulphite, in an per met, = = pasieeaties of 60° to 80°C, and in the pro- portion of 1: fibres, i.e > did deep s 3. The presence of eeey small amouats of boric acid, acetic acid, etc., was found to increase the maximum shade, keeping all the factors the same. The nature of thé re meeag involved is not underst sea at present but the additions to the vat are phe recommended owin, (t) Control of over (it) The chances of of ave. i.e. maximum shade obtained east amount of indigotine. The whole pr pete rests on finding out the a of over-reduc- tion and be condition sand nature of collulose in the v ture of Portland Laboratory experimen nts on the manufac cement from ties available in the United Prov. YG. _ E. B. Warson, K. ©. Muxkersee and N. G. y ~ CHATTERJEE. _ Chemical analysis indica ing in the United Provinces are (dl igh percentage of calcium carbonate ; magnesia in many materials. mak- the chief drawbacks for ce ment a ou) deficiency of material containing & 12) too high # perce ntage of i180. °° Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, But sc ge to chemical analysis satisfactory cement should be made fro (1) aes ae near Lucknow and the adjacent clay (see Hallidy’s report to the sana Board). (2) Kunkar ‘cin ne awnpore and Sutna limestone. ie opie ie made to prepare on a small scale satisfactory amples of t from these materia ta yer our experiences are des pen i regards a) catenating the correct proportion for the mixture ; (2) veffoc of varying the proportions on the properties of the cement; (3) effect of burning at diferent temperatures. Brominated Isocyamines —By K. L. MOUDGILL. Three bromoderivatives of sensitisers of Bye babs and gay 20 type save been eserves sed and the influence of the presence of a of bromine in the ene ee of the qui addins sicrebaciel sbudied: The region of meelivencas. shifts towards the ae end of the spectrum and the intensity of sensitiveness is considerably reduced. Some induced oxidations.— By N. N. Mirrra. It has been observed that sodium sulphite, sodium phosphite, = formic sat can induce the reduction of mercuric chloride by sodiu arseni The oxidations of tise hydroxide, Sgeoingpe hydroxide, and man- ganous hydroxide can induce in each c the oxidation of potassium oxalate by oxygen ae Attempt has been made to explain these reactions. Tetramethyldiaminoacridine.—By K. L, MoupGILL. e different methods of preparation of the compound are described Thr and ke yields Sctio ed. The best results were given by the method outlined below " 4 Oe oe CH. 3 HCHO oe RN. (Mey REDUCTION ne we orem MeN | N.Me, New methods of preparation of 2; 4 dinitrodimethylaniline and 3: 3 dinitro 4: 4’ tetramethyldiaminodiphenylmethane are describe d. Dyes from omnabenie anhydride.—By A. C. Sircak and S. B. Dur In this paper the — have shown that camphoric anhydride. ‘1 4 made to condense with various hydroxy and amino compounds yie 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 79 condensation products, which possess interesting tinctorial and flourescent properties, similar to the corresponding flouresceious, Eosius and Rhodamines obtained from phthalic anhydride, anphthalic tebe or quinolinic anhydride. A good number of such condensation products have been aeaueibed. The study of iodine absorption of certain Indian vegetable oils.— B . Yassik and M. Ras 1 Ae mparative — of the iodine sade of peal Indian wie, table oils was ied on by four different methods, viz. Hubl, Wijs Hanus, gear Winkler’s Seocisee Bromide method. 2. Iodine number of certain Tidiea oils such as neem oil, soap nut oil, sukhehain oil, bes, have not been studied previously, was deter- mined for the first tim py ae on the constitution of longifolene —By J. L. SIMON Experiments which have been made with the object of elucidating the eonatitatlis of the sesquiterpene, longifolene, were described. The constituents of some Indian essential oils—By J. L. SIMONSEN The constituents of the following oils have been determined: fro resins ee Pinus khassya and Pinus excelsa, from the leaves of Abies ebbiana, from io seeds of two species be Xanthoxyllum. Note on some new oils and fats.—By M. Gopat Rav. The oils (or fats) ae the following seeds have been e mined in detail: Mimusops elengi. Garcinia cambogia, Payena jleijere, ‘Chlorolesry- lon sweetania, Calophiniains wightiana. The acids obtained on hydrolysis of the oils were separated and identified. Section of Zoology. President :—Dr. N. ANNANDALE. F.A.S.B. Presidental Address. Eruics orf ZooLoey. ‘‘His majesty has taught men eae ing new and practical and has made an exce \ the animal, guards the stores, teaches equity, reveals the excellent, and stimulates the lazy man.’ (Blochmann’s Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I, p. 217. Let us constitute — humble followers of Akbar and strive to find a rule that will at once protect t the animal, guard the stores of zoological lea arning, maintain 2 opal _ between zoologists and stimulate the excellent, if not the lazy -man to sound zoological research. 80 L.S8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVII], Sir William Jones in his inaugural discourse to the Asiatic instincts, and qualities of birds, beasts, insects, reptiles, and fishes,” he said, ‘‘be acertained, either on the plan of Buffon, or on that of Linnaeus, without giving pain to the objects of our examination, few studies would afford us more solid instruction or more exquisite delight.” He went on to state that he could not conceive of the feel- ings of a naturalist who could occasion the misery of an inno- cent bird, ‘‘ or, deprive even a butterfly of its natural enjoy- ment, because it has the misfortune to be rare or beautiful.” He then gave the following translation of a couplet of Firdausi :— ‘* Ah! spare yon emmet, rich in hoarded grain ; He lives with pleasure, and he dies with pain.” Elementary as was Sir William Jones’s concept of zoology, his opinion as a scholar and a poet cannot be dismissed lightly. There is, as the French say, nothing that kills like ridicule, but ridicule kills only when its object is really ridiculous. 10 laugh at what is true and solid is merely to exhibit lack of sympathy and sense. There seems to me, however, to be some confusion of thought in Sir William Jones’s statement, which I have not quoted in full, and, moreover, he has ignored the fundamental ditference in the point of view of a man _ whose attitude the tail of his ox to believe that his motive is entirely free Imperial Universities open to the public once a year, an™ ”q provide a popular exhibition of scientific apparatus an! preparations. In 1915 T happened to be in a Japanse univer- 1922.1 Indian Science Congress. 1..8.C. 81 sity town in which an exhibition of the kind was in progress. The main exhibit in the physiological laboratory was a living rabbit firmly tied down and cut open in suc \ illustrate the beating of the heart. Even supposing that the have caused a riot in England, even before the police inter- vened; but in Japan, women and children examined it with perfect equanimity, and my friends of the university staff could not see anything wrong. And yet these very professors and lecturers were in the habit every year of holding a solemn ser- vice of expiation in one of the great Buddhist monasteries of the city for the souls of the animals which had been dissected in their Jaboratories. It is an interesting speculation whether the Japanese crowd would have viewed the vivisected rabbit with the same canons of Japanese art. must confess tions to the exhibition were just as much aesthetic as moral. The study of zoology in India has not, as a matter of the corner, for in the days of Bl) l Alcock, zoological papers were amongst the most important published in the Society’s Journal. Nevertheless, it 18 as well that in our zoological work we should keep m mind both Firdausi and Piyadasi. I need not waste your time on the eran dog and hates mankind. : Scientific work is plain-sailing as long as @ man can do it alone. It is when he has to con k who loves her experience peculiar difficulty, namely. in ~ owl i their seniors. help they have received from their a ite ment in a language not one’s own. ™ over, is often necessary to —— rapes courtesy and subtle flattery. The bes ay culty is to say frankly what help has been received and to express gratitude in as few words as possibie. cone Phe question of plagiarism is even more difficult in scienti 6 $2.1.8.C Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, fic research than in literature. If Shakespeare, as some of my younger colleagues would argue, was justified in appropriating a commonplace plot and transmuting it into a work of genius, we also are justified in using the ideas of other as our own. Unfortunately few of us are Shakespeares; or Darwins. Dar- win was one of the most modest of men, and always most scrupulous in acknowledging assistance of any kind, even, or perhaps especially, from those whose lights were much less than his own. In acknowledging help, whether from the written or the spoken word, we cannot do better than accept the introductory part of the Origin of Species as our guide. But this does not dispose of the more general question of plagiarism. How much may be legitimately appropriated, or may anything be appropriated at all? In the Roman Church St. Alphonso of Ligouri, the one modern Doctor of the Church, is accepted as the final referee on ethical questions. He was bold enough to draw up a tariff of mortal sin in theft. He ruled that in certain circumstances a respectable man who stole a shilling from a working man or fourteen shillings from a crowned head, did not commit a mortal sin; but that to steal even a few farthings from a beggar was always a mortal sin. In scientific ethics we bave no such authority as St. Alphonso; but the rule that nothing whatever should be taken from any living person without due acknowledgment is a good one. We must steal not at all, either from king or beggar. There are, however, in science as in literature many ideas and to an author, should be attributed correctly. For example, the saying that a practical man practises the follies of his ancestors is often attributed to Huxley, but really emanated in the first instance from Disraeli, in whose Coningsby it is placed, with many other self-evident sentiments, in the mout things ina clear and appropriate manner. It is not appropriate to couch a plain statement of facts in highly figurative OF ela- 1922.) Indian Science Congress. L.$.C. 83 in zoological literature must be chaste simplicity, but journalese is not simple, nor is it chaste. Superfluous words, words issued to startle or confound without thought of their precise grammatical to write in describing an insect: ‘* body black ; the legs are brown.” _ I would advise every zoologist to study Sir Arthur Quiller- Couch’s lectures. On The Art of Writing. He will find some hard sayings. With many others, I have found the state- ment that a case can only meana box not a little disconcerting, from both a philological and a literary point of view but the fact that such statements make us feel uncomfortable proves that they contain an element of truth. Apart from literary style in the writing of zoological papers, the question of the mechanical preparation of the editor of the Record and Memoirs of the Indian Museum I often receive manuscripts that need many hours’ careful and trouble- some work before they can be sent to the printer. If it were name of the genus of the species has been changed since the adays are more than ‘‘ Scarabees.” This 1s an immoral met not only because no man has the right to narrow Pe ie? et . oO a single family of beetles, but also because the whole o : ‘4 logy is at present encumbered with uncoordinated details t _ g the machinery of progress instead of ve 08 arpa a pi eee pC aE ausenee an iuterest if we _ ° 2 Fe) 5 Qa = Qu @ 3 2 = Rr ce) Qu 5 ig 5 : = ge S ° S S ct Ee. =] rr 84 LS.C. Proceedings of the Ninth (N.S., XVIII, interest in the Shakespeare-Bacon controversy than I did in Icelandic politics, but wished to impress the foreigner. You may apply this parable to zoology as you like. recent years zoological controversy, like most other branches of criticism, has grown more refined. but we are still far from the urbane irony which an American critic regards as one of the highest manifestations of the literary spirit in modern England. Courtesy is apt to degenerate into irrespon- sible and often irrelevant insinuation, such as that of an anti- Indian spirit in this country, or of slackness in war in Europe. case of a young man who brought to a friend of mine a paper in which far-reaching conclusions were derived from somewhat meagre research. My friend pointed out that the evidence hardly justified the conclusions. ‘‘Oh’’, said the author ‘but I can change the conclusions! ”’ n the other hand, it is quite unnecessary to call a mana liar because you disagree with him on some controversial point, or even on some matter of observation. All men cannot think, or even see, alike, and because a man is senior to one’s self, or teristic of the Malay race—and enquired if this could be true “ Doubtless, T'uan,”’ was the reply, ‘“‘but perhaps he ye i r courteous ; no offence was caused, and the bargain was con- eluded in a manner satisfactory to all concerned. feelings of the and fee but seems to me a good one. Some years ago I published @ ae in the Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal in which 1922.) Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 85 pointed out that there was considerable diversity in the frogs usually grouped under the name Rana tigrina. 1, therefore, suggested that several distinct species should be recognised. Dr. G A. Boulenger, then in charge of the Reptiles and Batrachia in the British Museum and still recognised as the leading herpetologist in Europe. did not agree with me. He paid me the great compliment of sending me a paper for publication in the Records of the Indian Museum, refuting my claim for the specific recognition of the different forms of Rana tigrina, which he regarded as merely races or varieties. In certain points Dr. Boulenger was evidently right and o i wrong. So I wrote a second note expressing my V as modified by Dr. Boulenger’s argument. Of this I sent the manuscript to him; and he replied ina third note. The e the zoological world together, without the slightest bitter- ness, loss of mutual respect, or ill-feeling on the part of either In the official document whereby the Zoological Survey of India was constituted in 1916, our relations with the techni- cal departments are laid down as being those of “co-opera- tion without subordination.” The thanks of all Indian zoolo- gists are due to the man who discovered this formula—I do not know his name. but also its independence of direct economic aims. nothing to say against applied science, provi 5 science at all, but the term is often “ applied - —, akin to the Holy Roman Empire, which has been desor! neither holy, Roman, nor an iS ; i ical branches, ven i te ee ssible, ‘‘ practical results he wh in which the mathe- o9 rs. science the matter ti : . lied piso Pasay ino sie? be he life of the animal is more vastly more complex and just as t . 84 IS.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, interest in the Shakespeare-Bacon controversy than I did in Icelandic politics, but wished to impress the foreigner. You may apply this parable to zoology as you like. In recent years zoological controversy, like most other branches of criticism, has grown more refined, but we are still far from the urbane irony which an American critic regards as one of the highest manifestations of the literary spirit in modern England. Courtesy is apt to degenerate into irrespon- sible and often irrelevant insinuation, such as that of an anti- hardly justified the conclusions. “but I can change the conclusions! ”’ On the other hand, it is quite unnecessary to call a mana liar because you disagree with him on some controversial point, or even on some matter of observation. All men cannot think, or even see, alike, and because a man is senior to one’s self, or belongs to a different race, he is not necessarily wrong. If a sense of the majority of zoologists were endowed with ) humour (which, after all, as Thackeray has pointed out, 18 essentially the same thing as a sense of proportion) much controversy would be avoided altogether, the real point at issue not being any point of fact or even of interpretation but merely some personal fad, jealousy or spite. 1 was once buying some sleeping-mats in the Malay State of Kelantan. The man who had brought them for sale stated that it j turned ut “Doubtless, Tuan,’ was the reply, “but perhaps he only worked one day in each month.’ The retort was @ retort courteous ; no offence was caused, and the bargain was con- cluded in a manner satisfactory to all concerned. _ The true test in all controversy is the inner feelings of the disputants. So long as a man respects his opponent and feels no bitterness towards him, controversy is a good thing ; but in scientific controversy there must be no reservations, no — We must play with all our cards on the table. p : 4 years ago I pableee Beh 1922.] Indian Science Congress. I.8.C. 87 trees.” This mystic aroma is compared by the early English poet to the hope of Divine salvation. slumbers. Virgil in his Georgics wrote what was accepted for centu- ries by the learned as a manual of practical agriculture poet- ically expressed. Among other processes he described the manufacture of a swarm of bees from the carcase of a heifer. Imagine the poet reclining in his cool verandah with a manu- script of Thescritus half unrolled on his lap. and pausing in his s a . . dictation to gaze over the countryside and muse or nately for his reputation as a practical agriculturist his (or father Theocritus’s) process for the abiogenetic production of honey-bees, which involved the slaughter of a prime heifer, was as unsound economically as it was biologicaliy impossible No one tried the experiment, and so-the process was accepted from generation to generation as practical. In actual fact the light-hearted, and doubtless illiterate, Samson, who slew a lion on his way to visit his lady-love and afterwards found a comb of wild honey in the skeleton, and made a riddle of it to puzzle the Philistines, was much the more practical man of the two. In modern times the man who introduced mongooses into the West Indies, rabbits into Australia or sparrows into North America doubtless thought that he had accomplished a great work of applied biology—at first. : In discussions on the value of zoological works there 1s nothing that makes me more indignant than the saying that this or that piece of Indian research is good work—for India. and many others—have no reason to claim indulgence. _ eh can be nothing more fatal to Indian science than to aim at a low ideal, and no greater insult can be : hi- scientific effort than to judge it from a racial or a geograp calstand-point. Zoology is often regarded in : rella of the sciences, and it is, therefore, necessary On oe re for zoologists to mingle the meekness of the dove with the subtlety of the serpent. Some years ago, 10 about a certain unity of purpose in the adm Indian Museum I incurred the accusation of | from one of my colleagues. I replied that | my inistration of the latent kaiserism t seemed to me 88 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIHII, improbable that the youngest and poorest of the scientific departments under the Government of India would arise from the mud like Pharaoh’s lean kine and swallow its more prosper- ous brethren. However effective such replies may be for the moment, the necessity for them does not tend to edification. One branch of science may be poorer in loaves and fishes than another, but all are equal. oology is so closely connected with other branches of biology, and so dependent in the last resort on geology, chem- istry and physics, that in my own work IJ find it frequently necessary to apply to members of other scientific depart- ments for special information. My experience has been that such information is always given in a most ungrudging and to assist all scientific men in their work, and especially in their research ; but to the gods, alas, it has seemed otherwise. The gods of Olympus led a free and joyous life, feasting on nectar and ambrosia: in files and official etiquette the gods of the Himalaya have found more congenial fare. A witty Chairman of the Trustees of the Indian Museum, in which four Imperial survey departments are concerned, once remarked that the chief difficulty in its administration was that the parts were so much greater than the whole. Hypertrophy of the depart- mental consciousness is a disease to which we heads of scienti- fic departments are by no means immune; a disease, moreover, which the Board of Scientific Advice, despite its zeal in pre- venting “‘ the overlapping of functions,” has failed to cure. 4m placing zoology on a sound basis in India individual effort alone is of any avail, but the effort though individual must be unselfish, it must not be inspired by any kind of bitterness or self-seeking. We must realize with a sigh that the intelligence of a committee is often much lower than that of its least intelligent member. Even a committee, however, is preferable to individual patronage. 1 am of the opinion that private donations to absolutely free. By the time of Alexander, however, ne intellectual light of Greece was fading out, and democracy. the m i we 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 89 countries of the modern world—whether it be in the dealings of Pope Urban with Galileo or in those of the British Govern- ment with scientific men in the early part of the War—ignor- ant members of the official hierarchy—and even a high official of the most excellent administration may be very ignorant of science—have attempted to treat science much as St. Columba treated the practical experience of St. Oran. The story is told in full in a comparatively late Irish life of Columba and is barely hinted at in more authentic documents. It been decided that one man must die for the community and become the guardian spirit of the shrine. St. Columba called for volunteers and St. Oran, who is said to have been his brother, offered himself. St. Oran was accordingly buried alive. After three days St. Columba, apparently overcome with human feeling, caused the grave to be opened. 8t Oran opened his eyes and said, ‘‘ There is no mystery in death and hell is not like what it was said to be,” St. Columba, doubtless thinking that the corpse was possessed of devil, cried out in alarm, “ Earth, earth on the eyes of Oran, lest he bla ore!” And so it was done. ‘Earth on the eyes of Oran’ has become a proverb in Gaelic. : I had recently in London an opportunity of discussing the position of zoology in this country with one of the greatest of living zoologists. He maintained that zoology should not be enconraged in India until India was in a position to do in- dependent work. By independent work he meant research independent of official control. Apart from aJ] personal consid - erations, I was unable to agree with him, for I see no way of fostering zoological research at present in India but through the agency of government. It is quite true that no branch of science can be said to be on a sound basis unless it 1s indepen- dent, and that the flame of research must burn feebly so long as it is not fed by the spirit of individuality. Moreover, the alue of the indepen- ? dence of science will be appreciated by Science and officialdom are as ant “ and the snake. but officialdom in its ——— form 1s a oe nfo matter of the spirit: abiit im mores. = No government that con- ci month. I ar i ith a dysentery ° aasod “sccketety Stove ite Finance Department. 90 ES.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Zoology throughout the world owes a great debt to the Government of India as the only Government that has found- ed a zoological survey on a basis of pure research. At the present time zoological posts sanctioned in previous years are kept vacant in Great Britain in the interests of so-called economy, while in India the Government is at any rate attempt- ing to place zoological research on a sound financial basis. The constitution of the Indian Museum is now, especially in the matter of zoology, much more liberal than that of the British Museum from which it was originally copied. We have, therefore, in India justification for the hope of a brighter age. With faith in our calling and hope in its future we zoologists are in a very strong position. In the whole course of human history there is nothing that has caused more waste of genius, the rarest and most pre- cious of human possessions, than the opposition of officialdom to the progress of knowledge; but even in our struggle with the spirit of officialdom we must preserve two essential quali- ties, reason and good humour, and the latter does not exclude done as much harm as the ignorance and stupidity of officials. Charity is not only a virtue but also a very powerful weapon in the cause of science, which is the cause of truth. The Scot’s half-reverential pity for the Devil, the great Adversary, but for all that the “ puir De’il,” has done good work for morality and efficiency. The fever of fanaticism is all-powerful in initiative, but in the end produces without fail an antitoxin of officialdom. Science can afford to be magnanimous, and the petty politics of the passing hour need not concern us. Truth is great and will prevail. Whatever may be our political views, whatever our race, or creed, or caste, Pope’s words stand true in science :— ‘* For Forms of Government let fools contest ; hate’r is best administered is best: For Modes of Faith let graceless zealots fight ; His can’t be wrong whose life is in the right: In Faith and Hope the World will disagree But all Mankind’s concern is Charity.” Pearl production in the Indian pearl oyster —By J. ELL. This paper embodies the results of twenty years’ acquaintance with pearl oyster research; it sums up the definite conclusions at which the author has arrived. ar o concentric layers around a nucleus, Any of the four shell layers ( including the peri s. The best are cyst-pearls which arise from a saccate invagination of the mantle epithel losi irritati bject. Cyst-pearls are of two kinds, J oi 1922. | Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 91 those that are induced by the presence and irritation of pone foreign a, @ grain ody, usually a dead ina larva, a grain of r intrusive particle, and th that a nucleus of pivourasid ike substance derived from the oyster’s own tissues. Thef s8, according author’s investigations, comprises the sale of the larger cyst-pearls,— 2 se supnee arls—the Jatter of the smaller ones of this description, itute by far the larger ancien: of cyst-pearls hi pata elased e cyst the of pearl origin_in its proper perspective ; we see that cest formation than was at first velerse are nevertheless the most important rg f supreme importance from the secant rape commercial standpoint. The process of pearl dn ion in the case of these two kinds of ho pearls and also in that of muscle pearls we detailed as deduced fr experiment ntal work on this subject scle pearls are those that ¢ form paid: Hoe Sade me insertion of the pallial and other m tele attached to shell ; he columnar nature of their pseudo-nuclei, we infer on their initial Ait is dne to the dislodgement of a tiny particle of hypostracum from the surface of 1 — — compound pearls. Usually only one layer of hypostracum o rios- 8 laid down, the —— layers being compose cre ‘a acal la seliang 3 $ not usually laid ‘down around the original nucleus as is the case in cyst- pearls uae by the irritation of an intrusive foreign body. Notes on the Genera Bullinus and Physa in the Mediter- ranean Basin (Mollusca Pulmonata).—By N. ANNAN- D . tes are given on the appearance and sae sas! of Bullinua truncatus and of Physa semiopaca and P. acuta as obse ved in the south of France, —— and Egypt. A vonpaeaties table o yer m: added, specially stress being p the existence of red blood in the: latter and its absence in the otto On the adi of some Turbinellidae—By EB. VxeD8N- BUR ae well-defined modifications ee ae successive m certain series of fossi il the oli i r miocene 0 of wes . - he —— seat: middle and uppe ects hesitation be omi , the er- rticular series is extinct along ahs The Sn 7’. pirum belongs to a separ- ate branch of foreign origin. Amongst the Turbinelidae — _— Tertiary has cogs yielded oo forms of Melongena pugilin _ paradisiaca melong- 92 1.8.C. Proceedings oj the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Résumé of Recent Progress in our eatin of ‘he Indian Wasps and Bees.— By Cepric Dove A brief review of recent work on the Aculeates. and an appeal to = Editors of ~ ‘Fauna cf British India” series for a new edition of ingham’s first volume on the Hymenoptera, the My meiiian are also beielly discussed. The Development of the Ovary of Culex.—By V. Natu. When the female culex emerges out of the pupaits ovary has sivonee reached an advanced stage of development. The ground tissue is ma up of cells ~ fibres mixed witha sack large number of tracheae. The vary is bounded by a limiting membrane and has also alumen. A large jicanbine of sais lie in tubes which Fines i the follicles grow ndary of a follicle is syncitial. This aynsinen! may be called the follicle layer. The content cells of the follicles are all simi- lar in young ovaries. Each has got a prominent nucleus with a single compact karyosome Unless the sainmauitces are fed on blood, development stops at this stage. If fed on blood development proceeds rapidly in the following way :— One single compas karyosome, e fut ovu uclei of other content cells become mu i mies sed their armeicaee heel up into a large number of chromatin grains. These are the nurse cells des L eo tined to feed the future ovu ater the outer boundaries of all the content cells unite and there is now a single sheet of protoplasm contam- ing nucleus of re s Ww th f rola cells. Gradually the nurse cell nuclei also disappear. words the nurse cells and their nuclei lose their individual identity and add to the cytoplasm of the ovum. Prominent ro grains of 1 ow appear in the eta cere along with smaller deeply staining grai the forks which is made of a large number of grains of some ra y hard matter. The chori rot R absent at one pole of the ovum thus z ing the micropyle. aes the chorion is the delicate vitelline inecnbeaae eted he ovu Copulation is 2, Ts for the development of the ovary. What is —— is feeding on bloo seems — that pase = — take place in bine ne eich since the spermathecae open i t but y the time the — the oviduct ihe chorion saddles « so hace 6 t it has not yet been Pp to obtain eens by the ova good enough "is afford the study 0 The Larva of gt sang annandalei Prashad.—By M. 0. TIRUNARAYANA LYENGAR. The See original description of the species rir —_— ide ntification- Museum, Vol. , 1918) is not sufficient f : has therefore been redescribed. I many ways very aaa liar. Its chief characteristics are ~ shape of the clypeal — a of a pin ome which as trifid, presence of short eareed setae on — — aad abdomen a -_ the occurrence of long branched hairs on segm It breeds in holes in trees and has been shpat from the Easte Slaven 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 93 A Further Note on the Contractile Anterior Thoracic Appendages in Anopheline Larvae.—By M. O. Tiruna- RAYANA IYENGA this paper the author has given an account of the internal mor” In phology of the thoracic appendages as revea aled by microtome sections in different planes. An account of the previous work on the external 80 F meeting, Pusa, 1921 (pp 216-217). The structure of the entire append- age is now fully known. But nothing is as yet known abont the homo- logy or function of these organs. Preliminary note on the oe on yeasts in some Homoptera.—By M. J. Narasim The author observed in 1916 the presence of een ee of yeast- cells in smears of crushed insects belonging “A ne ho see ad = a i i idae. He has Fulgoridae, Aphidae and Co e ts occur inside the tissues of these ieee "eit er P peak ered or in groups as shown in tome s . So far as he has observed he has observed the ly in insect ich secret oe h Ee w ni- vers spo pron gaia of brig oa in these er a reting insects - one Tsopoda of the family Bopyridae parasitic on the Indian — Natantia.— By B. Cuopra ing has so far per published about the Bopyrid Isopoda of the nd very little about those of the Pei mere parts. uropean a n ned, the islands of the Malay Archipelago have received the most attention tho ia number of forms have sb described from the seas around Jap The family is represented by thirty-one species and ereiye (eee In Of the twelve genera are in the soneetind of the Indian Museum. found to be new, while the species with three or four exceptions ae ¥ also new. On the occurrence and significance of a third contractile vacuole in Paramoecium caudatum.—By G. S. THAPAR and 8, S,. CHOUDHURY. Ordinarily P y two eonenene vacuoles. , e con ile cuo icting interna physiological an the animal. Notes on fresh-water Ciliate Protozoa of India. BHATIA I. Prev sites wise on the gro in Bombay and Grant and Si —By B. L. up briefly referred to. Carter had worked mmon in Calcutta, but the total num- 94 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIIT, ber of species of Ciliates pes from any part of India till 1893, as enumerated wid Schewiakoff, wa 1 oR r from India Gixe, viz. Prorodon edentatus, Pale eee sp. nov., Coleps prune puma albiani, Dileptus gigas, sp es Cyelidinm Tl. "General Summary. As the result of the work of the author pre- viously S aici sien or now being communicated, the number of species re- corded f ta de India has been ie neeesohared augmented. Total number up o date rset y other observers is 30, those obser by the writer are 4], wo of which had been reported by pr us workers. Th e total record is 0 69 species chorea to 46 different genera, and al- ted. e are an extraordinarily small percentage of the total pace ee investi sing: as This is in conformity with the well estab- lished fact that the fresh-water Srotoeas are cosmopolitan in their distri- bution, as also due to a desire on the part of the writer not to base new species on minor structural differences. A more extended survey of these forms from different parts of India would be desirable. The Modifications of the Swim-bladder in Hill-stream Fishes.—By SunpgEr LAL Hora The swim- Saas’ of fishes is suppos nate to be a hydrostatic organ. Fishes iiving te rapid waters lead a ground habit of life and, therefore, baloon-like structure. Consequently the bladder . : : . ° 3 ® oO Qu Q > 2 abdominal cavity. In this paper an attempt has been made to discuss the probable causes oe thie modification of the bladder in hill-stream shes, Saprolegnia on Murral Fry (Ophiocephalus marulius) in Ma ay re Hatcheries and its treatment.—By Hamp Kuan (t) Disease at Sespesie ti Hatcheries of long standing. Many fish died ise the last five (it) Fungus attacked eMail oo she in July 1921. The Fry had been kept in live-cars and fed on sheep’s (iit) Live cars were smeared a ys and washed in clear water ; 78% reduction in casualities resulte (tv) Fungus indentified as Saprolegnia, sp. Some observations on the Oral Apparatus of che Begs ae of oP ae parva Boulenger.—By Sov» Lal Hora ring a recent visit to the Khasi Hills a eo rigors - specimen : of the pork Sige Megalophrys parva were obta stream I Dumpep. They were kept under observations tor tou 6 ie hours. It 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 95 function could be performed both when the funnel w d when i ded. o observations were tuntately made on the feeding habits of these tadpoles e views previously held regarding note on the histology and musculature of the funnel is added. the text of the paper, the views of Dr. Annandale on the subject have also been embodied. Evolution and the Individuality of Cells —By Hariwvas BHATTACHARYYA. he author discusses the different views held by different authorities as to the structure, nature and individuality of cells. Section of Botany. President :—Dr. W. DupGEon. Presidential Address. Tue Botanica Opportunity 1n Inpia.! It is fitting that from time to time we take stock of our botanical achievements, and attempt to form an estimate of the field of opportunity lying before us. It is especially appro- priate at this the first programme of the Indian Botanical Society: I deeply appreciate the honour of standing before you in the capacity of President, and ask your indulgence as I attempt to make such an estimate. . The value of such a survey depends on the skill and insight of the one who makes it. If it is well done it should stand as a record of progress, and should serve to stimulate research in all lines of botany. Such estimates made from time to time may well constitute a record of the progress of botany in India. Whatever value there may be in my remarks is in no small way due to the cooperation of a number of botanists who have given me the benefit of their ideas as to the outstanding problems of Indian botany. It is a pleasure tu acknowledge my indebtedness to these friends, Except for their aid I should hardly have had the courage to undertake the task, important though 1 think it to be. I believe that such a survey as this is very timely . one country is entering on a new era of political, social and edu- cational development. Our scientific activity must be stimu- er lines, and with a has a heritage of love for learning that we all should strive to maintain. Our 5 oe . Sec- 1 Presidential address before the joint meeting of the Boteny tion of the Indian Science Congress and the Indian Botanical Society, Madras, February 3, 1922. 96 I1.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, field for botanical investigation is almost unlimited. In addi- tion to the perhaps 17,500 species of flowering plants, there is a great assemblage of cryptogams, providing an almost endless variety of material for research in every phase of botany. The peculiar climatic conditions under which our vegetation occurs only enlarge and extend the opportunity for study. My purpose in this address is to call brief attention to what has been done along certain lines both in India and elsewhere; to point out the great need for research ; to indi- cate some of the lines of study that seem most urgent and most likely to yield results; and to urge an increasing number of young men to engage in more, more intensive, and more effective investigation. To some of my older hearers my remarks may seem presumptuous. They know already the problems of botany, and are actively engaged in research. It is however, to the younger generation that I want parti- cularly to speak. There are many young men who have recently completed their courses of study, obtained their degrees, and entered into their various fields of life work. after the degree is obtained, we must conclude that these men need all the encouragement we can give them. Too frequently they gradually become satisfied with their original preparation, the desire for further progress grows dim, and they settle down to lives of quiet unproductivity. If some can find in what I shall say an incentive to further study and research, I shall to think of the latter as “pure botany.” Nowadays it is often only “applied botany” that engages the attention of the professional botanist, and attracts the interest of the layman. e are prone in this hurrying age to demand that scientific work yield immediate and profitable results. There is danger of forgetting that lying back of applied botany there must be an ever enlarging fund of fundamental botanical knowledge 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 97 the results. Above all, we must learn “ to regard satisfaction with what has been done as the cardinal sin In working out the details of this address, I have been guided by the general principles that it is mainly young men who are in need of guidance, and that it is the most obvious and easily solved problems that will first attract them. There and importance that can be most prea undertaken in India, and some of them will have to be undertaken here if they are to be solved soon or in any eee anner. On the other hand there are types and groups of problems that demand of the investigator long thorough training, elabor- ate facilities, and perhaps most important of all, the stimulus of frequent or constant contact with others working and thinking along similar lines. Such problems can best be undertaken and extensive monographic work in taxonomy. Various limit- ing factors—lack of leisure time for uninterrupted application, lack of material equipment, musev herbariums, ade- quate library facilities, guidance, and perhaps most important of all, lack of inspiration—combine to make work in these fields difficult orimpossible. In this ccna it is legitimate to urge on those in authority the necessity for making provi- sion in the various universities and research institutes for the ee of such studies. I want to spn: the opportunities for research ssi the dolteutae hea ae of Indian groups. General morphology and anatomy. Physiology in some of its more general applications, Ecology. Genetics in relation to agriculture. Plant pathology. Palaeobotany. Utilization of plant resources. Educational aspects of botany. SDN Orie Wb TAXONOMY. Most of the taxonomic work on the nt of Ini of pee ular flora. It j is unfortunate for Indian Hosts lections have been toa large extent deposited in European he 7 98 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, r s. Thanks to them and to their successors, we have excellent floras for the whole of the country, as HooKkrr’s' monumental work, the Flora of British India, Branpis’* Indian Trees, Prain’s? Bengal Plants, Cooxr’s* Flora of Bombay, BampBer’s® Plants of the Panjab, Gamsin’s® Flora of Madras, Durutr’ s’ Flora of the Upper Gangetic Plain, and Brppomr’s * Ferns of British India. There is at the present time considerable activity in taxon- omic work. Manuals are being prepared for more restricted areas and of more restricted material, as PARKeR’s* Forest Flora of the Panjab, Fyson’s '° Flora of the Nilgiri and Pulney Hill Tops, and Rane@a AcuariaR’s |! South Indian Grasses. There are many monographic studies of orders, families, and genera, and studies and descriptions of new species. Taxonomic works require revision as new species are added conceptions of relationships Such work must be more and more based on extensive observations in the field, and in many cases on analyses of hybrids and species complexes under ex- perimental conditions. We cannot hope to arrive at stable taxonomy till we have greatly increased knowledge of our plant material. It is obvious that such studies can be carried out best in India. hile a vast amount of work has been done with vascular plants, there remains much more to be done with the lower the results finally incorporated into handbooks with illustra- tions and workable keys, so that the rank and file of botanists throughout the country could use them. This is undoubtedly a large and monotonous task. It may first necessitate the sending of collections abroad for identification. A fungus flora ; sie Hooker, J. D. Flora of British India, 7 vols. London, 1875- 7. . Branpis, D. Indian Trees. London, 1907. : Poca i a 2 vols. Calcutta, 1903. ’ Pa e r f th ; . 2 vols. London, 1901-1908, ora o e Presidency of Bombay Vv ; BamBer,C. J. Plants of the Panjab. Lahore, 1916. GamBte,J.S. Flora of the Presidency of Madras. 2 pts. London and Calcutta, 1915-191] UTHIE, J. F. Fl : - 1° Swole Calcutta, 1903. ora of the Upper Gangetic Plain en BO itish India. Calcutta, 1883. andbook to the Ferns of British * Parker, R. N. A Forest Flora of the Panjab. Lahore, 1918. 10 Fyson,P.F. Fl ilpiri j 3 vols. Sliees ore, ora of the Nilgiri and Pulney Hill Tops. . a aren Acnariar, K. Handbook of Some South Indian Grasses- 1922.] Indian Science Congress. I.8.C. 99 of India is reported to be in preparation,! but it will of neces- sity be incomplete, for “‘ the total number of recorded species is probably under 2000, which is certainly not one-fourth of those that exist’ (p. 65) in the country. In the end we should have works on Indian cryptogams of such a type as Wrst’s? British Freshwater Algae. Cultivated plants have not received and are not now re- ceiving the attention they deserve. The classification of culti- value will be the published results, if the varietal names are wrongly applied ? Ten years ago, in his address as retiring president of the Botanical Society of Washington, PiPeR recorded his belief that fully 50 per cent of the crop varieties published upon in varietal experiments were either untrue to name or unidentifiable. But how shall they become identifi- able without adequate description and classification! And how shall they become adequately described and classified without botanists to study them?’ Such classification is just as urgently needed in India, before the improvement of crop plants can be put on a firm scientific footing. Taxonom- ists should not regard the classification of cultivated plants as outside the domains of legitimate botany. Not only is such work greatly needed, but it can be done best by thorough- ly trained botanists. MorpPHoOLoGy AND ANATOMY. The common a distance is a confession of expediency—of making use of material ching through know itful, rather than sear nown beforehand to be fruitfu ‘athe paper’ Beigel 1 Butter, E. J. Report of the hasten Mycologist. Sci. Repts Agric. Res. Inst., Pusa 1919-20 : 58-67. 1920. : 2 West,G.S. British Freshwater Algae. Casebriaers: -_ a 3 Batt, Cartetron R. e relation of crop-plant otany man welfare. Amer. Jour. Bot. 3: 323-338. 1921. 100 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth 'N.S., XVIII, Considering the vegetation by groups, the algae first claim our attention. Here little work has been done, even in a taxon- omic way. In addition to a few older scattered references, Guose! has recently given us some information about the Cyanophyceae of Lahore, and lyenear’* has worked out some of the Volvocaceae of Madras. The life histories of algae in a tropical periodic climate— methods of growth, reproduction and perennation—would certainly repay work. Practically nothing has been done with the morphology of Indian fungi, except in parasitic forms investigated at the agricultural and forest research institutes. The name of But- LER stands out conspicuously here. But only a good beginning has been made. It is almost essential to know the complete life-history of a parasitic fungus before remedial measures can be intelligently applied. As in the case of algae, there is a very large field for research in the structure and life histories in the rain forests and the Himalayas. ‘Kasnyap® has already logy of Indian mosses. It is usually considered that mosses as a whole are quite uniform in structure, but until work has been done on the Indian forms, it cannot be said that they would not repay investigation. Pteridophyte morphology may be expected to yield valu- able results. Kasnyap+ has made a distinct contribution to our knowledge of Equisetum in his investigation of the game- tophyte of #. debile. Miss Bancrorr® has studied the forma- tion of perennating tubers in two species of Selaginella from the Himalayas, and some work has been done on the vascular ana- ee ee ote, 5. ie The Myxophyceae of Lahore. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: ? IveNcar, M.O. ParrHasaRATHY. Observations on the Volvoca- ceae of Madras. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 330-336. 20. 3 Ka The relations of liverworts, especially in the light of some recently discovered Himalayan forms. Proc. Asiatic oc. Bengal, N.S. 15: 152-196. 1919, (Presidentiai address before the ey Section, Bombay meeting of the Indian Science Congress. ASHYAP, SHiv Ram. The structure and development of the pro- thallus of Equisetum debile. Ann. Bot. 28 : 163-181. 1914. 5 Bancrorr, N. Note on vegetative r roduction in some Indian Selaginellas. Ann. Bot. 28 : 685-693. 1914. 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1L8.C, 101 tomy of Indian ferns. Probabl i J y the greatest opportunity, and the work that most needs doing in aaa era i is jantel giate ferns. Our large fern flora provides extensive material for this kind of work. If there is any truth in the concept of recapitulation, such studies should throw a flood of light on the relationships, and possibly on the phylogeny of the various groups. : _ Gymnosperms in general have received much attention. Little, however, seems to have been done with Indian forms. Serut of Lahore is working on Pinus longifolia, where the situa- tion appears to be the usual one for Pinus, and Saxton of Ahmedabad is undertaking Cedrus deodara. lt is likely that the study of life-histories of Indian gymnosperms will a little that is new to our knowledge, except possibly in the Gne- tales. Gnetum gnemon and G. scandens have been investigated, but it appears that there still are species @netum in Burmaand the Malay Peninsula, and of Ephedra in the Himalayas that have received no attention. Because of the unique character of the Gnetales, these unknown forms should be looked into. Collections for morphological purposes should be made when- ever opportunity offers. ie vascular anatomy of all Indian gymnosperms should prove interesting. Groom anp RusuTon* have investigated rms will show anything al situations that will owledge. [or example, a casual examination of Ophiopogon intermedius Don of temper- Campsetr, D. H. The eusporangiate ferns aod the stelar theory. Amer. Jour. Bot, 8: 303-314. 1921. 2 Groom, Percy . RusHT Indian species of Pir.un. Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot. 4] : 457-490. 19 3 SaBnis, T.8. The physiological anatomy of the plants of the Indian desert. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: , 65-83, 97-114, 183-205, 237- 247, 277-295, 2: 1-20, 61-79, 93-115, 157-173, 217-235, 271 -299. 1919-21. Structure of the wood of East 90 102 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, ate mountain areas of India shows in microsporogenesis 56 bivalent chromosomes so distinct that they can be counted under an ordinary high power without any treatment what- ordinary material. Double fertilization, by Nawascurin !? oogamous apogamy, by JuEL,* and an embryo sac of four megaspore nuclei, by DanoreEN * may be cited as examples. It may be that embryo saes will be found that will give a defi- nite clue to the origin of the embryo sac, though Scort’s recent statement‘ that ‘‘ It is safer to regard the Pteridosperms, and therefore the Seed Plants generally, as a distinct stock, prob- mee as ancient as any of the recognised phyla of Vascular ryptogams”’ (p. 391), assigns to the angiosperms such great antiquity that the expectation is minimized. It seems quite possible that degeneration during mega and microsporogenesis as I was able to trace it in Rumex crispus® may be found to be of widespread occurrence. It may be found to give a clue to the morphological origin of dicliny, to offer an explanation of sex intergrades, and to contribute to the solution of the problem of sexuality in plants. There is abundant material in our flora for the study of this problem. Co rative anatomy has been used with conspicuous C etsiny* and applied them ph living plants with equal success. Comparative morphology and anatomy will be of increasing service to taxonomy in indicating relationships. Our flora presents a rich field for such investigation. Becurei’s? work on the floral anatomy of the Urticales is a a example of the results that may come from such studie ndian plants have received siiceehber too little attention from morphologists, and the conclusion is that a whole host of these plants should have their morphology and vascular anatomy investigated. | Nawascuin, S. Resultate einer Revision der Belrnebineaie gange bei Lilium Martagon and Fritillaria tenella. Bull. Acad. lm Sci. ra tiger a. eshse 382. 1898. 2 Jue, H. —o. bei Antennaria lapina (L.) R. Br. Bot. Contra 74: 300-379 1 AHLGRE x, K. heal ‘Dar r Embnyosack von Plumbagella, ein neuer Typus unter den Angiospermen. Arkiv f. Botanik 14: 1-10. yD. The present position of the theory of descent, relation neg ih early history of plants. Chem. News 123: 289-293, 301- oe Fic auaie Morphology of Rumea crispus. Bot. Gaz. EFFREY, r . The Anatomy of Woody Plants. Chicago, 1917. 7 Becuten, A, ne ‘aie floral anatomy of the Urticales. Amer. Jour. Bot. 8: 386-410. 1922.] . Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 103 PHYSIOLOGY. Perhaps physiology is after all the most fundamental of the botanical sciences, and it has been making rapid progress in the last few vears. Chemistry and Physics are becoming such important parts of physiology that the average botanist has difficulty in keeping up with the procession. Much of the present trend of the subject requires such a mastery of chemistry and physics, such elaborate equipment, and to such a large extent the stimulus of contact with others interested in and engaged in similar research. that really fundamental investigations in physiology are difficult in India. Some of the most valuable and suggestive aspects of physiology, as osmotic pressures of sap, permeability, antagonism, the chem- istry and physics of protoplasm, enzyms, photosynthesis, and metabolism are accordingly excluded from this discussion. Physiology as such has scarcely been touched in India. Howarp! and Hotm* have done valuable work on the effect of soil aeration on the growth of plants of economic impor- tance, and J. C. Bosr has made valuable contributions on the response of plants to stimuli, and on refined methods of study- ing response. ‘here is however a vast amount of work that can be done without the necessity of highly specialized training and ig orate outlay on equipment.. The work of JivaNNa Rao” on the conditions of leaf-bladder formation in Hichornia 1s an illustration. Some of the problems that scem most approach- able, and that would yield exceedingly valuable results are : The water relations and demands of plants. 2. The light relations and demands of plants. 3. Temperature requirements of plants. 4. Soil fertility studies. Water relations.—Conditions over the greater part of India are suitable for the growth of plants throughout the year, except as water is a limiting factor. Periodicity in precipita- tion is a marked feature of the climate. We need exact as on the evaporating power of the air throughout the aa Pr the response of plants to the actual fluctuations in umi : 2 and to the variations in water available to the roots. a e evaporimeter devised by BaTes* gives records of evaporation go a slowano, A. ng ivatitionson sean, fy special reference to Agriculture. Agric. Jour. el fatten Phe ok 2 Hote, R. 8S. Recent ns RTE on 3. 430-440 co dee 1918 Jour. India 1 first a z19- 1920. With spec.al reference to forests . 3 aie Rao, P. §. The formation of — speciosa Kunth (water hyacinth). Jour- Indian Bot. oP oa pndiew. + Bares, C. G. A new evaporimeter for use | Monthly Weather Rev. 47 : 283-294. 1919. 104 L.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, closely paralleling the transpiration of plants exposed to similar conditions, with plenty of water available. In nature, however, maximum transpiration occurs during the dry season, when available soil moisture is at a minimum. any of our common crop and characteristic wild plants should be studied with regard to their water demands. Jt is probable that the results would be of great value to agriculture, especially in connection with the search for varieties suitable for growing in the various parts of the country Light relations—GaRNER AND ALLARD! have shown that the number of hours of daily illumination is one of the most important factors in regulating the vegetative and reproductive phases of plants. They find in the species they have studied that ‘‘ normally the plant can attain the flowering and fruiting stages only when the length of day falls within certain limits, and, consequently, these stages of development ordinarily are reached only during certain seasons of the year. In this particular, some species and varieties respond to relatively ong days, while others respond to short days, and still others are capable of responding to all lengths of the day which prevail in the latitude of Washington where the tests were made’’ (p. 603). This opens up a wide new field for expeti- mental work. It is entirely likely that the failure of certain cuous success of others may be due in large part to their differ- } GaRNER, W. W. and H. A. Attarp. The effect of relative length of day and night and other factors on growth and reproduction in plants. Jour. Agric. Res. 18 : 553-606. 1920. * WatsterR, H. L. Formative effect of high and low temperatures hy on growth of barley: a critical correlation. Bot. Gaz. 69 : 97-126. 1922] Indian Science Congress. I.S.C. 105 tropical plants. It would be worth whi i é ile to have e3 “a pomgeaas along this line. a e factors involved in the acclimatisation of plant 2 a s from other parts of the world is a problem that would sey study. Soil fertility offers another immense field for research, in- ving as it does both the micro-organisms of the soil, and e plants grown in this soil. The problem of soil fertility as long engaged the attention of agriculturists, and suck studies have gradually settled down along certain traditional there i i “ a. ae" neces eee 2 is coming to be a growing dissatifaction with the results — by such methods. Lipman AND Linuart ! and ~eengerodl have recently concluded that the results obtained iy ordinary plots are of such little practical value that they not justify the time, energy, and money expended on them. a culture methods yield results of great physiological value, ut leave many problems unsolved It looks as if we wou HOM jungles and cultivating the cleared area for years derives its advantage from the killing by heat of bac- il need extensive t in the various soils of e, seasonal variation, and physiological action. On the other hand the reaction of plants to end nanan factors of soil fertility needs a vast amount of work. Much has been done already. But we should be prepared for strik- ing results in increase of plant production in ee eer Tea acetate study of fertilizer and manures. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10 : 415-419. . 1900 : India. 0 E. Agriculture in the Shan States. Agric. Jour. 106 L.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth (N.S., XVIII, HARRISON !| in reporting on manurial experiments on rice at Pusa states that ‘in a few isolated pots (about 6 per cent of the total) a very abnormal growth took place, varying from 200-500 per cent increase over the check pots in their particu- lar series,’’ and ‘‘ other officers in the department have had similar experience ’ (p. 43). The cause of this unusual growth remains unknown, but the fact indicates the possibility of enormous increase in plant production, when the factors in- ready known to be an important factor in promoting plant EcoLoey. _ _ Ecology is not as clearly defined as the other great sub- divisions of botany. It is still largely an observational science and as it becomes more exact it tends to pass over into mor- phology and physiology. It is as yet largely a matter of observation and description of vegetation, and the value of the results depends therefore on the critical judgment of the observer. | In recent years there has been great activity in ecology in north temperate regions, and latterly in the south temperate also. But little has been done in the tropics, and almost nothing in a climate such as ours, and in areas of crowded agricultural populations such as are found in India and China. SCHIMPER * has worked in Java, and Brown?‘ has made in- tensive studies in the Philippines There is only a little such comprehensive work of India. Hookrr * * has described the plant geography, and divided the country into characteristic vegetational areas, giving the distinct floral composition of _ | Harrison, W. H. Report of the Imperial Agricultural Chemist. Sei. Repts. Agric. Res. nst., Pusa 1918-19: 35-45. 1919. * Coteman, L. ©. Indian agricultural development. Jour. and Proc. c Soc. Bengal, N.S. 14: 102-19. 1918. (Presidential address be- fore x Section Agriculture, Lahore meeting of the Indian Science Con- gress. * Scuimper, A. FW. Plant Geography upon a Physivlogical Basis. English translation. Oxford, 190 i m114m H. Vegetation of Thilippine Mountains. ROWN, Manila, i919 ° 00KER. J. D. Introductory essay in Hooker and THOMSON. Flora Indica, pp. 1-260. London, 1855. H .). ica 2 OOKE Chapte , in Vol. I. Imperial Gazetteer of India. Oxford, 1907 an ROE TP! wer 1922 | Indian Science Congress. 1.C.8._107 each. Recently AGHARKAR ! has extended the details of this otk for arid north-west India. BiarrerR anp Hatiprre? have described the vegetation of the Indian Desert on the basis of WaRmiNa’s * formations, and SAxTON AND Sep@wick * have a the same for Gujarat. Kenoyer® has made a study of successions in the subtropical forests of the middle Braticyas, and I ® have madea similar type of study of the Gangetic Plains vegetation. Hor’ has studied the ecology of grasses in relation to forest types and iater*, has empha- sized the importance of ecological studies in solving problems of grazing land and forest management, and in the control of plant diseases. Other work is reported at this meeting, and is in progress, and the outlook for ecology in India is bright. The broad principles of ecology have been derived from studies on the vegetation of temperate regions. It is not vet known how generally these principles apply to the tropics. One botanist has put it, “ a large part of the plant eee (in India) should be studied without trying to fit them into a European or American system. Much study will be ‘requied whole.”” Brown * expresses a similar doubt: “...- meas from temperate regions are too apt to soaaitl temperate vege- tation as a generalized type and_ tropical vegetation as a specialized one, whereas there certainly are eeany reasons re p- action of the dense agricultural Rides ecology offers ! AGHARKAR, . Uherdie Verbreitungsmittel der Xerophyten, Horgan tn St Halophyten des nor pry tlichen Indiens und 1 k ans, fae eiag = ie Berlin, pp. Res. Bay flora of the Indian desert. LA d F, HaLLBERG. 619, 192. es Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 27 : geld 4 ee lish edition. Oxford, i) 3 #8 eal) a: _W. T. and L. J. Sepewick. Plants of northern Gujarat. Ree, Bot. Surv. Indi 23. 1918. > Ken 1 ae La Fo aire formations and aS wee of the a Tal Valley, Kumaon Himalayas. Jour. Ind dian Bot. 2: 236-2 at abe EON, WINFIELD. A contribution. . the — og} vPPat sone ee ‘plain. Jour. ar hs Bot. 1: 296-32 a F 1 Hote, R. 8. On some Indian grasses and their " oecology- orester ‘. § Hote, R. 8. Plant oecology and its baggie — pag EE eco nomic importance in India. Jour. and Pro Asia poe oan aeuy. 14: 156-167. 1918. (Presidential address Thatow the natiiee meeting of the Indian Science Congress § Brown, Wittiam. H. Vegetation Manila, 1919. Indian of Philippine Mountains. 108 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, fertile field confronting us just now; and the work does not require either long intensive training, or excessive outlay on material equipment. The most accessible problems fall into three groups : 1. Descriptive studies. . Response of the vegetation to the periodic climate. 3. ect of man on the vegetation. Descriptive studies will work out the great formations of the natural vegetation, and relate them to the climatic factors. This will include a study of the successions leading up to the climax vegetations. As these studies become more exact, they will increasingly require the use of instruments for determining the details of the climatic factors and their influence in deter- mining distinct types of vegetation. We have the meteorolo- gical records available, but they give little clue to local devia- tions of moisture, humidity, insolation, temperature, and ex: posure to wind, that are so important in causing local differ- ences in vegetation. Considerable effort has been made in the West toward developing exact statistical methods of describing vegetation. Perhaps the work of RaunkraER! is best known. “ doubtedly such efforts are still unsatisfactory, but they make it possible to compare directly the vegetations of widely sep- arated areas, and also to distinguish slight differences in local areas. It would be a most valuable contribution to have our ee types of vegetation studies by such statistical me- thods. e response of plants to our periodic climate offers an equally fruitful field for detailed studies. There is little bo- dual plant is one that offers many points of approach, an that can be undertaken almost anywhere by anyone sufficient- ly interested. It is commonly considered that leaf fall is caused by 4P- proaching excess of transpiration over water intake. In tem perate regions this is brought about by increasing cold slowing ce ' Raunkiazr,C. Recherches statisques sur les formations végé- tales. Kg. Danske Vidensk. Selsk., Biol. Meddelelser 13: 1-80. 1918. 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.$.C. 109 down root activity. In India we see small plants losing their piration, as the dry season advances. Excessive transpira- tion may also explain why the trees of the Peninsular forests lose their leaves along through the winter and spring ; but it offers no explanation of why the new flush of leaves comes out and remains on the trees before the beginning of the mon- soon, when conditions are at their severest. This new angle of the problem should be attacked. Practically nothing that I know of has been done with the distribution of roots and perennating organs in a monsoon climate. Do they behave as the roots of desert plants, as des- cribed by Cannon !, or as the perennating organs described by Warmine’, and others? This can be answered only by pecially of the characteristic rainy seas season floras.2 In addition, we should have information as to the ti the organs of storage, and the time and methods of lems should yield to histological and microchemical studies. The anatomical response of plants to the periodic climate is another problem. Work has been done in the West com- paring the anatomy of the same species in different habitats, but Hanson * has shown that there is equal or greater dififer- ence in the leaves from different locations on the same tree than has previously been reported from different habitats. n the aspect and content of ee ‘vegetation in e know tion during the winter ; and a relatively small group 5 persis- tent xerophytic perennials during the spring; but we should Such studies would apply equally to the whole range of eryp- togams. It is here especially that taxonomic studies are i er ! Cannon, W.A. The Root Hobite - — Plants. Carnegie In- 2 pean oF - Fash ton Pub. No. 131. = ae Om Jord fey ‘Kel Danske. Selsk, Skrift, Vatury. og Mathem. VIII: 2: 297-878. 1918 ’ Dastur, R. H. and W. T. SEXTON. ae -Osgweaiageed in Crotalaria burhia, Ham. Ne be o98 — This paper hasa ppeard since the above was written. nson, H.C. Leaf structure as related to environment. Jour, Bot, 4: 533-560. 1917. 110 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, needed as a basis for further work. TRANSEAU’s work! on periodicity in freshwater algae is an illustration of this type of investigation. Effect of man on vegetation.— Heretofore ecology has been concerned mainly with natural vegetation, and the effort has been to find areas that have come as little as possible in the Himalayas and in parts of the Peninsula. Th:re has not been much work directly attacking the problem of the population on vegetation. India and China are the two great fields for the study of this problem. Aside from the fact that man destroys the forests and to a large extent the herbaceous vegetation cover, we have little information. BurNs AND studied at every stage of progress. It seems probable that the present vegetation, especially forests, could be correlated with density of population, in much the same way as Bran- p1s* has done for rainfall. A knowledge of the effect of man on the vegetation will not only be of much scientific interest, but will undoubtedly prove to be of greatest practical value in future efforts to develop and conserve the vegetation resources of the country. This type of study is new, and India affords unusually favour- able material. GENETICS. Genetics has made rapid strides since the rediscovery of MENpDEL’s classical work in 1900. The subject is so attractive increasing number of botanists is going into it. Fundamental work on the underlying principles, including investigations into the cytological basis of heredity is as yet pretty definitely confined to the great research institutions of the West. } _We have a statement of the present position of genetics in India by Burns? in his presidential address before the Botany Section at Nagpur. Interest in the subject is evidenced ! Transzav, E. N. The periodicity of freshwater algae Amer. Jour. Bot. 3: 121-133. 1916. 2 Burns, W. andG. M,. Cuaxrapro. Anecological study of Deccan grassland. Jour. Indian Bot. 2: 84-91. 192l1. : Branpis, D, On the distribution of forests in India. Ocean High- ways 1872: 88-113. 1872. i _ * Burns, W. Some aspects of plant genetics. Proc. Seventh Indian Sci. Cong. 1920: 88-109. 1921. (Presidential address before the Sec tion Botany, Nagpur meeting of the Indian Science Congress.) ee i 1922.) Indian Science Conyress. LB. Tit by the large proportion of genetics papers on our present programme. Much valuable work has been done at the vari- suitable for particular needs and local conditions. The results will be of increasing use in developing new stable combina- tions in future breeding experiments. All observers of plants should be constantly on the watch for mutations of all kinds. We have only to recall that the novel orange industry of Cali- fornia arose from a mutation discovered in a single tree in Brazil. It cannot yet be said that the method of evolution has been discovered. But we should remember that the concept of mutation got its great start from DeVries’ study of a mere eed. Who shall say that in our vast flora there is not some plant or plants which when carefully studied will yield equally striking results ? ‘I want to go no further than to emphasize the far-reaching practical importance of genetics to our problems of agri- culture, and to urge greater activity in the subject. PLant PATHOLOGY. Plant pathology is mainly the application of knowledge i. The importance with which the subject is Considerable work has been done in India, especially in the agricultural research institutes and agricultural departments. Departments of botany in our colleges and universities have as yet made little contribution to the subject. The work of Butter ! stands as an inspiration to all interested in pathology. =e = @ DM cay 0g © cr. 5 5 ° bh oO fad bee Mm ct. Bc Sas Q e ia") © by 2] fa?) a 4 = 5 = a = =a = diseases in India. An examination of BUTLER § that this process has already begun. A considerable number of important diseases have been found in India for the first ees Caleutta, 1918, Also ' Burirr, E.J. Fungi and Disease in Plants. numerous memoirs. ; 112° 1:8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, time only recently. The only way to cope with such a situa- tion is to have a reserve of trained men ready to combat such outbreaks. The point I want specially to emphasize in this connection is the desirability of raising up a body of young pathologists to meet this situation. The pathologist must have a thorough grounding in general botany as well as special training in fungi and physiology. All of us who are in teaching positions where such training may be given have before us the opportunity to help by providing such instruction as will fit students to be efficient pathologists. PALAEOBOTANY. purely scientific interest, and partly as a means of comparing geologic horizons. Saunt! has given us a résumé of the present position of Indian palaeobotany, and SewaRD AND SAHNI? have recently restudied old collections from the Indian a bed sizes strikingly how incomplete this knowledge is. There 1s considerable opportunity in India for investigations in paleo- botany. UTILIZATION OF PLANT RESOURCES. I have hesitated about introducing this topic, not because there is any lack o rk, but because it tends to diverge from the usually accepted field of botany. The popula: tion of India is dependent to an unusual degree directly on the vegetation for food. Ancient crowded populations tend to become balanced against their food resources, and the supply of food becomes a limiting factor to increase in population. Our natural resources are already very completely utilized, but this utilization is often not only unscientific, but absolute- ! Samui, B. Presidential address, as yet unpublished, before the Section Botany, Calcutta meeting of the Indian Science Congress, 1921. 2 Sewarp, A.C. and B. Saunt. Indian Gondwana plants, a revision Mem. Geol. Surv. India, N.S. 71: 1-54. 1920. ‘ 3 Scorr, D. H. e present position of the theory of descent, : ation. + the early history of plants Chem. News 123: 289-593, 301- ]922.] Indian Science Congress. LS.C. 113 ly wasteful. I want to suggest just a few problems, the signi- ficance of which will at once be apparent. animal fats, mainly butter. Development along scientific lines of indigenous wild food plants—-roots, tubers, fruits, and systems of medicine on a modern footing. Various aspects o the forestry industry will bear much more study. The produc- tion of gums, resins, rubber, dyes, essential oils, and paper pulp are other problems for research in the field of economic botany. EpucationaL AspEots OF Borany. Our Indian botany is still in its infancy. In the Univer- sity of Allahabad fewer than one-half of the affiliated colleges teach science ; of these only six include biology, and none offer instruction above the B.Sc. degree. The centers in India providing for advanced training in botany are all too few. A feature of botanical education that should engage our best attention is the content and purpose of our courses. e should not be satisfied that the traditional content of botany is good enough. Our present education is altogether too the- oretical. It makes too little contact with the actual problems of the country. I believe we need to put much more emphasis its scientific interest, and to prepare specialists. Whatever the purpose, the value of the teaching depends much less on the attitude of the teacher; and it is just here that we can make the greatest improvement in botanical education Tn connection with instruction we sh ‘be prepared with special reference to Indian needs and conditions, and in the spirit of modern developments in education, to free us from dependence on foreign texts. Professor Ranoa ACHA- RIAR! has attempted to do this in his elementary text-book. We need really interesting nature study books for our middle schools, texts for high school grade, and at least one rather advanced text for B.Sc. student. This last might well be | Ranoa Acnartar, K. A Manual of Elementary Botany for Ind Madras, 1916. 8 114 LS.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVEBj written in parts, e.g. taxonomy, morphology, physiology, ecology, genetics, paleobotany, economic botany, pathology, history of botany, and microtechnique, so as to, permit the parts to be used in any desired combination. Another urgent need is for manuals of botany covering restricted natural units of vegetation, so simple as to require little technical knowledge, for the use of beginning students and laymen. Existing manuals presuppose considerable know- ledge of botany, and for the most part are too costly for students. The new manuals should be compact enough to be easily carried ; should have easy descriptions, and artificial as far as necessary to families, genera, and species ; should include brief notes on ecological habitats, uses, and other interesting information ; and should be cheap enough to be within the buying power of students. Existing larger works would serve as a basis for the compilation of these manuals. They would go far toward arousing wider interest in plants. Another need is accessible knowledge of our vegetation with reference to its actual use in instruction. All of us know certain plants that we make use of for various purposes ; it would be an immense help if this scattered information could be gathered together in such a form that all could have the benefit of it Research must become an increasingly important feature of our educational system. Research demands time to work, to read, and to ponder. No one overloaded with routine 1922.) Indian Science Congress. I.S.C. 115 appreciate its utility. If scientists in general were to engage more freely in writing popular scientific articles, it would goa long way toward arousing interest in and sym athy for science and its accomplishments. Think of the value of such literature as LANKEsSTER’s ‘‘ Science from an Easy Chair.” Most probably it would in the end result in greatly increased support for science; and institutions would find it possible to make the development both in personnel and in equipment that we know to be so necessary. Popular writing is difficult, and few have the natural gifts to do it well; but both the need for it and the value of it are great. hat I have had to say has of necessity been of a general nature. Any attempt to develop the problems in more detail, and to suggest lines of attack would extend the address to @ wearisome length. The field of botanical opportunity is as extensive as the world of plant life. Solution of the problems presented in the vegetation of India will contribute much to the advance of world science. I am conscious of the many defects in this attempt at estimation of the botanical oppor- tunity in India. I can only hope that some may find in it a new inspiration for research, and that the suggestions that have been made may be of some slight use in the selection of problems for investigation. It is my earnest hope that the Indian Botanical Society may increasingly serve in encouraging and furthering research, and that in the years to come it ma in very deed be ‘“‘A society for uniting the botanists and promoting the botanical interests of India.” Contribution to the life-history of Anewra indica.—By Suv AM Kasnyap and Suiva Kant PANDE. eura indica is the first Indian species in which the life-history has been worked in any detail. The plants studied were collected from various localities, Dalhousie, Lahore, Chamba-Chuari Road, Nilgiris, etc. vad e investigation confirms in a general way the conclusions ari by Clapp after her study of Aneura a (Bot. Gaz., Sep. 1912). i i elow :— t The plant is dioecious. ; Usually is found i hchamber. Occasionally t t with. 4 h y oon ogy ong narrow coiled structure of the usual type. sperm. os i fos a single projecting cell, — which two oblique walls can usually be distinguished. e ins 3-5 neck-canal cells. oO lac ® i) tae) ° iz ® a ° = S B 2 = m © n [=r] ar =| ee og ® ® 2 ae o) : % n ° mn + “3 ® Qu & 2. o ao) i=} -_ ie) i=} ct f the sporogonium the narrow and a little elongated, resembling to some extent the cells of the elaterophore. : Elaters are differentiated very late. ‘Chere is a well-developed elaterophore. ate 116 LS.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, 9, The capsule-wall is only two layers of cells in thickness at the time of the division of the spore ~ esi cells. The calyptra, at this stage, is 4-6 cells in thicknes 10. The number chromosomes is 12 in Fike sporophyte and 6 in the gametophyte opera scone to the life-history of Pingus longifolia.—By M. L. Ser e present aneeagth is continuation of a paper which the writer read at 9 PAA es Session f the Congress on ‘‘ The Female inoear of fol egg ow th neck. The pollen-tube opens into the archegonium m by a definite pit and discharges all its contents into the archegonium along with some cytoplasm an . reh grains. Only the larger deals nucleus cco part in fecundation. The tube-nucleu stalk cell soon disorganise in the egg cytoplasm, The first Join divisions following fecundation take a very eae Shy The four segmentation nuclei pass down to the base of the egg and arrange themselves in one plane. Cross walls are formed in connection with the first division. The vertical walls are also formed at this stage on fibres in oplasm en xe | development of the proembryo. The pibicese sa s formed from the secon tier from below. This pushes down the embryo-tier into the female pro- shalt the starchy = of whose cells nbobinily serve as a nutriment the growing embry Note on some attached | forms of Zygnemaceae.—By M. 0. PARTHASARATHY IYENGAR. Three attached algae eee to the Zygnemaceae (a Spirogyra, a attachment and a Mougeotia) were studied as regards their methods 0 of a Cc a forms a well developed disc-shaped rhizoidal attachmen ee the ond: cell of its filament and also from the sides ~ — cells at the — when they come into contact with the substra Zygnema forms knob-like haptera (or _ are outgrowths) from the side x 6 a sen cell in the middle of the filam metimes from each of two adjacent cells of the filament. Rhivoid-like ocnane of “attachment have not been noticed before in gne ee © moa interesting. The end of its filament coils itself spirally oe a agape of Spirayee or sped nother Mougeotia fila- ment, pe 3 sometimes Knob-like heptors are eS formed foster: the sides of the cells sometl allt sé cases the formation of the rhizoidal separ ooairar He or the eulling of the 1 filament appears to be the result of tactile stimulatio A case of axial prolification of the flower of Nymphaea rubra Roxb.—By P. M. DEBbaR MAN In the Calcutta Herbarium there is a curious-looking specimen of Nymphaea nee Roxb. exhibiting axial floral cpalitientins and phyll- 8 is specimen a supernumer hard structure, filled with a brownish-yellow mass and covered with intricate woolly hairs. = the supernumerary wy are no trace of ovary OF 1922. } Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C, 117 any anther is visible. oe leaves have become considerably altered in size ad t seems quite probable two kinds of factors, one ‘intern and the ohare ‘* external,’’ may have been the cause of these O caitel a Two new Indian plants.—By P. M. DepBaRMaN. Crotalaria topouensis, sp. nov., Leguminosae-Genisteae-Eriocar eae, from Topo outh India. Intermediate ween C. madurensis Wight and C. candicans an , in Flora British India Homalium ciliatum, sp. nov., sees eae-Homalieae- Blackwelia, from Sikkim and the Garo Hills. Stands hatiued A. fancies Bth. a H. bhamoense Cub. and Sm., in Flora of British India Two new Assam plants. shicen I. M. DepRaRMAN. i, rya japonica Thunb., var. ilali, var. nov., Ternstroemia- coae-Ternstroemicae, from the Kha sia, goers and North Cachas Hills. This oP ned is most closely allied to var. n*tida Kort Sterculia attenuata, sp. no Ste éoHassautorculicas-Bitister- Sag “from Sylhet a nd Khasia. Chesate allied to S. Roxburghit Wall. The algal flora of Bombay Island and its immediate vicin- ity the Salsette.—By V. N. Hate. The paper is a preli Se report on the algal flora, marine as well as shtick Bee in the vicinity of Bombay. The families and genera more commonly met with among the Myxophyceae, Chiorspneesas, and Chtrkiean are recordcd Geographical distribution of the Bengal species of Poly- poraceae, along with a short history of them in Bengal. —By S. R. Bose. ; So much of the world remains unexplored that a gener al view of we disteibution of fungi is as yet impossible. Damp tropical forcate. yi the greatest numbers of polypori. eins sa omni often pe c 0 in the gradual disappearance of many pees l Of the Polyporacea biden al f Ceylon, and the ds the range of a number All of bo 8 oias ts Bs . aceae are included in my A say ie of Berkeley (Jour. Bot. and Kew Garden Mi wae wig (Trans. mae 1874), Cooke (Grevillea, 1874-91), Massee (Kew Bull., 1398-1912), — in recent papers of Lloyd and the author A note on tet vegetation of Khajiar, near Chamba in the N. malayas.—By Mein is aie to a remarkably clear example of — i vegetation, apparently determined solely by 4 single fa —— or water. Khajiar is a roughly circular meadow with a _ saa which the centre, which is occupied by ti lake. Ro ; i i , there are several concentric zones = - and characte’ — by a flora strik- 118 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth {N.S., XVIII, The author exhibits some le a views of the meadow, in which arte Sbinceriteis zones are clearly see The ttt of the Nilgiri Hilltops plateau.—By P. F- Fyson The Nilgiri Hills Rie a poten? isolated by steep sides and long abdansd of plain from any other high lan ds. The pe eau is divided The differ is due to the cultivation of this tract vt an agricultural people, attracted thereto by a ee a condit On the western si utenti the climate not being suitable for agudilvore, a pistons al people settled doa and the: ey have not destroyed the natural covering of the The western side is thus the natural climatic _ of the local con- ditions ; the eastern vegetation is a degredation produ The asap of some plant communities in the Savannah stirs —By W. T. Saxton and R. H. Dastor. The authors have ss ied the vegetation of an area near Suan edabad with a view to elucidating the causes which lead to marked differences of vegetation in an ies where the majority of the physical factors bet prustiony uniform, and where the whole ae belongs to the sam formation Sonar gh the communities are differe ‘ This és shown, during the last seven ties a fairly sharp dis- “psa into feos r parts, and in some cases the dividing line between the r to arrive at any definite conclusion five lines of research Pave to be —* (a) a detailed mop cer of the vegetation of the parts ; (6) an analysis, Soanenl and p eal, a ‘es oases e water content; (c) an investigation oo ‘es of the more dominant pla plants i toss study of te piiysioko gioal papi * foie genes concerned ; and (e) experimental determination of the wilt- more in: ortant tion fence contol sacheee a ant plants, and their rate of transpirat p de frites wathors o w that the differentiation into Steet a communities ‘aa : woe sderlics factors and have studied the relationship between see actors and the communities eee ted. They also find tha * in ache ae cases the possession of a v. ye fe se i unbranched, tap- : is the only recognizable ‘‘ adaptation ” by — the plants of this ormation are able to survive eight ee mon Notes on forest successions in the Gangetic Plain and the Reeser. Vindhyas. KENOYER. w to the de termination of the character of the forest ~~ ia ns, no a4 et % q at 2 — ‘3 oO. io co © > i within the edge these upla ah 2 salad wali 1 heart, of the C.P. f ‘note: The following oealees iene can 1922.] Indian Science Congress. I.S8.C. 119 The Pera of this entire region are of the monsoon deciduous type o of Schimper. The thorn forest, which has been ascribed to part of this region, is sopaetials but a pioneer stage in the progression toward the monsoon type. 2. —— of Pe heavy —— of the cet there is here ard the forest i stage. proceeds southwar pratenirin gradually dancin and the amount o — hich has reached or proachi imax correspondin gly i pie ases. § . ere is great country. 3. The trees of the later oe lose their leaves at times varying with the species from October to April, but are practically all leafless by the end of April. Leafing out occurs rather before the commencement of the mo i 8 e few evergreens, such as Eugenia Heyneana, Ixora parvifior a and Buchanania eae are for the motl Da hydrarch pioneers in stream meta and in seepage seams on ther 5. Flow rering is distributed thr ree practi ically the entire year but is a Beet ano in the spring season, about February and March, and dur- in soon, about August and Sept secadnen: The climax forest of the Jub a Pe region is one hae Fiaporaae grandis and species of Terminalia prominent in the other regions icaenaten but as they grow readily ee pee sed aes is oen bio that the stress of human occupation has eliminated "7. In See where the stress is greatest, as the yA pra cae scarcely any timber is fo und beyond the pioneer stages. The t and shrubs found 4 in these coppice well, as a rule, and are protected from the ae na animals by_ thorns, by tough harsh leaves, or by a bitter cell cap. ‘D nd Bu most pure groups. art die of these is common on low w-lying, the last on higher areas. Along the edge of the hills an intermediate Stage is reached asi cae of "Dio ospyros tomentosa, Lagerstroemta parvi- flora, spec f Anogeissus, and Bassia latifolia. In many places the last, bocatibe of the great value of its flowers and fruits, is practically the only tree which escapes saneats cutting, hence becomes the largest tree of the forest There is a general difference in the composition of the cages of the plains and of the hills because of differences in the soil. Some trees ots to Layo elevations i in the Vind hive An Sipe coer study of Deccan grass land, I1.—By G. M. HAKRADEO,. . 1. This paper is in continuation of one read at the last Science i gels which seubned results of 1920. This paper deals with the resu 192 s year’s study shows marked secisert ook eh last tack in mon time of Pt ce ing of several species. Many additional s under observation. Some of lest year’s species are reduced in number, permanent qua oe se ee = —— of ae ea species, others are redu _—- “in — ants in each have remained constant except in qu I, in which an ; aditional Sominiack has ap 120 1.8.C. Preceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, 4. Plant ee have become much more a In addition, there have been discovered a few colonies of pure spec . Variety in the | fora, and its changing nature oni year to year have become very prominent. 6. The cultivated ae reseede.! middle strip has not stood to advan- 7. Firmer establishment of good fodder grasses on peorer spots, the gradually increasing area of marvel, and the extension of Ischaemum laxum on the land are hopeful features. he different tests of land improvement applied show favourable results, and the experience so far gained gives good hope of success. ae Field notes on oat gach airs of Southern India.—By C. C F Seer ore =o been published on the subject 2. The me economic importance as some of its species gore caoain a ste Theories as to susceptibility or immunity from attack are reviewed a criticised. ; - The notes refer to 23 specific parasites and 6 varieties and 218 host plants 5. Nc new theory has been suggested but the observations refute all the peers seieories as far as known except that of races within the species, gi foreign weeds recently saironerd in the neighbour- hood of By 8. R Several ‘phe ort soi etter Seige es in the Panjab plains and are well kno , Erigeron ‘linifolium, Malva- a ie oe sp.,e prot are. rani es. Some others have been noticed during recent years and are described 1ey reig A H ytrocotyl rotundifoli: ia a sith aps | Sita apetala, and Lactuca scariola. Am ons ¢ - ie aie cars pes a ing are no cr me Senebiera didy- ma, mbosa, Am najus, Tridax procumbens, Nicstiana. pipabarin ja Rucllia sebotea. Ve rbena bonariensie Euphor- bia geniculata, Eichornia crasspies, and Nothoscardum fragra A note on pollination and its economic importance in some of the chief crops of the Central Provinces and Berar.—By K. P. Surtvastava. 1, Cotton.—Observations were made on Gossypium neglectum sub- vars, malvensis, vera, and rosea; G. indicum var. bani; G@. hirs pe vars. rufa and buri. The flowers open between 7 and 10 a.m. Ordinarily self- pollination takes place, but insects, chi efly bees and butter flies, effect some cross pollination. The percentage of crossing varies with di fferent # : Bajra rp sane typhoideum) is cross a —— tes agency of wind and insects. Protandry prevents self pollin ae especially Aphis dorsaia, visit the flowers in great numbers. 3. Tur (Cajanus indicus).—In wat — ically aa flower, the anthers dehisce before the bud opens, and normally eclt- po results. But there is evidence that “oss ethos also oce gi clear days t the flowers open at abou and begin to fade gd the next day. Bees, especially sacle ‘isaimilis and Aphis dor rata, 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 18.C, 121 visit tbe flowers in great numbers. The former visits about 20 flowers per m Con one ae sion.—In order to introduce ae age paid — of any o the above crops in a particular locality, it is necessary to grow Set strain completely isolated from other varieties of the same. A short note on the short-cut to the nectar in the flowers of Bdeceayene rs 2 australe C. and F.—By P. M. Des : During the flo ° Castanospermum eusiene in the ‘Ro al Botanic Garden at siipar are i ; ica). i wi ir I ca S, just a : ring the process the birds probably become dusted with pollen, and thus become pollinators. There is no convincing evidence that they eat any of the fleshy petals they clip off. Some observations on the seekuins pads of Gymnopet- alum cochinchinense Kurz. and some other cucurbita- ceous plants.—By P. M. DesBaRMAN. sigan: res ene Michx. and A. Veitchit Hort. are frequently eg as anoles with i gachorin Eisen on the tendrils. Such omar ge also er heres among the Bicnonierenl d Cucurbitaceae. The plants tatboned in _ y cere, being chiefly copean seem no tudi sly. Under normal c onditions a tendril of Gymnopetalum ¢ cochinchinense Kurz. coils about a poitaass in the usual way. But if the ssigedy comes into contact with a roe fiat surface, the epide ern a cells in the region multi tale ae to the It Ba oa retard the devel- creti chmen aes an cian gud Tov i earin provide an alternative means of pgs? ing, we vt A hse portion of uch anchoring pads are found in Trie oaks palmata Roxb, and are suspected to occur pee a few other Cucurbitaceae. — S. The a system of Cyperaceae. By M. Sat Os made a passing porary in k on the Rhy sologteal Plant Anesovia! to the oceurrence © pes the — — in cer stg pie or is made exam menses sheaths arra: vascular bundle. The outermost sheath co hand ae cells. The intervascular type is rare and this type 8° 122 TS.C. Proccedings of the Ninth [N.S., SVE in hand wi ot a special feature of = vascular bundle whitt shows to ards the outside a prominent sheath of colourle er pe 7 i cells. The Shoeevainetts nar He = the Gra amineae is also inds a ap comneneeay and the gir type shows varying vp’ he Specialisation in grasses. The gir irdle ty i is sonata of Glumiflorae, and the girdle ee pe has arisen at a later stage. A case of plant surgery.—By L. B. KULKARNT. A baobab tree (Adansonia digitata) more than 300 years old and vi pagh in girth was so badly attacked by rot that the whole heart of the unk had — ppe eared. In 1920 the affected parts were carefully and th wood tarred, then the cavity was filled with. Ati kad thoroughly enactak over. The tree responded by unusually fine foliage: in ot Dec Garuga pinnata and Casuarina equisetifolia trees. also es pos i caashatly treated. Some abnormal 7 appa of Opuntia elatior, Mill.— By G. B. Patwa The writer has des ia d and photographed several malforma- Se of ‘clits of Seaate ator, _ observed in various tracts of the mbay Presiden ney. The for in their outline, spininess, form aes the position of their Perikin p em ad He has found the peculiar forms. aring more often in special situations in ary acts. The shapes i d n-lik ; forms, all appearing from the norm a phyllet ties: same phylloclade- : hown a whole half more of i nee of thorns. ae crowding of branches, jskeedhanasatiliey of vegetative and reproductive structures is also described. The writer is oe ng to propagate the types and is succeedi = to a certain extent. Some of the forms a sho owing signs of reproduc fee variant characters. ” Still os is too early to give an aaticeltative Be a nt. The ultimate searc pats liptridléas: fruit growing from a tio nhyiloctatla or a sae A study of Sid genus Triticum in Central India.—By G. K. Lx A Para and agricultural survey of a crop is essential prior to- he commencement o any experimental work devised =e Nea ee as particular crop, in the present instance, wheat of walior 2. The results of wheat investigation done within the Gwalior State are veg Sopleable to — rest of Central India tanical survey of the wheat crop o the Gwalior Sta s r cies, D on the heavy black soils, and the subspecies, Vulgare, for the irr rrigable loamy alluvial soils of Central India. ; 4, e impor sone - local variety trials = a realised, = or the purpose of a critical selection of the most suitable sorts, a collec tion of cultivated or from foreign countries ni desirable, if possible at the beginning of such a a The response of oo Early Barrt, Columbia and some durum wheats ——e introduced from the US. of alt wuld has been paliakaatiens at Gwalior give more valuable results than the o India, of issuing certain wheats from a research station. Productivity plus quality should. 1922.] Indian Science Congress. LS8.C. 123 be the first consideration ; in case the combination of the igo Peis is impossible, productivity should be given pe to qua n connec with item “65” i @ pc tioned. that a cates should be followed. This system has proved useful and agree ancl t the Gwalior Experimental Farms and is already in practice in ma conse ele stations of the U.S. of America. Variations in the Gossypium neglectum types of cotton.— By S. H. Prayae. n the course of the writer’s patente study on the principal five types desh, a “a al of senor etec., was notice the salient facts te es Neplctum Sarge: (N.R.). A distinct type of plant noticed had the ele CH eras Leaves and ots feria height oe ie o 3 feet 5 ; small 7 ~ fy Lid tole = at the axils of the leaves; accessory lo staple fine and auneuls ionge than the ordinary N. R. canon ‘pe _ plant ha lobed leaves and with the ory lobes absent, was ll (2) Noyletiom rt roseum, cutchica a (N. C. sat ede types of ‘plants h aving different-shapes of bolls were ob- Plants having globose bolls could easily be distin- aitiobed in the very early sti aie by the stem being hairy an pores ae the leaves being more broad than the ordinary type o (3) N eglectum vera (N.V.). Four distinct types re plants having different shapes of bolls were notic od. Plan pete al bolls had smaller braarooles = the others and possessed senitig nodes at shorter length a N nett tr ateuaet s (N.V.M. cae de types of pianks having different shapes of bolls were (5) N sero vera, Kathiavarensis (N.V.K.). this, a distinct types with variations in t ced. he shape of bolls were The determination of seed weight and i ae or lint per . R. Hin Rares in Cossneiae hirsutum.—By G cider in Pasa a de ens v effect elimi ia lon in mee ee! increasing size Ae sam ety: ie 10 seeds, midit tuation in weight due to ‘y.—-Method of determining fluc . voehs of seed, fluctuation in humidit of aver y. Similarity of graphs 0 age we t H a ee not per seed — of humidity. : i } pot end great to neh erg elabor: te precautions waren 8 nored or rend sae Cis Sng ered negligible by ‘arranging tani of single plants, On some petrified plants from the Mesozoic and Tertiary rocks of India and Burma.—By B. SaHst. uthor describes five e specimens of a woods, he three of them belonging to Conifers and two to dacioueria 124 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVI, Coniferous Wood. Age: Upper Gondwana (Rajmahal Group) of South India. steno Wood. Age: Sripermatur Group, Madras Presidency. ego us Wood. Age: Cuddalore Sandstone Series, South — . se Gah ai Digtrlodonou s Wood. Age: Tertiary of Burma. The spec robably sage san 4 abe! with Diipterce pedal Cae Hold ut ws a number ‘of structural fea- or tbed. Palmozylon Wadiai, sp. nov., silicified palm stem from Jam Ages Er wed "Siwalik (the specimen was not foie in situ). Section of Geology. President :—G. H. Tripper, Esq., M.A., F.A.S.B. Bearing of geology on some engineering problems in the 7 Presidency.—By N. N. Ayyanaar and G. G. ARK engin is essentially a geologist as he has often to solve siiabieres which gata geological principles, but as things are at prese nt in India t ey do not get the fu enefit, in their training, that a study y to solve the following interesting a ring problems in the Bombay Preside which resolve themselves to be geological “questo ns with a view to ee. the ‘importance of geolog By to engineering. The bearing of geology on irrigation, particularly in the Dec area, is tally discussed, with Seaseations of the water- logging and cule -efflor scence from Baramati an — areas near Poona and remedies estor to almost the normal conditions, are en ested. Similarly the question 4 ar : in the soft ground. To prevent damage, therefore, it is explained that i bar be the last of the series of sand spits formed on the bends of rivers where in = nas ion a very sharp turn due to the obstruc- tion caused by the Other Seteveabinee: ‘problems — as boring for sub-soil water supply , ete., are left over for future oceasio Geological results of the Mount Everest Expedition. —By A. M. Heron. 1922.) Indian Science Congress. IS.C. 126 Iron ores of Bihar and Orissa.— By H. G. Jonzs. Note on the occurrence of bitumen in the Deccan Trap of Bombay.—By W. A. K. Curistie. On a bitumenous limestone outcrop, associated with marine fossiliferous strata in the Murree series at Jokau, Haveli Tehsil, Poonch, Kashmir.—By D. N. Wapta. On the discovery at Kanneri near Bombay of one of the foci which contributed to the formation of the Deccan Trap of Western India.—By K. A. K. Hatiowes. On the fossil Pectinidae from Hathab, Bhavanagar State, Kathiawar.—By H. C. Das-Gupta. Palaeontological notes on the Nummulitic rocks of Cherra Punji, Khasi Hills, Assam.—By H. C. Das-Gupta. On the Cancrinite from Kishengarh, Rajputana.—By 8S. L. Biswas. On the occurrence of Siphoneous Algae in the Tertiary of Sind.—By B. B. Gurra. Osirea praelonga from the Bagh Beds.—By E. VREDEN- BURG. Section of Medical Research. President :— Masor J. Connineuam, B.A., M.D., LMS. Presidential Address. Inp1a’s Dest To MepicaL RESEARCH. It is my pleasing duty as President to welcome you to this, the 4th meeting of the Medical Research section of a Indian Science Congress. To our guest, Dr. Kendrick, I i § ia Jeome in your name. The oe alge ge pe ke Fait t the Rockefeller - been chosen for me. My distinguished predecesso that t : ap P . present time is particularly suitable for a careful consideration 126 L.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVITI, of our obligations to the past. Great changes are taking place around us. India is passing through a very definite and im- portant metamorphosis, the results of which are bound to have far reaching effects on every branch of thought in the country. The responsibility for her progress in medical science has now devolved upon her people and her future progress will greatly depend upon the attitude adopted by her political e medicine has been built, while her educated classes, in common with the rest of the world are more concerned with a host It is only by looking into the past and contrasting the medical conditions which prevailed at that time with those of the present day that we are able to measure the progress which 1922.] Indian Science Congress, I.8.C. 127 universal credence, and the nervous system was still regarded as the controlling factor in the various manifestations of disease. The clinical medicine of the time was comparatively simple. The arts of auscultation and percussion, recently dis- covered, had not yet come into general use. The fevers, with the exception of malaria and those which showed the character- istic eruptions, were as yet undifferentiated and included many diseases not known to have an entirely different etiology. Thus cholera was considered primarily a disease of the nervous system. One early writer indeed refers to concussion of the brain as the “ lethi fabricator” of the disease, the purging and vomiting being regarded merely as sanitary processes. rom the point of view of treatment all diseases belonged to one of two types, the sthenic and asthenic. It was only necessary for the physician to make up his mind-which of the two he had to deal with to apply the treatment considered appropriate to the occasion, depletion for the one, stimulation for the other. When we read of the lengths to which this treatment was carried we can well understand the feelings which prompted Stokes to say, ‘‘ Oh! that men would stoop to learn or at least cease to destroy !2’ : : icroscope as yet played no active part in medical investigation. Its existence was however well known and there was much speculation as to the true relationship of micro- organisms to disease. In fact Plenciz in Vienna had, as early as 1762, enunciated what in effect was “the germ theory of disease.”” The Hippocratic theory of the causation of epi- besides the aie still held the field. The exact nature of os harmful element was undetermined and was vaguely referre 128 I.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVII, into their graves in their dominoes. The grim horror of the situation can well be imagined. The terrible results of the various visitations of the plague in Europe are historical. During the outbreak of 1800, 76,000 persons were attacked and 15,000 died in Seville, a Spanish town with a population of about 80,000. The old cemeteries just outside the walls of Gibraltar bear witness to the havoc wrought by the same epi- demic amongst the inhabitants of the Rock. Nearly 6,000 out ofa population of 10,000 perished in four months. In India con- ditions were, if anything, worse. The large masses of people living under the most primitive and insanitary surroundings afforded an almost .unbounded field for the spread of every kind of epidemic disease. Fevers, small-pox, plague and cholera each took a terrible toll from the unfortunate inhabitants who frequently looked upon them as a sign of divine displeasure to be averted by prayers and sacrifices rather than by precau- tionary measures. The exact mortality caused by these dis- eases will never be estimated. Contemporary literature, how- ever, leaves no doubt as to their severity. Of an epidemic of ‘of numerous native villages dead and the dying.” A similar fever in Coimbatore and the neighbouring districts was responsible for the deaths of y 8 attacked the force at that time and, lasting just 4 weeks, carried off no less than 14,000 persons. Innumerable instances of this sort might be given but d have said enough to illustrate the appalling state of affairs at 1922. ] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 129 lest relief, but in some countries without even daring to approach them with assistance. What a contrast is presented by the scientific medicine of to-day. An “art” whic i i century developed into a great science based upon the results of experimental] investigation. To the general recognition of the value of this method, and to this alone, can be traced the mar- vellous evolution which has taken place. No department of medicine has remained unaffected. In none, however, has research been productive of greater results than in that which further and say that the investigations which proved beyond dispute the microbic origin of disease laid the foundations upon which the whole edifice of modern medicine has been built. Antiseptic surgery with all its latter day improvements, and Cohn. Preventive medicine was but ‘a blundering science,’’ until the establishment of the germ theory altered its Whole outlook and gave a new direction to its energies. small beginnings it has rapidly grown as new facts have been established until at the present day it rivals in importance the 9 130 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, governed by the necessity for certain meteorological condi- tions which must be present before the life cycle in the insect host can be completed. Thus the old Hippocratic theory of the causation of disease has received indirect support from the results of modern research. The deficiency diseases which came into such prominence in Europe during the war have long been recognized in the tropics. Workers in the East have frequently referred to the shortcomings of the eastern dietary and its probable connec- tion with liability to disease. A correct appreciation of these facts is most important in countries where the majority of the population live in the ‘ twilight zone. ’ Modern treatment is also the outcome of experimental in- vestigation. Polypharmacy has fallen into disrepute and has been replaced by the belief in a few well tried drugs, the effi- cacy of which has been proved by experiment. The search for have been subjected to chemical analysis and have in many cases vielded their active principles. Medicine has not hesi- tated to apply to her own use the advances in other sciences. Electricity, X-rays and radium are now recognized metheds of treatment. No better illustration of the complete subversion of the older methods can be given than the modern hypertonic saline treatment of cholera, which has replaced the recognized method of a century ago, “‘ exemplified by the following old prescription. ‘‘ Mitter. Sanguie brachio magno orificio, add. oz. XXX. aut usque ad syncopen.”’ The prominent part which has been played by workers in India in this marvellous development has been the subject of a graceful tribute by Sir William Osler : Speaking of medi- cine in Greater Britain, he says, ‘‘ Quickly there arises the memory of the men who have done so much for Briti tio What India owes to the medical research can be inferred — our literature be in the absence of their contribu- ns !”’ between race, creed or class. Applied to the relief of the multitudes stricken by disease or accident, modern medicine has brought about a reduction in suffering and misery U¥ 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.S$.C. 131 dreamed of by a people which for ages has sat in darkness and in the shadow of death. n the realms of disease prevention, if the results are less tangible, they have infinitely greater possibilities. can population, such as are found in the army and the jails. We The ultimate aim of Medical Research.—By Lr.-Cox. J. W. Cornwatu I.MS. - All diseases can be classified thus :— e to accidents. 2. Due to physical agencies. 3. Due to chemical agencies. 4. Due to specific parasitic agents. 5. Due to disturbed function. (a) metabolic, (6) mechanistic. Ss Wis ‘ta . ey are all preventable, some by State agency, the rest by ividual himself. ini - spending far too much time, money and peg fl a al tigating the pathological processes of declared ae a risa laborate cures, and far too little in trying to learn the cau ®viations from a state of health. : to- e main efforts of medical research workers petrnaid epee eed face the discovery oi conditions which permit a distur ions of the organs of the body to occur. : , din P athological and therapeutical studies which have not this en view are of secondary importance. 132 1.58.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Note on the Weight Curve of the Nor mal PR Infant Seats the first year. ae Miss D. F. Cur $ paper was werd ant of 842 observations made at a ‘© Baby v ” centre at Del A previ a series of weights at birth gave an average weight of am. Whi le it i is obvious that many more observa- w a this is rapidly made up and follow d a steady rise during the first three months of life which is the period of t rapid in- cr h of the twelfth the average weight is over 10} lb From the 3rd month onwards the rise 1s more g a t n the 24th week the average weight being 12 he average weekly gain during the first six months is about four ounces r sixth to the welfth month the curve as indicated on the chart was more theoretical as fewer observations were recorded at these ages. Du his e ise wai n to be more gradual and at the end of the first year the child weighed about two and a muc t bir e object of i t a : the note is to bring before those concerned with infant welfare in India the desirability of recording weights of the infants under their observation in such a way that accurate records irom different parts s of the country may be collected. Tuber ee beasts A attle is rare in India at as in the western Presidency. In view of this fact it was of interest and importance to investigate the catia and origin of an outbreak of tuberculosis that were — from ~ apoaee ny and from one which died of tuberculosis in en: gardens. The fac SS. the danger of importing into India mals from foreign a tuberculosis is common without satin safe guards te Pion ae opecdoia from the disease. On some observations on Tubercle Bacilli in culture with special reference wi the properties of an Endoli- pase.— By Lr.-Cov. R. Row, 1.M.8. The known biological fact that ani — or vegetable cells yield en- zymes has been extended to bacterial cells also. These bodies bein, ng speci- fic according to the richness of particular eeuuleaate rinciple it may be pres ent p Leal is to ascertain what enzymes if any, can be demonstra in a mass of T. B. grown on solid media and their earl on the sam during pate sis. Two kinds of enzyme ne a proteoly- tic and the “other De an tic. “Both produce changes in the t tuberculous mass-physical, chem nd microscopic. The result is the libera soe of a mixture of fatty stds demonstrable by acid reaction and for ’ ese incom soaps. The micro a changes result in the alteration x nels sulting from the solvent porte n on the waxy material. The en the action is Se eoaipiuts become Bons ank. The protease produces 1922.) Indian Science Congress. L8.C. 133 gummy material partially soluble in the Auid of a saline emulsion. The Bate d fatty acid can be extracted with petrcl-ether filtered through pa u i icle bee u Saeternca bo gis and freed from solid dr 8 zi and when evaporated gives an orange coloured waxy-mass soluble in chloro- form and from this soaps are avaiable with proper nedteaiad with ak ali definite oak and general reaction in tubere ulous patients. Observations on the influence of these salts = the sors stimulation in man infected Note on the Ratios of the Numerical Content of certain Bacterial Suspensions obtained by the Haemocytometer method to those obtained with Brown’s opacity tubes. — By Masor J. Cunntneuam., 1.M.S., and B. Timorny. The opacity method of enumerating bacteria be ra by Bro was originally based on numerical enna ites ted by a ge tio Wright’s and Braxton Hick’s methods. iat er com mmunication the rates of the numerical content of er saab sions obtained by the meter method to his original table (taken as unity) was ey given for B. typhosus, a paratyphosus A and B, paratyphosus B A fur Shee series of ee ommon orga nisms have been submitted to a Similar procedure an Baie gare ios to Brown’s or fees table have been estimated. The r canis which have been obtained so far correspond closely with those given by Br tical eer of the opacity ubes as estimated by the oe oe meth om: z na than ¢ Nichi toed age given by this author, The ratio between the Id and ne thods varying sete 1 to 1-2 and 1 to 0°9 for different origan The zslue = formol-gel test for syphilis.—By 8S. Rama- KRISHN eee t The for ae test for haere! the Wasserman reaction an clinical. histories were compared in 120 c a Wasserinan reaction agreed _ Sok ere! histories Pa 93:33% V hile clinica] histor ries d with the us the formol- el test stands condemned when compare history of aes cases 1g well as with the results of the Wasserman reaction. On reversion of the nica: form of Leishmania Pr: Ms and Leishmania tropica to the res sistant non- fyi a torpedo and 0 body in culture tubes and its benone 2 2 R Bee a “% search for the transmitter.—By on t do or 0 ant tor a oxprinetal infection with Se the Bergen sah ot insect Phagocytes. Now there is no evidence of Seren with flagellates found in the so-called pakacren feta 5 poutive 134 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVII, = pg a series of observations were undertaken to wis the ious phases of reversion from the flagellate to the resistant t forms and ae following pri were recorded oak ne nen week from surface peice, on N.N.N. medium which wast found to be the most suitable fur the pur- ose " normous division and sub- division sa ats flagellates of various sizes and shapes by simple fission. (First two weeks. ne Bs so and loss of mobility ae ie “flagellate es accom ed by a shortening of the flagellum anda ultaneous migration of the blepharoplas towards the nucleus and Pt of the proce sm. (Third week.) 3. jecteea and fattening phase of the parasite with the complete disappearance of the rudiments of the flagellum and _ closer apposition 0 of the ble pharoplast . i nucleus and increased vacuolation leading to the complete formatio a thin capsule which is cast off or aba bed. week. . Rounding off of the parasite before assuming the form found in the ag Saprw fours. week. om above clear that in the search of a transmitter the endless ‘arity of morphologically different flagellates, flagellates and 0 — ould lead to — ffic _ es in identifying the parasites 2 inculture s and therefore as e more so in are nceptete ea of inesite a aod = rally with atest kinds of herpat ; and in tiie absence of a ingle experiment prov ing the nfastivity ers these in susceptible ete it is a. te to Beit ; and condemn any particular insect a bug, a flea a phlebotomus, simply on the evidence 0 of Ae yet in aie “met ine e even aaveral weeks after an infective Note on the Cultivation of Leishmania donovani from the peripheral blood of persons suffering from Kala-azar.— By Lr.-Con. J. W. Cornwatt, I.M.S., and H. M. Lar- RENAIS. The authors related ten successive successful cultures of flagellates from af peripheral blood in kala-azar for purposes diagnosis and r flasks. Suggested that it be eee itely pe ded es e who have ac cess to numerous 2 patients with kala-azar tS ce Taeehod is really of value in aiding early aienad in doubtful cases The diagnosis of Kala-azar an pee blood culture.— By Brras Mouan Das etween March 3rd and August ai the gota nab blood of 35 cases of kala-azar was py claimeny > culture to N.N.N. medium. Nineteen © these patients had had no antimony ebaalanatis whit in the remaining sixteen varying amo eye of sntinine had been giv All those cases except two were culturally aye The average time when flagellates first appeared in the cultures was just under eight days. (Shortest period 3 days longest 22 days.) The two negative cases iad each undergone a com i .c. of 1% 80 timony tartrate) but had not shown m improvement in t elin- ical conditio gh the peripheral blood culture in these negative st cases leishmania we microscopically i spleen smears. © cases which were positive both by per ripheral we e bo culture sett negative by microscopical examination of lood and spleen juic . ¥ . 1922. | Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 135 hese shew that the diagnosis of kala-azar by culture of the peri- i pheral blood is in skilled eens ee if at all, less reliable than micro- scopical examination of spleen jc The value of culture of the peripheral blood in Kala-azar as a pena Prpeenys re.—By 'T. SunTHaPaTHy IYER and K. V. Krr The results appear to show that the culture method, used purely for purposes of diagnosis and not eee as a corroborative test, gives infor- mation span lue in:about 25% of case The more advan ged the case is a the time of culture the greater the chance of succe Repeated Saltire: where possible, is of value The nibes should be inoculated for a long ‘uti extending to about 40 days before a negative result can be recorded. The peau of Kala-azar.—By Masor F, P. Mackte, Major Mackie drew gh 8 to the prominent part ee had been played by workers in Madras in gue investigation of kala-azar. I dealing with the parasite he PRE the possibility of a sans in its was pre d. ch a supposition ure when it could not access to and escaped from the human being. nied of infection by me 2ans of the intestinal canal and also h versy which = Laan a a vats ound the SS te nee means of an insect. ing first with the © work which had been done by Patton, Mrs. Adie this insect and pointed out that while the bodies observed b ld be were most Jccuarapes ee work had yet to be done before it sg ; ale finally accepted a tage of leishman donovan body. He He cussed the position of thin sand fly as poe earrier of the dca - the disease by me of antimony tartara leishmania like bodies found by Major demonstrated, i, —By P .N. Das. siology of Micro Filaria ngue oe oti oe pea Filariasis < ce lo: , function, of the ton Certain aspect: the anatomy # — in penne ort of she ssichakite ey ae © Ss. Effects of the injections of —, of it ifiaren re alin, movements of M.F. under the cover glass blood artar, Emetic, Nov poet nobi flon, Iodine ete. laria 3. Effects of the injections under cover glass pan sn aio : ai Phi the developed stages of Filaria in preparations filari- ah Mosquito dissection in Puri Jail and Sadar Hospital. One flar 136 LS.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVII], ated fe com Dib yen infected 43% of the mosquitoes —— in jail and tran ted the infection to gg fellow prisoners and when remov to hospital, “info cted 32% of the mosquitoes ebantiind: 14 of c ert the advanced poy be: ie ment of Filaria. The successive - j s fed of scsi as flariated female priso Metamorphosis of filaria i: is ; Culex Fatigans. nm Discusion of the phenomena observed in 55 positive specimens osquito stomach. (2) Description of 13 aif apes —— and discussion of the pheno- observed in the of the ‘iawn erate: cycle in 92 rei epetiitions of mickaeita thora 6. Que — of the transmission of the infection from human bein ng to mosquito a om mosquito to human being and of infection in groups of familie vote “of filarial endemicity in the Puri Municipality as deter- mined by (1) Nae sp ROE infec ti d. (2) Examination of blood in a of 8. Certain. sities of the siatvoliey of the diseas 1 ie negate = a group re 153 cases in the i t stages of filarias Periodical filarial fever eae the associated pathological condi- tions in a grou Ss. in a group of 5 Dinctedan of the ersten ideas about esi pathology of the disease and its bearing upon treatmen Question of the ee period o the seasonal variations in the appearance of M.F. in the peripheral blooc ote of aval periodicity. Die nal and nocturnal varia- ood during the day in Haemolysed and tio conriagatced ree (diluted 15 minutes) BEE BS blood being nega- tive duri ing the day. 2 Shanetnd of aay with a weer debian Mixed helmin- thic infeetio on in a case Filaria in blood, Ascaris lumbricoides, Ankylostoma, Trichiuris Psrcker ova and Strogyloides Larvae in faeces —(Haemoglobin 10% 253 Tre shes nt of — (i) Filariasis with } n blood, in ape followed up from 1919 and 19 pete he in 1921 were 0 be varies from 6 to 5. Discussion of the mode of Ebon (ii) 31 cases of Si onc ohe treated in 1981 with marked results any cases resto — to normal condi ns on. Dis- sion of treatment. Treatment must be inten (iii) 11 Susad of periodical filarial hee: treated with cate ‘vesults. 13. oo of reactionary phenomena and after Antimony injec- tions in 110 ¢ bse ELSE ‘on ce criticisms against the usefulness of Anti- mony i in ‘hetions 3 in Filaria Filariasis research (Darbhanga Research Memorial) Caleutta School = f Tropical Medicine and Hygiene.—By 8. seca 3 Vv d in inte * in differ i gave some — — page: with the relative frequency of si Hie y °o t ise 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.0) 187 types of mosquito present and pointed nae oe nearly 10 per cent of the mosquitoes caught were infected with filar On the occurrence of fugitive swellings on the extremities and trunks of persons suffering from Filariasis i in India. —By Lr.-Cor. J. W. Cornwa.t, I.) Fugitive swellings due to the temporary or viiaiaide arrest of adult filariae in the superficial Keir of the tru poste nd extremities do occur in India, though apparently u rea f pyogenic organisms are present in the civoulaneiar an absces be formed. External pressure may be the cause of the ar erent re death of the wandering aria, A filarial survey with a statistical enquiry into the Rela- tionship of Filariasis and Elephantiasis.—By Masor J. A. hd tat I.M.S.., oe J. Cunninauam, I.M.S. and T. SretHapatuy ly Thi: Ae per presented the results of a statistical subd of the disease in Saidapet a spe infect cs area near Madras. Attention was special- a diverted to the differences presented by the sia in South India Sasige parts of the tropics —- ally Fiji. e differences are especiall aga microfilaria rate in cases of Alarat ‘disease B gible in ‘lephantiasis, In India microfilaria are requent 1 of si ial disease that in those without filarial aun, while i “Fi iii the erse pega tices holds g T aper records the important Steer ation that the Be ios of persons affect- ed with elephantiasis regularly increases wit ° i=) ~ ® Technique of staining and aoe Helminths in bulk. —By Caerain Visunu T. Kork oe technique described in this paper, is the outcome of personal tri AJthough the technique is similar for all different orders such a Pe watodse, eee and Nematodes, still it differs slightly in certain details for each o as been selected for staining and od will apply equally f fi n well to other species. More than net o age and Lge ing as been described. A particular fixative or a stain n eed not claim = Sele over other, ae r staing and yet the he sat is cage n each combin routine ee is described in the body of this paves ral while doctatie from the method have been described in the footnote Mass treatment of Hookworm infection.—By K.S. Mwas- KAR (Ankylostomiasis inquiry T’ richinopoly ). nky — . in ras Sienic A Osage of ¢ eC he use of strong cs ge of the ———— the u wa the Madras Presidency, this treatment was unsuited for the masses, em 2 sim ment which would be simple safe and effici Chemical, "phystolosioal and sharapaaitie — to be desire were carried out on 138 L8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, 54 an shasta nig the Trichinopoly central jail onde being treated for the i The results showed that, with the exception of oe form whic y prove useful in An siplodtornion infection, only t drugs-oil of aeericitodicae thymol, and betanaphthol are more or ste cient. Oil of chenopodium was found t o be a mixture of several useful and useless aeecalarrad the febatiniwint with it is efficient, but toilsome, costly, and uncertain as to its safety. skein and betanaphthol treat- ments in sin ‘ sch of 5 grains without purgatives are simple, safe, and efficient, thymo ore somewhat costlier than betanaphthol. The above conclusions were based on the hook-worm removal with one test treatment ; when ba oe on the percentage of cures, 67 and 72% of cases were cured with thymol and betanaphthol acoenll’ vely. Addition of light efi docs ate cartoons increases the antici action of dru ial e drugs e found to have a remote action which brings about ‘delayed’ te: et ae ng that except in proved cases of ae a Gentine ent which is known to be efficient need not be followed by an t The two drugs thymol — pacha ming gave older: good results in field work, The one Sie eatment without rgatives is simple safe and effici As no previous glee opical os shri of faeces is required an = as the ae need not be se egpemennaiy more than once, the treatment is likely to find flavour with the ma oe a of hookworm infection.—By K. S. Muas- me sibel of diagnosis of oe sehen are based on some e parasite. fe) enterin ng the skin of the host, ay cause the ‘ilarnthatory phenomena of ground itch, and while present in the lung may cause bronchitis. On reaching the intestine the Shep of the adult parasite may be detected Sch il by a large number Ova — esent in — faeces, or by the haem- rhage consequent upon the biting of thei sig tates and, indirectly, by the changes brought about in the blo od of eo ho After the death of he worm, either natural or induced, Bites Pes Bee may be detected by the finding 0 of gs hookworms in the es. — m infection, as distinguished fr hookworm disease, can- fy nd i ton is dierent outhern n Indi and in many other parts of India where Souler is “equally highly sentient On ee other =~ ae clinical dingo of hookworm disease is possible as it is base e presence of anaem aaa: ae arches but the process soe ae caveral liad of all prea causes of anaemia. The diagnosis of tents x infection has therefore to be based on laboratory — he object of this paper is to discuss the ge a value of t eocel methods which have been proposed. methods pe baad on ae examination of (A) the faeccs and (B) the blood of the a. examination of the faeces includes : ? pipette ee for the presence of Shan blood ; 2. cope examination the ing of ova; : a pepaeeber sabttind for the finding of the larvae ; . the finding o 2 — Secheelphiar: removed by an efficient anthel- & De” The gi Ee m ore wigaee! — - variation in the haemoglobin co . the ewer mei of ther ste a Cote of eosinophiles to other | 3. @ serological aie with reference to complement deviation. cg tia eee, ee De 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 139 A simplified sede for the pais of plasmodium RJ. A. SINT S Cultural methods seem to have been ao in the diagnosis “a latent malaria chiefly ee the methods hitherto described were no suitable for routine clinical u The following method was ocd with the idea of sees a more practical method for testing the value of cultures in diagnos The chief point in the method is the use of a special tubs which can i e blo stem about 2°55 mm wide. The pe r chuntinks is shaped like a Wright 8 This chamber and the stem act as the culturo t i ber is filled half full of Sy acts fluid) ealed off. drawn into the upper chamber its capillary end is sealed off is then ee until the beads have ag aieryt b The ig then sealed off in the flame shaken into the lower chamber. . jensiaee of the upper chambe the connecting stem he lower chamber can now be placed She: in the incubator at ¢ mine the culture the up ) ube is op ig with a Wright’s pipette, and a smear is made and stain tube is immediately resealed in the flame and replaced i in » the ical All the above steps are done with strict aseptic preca 4 Some very successful cultures have been obtained by ye Saetho Review of the position of the genus Haemoc ystidium 10 (Castellani and Willey 1904) with a description of two new species.—By Caprain H. E. SHorrr, S A paper des is to collect together, the known facts from a variety of sources, as — m my own observations, regering a up enus (haemo- cystidium) a bloo Apilees of reptilia, which special nage ah workers ge nerally on blood parasites of t is type. One of parr points — is as to the identity of the genus Bae aidion wit haemoproteu Is Keratomalacia a deficiency diseas e? if so, what is the nature of the deficiency 1 By Masor H. E. Wri I.M.S GHT, The clinical appearances were first descr! ibed in detail. en. In the consist in (a) eye changes, and (b) general constitutional changes. n t. eye on f the conjunctiva with a greas te e may find a smoky di iscolouration ° J aga Xerophthel of la cornea ma w anything from a blu aze ; infiltration up to a dense opaque in erstitial Keratitis. sometimes pro- gressin necrosis and ulceration. This is the Ke alacie ae which the condition derives its m mmon I dition there 04%. The tables give age distribation and frequency of prominent Symptoms in 80 cases observed in 1921. 140 I.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth _[NS., XVIII, TABLE I. ] Age, Years. Male. | Female. Total. : Rien 2 Ra Sand under .. a cet | 21 48 | 5 to 15 ng * 9 | 10 19 Over 15 = 4 | 4 13 4 60 } TABLE II. Condition. Frequency. | Condition. Frequency. Liver. ae blindness: ae 12 Enlarged se 7 Cornea :—Clea a } Palpable : 23 beanie = 11 Not Palpable 34 Deep infil- Reoaely small. . 2 tration .. 22 al ted 14 Ulcerated 27 Jaundic | D = no 9 Generar s appease nce :— Conjunct Fat and healthy. 8 Epithelial Scbecias | | in, not weasel 28 nly 8 Marasmic 44 Serosid with | id a tiv 4 61 Apgarently nor- ey is eaeben tend Sneed Re ES Sssociated with the eye changes are (b) marasmus, intestinal disease, respiratory tract disease, liver disease (atrophic and h yperatrophic with r without rae % phe tate changes in skin and mucous membranes and soe. of t which ely night blindness alone or pn pepe of amild — (referred to ve — were not con ee in the above figures. There appears to ome connection between night blindness with or without Rerascaiahiata and night blindness with ceoriitlla; whether of the Bo ntosa,” ‘‘ sine pigmento” or ‘* Punctata albescens oe raat e be that all Povey cases have sgenstine corp pte in 1s Keratomalacia due to a mtd in Fat soluable A? The experimental production of corneal necrosis by the deprivation of fat soluable A suggests that this food factor plays an important in the a condition. It was not eaters that the clinical condi- i ou ; i animals. in et fom oF of ot ® ang 6 3 ® 5 ot 5 z A 5 Fy sal 3 =| ® — 2 = Fs ° en 1922.] Indian Science Congress. I.8.C. 141 inflamatory cone e More accurate descriptions of the exact eye signs and symptoms in experimental Keratomalacia are required. In the ex- Eeeenial ae according to Stephenson and Clarke, the determin- t nf as in 2 im ate ork comparatively few of those who are predisposed to Kerato tialatia actually oe? cornea] symptoms but bacterial inva- sion ea not the determining fac a anetitte of clinical "Tecshceuclcae pig in the depth of the cornea hit the pai and Bowman’s membrane are still intact ust as ertain cases of Sy hilis or Tuboreuloi the condition may un on o. ulceration. ondary infectio y the ora ei the conjunctival sac does not u ce as good or b oil alone and neither produced the rapid effects obtainable in experime tal animals. It may not be the fat soluable A in Cod liver oil which is all important. ae Bikes feeding oe pose | igeeenes with success on the sage = meg n this con ea matter what the determin- in in Keo ra ernalaeie kinealyi— By Masor Wrieut, I.M.S. and Dr. Trimurrui (Madras). This protozoon was discovered by O’Kinealy of Calcutta in 1903 in yascular pedunculat ted nasal polypi and egy by Vaughan, Professor of i gy at the Medicat College of the Cit Minchin and Fantham published A scien description of the sails aiucotur ure of the parasite, and in the same year late Dr. Madras drew atte 1 of the profession to its existonne in this Rhinospouridium of the onjunctiva and the lachrym ee al sac hav made by Wright and tiie articles on the subject will sheathy appear in the medical ing be ere likened to small portions of the spleen or ene ung of a small een casos wer spas —— surface b Wet coloured paintings of Wright’s he tee achry mal sac the parasite gives rise to reddish soft polypoid gromths which fill up its cavi ity. Ths one how & granular feel. The par 1922.) Indian Science Congress. LS.C. 143 sitic polypi can be seen only when the is removed and c Associated with the growthi - a suppiueatioe deck you pabtetae Photngebhs of the conditions were The meting 4 Rip appearances were described in detail and some sears shown on the n of a minute conjunctival poiypi2 mm. x 1 A ref e mode i esults. Wright and Cunningham placed small portions of growth into sub-conjunctival pockets in monkeys and also tried pone 7 jon on the penis, and nasal mucosa of monke rhe with emulsion of fresh polypus and injection of similar cunuldol: in elise ung. ese experiments were unsuccessful up to the time of writing. The above siglo rast ap- arently assumed that direct transfer was possible. The reader was of the opinion that direct transfer from man to man is the mo ode of trans- mission. Wright considered that the position of the local lesion Rate dust or water transmission and that spores when shed probably hav an extra human life c ycle before ga rate access to the at mucosa. In thi i t male 2. e Madras Presidency individuals from the West Coast appear to ee irequently affected. ajority of ponte are boys ae young adults, the highest tiisldcrice being between ae to 20 and 20 to Treatment. Up to nape ke Rael of hi growths was the method egg of the gr eeetiiens su When the growth was |] — and ting conju of Quinine Bi-hydrochloride in 1% and 2% water solution on a conjunc- tival polypus without success. He found in one case that 2% Tartar emetic dropped into the eye t.i.d., caused the disappearance of the dn in two months. Pres umably t the ato al antimony destroyed the parasite. This observation needs confirmatio Treatment of ES rEosy with we bce) oil and its pre- parations.— By E. Murr Hydnocarpus oil is * pigiticoe: from the seeds of hydnocarpus Poeaiietaes es There = —o me 28 species oe more or less of the same qualitie: which ne nae celia lepro tions F The init iia: must be gr but in order to m it is necess any to increase osage. The incre reased dosage general results in a reaction which is tellawel by neces Hae doses “ete to be given r experience better results one obtained by ment ‘than by any — drugs, but i a. diet, climate, ex exercise and many ot if the patient is to wiheGee: this line of treat- ar in mind that eh dbatiors, have to be attended to na Note on the preparation of vaccine lymph cage : eo climate.—By L1.-Cou. W. F. Harv = An exposition of Dr. Nyland’s soak ep of eee of potency vaccine lymph under continuousl tropical condi - he principle underlying Dr NN yla nd’s method is that hes gsc - shall be inoculated with lymph derived from a same speci 144 1.8.C, Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Under these conditions degeneration does not take — Three species ps vaccinifers are used, the rabbit to provide lymph oculation of the ow-calf and the cow-calf to provide stock lymph : “i saaolated on of buffa- can be sent far afield without loss of potency. It is diluted at the time of use by the ooo and this ‘diluted lymph preserves its potency for two or three day The necessity for a standard for vaccine lymph.—By Mason J. ConnineuaMm, I.M.S., and Masor J. A. CruicKsHaAnk, I.MS. rious standards Ss been introduced ge time to time but none of these have come into common use. Vaccine lymph has been consi- dered ep egeeggeal so fang as continuous Gesinulation has been one Variations in potency and the bose a deterioration c judge oa i any extent by this.m e exact datertaination of the mala of a lymph is thus require The Phares rs describe a method "Dhiok depends upon Bi dilution of the lym moh various str pie until discrete vesiculation is obtained. The mi lie audi din terms of the number of vesicles col the vield of pulp per linear inch sown. "The compartive value of various samples of lymph can sas i recorded. An examination into the degree of efficacy of Antirabic treatment.—By Lr.-Cot. Harvey, I.M. S. and Mazor H. W. Acton, I.MS. The aoe argument adopted by the authors leads to the follow- ing conclus (1) The sage spo rates from rabies whether amongst treated or untreated — ~ rrected in accordance with the constitution of the population conce 2) We should. have substitution or oe least inclusion of the total mortality rates in reports, which at presen t simply give failure rates. 3) The current ideas of the mortality occurring amongst the untreat- ed are in anes of revision. Cholera and the value of ae inoculation.—By Major H. G. Srinzs Wess, eals with the experience of the author whilst working in the dis- tricts of the North- al Frontier Province at cholera during the months of April-September 1 e deals briefly with the vibrios that have been found in connection with sholate a and how they can obtain a footing in the human body and their ultimate fate there next touches on ‘the subject of immunity as ee es and finally gives his experience of inoculation as recommended to be actised at present, and his reasons for r modifying the doaige —— set opnditions attendant upon Dishes. ie epidemic in a widely distributed population pidem The fo liawing § 1 sag of ‘cholera vaccine were employed by him. Series 1. A single dose of 0-5 ¢ ¢. (4000 M. Vibrios) es os 10.c.c. (8000 M. ,, ) 3. ” 1°5 c.c. »» 4 Two doses Ist 0-5 ¢.c. and 2nd 1'0 c.c. 1922.] Indian Science Congress I.S.C. 145 He gives a neg of cases of cholera occurring in 88 inoculated persons and wishes to r if his experience is verified by other r worker The 4 fatal cases which were inoculated occurred in three of the series as folloe Series I Cases, Deaths. 6 ) Mortality Series I] Cases. Deaths. ', 25% 51 Series IV Cases. Deaths. 2] 7 ! 33% No case occurred in Series ITI. The author summarises his conclusions as follows : “* In the first place I have had no case of cholera et up to date in any individual who received a single dose of 1-5c.c. of m and I think ifies no Se offecta whatever from giving the larger dose, and expe- Le silted x Pe yse Is ould Aenard poo y secre that a first dose of 1 ¢.c. followed in ae days vbye one of 2c.c. would be ideal produce, but I had no oppor nity of 8 hia in the district rmly aeviaeie ‘of the value of inoculation and I will admit hat Wide t started I was somewhat sceptical.” ane dose of he eee vaccine necessary in re-inocula- L. W. F. Harvey, I.M.S8. The author records experiments which tend towards the conclusion that dosa ies in ibe ot bi actic re-inoculation need not be as large as those used on first inoculati Observations on the incidence of cholera in the indivi- dual districts in the Madras Presidency.—By Magsor A. J. H. Russe.t, I.M.S. a de w This paper gave the baile of a preliminary investigation ma eee aac, the. In an attempt to throw light on some of the problems connected w ‘th the prevention o of cholera, maps of the a, : ig ing the areas affecte d by the south -w and north-eas A SSgidaniey outa prepared and these showed shah: pers spe king ’ ne “ab raid ee oO ni In the sonoen area affected by the spree ogaat ant Wb the af ae for each district reached its maximum in July or Augu dually fell to fee ermal figure. In much i ad distinctive than in others but was nevertheless qu ne cidence of ¢ aes to “months after cae. i : petetiiaaagg the ong reac ae nce of ! a result of the influe January, The sphere ea er Ae - to produce any very appre the south-west monsoon were not su 10 146 18.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, ciable effectand cholera evtbreaks in June to September were shen brief and not very intense. Those districts lying round Madras City a those in the south of the Presidency adjoining the Bay of tak 2 and the Arabian sea all presented the typical curve wich a high December and January, falling to a small minimum throughout ‘the na ar. The south-western interior raplpipes were represented curves howing a double rise—the curve being a combination of the ee already ri almost entirely unaffected “ee si south-west monsoon. Cholera begins to increase shortly after the vigil monsoon bursts and = eurve of the graphs rises abruptly to its maximum in December and January. The curve of South e anara Distriet which, on the above distribution, ought to correspond to the first Rowe was found to be v very similar to that of the third group ae although s as to the cause for this disparity of type, n o definite conclusion was criived at and the Further investigations were proposed on a possible relationship between humidity and the incidence of cholera on the lines indicated in Col. Gill | on the influence of humidity and temperature on the inci- dence of ma _A plea for the extended use of the Voges Proskaver Pest —By Lr.-Cou. Guen Liston, I.M.8. and SB. N. GE f organisms of the “aypho id colon group, Indole and Voges Piaskiuiet reactions stand pre-eminent. It is therefore aenaergee that the techniques of such routine reuctualae should be PPA: r and reliable. Such a technique aa already been described for I forsctny viz. the ‘‘ Cotton: deca ag test ”’ none of the methods so far recommended for Sewers ng the Vo oges Proskauer reaction fulfills the Sanaa ns of a routine test 2. Accordingly we have developed a technique which ‘conforms to the Seecthacecns of a routine test. Gar rocedure is as follows:—The cul- a : t of and at the end of _ eet -four hours period of incubation @ loopfu of the culture is removed on white porcelain slab and mixed a loopful n_ th further lie n is require . In the glucose sehen the pink colour of the V.P. reaction a its nia scievea in “ nee o fifteen minutes but fades away almost comr pletely in about We have shown that if milk be need instead of re ned ig Saeuaiis medium, not only a ‘brighter — colouration is obtained but the mixture of the culture and soda solution solidifies and forms a dry pink spot on the slab which retains the inten I tai r more than six x ebserved that when tet is used v9 place of glucose in the culture media. a positive V.P. r n appears after a shorter period of incu uba- tion, and the pink rites is -hedithites oa in glucose media. The eee ay. of the Mills- ete 8 Bapep tre to Indian conditions.—By T. N. 8S. Racu os . The a ee of the eakasi eas phenomenon to t vital statis ties of any town with a ected water supply ae upon four essential Soeticna 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 147 (a) The Soe of a definite water-borne disease with an appreci- able mortalit (6) An eR record of the total Pease rate accurate record of the death rate due to certain individual diseases, both -borne and no -borne wa or e existence of a fully abr ph water ‘supply. S paper deals with stone xtent to which each of these factors is io e aun condition is peer satisfied by the presence of cholera in endemic se he ioe is in per Fiat Stet sufficiently accurate in many muni- cipalities tis meet the eg te. is at soslane unattainable. urth is also © open to serious doubt, for the term ‘‘ protecte as flied to wer avers. in the Madras Precae can only be re fet as relative and in most cases does not come se to the standard required for a athe application of rs phenomenon Limitations of B. Coli method in water examinations.— y Rao Saute V. GovinDaraJu. Contradictory oe are at present held on the subject of bac- terial standards of purity of water in India. My recent researches tend to some light on one of the causes of this divergence of opinion The presence of fro o o be responsible for an waters is apt to be misleading in the case of waters of great purity like mountain spring waters. Again stasis in reservoirs and passage through Pipes may be responsible for an increase in mr bacilli, ey that a mere increase in the number of faecal bacilli, in a water does not necessarily indicate faecal contami nation but may simply - ie to tela in reser- voirs or to flow through pipes. The Sack Steam Disinfector.—By Masor L. A. P. ANDER- son, I.M fessor 0 An e of disinfector devised by Col. P. S. Lelean, Pro of Hivaiens: at td edi R.A.M. College, called the ‘* Sack Ste. am Disinfector, was brought to the notice of the Indian Science oe rn the cease : The special —— claimed for this appa ability oP goer @ low initial cost, simplicity of construction, portabi ae Ig ne price cy and sieess utility for civ adh of Seiatieede ae has a been elaborated into sites types for use pe fata arying circumstance The disinfector is very s ‘nla in n construction n and co: ly of asteam tight sack 2’ by 4}’ of heer Big feet capac which igs connected b hose to ge mall gaee re rs d isplacement by ned in the sack. The water geeks gZ pipe nsists essential- of the boiler is arranged h a way that it oe water : "ae the boiler pressure exc 3” water-he nigh steam through the pipe ees warning that the boiler requires pucseicaat in a very simple and yet effective Se fbr gl no skilled attention for its supervision cide. Ad r of prove efficiency of the disinfector as a germicide. lities hospitals, this type ould be of special value in schools, m Tabour camps, pilgrim and i —— especially in the mofussil, ships, !abo centr = 148 I.SC. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVITI, Some observations on the trenching of night soil_—By JaHaR Lat Das. paper octuda the ohetrntaoes: . the peo on the trenching of sia stg at Man cgay a first class nicipal town with a population of hose 763 (1911) and only a limited arene (30 bighas) preys oe for trench- The Hadise 3 laid down in the Circular issued by the Sanitary or Bengal in i ongs Oe § for two years view to prevent the land from becomin pint Cale Bred 6 on Ue basis of this Circular, the total extent of land for the purpose at least 200 bighas of ue would have been required. Consequent on the limitation thus se , the author decided on re- trenching every plot, every oe months. rite r examining them as to their fitness for retrenchin He found that in a ripe laeinetee trenched soil it took nearly fie but never less than four months for transformation of the excreta ie a sort of odourless loose black e ie i ti iti reas in a virgi and whe abou one months more oe excreta to acquire this character. Thus every plot was rebrenched about half a dozen times instead of once, every thre e yea Thes observations were fully borne out at other places adjoining Caleutta, viz. Nadi Bagan, ar ohie h, Cossipore, Chitpore Municipality and also in other parts of Ben e concludes that :— (1) The nitrifying organisms in the soil multiply enormously e application of seascape excreta and the soil gets im oved in quality to such an extent that it can be re- iahed mit often then the period originally laid down {2} No soi was found to disintegrate in less than four to ro five (3) The soil did not appear to become sewage 8 ick. : (4) E t from an econo “pom point = view, ae idea that be rae (5) By not reapplying right coil to as plot for about two ye re the plot may acquire more or less the aan of virgin seid — stg death of the nitrifying bacteria as a result of (6) Hard lay ms ‘soil when retrenched at short intervals improves ality and acquires a porous character suitable for ies ing. Sewage disposal with use of gases for generating electri- city and of the effluent for agriculture.—By K. BuR- JORJL DapyBtRsoy. The present method of sewage rte in awed bei is aa a and uneconomical. Septic tan k treatment o and disposal of nation with a specially constructed purifier, co nse apltaaigto 2 taining slaked lime which effectively removes the CO 1922, ] Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 149 doss milis at J debulpete & abe gedaan saute “of this, The gases can also be profitably used for working a gas engine to drive dynamos for ea taba ity. The sewage effluent and gases after treatment have been found to be odourless he conditions necessary for such a process of aves disposal are as follow ly The fi ad system must be a separate and on a combined (2) There aboela be no open house drains where igs oe ibbish and olhes foreign substances enter the s (3) There shoal be as little silt or foreign substances a 2 ‘poealts in the se of ‘‘ Natrani’’ traps so as to or oO a t being oe chemically if precipitan (6) fee, supervinin o sewe ystem is essential and should be di rents towards electively preventing the i ingress excess into the s and as qui chig ak pal Section of Anthropology. President :—Rat BanapuR Hirawat, B A., M.R.A:S. Presidential Address. THE ABORIGINES OF CenTRAL INDIA. ‘he most wonderful bare in this rear ’s programme is the he Science Con- unscientific class, the district officer, was the first problem which confronted me, when I first heard of it, but I have found a solution to what appeared irrecon- cilable i in the beginning. The Executive Committee were wise pe, Successor will be a rival of Mr. Roy. In inst gah ee dn interposition, as you will admit, was very necessary. have, therefore, no cause to be d isappointed if you gars sa light and no science in what I am me to read to you a some of the Central Indian Tribes. iad’ It has become a fashion to talk of various waves 0 150 1.8.C. . Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVII, grations from which the teeming millions of India derive their origin. is is probably due to the fact that the dominating race of Aryans are immigrants and as they came from outside, they have fallen into the habit of thinking that their prede- cessors did the same. They have, therefore, been at pains to discover from various data, Geological, Archeological, Linguis- tic and Authropometrical, when their predecessors in the remot- est antiquity came over to patronise this land. The primitive races are taken back to some period when they are alleged to have come to this country from somewhere else. Geologists tell us that the Indian Peninsula was formerly cut off from the north of Asia by sea, while a land connection existed on the one side with Madagascar and on the other with the Malay Archipelago, and the inference drawn by some scholars is that Peninsula. Thus the theory of immigration suits the propoun- ders thereof very well, and they have no hesitation in putting forward that the Munda or Kolarian tribes entered India from south-east. Again they find Brahuis a tribe in Baluchistan speaking a language akin to Oraon from which they conclude that the Dravidians entered India from North-West. But no reason has been shown why the reverse should not have been the case. If India had autochthones why could they not emi- grate to Baluchistan, Malay Peninsula and the Indo-Pacific Islands? I have not yet come across any cognet reason to suppose that India was barren and wholly colonised from out- side. As a matter of fact there are several reasons to regard the Dravidians as children of the soil. Says Sir George Grier- son, ‘‘ The Dravidian languages form an isolated group. Com- parative philologists agree that the Munda languages, Khassi, Monkhmer, Nancowry and the speech of the aboriginal races of the Malay Peninsula contain a common sub-structure which found outside India.” It is true that the Australians share many of the characteristics of the Dravidians, but there are not sufficient reasons to assimilate them into one common stock. The question of the origin and old distribation of the Dravidian race belongs as remarked by Sir George Grierson to the domain of anthropology and of anthropology alone. This 1922.] Indian Science Congress. I.S.G, l5t science has, however, developed very little in India and it is only recently that it has been taken up in right earnest in some quar- ters. And the most important problem to be solved by it is whether the Dravidians are autochthones. Sir Herbert Risley has introduced a confusion in the racial terminology of this country by including all Mundari-speaking people into Dravi- dian which was formerly restricted to people speaking Tamilian and kindred languages. In fact Tamilian is a mere variant of Dravidian and I think it is best to continue to use the word in its old sense, since Risley’s theory of racial distribution has not been universally accepted. The well-known Dravidian tribes number about a crore as against a crore and a quarter belong- ing to the Kolarian or Munda races. These do not include castes formed by fusion with later immigrants such as the Aryans or those wholly absorbed by Hinduism. The aborigines apparent- ly had no regular tribes as is evident from their names which are merely equivalents of ‘ man’ in their languages, as distin- guished from other animals. For instance, those calling them- selves Korku derive the name from Kor a ‘ Man,’ ku being the plural suffix. Similarly the biggest tribe in Central India is named Gond, but in its own language its name is Koitur which means‘ man.’ By the way it may be remarked that the Aryans being the dominant race, went so far as to impose contemptuous names on the wild people which, at any rate in the case of bigger tribes, gained currency over the proper tribal names. The name Gond is one of that class and is de- rived from Sanskrit meaning an ox or cattle, Gonds being regarded as no better than cattle. As a matter of fact in And the reply was “ yes, we are really . : language Orbe: but the Uriyas (meaning Orissa agen us Kharias and we are therefore obliged hee ‘hay a ly Kharias in order to prevent misunderstanding as | sin Bt the naine Oraon to Khare’ The Rene ee admitted to me that they were really Bibel iuite, primitive people have not only accepted sit but have even the etymology of which they did not now, ® rs in accept- condescended to yield to the whims of their superio 152 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S. XVHi ing wrong names imposed on them by the ignorance of the dominant class. - As is well known, the tribes have not escaped the influence of Hindu caste system which has resulted in the formation of a number of sub-tribes which in several cases have matured into full blown Hindu castes, and have broken off their connec- tion with the parent stock so far, that they cannot now be recognized as having had any connection with the tribe from which they sprang.’ As remarked by a Census Superintendent ‘in the stupendous growth the base and the main trunk have in several cases been altogether lost sight of so that it is now y no means easy either to distinguish the branch from the trunk and the iwig, or to Jocate the root of any trunk, branch or twig.’ In spite of this, a number of tribes have persisted in retaining their original characteristics. According to the Census statistics the biggest tribe that has withstood the procession of centuries is that of Gonds. Its present habitat is Central India, which once bore the name of Gondwana after the tribe. According to the Census of 1911, Gonds numbered 29 lacs, but the figure is not reliable as some two lacs of the same tribe in the United Provinces have been separately classified under a name spelt as GONR. as dis- tinguished from GOND. But this is a distinction without a difference. Again certain sub-tribes have been separately clas- sified, for instance, the Koi, the Gowari, the Pardhan and the Parja, which in previous censuses had been included under onds. These 4 sub-tribes muster six lacs strong, so that the total number of Gonds goes up to 37 lacs which represents the highest tribal strength in India exceeding even that of olis who are now absorbed into Hinduism and who according to Census tables number close upon 32 lacs, otherwise the highest figure for any tribe in India, even after excluding 33 lacs of Kols from whom Kolis are said to be derived. The fact, however, remains that on the Dravidian side the Gonds and on the Kolarian side the Kols are the strongest being almost equa] in number each exceeding 30 lacs. Bot these tribes are found north of the Godavari, though the for- mer’s origin is traced to the country south of that river. It 1s somewhat curious that in the true Dravid country, viz. south of the Godavari, there should not be found a Dravidian tribe as strong in numbers as the Gonds of Central India. The Central Province is full of Gonds. Every 7th man there isa Gond. There are certain hilly districts where as much as 60 per cent of the population is Gond. There are altogether some 40 different tribes in Central India, of which about 3ths do not individually own a strength of even 50 thousand persons. Thus we are left with about nine great tribes, viz. Gonds and Oraons belonging to the Dra- vidian group and Bhils, Kawars, Korkus, Kols, Sawars, Binjh- 1922.} Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 153 wars and Bharias included amongst Kolarians. In point of strength the Dravidians as exhibited by these tribes far out- weigh the Kolarians, the former numbering 30 lacs against 15 of the latter. It is note-worthy that the Kolarians have much more assimilated with the Hindus than the Dravidians. In fact it is very difficult to differentiate Kawars, Binjhwars, Sawars and Bharias from low caste Hindus. These people have absolutely lost their languages, if they had any, and their manners and customs have undergone great changes. In Cen- tral India even Kols have forgotten their languages which is preserved by their brethren in Chutiya Nagpur. Thus it is only Korkus amongst the main tribes of Kolarians who speak their primitive tongue. On the other hand the two main tribes of Dravidians mentioned above have retained their languages even in the remotest corners. True, there are thou- sands of Gonds who speak only Hindi. And yet the persist- ence with which the primitive tongue has held its own in the midst of very unfavourable surroundings goes to show that languages die hard, and are the best index of the tribal unity, if not identity. I will now try to give you a glimpse of these nine Central Indian tribes, and leave you to judge where they shou find back to u a 14th century. Surely three million Gonds did not start agen in order to strike the great Kalachuris of Tripuri in their own homes and oust them for their errand ately again and again during the period immediate!) ‘ : exodus. in fact the cret-aaceatat of the ruling irage ——. ing to tradition, was a mere adventurer and got the t i bulpore country having no through luck. The king of the Jabba aa of his successor male issue was advised to leave the se The bird alighted on the head of one Jadoral, a som south of the Godavari and the king g@ “pe and kingdom. Even the beginning of the Chris 154 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, the Andhras from the South overran Central India is too late a date for the immigration of the Gonds from the south of the Godavari. It is possible that during the Andhra ascen- dancy some Dravidian families may have settled in Centra India. These may well have been Gonds, but this is not suffi- cient to account for their presence there in such force as men- tioned before. That Gonds have been for ages in Central India is testified to, by even mountains, rivers and valleys which bear names taken from their aboriginal tongue. For instance, in the northernmost districts Saugor, Damoh and Jubbulpore, where Gondi has practically disappeared, we find : eee K pometrical survey in the Central Provinces to enable one to give precisely the cephalic or nasal index which is the order of the day. And let me here interpose a remark about the relia- bility of anthropometry in the case of Indian people. Of the three main methods applied for distinguishing b2tween the races of mankind, viz. physical, cultural and linguistic, the first named is considered as the most satisfactory basis on which classification of mankind can be erected. Skin, colour, hair, stature, nose, face and head-form are the chief factors constl- 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 155 tuting physical characters for classification. Anthropometry chiefly comes in for head-form and nose, which in India are rendered artificial by the prevailing manners and customs. There is a wide spread custom of moulding the head and nose according to notions of supposed beauty. Walcher has shown that in infancy the bones of the skull are so soft that it can be made longer or broader according as the child lies on its side or its back. What then, when midwives actually manipulate with the head and nose to put them in proper order? In the western Punjab it is the almost universal practice to flatten the back of a baby’s head by making it lie on its back with its head resting an a hard surface. A very detailed and interesting account of this practice is given in the Baluchistan Census report, where it is stated to be extremely common. It is not less common in Central India though the Gond midwives do not seem to be partial to aquiline nose. They make the head all the same though they may not touch the nose. Nearly all people including Hindus do the same, the matter being at the mercy of the midwives’ notions of beauty. Among the Hindus the pulling of the nose to make it aquiline is very common, which renders the nose test as of little scientific value. On the Madras side, however, the custom of making the head and the nose has not been heard of, and one may expect some sort of uniformity, but Thurston tells us there is none. This result on the ple. loins and another on the head complete his costume. These are really substitutes for leaves; bark or skin formerly by oe “4 r roofs. The household articles consist of earthen ing and keeping water and for distilling liquor, prohibited, a few gourds for cooling water, gri 156 J,8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, trivances for extracting oil and husking grain, leaf plates and cups, ladles, baskets, bins, pipes, mats, brooms and a few odd things. Fire drill is now seldom used and has been replaced by the chakmak (steel and flint). Their favourite mode of This is done in the night. The wild animals come dancing drawn by the light and the jingling noise made with the rings. A second man armed with a bamboo strikes the animal as they approach the Dhatti. Gonds have many kinds of traps and snares, and use also bows and arrows, and lances and spears for hunting. They surround a tiger and spear him, Their food is simple. In the wilder tracts they live in roots and fruits and flesh of wild animals. Wild mice are a delicacy to them, and sometimes a penalty for tribal offences is levied in the form of so many mice to be provided by the offender for atribalfeast. The principal amusement of Gonds is the dances in which both males and females take part. They have a whole night and again be ready to do so if called on. A mar- riage ceremony is the greatest occasion for it. The present internal structure of the tribe shows that Gonds have contributed a number of occupational groups, iy as the Agarias or iron workers, the Gowaris or graziers endogamous divisions and are on the way to complete separa tion like the occupational groups. : The Gond rules of exogamy vary in different parts and in one respect resemble the system found in Australia, by which the whole tribe is split into two or four divisions and every ma” in one or two of them must marry a woman in the other one or tween brothers and sisters and then between parents and child- ten by the arrangement of these main divisions. The Gond sleep. The Oraons also have a similar house and we learn from Professor Haddon that Papuans also possess an analo- 1922.] Indian Science Congress. LCS. 157 gous institution. Almost every where in a village, he informs us there is one building often two, of a public character where men eat and spend their time. In these young men sleep and strangers are entertained. The Gond marriage is a simple ceremony. Its distinctive feature is that the procession starts are to be found in many localities. bride price is paid The practice of Lamsena or serving for a wife is commonly adopted by boys who cannot afford to buy one. Traces of brother’s daughter to the sister’s son, which was done for bringing the latter as an heir to his house. Now-a-days the marriage of brother’s son with sister’s daughter is very much in vogue, in fact it is claimed and admitted as a right on the ground that the brother’s family gave a girl to the other fami- ly and the latter was therefore bound to return a girl to the other family. Thisis called Dudh lautana or bringing in back the milk. Widow marriage, divorce and polygamy are freely allowed. The last is reckoned as a sign of wealth and dignity and is sometimes made an exhibition of. A Gond in Bala- ghat who had seven wives was accustomed always to take them to the bazar walking in a line behind him. The Gonds bury their dead. They deify them and wor- ship a host of gods of whom Pedda Pen or Bura Deo stands at the head. He lives on a Saj tree (Boswellia serrata). The Gonds were accustomed to human sacrifices and hook-swing- ing, but cannibalism was unknown. : As a rule Gonds are simple-minded, shy, quiet, docile and honest. ‘They are a pleasant people and leave kindly memo- ries on those who have to do with them. Comparatively | ay, however, they ‘ ‘ the tials and decided that if they buried the _ : ye be unable to see them eating. They accordingly os ad and ate some of the mangoes, an honesty at the journey’s end, cou m8 Sey. Proceedings of the Ninth. [N.S., XVIII, is doing so much for Indian Anthropology, I mean, Rai Bahadur Saratchandra Roy. As you know, he hails from Ranchi, the headquarters of Chutiya Nagpur where Oraons abound. In the Central Provinces they are merely an out-growth number- ing only 83,000 against their total strength of over 7 lacs in India, yet in Central India they form the second Dravidian tribe very appropriately, as they are so closely associated with Gonds. “Mr. Roy identifies them as the monkeys who formed the armies of Rama. The Oraons in their own language call themselves Kurukhs, the derivation of which is unknown. t home. Let me, however, first tell you that this tribe owns some six different names, viz Dhangar, Kuda, Modi and Kisan besides Oraon and Kurukh. Dhangar means a farm servant, and this name is given to them where they serve as such. Elsewhere they are diggers of earth and therefore called Kuda which means a digger. In some places they make a speciality of constructing embankments of fields and are called Modi from Mida an embankment. Where they cultivate for them- 1922. ] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 159 selves they are known as Kisan, which means a cultivator. As regards the most prevalent name Oraon, some derive it from Aryan and others from aboriginal languages. Dr. Hahn was the first to derive it from Orgora, a hawk, which is a totemistic sept of the tribe, and he thought this was the name given them by the Hindus. Sir George Grierson suggested an improvement, saying it might be derived from the Burgandi urang ‘men.’ This may be plausible, but no tribe as stated before would go to borrow a word from another language for itsname. If it wanted to call itself a collection of men, why could it not take a word from the language it was using ? Mr. Roy is of opinion that Oraon is a corruption of an uncom- plimentary name given to them by the Hindus as Rawanput or born of the demon Rawana. The original word was in due course abbreviated into Rawan vulgo Rawana, which with an interjection O assumed the form of Oravana or Oraon. Here let me add that Gonds are known as Rawanbansi or descended to add a derivation of my own, assuming that Zs Eer® theory that the Oraons were Vanars or monkeys of Rama s army is admissible. I see no difficulty why Vanar should not have assumed the present form of their name. From V word Vanrao would simply be a form meaning “ monkey like. Vanrao may change into Unraon, leading finally to Urao. Now let us consider the name they use among themselves. stated before, Dr. Hahn would derive Kurukh from the Kola- rian horo man or the Dravidoscythian Korukb & oryer. Br. Grierson does not support this son -_ eo ; ut not cryers. . : people may call themselves speakers Krishan changed into Some Kuru came from Konkan and that gave them the name. th ‘ . theretore, ‘ eir colour is black and they were ‘Another deriva- istic 160 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII. According to their own story, the Kurukhs derive their name from Karakh the name of their first king, who ruled over Karush or Karukh country, the old name of Shahabad District whence they say they emigrated. It is very probable that their tribal name is a territorial one, derived from the country from whence they migrated. But this postulates another primitive name, since they say they went to Shahabad from the Karnatak, where they must have had some other name which is now lost. Oraons resemble the Gonds in many respects. Both are hard drinkers and great dancers, both are Mandar and Chat- -kora players using doubie faced drums and castanets, both have Gotalghars or Dhumkurias for their bachelors and maids already described, both have the same sort of beliefs and cere- monies and both are hilarious and light hearted, with no cares - to trouble them. They resemble in features also and the Oraon language is decidedly Dravidian The most marked feature of the language is its guttural intonation. One gets startled at Kher, Khaddar, Khalli, Khisse, Kher, Khikha, Khib- da, Khes, Khann, but amongst the wilder Gonds the Gondi is of the same type. We hear a Maria or hill Gond saying ‘* Baghe Oroq Manena irur Mag Mattur,” while the same sen- tence would be spoken by a Gond of the plains as “ Bore Orur Mannena irur mark mantur.’”’ In Mr. Roy’s monograph interesting features of the tribe have been brought forth and they need not be mentioned, but there is one speciality worth notice. There are traces of marriages between a grandfather and a granddaughter, which so far as I know, have not been detected in other Indian tribes. But it is said to prevail amongst the aborigines of Australia and the Island of Pente- cost. Besides the two great Dravidian tribes, there are about ten others whose total strength in Central India does not exceed - 1} lacs. Amongst these the most important are Kandhs or Khonds, whose total strength in India is about 7 lacs, out of whom only about 10,000 live in the south-east corner of the Central Provinces. Their habitat is the hills of Orissa and where else. It is called Kolam. Its speech bears some inter- esting points of analogy with the Toda dialect of the Nilgiri Sir George Grierson is of opinion that from a philological point curious practice prevailed amongst them of capturing husbands for women, who would otherwise have gone unwedded, this 1922.] Indian Science Congress. L.8.C. 161 being apparently a survival of the matriarchate. Widows and widowers were exempted from capture and debarred from cap- turing. The total number of Kolams does not exceed 25,000. The rear of the Dravidians is brought up by three Chenchus. apparently casual visitors from the Hyderabad State. A Cen- sus Superintendent playfully tells us ‘“‘ He who would enumer- ate the Chenchus of the Nallamalai forest must needs first catch them. And a Chenchu possesses some remarkable facul- ties, among them the faculty of seeing things and of disappear- ing before things seen. Lie hidden behind a bush and watch a group of Chenchus crossing a forest clearing; stir a finger and the Chenchus are not, it is as though the earth had swal- lowed them up.” To return to our seven Kolarian tribes, the Kols and Bhils preserved some of their primitive customs. They do not freely mix with other Musalmans. Bhils seem to have attracted the attention of the Aryans much earlier than any other tribe, except perhaps the Savars, whose ancestors are sometimes cumbed to the invading Aryans. . ot tke us out of the ora main Kolarian tribes hs racea India, Bhils, Sawars, Kols and Bharias are known for 162 I1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, to have been ruling tribes and Kawars and Binjhwars even at present own large landed estates. Only Korkus alone did not possess their own raj, but they appear to be a later off-shoot from the parental stock which was dominant in Chutiya Nag- r. I would now try to sum up the inference I have drawn from the study of these tribes in Central India, and submit to you for consideration whether they can stand the anthropolo- gical test Except Sir Herbert Risley, who denies any racial difference between Kolarians and Dravidians and the followers of his school, others have hitherto recognized three primary stocks in the Indian population, viz. the Kolarian, the Dravi- dian and the Aryan, and those who maintain that all the three came from outside, aver their immigration in the order named, Kolarians entering first from the south-east and sweeping over North-West who drove the Kolarians to the hills and forests and were themselves finally hunted out by the Aryans to take re- fuge in similar places. In my view the Dravidians were the autochthones of the Indian Peninsula, even when it was cut off from the north of Asia by sea, and if the Kolarians were not the autochthones of the then South Asia or the present Upper India, they may have entered North India via Malay and Assam, and swept over Northern India, dominating it till they were ousted by the Aryans. This would explain the somewhat curious fact, why the Kolarian tribes who have for- gotten their primitive tongue speak an Aryan dialect and never a Dravidian one. Had Kolarians been ousted by the tween Aryans and Non- Aryans, the former were classed as Sud (Sudhan) that is the pure, the latter as Kol, the impure, liter- ally swine, and by other uncomplimentary terms.” I do not know whence this has been taken, but it seems to prove that the first tribes they encountered were those whom they named as Kols, and these must be those who still bear that name and its variants. How could the Dravidians who never received that name from the Aryans be included under that name ! The tribes that came in contact with are Bhils, Sawars, Kols Sanskrit literature, but there is no trace of a single Dravidian tribe having been defeated by the Aryans in Upper India. have certainly come in contact first with the Dravidians, an it is the Dravidians whom they would have called Kols and 1922 } Indian Ssience Congress. LS.C. 163 not the descendants of Australians who had been driven out of the field by the Dravidians. It is now partially admitted that Dravidians are an indigenous people and even Professor Haddon has opined that the Dravidians may have always been in India, yet the fact remains to be satisfactorily established by further researches. n the words of Professor Turner of the Benares Universi- ty, the sath to knowledge is laborious, the road is long an difficult. It calls for high endeavour and the nobility of sacrifice. Rut this reward awaits the traveller. The origin of the Chinese junk and sampan.—By J. L fter comparing and describing the outstanding features of these two crafts, evidence is adduced in favour of the view that the sampan is derived ultimately from a modification of the otis: canoe in use till compara- ent of the A The truncate transom bow ~~ — of the sree probably vy hr y form that gives a square-bow appeapaie 6 the junk, are what w be expacted if these ane doeoleoed te from two canoe hulls joined together by a A inh sat deck-platform. Besides 5 tuts structural evidence, we have he te oe ‘junk,’ de in D dam and sangad—; probably the seargein donga has the same i sangara of the Periplus, described ieee eoastiag vais ae Sout India, formed of monoxyla joined ‘oasther: seem to have been more like craft of the present day ets point to the range of the sea-going double-canoe having extended in former days to India and China—the e ancestors of the present Polynesian race, aT ne 5 the catamaran- question is raised of the origin of the term jangada for ike sea-rafts used by the coasta native Brae ilians. Is it indigenous or introduced by the Portuguese ? she te in Old Official Records.—By Sarat CHANDRA Roy emphasises the necessity of aga from h “ is paper the author. the many interesting scraps of ethnogra this er and impending decay, ; é as a curious i Pe cai of ge indi Nnccias fs Gi cha Ge ae ee from the ari ° titive Examinatio: subjects prescribed for the feces Civil Service Competi f to be he Id i in India in 1922, while Anthropology in its various branches ° call 164 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Physical Anthropology, Prehistoric aaespe hey and Technology, a Social Anthropology are included a the syllabus for the next Givit poids e Ex aminatio n to B pctiag ab tee The author suggests that the s Commi igh cope 0 ia be Pectally extended so as is include those of ethnographic interest as well. The ee tighee a specimens of interesting ethnogr — material raeoie4 in moth- Piro sehen of Government record-rooms which he able nad eee by the permission of the Cae notaries of the Shade Nagpur Divis moose Anayans of the Travancoe Hills —By Rao Bana- R L. D. ANANTHARRISHNA IYER Honey-gathering by the Hill Tribes —By Rao Banapour L. K. ANANTHAKRISHNA IYER. Prehistoric Archeology.— By PancHaNaAN MITRA. The role of climatic conditions in epidemic disease with special reference to malaria.—By Lr.-Cou. ©. A. GILL I.M.S., D.P.H., D.T.M. & H., Chief Malaria Medical Officer, Punjab. (1). Historical Note. The nature of vietnam has exercised the imagination of mankind since the earliest times and a portant rdéle in its me chanism has long j stints ia _ In fact the association of plagues and pestilences tei unusual climatic “veppipes ais one of the oldest e prasaeRAGat observations on record. It is not surprising ripened bese with the birth of scientific medicine in ancient Greece the influence of climate on epidemic disease tion crates, over 2000 years ago, observing that a seasonal varia- tio on in the incidence of disease occurred in association with changes in climatic conditions and being impressed by the sudden and widespread Thus arose the miasmatic th eory of epidemic causation which, as. finally formulated by the Greek school of saad Splales ophers, postula- ted bo all epidemic outbreaks were the result either of occult a a ric states or of some change in the ph sdk roperties of air engendere by serene Parente: pita + tions. ad te 3 o smali credit to the acumen of the classical school of epi- demiologists that this theory with only minor modifications successfully held the field for over 2000 years. It is true that in certain respects 1! its seer Ream became apparent, yet it was accepted in principle, if not - sonar by ig denham and indeed by all spidemniologiste down to quite t w. ong t in fact — after the scones & in the latter half of the 9th century, of the micro-parasitic nature of infective = ger me the ae area hypothesis it finally and definitely aban "Ta ase of malaria this occurred Hey the year 1880, of hole in 1384, of ‘ideas in 1892 and of plague in 1894 e new impetus Avent us medical research by the great dincey eries of the bacteriologists there was no room for the esoteric theories of the classical lee and the influence of climatic conditions oP epidemic diseases was relegated to a position of purely mire interest. The ubsequent disconsey, of the réle played by insec and other * teh as” ie ne ~eti ip atiiedianhin sania «cae. 1922.] Indian Science Congress L.S8.C. 165 ‘‘ carriers” in the spread of human disease merely served to confirm this view ate Bs direct epidemiological research along fresh channels. The ne which epi i _@ Ss -~ o S & ra ie} oO mM nm a 2 re fe) a O a = 2 5 as) @® “— 5 @ > ee data then available) to neha in true hippocratic fashion the outbr of epidemic with specific atmos eric states But nowadays when, thanks re the records maintained by t Department preniaea over by Dr. Gilbert Waller, meteorological da he extending over many years are available, epidemiological investigators usually omit all reference to the influence of climatic conditions or refer anner. ne Nor ps the réle of climate in epidemic diseases fare any better in modern text-books in which this subject 1s dismissed in a paragraph w whose brevity i is rendered all the more conspicuous by reason of wide excursions into the domain of bacteriology, entomology and other ancillary sciences. i ested m h i & nfection, no te th merits of the miasmatic hypothesis, pd it is af object 9 pian the i in the mechan o before you some of the reasons for Y doneleiile that, this factor plays a réle of profo mae importance in determining the occurrence of epidemic outbreaks. {2). The I. Siti of Climatic Conditions on the Transmission shi: Malaria. tion is likely to be emetiaad by the study of the réle of climatic and me oteorological conditio It has long been nos nown that malaria Honrishee pares in warm pti aan in the hot ole in the temperate zone, and it h h Sagi en observed since _— times that high atmospheric noma is ay reas to the diseas epidemiological signi.icance attaching to these facts has css ibe ide have sbitected sin Rg little. eesiichgss only a few experiments hav: iain a rd to the influence of temperature, whilst the precise matle of humidity has never “ars aeunaae determined. ee 9 ge te lect, in the case of temperature, is probably due to me nisi ata tlas influence was ees — 100 Cle nt pana rt obasesed tion, whilst in the case of humid ity we ae in raps by its sone by the view as high aio favour bene rs ndi ions giving r t it is surely i ‘dient to a aga vita tru ith, for mipeees i like anes it seems possible thei ions ce on the oengenans cycle of the wlan parasi nsect-carrier, will be capable of influencing the and thereby the imaliiomes of the diseas 166 1.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, I s on these pours thought expedient, in connexion with the study of epidemic malaria in the Punjab, to investigate the precise ahiat of meteorological co sodinons on the Vife- -history of mosquitoes and o their 2 tei to transmit infection. need not detail the experiments undertaken with this object in view since ee ey are described in the April number of the Indian Journal of Medical Research, but I must refer briefly to some of the conclusions to which they gave ris Tt was found that susceptible to the influ- 2 of humidity and that their length of amp was largely determined by the relative humidity of the atmosphere. : the f Cu fatigans, when adults are incubated at a relative humidity of 45 per cent or less (at a constant temperature of 27°C) they die within 5 days, whilst ‘* controls’’ incubated under ee oe ns but at a relative humi: dity of 48 per cent or over alm invaria ur at days. Insects have in fast ag teas: alive in the laboratory under months. conditions of temperature and Haidiey for near we two ont the atite of — — as ei selection of resting plane duing the heat of are , by oi controlled experiments, that at low we ingtses of relative “humidity egg-developmen f eC females was retarde nally igh degree a relative humidity was found to be an wapeetant Since in determining the desire of mos tte hes feed on blood. her wei’ of ex osama pene with Culex fatigans infect- ed wah pith a (Proteosoma grassi) showed that batches of nee ie roe ‘nti al — ons ‘ead | incubated at the ae poor ee e nt de t of odcysts d ornare in the mid-gut. It was also that the shortest period bisiiieied for the eT of the devolancetie al ne e of ce parasite e in the mosquito was six day. sh kar therefore bt to the plow that, whilst re- — bisa ty may e e an important influence in deter minted pepcciser ae n of malar a bps reason of its effect on the longevity o quitoes, it does not vere any direct offect on the malaria parasite soc its exogenous cycle. On the other more b ations on — influence of temperatur> 5 show that low temperat e (in the pre f high relative humidity) has little effect on the aoiiagtl of life of ese although low tem sire a as in hibernation, —— — penne vital functions. But tem- perature exerts influe 4 larial pee since opme hilst directly with the height of the temperature above this figur hese obser neath therefore suggest that the siesta factors of temperature and humidity are both capable, ape - a different ™' a ission of malari se = elements are ne wine perio in Nature Scoot marked rise 19 mperature is usually associated with a onc coalee in atmos nee humidity and ote ver A fall in sien tem ceesie may thus give rise to atmosphere oe tions favourable to the prolonged life of mosquitoes but ico mpatible with the transmission of — —_ to an unfavourable tempera On the other hand when the mean temperature undergoes @ ™ rise the relative humidity i is = apt to “fall 0 the ‘‘ critical ’’ figure. such circumstances mosqui s may be prevalent a d active - ~ transmission of eualavia sire remain in prenen e since infected 1! will not live long enough to transmit infec i Pace These facts, I think, pine to the pana that — 1 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8 C. 167 portance attaches to the study of meteorological conditions in relation to the transmission of malaria and indeed of all insect-borne diseases. They afford also a scientific basis for the hypothesis of Galen (to whom malaria was well known) that ‘‘ the seeds of pestilence,” which a regarded as floating in the air, re (iis for their propagation ‘‘ a war and moist state of the atmosphere (3).. The Role of Climatic shdervsioted in the Mechanism of Epidemic falaria. When the meteorological circumstances necessary for the transmis- sion of malaria are considered in the light of the climatic conditions pre- vailing i in the Punjab some AB facts “ rge. It is found, at the result of a study of t ape gece and humidity ata pars in the viene gical Re be om that the transmission a aa isin abeyance during the cold weather on pat of low tem ure, uring the spring there is normally a short period during which both pcre and humidity - Jabot ble to infection. With the rise in me mpera ature which ushers in the hot weather the transmis- — of inthiont is again Reiss: at to low mean relative humi- ity. ith the onset of the piso a marked rise in relative humidity take s place and both the t mperature and humidity factors become fa- vatecble t the eraiaeaaii of infection av avhige years the annual period ot potential —— is hor to be approximately 4 months in most parts of the plains, but in deficie ns oe rain’ a8 - is much pi as it is ewig: ring “ bre n the con. On the other hand in years of exces- sive rainfall he setueusenieaeal factors remain highly favourable to the ransmission of infection throughout the monsoon period t is in these latter years alone that great epidemics of m alaria occur j the or do t cur in areas where the rainfall is relatively or absolutel in excess. - is in fact found that malaria epidemics are strict on- fined to a exhibiting climatic conditions which, whilst jaar! dg area tively unfav ater to the transmission of infection, become highly vourable to infection and re-infection on rare occasions. vation “etouiil te the fact that great This epidemiological obse epidemics saa m alaria are not encountered in all malarious countries _ are only ith in areas exhibiting climatic conditions similar to those = ope see of the plains of the Punjab. imatic Sanne therefore cons es an exceedingly important actor 4 e cage of m Cli i ares ee ec cae ee the gecurrence 0 of ihese epidemics during the period immediately following the rainy se seasonal periodicity of malaria epidemics is es a 1 function of the The li clisnatic fator mperature and humidity in re the aie assigned t : e well-known associa n of ex nd transmission of malaria aia that th eos bxplain pag ng due sive photic with epidemic malaria may ie a ailciy 0) rather than te osqui sep * ee : . al pre- Finally, it is clear that, since excessive rainfall is an essen cursor of af epidemic of aes ria, this climatic factor constitutes ms direct and immediate ca : ese Gulcleckane a ~ well-fonnded, suffice to show pide ope — et intimately the mechanism ans ai ct They are also not sey: Coors ciporneiios e from the ney Thus ey is now possible with the aid of meteorological 168 I.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth |N.S., XVIII, with some degree of precision the period during which prophyian™s measures, such as the use of mosquito nets, are necessary in any g Finally, with a ttre of the climatic and other factors concerned in the mechanism of epidemic omnes it should become possit-le to fore- ast the occur eks and it may well be that the time is not far distant when ‘‘ epidemic fore- cunts > will become a normal function of the modern epidemiologist. (4). Conclusion. The views briefly advanced in this paper suffice, I think, to i pe that climate exercises a marked influence in the causation of malar cere course not the only factor concerned ~ ae mechanism of sadder gis but it seems justifiable to conclude that climatic conditions constitute a — = importance itis both Aheeudec sa to neglect and difficult to over-r Mee does oo seiaie of the consideration of the — role of os a cme mate in the causation of other epidemic di oo sigt n t suffice stale that whilst little or no ee knowledge appea xist on the subject, it is not unreasonable me that the eS asta will be found to exercise an ana ~ gous “influence in the niger get of many epi- demic diseases. In the of plague, for example, it was show n by the Plague — feta that The severity of plague epidemics in the Punjab during each spring was cl osely as associated with excessive bute during the four months preceding their ee and it was concluded that this circumstance was due to the favourable effect a humidity on the pupa of rat-flea B — ts ae to have been carried out to determine the precise in sidcoetia of humidity on oie rat-flea or indeed on any of the other ‘‘ carriers " of human dise ex i on to this “festa a are some observations of Kinghorn — An and Yorke (1912) on the influence of termperature and humidity es the deve oe eycle of Trypanosoma rhodesiense in Glossina nia _, hese observers reached conclusions —— ree to those cae tailed in conan with oe transmiss of malarfa al- though they recorde servations 0 on ne influence sf paberg mere ene pool on hone life-history ‘of See fli : it expedient to — a S epeet ee only mer } Hoenes in Sibaiocs 8 b oa sect-carrier, for it is clear that all pathogenic caraalicn are sone the aati nce of mete orological conditions during their extra-c srpercat peed inding ere would appear therefore to be few epidemic dise ases, not 6x i uding holes, in which the in nifucads of the climatic ge can be safe- ma Alistegarded. Little or nothing appears to be known in regard to the Fee uence of climate me directly-transmitted epidemic or but I hope © show in a paper now under preparation the manner in whi ey the cli- matic factor is involved | in the mechanism of epidemic influenz i bbe these remarks I will conclude in the hope that siciont has deni syne to justify the view that the yuma of climate in relation to epi- calculate provides @ wide field of investigation whose prose ution ast i: 2 to throw fresh light on the piece re of epidemicity aD us lead to the discovery of new methods of prevention. (1922. | Indian Science Congress. LS.C. Recent work on the Constilubion of ns Atom.—By E. P. Harrison, Ph.D , F.RB.S.E., : ti Ps To pene stillis the pine goal of the Natural Philose — Enormous adva in knowledge of the atom have occurred since Dalto n propounde “the Atomic Theory, but most = this advance has taken plies two ogee > a baa e be useful if I set before you a ver “0 brie ef account of ma a okoadl about 15 years on at the beginning of what 4 a oul call the ‘‘ present ’’ per at time, bss Cathode rays, which really faok the cal ne point of the shale story, had been proved to be ‘‘ particles”’ carrying a defi- nite —e of pees divcteicttg: and moving with a speed pate jisvh of — of light had become abundantly clear that the negative electron, as such a a rticle’’ was appropriately called, was a common constituent of all rms o at i e (48x wn forms of matter, that its harge was always the sa 10-10 electrostatic units) and that its mass (7 x 10-28 gram) which was dc gps ed as being due wholly to its charge, ai ee in the ‘* field’ rounding it, increased as its speed incre These characteristics of the kage = ieee herir on the whole, truly experimental pesgenins: standin independent of those underlying s which have subsequently enabled the noncietens of amo ypothe plestrical charge to be Og oak theoretically on the basis of axecits eleetrom magnetic equaticns. At the common negatively universal and which a ee ‘ kno el ts differ in respect of the properties of their ome: Se logical conclusion was that the electron was a sub-atomic entity m cigs reco . esis at ioe gnized e t once noe as observable ar properties go, no change was to be ex xpected either in “the a iron. On that foundation the ae pres lem of ee “thought ha which now occupies so much of t iT can ae Shag te ; its first beginnings. The problem age, wee given these universal naaneo neh etait fee some ae of their properties, given the fact nies posi cba were at least oe Selig matter om i ; given also the enlaces of pmaee' and the Maxwell equations (already established = dantly), fulfil the an sini ok Sieee as a first approximation must fu Solicwin. condit 1 (1) In i various complexities de must explain the ome nr and the sequence of atomic weig' that is for oe 2) I t Pa radiation, (2) * = eT eee d for spectral series and for the ts of chemical combination occasionally asso- Zeeman effect. (3) It must account for the main fac and valency of the elemen 170 L.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, (4) Tt _— explain the phenomena of magnetism in so far as that may be an atomic property. time, was due partly to cad Kelvin, but Se aaeuty. ‘a aleli 4 ‘6 ir Josep mson. is m med a sphere i i e influence of the central attr —— force provided by the sphere. Elec- trons in static equilibrium, not r je ving w wage largely fail to account for magnetic phenomena, whi “ae on a theo s kind inv olves =“ for whi rnal ring structure—and would thevsties be expec o show similar pater proper = oetccenale aca as the atomic weight (total i d u of netic moment required for a eee atom was also explaine y matter built up of the Thom son atoms. In looking at the great com- plexity of epee aterial properties which any atom model ought to ecount for s hardly surprising | bela cee early synthetic atoms should fail ne certain lines s extraordinary that they accounted sol so much and this sidioated that research was at least on e main of this type of coplanar sing a appea sept of explaining the simple relationships between poeateal aslo still le ss the extremely com- plex spectra and series of Bite which are known by observation. Indeed, b oi s s is na later oe the starting point of a completely new design in atom It is es difficult te account for the ejection of an a particle in radioactive change. But above all, the objection to the Thomson atom Hes in its failure to account the mass of the stru The whole a z ole of the nse ed ae sphere is ip smaller even than ot a a single on “oe no cnn of a is. # : of the ultimate constituents of matter did me ee ~~ the old dyna- mical laws. The ideas were cats al in the extre and were largely rejected as curiosities by the average phiveidiat: T shail attempt to show ree er how fruitfully these pain ah have ie oped in the last t few ars Meanwhile me — on the mystery of the atom has continued to davelag: slong tw e fi atomic droll as woes in (a a) s spectra and s —_ ral series an nd in i b) X g to bui fortunately it t is quite impossible to work backwards and to infer from the spectra or other phenomena what kind of atom to start with. The 1922.] Indian Science Congress. 1.8.C. 171 only way to do that is ee by direct frontal attack on atom struc- ture by bombarding matter with — had projectiles in the form of a particles from radium oa. and obse (a) what happens to the scales itp ig ye happens to the bombarded a may be — as the second Tin eo ot attack. I will first con see what has been done by Rutherford and — by the banibaat nt method the etn oink beginning about Phe ied fewmece of the experimental Soak is that each individual a particle bie se to a scintillation when it strikes a screen of zinc ene digi wa: slic m which had lost two electrons, probably external ones and therefore poss charge + 2e s it had only lost ois electrons it clearly possessed practically all the mass of the original helium atom and was regarded as sien the + portion of thea Its velocity from . to be about 2x 10% ems/gec, = iles/second If a steam of thes > high velocity, massive particles is fired at a thin plate of matter monet asa a film of gold, the ir behaviour on emerging from e film, can be exa a Zn sulphide screen held at a suitable distance. W Md have peal the particles even if they penetrated the film to be enormously scatter-d during the process. ne , least expect this pode if he voigatia the po bombarded atom to be of size comparable with the a parti It was however found by Geiger arsden that large majority e eP were very slightly deflected from their origi al direction, but that occasi lly an a particle suffer defile rare in- w it is not difficult to i negative errecire is negligible; so also would be the effect of a Tiabubid of + electricity over a sphere as eq an exceedingly small region, for if not the deflection a particles must have been both lar d numerous. If we call this inute massive portion the nucleu e atom, detailed calculation (based th i nownm S : nd charges of the a particle and bombarded nucleus) agreed extremely well with the deflections actuaily observed and also brought out two addi- epee oints :— The large deflections were ore to a single encounter and not to a number of small deflections superpos The colliding particles in ise case of the large deflections ap- 2 one another hiboeie - distance of 10 The good agreement of theory and experiment thus een very _. gaye that pres inverse square law the dis +6 ems. from the nucleus, and that the + — < the latter was Pdlatnbute over an ied minute aie n of s : spe most recent work of Rut therford is eve - eet “ ational me t was f f a pi es throug: as found that the fives ° : a p ic peyond the range as e rise to scintillations on a screen pla fi F Particles itself, four times as far in fact. The natural explanation the peared to be that the hydrogen atom or art of it ing shot forward by t collision. It was found, as the result of experim lied : atoms, whatev ey m . consist a were Se in che direction in which ¢ article ving. llh That ere velocities ek reap a a small range, ie. they all had nearly the same velocity. tance of 3x 10-15 cms 3. That the. nuclii approached within a dis ssion for the num- during a collision. Now arwin has Semel an expre 172-184). Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, ber of long a atoms of charge +e to be expected as a result of colli- sions with bombarding a particles of ois og +2e assuming the nuclii act as — charges eso the inverse squa number observed e su petomctally eee not agree with Darwin’s editlation 8. It is opp greater than theory indicates. There are three neni ssible explanatio cee er (i) the ass aes charges +e and + 2e are wrong. Or (ii) the nucliido not act as point charges rere as eee of finite size, (iii) the law of force is wrong at these small distanc If a particles . ses range (4 cms.) and smaller pia are used — Darwin law fo mber is much more nearly obeyed. Thus in these ases both Deiie! 8 econo as to the charges and the force-law must riage correct or very nearly so n other words when ‘the approach of the nuclii is nut so close the charges and the law of force are correct and the nuclii act as points. en 3 cles (range 7) the most likely solution is not that the law of force itself suddenly alters ae that the nuclii no longer act as point charges at dis- tances os 10- > ems, — Sua, wn by Ruthe ae that the FL ae Sohuvere an PA BE Bia ie mat — swift H particles as produced equally well trots combined hydro _. Additional eontie cn that these swift atoms are really hydrogen with a + charge has been obtained by the measurement of their mass and velocity by the deflection method. : y are found to be atoms of charge +1 mass | relative to oxygen (mass 16) and the value for te ma =10# e.m. units. The electrolytic value of charge —— for H, is 9570 e.m.u, Hence the atoms are undoubtedly hydro- gon of oh charge +1 which means that t they are probably by droge nuclii. h e electron, « or proton with purely mor magnetic mass. If this is true it is easy to ——o its diameter since its mass and char rge are kno “ and m are the masses of nu oe ot. pease ieee respectively, tes being purely electro-magneti r their re spec: Ze tive radii. Then since they have the same shai e fe eae hes @ 3M pm Ser g oe =_—.P => = =] a ms. 2 & wr’ raga * 13% 10 c 3 ’ Thus on this hypothesis ina radius of the H'atom nucleus is 5,55 Of the radius of the ne egative elec S$ extreme minuteness is ete out as we have seen by all the deflection gehen mee the Helium nucleus (a particles) has nearly four times the mass of the H nucleus it ie "faters ed that the former porns four positive eta ts nuclei) and two negative electrons — iated very closely. oa charge is +2e. Since in radioac transformations, a rticles are peeidey but never H atoms, it is pele inferred that the ga }, inch at a distance of 6 miles d yo picture of our present ccliadt ion n of es iis atom On this scale the a ae eee rea 12 inches would geile mh the atom with a velocity of 1 9 sates per secon “ If it by chance hits the speck of dust, the forces aed into play are s tremendous "that the speck deflects it through a large ee and is shot off i tself to a distance (in Tn scale) of abo ut 1015 atiee: the confines of the known universe. a co) urn to s etre tal espeot of i “ ohians which concern the intrprotation arse spectra sinh ectral series. Let us confine our at- tention to hydrogen spectra a alone ye promising the greatest simplicity. The feats observed are briefly as follows. The gas can emit severa Z tra the chief of which are— (1) the 6 line spectrum which may contain an infinite number lines, which extend into the ultra violet and the ane of whi _ wo er ie} =. As -_ ar 2 Hg o oo | st © oO — ie) Q i ie) ate ® te} co ar} a: S Qn hr ef © wa ee) > ® : a as a 5 fas) Rn seen in te laboratory are concer ned. The rest is atom (2) the secondary spe see ais a cients also thousands of yess: which is undoubtedly an atom spectrum. what extent will the kind 2 ary atom we have a iready pictured, w b nt for the above facts? may be admitted at once that it does pote apooun for the facts. cv aside the possibility that spectra may have thei! 1922.] Indian Science Congress. LS.C.' 175 origin in the vibrations of the wer, take the more probable concep- tion that the external electrons are concerned. Firstly, it may be proved that a gees meen ive electron recenvings in an orbit must radiate ener- gy into space. As it radiates, the total energy of the atom changes and therefore — the ieacene cy of the oscillations ; eventually the electron would f to the central + charge. Thus a gas made up of atoms of this tind! Syate show a continuous spectrum and not sharp lines, since in an observed mass of gas there would exist atoms giving every possible peaeney. eee words, sharp lines Semen that the radius of the orbit shoul be constant or that it should have a definite number of possible stable alciea to which it could jump seonbestaecanal y. Now no possible application of Nawteninn: dynamics could account for discontinuity of is kind i th a t i i i —- — ~ 8 between the solid results of Peeadtntce and the aplication of his an- cient and rinbes dynam cal syst Som peg a - and for the moment, the old dynamics is andes citictale she satidae trial. The bold apeputukion of Bohr hing ch di fat ap “the Begone system, is not quite new in kind. Speculat ns of the same nat were first put forward by Planck in 1901 in co ashen with thermal gadiitian. But I propose to © consider the assumption of Bohra lf w is the frequency in the orbit he assumes that the angular mo- mentum of the electron in its orbit=rT. = where / is a universal constant T (the same as was used by Planck) and 7 is an integer, which may be POLES 1, 2,3, ete. Thus the angular momentum, | which is _ x loss of energy h h of the electron | is equal to 1 x me or to 2x Pe or to 3x z and so on. In 7 other ot ds the angular momentum is conceived to change by jumps. S gives dente fixed values, for the loss of energy ; som the radius of the Ser, and for the frequency, ‘corresponding to each integer. s cannot change unless 7 changes, no oscillations in ra ; 0 i d is always occur energy is radiated and is sheclately aa = ae = _ t iation i Moe me amount hy where » is the frequency of the agg spend atom. this reasoning Bohr deduces very simply ¢ an exact statement o the empire law of Balmer. are, however, other bear = conceptions of the a stan Redegger also esognat for Balmer’s law. The secondary spectrum rem present pamiinirsi for. : only endeavoured to indie the barest sien of a lar subject in in onder a asize the fact that SOME TH rv ia ar more iverse than has “tinarte been sus- her important attempt to ie ae the a, ap of spectral — t the atom ce is due to Ritz in 1908. The assum — of sonal ecgarectiaert srk tains ged e mechanism sce aes sa : pheenmt Saad he wakes Is pure assumpti h sek te ag ete ate - to account adh: Ratan Said field exists in the es So electron daeekie an orbit in the atom, it is poss! f ge sion for the frequency which is the same as eciees Pa 176 1.8.C. Proc. Ninth Ind. Sc. Congr. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.} Now recent researches of an experimental nature on the magnetic atom the sega = ee material. These cannsietc aieisonte were sailed ” ma, ons. Sti ee ore cea rk by Oxley on sonia «oe staan that mag- netic atom-fields of 107 or 103 gauss must Humphrey’s theory of the _— of se lines under high eianiin’s Se eendiansn epi het fields of the s order of magnitude. Thed « siesieal converging and independent lines of research pt that a ssaeniaie unit of fixed value for all o> eg west the atom. ar there has been no.direct evidence for existence. "1 men- ti ool a. sly that Rutherford’s work le ite us ons believe in the pos- sible e nce of cual double ts of zero charge and mass 1, formed of one electron in — association with one negative electron If such a system were = ing it is conceivable — a intense local fields de- — con Ritz and others might meioey at blet saheig - val Soong be undetected by a-par- sieke ‘mothers as at — pract not aware that this pane possibility has — SS out quantitatively but if not, here is a problem for the mathem Kelvin is said to have remarked duri ing his J ee per the Gatsereisy, that he knew no more of the real meaning of sieveusine than he had done 50 years before. The same arnt could not truthfully be made nowadays, neverthe- less it tagiryr that the tobe has only been put back on to the deeper myste the electrical charge. Ou libly over the words positive - negative waa bb we can ance large bse oo in terms of a universal unit char pel of ~_ know a good deal, but no one has ever defined wh xt Se s by ch ae except pe chen refer to. - as a condition of volume density which, of course means nothing physically. It seems iikaty that aisteiea! charge, the basis of the atom will take its place alo: ongside — ation as a fundamental mystery and that any fap iy serpin into its meaning will involve those fuller conceptions and space which have been applied with such remarkable results by Binstein and by modern astronomical research LV OOO NN SOOO ee te dae LIST OF MEMBERS, NINTH MADRAS, A Achyutaramayya, V., Government Agricultural Station, Anakapalli (Vizagapatam District). Adinarayan Rao, K , Lawley arty Coimbatore hig Office, erriake Adisesha Ayy 5 del Se Deputy Ss anitary Commissioner, Madras. Adwani, G. T Agharkar, ir, 8 Pay ab; Eeoures reular Road, Caleut a% Muir College Hiralal, Rai pee Dy. Commis- seeping : “* ’ a Ph OH Allahabad ole, B.S., Woreet Bovetilas: Dehra Ghosal, Prof. S., Jubbalpore. Dun, > at A ce etamoneria, M.S.M.R. Hore, 8. Ee . Laas Museum, Cal- shee Prof. . C.. clo Prof. JON. Mukherjee, “82, Upper Circular Ma Road, Caleut Hornell, James, 22, Commander-in- ay te Ay Js *. Cooper Road, Chief Road, Egmore, Madras ahore. Heward, A, Puss, Behar. Gill, Lt -Col. C. A.. IM S., 9, Race Sinacd, Mrs G L.C, Pusa, Bihar. Course Road, Tahore Huidekoper r, J. H. Gokhale, J. G., KhandeshyEduca- Huide koper, Mrs. J. H. tion Society, Amalner, Bombay | fy J a Graaff, M.A., Hornell, Mrs , Connemara Hotel, Dr. Presidency. In charge Computing Office x — Rao, D. B., Bes Lingaras- oo sti Dehra Don, g St., Triplican UP. Gopal, Hs Peashare College, I Said Gopal “Si ie Hauee: Dyal Singh | tram dar, Prof. R. S, K. College, Lahor Muthiah and Co., Govinda Naie. Govinda ftaja, Reo w Sahib V., Trop- ‘ Madra: ical School of earn Central I ecse HL eg fT; iA, Vansittart Avenue. Calcut Row, Calcutta. Rao. M., ak Forest Chem- ae Dehck Dun 7 e,Dr.S.N, "Bo mbay Bacterio- : Toric Laboratory, Parel, Bom- | Jacob, K. Cherian, Agricultural llege, Coim eas: Rao Bahadur, Asst. Jamal, Kha $l Sahib "98 si Director of Fisheries, Calicut. , Assista Govinda .M.A Gravely, F. f. ot ae Janakiammal, Miss. E.K., Women’s Madras Museum, Mad im Nungambankam, Mad- Grav, Major W. oe IMS. Wood- croft, Nungambankam, Madras. Janikiremen, P. EBs Greig, Lt -Col. E. D. W., Office of | Jenkins, Prof. W A.. Dacea Uni- D.-G , I.M.S., Simla. ve cori P.O, Ramna, tn : Gundu Rao, ied 5 ae erudoss, Dr. s., Dy. Sanitary Y ad Gunjikar, Prof. c/o K. —— Cathedral Port Methiah & Co ee Weiser Street, Madras jivens Rao, P.S., Agr! College oe Research rote Law. H Road P.O., Coimbatore Hanafin, Major G. B., LM.S., c/o | Jivanna Rao, ~ Bri ae ae Ma dras Johnston, te Eger cca te ae sar Co Oe, (8h: Mount Road, Goacee: Harri e Observa- Jones, Mr., cio G. ‘a. gy en ri, 2, to tory, aheceey Calcutta. | _ gtoat Survey, — 180 L.8.C. Proceedings Joshi, K. R., Asst. to Director of | Agriculture, Indore, C.I. | Joshi, » Ba acteriological Sec- i esearch Institute, K yt oa Ardeshir, St. Xavier’s College, Bombay. Kane. mie W. V., Civil Surgeon, Khandw Kanga, D.. , Custom and Excis Chemical ae, New Cisethins Bomba Karamchandani, Capt. PY. Sind. ashyap, Prof. Lanier Govt. ore jaca Dr. S. W. Indian Museum, Ca Ken en A., Agricultural Insti- vite: walla abad. Kesava Pai, Rao Bahadur M., mee Sri Vilas, Egmore, Mad- Khisty, Dr. B. R., Pica Hospital, Khandwa, ie as Fok toga mbay I R., H.H. The ee 8 " College, Trivand- Kcishnamacharys, C., ries of neering, Ban alor Sciahcmacactt st. g Phe Veteri- Madras Krishnamoorty Ayyer, G. P, Krishnan, Dr: K. Y¥. Krishna Rao, K., Nagappur Street, Trilicane, a Krishna Rao, Dr. FN... Medical Colleg Kri shoe Rao, Rao Sahib R., Jt. Sec South Indian Research neato ae “eras Shins Gots. Vepery, Madras Pee hee - S., 92, Victoria ane Kuppuswami, V. S, ; Madeas. Kurup, P. K. of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, L Lakshmana Rao, Lakshmanaswa mi, A., Madras. Lakshminarayan, be , M.A Lele, S. H., Bom ele, G. K., harininatl Research Laboratory, Gwalior ‘2. aye, D. The Ranade In- stitute, ca City. Liston Lt. Col W. G. L., Parel, omba Littlehailes, R., Director of Public Ins gti ~ Lorimer, j G., I.M.S., Majo neral Hespitel, Maden M MacMahon, Prof. et 8., Canning College, Luckno Maconochie, Major . LM. 8., Inspee- tor General of Prisons, Madras, Madeley, J. W., Special Engineer, orporation of Madras, Madras. Madhava, Prof. K. B., Central Col- lege, ci Ma nt Rao, M.R. Ry. T., ‘sath ill Hospital, Bez Mahalanobis Prof{ Pr ey, wallis Street, Guicaiex: Seem ae 8. prt 210 Corn- teur Testisqte Shillong. Maitra rof. N., Bengal Engineering cole Sibpur, How Malal, Khan Bahadur H. M., Crad- ock Town, eh Medoowinct, Major G. E., + M.S., Medical Co cltegs?. Madras. Martin, Oswald, 6 and 7, Clive ta. iV: asillamant, E. caivantras Women’s College, ; Dy Sanitary Commissioner. Mayuranathan, P. V., Govt. Mu- g ae ; Mehta, R. C.LE Galea pees Park, Balipadace, a cu Meldrum, A. N., Gujarat College Ahmedabad. — Prof K. Ramunni, Presi- Dr, &. &.. Ankylostomi- asis Inquiry, Trichinopoly. iin. Bin atid. a 1922.) Middlemiss, C. 8., Srinagar, Kash- OEE d. Caloutta. ——_ Jamshedji, B.A C.LE., 1, Wode house ~ grees "Colaba, Bombay ee i Kk. J., Gresham Building, ort mbay Mondgil, K. i, HH The Maha- “ot oo * W. Patna College, Morriso on, J., Pasteur Institute of ia, Kas auli. MudhageipNayak, G. ur, Dr. E., School of Tropical Medicine, Calcutta P. Mukherjee, Prof. J N., 92, Upper . Cireular Road,Caleu tta. are: EG: Fechnological Insti- le wnpur eee Pillai, Dr. 8., uthuswa mi, es N., Presidency wen ollege, Madra N Naik, Prof. K. G., The Chemical Laboratory, The College, Baroda. Namasivayan adras Namberumal "Che tty Narasinga Rao L. T. Class Tea orrtees College ‘Saidapet. M. J. r. V. V., Civil Asst. t Physic, o Maharajali'a “Ueleae Viziana- | ram. arayana Ayyer, P Narayanaswami, v. , 2/3, Kupper Mathu Street ¥ oad Math Fort Road, adras. — sir a Shankar Bagh, Narke, Pr 7 oa Engineering, Poona Indian Science Congress. 92, Upper Circular | oa ie: , Norendranath. ‘ oe Bad- i ha T., " Crynant | eemeton Road, "Ohet tpat, Mad- | ce , College of | | 1.8.C. 181 | eee Prof. T. 8, | Newcomb. Capt. Clive, Riera i , Ma ' Agnisattaal College, eb Merete Norris, Agricultural College, Chinibavocs: Fg Padmanabhan, A. R. Parameswaram, H., Cavendish La- boratory, Cambridge, _——_, Parija, Pro / oor, The pe aeinas Madras. phe ote sui V.G., Agricultural College, Poo | Pendleton, Robert L | Agriculture, Gwaliar Padulingam, C., “Agricnltaral Col- imbato Pact oe of Ge; al geared of Science, Mayo Road, Parnell, F.R. , Agri. Coles, atlas Road P. O., Coimbato Parthasarathy Iyengar oN. O., Pre- sidency College, Madras. Economic | Patel, C. K. Patvardhan, Botanist Bombay, G. B.. to Govt., Poona. Paul, J. W., Muir College, Allaha- ok John, Asst. Surgeon, napalle. Pillai, D. 5 Pillai, V. D. Purasawakkam, adras. ere Prof. H., Govt. College, Prasedh Prof, K., Patna College, Bankipore. Prasad, Prof. Yedunandan. Prayag, 5. Cotton Bruder, Khandesh, Dhulia. R Bo aaa sale R. Ry. T. Pheer Solis, Bed , Dr. K., a | ‘Office t; Corporation of Madras | Madras. Dr. K. A., Dy- pameeer? | ee te a Oy Punjab, Lahore | Rajagopalan, M. | Rajeg 1 Ayyer, Rao — = | Principal, Kumbaconam “\ollece- | Ra agopal Na' idu, eise® Ra eehit, JuN., Ghazi 182 I.8.C. Ramachandra Rao, Rao Sahib, Madras Ram-krishna Aiyar, T. V., Agrl. Road _ P.O., | | ng College, vib ley Coi bat Ravnkiahen “Tye «Prof. 8... 1.8 hes "Maharaja s : Dalian Trivan- Ravialvinhsan, Dr. ote — Insti- tute, Quindy, Madr Ramamurti, C., Medical College, Madras Ramamurti, ec Mieg 80S Aa yscdoed Mylapor Raman, A. “HL aan 210, Bow- bazar Street, Calcut of. Raman, Prof. C, V. m0, ‘Bowbazar Street, Calcutta Raman, G. A Raman Nair, Ramanand, +, Saidapet, Ramanathan EL; ae as e Henepie s che Trivan Ram tig ,A , Teachers’ Colioce: i Gamanitioas Re 8., Teachers’ Col- pee Saida Ramanujam SG. Manavala, M.A., Christinn College Madras. -Ramarao, C. s Vanteines Gardens, Mylapore, Madras Rama Rao. N.S. Ramaswami Ay Indian In- singe of aad de "Habbal. Bang. alor Hawenw ami, R. Ramaswami Sivan, i. R. At atin tural College, Colinbaty Ram Raw, L., 58, bon Riasdabaia City. Ranade. V. V., B.A., LL.B., 101 oe ea Peth, Poo ona City. Rangachari, K_, Agricultural a lege, Lawley Road P.O... Con _ batore. Ranganatha Ayyer, S. R. array najee Ayyeng a ag = Teachers’ College, Saidapel, Madi Rang aswam i, 8., Madras. Rathnaji Rao, V. [Bombay. myer gard N.J., Malabar Hill, Reddi Hon. Rai = ras. ‘eoare tn KE... ./o.8. KK, Matrubhutam, 1069, East Adaya- c. ms ee aa Marine Lines, Fort Bombay ahadur Jee Minister, Government of Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVII, Roy, Capt. 8. K., _ ri 26, Am- herst ae Calcu Roy, Bai Reta Sarat Chandra, Vakil, Ran as Kumar a t Kumar, M. — ce Hospital Road, Calet je Se Sudhir Chandra, Craddock Nagpur Russell. Maier A. J. HY, » Sanitary Commissioner, Madra 8 Sabhesan, M. S., 18, aia treet, Triplicane, Madr Dr. Sadagopan, , [hambu un Chetty Street, Mad Sadulla Md., "bat Bahadur tha Sahib., 9, Randall's Road, Vepery P.O., Madras Saha. A. C., c/o L. Sele, Esqr., ee ee Egmore Ry. - Madr ee Prof , M. N. , 1, Guindy Road, Ady r, M: tay Sahasranam .T. AS Sahni, B., » University of Lockanes Poskac Sait. H. M. Ebraham, Post Box 101, Madras ambamutti. G, Govt. Trg. ert Olentt’s = og ee Bangalore = bi - M., Canning College, Af ris Rao, S:; , Medical College. Sanjirv:n R Santhan» ey Pillai, M. J. Sanyal, A. K., Muir College, Allaha- bad. Sastry, Capt., Indian Station — pital, St. Thomas Mount, Madras ees: B. (3. , Dr. 8. R., Govt. Meteoro- 9 oe Seetharama Sastry, G. : Sen, Dr. H. K. 92, Upper Circular fd Calcutta. Sen, Dr. ae N., Dt. Nim Sen, Prof. “Romesh ner Prof. of Phys G. B, B. College, Micafiaepae: Burhanpur, C.P.. 1922. } ener M. S , c/o Gov nd Palac Mount a Ma rr Seshagiri Rao, Se Seshu Aiyar pb P. V., Presidency | og ege, —— Set Mohan , Govt. College, | pas Shah, R. S. Shevade. Prof. S. V., Baroda Col- lege, Baroda. Shiv Saga Serie skit , 20/ . pee ‘Tank Road, Camp, Poo oer. c ?. anos, Bota- ist, Nagpur, C.P colt r. 0. S. Simonsen, Dr. orest Re- ae ae. N. ., Opposite to Egmore Ry. ie Madras. Singh, Prof. B. K., Ravenshaw Col- lege, Cuttack. Sin ale K. P., CoG, Geo dere Survey. Cal Sinton, Mai rae Bee ae Sy posing Voc ci ne Laboratory, Nagpur Sitaram V. Sitaram Si thararn Parada, M. R. Ry Man vt. Hk Aoakigatt (Vieng. D t). Sivaraman, Dr. . Civil Surgeon, Tuberculosis Hospital, Royapet a acer Sivasankaran. Smith, W. E., Same Club, Tipper, , Farm " Ruatien, Mad- Sica barasiac, M. G., Madras. stencil Naidu, A. Srinivasan, K. C., ‘Tantal, — Big ahiowes eileen M Sriniv ee igs Kuala Soar Insti- tute, C Srinivasa Rao, “Triplicane, Madra Rao, H., ype Zoological Bar. vey, Indian Museum, Caleutta —— ., Tripli- Nivaatve me H., Christian College. uckno Srivastava, J. P., The Western In- ia Prospecting Syndicate Ltd., P.O, 49, Ca vanes é anaes Mire, Maragaret. Madras. Subbsiver, A. §., 41, Police Hos- al Road, Basie, Calcutta. Suliba Rao, Madras. Subrahmanian N., Madrasa-i- Azam, Madras. Subramaniyam, Capt. R. B., Dy. Indian Science Congress. Cte Govi nda | LS.C. 183 Sanit mein a gaia Northern Range, tair » Ma dras. Subram Su Sabha z _ Indian Institute of Science Bangalo re Sundara Reddi, Dr. T., Medical ollege, Madras Sunder Rao, Dr. et Filarial Re- search Worker, Calcutta School of Tropical Medicine and Hy- —Ra nihat, Cuttack. A., General LMS., ymons, Lt.-Col. T. H., Ge neral Hospital, Madras. Kg , Dy. Sanitary Tewar fe Béaek: Banki- Dr. S. Sieger? Thapar, Prof. 8. tat Newal Kishore Road, Luckno Theodre, J. Thomas, W. H., M.C.A. Thyagaraja Ayyer, M.. Puraswak- instal B., L.M.P. Saidapet ipper, G. H , Geological Survey of India, Calcutta. - Tirumal Kao, B. Asst. Surgeon, sapur, Dt. ares : Tirumalayya, Dr.. Madura. Tirumurtti, Dr. S., M.B.C.M., Medical College, Madras. — rof. §. C., c/o Dr . R. Savoor, The Observatory, Mad- ras = Ubhaya, Capt. N. R. Vv Vairavanathan, 5. eeraraghava Ayyer, C. al Venkaraman K- Mudaliar. 8. R., ng Aiyeng Venkata Ranga Venkatasubbaraman, re Vepery, b> T. i t an, Rao Sahi Venkata fen D+ | Post, Coimbato Venkat Rao ae Venugo ‘ Voraraghove ss yer, K. C., Govt. College, Ku mbakonam. 184 1.8.C. — , K., Student, B.A. (Hon’s) Class, St Jos = College, Trichin opoly P.O., Teppakulam. V ishma nath, Prof., Mohondra Col- Vi pW. 8. | Vredenburgh, E., ce Sur- vey of peste: — Vythynathas "31, Rama- | aan Birest ; \Meanalts P:0:, Madra Ww Wad, Y. D. Chemical Adviser _ Shahpur are ad Ahmedabad., | Wadia, D. » a ig ogical Survey | of India, Galas Wali Mahamad, Dr Privaics ve Lucknow University, Lucknow Wright, Maj Procs. of the Ninth I.S.C. [N..S, XVIII, 1922.] Walker, Dr. en F.R.S., Meteo- r ologist, Sim oe Fs St + Teak House, Eg- mo ras. rae Mrs Elsie. Medical Officer, S.M. Hos tal, St. Andrew’s Colonial ernin, ogee pong. Warrier, P., Ma Wassoodew, Bebrashod Venayek, 3, Warden Street, Bombay Wat Rus £0 “Siaakisites In- siti, Cawnpore, UP: or R. E,. Shawfield, Egmore, Madras. Y Yajnik, N. A., Forman Christian College, Lahore. ee RR en a er ag oe me a oa INDEX “gla — and N. A. Yajnik. The investigation of the composi- m oil, and the diana and removal of the impurities, 65. Absorption | of ‘igh ht by. some ae and a salt miedo ied a cae irony = udborough and W ; Acton, Major H. nd 1. Harvey, LM. “ oo examination into the degree of efficacy of Antirabic treamen Aiyar, T. V.R. On some insects noted as wa fy fruit trees in S. India, Aiyer, ‘Krishn a K. R. and R. Ramanathan. Supersaturation and periodic e precipitation, 74. Albedo of the E C. 56. eohplyps of es enthyl cote - some af—unsaturated acids and o eirsaturated analogues. B.Dasannacharya and J.J. ieee, Algal flora of Ps Tie Island and its immediate vicinity the Salsette. 117. Anchoring oi of Gymnopetalum cochinchinense Kurz and some other ucurbitaceous plants, 121. serene ae Major L. A. P., +3 M.S. The Sack Steam Disinfector, 147. Aneura ind rien, 2 ntribution to the life-history of. Shiv Ram Kashyap i ande, and Sh Annandale, N. Notes on the Genera Bullinus and Physa in the Mediter- ranean Basin (Mollnses Pulmonata), 91. e Antirabic nee Sak examination into the ee ia efficacy 0 Lt, Col. , 1.M.S. and Major H. W. =e IM Archaeology, Prehistoric, Panciin anon sp Assam plants—Two new. P.M. Debbar wits Atom—Recent work on the Constitution - the. E. P. Harrison, Ph.D.. F.R.S.E., F. 69. Automatic «, make and break” key for the heating and high . ete ofa Goolades X-ray tube. E. P. Harrison and Narendra Axial prolioation of the flower of Nymphaea rubra Roxb. P. M. bar ll Ayyangar, N. N. and G. G. Narke. Bearing of geology on some engineer- ing problems in the Bo mbay Presidency, 1 Ayyar, P. Ramas swamy. Preliminary Note on the chemistry of neem oil, 65, etals and some alloys, 7 — mg s eg erro of a ee Ssaereaniin cas wartibeter- Ebeling non, 72. 71. Banerji He Pk. Oxidation of ferrous sulphate by air, fe teeing ses of some reac pee B. Coli method in water examinations—Limitations © Govindaraj a, 147, Bombav Bearing of : lo y on some engineering — —_— Presi N.N.A ar and G. G. pee eres B.L — _ freshwater Ciliate "che Indiv iduality of Calis, 95. , 66. at Rao Sanib V. 186 L.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Bi sig limestone a associated with marine fossiliferous i in re. — ies at Jokau, Haveli Tehsil, Poonch, Kash DD: 4 ° Wadia a, Bose, 8. R. gaa Ee, distribution of the Bengal se of Poly pora- eae, along with a short ag a of 2a ele in Bengal, Bovine Tubere sulosis in Ind An reak of aca a amon: animals in the Bombay Zoctosical hig Lt.-Col. W. Glen Listen an . M. B. Soparkar Brominated Tsocyamines. ic! c. Moudgill, 78. Cancrinite from Kishengarh, Rajputana. 8S. L. Biswas, 125. oaeorag! esters—Some derivatives of Chlorine as a e cneieae oxidis- ing and condensing agent. R. L. Datta and B. C. Cha , 74. Castanoxpern mum australe C. and 4 a short oe a the oe cat to the the flowers of. P. ebbarm Gots iotition and the aaivducbty of, Barides Bhattacharyya, 95. Chakrades. G.M. An cecological study of Deccan hedegion nd 19. Chatterji, B. C., and R. L. Datta. Some derivatives of carbamic esters. Chlorine = ‘a simultaneous oxidis sing and soudetainng agent, 74. Chatterji, K. P. A note on some tartrates, 77 Chatterji, N. G. aoe on the Liesegang Phenomenon, 74. Chatterji, N. G., E.R. Watson and K. C. Mukerji. Labora atory experi corel on the a a. of Portland cement from material avail- le in the United Provinces me Chinese junk and sampan- The omit n of th J. Hornell, 163. as and the value of Seophslactic ssssiiiabstiavbe Major H. G. Stiles -M.S., 144. Cholera in the individual oe aate in the age Presidency— Observe- tions on the incidence of. rAcy ssell, Chopra, B. Isopoda of the ieisily Dopp iia; stconist on the Indian Deca- poda Natantia, 93. Choudhury, 8S. S. andG.S — On the occurrence — significance of a third contractile vacuole in Paramoecium caudatu Chat WAL Flys on the: occurrence of bitumen in ithe Deccan Trap Bombay, Ciliate Protozoa a ‘Fudia Nene on fresh water. B. hatia, 93. eee oe of manganese dioxide sol by different ascteotyeae P. B. sagt + 67. Composition of neem oil and the detection and removal of the ia aus —The 8 tt of. N. A. Yajnik and Sh. Md. Abdulla Saaiihibsinas of some Indian essential oils. J. L Simonsen, Constitution of longefolene— Experi riments onihe. J. L. Sim onsen, 79. Contractile Anterior Thoracic Appendages in Anopheline Larvae. M. O. irunarayana Iyengar, 93 Cornwall Lt.-Col. J. I.M.S. On the occurrence of fugitive swellings on Pig nvm and trunks of persons suffering from Filari n Cornwall. Lt.-Col. J. W. The ultimate aim of ce roe 131. Cornwall Lt-Col. J W.,1.M.S. and H. M. Laf Note on the Cul- tivation of Leishmania ae from the sadiohatsl Sipe of persons suffering from Kala-a Cinesian of a coe fost “a pose for observational errors. Pp. C. is, 54.- so ese upper air. P. C. Mahalanobis, 53. x ica ekring ag of. B. Ganapathi Rao; dd: pisdisomnall an ats Cruickshank, Major J. A., I.M.S., Major J. Cae I.MS. The y for a eae ar oie for vaccine lymph Craiekahank, Major J. A., I.M. S., Major J. sabe bP MS. pathy he er. A fi survey with a stat ea pra T. : filarial s yrs? the Relationship of Filariasis and Fieghantienia, 137. 1922.) Indian Science Congress. I.8.C. 187 Cultivation of hoe cuore from the Gi ree a blood of persons suffering from Kala- Note on the. Lt.-Col. J. W. Cornwall, I.M.S. and H. M. Lairenas 1a Cunningham, Major J., 1.M.S., Pe cAs Behr seman I.M.S. The necessity for a standard for ma nein Cunningham, Major J., 1.M.S , Major rd. A. Crni - halite: 1.M.S. and T. agp cn Iyer. A filaria) survey with a statistical prvictss into he Relationship of Filariasis and ee 137 een) Major J., I.M-S8. and B. Trim othy. ‘Note on the Ratios of the Numerical Content t of pete Bacterical Suspensions obtain ned by ve asitineytorheae method to those obtained with Brown’s opacity » 133. ubes Ourie Miss D. F. Note on the Weight Curve of the Normal Indian nfant during the i year, 132 eee OT se at of the effluent for egeculur Ps, Jahar Lal. Some observations on the enching of night soil, 148, Das, P.N. An isvextaues into hess * Puri Dasannacharya, B. and J. J. Sudborough. Aaohoinee of the menthyl esters of some «f@-unsaturated acids and of their saturated analogues, Das-Gapte, oy Mohan.. The diagnosis of Kala azar by peripheral blood 134. Dastur, R. H and W. T. Saxton. * The cela of some plant communi+ ties in the Savannah host , 118. Debbarman, P. } As note on the short-cut to the nectar in the owers of Castancspermu australe C. and F., Debbarman, P M. A case of axial erolidicasion of the flower of Nym- ee emda 116. bektack .M. what rate Indian — ty > w Assam ae ela sepeais on the anchoring pads of Gymno- petatum i Nena Kurz and some other Cucurbitaceous plants, lz fees of seed poet and weight or lint per seed in Gossypium hirsutum. G. R. H , 123. egteey at Kanneri near ; Bombe of ono of the foci which one a Pad ee ay of the Deccan Trap of Western India Hallo Double slit Thedte hot gene & modified form of. A, L. Narayana, Dover Cedric. —— - Recent Progress in our Knowledge of the Indian + 82. hvride, 78. Dutt, 8. B. and A. ts ‘Siar Dyes from camphoric anhyride, ied dah Dore sikhi “Bhu usa d E. R. Watson. An atte ‘ly auxochromes phide storie. fom pugs of other groups by replacing t fon : Dutt, Sikhi Bhusan and E. R Watson. An ee P — . phide the. on bedi introducing paige Om Se aes: ae ome », phthalsin acridine and nitroso gro ies Dutt, Sich i Buse san and E. R. Watson. The bona and properti o-dyes containing mercaptan groups, Dithe, iB tLe nd B; 0 Chatieeii Some derivatives of — 74. © as a simultaneous oxidising and con s. SB. ig ri 78. Dyes fest camphoric anhyride. A. C. Sirear and 188 1.8.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Ecology of the Nilgiri Hill-tops plateau. P. F. Fyson, se Effect of resistance on celestial motions . B. Madhav mission and absorption spectra of the halogens i in ihe: visible and ultra- violet regions. A. L. Narayana and D Gunnayya Epidemic: — with special reference to ‘cabin nh ive Sle — climatic ons. Lt.-Col. C. A. Gill, I.M.S.,D P.H., D.T.M. and H., 164 Equilibrium between a mixture of acetic acid and feahopagtio acid and Evershed, J. Som Reclaiee and tas. individuality of Cells. Haridas Bhattachary ya, 95. Field notes on the poaigrsiceess . Assis’ gto India. C. E. C. Fisher, es is Filariasis in India—on the occurr f fugitive " eclliiti on the e itie ee ates of persons goiiesiue from, Lt.Col. J. W. Corngell, ag Se ariasi —An investigatiion into. P. Wieriaais or eivianiose A fila oh survey with a statistical enq pry into the Relationship of. Major J. A. Cruicks a ers tei nar ye: * mack, Reeth apkitiy Tyer 137. py ned rese a: h (Darb ‘erat ree) Memorial) Calcutta School of cal Medicine and Hyg ara Fischer’ ©. . C. Field Sas Ae on agen tosiauithitcns of Southern India, Forest “stoma in the ego plain and the adjoining Vindhyas— Note L. A. Kenoyer Fossil Pectinidas from pis bebe iiatidaae State, Kathiawar, H. C. upta Fyson, P. F. The ecology of the Nilgiri Hilltops plateau, 118. Ganguly, P. B. Certain observation on a surface-tension phenomenon, Ganguiy,P zy fe Coagulation of manganese dioxide sol by different elec- Genera Bullinus sth Physa in a inn te Basin (Mollusca Pul- monata)—Notes on the. N. A dale, 91. us Triticu um i in Ce meee) uies_-A' uae ots of the. G. K. Lele, 122. Geograpiital distribution of the Bengal species of Polyporacese, along with a istory of them in Bengal. By S. R. Bose, 11 Geological Results of the Mount shade Expedition. A.M. Heron, 124. sh, J.C. Ab i ight b a new method of deweeniieten aetineet on-coefficient in the ultr iolet, 65. Gill, Lt -Col C. A., I.M.S., D.P.H., D.T.M. and H. The role of page onditions in epidem mic disease with special reference to malaria, 164. Gossypium neglectum types of cotton—Variations in the. 8S. H. Pr ayag, Govindaraju, ge Sahib V. Limitations of B. Coli method in water xaminations, 147. Gore. 8. N. an Ae CE -Col. Glen Liston, I.M.S. A plea for the extended use n, 146, Gunnyya D. snd A. L. Narayana. "Emission and poi os spectra of the halogens in ‘the visible and ultra-violet regions, 52. f he to bgt B. On the occurrence of Siphoneous Kicad in the Tertiary ° in SF aoa in ing (Castellani and Willey 1904) with a deasipriee g re of the position of the genus. Captain H. » K. A. K. On the discovery at Kanneri near Bombay of one - the foci which contributed to the formation of the Deccan Trap ° Western India, 125. { 1922,] Indian Science Congress. TS.C. 189 Harrison, E, P., Ph.D., F.R.S.E., F. Inst. P. Recent work on the Con- stitution of the Atom, 169. Harrison, and Narendranath Sen matic ‘‘make and break”’ tor the heating and high ea trees of a Cooledge X-ray tube, 54. ioabhck Lt.-Col. W. F., I. ¥ rt The dose of prophylactic vaccine neces- y in re-inoculation, Harvey, Lt.-Col. W. F., : 7 S Note on the preparation of vaccine lymph GHosue ¢ ina tropical climate, 143. Harvey, Lt.-Col. W. F , I.M.S. and Major H. W. Acton, I.M.S. An examination into the degree of efficacy of Antirabic treatment, 144. Hate, V. N. The algel flora of Bombay Island and its immediate vicinity the Salsette, 117. Helminths in bu peri of staining and mounting. Captain ishnu T. Korke, 137. Po A. M. Geological results of the Mount Everest Expedition, 124, Hilson, rs at — determination of seed weight and weight or lint per tum hirsutum, 123. Honey- gathering g by the Hill Tribes. Rao Bahadur L. K. Ananthakrishna lye Hook worm stillness diagnosis of. K S. gece rag Hook worm infection—Mass treatment of. K.S. Mhaskar, 137. Hora, Sunder Lal. The Modifications of the Swing- “bladder in Hill- tadpole Hornell, J. The origin of the Chinese sanken be sampon, 163. Hornell, J. Pearl production in - Indian pearl oyster, 90. Hydrogenation of oils. J. W. Paul, 66. Indian plants—Two new. P. M. Debbarman, 117. se Indian Wasps and Bees—Résumé of Recent Progress in our Knowledge of the. Cedric Dover, 9 ae Indigo hycdrosalphite vat textile dyeing—Some investigations on. ¥ . Sarna, 77. ajnik and Insects noted as vee of fruit daar ® ee Rg i xa R. Aiyar, 27. Interpolation —On a ractice I ne absorption of f certain In Indian vegetable tile The study of. N. A. a Iron ores of Behar and Orissa, H. G. Jones, 125 Isopoda of the family Rey ¢ fase pantie on the Indian Decapoda Natantia. B. Chopra 93. i Iyengar, M. O. Partha nsty: Note on some attached forms of Zygnema ceae, ; Note Iyengar, M. O. Tir = A pes Sphotia hy pen : s in An . Iyengar, Thoracic ‘Appen an Tarte oF lege annandalei Pra baie Travan- lyer, Recetas: Rao Bahadur L. D. Mala Anayans of the core Hills, by the Hill Iyer, Adeutalitene. Rao Bahadur L. D. Honey-gathering by Tib 164 f some Tver, P. Vv Ge Sech u and T. R. Ranganathan. A Statistical Study of so mination Marks, 52. .S., Major J. Tyer, Seethapathy T., Major J. Crui seagate po eee into ri nningham, I.M S$ A Blarial pasha’ with a statis e Re Maia of ae and Elephantiasis i of oxlenee of the ie, & Seetha apathy T., an V. Krishnan. se npeaied wih Peripheral blood in Kala-azar as a diagnostic p. ~ the Contractile 190 1.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII; Jones, H. G. Tron ores of Behar and Orissa, 125 = K. R. Tmproved method of wheat sowing ‘for Central India, 33. N.V. Studies i in methods of Reerens nitrogen losses from Cattle ” Dung and Urine during storage, Kala-azar—The problem of. Major F. P. Mackie, I.M.S., 135 Kala-azar as a diagnostic meer The value of culture of the es pertiiie al blood in. T Seethapathy Iyer and K. V. Krishnan, 1 negroes 7 coviphewal "biead Saltaire The diagnosis of. Biraj Mohan as-Gupta. 134. tig: ee nd J.J. Sudborough. The equilibrium between a mixture of avetic sath — Byte insite acid and their esters, 67. : Kashyap, S R. reign tl ighbour hood of gti re, Kashyap, Shiv Ram pos eget Kant Pande. Contribution to the life- history of Aneura indica Kekre, M G. J. J. Sudb eee Mes E Watson. The production of acetone from emt and ake dae Kenover L. A otes on forest 7 sdsomenicgas in the Gangetic Plain and the oining Vistueud 118. adj Keratomalncia is @ deficiency disease ? if so, what is the nature of the defi nev Major H&. Wrig ight, 1.M 139. Khan Heri. rolegnia on soba | Fry (Ophiocephalus marulins) in Madhopur Hatcheries and its treatment. Kohli, 8 J andN.A Yajnik. Hadsoectivity 7 some Indian — 73. Korke. Captain agri Tt. Technique of staining and mounting Hel- minths in ngh Opuntia eae Mill—Some abnormal phylloclades of. G. B. Patwar- dhan Oral rApparatis 7 tees eg os “ yk pat parva Boulenger—Some rvations on the. Sunder Lal Hor Outre per te fbn the Ba, ‘5 Beds. E. Vredenburg, 125. ary of Culex —The de velopment of ya V. Nath Oxidation of ferrous sulphate by air ia Banerji, 7 L Oxidations—Some induced. N.N. ee: 78. ing ogo notes on the Ae rocks of Cherra Punji, Khasi ls, H. C. Das-Gupta Patwardhan, az "B. eis abnormal eplivalados of opuntia elatior, Mill, Patwardhan, V. G. and D. L. Sahasrabuddhe. A note on the utilisation of the spent Mohwra (Bassia “ee Flowers, 32. Pande, Shiva Kant and ap v Ram Kashyap. Contribution to the life-his- tor » 115. Paul, J. W. re ogenation of oils, 6 Pearl production in the Indian pearl Sa er. J. Hornell, 90. Pedal line family oF atriangle. A. Narasinga Rao, 56. Petrifi = ants m the Mesozoic and Tertiary rocks of India and Bur Ss ni , 123. Phosphatic nodule of the Trichinopoly as a manure for paddy—Avail- R. 9. abili M. Photo. Chemical Calais A. K. Lee, 76. Photosynthetic A ae be of Cypera M. 8. pce 121. Phototropy of i eh ees salts Gaga Sin ngh, 7 Phylogeny of some inellidae. E. teat rg, 91. : thy Jah Bpioke— Pike comer to the lifecistory of. M. L. Sethi, 116. Pl ase of, L. B. Kulkarn : Piaacie divest in vitro—A simplified ne ies “ie cultivation of. Major Inton nton » 139. Pollen storility i in relation to vegetative propagation. P.S. Jivanna Rao, 28. pgs npn and its economic sss. mee in some of the chief crops of the Central Provinces and Berar—A no K. P. Shrivastava, 120. Poppy petal 5 N. Rakshit | and 8. N. Singha , 74. gS. H. Variations in the Gossypium neglectum types of cotton, 133, Precipitation—Supersaturation and periodic. K. R. Krishna Aiyar and K. manathan Preparation and properties of azo-dyes containing mercaptan groups. E. R. Watson and Sikhi Bhusan Dutt, Presence of wh weg in some Homopt era—Preliminary note on the. M. J. Narasi Poesidaatial ‘sada of the President of the ee 23. = » "e Anthropological Sec., 149. : , ’ otany Sec. a * + Chemistry has 56. us bed 2? Maths. a pd Phys. Sec.. 30. a ” »» Medica 1 Bes Sec., 125. 2 Zoolog Mage ers nitrogen losses from Cattle Dung and oie dating storage Studies in methods of. N. V. Joshi, 28. 1922.) Indian Science Congress. I8.C. 193 ages error of the component frequency constants of a dissected fre- ney curve. P. C. M Mah alanobis Probable error 0 of const ned by linear interpolation. P. 0. Maha- , 54. Bich ylactis vaccine Pr aeytd in re-inoculation—The dose of. Lt.-Col. W. F. Harvey, I.M.S., 145. Radioactivity of some Indian minerals. N. A. Yajnik and 8. J. Kohli, 73. ooh mapa T. N.&8. The age sae? of the Mills-Reincke Pheno- m to Indian Condition Raj, } M. and N. Yajnik. The "Study of iodine absorption of certain fadian Soccbatite oils, 79. “pales gee M. and H. E. Watson. The reaction between sodium sul- d sulphur, 66. Ramakrishnan, S. The value of igh rerhg Sack for Syphilis, 133. V. The kibede of the Ear #55 Mamaitthes: K. R. The Molecular Boktbating of Light in Gases, 56. Pa 3 Thon derstorms in Trivandrum, and K. R. Krish na Aiyar. Supersaturation and pe eriodic precipitation, 74. Ranganathan , 8. R. ie he Seshu Iyer. A Statistical Study of some xamin nation Ma es Rao, A. Narasinga. The Podal line family of a triangle, Rao, Ratema yank: Symbiotic nitrogen fixation in ata other than those of the Leguminoseae order, Rao, Ganapathi B., J. J. Sudborough, and H. E. Watson. Purification of sand nitre, 15. Rao, ae aie S. Pollen sterility in relation to vegetative propaga- Ries rot the Numerical Content of certain — Suspensions ppkened: 2 y the Haemocytometer method to those obtained with n’s opacity tubes—Note on the. Mejor J. Cunningham, B. Timothy, 133. Rav, 1 Gop al. Note on some new oils and fats, 79. Reaction ras ease gove sulphite and sulphur. H. E. Watson and M. Rajagopalan, Recent Sobek t Kodaikanal. J. Evershed, 5 Red Toma dyes ee introducing mercaptan pee into aed of the zine, age phthalein acridine and nitroso gnome —An attempt to ve epare. E. R. Watson and Sikhi Bhusan Dutt, Red Sulphide wierd ate dyes of other groups by replacing the ee chromes by Santee groups—An attempt to prepare Watson hea Sithi Bhusan Dutt, 68. Reh ned 2 of the United Provinces and the ek of their Saad nba erie une and character E. R. Watson an uker Rhinosporidiam ‘Rincaly. Major Wright, I.M.S. and Dr. Trimurthi (M Root, = Ran ldehaager em in development and anatomy ,—T.8. en . Thomas, ; Row, Lt.-Col. R., I.MS. On reversion of the Flagellate form o as et Mania donovan ni and Leishmania tropica to the resistant non-flag id torpedo and 0 body in pores eg and its bearings the transm1 Ns aie eae pe aa ak pelea . ck Tae 3 on — Bacilli in culture with special scbacdue to the rapectiel of an Endolipase, 132. Row, Sundara S.. Fi lariasis opener Boot hanga eats Memorial) Calcutta School of Tropi and D eesoneds, I Roy, Saratchandra. Ethnography in = ad Official oO 194 L.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Russell, Major A. J. H. Observations on the onporae of Cholera in the individual districts in the Madras Presidency, 145. Sabhesan, M.S. The eo system of Bed ecco 121. Sack Steam ga capotas Major L. A. P. Anderson, I.M.S., 147. Saha, M. a On the e experimenial decsGiatretion of the Temperature Radiation of Gases Setairebed tie and V. 'G. ‘Patwardhan. A ay on the utilisation of the spent Mowrah (Bassia latefolia) Flowers, Sahni, B. A note on the vegetation of Khajer, near Chamba in the N. kok Himalayas, 117. Sahni, B. On some goatee ais from the Mesozoic and Tertiary ik of India and Bur Sanyal, A. K. Photo- eaten) perenne 76. Saprolegnia on Murrel Fry (0 phiocephalus ng tbe & in Madhopur Hatcheries ay its treatment. Hamid Khan Sardine oil—West Coast. P. K. Kurup, J. J. ‘spabolangh and H. E. atson, 65. Sarna, D. R., and N.A. Yajnik. Some investigation on indigo hydrosul- Saxton, W. T., and R. H. Dastur. The oecology of some plant commu- nities Ge the Savannah formation, se : Sen, Hiaiuds anath, and E. P. Harris matic ‘* make break”’ key the heating and high otantied civeaite ofa cocked X-ray tabo; Sethi, M, L. Co: ntributions to the life history of Pingus longifolia, 116. Sewage disposal wit of gases for generating electricity and of the effluent a agriculture, 148. Shortt, Captain H. I.M.S. Review of the position of the g _ ected um 7 (Castellani aaa Willey, 1904) with a auaneiptioke two new species, : iilieivantawi K.P. An cs on pollination and its economic pene a in some of the chief crops of = Central Provinces and Berar, 120. Simonsen, J. L. Constituents of some Indian essential oils, 79. xperiment on the constitution of longifolene, 79. Singh, "B. Ki; ‘ a gh, cage of La 1. Studies on the Dependence of optical Rot chemical constitution, Part IV: The Rotatory Pawcte! of aryl feels aves of Hisimins-and-aminocamphor, Singh, M. dit ditto. Singh, Gopal. Phototropy of ino Eun salts, 76. Sinha, 8. N. and J. N. Rakshit. Poppy petals, 74. Sinton, Major J. A., I.M.S. A simplified method of the cultivation of modium in vitro Or Gane ae Algae in the Tertiary of Sind—On the occurrence of. B. B. Sircar, A. C. a a §. B. Dutt. Dyes from camphoric anhyride, 78. — pret scot M. R. Ss sage ag of the Trichinopoly Phosphatic ule as a manure for Paddy Sobti, B. R. and N. A. Yajnik. "Molecular conductivity of potassium e ce) ts, 72. Some derivatives of copter esters. a as a simultaneous oxidis- ing and condensing agent. R. L. Datta and B. C. Chatterji, 74. Some foreign weeds recently taugdaceds in "the a kpaokion® of Lahore. 8. R. Kashyap, 120, bg ee Dr. M: 3.; and Lt. -Col. Ww. Glen ence Bovine Tuberculosis dia. An outbreak of tube: g animals in the Bombay Zoological Garden, 132. ri South Indian fungi with special reference to those of apnea historical account of. §. R. Venkatakrishna Mudaliar, Srinivasan, C. South Indian Wattles, 76. 1922.] Indian Science Congress. LS.C. 195 peababty of of chromates at high sieniicbiial M. Raman Nair and H. E£. ats 3. Statistical _ Study of some Examine Marks. P. V. Seshu Iyer and . R. Ranganathan, 52. Subramanyam ,and A. L. Narayana: Surface-tension of soap solutions r different concentratio s, 72. Sudborough an . Dasan aaaeeare Alcoholysis of the menthyl esters ome a acids and their eo ted analogues, Badhococet, J. J., B. Ganapati Rao and H. E. Watson. Purification of crude nitre, 75. pegs: and D. D. Karve. The equilibrium ee a mixture of Sudborough, J. J., P. K. Kurup and H. E. Watson. West Coast Sardine oil, Sudborough, e i Be G. Kekre and H. E. Watson. The production of acetone from eigen acetic acid, 72. Sugarcane Root—systems—studies in development and anatomy. T. 5. V dR. Th enkataraman and R. Thomas, sia et ace and periodic precipitation. K. R. Krishna Aiyar and K. R. Ramanathan, 74. Surface-tonsion phenomenon—Cortain observation on. P. B. Ganguly B. C. Ban huitwos tediatons of pomp solutions for different concentrations. A. L. arayana and G. Subrahmanyam, Swim- bladder in Hill Stream Fishes—The modification of the, Sunder- lal , 94. Symbiotic Sy ete pre in serps other than those of the Legumino- order. K. Adinarayana Rao, 31. Sy philis—The value v Teoh -gel tost ‘for. 8. Rama Krishnan, 133. Tartrates—A note on some. K. mepoates. 77. Temperature-coefficients of some reac . C. Banerji, 66. Temperature si patie of Gases ae he Pace <5 Aaseeason. M. N. Saha, otramotinyidisminoacridine K. L. Moudgill, 78. Thomas, R and T. 8. Venkataraman. Sugarcane Root-systems— Stu dies in : development and anatomy, Thunderstorms in Trivandrum. .R. Ramanathan, 53. Timothy, B. and Major J. Cunningham, 1.M.S. Note on the Ratios of the Numerical Content of certain Bacterial Suspensions obtain the Haemocytometer method to those obtained with Brown’s opacity tubes, 133. Trinitrotoluene ie ea and Burma Petroleam—The manufacture of. E. R. Wats Teleiaeiy De (itadra), and Major Wright, I.M.S. Rhinosporidium Kin Dibeesols Beoiliii in Culture with special reference to the properties aA an Endolipase—Some observations on. Lt.-Col. R. Row, I.M.S., 132 of cobalt, Uberoy, Ram Lal and N. A. Yajnik. Study in_ viscosities copper and mercuric chlorides with a pal to find the constitution of the complexions formed in the solutions, Utilisation a the spent Mo ee wra (Bassia latifolia) lenin note on the. D. L. Sahasrabuddhe and V. G. Patw ardhan, Vaccine lymph—The oo for a oe a ee a ae ds ham, I.M.S. and Major e Vaccine a effective in a tropical climate—Note on ee of. Lt.-Col. W. F. Harvey, 1.M.S., 143: 53 Vaidyanathaswami, R. Movement in n-dimensions, 53. 196 I.S.C. Proceedings of the Ninth [N.S., XVIII, Veastesiors of Khajiar, near Chamba in the N. W. Himalayas—A note on he, B. Sah hni ee ealirames T. Ss. and R. Thomas. Sugar-cane Root-systems— ies in development and anatomy, 26. Viscosities se oom lt, copper and mercuric ‘chloride with a view to find ye n of the complexions formed in the solution—Study N. A. Yair ‘ik eroy, _— rleoagg 9 ge plea for the extended use of the. Lt.-Col. Glen n, I.M.S. and 8. N. Gore, 146. Giacntee. E. Ostrea praelonga from the Bagh Beds, 1 Vredenburg, E. On the phylogeny of some rebissiltian, a Wadia, D. N. On a bitumenous limestone ou tcrop, associated with marine Kouaitilerous pein in the Murree series at Jokau, Haveli Tehsil. Poonch, Kashmir, 125. Watson, E. R. The aan uheeties of trinitrotoluene from Assam and Burma cree 76. Watson, Bd and K. C. Mukerji. The extent and character of the reh depos i the United Piavinese and the possibilities of their com- ei geitins ation, 75 ba oR Bec. les rji and N. G. Chatterji. Laboratory experi ent on the manufacture of Portland cement from materials avail able’ in the United Preise Watson, H. E., J. J, Sudborough and B. Ganapathi Rao. Purification Watson, H. E. and M. Raman Nair. On the stability of chromates at high lecnncbatteres: 73. Watson, H. E., M. G. Kekre and J. J. wees The production of acetone from acetates and acetic acid, Watson, H. E., P. K. Kurupand J. J. Suhail” West Coast Sardine oil, 65 Watson, E E.R d Sikhi Bhusan Dutt. An attempt to prepare red — ion ake dyes of other groups by replacing the auxo- chromes by mercaptan gro ups, 68. Watson, E. R. and Sikhi Bhusan Dutt. An attempt to pe a red sulphide dyex by introducin Se ck groups into dyes of the azi troso ps, : heer E. R. and Sikhi Bhusan Dutt. The preparation and properties of zo-dyes con saint pen eel groups, 70. Wattles Sou th Indian. C. Sri an, 76. Webb, eu = ene LM. 8. aber Pett and the value of prophylactic in noculat hepa Carve ‘of rb N ormal a Infant during the first year—Note on s D. F. Curjel, Whea ia oe Ceaheal dia teapede ved method of. K. R. Joshi, 33. Wright, a rH. E.,1M.S. Is Ke cavveele’ a deficiency disease ? if hat is the nature of the deficiency Wright, Majo or, I.M.S. and Dr. aon 4 (Madras). Rhinosporidium Kinealyi, 142. Yajnik, N. A. and B. R. So ns Molecular Conductivity of potassium iodide in organic solvents, Yajnik, N. and D. R. Sarna. Some investigations on indigo hydro- sulphite ea “textile dyeing, 77. Yajnik, N. A. and M. ne The study of iodine absorption of certain Indian vegetable oils, Yajnik, N. A. and Ram Lal lUberoy: so in viscosities of cobalt, coppet and mercuric chlorides with a vie find the constitution of the complexions heaps in the scltele, "73. - 3 Yajnik, N. A.and 8. J. Kohli. Racdkiaetaxiy of some Indian minerals, 73- 1922.) Indian Science Congress. L.S8.C. 197 Yajnik N. A., and Sh. Md. Abdullah. The investigation of the composi- tion of neem oil and the detection and removal of the impurities, 65. Zygnemaceae—Note on some attached forms of. M. O. Parthasarathy Iyengar, 116. 24- Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Salsete, Chorio, Divar, and the Molucas (1579) Edited and translated by the Rev. H. Hosten, S.J. an being seat cr irreleva nt to those studies, deserves a permanent home elsewhere. The relation is neither signed nor dated; luckily, the writing and the similarities between the account on the Thomas Christians and a letter dealing with the same subject and written by Father Antonio Monserrate, S.J., (Cochin, 12th January, 1579), of which I have a photographic facsimile, shows unmistakably that the author of the anonymous rela- tion is Father Monserrate, and that the date is the same, to within a few days. It is an autograph, therefore. The letter from Cochin was addressed to the Very Rev. Father Everard Mercurian, the General of the Society of Jesus in Rome. The relation, Informacion de los X’pianos de S. Thome, is like- wise addressed to the General. The endorsement, in the author’s writing, at the end of the document is: “ Informa- zt concerning some Christianities of India. To be seen by our Father General.” ie a cher Monserrate is the author of Mongolicae Legationis Commentarius (1590-91), which we published for the Asiatic ied of Bengal,” and of a Relagtio do Equebar (1582), which ! in 1921 (July in 1922 Ss Herald of India (3 Portuguese Church I have published in The Catholic Street, Calcutta), tentative y Ww articles ona sree fi Prob bie, seme finds from lapo ote thro new light on the question of the traditional apostolate a raged el on a second series of articles one with = embrace uestions regarding the same problem t accounts of 350 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVITI, we published for the same Society.’ We need not therefore enlarge on his career or on his merits. Those who have read his writings on Akbar will find him not less painstaking in Thomas Christians is as valuable as all his other writings. Father Monserrate’s writing in this document is a very microscopic one. The whole Spanish text which we a here fits in 2§ of his pages (23 centim. x 153 centim.); vet. wrote so clearly that, in spite of my very limited shawl of Spanish, I have had but little difficulty in deciphering him ealerebis? Evén the more diminutive writing added between the lines or running down the margins yields its mysteries to the unaided eye. For want of books I cannot ee annotate this bin oy ot as fully as I might have wished. I trust, however, that Mon serrate’s description of customs will "be found on the whole fairly accurate. Itis the more valuable as it is one of the earli- est of its kind for Goa and its neighbourhood ; and we cannot but regret again that three MS. volumes by Monserrate are lost or in hiding, viz. his book on the geography, natural history, customs and antiquities of India, his similar volume on Arabia, and his account of his captivity i in Arabia I publish the Spanish text as I find it, with the exception that I punctuate it more copiously, use more capitals, and divide it into paragraphs. Darjeeling, 8t. Joseph’s College, 18th June, 1922. We have translated and published the whole of that important volume on the first Jesuit Mission at Akbar’s Court (1580-1583) in ae Catholic Herald of India, a weekly paper, a in 1920-21. mary! eeerehink it in book-form, because we hav. _ here the — the ns to annotate it as it deserves, and bank a large n of su subsidiary materials of the same period ought to re agora pail i "Oh J. and Proc. A.S.B., 1912, pp. 185-221 ; title : ‘<‘ Father A. Monserrate’s prcarte of Akbar (26th Nov. , 1582).” \ 1922.) [ Fol. 151v.] I a abeae et delalsla y Xpiandad de Salsete. La Isla de Salsete esta a la p® del Sul, saliendo de la varra de Goa. Confina por vna p* con tierras del Hydalcan, y por otra con la mar. las cierto lugar con su escriuano, y alli, como en conseso, asien- tan lo q’ se a de hazer y es necess® p* el bien publico » p* arecadar el fuero y renda' de aoe (7) re Ss o) M Qu @ P) D oO =] cr ~ Q. io) i uano vn grito como pregonero en almoneda (y esto llaman nemo), q’ es comti consentim® de todos; y si vno solo faltare V no le paresciere bien, no se puede effectuar nada: y de lo se asienta solam® da fee el escriuano, sin firmarse ninguno 1 First: renta. Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Salsete, etc. 351 (Fol. 15 1v:) JESUS. Information on the Island and Christianity of Salsete The Island of Salsete is on the South side as one comes out of the bar of Goa. On one side it borders on lands of the Hydalcan; on the other, on the sea. It is 6 leagues in length and two in breadth. This island yields to the king ,000 pardaos It has 66 aldeas [villages], which are ed to 12,' which are ei ones who alone govern the whole island and the whole of the Conchan,in this manner : two men from each of these 12 aldeas assemble in a cer- tain place with their saber eaile. eting. patito of When they vied igelied iia has to be done, the scrivener like a crier at e should eal. and he should not approve of it, nothing can be done; and the scrivener alone four, on WwW we often eady commented in connection with the 12 Bhuiyas of } For other ex Jes not noticed by before, . Yule, Marco London, J. Murray, 1874, I. Polo 417, II. 137, 420. 2 The king of Portugal. 352 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, dellos, aunq’ sea en ‘cosas im- siempre se le da aquello, ora las rte rendan mucho ora Gancares.! El rey tiene el comun senorio y su_ renta cierta.* Tiené en cada aldea todos los officios con sus orden- arios . p" lauar ropa, garbear, ferrero, &c. Es esta isla muy fresca saludable v fertil de ‘manteni- ! Here oe Qancares ; else- where: Ganca 2 Later addition. testifies to what is settled, one of th affixi i ed in such a way that that amount is always given him, whether the lands yield much or little. And if an aldea was lost and had no harvest, the others pay for it ; and, if any- thing remains over, it is divid- ed am the same. The doiminton and administration of this island is in the hands they have all the occupations, and their menials, to wash clothes. to remove refuse,” a blacksmith, ete This island is very fresh, healthy, and rich in foodstuffs, game, fountains, tanks, etc. There is much variety of there are very fresh palm and arequa gar ardens, and pepper, and vetre (betre, betel) which they use and eat the whole day. There were in this island at the time when it Ea se r an interesting account of the Island of Salsete, its first Chris- tians and the ‘Gancar Chamber,’ see Father Francisco de So Oriente Conquistado, 2° ed., Parte I, gti ae 1881, Cong. 1, Div. 2, §§ 55-61 2 We should expect our scaven- gers to be mentioned touts with our washermen. Hence, thought Spanish dictionaries nae slate co bear by ‘to bind sheaves’, I trans- late as above. See the origin of the English words Ts garble in. The Oxjord Dictionary AS i) Ry ek eat 1922.| Father A. Monserratie, oe tiles 100000 mill — y ‘po q’ ceremonias gentilicas. Ay entre estos gentiles dina castas, mas todas se assi en ceremonias como en ! Later addition. S.J., on Salseie, ete, 353 to gentiles 100000 thousand inhabitants,' and there was that number all the time when they were allowed to have their pagodes and gentile cere- monies. There. are castes among sie on Se ies they are all reducible to three: Ba- neanes,’ Vaissa,’® Quetri,* Bra- menes, Chases: 5 Chaudaris,® Corumbis,’ Faraces. And these castes differ much among themselves both in ceremonies, 1 hata Wiscaciite | Seam realy mean 100,000 thou 100,000,000 ; but only 100. 000. The island of Salsete was pens 6 -degagose more than 30 pagodes each, was only 3000 i in 1579. Cf. in 2A Gujarati plural, ‘ vaniyan (merchants). Cf. er ss on Da si o L . 94, 3 Vaisya. Cf. i I. ‘7. + Ksatriya. Cf. Dalgado, LI, 5 ‘Chararo a} be akin to Chardo, of the cas ; Dalgado, I. 268. Mgr. Dalgado says that many in a the word hi ied op. ctt., a ed., Parte I, Conq. 1, 2, §6 6A aieteiies isa toddy-drawer (Mahr. : cha haudhari). Cf. Dal- TA re oeuaibil is a §udra culti- aise (from the Konkani and Mah- 354 costumbres y pagodes. Nose comunican entre si ni tiené parentesco *ni alguno a de ser mas q p® ni tener otro officio!; ni com nos con otros. Solam® en casa de Bramenes, q’ se llaman Botos, no comen pesca ado * ni carne; y estos, aung’ tienen nq 1 discurso de su vida tiené tditae las castas diuersas ceremonias, | Later ad adit on, Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (N.S., XVIII, and customs, and pagodes.! They do not communicate with one another or establish relationship by marriage ; and no one has to be greater than his father or follow any other the house of Bramenes may all eat, because they are the most honourable. The Bra- menes form the chief caste: they are the whitest, are well- formed, talented, clever, es- and for commerce, and indus- trious in makin money. Among the Bramenes there are two castes: one who eat flesh and fish, though not see flesh and por rk. These are like the administrators of the whole of the Conchan. There are other Bramenes, called Botos,* who eat neither fish nor flesh, and, although these have the same and performing all the gentile t others : est veneration by all the gen- tiles. They are great enemies of the Christians. And, albeit all the castes have different ceremonies in the course of 1 a a, uses a word pagode for an idol- tec at or he seems to mean the idol itse 2 Boto (Konkani: bhat; Sar- skrt; bhatta): a Hinds priest, a bedi rned Brahmana. . Dalgado, 14 Ee a es a 1922.] Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Saléete, etc. 355 bastara dezir maya p prias de los Bramen : Logo como nasce algun nifio Bramene, luego mandan lla- guardan escrito!; vy el Boto conforme la estrella le pone nombre; y si acierta de nas- cer en vna estrella q’ llaman mala, echan fuera de casa la quedare en casa q’ a de morir su padre y madre. Despuesde nascida la creatura, velan sobre a le hazen ciertas cere- ollas, &c.; y lauan a la crea- tura y a st madre, y todos se Ser en casa, y con aquellas cere- ! Thave iissitated between ocuto (? for oculto), secreto, and escrito. Writing indistinct at the second fold of the page. poe life, it will be sufficient speak of some anon are pci to the Bramen a Bramene pars is under what sign i was born, the vicissitudes of its life, manner n and whatever he answers they keep in writing. And the Bo- to gives it a name according under a star which they call unlucky, they cast the baby outside or give it to another person to bring up: for they believe that, should it remain in the house, his father and mother will die. After the birth of the child, they keep watch over it during six full days against the witches, and, on the 6th day, they perform for it certian ceremonies which l ot @ < ie) 2 rn) S ° 5 co 4 nm baby and its mother; and all dress neatly, and they cook ‘ood with new fire, a and say that, all the days before, a were unclean and s cause the woman gave bch within the house, and with | Sety. Cf. ‘qageas” TE. * 300. From the Konkani and Mabra _ sathi or sate? ; Saruskrt 7easthi (6t day). 356 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S , XVIII, monias quedan otra uez lim- pios, y aquel dia ponen al nifio en la cuna con ciertas cere- monias, y le ponen otro nom- bre, como quiere su padre. los gentiles desta- Com tierra tengan p* si q’ la alma del hombre despues q’ muere ellos uiuen en este error, dizen q quando vn nifio Bramen nasce, hasta q’ le echan la lifia, q’ son ciertos hilos, la- qual le ponen al .7. afiooa los onze afios, dizen q’ no es Branien, porq no saben cuya fue aquel alma qn® estuuo en nifio porg’, como es cosa de ? religion, dizen q’ a menester vso de razon. E] modo q’ tienen de dar esta lifia es este. Primero, preguntan al Boto del dia bueno o malo p* darsela (porq’ en todas sus cosas no hazen nada sin preguntar esto a sus Botos, pagodes, o hechizeros) ; y sabido del dia, mandan Ila- monias, haziendo muchas hogueras, al rededor de las y los mandam* q’ ha de guar- these ceremonies they are they give it another name at its father’s choice. The gentiles of this country hold that the soul of man passes after death into the bodies of all the animals, and lastly into that of the cow, not a Bramen until they give it the line (which are certain whose was the soul when it was in this world. And with this line, which they put round its neck and under its arm. it be- comes a Bramen. They do not give it him, when a child, because, as it is a matter of religion, they say that the use of reason is required. The manner observed in giving this line is as follows. First, they inquire from the Boto about the lucky or un- they do nothing without con- sulting about this their Botos, pagodes, or sorcerers. e they know the day, they call for many Bctos, who together make certain ceremonies ; they kindle many fires, around which they keep with the child, which is naked and recite on it tos teach, and _ the} give it the law in which it has 1922. ] Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Salsete, ete. 357 dar, y como ade huir de to- pedir a N.S. q’ sola la ley de los Bramenes sea aleuantada y todas las otras sean extin- vez a de dezir aquella oracion ciento y ocho vezes. La lifia del cuello no la tiran, ni pue- den comer ni beber sin ella. acaban de aprender la ora cion. Est pedir a Dios q’ la ley de los X’pianos sea destruida y la de los Bramenes onrrada y ale- uantada. to live, and the command- ments which it must observe, and how it must shun all the castes, chiefly that of the Christians, and that they must not have dealings with tem, and must ask of Our Lord that the law of the Bramenes may alone flourish and all the others may be extinguished. With these words, they put around its neck the line, con- sisting of three ‘threads of white thread, and another line aroun its waist, in honour of the god Bramaa, Vistu, ! and Maessu,* who are their god, of whom they say - and each time he must say that prayer one hundred and eight times. They do not take off the line round their Ce. Delgado, LL: 10 iva. Cf. Dalgado, 11. 1V. se Ajcurious spelling for ‘ Sarb- skrt.’—The mewhat crude de- scription of the prayer must be a reference to the Gayatri. 358 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Quando se casan los Bra- menes, se hazen tambien mu- d ‘ santas. La forma de_ su casam°® consiste en poner el marido vn poco de aroz crudo misturado con alegria en la. frente de la muger v la muger en la del hombre y con esto quedan casados, y todas y si se ajuntan, pierden la casta q’ es cosa entre ellos de grande pena, y q’ les cuesta mucho tornar a resceberlos en generales a todos los q’ an de ir, en los quales, por muchas iguerias q’ aja, todas se an de poner delante a cada vno por si, antes q’ comiencen a co- mer, y puestas, el Boto haze sus ceremonias, y el p® del oy noiue, y dan lic" p* comer. When the Bramenes marry, many ceremonies are als served, which cannot ES written down, J are holy. The form! of their marriage consists in that the ‘alegria.’* Therewith they are married, and al) the other ceremonies serve as ornament, the ceremonies lasting five days, during which, although they sleep in the same be they must keep chastity ; and, if they have intercourse, they monies to be received back in- to it. [Fol. 152r|] The Bo- tos make all these ceremonies general ee for all those who have to take part. In these banquets, all the viands, however many, must be set in front of each one before they r the father of the bridegroom, and thev give leave to eat. d ‘form’ seems to be used in the Sicha taal me ‘ ‘ form’ pp to ‘ matter d i r sent and wees the contra 2 (Bo Hiecaas orienta é, 5 ade of sesamum and hone. d gu ew ed., Par (18177?). The ages co might also mean ede: not in our context. ale * but oe ee ec ini i 1922. | Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Salsete, etc. 359 Tambien qn* el Bramen muere se hazen muchas ce- remonias. Primeram® estando tencia q’ de algunas vacas de limosna : * y a de morir con tener la mano en vn rabo de vaca, p" entrar luego su alma en la vaca y en ella ir p* su paraiso ! ; y si tiene algun hijo 0 hijos con lia, se rapan to- dos estando a los pies del es- o ae = a @ 09 3 hed 4) a. 5 oO Lag ° Mow iy oO bg om ra) oS gq 2 mer con fuego nueuo, y el hijo mas viejo de ay a doze dias a 9 por miedo q’ tienen no les venga algun mal por p® del de- monio. Siel q’ muere tiene muger, vnas vezes se determina la muger de quemarse con el ; ! Later addition. Also, when a Bramen dies many ceremonies are observed, First, when he is about to die, he calls for some Botos, and makes before them.a general confession of the sins which he wishes to confess, and the Boto tells him as a penance to give some cows in alms; and he must die while holding in his hand a cow’s tail, in order that his soul may enter the shave themselves, standing at the feet of their father or mother; and, when he is in a new sheet; and so they carry it to the pyre; and, fire, and, before setting fire to it, he calls three times on the dead person to see whether he is dead or alive. When the m his father died, and he covers himself with a wet sheet ; and 12th day, he feeds many Bramenes and [ performs] > eremonies, all of sons an Beg demon should bring any ev! upon them. If the dying person has a 0 oo wife, she at times decides t 360 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVIII, otras no, qn®° tiene muchos hij fi dize mill palabras amorosas hablando con su marido, re- latando los bienes q’ le hizo en su vida, los gustos y pasa- de dexar ir solo a la otra vida, sino q’lo a deacompanhar. Y assi hazen vn grande poco con grande fuego, y con mu- chas fiestas y canciones de vestida y arreado [sic] de todo [sic] la Como ella se echa en la foguera, o la echan algunos deuotos y honrrados . parientes, q’ tienen esto por grande onrra, cargan sobre ella infinito azeite, p* q’ se , y la guardan p* por los joes embiarla a ! Later addition. resolves to burn herself toge- anoints este with oil, which is —o sign that she wishes to die ; duns says a thousand and she says that accordingly she must not let him go alone to the next life, but must accompany him. And _ 80, they make a big pit with a great fire; and, amid many rejoicings and songs in honour of their pagodes, she must stupefies ; and, ing Pherself into the fire, ais gives to all those who accom- pany her vetre to eat. While she throws herself into the fire, or some devout and upright relatives cast her in, consider- ing this a great honour, a one hon who burnt herself there. And, three days after the burning, they take her ashes and keep them to send by the joses! t to 1 Jogis. Sa °! aanae a tek dae ia ee ea ey eee | ohh tenn oe OO 1922.] Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Salsete, ete. 361 echar en el rio Ganges, como trazen cada afio a todas las grande deuocion.! Quando se va a quemar leua en la mafio vn limon o vn peine vy dize q’, p* q’ vea® q’ va a gozar de la otra vida, q’ despues de muerta y quemada hallaron el limon fresco y el es - cierto, el demonio no p* as leuar al infierno mas de presa Si Ja muger es vieja y tiene hijos * y no se quiere quemar, va se a los pies de su marido muerto, y alli se rapa, y se despoja de todas sus joias p® hunca mas gozar de cosa de pasat’po deste ERED Si so- lam® eran desposados, que- dando ella praia a se lue- go de rapar, y no a de vestir mas paiio lauado ni poner joia ningunas ni ver regozijos. Son todos estos gentiles da- dos a supersticiones y ague- tos. Tien@ grande veneracion a las ma de capelo, y a estas pintan en sus pagodes. Nada an de comencar sin res- puesta del ministro del pago- 1 Later addition. 2 Vean (?) 3 First : filhos. the Ganges and throw them - into the river; indeed, every year, they carry to the Ganges the ashes of all burnt corpses, the pilgrimage to that river being one of great devotion. When the wife goes to burn herself. she carries in her hand a lemon or a comb, and she says that, in order that they may see that she goes to en- joy the next life, they will, after she is dead and burnt, find the lemon fresh and the re times uses this trick to take them [these women] to hell the sooner If the woman is old and has children and does not wish to burn herself. she goes to the feet of her dead husband, sbaves herself there, ei di- oil wh ust main. married, shaves herself, aid she must never aga ear main a widow, and may go to any foativities or w it- ness rejoicings. All these gentiles are much itions and e- ave much V odes. They must aos nothing without an answer from the minister of the pago- : | Cobra de capello, Naja tripu- dians. 362 Journal of the Asiatic Sociely of Bengal. de, p* loqual lleuan vnas rosas, y mojadas peganlas al pagode, y estan postrados y muy de uotos esperando su ventura, org’ si caen prim® las del lado derecho, tienen por cierto ¢’ todo les sucedera bien ; y si caen primero las del isquierdo, graja, o si algun perro ladro a su puerta, o si cayo algun gu- sano en su cabeca, &c.; v p* q’ el pagode les quiera respon- der offrencele gallos muertos, oe arroz, cabrones, carne- ; y todo esto es p* los jo- ~ hombres no lo leudtarian.! Y esto mismo hazen al t po de sembrar, y la valados de sus heredades q estan junto de la mar, porq’ cuydan q’, qn“° el mar anda leuantado, es la ira de dios q’ gouierna aquella parte. ! Later addition. [N.S., XVIII, de; for this they bring some roses, and, after wetting them, stick them to the pagode, and they lie prostrate and very devout. waiting tor their luck ; for if those of the right side fall first, they consider it certain that all will go well with them; and if those of the left fall first, they under- take nothing.' The same when, going out of doors, they hear the croaking of a crow, ora dog barked at the door, or a worm fell on their head, c goats, and sheep, and all re is for the jogis, who are the ministers [the pagode] certain slippers, ., sandals, because they said that the whole night he went about fighting the other gods to protect his people, holding a stone so big that 20 men would not be able to lift est ies same they do at the of sowing, and they sprints the blood of these ani- mals, as something holy, in the enclosures of their fields which. are near the sea, because they think that, when the sea is stormy, it is the — of god, who rules that part. | Mgr. Dalgado has pr following in — sontiec tion hoto seo as flores. o munidades de Goa, p 1922 | Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Salsete, etc. 363 Eran mucho dados a pago- des, y cada casta tiene sus distinctos pagodes, tanto q’ auia en esta isla .360., y cada truir los palmares, &c. ; y assi le hazen iglesias en la figura q les aparece, q’ es vna com- Sh ie] 2 wy @ 5 ° ae bar] ve] o Qu. ® ee ) m 5 0g ) Qu ® Te n los pagodes destas, al ieledet dellos, se dedican muchas mugeres p*q’ vsen del- las quantos quisieren. * Bes pagode de mill esclauos y e marido, si se recogia al pa- gode por 2 ge no podia cobras is a ma 1 Lanter addition. 2 Later addition. They were much given to pagodes, and each caste has its separate pagodes, so much so that there were 360 in this island, each with its separate revenues, which were spent on the day of its feast, and on the ministers serving the pa- gode, and on the _ public women and danceresses who lived in the pagode for all y had gods of war, of the sowing season, of fortune, of life, of death, and above all the devil- god, whom they serve and reverence most, and they call invoke him as such, for he is feared, and they are people who are much swayed by fear and interest. and they think that he will burn their rice and destroy shape in which he appears to them. Indeed, it is a great pity to see how great a domi- nion the demon has over those them [the pagodes], many women dedicate themselves to be used by as many as like. And there was a pagode of one thousand slaves and 500 de as a prostitute. 364 Journal of the Asiatic Sociely of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Ay en esta isla .6. iglesias, en las quales todas residian p*s de la Comp* occupandose en la conuersion de tanta gen- tilidad, y auia ya cerca de 10000 X’paos y mill cathe- cumenos ; mas con la guerra q’ v n Goa con el Hydal- can 2a afio de 71 y con la q’ agora vbo por causa de Dabul y del aleuantam’ de los gen- q el Visorey Don Ant?® el ano de 66. mando derriuar y applicar las rentas a las iglesias, y el Concilio primero p‘uincial de Goa asento q’ se les quitasé todas las ceremonias de sus ca- y hazienda y parientes por guardar y conseruar la fee. There are in this island 6 Churches, in all of which there resided Fathers of the Com- pany, who laboured for the conversion of so vast a gentili- ty; and there were already about 10,000 Christians and one thousand catechumens ; but, owing to the war which there was with the Hydalcan in the year [15]71, and on account of the one waging now because of Dabul and the rebellion of the goatee they would not grant them pagodes and ceremonies, Vice- roy Don Antonio! having ordered to destroy them in the year [15]66 and to apply the revenues thereof to the Churches, and the first Pro- vincial Council of Goa * agreed that they should be forbidden all the ceremonies of their marriages and their anointing themselves with sandal—the ——- suffered some de- riment, and it was impossible z proceed with the work of conversion ; but all the Chris- tians withdrew to Goa and its aldeas, wherein they gave much edification abandoning their country and property and relatives in order to keep and preserve their faith. 1 Don Antonio de Noronha, 9th cai left Lisbon, March 29, 1564: go noel Xavier, 8.J., mm: univers tod overnadores, , Imprensa Nacional, 191 17, p. 68. f 2 The first Provincial Council o Goa sat in 1567. eatin: eek cg Wee cliahlas e0 SL ee Fiat iin ited a 1922.] Father A. Monserrate, [Fol. 152v.] JHS. Informacion de la Isla de Cho- ran y la Isla de Diuar. Estas son dos islas pequenas q’ estan junto de Goa a la p® del norte, y no las diuide mas , . q vn rio. Destas no ay mas tancia; solam® q’ assi como Salsete se gouierna por aquel- los 24 de 12 aldeas, cada vna octrina en cada vna tiene mas 400. nifios, q’ a e ser Vv enos X’pianos ! Later addition. ® Later addition ; difficult to de- r. ciphe S.J., on Salsete, etc. 365 [ Fol. 152v.] JESUS. Information about the Island of Choran and the Island of There are two small Islands by a river. There is nothing to be said about them except what we said about Salsete : r the same, although there are always differences in so matters of little importance : only that, whereas Salsete is governed by the 24 from the 12 aldeas, each one of these! [is governed] by ten Gancares, nes. There must be in each of them three thousand ouls. there were in each more than 30 pagodes, wi much revenue. Now 3] the diligence and zeal of Vice- roy Don Constantino’, and the school of the doctrine ® in oa They are ministered to and taught solely by the Fathers of the Company.’ 1 Of these two islands. 2 Don Constantino de Braganga, 7th Viceroy: Jeft Lisbon, April 7, 1558; governed 3 years and8 days, Cf. Padre Manoel Xavier, S.J., op. it., p. 68. "3 bi the Christian Doctrine or techism. Oy ba the conversion of the people 366 Y en estas dos islas tiene la el re porq officiales de just* en sus pa- gam, &e Entre los pagedes q’ tenian era vno,* llamado Saptanato,! muy senalado y frequentado el dia de su fiesta, q’ era en la luna de Agosto, y concurrir muchos peregrinos de toda manera de gente, y la causa era q’ aquel dia echauan en el rio, q’ estaua junto al pagode, en cierta parte del Tio | donde h > vetre y fructas, lasquales el agua sor[ba] p*® dentro con la fuerca del agua, q’ entonces el demonio a rescebir aquella fructa, y por este recebim® le uchos, aisha del dé- monio, lo querian ir a ver, y se echauan en la fuerca del agua y desaparecia luego; y los demas pensauad q’ iba 1 Later ape 2 So +: ecuils — at the first fold + of the paper Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, And in these two islands them for their maintenance, and for this reason they {t the Fathers] are more quiet, since they have not to depend. on the officers of Justice for their payments, etc. Among the pagodes which they famous one, called to!; it was frequented on the day of its feast, which fell in ey threw into the river, which is near e pagode, where [it] makes...... , vetre, and fruits, which the river swallowed up owing to the force of the water, which is greater then, as it is winter; and, to celebrate this accept- ivity offered to him great presents. appea immediately, the rent thought that they se Choréo by the Jesuit Fathers. Oriente Conquista or oe 2a ea: Parte I, Cong. 1, Div. 2, a 40, 41, 42. On the save the people of Divar, ., Parte I, Conq. 1, Div. 2, § - 1 Father Monserrate ope t Saptanato and other Hindi —_ uae ~ nath in his os Legat Com See p- ompare a ‘i what he os about sati (p. 374), and Krisna’s nine aon (p. 587)- 1922.) eerecho al paraiso. Y como, on la venida de los Portu- dice y padres, les quemasen todos sus pagodes, por ser este del rio, q’ es tierra de Moros, *le | hizieron e atte otra casa,* y lleuaron las reliquias q’ pudieron,? y le hazen misma fiesta, y tienen sus la- uatorios, &e. Van se todos los X’pianos destas dos islas acomodando mucho en todas las cosas, como los X’pianos viejos, en acudir a la iglesia, predicacion, confession, comunion, enter- ayudan muy biena el estado de la India en la guerra, porq’ los de Salsete sustentaron mucho t’po en pie su tierra contra los aleuantados ; y los de Choran en t’po de la guerra de 71 se defendieron 2 mataron _— ages? ft entraron en la ellos solos sin Saticene. pee su tierra 29 Perhaps; ce for se, 2 Later addition. Father A. Monserrate, S.J., on Salsete, etc. 367 went straight to paradise.! And since, at the arrival of [? for themselves other houses | and took what relics they could, and they celebrate the same feast in his honour and have their baths, ete. All the Christians of these two islands conform religiously to all the things of the faith like the old Christians, of Choran, during {15]71, defended themselves and. killed many Moors who came into sa ‘sland and now they alone, without the Portuguese, defend their See Oriente Cong , Parte I, Geng. 1, Div. 7s, $50, he about a great image in t Island of Divar. ‘‘ Divar was as nerated by the gentio Bramanes bank pero the place where 368 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |N.S., XVIII, de los Moros, a hazen asaltos con animo en tierra firme, vy les van a su sie a quemar y destruir los pagodes, q’ por esta causa se an metido los Mouros por la tierra adentro ; Pace *s< G.* on Di° de Meneses les mando dar se n d fuesen fauorecidos y_honr- dignidades Visoreyes, vy breuem® toda la Seatilidad reducida, con q’ esta mucho mas segura y rica la India. Informacion de las Malucas. Malueas son infinitas Morotai; y de 150, como Morotia, y otras pequenas de .4., como Ternate, y 20. como Amboino, Tidor, Oliazer, Nu- zelao, Athua, Ouma, Abouro. Nombro estas porq’ en to- A Ree letter ; probabl for Gobernador Sonn fe or 3 words illegible at th o of the paper. Z es * Y trinta appears to be effaced. country against the Moors, Christians were favoured and honoured....with dignities and offices by the Viceroys, fidalgos, and eee as His Highness comman the Christianity would qremie in- crease, an is Highness that India is safer and richer. Information about the Malucas. The Malucas consist of an infinite number of eae ong them (and thirty ?) leagues big, as 0, as Morotia ; as Amboino, Tidor, Oliazer, Nuzelad, Athua, OQuma, an bouro. 2 I name these, be- 1 Don Diogo de Menezes, Gitonions governed 9 months (el Nov., 1577-22 Aug., 1578), Cf Padre Manoel Xavier, 8.J.,; 3, Div 7, Cocaniaté 3 is devoted to the Mission of the Molucas. I do not 1922.] Father A. Monserrate S.J., on Salsete etc. 369 das estas auia oe east sin otras muchas q’ no estan descubiertas ni he noticia de n’ra s* fee. uria en to- das estas islas mas de 70000 ron todo esta quasi destruido, y los X’pianos se tornaron os saluo en Amboino, ad- onde ay algunos Portugueses y algunos p* de los n’ros, y aura 20000 X’pads. Endorsement (Fol. Jhs. Para ver n’ro cause there was Christianity in all these, not counting many others which are not discovered and have no knowledge of our holy faith. n all these islands there m of ours, and there must be 20,000 Chiniastind: find there the three other islands liazer, Nuzeléo, Abouro; but I t th correctly. I have a doubt about cee = may perhaps be rea s Dha 152 r); A/Do.! Informaciones de algunas X’piandades de la India. P.G. 1 These letters on two different lines seem to indicate that encores was going to write the address but left it unwritten. would mean: #0; Do woul _ from the; perhaps, ‘ come ther do Padre Ant°® Monserrate ’’ was to [The End. 25. Father A. Monserrate, S.J. and Capt. F. Wilford. A note by tHE Rev. H. Hosten, S.J. In Asiatick Researches, Vol. IX (Calcutta, 1807), among the errata and addenda, I find that the following passage, which should have been added to p. 81, line 18, ie. at the end of Wilford’s essay on Anu-Gangam, or the Gangetic Provinces, and more particularly of Magadha, contains a reference to Monserrate which T overlooked in my edition of Monserrate’s Mongolicae Legationis Commentarius (Memoirs A.S.B., Vol. 11, No. 9). It should have been inserted there at p. 695, after my fifth quotation from Wilford’s writings. The new passage runs thus :— “The Magas in Bengal are mentioned by Pliny under the name of Macca-Calingas. It appears from the context that the upper part of the Bay of Bengal was divided into three parts, called in general Calinga, or the sea-shore in Sanscrit, from its abounding with creeks. West Calinga extended from the river of Cuttaca! to the western mouth of the Ganges.’ In an island of the Ganges, amplae magnitudinis, of very great magnitude. and of course the Delta, was a single nation called Modo-Galica and Modo-Galenca, from the Sanscrit Madhya-Calinga, or mid- dle Calinga: then came the Macco-Calingas, or the Magas of Chittigong,’ from Maga-Calinga. The Magas or Mugs main- tained themselves as an independent tribe in the Delta for a long time ; and they were at last expelled by the Mosul and the Rajas of Tipera, about the beginning of the 5 oe century, as mentioned by P. Monserrat. Through the wed Empire, Arracan and in Chittigong the Priests ouly oF ca = Magas according to Col. Symes: butin Chittigong rhe cate countries, the name of Muga is also attributed to the w tribe.”’ Wi : Fr, Monserrate’s name : Wilford adds the following note to Fr Igo dicuntur Mogi, “*Gens vero Modo-Galica, ii qui vu tivumpulsi Arracani consistunt. re ion.”’ Mongolica, vol. the Ist, p. 19., a manuscript in my possession. q o (see Asiatick Researches, vol XIV, 1822, p. 08; A7N the Ancient Geography of India). There Wilford said in no ciate ene = 3 o ‘ ' Cuttack. 2 The Hugli. Sic 372 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, about the book of Monserrate which he quoted: ‘In an autograph MS. of the author in my possession. The Padre wrote about the year 1590, in the prison of Senna in Arabia.” And I had to remark, what I have to remark also on the new passage quoted above, that there is no parallel passage in the MS. of Mongolicae Legationis Commentarius which I have edited. Wilford said again (Asiatick Researches, 1X, 1807, p. 230 n. 1): “The original MSS. of Monserrate’s travels is in my posses- sion,”’ where the singular verh seemed to show that by ‘ MSS.’ he meant ‘ MS.’ In the new passage now found Wilford gives the title of the book as De legatione Mongolica. lt is the only time that he does so. He adds that the passage he quotes is in the first volume of Monserrate’s work. This shows that he had at least two volumes of Monserrate’s in kis possession, both o which seem to have been entitled De legatione Mongolica. Now, in his preface to the MS. edited by me, Monserrate refers to four volumes written by himself. One volume con- tained the history of the first Jesuit Mission to Akbar’s Court; that it was fair-written in prison at Senaa in Arabia in 1590, be- tween October 21 and December 11. Yet, it too became geographical notes in Wilford’s first MS. volume had already been omitted from my MS. and east into a separate volume. It follows that Wilford’s two volumes represent an earlier ices ugk CE Pam RC a. So ai a 1922.] Fr. A. Monserrate, S.J. and Capt. F. Wilford. 373 redaction, in which the history of the Mission was mixed up with notes on the geography and natural history of India. That being so, Wilford’s two volumes are apparently the work of which Monserrate says in the MS. which I edited . “IT completed this Commentary at Eynan in Arabia on the feast of St. Anthony of Padua, in the month of June of the year 1590,” ie. June 13, 1590. That MS. was taken from him by the Turks, but was restored to him at Senaa on the feast of December 11, 1590, must have been made from it. That earlier copy was naturally the rough draught which, on his being sent to Ethiopia in 1588, followed him from India to Arabia. A summary of the diary which he kept most faithfully from his departure to the Moghul Court (1579) up to his re- turn to Goa in 1582, it now seems from Wilford’s new quota- tion that it comprised two volumes in which the history of the Mission was interspersed with disquisitions on Indian geography and natural history : Wilford must have had at his disposal a magnificent library, containing even a fine collection of theological books. I find him quoting Cardinal Bellarmine and Cornelius @ Lapide (As. Researches, XI, 61), which is not a little surprising for such a place as Benares, where he resided from 1788 to 1822 the year of his death. Where had he obtained his marvellous library from, including scarce Jesuit MSS , and rare old a and Greek books on travels and geograp fe . h After T had edited Mongolicae Legationis Commentarius, : : Rev. W. K. Firminger, who had discovered the MS. in the St. Paul’s Cathedral Library, Calcutta, suggested in B b & Present that, as the library mark of the MS. appeared "3 a of the same kind as those of a number of theological aye 7 the St. Paul’s Cathedral Library, all these books must hie come to Calcutta on the same occasion. Now, "ib = one: the ee MS. in the St. Paul’s Segoe a sie 2 oH te Metcalfe Hall Collection, whence it went Bs: Games Library, Calcutta, and from there to the St. Library. : . . st l’s Cathedral To clear up this point. I paid a visit to St. Pau on February i 1992, and inspected, ios the help of a MS. catalogue made by the Rev. W. K. Ae Fd colne from Fort William College. I found library marks of the XVI. L. 127. in che Moumureate MS., a Metca e Hall ee aac none of the same type as I.P. 46. There was no indica ae eat that any of these books had belonged to Wilford oa a sora from the Jesuit College of Agra or of Goa. I fou os . MS. of Monserrate’s, and the Mongolicae Legatioms Com 374 Journal of the Asiatic Soc of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.) tarius MS., which I have edited, was not entered in the new type-written catalogue. To return to the new quotation from Monserrate which we have discovered in Wilford, I believe that Wilford is correct in identifying Monserrate’s Tybreri or Tybrerae with the people of Tippera. I do not know, however, what river corresponds to the river of Balsar. If Wilford is right in identifying Modo- Galica or Modo-Galenca with Madhya-Kalinga or the Middle Kalinga, the derivation of Cock Island, or Cock’s Island, Coxe Island, now merged with Dog’s Island into Saugor Island at the mouth of the Hugli, would be thrown a great deal further back than Ilha de Gale, Ilha de Gallo, Ilha de Galinha. In his (Mem. A.S.B., Vol. III, No. 9, at the end) Father Monserrate calls it Gallorum Insula, which would indeed corre- spond to Cock’s Island, whereas Ilha de Galinha would mean Hen’s Island. Ilha de Galinha would, however, have been a corruption natural to the Portuguese for an island inhabited by the Modo-Galica or Modo-Galenca. And so, the derivation sought by Sir R. C. Temple (Cf. Thomas Bowrey’s Geographical Account of Countries round the Bay of Bengal, 1669-1679, p. 210 n.) in Gallinhas del Mar,! a sobriquet for the timorous mixed off- spring of the Portuguese in India, would appear far-fetched. Besides, the sobriquet must be later in date than the first Portuguese name for Cock’s Island. Goethal’s Indian Library, St. Xavier's College, Calcutta. January 27, 1922. | Del is not the usual possessive case of the definite article in Portuguese. PIONS 26. An Old Gypsy-Darwish Jargon. By W. Ivanow. In my previous papers on the language of the Persian gypsies! { mentioned the fact that many idioms, which may be regarded as nowadays quite indispensable to the vocabulary of the gypsy patois in Persia, are frequently met with in the jargonic codes used by wandering darwishes, some classes of craftsmen, and especially by thieves, professional beggars. etc., in that country. The composition of these jargons, as already shown by me (J.A.S.B., 1920, p. 284), is invariably synthetic. The bulk of such patois consists usually of the local dialect of the majority of the population in the etymologically untraceable abdal (a very old word), galandar of the Mongol invasion), kashkit ee Alyn ae | Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. (n.s-) X, PP- 439-455 (1914) and XVI, pp. 281-291 (1920). 376 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, Still many more appear in more modern periods: mantishakh, garza, gulbang, palahang, Some years ago, craiee mesidaictatiy. I came across an inter- sting document, particularly valuable in its bearing on these didn It was a fragment of a secret code of a religious community which fouciihed at least 400 years ago, probably much earlier. Although only about one hundred words could be extracted from the fragment for examination, many idioms are found there which can be at once recognised as favourite expressions of the present-day gypsies in Persia. THe MANUSCRIPT Several years ago, a Manuscript was offered to me for purchase at Qarshi, in Bukhara. It was a volume of some two hundred folios, in quario, containing an interesting collection of philosophic and Sufic treatises, mostly rare, apparently selected by a man of learning and of discriminating taste in these matters.' Unfortunately I did not succeed in my endeavours to purchase this interesting volume. The owner, by some obscure process of reasoning had come to the conclusion that the MS. was nothing less than an autograph of Avicenna himself, several of whose treatises were included in it. For this reason he demanded a really fantastic price, and it was waste of time to argue with him regarding the falsity of his pretensions. All I could obtain was his consent to take the precious book on loan for one evening for a closer examination. The copy possessed all the typical features of manuscripts dating from the end of the 1 It epee in mpage to short Lain iio (1) A short treatise by 7 Farabi (d. A.H./950 oe (2) Several small works of Abia ‘Ali Sin (Avicenna) ‘a. =< A.H. ATA D.). The treatises in duesiot are ‘hiciee ned by Brockelmann, Gesch. d. Ar. Lit., I, p. 455, Nos. 24, 37 and extremist shade, i.e.: (5) A letter by ‘Aynu’l-Qudat § Hamadaet (oroste 533 A.H./1139 A.D.) ; oe A Treatise by Shihabu’d-Din Mouse: SurAs Magqtil (executed 587 A.H./1191 A.D.), see Brock., ibid., 438, called J al Alwahu’l-‘Imadiyya (rather rare); (7) The well-known eps by c ges of Mirsadu’l-‘ibad, d. a 650 A.H. fing A.D); (10) A version of Jawidan-khirad, Ghend > pions the works of al-Jahiz, on a supposed Pahlawi original attributed to ae (This version is quite different from that of on Kashi, which is in Persian, and not in Arabic, as is the neti in question). There rooties also many other interesting extracts and no Cn 1922.] An old Gypsy-Darwish Jargon. 377 Xe. A.H./XVIc. A.D. The paper, handwriting and general style suggested Indian influence. There were originally several dated colophons which probably contained also the scribe’s name, but all of them were effaced in a most primitive manner, obviously because of conflicting with the Avicenna-autograph theory. The handwriting from beginning to end seems to be the same. Thus, the age of the vocabulary can be taken to be at least 350 years—which is probably the minimal age of the tran- script. But there are good grounds for suggesting an earlier date: the calligraphic appearance of the copy, the even distribu- tion of the text and other peculiarities of the MS. make it very unlike the usual type of ‘jungs’ or ‘majmu‘as’ of similar kind. One may almost certainly regard it as a copy of an ear- lier album. On the other hand, all the treatises whose date can be ascertained, belong to a period not later than the end of the VIIlc. AH. Therefore it is by no means impossible that the vocabulary in question also belongs to the same time, and So may be over seven centuries old. Unfortunately there are no positive indications to support or to reject this suggestion. THE CHARACTER OF THE VOCABULARY. The fragment is placed on the margins of three pages. Originally it was probably complete, but there is a lacuna of several folios. Its heading (in gold letters) is lube ohs jl Ju which probably means: ‘the beginning of the book of the most parasitical beggars.’ The word ‘sds,’ according to Vullers (who gives only two instances, both from an early author, Sanai), means a kind of a parasitic insect, or worm, which attacks men and animals. It is obsolete now, as we as sdst, derived fromit. It is permissible to think that this un- kind term was applied to the individuals who perused the code, on account of their unattractive manner of stimulating public charity! ! The same name, in nasalised form, Sasi, is applied s—on known gypsy criminal tribes in the Punjab. They use two cereal css. of the usual Indian-gypsy origin, and the other a special vi Gite eed ir George Grierson, Linguistic Survey of India, a aa cole guages, 1922, pp. 49-70. 378 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, ideas cannot be reconstructed. Something is said about ‘ the language of those who call ‘Ali a God’ ( Jbha vt le ob) Further there are a few words about J'ufayliyan (parasites, uninvited guests) ; also about Sufis, and even Jews ( .fo,e> sie, the form used in Turkestan). The vocabulary which follows this is arranged probably under subjects. But the principle of classification was not followed strictly. The part of the vocabulary which still exists, contains some 400 expressions, but only about one hundred o them are legible. The general nature of the vocabulary suggests that: (1) it was intended to be perused in a country with a non-Arabic speaking population ; (2) the community which perused it was an organisation with pronounced religious or Sufic interests ; and (3) judging from the equivalents for proper names, was strictly Shi‘itic in its tendencies. Two names casually found may be of some use in future research as to the identity of the community. They are: Abu- Sa‘d (or Abu Sa‘id) with the code-surname ‘ishg (‘love’), and Abi’l-Qasim (Khalifa, ‘ the lieutenant,’ a term still much used by Persian darwishes and sectarians, who apply it to one of the various degrees of priests taking part in their secret rites). The selection of such seemingly unsuitable matters for a collection of treatises which could appeal only to the most educated and intellectual men of the time, may most probably be explained by its utility for controversial purposes. THE VocABULARY. The groups into which the vocabulary may be dissected are mentioned in the beginning of this paper and need not repeated. As it is impossible to arrive at a precise conclusion only their meaning in English and such references as are ne- cessary. ery few generalisations can be suggested on examination of the philological structure of the code. The suffixes used for modifications of words of familiar origin are the same as those nowadays in common use amongst Darwishes and G ypsies,—1.€. chiefly -@, -7, and the Persian diminutive suffixes -ak and -cha. There is a prefix of an obscure nature, b-r or p-r ( ps which seems to be used equally for privative as well as for possessivé formations. The ordinary Gypsy and Darwish device of to-day of using an Arabic word for a simple and common idea which is ordi- narily expressed by a Persian term, is very frequent here. 1922.] An old Gypsy-Darwish Jargon. 379 The same can be said of the cases of transposition of syllables, especially in connection with the liquida. Note.—The following abbreviations are used in the list: A. for Arabic; G.—Gypsy. G.I.—my paper in J.A.S.B., 1914, pp. 439-455 ; G. II another, ibid., 1920, pp. 281-291; met.— metaphorical ; P.—Persian; pr.—pre efix we —sufiix ; urkish ; D.—used nowadays in the jargon of the Darwishes of Persia ; lit. —literally. (4) Words still used by the gypsies in Persia. z>--&) good. This word, now sounding dakh, is a most com- mon gypsy and darwish jargonic term (cf. G. I, 449, G. II, 287). In the darwish speech it forms compound verbs with the help of «9,5 ens °(?)- G%) beard. Obviously connected with G. dagna (G. : I, 250), which is a ‘ general name’ (substantive as well as adjective) for everything connected with the mouth —the mouth itself, the lips, teeth, beard, etc. “io - 4; woman, wife. Now one of the most common G. a diminutive sf.) sas (or niddéw 2), with transposi- tion of syllables leentany nidéo (Southern Khorasan), ' nodo (Lori, Baluchistan Gypsy), etc. & gles -y~ Son, boy. Cf. G. 1, 454, sind used in Qain. lle - ;4j prayer. (A.). Among present day gypsies it is used for everything connected with religion. lids - <6 dog. (A.). Nowadays commonly used by darwishes ; ey gypsies use it also in the form of kalpik (cf. G. 1, 451). aS - 050 thief, brigand. Evidently the dots are misplaced and one must read ,Us, now spelt genaw, freely used by sypsies (cf. G. II, 287). aye) (2) - i camel. Porobably originally a ‘general name; ae domestic animals, the same as Qaini limar or limur hich (G. 1, 452) and Sirjant limru (or, easily, limuru), W generally ‘cattle.’ The liquida land r are easily interchangeable in gypsy dialects. of RE en Perey Sykes’s notice on ee he: language in the Journal ¢ Anthropological Society, vol. 25, —— Deny ag Sonne Bi Report ae Baluchistan, 1911, pp. 173 sq. 380 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, aiSle (?)- slo mother. It may be a mistake for aisle a very common Persian Gypsy word, pronounced makis, maqis maqitha, etc. (cf. G. I, 449 and 452). dye - oe eye. A very common term amongst darwishes and ypsies. cxweye - JU bread. Cf. G. II, 285. Alsoa very common Gypsy and darwish word. (6) Words of Arabic origin. lu! - Uel& poze “the chosen’ (initiated ?), apparently for slit sons. Sut (or Us! 2?) - x: father. Probably to be read Sy! , geni- tive of 45! ‘thy father.’ (ibs - 6% abdomen. (A. 5b: andsf.-@). D. ws - acl = courtesan 2 yaam - fyb ruffian. (Probably originally an allusion to a parti- cular person of this name). soe - —Sye a riding animal, ship. pglaa (ie. (jhe or lia) - cul true. (From A. (35). The form haqqani is extremely common amongst darwishes. aly - eS ear. (From A. (wl) and P. sf. & 7) : 2 - o bad, wicked. A., unchanged. Jaw - ive a Sunnite, lit. ‘light,’ perhaps ‘loose.’ oe - deo all. (Perhaps a bad ligature for ples entire, intact). 1S - éy)¢ lie, wrong. (A. ,% and jargonic sf. -@). tog - ast; ascetic, hermit. Sleo- spe aSufi. (A. Sise ‘one who mocks’?). Itis remark- ' able that the followers of the sect ‘Ali-ilabi use this name for one of the incarnations of the Deity, Sultan Sahak ; they insist on this orthography of this word . lke - 4oS neck. (A. sic and the same sf. -@). D. Lic - Sina cattle. The same formation. D. 4s - .l2o mouth. The same formation. D. Wyo - dwg: kiss. (A. X13), wise - Sis war. (2) Wl - Jo heart, stomach. The same formation. D. cls - Soil little, few. LL - lb; tongue, language. The same formation. D. le - oo man. 1922.] An old Gypsy-Darwish Jargon. 381 le - r f. 35v) is mentioned. u ‘Amr veh also apparently of the same time, an 2a sirit of Khorasan. His book referred to here is called 3! BI! Ssve (£. — It may be read also U!,b)! Sime ). 8. Abu Sa%d Kharraz, d. 285 A.H., a saint of very high repute (cf. f. 43v. so, polayy af oialf jf,d). ‘Attar (I, 40) ascribes to him no less than 400 works, but Ansari, in spite of is great veneration, had probably never seen any one of them, and mentions only the fact of his literary activity (f. 41, warila ), 9. Ibrahim b. Ahmad Khawwas, d. 291 A.H. (25% =~)° ¥ ‘if this date is correct,’ as Ansari remarks). His ‘ book * (f. 78, US ) is npr eae: and the Shaykh had seen it. 10. ‘Am ‘Uthman al-Makki, d. 291 or 297 A.H., the celebrated saackol of Hallaj (cf. also ‘Attar, II, 36-40). He was the author of some treatises. , apparently not quite orthodox, and suffered persecution (f. 53 G,mic els tpg oe Ssyb of ya A —_* Aho i! y Ma,f Fre 9 NOS). His Hila are mentioned on oy Abi’'l-Qasim Junayd, d.299 A.H. The literary works of this famous Sufi, usually believed to be the first Sufic writer, are often referred to in the Doses but only once a definite title is given (f. 96). It is acli js, most probably the same as ‘ : a i z : | 1922] The Sources of Jami’s Nafahat. 393 &dqatt Culait syeall obs (Cairo, II, 87, see Brockelmann, I, 199). 12. Husayn-i-Manstir Hallaj, d. 309 A.H. Ansari dis- cusses at length the question as to whether it would be com- patible with being an orthodox Muhammadan to recognize this personage asasaint. It is rather surprising, having regard to his strict opinions, that he decides to admit that Hallaj had been misunderstood. His ‘eloquent poetry’ (f. 86v. es) and some ‘unknown books’ (ibid. Gyyacl (lS) are men- tioned besides his (f. 103v) ess ure CUS (which is referred to also in the Nafahat, p. 209). ae Abu’l-‘ Abbas b. ‘Ata, executed in connection with the case of Hallaj, in the same year, 309 A.H Ansari not ouly states that he was the author of some wiles (f. 79v), but even describes them as follows (ibid.). obj 5-83 cumisre I) Coy wly? sient © ks yc why wie ec? O° we slams wl 5 ws ea : Could! ly ATG Jp! 5! 14. Mukammad b. ‘Ali Tarmidhi, usually known as Abi Bakr Warraq, da. 302 A.H. (cf. Brockelmann, I, 199, where several of his still extant works are enumerated). Besides wuilei (f. 70v) and Vis (f 72v), his re Q!yo (ibid.) and os pllaic els (ibid.) are mentioned. 15. Abu ‘Ali Juzjant (Gazgant), Warraq’s contemporary and fellow-countryman, who also composed some works (f. 74, ules). Cf. also ‘Attar, II, 118 sq. and Nafahat, p. 143. 16. Abi Bakr Wasiti, d. 320 A.H., also produced a book, which Ansari had an opportunity of seeing (f. 70): x= be KIES chausly as stbS 99 Boye Nou he wr - : 17. Yusuf b. Hamdan Sasi, apparently of the same period, also produced some Wisiles (f. 76v). 18. © Aba ‘Abdu’l-lah b. Khafif Shiraz, d. 331 A.H. His book, which Ansari calls (»)l — egttel US (f. 31), probably not by its proper title, was apparently one of the chief sources of the Tabagat. This was not however the only work ascribed to that saint, because his Wajles are mentioned on f. 118 (cf. 394 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, see from the next two numbers,! other Suiis in different corners of Iran tried to do the same. 19. Abu Bakr Paykandi, apparently of the same period, a disciple of Abi ‘Abdi’l-lah Maghribi and the teacher of the next author, Abi Bakr Razi. He wrote a book which Ansari ealls els (f. 102v). 20. Abu Bakr Raz. He composed a aut (f. 115v), on which Sulami’s T'a’rikh-i-stifiyya was based. 21. Aba Said A‘rabt, d. 341 A.H., was the author of several books (Wiles f. 108v), such as Qltyo slaw yo day ols and say 9 GS 4, (ef. Nafahat, p. 247). The titles are obviously not genuine, and were given probably by Ansari himself merely to show the contents of these works. 22. Ja‘far Khuldi, d. 348 A.H. (cf. Luma‘, pref., p. XVII, and ‘Attar, II, 283). Ansari says about him (f. 109v) : SIAL 5 goltec Syne (sic) . wry Boe s oie 5 ee wer tee wale pilin git 3! ale cg Cemmig® 23. Abu ‘Abdi'l-lah Rudbart, d. 369 A.H. (cf. Luma’, pref., p. XVIII, sq.). His book !,% tof CUS is mentioned (f. 122, cf. Nafahat, v. 300). 24 Abu Nasr Sarraj, d. 378 A.H. (cf. Luma‘, pref., IY). abine it to a different person, Abi Bakr Mufid, who “died. according to Ansari’s statement, in 364 A.H. (cf. Nafahkat, 220). It ae be interesting to find if this is simply a this statement of Ansari’s ; the original passage, not repro- duced in the Nafahat, is voreli quoting (ff. 112-112v): eel! er deal uy deme Coy ali Oabe G 9 (aS Has pled exe ) Fe chp ASL cemy it ead GUS Colt are sets Soy oy Be BHId Oe » wily Ge EY dwg € Bow 3! wx » Lol 8355 ey) ie $d duo ty (59 30° ext € Lio jf aby: KILIE 4 cpio y gy dee 9 oy aod up 9 Pt 5 dS jhe cso ye 6 Salo suse iors ot ‘ J!pa! eatin’ 9 And he — assuming it to be a fact that Luma‘ is due to Mufid, oe. ical Bo 06 i) Be MRO fx! a 6s nabiie ere ' ea ‘eles Wee. 22 and 26. ee ee ee ee ee 1922.] The Sources of Jami’s Nafahat. 395 apparently did not agree with this and replaces the whole passage by a sentence eruare: Oar to —_ nach ajahat, p. 220) : 25. Abu’l-Hasan Saya!) or Sway as in ie Nafahat, p. 182, and Luma‘, pref., p. XXXII. the author of some treatises ( alas f. aoe 26. the Dacca Review for April, 1915. On my return to India at the end of 1919 I found that the enforced delay had not been without a large degree of compen- sation. In the interval, a supplement to the Shillong Cata- logue had been published : and further interesting finds of me- diaeval Bengal coins had been made at Rautkhai (Sylhet) 1914, Khulna District in 1915, Kankaribagh (Sylhet) 1916, Bashail (Sylhet) 1917, and Murapara (Dacca District) in 1919. To some extent I even found myself forestalled by a discussion of the Murapara find that obtained for its author (Babu Nalini Kanta Bhattasali, M.A., Curator, Dacca Museum) a of the Griffith prizes of the Calcutta University in 1920 ; an 408 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |N.S., XVI, I am glad to acknowledge, to begin with, that his careful des- ira coi assistance to ie) pi ao) =, io) =} 2) =r cr a ® 3 3 ie) = S n iz) Mr. Thomas’ pioneering work on Bengal numismatics) ; and as, in the cases of most of the Kings concerned, independent material is now available on which a complete historical analy- sis of a considerably longer period than the Curator of the Dacca Museum dealt with can be based, I am in a position to carry out the survey of the field that I was on the point of making in 1915 with even greater prospect of arriving at the truth than I could have hoped for six years ago, efore passing on to the paper, I should also like to ac- all custodians of national and provincial collections of coins that it was necessary for me to consult. Mr. J. Allan. of the Devartment of Coins and Medals at the British Museum, be- sides supplying me with casts of an important coin that does not seem to have been previously noticed, afforded me free access to the Bengal coins in his charge. Dr D. R. Bhandar- cabinet ; while the courtesy of Mr. A. W. Botham, C.1E., Chief Secretary to the Government of Assam, as well as that of Monsieur Foucher, has enabled me to reproduce several important coins in Plate X. The opportunities I was given by these gentlemen of re-studying every Bengal coin included in the Indian Museum ani the Shillong supplementary Cata- logues will sufficiently explain the varte lectiones in the case of certain coins already published. I would also mention in conclusion that I am indebted to Babu Nalini Kanta Bhatta- sali for the excellent photographs of the coins given in Plate X. THe Batpant Kinas oF BENGAL. Nastruddin Mahmid, c. 682-690 A.H. The annals of independent Muslim rule in Bengal are usually taken to commence with the reigns of Fakbruddin Mubarak and his rivals ‘Ali Shah and Ilyas Shah, but except for the incidents that led to the extinction of the earlier line of Balbani Kings and the temporary re-appointment of Governors by the Dehli Sultan Muhammad ibn Tughlaq between 725 and 735 A.H., there is nothing to distinguish the status of the Balbani Kings from that of the Muhammadan (and Hindu) Kings who ultimately succeeded them. I therefore propose to begin with a survey of the numismatic and other evidence that 1922.| History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 409 now enables us to fix the chronology of the Balbani Kings with a fair degree of accuracy. immediate cause of the establishment of the first descendant of the Dehli Emperor Balban, as ruler of Bengal, was the successful suppression by Balban of the insurrection of Tughril, a favourite slave whom he had made Governor of Bengal. About 680 A.H. Tughril had become very powerful, owing to the booty he had obtained from a successful interven- tion in the affairs of the independent Hindu Kingdom of Tipperah, and had been induced to declare his independence under the title of Sultan Mughigsuddin.' Two generals who were sent against him by Balban were defeated, but when finally, about 682 A.H., Balban in person took the field, Tughril was siain on the borders of Tipperah. After savage retribution had been made in Lakhnauti on Tughril’s adherents, Balban throne preferred, however, a son of Bughra Khan called Kaiqubad, whom they made Sultan with the title of Mu‘iz- zuddin. This led Bughra Khan to declare his independence in Bengal with the title of Nasiruddin, and he even made a faint-hearted attempt to claim the throne of Dehli by force of rms. He was ultimately, however, persuaded to return to Bengal without fighting, nor did he even take any active steps to revenge the death of his son, two years later, in 688, when Kaiqubad was assassinated and Jalaluddin Khilji became Sultan of Delhi in his stead. ‘ All this we know from the narration of Ziauddin Barani ; —but in spite of Barani’s assertion that, on the accession of Kaiqubad, Mahmiad struck coins, bearing his newly assumed title of Nasiruddin, neither coins nor inscriptions in the name of Nasiruddin have yet come to light, and thus, for historical purposes, this King must remain for the present almost a cypher. The only fact that corroborates Barani’s account _ | Babu Kailash Chandra Singha, on pp. 30-31 of i pela (a history of Tipperah, compiled from local recoids: printe in ‘ ae . 1896 A.D.j, states that Tughril’s reason for invading Tippera ra of Maharaja Dungurfa o succeeded his n battle, and when Ratnafa In return Tughri ‘ titles of Manikya, which the ruling Princes of Tipperah have ever since orne * Elliott and Dowson, History of India as told b TIT, pp. 112-122, y its own Historians. 410 Jcurnal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S8., XVIII, is that Mahmid’s son, Kaikaiis, by using on his coins (as well as in one of the mosque inscriptions of 697 A.H. noted below) the title Al Sultan ibn Sultan ibn Sultan implicitly claims independent rule for his father. Ibn Batiitah states! that Nasiruddin died in Bengal ‘‘ some years after” his visit to his son Mu‘izzuddin in 686 or 687. We may therefore reasonably assume the minting of coins by Kaikais in 690 shows that the deuth of Nasiruddin occurred either in the same or the preced- ing year. Ruknuddin Kaikatis (690-701 A.H.). The first coins known to have been struck by a member of the Balbani line of Kings in Bengal appear with the accession of Ruknuddin Kaikaiis, possibly in 690 A.H. This date is to be found on Bengal coin No. 8 of the Indian Museum Cabinet, the marginal inscription of which has been completely misread. The inscription (vide Pl. X, fig. 1) runs as follows :-— on one inscription as his father (vide infra), it is certain that he ! Defrémery and Sanguinetti’s translation, III, p. 179. 2 Other examples of the phrase min kharaj (and some place name) on coi inscriptions may be-seen in I.M.C. Vol II, Part I, N: uo en ee A.H.; Qanauj and Mint Biladu-l-Hind); and -m.C. VO ‘ n u ned (c/.,e.g., th ; Ruknuddin, and that of Jalaluddin (709) mentioned later). It is impos: sible also to agree with his reading of Bardan as the name following Gar i so Ss ft : ginw in Akbar’s time included Bikrampur and much land to the south vide *Ain-i-Akbari, Blochmann’s trans., Bk. IfT, pp. 138 and 139); and a iv : : n) vory probably a descendant of the Sen Kings. Minhaj records that anga, up to the date he brought his history—the Tabagqat-i-Nasiri—to a close (658 -) was still under the descendants of Rai Lakhmaniah p- 558. : 1922.| History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 411 was a son of Nasiruddin. Coins of Ruknuddin struck at Lakhnauti in 69[3?], 697, 698 and 69[9%}, which were un- earthed in 1910 at Purinda, Dacca District. are preserved in the Shillong Cabinet!: and the Indian Museum Cabinet also includes coins of 691 and 697 from the same mint. The only two mosque inscriptions that bear the name of Kaikais are both dated 697 A.H. In the one at Gangarampur, Dinajpur (the old Hindu stronghold of Dev-Kot?) he is described as Kaikaiis Shah, son of Mahmiad, son of the Sultan (i.e. Balban). In that from Khagol* the titles run “ Shah, the Sultan, son of a Sultan, son of a Sultan.” Shamsuddin Firtiz (701-722 A.H.). Ruknuddin Kaikaiis was succeeded—probably in 701— by his brother Shamsuddin Firiiz. The latter’s relationship to Nasiruddin is given by Ibn Batittah* but in contrast to the more elaborate title adopted by Ruknuddin, Shamsuddin contented himself on his coins with the simple Al Sulian. is son Hatim Khan, Governor of Bihar in 709 and 715, also uses this title in referring to his father on inscriptions. The Shillong Cabinet include Lakhnauti coins of 701,’ 702 (Purinda find) 703 (from Enayetpur, Mymensingh), 704, 706, [70]7, [70]9, 710, 71[12], 712, 713, 714, 715, and also 720 (Purinda). Sunarganw coins of 705 and 710, also occurred in the Purinda find, and a new mint Banga is found on a coin in the Shillong cabinet from Rupaibari in Nowgong (Assam).® Only the mint figure [- -]5 is legible on this coin, but as the position of the unit seems to leave no space for a decimal the date is almost certainly 705. The period was one of active expansion of Musalman dominion in Bengal and the adjacent countries. The clearest picture of this is seen in the conquest of the previously inde- pendent territory of Satganw by the Turk, Khan Muhammad, Zafar Khan Ghazi, as described in 1847 by Mr. Money’ from the ‘Khurseenamah’ of Zafar Khan’s descendants at Triveni — near Hughli. Zafar Khan, accompanied by his sister's son Shah Sifi, or Safi, (who appears to have been also the nephew Sec | The reading 7{--] on S.C 1/5 is so extremely doubtful that I have omitted to mention it. The. coins of 697 and 698 are the latest cer- tain dates up to now known. Thumas, (op. cit. p. 46) only records coins of 691-695. 2 Blochmann J.A.S.B., 1872, p. 103. : ; : ~ 3 Idem, J.A.S.B. 1873, pp. 247-8. This place is near Lakhiseral in Bihar. (Idem, J.4.S.B., 1874, p. 288). 10. x. fig. <, ® Vide Pl. X, figs. 3and 4. 1D. Mone LSB. 47, p. 395; (vide also Blochmann’s *“ccount of the Triveni inscriptions in the J.A.S.B. for 1870). 412 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, of Firaz Shah) came to Bengal from Manrgaun in Birbhum, for the purpose of converting infidels to the- Muhammadan faith. The ostensible reason is given by the following local story collected by Mr. Money. A Mahomedan subject of a Hindu Raja on a certain festival in honour of his son used cow’s flesh. The Raja slew the son. The father resorted to the Court of Delhi ( sic’) and told his tale to Feruze Shah, who immediately sent an army to Bengal against the Raja, commanded by Zafir Khan, and his nephew Soofee Khan. The Raja’s name was Bhoodey Nripati (i.e. King) with whom a battle was fought at a place called Mahanad, near Satgram, about 8 miles west of Triveni, where Zafir Khan’s army was victorious. é The story is obviously a muddled one, for the first inva- sion of Satganw must have been in the time of Kaikaus, as Zafar Khan erected a mosque at Triveni in 698 A.H.; but apart from the fact that there was no Dehli Sultan of the name of Firaz at the time!; Zafar Khian’s subsequent subordina- tion to Shamsuddin Firtiz Shah of Bengal is shown by the appearance of this Sultan’s name on the memorial tablet on the Madrasah erected by Zafar Khan at Triveni in 713. The more reliable Khurseenamab goes on to say that having made a proselvte of Raja Man Nripati, Zafar Khan was killed in a battle fought with Raja Bhoodev at Hughli. His head was left on the field and his body buried at Triveni. His death, according to Mr. Money, occurred in the same year 713 as Zafar Khan erected the Madrasah already referred to. The Khurseenamah further states that ‘Ugwhan Khan, son of the aforesaid Shah Zafir Kh azee, having marched against the Raja of Hugli in Sirear Satgram, conquered him, con- verted the infidels to Mahomedanism and married his daughter. After some time Ugwhan Khan also died at Triveni.’ Thus Satginw passed into Musalman hands; and in Barani’s account? of Muhammad ibn Tughlaq’s relations with Bengal for the few years following 725 we find it men- tioned as one of the three recognized divisions of Bengal. The other two Sirkars were Lakhnauti, the original principality acquired by Bakhtivar Khilji in 1198 A.D., and Sunarganw, have been finally conquered soon after Balban’s invasion of EKastern Bengal in 682. _ Now it is curious that precisely the same story for the invasion of a Hindu kingdom by Musalmans occurs in local ot Alauddin Muhammad Shah was on the throne of Delhi from 2 Elliot, UII, pp. 236 and 239. ourn As. Soc. Bene., Vou. XVIII Prate IX Pagan ae 9 be 4 pty By — ire Survey of India Offices, Calentta, 1923 INSCRIPTION FROM SYLHET, RECORDING THE DATE OF THE FIR sT | S f tr T rf J TTT Cy\TT NT t Ps TI } FIRST MUSLIM CONQUEST OF THAT COUNTRY 03 A.f.) 1922,] History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 413 tradition regarding the first conquest of Sylhet. This has previously been believed to have taken place in 786 A, ‘. though the name Shamsuddin as the reigning King of Bengal at the time and the fact that one of the chief participators (Shah Jalal) was a disciple of Nizamuddin Auliya, who died in 725 A.H., might have suggested to Biochmann that the date was erroneous. That the conquest of Sylhet took place in the Review in August 1913. Though not a contemporaneous record it gives almost certainly (both from the date as well as from internal evidence) a truer version of the first invasion of Sylhet than local tradition has hitherto supplied us. The inscription (Pl. IX) runs as follows :— DeR0O Oy) Oye Jia ze ppose (4, plas ze reba oiSoe neds Crane | aye set allel i Sy cs7' | 31% jy? tals ae yo | sil? wis ad aS MRIS) ylec | yt azleage y dS bie Le yes | Boys SO y y3y whylalf oma | sais 8576 (oySs) USaryt gy 65 jle 9 | ols 5 self is ei, : ~Kilomady phe g vied aie sliol Slay | Gaile abel, “In honour of the greatness of the respected Shaikhu-l- Mushaikh (?) Shaikh Jalal, the hermit, son of Muhammad. oo “The first conquest by Islam of the town Arsah Sri a was by the hand of Sikandar Khan Ghazi in the time of Sultan Firtiiz Shah Defhijlavi in the year 703. es “This building (has been erected by) Ruka Khan, = sre queror of Hasht Gamhariyan, who being Wazir and cna for many months at the time of the conquest of Kamrt, art ~ Jaznagar and Urisha, served in the army in several places - the train of the King. (Written) in the year 918. tion is The excellent state of preservation of this SCA shi a due to the fact that (like the inscription of Shamsuddin ie Shah’s son, Hatim Khan, of 715), the back was ate tant considerations :— ee (1) Sultan Firaz Shah was actually om the throne of Bengal in 703 A.H. ears. t (2) As the grandson of Ghiyaguddin Balban oat called Dehlawi (cf. also the connexion of Firuz 5h Dehli in the Satganw tradition). 414 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, (3) The date is in agreement with a local tradition that when Sikandar Ghaziat first failed to defeat Raja Gour Govinda, Saiyid Nasiruddin Sipahsalar, accompanied by Shah Jalal and other warrior saints, came to assist him and that the former was a General of Firtiz Shah Dehlawi. (4) In 703 the Sultan of Dehli was ‘Alauddin Khilji, which agrees with another tradition mentioned in Nasiruddin Hydar’s History of Sylhet (the Suhail-i-Yemen) that he was the Dehli Emperor when Sylhet was conquered. A village of the name Sekandarnagar in south-eastern Mymensingh may possibly owe its name to Sekandar Ghazi, but he is apparently buried at Bishganw (alias Ghaziptr) in the extreme south-east of the Habiganj Sub-Division of Sylhet (in the Tipperah Hills), where his shrine is venerated by uhammadans and Hindus alike. Before coming to Sylhet he is said to have warred successfully against a Hindu Raja of the Sunderbans called Matuk, and it is curious that the present Magistrate of Mymensingh (Mr. H. C. French, I.C.S.) possesses a coin of Shamsuddin Firiz Shah dated 710 (or 720) which was found in a village in the extreme south of the Satkhira Sub- Division of Khulna District. The Ruknuddin of the inscription wasa well-known Genera! of Sultan Husain Shah of Bengal (899-925 A.H.), and his name occurs on two other inscriptions deciphered by Blochmann, who wrongly makes him an inhabitant of Sarhat in Birbhum, ns : J.A S B., 1870, pp. 284 and 295; idem, 1872, p. 106. Loe. cit,, pp. 152 and 165. 1922.] History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 415 with his father. The despatch by ‘Alauddin’s predecessor Jelaluddin Firaz Shah Khilji of boat-loads of undesirables into enrol these men in a “ Foreign Legion” and utilise them in fall of the Balbant dynasty had, in their turn, been swept away, we find the capital Lakhnauti appearing on the coinage under the name of Firazibad. As this survey will chiefly consist of a narration of the efforts of his sons to share the sovereignty of Bengal with their father, or, after Firiiz Shah’s death (about 722 A.H.), either with a brother, or a Governor of the Dehli Sultan, a fresh section will be begun with a list of the sons of Firaz who are known to have struck coins. Jalaluddin M ahmid _ «+ (709-or 707- A.H.) Ghiyaguddin Bahadur - (c. 710-728) Shihabuddin Bughrah 2 (717 and 718) Nasiruddin Ibrahim as (c. 724-726) By 709 A.H., when we find Hatim Khan, a son of Ficuz Shih, installed as Viceroy to his father in Bihar’, Shamsuddin 41. 2 Blochmann, op. cit., 1873, p. 249 : 3 The name ianaund Subnahed & certain amount of threat et Was the great grandson of Balban, as the name of cag “eustom of Bughra Khan, was also Mahmiid. For this Muhammadan cit., 1873 ae a child after his grandfather vide Blochmann, op. cit., : p.288, 416 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, as that already noted for 1.M.C. No. 8, except that the date is either 709 or 707. The translation of the margin runs: “‘This silver (coin was) struck at Hazrat Lakhnauti from the land-tax of Banga in the vear 709 (or 707).”’ This third mention of Banea on a coin legend furnishes additional evi- dence to that supplied by Firiiz’s coins of Sunarganw struck in 705 and 710 of the complete subjugation of Eastern Bengal either during, or before, the reign of Firaz Shah. Jalaluddin’s success in inducing his father to share the kingly prerogative of striking coins with a son must have roused jealousy amongst Mahmiid’s other brothers, and it is Shah. The absence of any other coin of Jalaluddin and the continuance after 710 of Lakhnauti coins of Bahadur suggests the possibility of Bahadur having succeeded in arranging for the assassination of his presumptuous brother or, at least, of achieving his permanent exile from Lakhnauti. The Shillong Cabinet includes coins struck in Bahadur’s name of 710, 720, and 72[22], from Enayetpur, Mymensingh; 714,717, 720 and 721 from the Purinda find ; 721 from Rupaibari, Assam ; and 721, 722 (or 723: S.C. 2), 72 [29] (S. C. A-vs and 723 (S.C. .2,) found at Kastabir Mahallah, Sylhet, in 1913. All the above, where mints can be read, are from Lakhnautt; except in the case of the 717 coin from Purinda (S. C. 2) which was found on re-examination to have been struck at Sunarganw. were bought in the vicinity of Enayetpur. The only other Ghiyaguddin coin with fairly complete margin in my cabinet that was obtained from this part of Mymensingh bears the ae portion of the mint name Sunarganw and was struck in a There remains to be considered the extremely interesting Shillong Cabinet coin 2, from Enayetpur, (vide Pl. A, ' Ibn Batiétah, loc. cit., p. 210; Blochmann, J.A.S.B., 1874, P- 289, notes that this is evidently the Hindustani Iy9¢? «‘ brownish.” Mr. R. Burn, C.S., informs me, however, that in the United Provinces bhira is used to refer to a man who is markedly fairer than the ordi- nary Indian, with brown moustache, blue eyes, and a wheat-coloured complexion, : se a ' 2 Thomas, Chronicles of the than Ken ad 201; an Pi. VI, fig. 5. ‘ronicles of the Pathan Kéngs, pp. 153 an je oe ahi? 1922.] History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 417 coin supplied certain evidence on the subject, I was extremely doubtful as to the accuracy of Thomas’ reading 730 for the date. The margin after the mint name on Col. Guthrie’s speci- men was mutilated, but, even if one conceded that the following word was ai, I could not agree with Thomas’ reading of ...%) for the Arabic numeral 30, which, so far as I know, is invari- ably written was on Bengal coins. From the Shillong coin which is apparently an exact duplicate of Col. Guthrie’s coin, it is evident that the date of both coins is 722, and, indeed the unit (,i3! aiw, in the year two, is clearly legible at the bottom of Thomas’ reproduction. The reading of the marginal in- scription of S.C. 2; in the Shillong Supplementary Catalogue, besides being probably at fault in reading ce=! (one) for 4s", is also wrong in regard to the words that follow the mint name, as there is only one month of Safar in the Arabic calendar. cannot however at present offer any certain suggestion for a correct reading, though it seems possible that the word imme- diately preceding @iw is -Q« (Safar). Enayetpur lies on raised land about 15 miles south-west of the present town of Mymensingh, on the upper reaches of the Banar River that drains the centre of the Madhupur Jungle into the Lakhya, and as a mauza on the river bank near Enayet- pur is still known as Ghiyaspar, it seems probable that this was the site of the mint that Ghiyaguddin named after himself. It is not far from the Baratirtha, a tank said to have been seat ci by a Hindu King called Bhagadatta Raja. After the tank ha been dug, samples of water from 12 Hindu places of pilgrimage Were poured into the tank and thus the Raja's mother nd enabled to acquire virtue by bathing therein, without veh “af visiting the tirthasthanas herself. A large an eae wy yne Baratirtha still takes place annually in March. but if Thomas suggests that Ghiyaspur is near Maldah, se ‘i the identification of the position of this mint on the _ ates that Bhagadatta’ fi Eastern Bengal; and his battle with the Bo name is not known, is said to have eg place near Bogra. | Bikrar- but on reaching home he found no prevent herself from falling into the hands of the M set fire to the palace, and thrown herself, with her ar the flames. The Raja, being disgusted with the wor sanyasi, and was heard of no more. tire family, into , turned into a 418 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, River, Mymensingh, is correct, the fact probably furnishes one in Bengal during the reign of Shamsuddin. In this case it resulted in the absorption either of the petty sovereignty of a Hindu Raja (who may have fled from Bengal to the Madhupur jungle for fancied security from his Musalman foes), or of an outlying portion of the dominions of Kamata or Pragjyotishpur (Assam). Ghivasuddin was not allowed to share the sovereignty with his father without dispute, and it was the successful attempt of another son of Shamsuddin, viz.: Shihabuddin Bughrah Shah, in 717-718 to obtain the same right of coinage as his brother that ultimately led to the affairs of Bengal again becoming of active interest to the sovereigns of Dehli. The few coins of Shihabuddin previously recorded are al) dated 718, but the unit decimal on a coin in my possession, which was purchased at the Calcutta mint in 1906 from among the rejecta of a find made at Murshidabad the previous year, seems clearly to be -17, yse ew .! As there is also a coin of Ghiyasuddin of 717 in the Shillong Cabinet and no coins struck by Ghiyaguddin in 718 or 719 are known, Shibabuddin seems to have success- fully ousted his brother from his position as joint ruler with — Shamsuddin during the year 717, and, possibly, maintained himself in power at Lakhnauti for two years longer. In 720, however, Ghivaguddin’s coins begin again and are found in comparatively large numbers for each of the succeeding years until 723; in which year Ghiyaguddin’s coinage as an inde- pendent King comes to an end? le y possess two fairly satisfactory contemporary authorities for this period, Ibn Batitah, the Tangiers doctor, who arrived in India at the beginning of the Hijra year 734 (September, 1333), but who dictated an account of. his travels . > of another independent line of Bengali Kings with Fakhruddin and Ilyas Shah. 3 P va pee a goes ; * The British Museum Catalogue gives one coin of 728, buton um spection the unit word was found to be undoubtedly us’, 80 that the real date of the coin is 729. : : 1922.| History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 419 After narrating the attempted rebellion in the Deccan of of Ulugh Khan Muhammad Fakhruddin Jana against his father Ghiyadguddin Tughlaq of Dehli in 721-22, and the execution by impaling at Tughlaqabad of two of the conspira- tors, Ibn Batitah goes on to say: ! “The other Amirs fled to Sultan Shamsu-d-din, son of Sultan Nasiru-d-din, son of Sultan Ghiyagu-d-din Balban, and established themselves at his Court (at Lakhnauti), “The fugitive Amirs dwelt with Sultan Shamsu-d-din. Soon afterwards he died, leaving his throne to his son Shihabu- d-din. This prince succeeded his father, but his younger brother, Ghiyagu-d-din Bahadur Birah (this last word signifies in the Indian language black,) overpowered him, seized upon the kingdom, and killed his brother Katlu Khan and most of his other brothers. Two of them, Sultan Shihabu-d-din and Nasiru-d-din, fled to Tughlag. who marched forth with them to fight with the fratricide. He left his son Muhammad in his kingdom as Viceroy, and advanced in haste to the country of Lakhnauti. He subdued it, made the Sultan Ghiyagu-d-din prisoner, and set off on the march to his capital carrying his prisoner with him.”’ to Sultan Muhammad, and made him come from rankal, and appointed him Regent in his absence, and entrusted to him the affairs of the government ; and himself departed with an army to Lakhnauti and crossing deep rivers, and quicksands, and swamps he hurried on his way to Lakhnauti. ie ‘“When the shadow of Tughlaq Shah fell upon Tirhut Sultan Nasiruddin, Governor of Lakhnauti, came with submis- sion and obeisance to the Court and humbly offered allegi- ance: so that before the sword of Tughlaq Shah was = tala all the chiefs and the nobles* of that country hastened to do him service, and to offer him their obedience. Then ‘Tatar Khan, who was the adopted son of Sultan Tughlaq er was Governor of Zafarabad, was sent with an army an pes “ all that country to submission; and Sultan Bahadur Shah, a. : liing Tughlaq ! Elliot and Dowson, op. cit., III, p. 609. bln ag adopted in the J.M.C. has ‘i followed in this paper though Tughluq is probably more correct. 245 2 ee haa and Colvin’s translation (J .4.8.B., 1871 * gaa eae is quoted as it is somewhat fuller than Elliot and Dowson. 8 Rais and Ranas. 420 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., X VEL, Governor of Sunarganw, who was rebellious, he brought witha halter round his neck into the presence of the King; and all the elephants that were in those parts were gathered together into the King’s elephant-stable. and there was collected to the army of Islim much treasure because of that expedition. Then Sultan Ghiyasuddin Tughlag Shah made Sultan Nasir- uddin, Governor of Lakhnauti, and entrusted to him the kingly power, because he had hastened to do obeisance, and sent him to his government. But of Satganw and Sunarganw he took possession. And Bahadur Shah he sent with a halter round his neck to Dehli, and Sultan Tughlaq Shah returned in triumph and with victory towards Tughlagabad. In Delhi also the news of the victory in Bengal was read in all the pul- pits, and canopies were erected, and the drums were beaten and there was much rejoicing.”’ On comparing these two accounts with the numismatic evidence at our disposal various facts emerge. In place it is clear that Shamsuddin Firaiz Shah could not have died before 722, so that the doubts cast by Blochmann on Thomas’ reading, 722, on a coin of Shamsuddin, and his limi- tation of the latter’s reign to 717 or 718,! cannot be upheld. Secondly, the existence of the series of Ghiyasuddin Bahadur’s coins from 720-723, and the absence of coins of Shihabuddin after 718 tend to show that the eviction of Shibabuddin from Lakhnauti by his brother took place in 719 or 720 (i.e. before their father’s death) and that it was probably only the usual general massacre of brothers that was attempted by Ghiyaguddin on the death of Shamsuddin in 722 or 723 that led to the 1 J.A.S.B., 1874, p. 289. : ? So Blochmann (idem) paraphrases Barani’s words kih dar ict bandagi sabgat namiidah bid, 1922.1 History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 421 pbs Ye wl-b_LwJ} wdly Lalo} Klose Bl Glad Khel! 5-4! (yb ad The first two lines are identical with the first two lines of the coins of Bahadur, and the whole fabric of the coin shows that it was almost certainly issued from Lakhnauti and that it was the work of Bahadur’s own mintmaster. The reverse, which supplies us with the actual name of Nasiruddin, viz.: Tbrahim, runs :— Bl ail yt bolt 0 wlblec wt wlbldt been obtained, but from the fact that death took place in 725 A. H. the coin mus either in this, or the previous year.’ the very day that he returned from Bengal to Tugh- died by the fall of a tem- e had partaken of a feast of welcome, and 3 te Muhammad ibn Tughlaq. nd was succeeded by his son Mu sievite Bahkdut and send him back to Bengal to share that - with (apparently) his brother Nasiruddin Ibrahim sontemporary authority for t (except the evidence of cains tha tioned) is Ibn Batitah, who gives Bahadur and his subsequent fate.” anager sa 8 Pl, XVI, pub- 1 A reproduction of this coin may be seen in No- 3, lished with Numismatic Supplament No. XVEof J.A:8.B. he 1911. Mr J. Allan states that it came from the Sonpat hoard, Punjab. 2 Op. cit (Arabic text), pp. 316 and 317. 422 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Account of the beginning of Muhammad ibn Tughlaq’s reign and his clemency to Bahadur Birah. “When the Sultan was invested with power on the death of his father, and the people had taken the oath of allegiance im, he summoned Ghiyasuddin Bahadur Birah, whom Sultan Tughlagq had captured. He pardoned him, and removed his fetters, and gave him many gifts of money, horses, and elephants, and sent him back to his kingdom (Bengal). He sent with him his brother’s son, Ibrahim Khan,' and arranged with Bahadur that they should share that kingdom equally, and that their name should appear together on the coinage, and that the Khutba should be in their common name, and also that Ghiyasuddin should send his son, Muhammad, known as Barbat, as a hostage with the Sultan (of India). “Then Ghiyasuddin returned to his kingdom, and ful- filled what he had agreed to do, save that he did not send his son, as he pretended that the latter was unwilling (to go). also impolite in his correspondence. On this, the Sultan sent his armies to (the assistance of) his brother’s son Ibrahim Khan, underthe command of Dulji At-Tatari. They fought against Ghiyaguddin and slew him, and stripped off his skin. The skin was then filled with straw, and sent round the Provinces.” Ibn Batutah’s account is sufficiently clear except that it makes out Ibrahim to be a brother’s son of Muhammad ibn Tughlaa instead of Ghiyaguddin’s brother: but this may pos- sibly be due to the mistaken insertion by a copyist o i “ in the manuscript before #as!. It also implies that Nasiruddin Blochmann’s suggestion (J.A.S.B., 1874, p. 290) that here _ | ur’s confinement at Dehli. us, Barani speaks later 4s if Kakbruddin, the next independent King of Bengal, revolt ‘i Mvhammad ibn Tughlaq at Sunarganw, after Bahram Khan’s death, an 1922.) History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India, 423 His position seems to have been that of Imperial High Commissioner in Bengal to keep a wateprul eye on behalf of the Dehli Sultan over the proc ceedings. of the now feudatory Balbani Kings. The second is that Nasiruddin died apparently in the year following his confirmation in the sovereignty of Lakhnauti and that in his place Malik Bedar (or Pindar; Khan Khilji was made Governor of Lakhnauti and received the title of Qadar Khan. We also gather from another late historian, Badaoni (c.1595 A.D.), that at some unspecified but early date in Muhammad ibn Tughlaq’s reign Satganw was placed under a separate Governor called Malik ‘Izzuddin Yahya ‘Azamu-l- Mulk. This agrees with Barani’s statement that Satganw (with Sunarganw) had been kept directly under the power of Ghiyaguddin Tughlaq: but as Badaoni mentions ‘Izzuddin after Pindar Khilji, the formation of Satganw ito a separate eee might have been effected after the death of Nasiruddin No coins in the joint names of Ghiyaguddin Bahadur and Nasiruddin Lbrahim are known but Firishtah’s date of 726 for the latter’s death is confirmed by coins struck in the name of Muhammad himself at Shahr Lakhnauti in 727 A.H.! The coin cabinet of the British Museum contains, however, hitherto unrecorded and posibly unique coin pee in the joint names of Muhammad and Nasireddin. nm the annexed cut it will be seen that the inscriptions run as follows = Coll. Bleazby No. 2085. &. Wt. 166:9 grs. - S. 1:1 in. other Gov that town the headquarters for his successful attack on Muhammad's ioe bhateaat ar Khan, at Lakhnauti Pi. x te. 10. These one Bs well as ee of a ae Began 733 A, H. Wile Table on next page but one) differ r edema and Sunarganw (Nos. 2 (a) and 3) in ee anni Si a3 ax , in the 424 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [(N.S., XVIII, Obverse : ft ylblt Load) gle oesro abe Reverse. As in the coin of Nasiruddin, previously des- cribed, except that at the end of the first line #s+' occurs instead of the incorrect pbes w. Though the name of the suzerain is only given as Muhammad, there can be no doubt that the monarch in question is Muhammad ibn Tughlaq. The date of the coin is probably 726. Only five coins (two gold and three silver) struck by Baha- dur after his reinstatement in Eastern Bengal have been re- corded ' and these all bear the date 728 and mint name Hazrat Sunarginw. The inscription on these ‘coins, as given by Thomas in the case of the silver coin, runs as follows :— tel cyl wthl-J} xlo gle Reverse (Area): s\% G45 wy come al Gill yo's G2 (Margin) : led alae > Gao wy esu aS Sf oe Kyler y wire y from Bahadur by the Dehli Sultan. For the approximate date of Bahadur’s death we must turn to a.consideration of the coins struck by Muhammad ibn Tugh- laq in Bengal as well as a rather complicated argument that can be gathered from the pages of Ibn Batitah. The dates and mints of all the Bengal coins of Muhammad that I have been able to trace are summarised in the fol- lowing table :— ! Thomas, Initial Coinage of Bengal, 1, p. 55; and idem., II p. 38: JA; S.B., 1921, Num. Suppl., p. 153. There is also a sixth (silver) spect men of this coinage in the Indian Museum Cabinet. 1922.| History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 425 Mint Type and Metal. Date. Trove and | — | ee ———— ——-- | (a) Shahr @e MC., ae 321 (Dehli, Aichi 728(2); id are: p. 48, Lakhnauti 725) : er d 730(3); : BM. (Coll. 4) Bleasbye 2 coins); and H.E,S. (Ena- yetpur), (2) B. M. (Coll. Bleazby ; 2 coins). (3) Coll. H. R. Ne- vill (J.A.S.B., Vol. XVII, 1921 p. 133). (Coll Bleazby) ro also a coin ) Thomas £.0-B,, 56 (Co ol. Gu- ae s 5 coins). o.: Gold 734(5) (5) Co Coll. H, R. Ne- (idem). 1 (6) Iqlim =| 1.M.C., No. 375 — 731(1) ; 732(2) (D) LIC. No. 382. Lakhnauti, 730): Forced currency (2) odge rs, J.A. 3. B. 1883, p. 2 (a) Satginw As in I{a): Silver 729, 730, and | (1) I.M.C.,Nos. 324 733(1); 734(2) | 325 and 327. (2 ae E.S. (Enayet- | Kalimah-type (without | 734 and 735(3) 3) "? M.C., p. 47, names of Companions): Nos, 2a nd 1. | Gold. 2(b) Arsah | As in 1(b): Forced eur- | 730(1); 731(2)| (1) 1.M.C., No. 383. Satginw. — rency. (2) Rodgers, loc. : < p. 60. 3 Shahr Sunar- As in I(a): Silver 733 and 734(1) | (1) ibe. (Enayet- zanw pur). From this table at =e appear that, apart from the Lakhnauti coins that Nasiruddin, there was fe issue of B 20h of Mahammad ibn Tughlaq until "729. The sudden acti- vity of a second mint in this year may, very reasonably, be ¢ o be — after the decease of 1 coins in the sole n- nected with Ghiyasuddin having been defeated and slain at about this date. Ibn no facts from which a parce su lies io ae date can be obtained, On his u arrival in India in 734,! Ibn Batitah saw at ed over the door of the palace of Kishlu Khan alias Mali ies ia ee ! Op, cit., TIL, p- 93. 426 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVII, Bahram ‘Abiah, Jate Governor of Sind and Multan, the head of the deceased Governor.' Kishlu Khan’s death had occurred as the result of Muhammad ibn Tughlaq’s anger when he heard that this Governor had buried the skins of Bahadur and of Bahauddin Gushtasp on their reaching his hands, when the two skins stuffed with straw, were being sent round the Provinces as a warning to other would-be rebels. Bahaiuddin wasa nephew (sister’s son) to Ghiyasuddin Tughlaq, and after the accession of Muhammad to the throne of Dehli, he refused to take the oath of allegiance and fled for refuge to the Rai of Kanbilah in the Deccan. He was finally caught, and on his being brought into Muhammad's presence, the Sultan ordered him to be skinned alive and his flesh to be made into a curry which was sent to his wife and children to eat.” From the fact that his flight to Southern India occurred in consequence of his not being willing to take the oath of allegiance, his death must have taken place fairly soon after Muhammad became Sultan of Dehli: but in view of the existence of coins of Bahadur dated 728, I cannot agree with Defrémery and Sanguinetti’s accep- . tance (on the authority of Khondemir, the Persian author of a Universal History called Habibu-s-Siyar, who died in 1534 A.D.) of the end of 727 as the date of Kishlu Khan’s death.’ Badaoni, on the other hand, gives+ the date of Gushtasp’s breaking out into rebellion as the end of 727, and Ranking notes that in this he is supported by the Bombay text of Ferishtah (though Briggs in his translation makes Ferishtah postpone it to the impossible date of 739). If therefore Badaoni and Ferishtah are correct, this would point to some time in 728 (or even 729, if one considers Ibn Batiitah’s account of Gush- tasp’s subsequent adventures in Southern India).’ In view of the fact already mentioned that both Gushtasp’s skin and that of Bahadur arrived together at Multan, we may finally conclude that the death of Ghiyasuddin Bahadur took place either towards the close of 728 or early in 729. Thus ended, in abject ignominy, the line of Balbani kings of Bengal. The apparent cessation of Imperial coinage in Bengal in, or shortly after, 735 points to a sudden outbreak of internal trouble ; and though, as we shall see in the next section of this paper, historians record that Muhammad’s Governors continued in power for some years longer, they were ultimately replaced, after a period of anarchy, by independent Kings, and 1 Idem, p. 324. 2 Idem, IIT, p. 321. 3 Op cit., III, Prefaco, p. XX. + Ranking’s translation, I, p. 304. # Joni goes o y ‘‘ After that, Malik Bahram Iba, the Muhammad ibn Tughlaq had to suppress in person. All this agrees m perfectly with Ibn Batiitah’s account of the rising of Kishlu Khan. 1922.] History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 427 Bengal again ceased to acknowledge the suzerainty of the Sul- tans of Dehli. Received February 25th, 1921. APPENDIX A. GENE aot es OF THE KINGS OF Buyaat, LT WITH IN Part [. Balban, Sultan of Dehli. | Nasiruddin Mahmid, of Bengal. 90 A.H. Ruknuddin Kaikaiis Sharealate Firdz 690-701. 701-722. | | l Asian Ghiyasuddin Bahadur Shihabuddin edn Khan oo Poets ad (struck coins at in- Jfemee him 709 (or tervals from 710 to 717 a seaceee 707). 728, those in 728 in 718. Jain by (under su joint name of the Ghiyasud- zerainty sosaratts Muham- din]. f Dehl n Tughlaq, Sult&as). b sultan of Dehli). APPENDIX B. Beneat Mints or Kinas DEALT WITH IN PART L; Date on Coi ; : : Silver unless otherwise Kings. Mints. ( apa [Nasiruddin Mahmid . No coinage | known. ] Ruknuddin Kaikaas Lakhnauti 690. (** from the Kharaj of Banga’”’) 697, 698 and 699 (7). Lakhnautt tho — 691 Aer a Fae ae z 704 » Shamsuddin Firiz Lakhnauti 701 ro on, "i10, 7H 714, 715 a 2" ee 702, 715, 720 and 722). ee a [Lakhnauti ?] x fo nt ioe ce ROTO IE 428 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Date on Coins. Kings. | Mints. (Silver unless otherwise ated.) I ee eS cat Shamsuddin Firiz | Su —— -- | 705 and 710. ontd). Bang ; 045. Jalaluddin Mahmitid | Lakhn 709 (or 707). 8 Gon ks Kharaj of Banga’’). Ghiyasuddin Bahadur .. Lakhnauti -- | 710, 714, 720, 721, 722 and 723 (Thomas “ wy es coins of 711 Sun a7. Gaston Ghiyaspur. tee. Sunarganw — (& and WN). | Undated [725 or 726}. j 2. Under sozrainty of | id laq of Dehli gh Shihabuddin Bughrah ay | Lakhnauti -+ |-717 and 718. Nisinadaiza | | Under bbc of bene] _ Undated [724 or 725]. Chigagudain Taeh h- | | beeen Lakh- laq of D f na = | Sh Tu Midechater ibn Tugh ahr Lakhnauti .. “721, 728, 729, 730 and 733. Sultan of Dehli. 734 4 ( AN). | Iqlim crt .. 731 and 732. Sat atgan ~- | 729, ie ri and 734. 1734 a 5 (N Kalimah | vet Arsah Satgan . 730 and 731. | Shahr sunbesenw: | 733 and 734. APPENDIX C. PuaTE X. Muslim Coins of Bengal, 690-727 A.H. (Reverse in each case, except No. 10.) 1, Ruxknu-p-DIN KatkAts 1.M.C., No. 83> Wt. 1 In double square inscribed Margin.—Zarb haza alfizza in a circle :— (bthazrat) Lakhnauti min kharaj (1) Al Imam. Banga sanah tisarin nwasitt, Journ. As, Soc. Bena,, Voi. XVII, PLare X, 10 India Offices, Caloutta.. 1923. otogravure KS are. Ps Survey of ENGAL. NS OF BI BRARLY MUSLIM CO 1922.) (2) Al Musta‘sim Amir (3) Al Maminin. “ over first mim of Imam. 2. SHAMSU-D-DIN-FIRUZ In double square inscribed in a circle Inscription as in No. 1, but period ac — over first mem of Im 3. SHAMSU-D-DIN s Firvz Inscription as in No. 2 4. SHAMSU-D-DIN Firvz Inscription as in No. 2 5. JALALU-D-DIN MAHMUD sunt ga as in No 2, but of Amir missing and period. ean ou over first mim of Ima 6. SHIHABU-D-DIN BUGHRAH Inscription as in No. 2, but with period mark ~ over mim of nag (cf. star in > I.M.C. .No. 13). re Garbisde. DIN BAHADUR History and Ethnology of North-Eastern India. 429 mat, S.C. No. 4; Wt. 1685; Sibi Provenandé Purinda, Dacca District (701 A.H.: Mint, traces of LakuNavrT!). Margin.—Traces of margin, as in No. 1, to Lakhnauti, fol- lowed oe Sanah ahadi wa- saba‘ m ne C. No. <5; Wet. 168: 9; . 1:06: Provenance, Purinda (70) 6 A.H.: Mint, SuNAR- dec ait Sunar- ganw sanah kham (no space for any ap TAD as marginal inscriptionsin Firaz’s coins ea at the top). = eee las UWE. 8. 1:05; Pisveunies: pai- bari, Nowgong, Assam ( [70)5 A.H.: 168°5 ; Mint, Ban@a). Margin... . (ha)zrat Banga sanah khams........ (no spac for any decima S.C. No ae Wt. 168°5; ‘1; Provenance, Parinde (707- or 9-A.HL. : Mint,‘‘ Laka- NAUTI from the revenue of BANGA al- argin.—Zarb haz pe bihagrat Latina ta or ES.; We. i. S. 1:04; Provenance, Murshidabad ((7]17 A.H.: Mint, Laka- ieee argin... Lakhnautt sanah saba‘ ‘ashara.. §.C. No. Wt. 167°9; S: 206; ne Enayet- 430 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. bir, ahs as in No. 2, but thiyasuddin’s usual mark * over mim of Imam 8. GHIYAsU-D-DIN-BAHADUR Iuscription as in No. 2, but with period mark ~ over din with this mark instead of the usual .: 9. Gutydsu-p- DIN BaHApur Inscription as in No. 7 10. MoHAMMAD IBN TUGHLAQ (Obverse.) Inscription : In a circle the Kalimah. SN ON Ni [N.S, XVIII, 1922] pur (722 A.H —not 721 as in yee SupleniensHaees GuHIy- dias gin.—(starting at mid- dle right) Zarb haza al-sikkah gasbah Ghiyaspur [fi shahr Safar (2)| sanah ithnit ‘ishrin ‘ miat S.C. No. 23° Wt.c 16679) 1-1; Provenance, Purinda (717 A.H.: Mint, SuNARGANW). Margin.—(starting at mid- dle right) Zarb haza (traces of al-fizzah bihazrat) Sunar- ganw ee saba‘ ‘ashara wa- saba‘ m H.E.S.; Wt. 167-1; 8.1.08; Provenance, Enayetpur Margin.—clear, but evi- dently the work of an engrav- er completely ignorant of Arabic who has endeavoured usual margin: cf. sanah twice and bihazrat zarb H.E.S.; Wt. 169-7; S.° Provenance, Enayetpur aa A.H.: Mint, Sanur LaKi- NAUTI). Margin —Zarb haza_ adl- stkkah Shahr Lakhnautt sanah saba‘ ‘ishrin wa-saba‘ miat. LAI LIS 30. Primogeniture in Ancient India. By Nirmat CHANDRA CHATTRRIEE, M.A. The history of the law of primogeniture in ancient India is very interesting and shows the different stages of the steady decline of the primeval custom of the patria potestas in early scams the Vedic literature we find that Pika geetor te was generally the law of succession (e.g. Aitareya-Brahman iv, 25 & vii, 17-18). With the gradual sansa a of the sons or the brothers from the authority of the family patriarch Say oye steadily gave way to equal distribution.'! Gau- tama, the author of the earliest Dharma-Sitra, is in favour of primogeniture : Urdhvam pituh putra riktharn bhajeran| Niv- ritte rajasi matur=jivati v=echchhati » Sarvam va purva jasy = etaran bibhriyat = paves Vabhage tu dharma-vridahih Vimsati-bhago jy ynam = ubhayato —dad= ratho go-vrishah | Thus Gipiatind is in favour of the whole als going to the eldest son, and even in partition he allows him an additional share of a twentieth part of the estate (28, 1-5; S.B.E., II, page 299). Baudhayana, who appears after Gautama, enjoins three different methods of distribution of the parental estate : (1) gift of an equal share by the father to each eye the authority of a Vedic passage (Taittiriya- Samhita, iii, 1, 9, 4) which clearly points to equal division ; (2) allowing ra eldest son “the most excellent chattel” on the authority of another Sruti text (Taitt. Sam. ii, 5,2, 7); and (3) a preferential share of 1/10th of the property to the eldest son. Baudhayana sounds a distinctly liberal note and does not strenuously advocate primo- (II, 2, 3, 4-9; 8.B.E. the equality of shares *(II, 6, 13, 13 & II, 6, 14, 1; 5.2. 11. p. 132). Later on he ably controv WS dvc cates of primogeniture and points out that it is reer cameate to the clear precepts of the Veda. He quotes and interprets he Taittiriya s for the method of division, it is clear from the 1 Sarnhita. tii. 3, 2 that the eldest son was usually pref ferred. ’’ (Vedic —, Vol. sd p. 352. .) 2 Vide Biihler’s Introduction, 8.B.E., Vol. II, page xx. 432 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.&., XVIII, the Vedic passage (Taitt. Sam. iii, 1, 9, 4) in support of his view, and argues that the other text (Taitt. Sam. i, §; 25955 merely a statement of fact and has not the force of an injunc- tion (vidhik). He emphatically asserts that the preferential treatment of the eldest son ‘‘ is forbidden by the Sastras. ”’ (i, 6, 14, 10-13; S.B.E. II, p. 134-5). Vasishtha gives the eldest son a double share and a tithe of the kine and horses (XVIT, 42-3; 8.B.E, XIV, page 88). Kautilya also provides for a preferential treatment of the eldest son :— Eka-stri-putranam jyesth-amsahy Brahmananam = ajah ; Ksha- triyanam = asvah ; Vaigyanam gavah, Sidranam = avayah t Cha- tushpad-abhave ratna-varjanam daganam bhagam dravyanam =ekam jyestho haret; Pituh parivapadyanam = abharanam cha jyeshthah | Sesha-dravyanam = etad = dravyasya va samo vibhagah 0) (Artha-sastra, Bk. IIT, Ch. VI). “Goats shall be the special shares of the eldest of sons, among Brahmans; horses among Kshatriyas; cows among Vaisyas; and sheep among Siidras ...... In the absence of quadrupeds the eldest shall take an additional share of 1/10th of the whole property ........ The father being dead, his carriage and jewellery shall be the special share of the eldest (IX, M2: SBE XK, page 347); but Manu like Kautilya is no blind supporter of primogeniture as he strictly enjoins separation and partition if the eldest brother “ behaves in a manner unworthy of an eldest brother’’ (IX, 110; S8.B.E., XXV, pages 346-7). Vishnu gives 1/20th part of the inheritance to the eldest as his additional share (XVIII, 37: S.B.E., VII, page 73). But Yajfiavalkya takes a bold stand against the claim of the eldest son to a special share :— “Vibhajeran sutah pitror = ardhvam = riktham = rinam samam ” ““ Let the sons divide the wealth of their deceased father equally among themselves.’ (II, 117). (Stenzler’s edition, page 58). Narada virtually abrogates the right of primogeni- ture as he declares that even the youngest son may be the family property, if specially qualified for the task (XIII, 5; S.B.E., XXXII, page 190). Brihaspati is clearly in favour of “* All sons of the twice-born, begotten on women equal in caste (to their husbands), shall take equal shares, after giving a preferential share to the eldest. 1922.) Primogeniture in Ancient India. 433 ‘“‘ He who is the first by birth, sacred knowledge, or good qualities, shall take a couple of shares out of the partible wealth, and the rest shall take equal shares. ‘‘When they divide their father’s heritage all the sons shall share alike.” (XXV, 7-10, 8.B.E., XXXIII, page 371.) Katyayana is also against special treatment of the eldest son. This triumph of equality over primogeniture marked the com- plete emancipation of the junior coparcener from the control of the head of the family exercised by the father or the eldest brother. In studying the evolution of primitive polities we notice two important characteristics, namely, agnation and patria potestas. With the progress of society, as we follow the transition from the tribal to the territorial state, both these characteristics were slowly impaired. In ancient India as in ancient Rome and in other ancient states the family patriarch was gradually shorn of most of his prerogatives language of modern civilised society aggressive individualism over primitiv definitely proclaimed. FE tn Oe ae ai ain ei 5 31. Lala—A Note.! By H. C. Ray. It is generally believed in Bengal that prince Wisse § the traditional conqueror of the beautiful island oe lon is a Bengali. The origin of this belief as far as is kno tg me is contained in the Buddhist Chronicles of Ceylon sihick describe the story of the early conquest and settlement of the civilized races in the Lanka dvipa. The belief has become so very general that it has entered in the popular songs and ballads of this province. We give below a brief summary of the story from the Mahavamsa : 2 the country of the Vangas in the Vanga capital there inal once a king of the Vangas. The daughter of forests of the Lala country. The lion begot on her a son, Sihavahu and a daughter Sihasivali. After slaying his a hundred BE and reigned over the kingdom of Lala. His eldest son Viaws banished for his lawlessness sailed with a band of 700 followers from Sihapura and at first ‘landed at the haven called Supparaka’ but continuing his voyage he came to Lanka very shortly before the death of the Tathagata. It will be noticed that in the story prince ee got is represent- ed to bea son of Sihavahu the King of Lala what is Lala ? Scholars are far from unanimous in their Phar ec of this country. Childers, Goldsemidt and Kuhn considered it as a Since then Dr. Ray- ber last. ! This note on Lala was written in Octo Vol. Z in oe chowdhury in reviewing The Cambridge History of arise Calcutta Review for December, 1922, has come to m lus however publishing this note because it sets forth in "gall the raves which lead to that conclusion fee also because it contains in br ief the references to me previous discussion of this question. .T.S. Trans. i ., pp- 51-54. ; Ind. Aat., Vole XI, p: 108; note#: Vol XIE, pp 04-05 Om PS’ : . 105; Bournouf Recherches sur la Géograp ie lon, p. 61; J.B.A.S. New cite Vol. I . a also takes Lala in the sense of Ra Mookerjee Silver Jubilee Volumes, Vol. III, Orientalia, part 1, TR a << Q & ag oO | © i=} Qu ies) ae io} 436 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, India. They identify it. with the province of Lata or Latika, the Aapiyy of the classical authors. (Mod. Gujarat.) Writing in the Cambridge History of India on the History of Ceylon Dr. L. D. Barnett has recently endorsed this view and has discovered the following nucleus of fact in the story. He observes ! :— ‘ and Sopara. The latter band belonged to the Simhalas (Sihalas) or Lion tribe, and it was probably they who imposed their Aryan tongue on Ceylon. At any rate they t Sthaladipa), whence derived its later titles, the Arabic Sarandip, the Portugese Ceylon, and our Ceylon.’ Here I have nothing to Say as regards the theory of the learned Doctor. It is possible that Ceylon was colonized by coast and another from the Kathiwad peninsula. It is even possible that one was mainly Dravidian while the other was Aryan. The fact that Vijaya after starting from the Lala country at first landed at Surparaka seems to indicate that the _ early colonization and settlement of Ceylon probably had some connection with the western coast But even granting this geographical data contained in the Mahavamsa do not agree with this assumption. The story tells us— “Alone she went from the house (in the Vanga capital) desiring the joy of independent life ; unrecognised she joined a caravan travelling to the Magadha country. ms the Jala country a lion attacked the caravan in the orest.’ Gaya Districts. Apparently Lala must be identified with Radha which was the name of that part of Old Bengal of which the Ganges and its Bhagirathi branch formed the eastern 1 Chap. XXV, pp. 605-07. ; ? Mahavamsa, trans. by Geiger and Bode, p. 51 1922. ] Léla—A Note. 437 boundaries.' The contiguity of Lala and Vanga is further supported from the fact that when Sihavahu fled with his ? the Ladhas,’ keep us in no possible doubt that Lala is Radha. 1 J.A.S.B. New Series, Vol. IV, p. 287. ? Mahavamsa, trans. by Geiger and Bode, p. 52. ONY RP NTN NAN Re te NR 32. A Note on the Newly Discovered Bogra Stone- | Inscription. By Haripas Mirra, M.A., Sometime Government Research Scholar. This fragmentary inscription in black clay chlorite was di Nadia by Babu Purna Chandra Bhattacharya, Dt. eee mee while excavating an old tank at Mahasthana, Dt. Bogra. = pacts Research Society was requested to decipher the ord and to report upon the same. A rubbing of the inscrip- tioned above. Several puns and hidden meanings, anskrit verses, but it ons only of 16 lines, the rom the sense. Anustubh is preserved and the ic long and short vowels beginning from the firs . The inscription had 64 to 68 letters (Aksaras) per ‘ine. : : in Nandin family ; 440 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, logy of the Nandin family cannot be determined with absolute certainty but very probably it was as follows :-— Vibhusita Nandin (Names of predecessors lost.) Sri-Narayana Nandin + Sudargana. Sunaya + Arundhati. Kanvala Nandin + Sarasvati. (Names of descendants lost.) The epigraphic alphabet of this fragmentary inscription is undoubtedly a little later in age than the Ghosrawa inscription of Viradéva, with which the epigraph has in common the ortho- graphical peculiarity of expressing anusvara by a ‘na,’ when followed by a‘s’ in the middle of a word and the practice of Text. Li, x navichala (?) x chhala (?) x —eet —a — ll —_—— ree L. 2. —— —-—— « kulamirjjavasya | tasmad-ajayata Vibhi[s]ita-nandi — nama PLATE XL JOURN. AS. Soc. BENG., VOL, XVIII, 1922. “NOILdIMOSNI ANOLS Vunod AHA =i) ie ey % Ais pe aut une nadie to : s . . ; ate ZENA \PI kWh chirps eR EYIRIEWR RNG Lose ee Bibe RRM Ne NEA VSD LELER) OMY? eee 4 ~ oe A, x ‘ ; ¥ ' 5 iain ‘ f q : nf : é 2 ah : i : ae. : e : oe ; ; iy | : A : . a i & ; wo ¥ . " ; ee / . X. i : 4 te og ee a ee ee . : A Sa Spa J Heats a” SEE : i y " “sh i a ee “ . 1922. ] Newly Discovered Bogra Stone-Inscription. 441 Ifa] L. 3. — — ERP rs ne inyam(m) varsarambhah kripanasarasém-amy(b) yadhidht ( (rvva) nadinam kridanidam sujanavayasam-v[é]sma vi (?) x -——— _ L. 4. —pu(?)- janma t [ce] tasya dharmmanidhir= ddhiman sunuh sunritavag-abhit Sri-Narayananandi-ti Nandinam nandivarddhanah u[d] si- x ——-—— I L. 5. Se mauktik-ahara-lilam (m) i} [e] yaso- daya-nanda-gunair-alankritah Sriyanvit6 Gopagrihe bhajan-v(b)alam (m) | Sudargana-v(b)addharatih sa fj —- —— ————— —_—_ ——_—_ || L.6. ————x -naya Sunayasya __patni | sadhvi sone prathitakirttir = Arundhatiti ya Arundhativa nutim apa pativratanam (m) u [g] sudaksina x ——_—$— —__— L.7 —__—— x [sthi?-] tayé’nuripa 4 [hb] scien abhut- satya-pavitrakantha Kanvala-nandi-ti suto-tulasrih | pa {ra] spara- -préma-samahita— x Ml ene - idag- L. 8. [vid]vad-gosthi-rasa-visalat asvada-lila-vi dhah! kuryvan buayS ya vividha-sumano-manasé ares tam Khyaito * jana itan-n-siv-a tah L. 9. [sva]dhinaya janaya na prakupitan-n-alv P eaieh na ee jihva = — krita x ths a a ee er / 442 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIIT, L. 10. —maré sa[pa]tnan sarvvasvam apy asakrid L ipitye rye Sueye) ! yah prémni ch-ayusi x — ae TY rr bil, —t pradhvansam gamité reese supathi svargg-Apavargg- Onmukhé) lokam pu —_—. — ee cen UAE ture emmamrezmenen fae L. 12. x Scha see -SAyinah | minayita digantésu Sankit ya— x nj{n] Li TBs Srir-nn-agamat- eared -iva yiGia-bieke a (m) ifo} Sarasvatiti yasy-abhid-an — -— | | —— —_—_1[p) L. 14. x —a ponvabbaryesy-ape preyasi | yam-alokya satipa x ai x —— gy} | LS fees = L. 15. —[gi-?] ni | rajita rajahans-iva manase vasya x n [r] —_ — — steel L. 16. x patéh paramadaréna 4 [s] P (The rest of the inscription is entirely lost.) Tentative Interpretation. Verses (a), (b),(c) might have referred to Vibhisita Nandin V. (c) Good men frequented his (Vibhisita’s) house. V. (d) Sri- Narayana nti was like a Siva (Nandi- vardhana) of his family. V. ‘(e) probably Lema his good qualities Vous) Double entendre. Somebody (very probably, Sri- arayana) is compared to Visnu in his Krisna incarnation. The place of residence of both was : Rete engin, house of cowherds ; (2) name a pla ¥ec(g) ee ‘the virtues of Arundhati, whom Sunaya had for his wife. VY. @ describes the birth and good qualities of Kanvala andin << << < a Newly Discovered Bogra Stone-Inscription. 443 (j) Double entendre,—(probably) Kanvala Nandin on account of his fondness for the company of and his patronage of men of letters, is compared to the Rajahamsa that feeds upon sweet lotus roots, (k) describes Kanvala’s kindness to men under him and his avoidance of bad company and vile words. (1) describes his liberality. (m) oie described his pious and meritorious eeds. (n) crm e described his valour. (0) In Kanvala’s house, Sri—fickle Fortune—be- haved like a chaste wife. She did not leave anvala. (p) baarcau seems to be the wife of Kanvala. (q) probably Kanvala had another seo who was the abode of womanly grace and dec (r) ei described the hasheee’y g oth love for his . ee Ne at Notice. Foreign Societies who favour the Asiatic Society of Bengal with their publications are informed that they may be sent either to the address of the Society at Calcutta, or to the Agents of the Society in London, Messrs. Luzac & Co., 46, Great Russell Street. AVIS. ia Bengale de ses dpe sont priées de les envoyer ou dsreuter ment a l’adresse de la Société, 1, Park Street, Calcutta, ou a Vagents de la Société a Londres, Messrs. Luzac & Co., 46, Great Russell Street. ANZEIGE, Auslandische gre oie welche die Asiatische Gesell schaft von Bengalen mit ihren Publicationen beehren, we hierdurch ersucht Sicseiten entweder direkt an die Adresse ie Gesellschaft, 1, Park Street, Calcutta, oder an den Agenten in London, Messrs. Luzac & Co., 46, Great Russell Street, zu senden 33. A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. By Jowan van MANEN, SYNOPSIS, Page I. General Introduction Bs he «. 445-455 II. The Bibliography of Tibet .. a «+ 456-471 1. Tibet in General. . ie 5 .- 457-459 a. General Oriental Bibliography 457 b. Special Chinese Bibliography - +e 457 c. Special Buddhist Bibliography ws ve 458 d. Bibliographies in individual works .. 458 2. Kanjur and Tanjur = é -. 459-462 a. Western Material 45 6. Eastern Material rss 3. Extra-Canonical Literature 462-466 4. Collections and Booksellers 467-471 ions .. ae 467 b. Booksellers sue 469 III. List of some Tibetan Presses fe .» 472-474 IV. Text of Three Book Lists .. 6a .. 475-488 a. Titles, printers, volumes at . 475 6. Titles and leaves cy eb pee 481 c. Titles only es 484 V. Index to Titles i _ Bie «+ 489-523 Translation and notes 429-523 VI. Addenda 4 ne - + 524-525 I. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 446 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {N.S., XVII, with regard to what has ultimately to be accomplished. In connection with Tibetan studies our bibliographical knowledge is still in its infancy. The literary treasures which our present data induce us to expect as existing must be immense. Lists of Tibetan works published hitherto lead us to surmise that we are only at the very beginning of our discoveries, and that all the titles known to-day, and all the books collected in private and public libraries, represent only a small part of a really immense literature of which we can scarcely estimate the bulk, still less the full nature and contents. The two large Tibetan religious cyclopedias, the Kanjur and the Tanjur, are fairly well known, bibliographically at least, and have, especially of late years, been studied in detail, but these two voluminous compendia, we have now found, do not in any remote way and extra-canonical literature is now found to be much more extensive than even these two well-known collections added to- gether. Any contribution to our knowledge of this literature, at the present stage of Tibetan studies, cannot fail to be of a certain importance, if it were only to furnish starting points or further research. At one time, through the information brought back from Tibet by Sarat Chandra Das, about the existence in that country of old Sanskrit texts which have long since disappeared from sight in India, great hopes were enter- tained that in this Land of Snows startling discoveries might be made in that direction.. The discovery of such texts in Dalai Lama, to obtain from him a list of such texts. Schlag- 1 Bericht iiber eine Adresse an den Dalai Lama in Lhasa (1902) zur Erlangung von Biicherverzeichnissen aus den dortigen buddhistischen Kléstern. Von Emil Schlagintweit. Abh. K. Bayer. Akademie 4 Wiss. I.K1. XXII Bd. IIT Abt. Munich 1904, 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet, 447 Sanskrit texts probably stillextant in Tibet.! I wished to have a report about the current literature of the country to find out whether any such report would go beyond the information already in our possession. I expected that this more limited line of enquiry would in all probability prove more fruitful, I was not deceived in my expectations. Last spring a Geshe of my acquaintance, residing during the winter months at one of the places of pilgrimage in India, holy to Tibetan Buddhists, of his annual summer visit to Tibet. I met him and explained my wants, and he kindly promised to do for me what he could in this matter. Six months later he returned with two lists European conception of bibliography, but his lists did not, materially, come up to any ideal standard. Nevertheless they numbers, and so practically changes into a third list of titles only. Evidently verifying these numbers was a laborious work, and could not be com- pleted before my friend left Lhasa again. So he brought the list with the page numbers filled in as far as they had been en- tered at the date of his return to India. Both lists are written in Umed character. When I received them I went over them ae ‘ ing me to expect ! I possess, nevertheless, credible information leading me : that, with more intimate relations with the Tibetan psec ie gions ing, agreeable, and important surprises may be in store direction. - 448 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, The existing lists, like the present ones are all drawn up too briefly and summarily to justify as yet the compilation of a kind of Catalogus Catalogorum in connection with the three lists now presented. One of the previous lists gives no Sanskrit equivalents at all, even where these alternative titles are given in the books described. Another gives the original Tibetan titles only for some volumes and not for others. Another again tran- scribes only part of the titles, in arbitrary abbreviation, though the author has the actual books before him. My own lists are worse in a way, for they seem not even to have been copied from actual titles, however partially. I understand that they have been taken down from dictation, from memory, and re- present the current popular names by which the books are referred to in Tibet. From the standpoint of scientific biblio- graphy this may be sad, but from that of a study of the popular life it has its value. I do not think that the actual writers of the lists can have been very learned men ; they may have been practical booksellers. Uncertainties like those offered by No. 116 (AF for AS, etc.) seem to point to this conclusion. ~ ~ But it is certain that the lists embody an unusual amoant of familiarity with book-names. I have not met with Tibetans ciable proportion of new material. Further, it seems to me that the value of these lists lies is the fact that they give us a picture of the literature affected by the modern Tibetan in- telligentsia. The Kanjur and Tanjur as such are excluded, but some parts of their contents are evidently still widely read and current in separate editions. The number of works on the educated and cultured Tibetan of to-day. The exceeding- ly numerous, in fact uncountable, little popular rituals, prayers, hymns, litanies and similar works which are to be met with in Tibet are altogether absent from our lists. Most of the works belief. A fact which seems very significant to me is that we meet with several titles wholly identical with, or at least similar to, those published in the old lists of Schmidt, Bohtlingk and Schiefner, about three-quarters of a century ago. Literary taste does not seem to have changed much in Tibet during all that time. Whether the cycle of Cathay will move as slowly in the future seems doubtful. Already there are rumours of telegraph line to Lhasa.!_ Uniformed soldiers, postage stamps | To-day the telegraph line has become a fact, and compliments have been exchanged over it between India and England, and agi 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 449 and even banknotes have already appeared in the land of Tsongkhapa. There was even a Lhasa Gazette is the most approved up-to-date style, though printed (lithographed) in Peking, which existed for about five years up to about the first year of the second Chinese revolution, and this SYNTHS DANSON, of which I possess an almost I may record stories of electric light in Lhasa in private houses of certain rich men and of a Russian diplomatic present to the Dalai Lama consisting of a gramophone praying the Aum Mani Padme Haim. Whether these stories are true I do not know, but it seems certain that a few years ago an enterprising Nepali took a small cinema to Lhasa in order to make his fortune with it. But this was a failure, for the local wits de- cided that such things had never been spoken about in the Kanjur, and so they could not be. They were not to be had in this way. And our Nepali did not get any public to his magic exhibitions. The enterprise collapsed. To return : have made a few references to the three earlier lists, mentioned above, in connection with some picturesque titles which re- appear in our own lists after seventy-five years. It is scarcely necessary to add that bibliographical publications in Tibet are rare ; booksellers’ catalogues also. Only one item contained in our list seems to be a list of publications issued by a print- ing establishment (No. 144). As remarked in loco the existence of similar lists is not known to my informants, but in 8.C.D.’s list (A 44) we find what seems such a print, the RIA BS IF Sarge sys Fy Enquiry might lead to the discovery of others. On the other hand there are as a rule very good indexes attached to the separate volumes of the larger Sung- bums, or callected works, and the list of Schmidt and Bohtlingk enumerates a great number of indexes to various editions or manuscripts of the Kanjur and Tanjur (Nos. 262-284). ae As to Tibetan bibliographical works, perhaps they soe ; In the list of Schmidt and Béhtlingk we find an entry, Nos. 446-456, entitled NTRS ane a AS’ 37 Nar bees en aa —, ce a i alled ASAN AA SHAH RF SFAIO AAT, “The book tih, © ‘Source of Valuables’ composed by the Teacher ua dub.” This seems a bulky work as it consists of a tp : te I have not been able to collect any information a = kone it may be that the title of the work is afterall the mos y 450 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, bibliographical part of it. Yet until the work is f d and examined the title holds out hopes. ers _ As to the book-trade in Tibet I have only meagre data. It is said that in Lhasa alone there are a score of book-shops ° y @ ct z, D ae a ct =) } 5S o wm =} TR = —- GQ © e mM @ pe] 5 a 2 te ) =) 0 oe mM & in 5 gy ma ® — © on oo D> “3 bazar see Sandberg, Handbook of Colloquial Tibetan, p. 174. it is said that the larger books are never kept in stock printed, but are only struck off to order in as many copies as the customer needs. In Lhasa the book vendors undertake to st ah 5 = er | 5 (Sia NIL Baile eee ee amma a aL Fi om c oo ct i= oO wn oO © +S] [or eS ° ° es ~- oO w 2 = fa) ™m i) ras) fe ° = j=] pS) aig ——s hej kg Hi =} or ) Qu ra) S Q 5 ~~ a) — pe require these collections for reading at all but for purposes of worship, for pustaka-puja. A cheap copy serves as well ‘ ments. The only more or less secular printi : printing place seems to be that of the Potala Zhél, which is to a certain extent a 2 S- Q. or a 2. 5 zo) © iS ® “4 = mM ° om =] — ee Co © cf a : a gy .@ < ma ® 2 et B co) DM pe = R © et ® RM a Lu) 5 = 4 ® 2 - eee er se prints, often leads to the blocks being forgotten, lost, or be- certain amount of literature is apt to dj : pt to disappear. Blocks are also sometimes cut at the chief expense of the richest patron sri tie phage a ee ee 1 See Beckh, Udanavarga, Preface, p. iv, note 2. Be Es aa 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 451 with some little help from more modest contributors, in which case the chief patron, mostly, becomes the custodian of the ocks. In colophons, sometimes detailed data about such P dwelling places in the winter. There is a great variety of usage as to the way in which prints are obtai e paid at the rate of a fixed price per 50 or 100 leaves, but in others the use of them is free after complimentary gifts to the To ensure not above skipping batches of fifty pages or so in the mi dle of fat volumes. They save themselves labour in that way, as also the money to be calculated for paper and ink. Careful checking of any printed volume is, therefore, always necessary f Besides this a thorough check has to be kept on the quality o the prints, as pages are often blurred and illegible. If a be . 452 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, other establishments. It is said that there is a specially fine copy of the Narthang Kanjur in Kalimpong on such paper, in the possession of one of the local nobles. This edition would probably be invaluable for text-critical work. vw words must be said about the relation between manuscripts and prints. In Tibet the position is analogous to that of Kurope in modern times. As there, the printed edition usually represents the labour of expert and careful work: the block-cutter (equal to our compositor), the reviser (equal to our proof-reader), and in cases of very careful production even the editor, as with us. In Europe printed books are practi- cally no longer copied for home use, but in Tibet this is still done. The reason is almost invariably, either the impossibility of buying another copy of a coveted and valued book, as the book-trade is not organised and communications difficult, not c Tibet. The result is that copying is almost invariably done by people less expert than the printers or the block-cutters work- ing under expert supervision. And in the case of those copy- ing for reasons of poverty, they are often not the most learned and may even be really ignorant. Grammatical knowledge in Tibet is very limited and a science of the elect. Even profes- sional copyists are better craftsmen than linguists or gram- eae Desgodins has made a very pointed remark about is But there is still another class of MSS. made for other piety the Ashtasahasrika ranks next in popularity. Also other ooks are chosen, and in the Victoria Memorial in Calcutta there is a fine copy in this manner of one of Padmasambhava § works, I believe a ANA" Ihave also seen a still other variety of MSS., namely illustrated ones, with coloured figures ad gods and tantrik symbols, which cannot be produced m Tibet in that manner by print. All this does not exhaust the Se | Since acquired by the A.S.B. Te ee eee teint dine iia tne li srs ns a i ie ee 1922.) | A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 453 subject and can only serve as a very slight preliminary sketch of it. Now we have still to consider the question of publishing or printing centres and the locality of the presses. Publishing in the European sense of the word is unknown in Tibet. No wholesale editions are ever printed off at once and distributed through selling agencies. As said before, the normal practice is to print each copy for the customer who wants it. An ex- ception is formed by the small popular prints kept for sale by the little book stalls in Lhasa, or those hawked about the country by bagmen. But even these are probably ordered by these booksellers in small batches and not kept in stock at the presses. Tibet is a country of travel and pilgrimage. A vast number of travellers are always on the road from the remotest corners of the country to its centre, Lhasa, and from there back again. These travellers, whether traders or monks, are the distributors of the printed literature. A man going to Lhasa, or elsewhere, may be commissioned by his friends to bring back such and such works, or having the opportunity at some monastery to acquire such works and having still room for an additional load on his yaks or mules, he may take books as balast, either for his own use or as a speculation. Often, also, a pilgrim may invest in a spare volume or two carried home on his back with his personal effects in the hope of some gain by their sale when he has returned to his dwelling place. Hrom time to time I saw a few isolated volumes appear in this way on the benches of some shop in the Ghum bazar, which usually disappeared quickly. And then no one knew how they had come or when other copies would again arrive. This kind of book was usually not very valuable. Yet I have often picked which are only delivered to the specially privileged. There are Such works as are judged in the eyes of the authorities to be own to me. I believe they deal as a rule with the higher arcana of tantrik philosophy. The matter deserves further n the Volumes delivered to the ordinary public the part corres- Ponding to these titles is not included. In our lists here 454 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, published 21 presses are named, butas they are practically all in Lhasa or in places along the road from India to Lhasa they can only represent an infinitesimal proportion of all the presses in Tibet and in the countries round Tibet where Tibetan is printed. Of Mongolia, Kashmir, am, China, practically nothing is said. Bhutan is reputed to have a great number of presses, with excellent prints, and with an extensive literature. The trilingual Chinese prints. Then there are Kashmir or such centres as Kumbum at the other extremity of the country. We may expect to find a really astounding output in the whole realm. All of this relates more or less to lamaistic literature, whether religious or secular ; mostly, of course, religious. But it is also said that there is a voluminous printed Bon literature about which practically nothing is known. Anyhow what has been mentioned is sufficient to show that literary discovery has still immense scope in Tibet The totals of our lists are as follows. The first list names 21 presses, and indicates 374 volumes. The number of leaves given in the second list comes to 4,017. The third list gives 74 titles. In all there are 219 entries, of which some are duplicates, and several are already known. Below I give the names of the 21 presses enumerated in our lists, together with the few notes I have gathered about them. ey May serve as a preliminary reconnaissance in this wv . Indian collections of which I have knowledge, as well as to some collateral matters of practical utility. — : _ In his detailed and careful compilation on Tibet Opisanie Tibeta (Description of Tibet), Vol. I], Part I (Vladivostok, additional data, I here append what he says about Tibetan printing. The remarks form part of note 116 in the Appendix weg = Sa = GA ceo Me eae eee na Poet EA i) = i 2 ia 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 455 at the end of the volume, and are to be found on pp. 109 and 110. He writes :— Tibet. Outside the country Tibetan books are printed in Peking (Sung-chu ssi), Urga, etc. In smaller printing houses, usually mere printing shops, only the common religious books and other works of small size are printed. In the larger establishments, too, usually the same kind of literature is dealt with, except when special orders are given. In the time of the fourth Urga Khutuktu the Urga print- ing house began to cut the wood-blocks for a Tibetan Kanjur, and 72 volumes of the 108 were finished when at the death of Khutuktu the work was discontinued. So the Urga Kanjur remains incomplete till the present day (1892, the time when A. Pozdneyey visited Urga). Many of the blocks that had been prepared have since been damaged or lost, and others have ecome worn out through printing. The Urga edition of the Kanjur may therefore be regarded as non-existent, though some of the poor Khalkha monasteries buy it and complete the missing parts in writing. The high cost of Tibetan works is chiefly caused by their length. Especially the collections of the Kanjur and the Tan- jur are very bulky and represent quite a capital. (Cf. Wassiliev, Notice, etc., pp. 375-376.) Nn most cases the purchaser who wants to buy a book, addresses himself to the nearest printing house where the blocks are kept of the book required by him, and orders a copy to be prepared for him. Kawaguchi acquired in this manner the greater part of the books he brought with him from fibet. As he told Walsh (Walsh, List of Tibetan books brought from Lhasa by Ekai Kawaguchi, 119-120), he had Wise it is a very common form of fraud to leave out a large number of leaves.” The rest of Kuehner’s note consists of extracts from Walsh’s introductory note to the list quoted, which, as bearing on our subject is mentioned below in its place under II, 1, 14, on P. 465. As this introductory note contains some details not a should likewise see Kawaguchi’s remarks on books and print- mg in a “Three Years in Tibet” (Adyar, Madras, 1909), 4, 3 ae i * Il. THE BIBLIOGRAPHY OF TIBET. All bibliographical literature about Tibet falls naturally under two main headings, the one treating of Tibetan works produced in Tibet, and the other of the study of Tibet by Westerners, be it scholars, travellers, missionaries or others. Under both headings important and numerous data can be entered. Arranging the available matter in tabular form the following scheme may be drawn up :— I. Tibet General. General Oriental Bibliography. Special Chinese Bibliography. . Special Buddhist Bibliography. Bibliographies in individual works on Tibet. Aa os II. Kanjur and Tanjur. Western Material. Eastern Material. so III. Extra-canonical Tibetan literature. IV. Collections and Book-sellers. In this scheme the first division deals mainly with Western books, about Tibet, the second and third with the literature of Tibet, and the fourth gathers some practical information which here in India is often little known. It would not be necessary to include the first two divisions in the present paper at all, if experience did not teach that bibliographical knowledge, even amongst students, is limited in this country, and that for the simple reason that it is nowhere taught or studied in India, has no proper literary organs, and is not aided, as in Europe, by ex- tensive library activity and the resources of great book collec- tions with all the paraphernalia of indexing, cataloguing and reference, and above all expert guidance. Our best libraries In India are at most second-rate according to Furopean standards, and few in number at that. Many small specialist libraries, excellent within narrow limits, are difficult of access beyond @ restricted geographical area. And nowhere in India is there any library which can even remotely strive after the ideal of some degree of practical and well-balanced completeness. Great numbers of books on any given subject, which may be found in some library or other in even the smaller European countries, cannot be found in any accessible library in the whole of this gigantic continent; and the totality of India’s book- wealth is so chopped up in small sections that it is often more practical to procure a work from Europe—with all the delays attendant on that procedure—than to waste time in 0 on nadie ~tt velit taa iat ~ ily antiangiogenic iia a = eee re EES ES a nT a re [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliog. of Tibet. 457 fruitless search along the many possible avenues of exploration leading to Madras, Bombay. Simla, Delhi, Lucknow, or wher- ever else. Itis for the same reason that I mention the names of a few book-sellers specialising in Oriental Literature, con- trary to the convention usually observed in learned journals. I. Tier Generat. a. Genera | Oriental Bibliography. 1. Orientalische Bibliographie (also with English title- page : Oriental Bibliography) A and E. Kuhn, 4 vols., from 1883 to 1886 ; now “ Orientalische Bibliographie,” lastly edited by Lucian Schermann, from 1887. The latest bound volume in the Imperial Library is Vol. 22, and contains the titles for 1908. Published in 1910. Since the outbreak of the war this indispensable work has ceased to appear but recently information has reached India stating that there is a probability of the resumption of its publication. A separate special bibliography of works on Tibet does not yet exist. In the above work Tibet has a separate head- ing. The Imperial Library in Calcutta has a complete set of the third series ; the Adyar Library a nearly complete set of all the three series. 2. Recent works on Tibet are periodically recorded in the excellent subject indexes to the modern works added to the Library of the British Museum, of which the various volumes are dated 1902, 1906 (for 1901-1905), 1911 (for 1906-1910) and 1918 (for 1911-1915). In the Imperial Library. b. Special Chinese Bibliography. The older “‘ Manual of Chinese Bibliography ” by P. G. and QO. F. Von Mollendorff, Shanghai, 1876, has a special section devoted to Tibet. sors. is work is now superseded by the “ Bibliotheca Sinica,’ of H. Cordier, Paris, 1904-1907 (2nd edition), 4 vols., which in Vol 4 devotes about 68 columns to Tibet, and this part of the work constitutes in reality the fullest special Tibetan bibliography extant. In this work also the section Bud- ism naturally contains much matter of interest to Tibetan 458 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, students. A supplement to this work is now in progress of publication. Publisher Paul Geuthner, Paris. It is to bring the literature up-to-date to 1920. The mone part of this supplement has appeared in 1923. c. Special Buddhist Bibliography. Of the older works the following may be mentioned :— 1. Otto Kistner. Buddha and his doctrines: A biblio- 69. grap 0 1 2. Albert J. Edmunds. A Buddhist vuplestephy: Journal of the Pali Text Society. London, 1903. Three recent works of great practical utility are :— 3. Hans Ludwig Held. Deutsche Bibliographie des Bud- | ismus. Munich-Leipzic, 1916 (2544 entries). 4. Ida A. Pratt. Buddhism. A list of references in the 1916 > ' New York Public Fahaey. New York, : - Dr. Hans Haas. Bibliographie zur Frage nach den Weehselbeziehungen zwischen Buddhismus und Christentum. Leipzig, 1922. d. Bibliographies in individual works on Tibet. 1. Emil Schlagintweit. Buddhism in Tibet. (Biblio- graphy, pp. 331-369.) Leipzic, 1863. . 2. Id., French translation by Léon Feer. Annales du usée Guimet. Grande Bibliothéque, Série in 4°, Vol. 881. 3. L. A. Waddell. The Buddhism of Tibet. (Biblio- graphy, pp. 578-583.) London, 1895. 4. Berthold Laufer. Verkiirzte Version des Werkes von den Hunderttausend WNaga’s. Helsingfors, 1898 (Memoirs of “ ieee -Ugrian Society, Vol. XI) Bibliograp . 1-7 5. Albert Grin wedal: MN ythologie des Buddhismus in Tibet und der Mongolei (in the notes, behind, pas- sim). Leipzig, 1900. . 6. Sarat Chandra Das. Tibetan-English Dictionary. List of references on pp. xxvii-xxxii. Calcutta, 1902. 7. Berthold Laufer. Skizze der Mon ngolischen Literatur. In Keleti Szemle Noohtee Orientale), VIII (1907), also separately print 8. Guenther Schuleman. Die Geschichte der Dalai Lamas. Heidelberg, 1911 (in footnotes, numerous references). 9. A Getty. The Gods of Northern Buddhism. Oxford, London, 1914. ws Spats be pp. 183-186.) 10. Emil Trinkler. Tibet. Sein geographisches Bild und r ) 3 1922. (Contains an excellent geographical biblio. graphy enumerating 362 items.) 1922.) A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 459 These are some of the main works, giving rich biblio- graphical material. Nearly all that B. Laufer has written con- bibliographical material must be looked for in general geo- graphical and missionary literature. JI have no important references at hand for these, except No. 10, quoted above, though this literature should not be neglected. (See Addenda, behind.} II. Kansgur anp TanJour. a. Western Materval. Csoma de Koérés. Analysis of the Kanjur and Tanjur in Vol. 20 of the Asiatic Researches, the precursor of this Journal, Calcutta, 1836. (In various separate articles.) Thou ugh better and more complete catalogues of the contents of both collections have been published since, and scientific detail has been attended to to a far greater degree than in Csoma’s work, his catalogue is still the only one in any European language which not. only enumerates “but describes the contents of the first of these two large cyclopedias, the Kanjur, and as such his work with reference to the Kanjur is still almost as valuable as it was nearly a century ago on its appearance. In fact, in a way more valuable, because at present better use can be made of his data. His analysis of the Tanjur, on the contrary, is too brief and fragmentary to be of use 2. This work was translated by Léon Feer, in Vol. 2 of the Annales du Musée Guimet, Paris, 1881. Feer, arranged =o ae whole material in a practical way and added valuable inc 3 oe dex des Kandjur. Preface by I. J. Schmidt, Im- ee Academy of Sciences of St. Petersburg. St. Petersburg, A lithographic reproduction, in Tibetan character, of an indigenous index, without commentaries or translations. Copy in the othe Library. 4. Hermann Beckh. (Catalogue of the Kanjur.) Hand- schriften- alr eet der Kéniglichen Bibliothek zu Berlin. Vol. 24, Part 1 (Kan Detailed digas: and criticism of No. 4 in the next two numbers, 5. Paul Pelliot. Notes & propos d’un catalogue du Kan- jur.. fg Asiatique, July-August, 1914, pp. 111- 150. 7 Bark rthold Laufer. Tibetan Manuscripts (Book review). ERAS, 1914, pp. 1124-1139. aS P. Cordier. Index du Bstan-hgyur. Second an 460 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, - Anton Schiefner. Ueber die logischen und gramma- tischen Werke im Tanjur. St. Petersburg (18472). In the Bulletin de la Classe historico-philologique de ]’Acad. Imp. des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg, T. IV. Nos. 18,19. Also reprinted in the Mélanges Asiatiques of that body, and as a separate pamphlet. 9. Georg Huth. Verzeichniss der im Tibetischen Tanjur, Abtheilung mDo (Siitra), Band 117-124, enthaltenen Werke. In the Sitzungsberichte of the Royal Ac. of Sciences in Berlin, 1895. 10. A brief supplementary note to No. 9, by the same Author, in Z.D.M.G., XLIX (1895), pp 279-284. Title: Nachtriigliche Ergebnisse. etc. - Sarat Chandra Vidyabhusana. Numerous articles in the J.A.S.B., New Series, mainly in Vols. 1-6, 1905-1910. It will be seen from the above that we have at present only two easily accessible, satisfactory catalogues of the Kanjur and one only of the Tanjur. The enormous mass of material in the form of names of authors, translators, revisers, etc. ; 0 countries, places, monasteries : and of kings and other historical persons, mentioned in the pages of these volumes cannot be fully exploited until indexes to all of them have been made. Here isa true mine of treasure awaiting students. The numbers 8 to 10 all deal more or less with the same small group of volumes in more or less the same manner, and are largely superseded by No. 7. emarkable and very special contributions of value to the knowledge of the Kanjur are furnished by the two following :— 12. Berthold Laufer. Die Kanjur-Ausgabe des Kaisers K‘ang-hsi. Bulletin of the Imperial Academy of Sciences of St. Rees 1909, pp. 567-574 hold Erstes Heft. Malerei Das Citralakshana, Leipzic, 1913. (Spe- Z 62. erthold Laufer. Descriptive account of the Collec- Lihat jiehs stele ai { ! SS ne nagar tenor rite ei! ew SSC 2 Se 1922.j A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 461 Mainly about the Kanjur and Tanjur, but with some general remarks on Tibetan literature, pp. 6-12, and with further matter on the Chinese Tripitaka. 15. An article by “ X” on The Tibetan Tripitaka, in the Imperial and Asiatic quarterly Review, 3rd series, Vol. 28, 1909, (Woking), pp. 335-337, seems hardly important enough to include it here. (See also Addenda, behind.) b. Eastern Material. In the first place we have the Tibetan material, represent- ed by the Tibetan Index published in St. Petersburg (see immediately above, a, No. 3), as well as by the various other Tibetan indexes preserved in various collections and described in various lists. So for instance the several indexes to Kanjur and Tanjur in the St. Petersburg list of Schmidt and Béhtlingk (see below under m1, extra-canonical literature), which cover 23 numbers. What these titles really represent is not at all sure as yet. The Schmidt-Bohtlingk list (Nos. 278-279) speaks of a Tanjur printed in Potala. My informants main- tain that such a Tanjur does not exist. They may be right or may be wrong, but the matter deserves inquiry. hey explain the existence of several different Kanjur and Tanjur indexes by the statement that these refer to manuscript copies and not printed ones, Whether true or not, the suggestion is interesting enough, ext, the oriental material is represented by what can be learnt from the Chinese Tripitaka, because we may regard this as, in a measure, a Chinese equivalent of the Kanjur and Tanjur. Most of our information about this collection is now derived from Western scholars, and they have certainly fur- nished the material most easily accessible and useable by Tibetanists, who may not know Chinese. So the matter is Perhaps slightly out of place here under this heading. If so, hat may be forgiven. The following publications deserve mention, mostly available in India. _ 1. Samuel Beal. ‘The Buddhist Tripitaka as it is known in China and Japan. A catalogue and compendious report. Devonport, 1876. Now superseded. -_ Bunyiu Nanjio. A catalogue of the Chinese translation of the Buddhist Tripitaka, ete. Oxford, 1883. In the Imperial Library. This work contains a very detailed introductory “ssay on the bibliography of the Tripitaka in China. 3. E. Denison Ross. Alphabetical List of the titles of works in the Chinese-Buddhist Tripitaka (Index to Bunyiu Nanjio and to the 1905 Kioto reprint). Calcutta, 1910. Alfred Forke. Katalog des Pekinger Tripitaka. (Royal piracy Berlin.) Berlin, 1916. Describes a copy which, un- appily, is not altogether complete. : ext come the truly oriental catalogues, those contained 462 J-urnal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII. in the Tokyo Tripitaka and in the Kyoto Tripitaka. The complete collections of the former edition (with the indexes) ) gs part of the latter edition (with the indexes) is in the Imperial Library. It is further reported that the Calcutta University is arranging to acquire a copy of the recent Shanghai edition. Of a practical catalogue raisonné of the Chinese Tripitaka, in ten volumes, entitled [ra] Hex FN "Eee Yiieh-tsang-chih-ching, and mentioned by Nanjio in his introductory essay, several copies are in Calcutta, one in my own possession. For the Pali canon a reference to the publications of the Pali Text Society is almost sufficient. Of the King of Siam’s edition there is a copy in the Library of the Calcutta University, pecial bibliographical essay dealing with the relation of the Agama literature in Chinese and Pali :— Prof. M. Anesaki. The four Buddhist Agamas in Chinese, a concordance of their parts and of the corresponding counter- parts in the Pali Nikayas. In the Transactions of the Asiatic Society of Japan Vol. 35, part 3. Yokohama, 1908. The bibliography of the Chinese Tripitaka, however, forms a special subject which cannot be pursued further at the present occasion. TH, Exrra-canonicat TIBETAN LITERATURE. political mission to Tibet, which was in process of being prepared in 1903. Dr. Th to Tibet. The memorandum, dated January 18th, 1904, was followed by two important appendices. One gave a list 0 | | f ! f ( li ¥ 1922. ] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 463 hitherto published library catalogues of Tibetan books, and the other a list of titles of extra-canonical Tibetan books 3. I. J.Schmidt and O. Bohtlingk. List (Verzeichniss) of the Tibetan MSS. and Xylographs in the Asiatic Museum of the Imperial Academy of Sciences, St. Petersburg. Published in the Bull. hist.-philol. Vol. [V., Nos. 6, 7, 8. Reprinted separately [1846]. A. Tibetan works, 520 entries. B, Tibeto-Mongolian and Tibeto-Mongolian-Chinese works, 43 entries. C. Duplicates, 141 entries. 4. A. Schiefner. Addenda (Nachtriige) to the above. Same Bulletin, Vol. V, No. 10, reprinted separately without date (about 1848). 58 entries. - A. Schiefner. Report (Bericht) about the latest con- signment of books from Peking. Same Bulletin, Vol. VIII, Nos. | and 2, 185]. Reprinted separately. 1. Works relating to India [in Tibetan], 11 entries. 2. Tibetan works, 43 entries. : 3. Tibetan works with translations, 3 entries. [4. Manchu works, 12 entries. | Nos. 3-5 together constitute a collection of the greatest importance. It is reported that since the issue of the latest list, of 1851, an enormous amount of additional material has accumulated in the St. Petersburg Institution, but no further catalogues of the new acquisitions have appeared. The above lists all give full Tibetan titles, together with a German translation of them, and if present, the equivalent Sanskrit titles. - 6. Catalogue of the Books and MSS. in the eng Manchu, Mongolian, Tibetan, and Sanskrit languages, in the Asiatic Department, St. Petersburg, 1844. Number of entries for Tibetan not given ; reference taken from Dr. Thomas’ list. : S. in th 7. Emil Schlagintweit. Catalogue of Tibetan MSS. in the Royal Library, Munich (Die tibetischen Handschriften, etc.). 464 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, In the Abh. of the Phil.-Hist. Class I of the Bavarian Academy (Munich, 1875). Reprinted separately. 48 entries. 8. Emil Schlagintweit. List of Tibetan MSS. in the Wur- temburg State Library in Stuttgart (Verzeichniss). In the transactions of the philos-pilol. and hist. class of the Munich Academy, 1904, pp. 245-270. Reprinted separate- ly. 22 entries. . Emil Schlagintweit [?]. List of MSS. collected by his brothers and incorporated in the Bodleiana in Oxford. Schlagintweit (Bericht iiber eine Adresse, etc., p. 659) states that his brothers brought home 101 Tibetan items from uddhist monasteries in the frontier regions of Central Tibet. “A detailed description is in preparation” (1904). Laufer (Ein Siithngedicht der Bonpo, p. 1, 1899) mentions a ‘short lithographed list’ of these: ‘Tibetan Manuscripts, Schla- gintweit Collection.”” Mr. A. Cowley, of the Bodleian, had the kindness to inform me in 1918: ‘‘ We havea lithograph ed copy of a catalogue of the Tibetan MSS. bought from Dr. Schla- gintweit, but we have no spare copy which we can send.” 10. Lama Phun-tshog Wangdan. A catalogue of Tibetan Block-prints and Manuscripts brought from Tibet, by Cri Sarat Chandra Das in 1879 and 1882. A footnote says: This list was first made in May 1886 by Lama Phun-tshog Wangdan. Date and place of issue are not given. It is not evident that this important list has been officially published. Probab- ly Sarat Chandra Das distributed it privately to his literary friends. The list is divided into two portions, enumerating 165 and 42 numbers, 207 in all. The 42 works of the second portion are said to be in the library of the Government High School at Darjeeling. In a note in Schlagintweit’s Bericht, quoted above, it is said that the other 165 works arein Calcutta. The majority of these have since found a permanent place in the Library of the Calcutta University. It is a strange coincidence that this very valuable list has remained as hidden to the general public as Dr. Thomas’ Memorandum. ll. P.Ghosha. A nominal list of Tibetan Manuscripts and Xylographs in the Library of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. o date. A very imperfect and incorrect hand-list. 177 entries of which the first 120 seem to refer to the Kanjur. 12. _H. Wenzel. List of Tibetan MSS. and printed books in the Library of the Royal Asiatic Society (of London). J.R.AS., 1892. (NewS. 24, pp. 570-9.) 29 MSS., 18 prints; many incomplete and fragmentary. 13. Berthold Laufer, List (Verzeichniss) of the Tibetan ee ge a a —— —— 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 465 MSS. in the Royal Library in Dresden. Z.D.M.G., 1901, pp. 99-128. 138 entries. 14. E. H.C. Walsh. A List of Tibetan books brought from Lhasa by the Japanese Monk, Mr. Ekai Kawa Gochi. J.A.S.B., Vol. 73, Pt. £, pp. 118-177, 1904. 81 entries, of which several sub-divided. 15. Tsibikov. Musei Asiatici Petropolitani Notitie, IV, 1904. (Tsibikov and Stcherbatskoi.) No number of entries. (From a MS. Note in Dr. Thomas’ Memorandum.) - L.A. Waddell. Tibetan Manuscripts and books, etc., collected during the Younghusband Mission to Lhasa. The Imperial and Asiatic Quarterly Review and Oriental and Colonial Record. Third Series, July 1912, Vol. 34, No. 67, pp. 80-113. 464 entries li. Vol. VIII, 1838, pp. 147-52. Reprinted by E. D. Ross, J.P.A.S.B., N.S., Vol. 7, extra No. 1, 1912; also Csoma’s Grammar, pp. 179-180. : 19. Bernh. Dorn. Das Asiatische Museum der Kaiser- lichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu St. Petersburg. St. Petersburg, 1846. “Mentions a very few works.” From Dr. Thomas’ Memorandum.) 20. Catalogue of Oriental MS. and Xylographs of the Imperial Public Library of St. Petersburg (Bibliothéque Im- périale, Catalogue, etc.) St. Petersburg, 1852. Enumerates only ten items, mostly of only a few pages, and without im- portance. The only interesting entry is the one mentioning the famous leaf found in 1777 in Siberia, on which Bayer mis- Spent so much labour. Mention must also be made of : j 21. Wassiliew. Die auf Buddhismus beziiglichen Werke der Universitéts-Bibliothek zu Kasan. Bulletin of the St. Petersburg Academy, Vol. XI and Mélanges Asiatiques, Vol. II, pp. 347-86. St. Petersburg. Also reprinted separately. More a literary than a bibliographical essay ; yet valuable. ‘ n addition to the above I have met with two titles whic Seem to refer to other publications than any of the above :— 22. Catalogue of. the Sanskrit, Mongolian, Tibetan, Man- churian and Chinese books and MSS. preserved in the library 466 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, of the Imperial University of Kasan, (in Russian), Kasan, 1834. Quoted by Laufer in his sketch of Mongolian Literature, p. 166. (This is not the same as No. 21, and the list does not seem to be mentioned anywhere else.) 23. Wassiliew. Notice sur les ouvrages en languages de Asie orientale que se trouvent dans la Bibliothéque de I’Uni- versité de Saint-Pétersbourg, 1856. (From Geuther’s Ephée- mérides, 65, March, 1923.) It is not evident, however. whether this list contains any Tibetan titles. Scrutinising the above lists, we find that the bulk of im- portant information and material is contained in Nos. 3, 4, 5. 10, 14 and 16. Nos. 6, 15, 19 and 20 are little accessible, and Nos. 6, 9,15 and 21 may contain some important titles. The old St. Petersburg lists and No. 14 are most satisfactory to deal with, as they give the titles in full, in correct transcrip- tion. Waddell’s list is curiously inequal, giving full details for some titles and only summarised translations for others. Wangdan’s titles are written with oriental freedom. Walsh has, unfortunately, given no attention whatever to the relation of his works to Sanskrit literature. The descriptions in No. 17 are insufficient and the list only serves as an indication of the existence of the works it mentions. My own titles are insuf- ficient for strict bibliographical purposes. Whether the time has arrived to amalgamate all these titles into a small Cata- logus Catalogorum may be doubted. Nevertheless the totality of the data furnished by our lists brings ample material and is sufficient to indicate the richness of Tibetan extra-canonical literature, opening vistas in many _ Rev. Father Felix, 0.C. Remarks on the Tibetan Manuscript Vocabularies in Bishop’s College, Calcutta. -A.8.B., New Series, Vol. VIIT, 1912, pp. 379-397. PRs A Re ee ee Ea TT eee ee ee ee 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 467 IV. CoLLECTIONS AND BOOKSELLERS. a. Collections. It is known that greater or lesser collections of Tibetan books are in the possession of many of the well-known Tibetan scholars whose names are familiar to students of Tibetan matters. References to such collections have been made in connection with the names of Prof. Griinwedel in Berlin, M. Jacques Bacot in Paris, Dr. B. Laufer in Chicago,! Dr. | Hackmann (see the illustration in his “‘ Von Omi bis Bhamo my The Moravian Missionaries from Ladakh, Dr. H. A. Francke, Mr. 8 Ribbach and others, probably have gathered interesting material. Sir Claude A. Bell, late Political Resident in Sikhim, is reputed to have a very rich collection. Most of Waddell’s and Schlagintweit’s books seem to musi passed into the posses- sion of public institutions. 1 myself possess a collection of slightly over a thousand sian, “halt MSS. and half prints. In Darjeeling a brisk trade is being done in ornamental MSS. of Prajfidparamita texts, mostly Astasahasrikas, written in gold or silver. Rich globe- -trotters carry them off to all parts volume had just been acquired by a London commercial m nate. Many missionaries must undoubtedly have brought ok with them to Europe, either from the Chinese frontiers, or from Ladakh or Sikhim. The Vatican should possess some curious relics of former missions, as well as, perhaps, more re- cent material. The headquarters of missions operating on the borders of Tibet, whether Moravian, eect si See or aga Catholic are sure to have some collecti As far as — collections in India are specail T know OF the follow 1. Tho “meas pete: of Bengal, Calcutta. Complete pine and Tanjur, and some 50 extra-canonical works, and e MS. Bum referred to have 2. The Caleutta University. A Kanjurand Tanjur. An excellent MS. of the first three Paramita texts, a so-called Bum, 16 vols. The bulk of Sarat Chandra Das’ private ! Laufer in his sketch of Mongolian Literature, quoted above, states, P. 165-166, that his private library of Mongolian and Tibetan prints contains about a thousand cat plat . rag Férderung der tibetisch- ™Mongolischen Studien bin ich jeder Zeit gern bereit, hese se Werke aus dieser Sammlung zur freien Benutzung zu tibe 468 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIIT, collection, and a hundred various volumes as below, together with some further material. Recently increased by a very valuable collection of an- ti other hundred volumes brought from Lhasa, and some time before that by a copy of the RF SATHN RES, Precious Treasury (of the religious literature of the different Nying- mapa sects), in 63 vols. It is said that there are in Tibet five such religious miscellanies or cyclopedias of which this is one; each restricted to the writings of a particular sect, or rather group of sects. The saying is AES SH SSO; there are five different religious treasuries. Together they comprise about 200 volumes. One is devoted to Gelukpa matter, one to the Nyingmapa, one to the Kagyiipa, one to the Sakyapa and one to general knowledge. They were collected together by a famous Tibetan encyclopedist, mo" aN: mt "Rae who PAA GAs, lived to the ripe age of 86 and died about 30 years ago. He lived in Kham, Derge, where this colossal work was pub- lished. A second edition of the Nyingmapa part only was in recent times completed in Sy Ar aar'e” A short bio- graphy of this remarkable Tibetan polygraphist exists. volumes, as above, comprising the complete works of the first tshab-rje and Mkhas-grub-rje), further of Atisha, Brom-ston, Dge-hdun-grub, some 15 volumes of Nyaya texts, the works of four Yongdzins or Lama-teachers, and some minor works. 4. The Adyar Library, Madras. A Kanjur and Tanjur and half a dozen other works. cated and commented upon above. There may be other public collections in India of which I am not aware. All the Kanjurs and Tanjurs mentioned above are Narthang prints. Some are exceedingly badly legible, and the multiplicity of copies in India is inno way excessive. In ., ention must be made of the curious history of two Tibetan works brought to Calentta in the time of Warren Hastings, 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 469 graphy of 8. Gaur Das Bysack. Notes on a Buddhist Monastery at Bhot Bagan (Howrah), on two rare and valuable Tibetan MSS. discovered there, etc. J.A.S.B., Vol. 49, Part I, for 1890 (1891), pp. 50-99, with two plates. See also Proceedings of the A.S.B. for January 1889, pp. 8-12, on this subject. Besides the above collections in European and Indian hands, there are, of course, the monastery and private collec- tions in Ladakh and in and around Sikhim. Bhutan, being practically inaccessible, need not be mentioned. Ladakh is rather out of the way for most students, but Darjeeling and its neighbourhood are next-door to Calcutta. In the Darjeeling, the Ghoom and the Gying (AIC) monasteries (the two latter each a few miles from Darjeeling) there are Kanjurs (Narthang), but no Tanjurs. m pong monastery there is only a Bum. In the Sikhim monas- teries there is said to be material which it would be worth In the Nepalese Durbar Library at Katmandu (or in an- other library in that place?) there is at least a Tanjur, and this copy seems to be another than the Narthang print as it does not contain a certain text incorporated in this. b. Booksellers. “yp ised book-trade for scientific purposes is still in a primitive Europe. It would be impossible to give, or even attempt to a8 a practical branch of Orientalism, in the same sense as Science is classed as Pure and Applied, without difference in rinciple. 470 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [N.S., XVIII, In pamiend ; uzac & Co. , Oriental and Foreign Booksellers, 46, Great Russell Street, W.C. I. a very instructive + ‘Iuzac’s Oriental List and Book Review ” "| 1922, Vol. 33), and periodically catalogues of second- hand books amongst which a Bibliotheca Orientalis of which about 25 numbers have appeared. Probsthain & Co. (J. Murray- Wood), Oriental Booksellers, 41, Great Russell Street, London, W.C. ] Issue second-hand catalogues, ae Oriental Catalogue, 0. 33. EK. L. Morice, Museum Street, London, W.C. Used to specialise in Chinese and Central- Asian literature, issuing useful catalogues. Has d died, and his stock has been acquired by Messrs. Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co., Ltd., 39, oy Oxford Street, London, W.C. rnard Quaritch, Ld., 11, Grafton Street, New Bond Peres W. 1, London Spec ially seetul for rare works and MSS., old editions and phate generally. Most sumptuous catalogues (present num - ber past 370). Sie Edwards, 83, High Street, Marylebone, London, W. "Fre equent Meroe specially rich in recent literature re- lating to India, No. 437 in No vember, 1922. John Grant, Homksctige: 31, George IV Bridge, Edinburgh. Frequent Orientalia. B.H. Blackwell, ee , 50 and 51, Broad Street, Oxford. Frequent catalogue John M. Wenne OL, Cecil Court, Charing Cross Road London, W.C. 2. Specialises in mystical and philosophical lecture of East and West, Catalogues. W. Heffer & Sons, Ltd., Cambridge England. Speciali ise in “ Remainders,” but also publish a ‘‘ Bibliotheca Asiatica ( eps sguey cand books), of which the 13th Number was pub- ished : pie & Co.,. 43, Piccadilly, London, W. 1. Latest gota No. 75. Gecauienal Orientalia. n Fra; Paul Gate 13 rue Jacob, Paris VIe- Issues valuable «“ Ephém érides, ” latest issue No. 66. Both new and second- hand Orientalia In German Otto Re Leipzig, octane 14. Used to issue, before the war, most valuable ‘ ““ Berichte,’’ which lately have been in suspense. Has issu es a profusion of catalogues, mostly on Orientalia (No. sida in 1923). Latterly these cat- alogues have been less frequ arl W. Hiersemann. Hye 29, Leipzig. 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 471 Valuable catalogues ; about 500 issued. Joseph Baer & Co., Frankfort am Main. Hochstrasse 6. Not specially Orientalising, but occasionally issuing goo catalogues on Oriental subjects. About 700 numbers to date. In Holland : i. J. Brill, Oude Rijn, Leiden. Especially strong in literature relating to the Dutch-East-Indies and Mohammad- anism, but also general Orientalism. Latest second-hand catalogue No. 75. Martinus Nijhoff, Lange Voorhout 9, The Hague. out 500 catalogues issued. Most of the firms mentioned above are not only dealers in second-hand books, but also general booksellers and in many cases publishers. It should be distinctly understood that mention or absence of mention of any name in the above list or the order of publications such as Catalogues, Notices, Journals, etc., saat brief few-line indication of their specialities. That wou the second-hand book-trade and study. ee _ As there does not exist any publishing-house specia =a in new publications on Tibet, the trade in new books is alto- gether left out of consideration in the above. ! Recently a Chinese Monk has founded an ‘‘ Tetoragsionel © scree Book Depot” first in Calcutta, now in Rangoon. His name a are Kev. S. Wan Hui, Post Box No. 971, Rangoon é intermediary between Buddhists in the East and Western books i. Bud ‘ dhism on the one hand, and between Western scholars and Laster dhist books on the other. Ill. LIST OF TIBETAN PRESSES. In order not to swell the bulk of this article too much I refrain from giving here references to works about Lhasa and Tibet generally, which would furnish additional information about the presses mentioned. I only note down the oral in- formation received from my informants. | MAASAI G hasa. Press of the ay di AAAIR Gelukpa. In Lhasa. Pres a or school of that name. About 100 tapas. se ALTREC Gelukpa. In Lhasa. Press of the aya of that name. About 170 tapas. It has been re- 2 and of another private press the avAC Of this last press most blocks have been cut anew and so have been replaced. 3. eagay Nyingmapa. About one day south of Lhasa. Number of inmates unknown. 4. TBA AQT AA Kagyiipa. aR, Bhutan. No details. bes 5. Ok yaaa In Lhasa. In the basti under the Potala alls. Described as the only large ‘secular’ or ‘ official’ (i.e. ran by the government) printing place in Tibet. 6. AVE RBS Gelukpa. In Lhasa. The monas- tery of the late teacher, or Yongdzin (now dead), of the pre- sent Dalai Lama. About 50 to 60 tapas. . STANCES Sect and number of tapas unknowa. South of Lhasa. Distance unknown. . ASA Rr Bg WE’ Gelukpa. One of the many presses wa ee a ee Ce a i [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibl. of Tibet. 473 of the separate colleges ( aya" ) in Dapung. Lhasa. About 200 to 300 tapas. : 9. AAS Hoa aSe ey Gelukpa. Lhasa. The college ~ for the people from Tsang ( SQN AN SS ) About 100 to 200 tapas. 10. Aaa Hoar 3A5 Gelukpa. Lhasa. A press which serves the ise of the Dapung monastery as a whole (y = general), and not any individual college. AINCSEPaIC’ Gelukpa. Lhasa. From 500 to ARSC A A 600 tapas. AQAAN CARA’ Gelukpa. Lhasa. 100 tapas. avyeery 13. Ana ycaraaar ew (or Sas Rs BF) Galuk. pa. Lhasa. 100 tapas. 14. AXA HCAS’ Gelukpa. Lhasa. BR ANT AF S 100 tapas. 15. Say aC Gelukpa. Lhasa. 100 tapas. / 16. HSN AAS (=BFQCAENS ) Kayyiipa. One day North of Lhasa. Number of tapas unknown. 17. AAT ASS | = Qa Reale? ) South of Lhasa. -No further details. 18. agagaraysy South of Lhasa. No details. (Ax qerayar seems not to be the real name of the monastery, but that of its presiding incarnation). 19. BIGNESS Gelukpa. Lhasa. 200 tapas. 20. Sie SINE Gelukpa. Lhasa. The Sera tantri- kas, 1,000 tapas. 474 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] .— an 21. Ey 35 Aaa Sect unknown. About three days south of Lhasa. No further details. This name seems doubt- ful, might be aa50", the name of a district. at ee Re ee ae ee ene alti. seep ee eee ea — ve PRET a anon ey zr VEWET \ a — IV. TEXT OF THE BOOK LISTS. ARSENE ACSA C'S ae Byagarg Sy a argsradjar AIRS Sargar sy 5g a4 BF SN RSS Farsygs'a jar e855 % gg y as Baar ARCA ASE TAN SAA ACS | AN'AA SS AST AN ALT VATA REA DAN SN Sor agay CATR AR ST AA Jplai-ieatl asl barn. aes yy 29 476 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 13 ~~ i ANTIVIR AAS ACAI TARTAN AACA ge SehansaeaL aI RES TAIT AN AA AC ANA ARAL Sa TSS BNF AR Ca eyA sa1g5 SARS SAGAS 55 SREELE cay QQ Qar'S5 2 Aa rjarey HV Asra a STNG QE ACSA ACS | ana aR asa ap uaeaal lanes 2 sara PAA ST San ayaa se axpagy [N.S., XVIII, e A ad i GME Ee a 1922.] Oo foe 3 Or 47) 48 A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. qc EarGagor ATIAAa| AN SFAeaqarer BN ATAT AGT SRA SARA'S | ANAT SHR Raqagrage BAN RA AFOAACS | NANA IYO AGT SAIN AR HA ASAT RSS AR Re siqersc ey sig ash ews UE ATIA‘AgSH eal rye sPesrcrscsr ger SVAN NASA BC'S | SRAIRAQY a QaaC Mac aga 477 478 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. AINA NAT AR gy AICS qa RATS ASV EA SES TIRANA acy yaa MARAE SICA ASIN AREAS ACS | CAPRA SANA ASIC Raae crak Amc GASB | Balas Gia) Gary TAIT al BAN sv ASAT aaar SAA ART RAT AT A gare’ [N.S., XVIII, SR SS a ee eee ee a ~I K=) (e ) oO Go _ i? 2) bo 83 8 i or 8 A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. ASEAN SH SFB) arg ANS ARC RST SR ATR SAT ATA‘ ar AMR "IE" arg] ATA IETS RS RING'S ESAS TSAAL AA AST HER AES SIRE x 5 5 SF CHA AC AA Arary” VAST SATA Resear S aay caper 7 FTC RS | STAT ABT AA ae AC kar saz s STAN ARC IS STA qAgs Aria 5) BG ai alata | AAS AATAT IGS a ays mat asr Sar 479 480 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, to Ww ALA ANASAN RS | Bar SI = 9 PTT STA RIT 2 BRST ANAS 9 SRE SN 9 SATARAR AC | AGN AESA GN HVASSTNOAIN als Rar qay 2 | STA STARS | ATT IAT SY AGA TIS HIN AG IQR AGE 2 AZVAAVAS ACS | AF ARAN SES eis SN 9 ‘s MAA ALCS nagy aaa 2 TARGA SEN AR BISA QCA ‘ ISS SACS ? aT EEG : AMEN TNA HTT SFE ITE 7 VHYASN AAS ? 1922.] A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 481 SAY NSEC AC | lol AR ATNES AS 102 aicgay 2 108 GAAS > RFA INT P| 104 ST AGFARTTSS ANC AGA 2 QATAR CY 105 SGV FELOARA a 106 AST AUST YS , 9 Tee Gasealaad 107 ATT ASO’ HINT aw los. Car aayaes’ e ER QATEIR AC 109 NFA AAAI | 9 AF are Oy Peesey FRAN ATIC | 110 ANA ARRAS EAST I RPA GCS AIA GNIS 23 ¥YSS 482 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 112 AQ erga gsrer 904, 113. INARA “sy x4 Aa -gardis 2 Qzq ajar Soe 115 INA’ARAISTASTA IC AN SG Hara AES “c) om 116 INRARAN SN AIS BAS ANG ATEN SIN RIES 2 70% LIT ARNT IS aC ay NRA RES 2A SINT STASIS 92 118 pala al NG Et v2 119 SVARS STATS ASA ay 298 120 ANAT SCAT SAA re) 121 SATHCar 23 122 WRASST TAA 34 SAT AAT SER SA S15 EAT SHAE ESCO ANE ERT RAST 42 123 BSA FAL SANT RES ATS Ay SAAN ECA A sEerag ug 124 PAREN TSC HA gsraseraaarer Ih 125 TOVeyA ay 126 Fae TASHA Sayermsersysverae 9h RT SRTSC AS AR Sepa IME Garg asar 22 a EE tp 138 13 K=) A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. “ 483 aka ga" 7 5" Agr eAmjar me ART ASAIN ur Qs 29 gras Rg TR saaie Saiergsage ve ARS S518 SIN BACB ES a4 2 PARSE SFE AAR as ARR yr gor 9 PIS FRAN Sa PQS AVTA NT IYT A GATT ATES TITAS pata AQAGT aN ESE oe. | CAP SSICTAST IAIN) S81 GNSS AST gy RSS NN RES LY 2S eRcar APTA SSL AA FAG AN RSA’ BAH AWN ASSES A vv Aavers stig Rar SMG FAN: Fa Sane VAST TASS v2 AS ARRAS GIT anal as y 351 5: ATTEN GAVE IN AEST S38 ACES OT YT ASA’ AAT INE AC AST RES cy" 996 yaar ARTA SAA’ ASIST na Bayer SN QA QESTAISS ARF EAANS chien RIES Cy aes 484 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 140 TSF TANGA Gera ge an dy SES CN ve M41 QESTASEATABRS SSA SOE BATA garg E R055) AVES: zy DI" 142 NIN QELS ARS RSQ ars xr g 18 ~J 18 @ 18 =) ~ ay’ are inal SQA | Heras Sry VaR sy VE | AS SEAS SAS] ovate is| FEW AFT INAS | SSISUET S8} 9.98 AAR SFA RT CATS all N FATS | SLAG TAL ITS BA AY THN ASN ANNA] | PITA’ | TAF TATATLS SOQS AQIS ARS ANS TAS AA | ARRTASEA AIA Aa RS VARS BS | GRA IFAT A HVI9 S859] F AMAIA IN Sarg RIFT ATR SASS alae 44 AEnarSy gq Sq Ge RH ical SPSS ARASH ART ISAT RAR So aay Hraraeas a: sr are x 55781 5m ABE AS lia RSS UME Mili he ela AB nt et a A Contribution to the Bibliography of Tibet. 487 graqqstey PASTA ASC A gN ISS IQR | QANTAS IS IIS SAIN | SHAT TAFT TAS TSF | Pa eENy] J] NTA AAS ILI AAAS HIST ASS | SF DINAY TINY NAN ASA AA | PRA AA AAAS] TAA ATA | FP HT YNAA PNT SVAIC PAS | RIAN ASL AT AAAS AGATA IA gS TACT BRS IVA ASC ISN | RAEN SHUR AA HH HA TACATAASS | HHA san Gee aqas | ant sahara ogy eT) ela erga at S595 any Sy SE ITIAATA sR GI SRA ay HEA NAN SATA Ravage gage Lays | 488 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] 210 BARPASA ITAA ICA 211 SATASR AAS | PAWC'AgS | 212 ARRAS AAS AQ AIA | ais BESTSgEA Ear NEA gR 2 BO YAR AG TAS A TA 215 NBLAQFLTAT HA TILA | 216 ROSIN SAA WTA TH | 217 BSH A AMO ATS | 21s VST RT ANAT G9 SRN A | ie Sera gay sare Saga V. INDEX TO TITLES. With TRANSLATION AND Norzs. a N anc" q a (98). (Concerning the) peaceful and fearful (aspects of the gods) by (the revealer) Karmalingpa (NRAACET ay Aa, ritual. ANAS, Kagyii. MAY VAITAT ARCA STERNAL ET (148). Commentary on the ~~ in the garland of the collected works of the wes lam ATA” a4 fy HQ al ise S151 2518" the grammar of a Kagyii lama as orally taught by him. MAA SIAC SI GS) QQs (95). The oral teach- ing of the Karmapa (Lama) concerning the see thousand (=collected doctrines) of the old tradition. Kagy MOVERS (126). Kalapa sutra, i the ewes es same awmqiqga 2s in Tanjur, mdo, Vol. A, 116, No. 9. Schiefner fol. 86, Cordier fol. 91. Immediately followed ,in the Tanjur by two commentaries, with another three Rag treatises in mdo, Vol. Ey (132). Explained as FARTS, a book about words, i.e. on the translation from Sanskrit in Tibetan, particularly: dic- tionary. See No. 61 below TASES ARASH SCA IQEAGT (0) col = . . lected works of the all-knowing Jikmelingpa. One of the eight aN S55 or revealers of hidden scriptures. ang biography. The author is said to belong Khams. Eq ay ; dzokchen sect. 490 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 6. mFAAC EAA (109). Precepts of Lama Kun- zang (from Khams), dzokchen. an SN 7 Z “RAT AIG (198). Answers to questions MATAR Rar concerning the soul ? 8. MSD AEN AIA AIAIG’ (53). The oral teachings of (Lama) Jamyang (Mafijughosa) from (the monastery or hermitage of) Ketshang. 9. MR eas Ray (86). The gradual way of (the country of) Kongpo. (S.E. Tibet.) Probably a manual of meditation, and one of the many Lamrims distinguished by the name of the country in which they have originated. See No. 198. : . easier Spee wc 10. q aga ATA FAT AIAN (61). The three Naga hundred thousands, white, grey and black. Bon-po. There are three series of works under this name, which have for the greater part no mutual connection. The smallest collection, exceedingly frequent, has been published by Laufer in the Memoirs of the Finnish Society in Helsingfors. (In the first he has skipped a leaf of the text.} Two of the three parts of this little work are based on a larger work called WA yCagR (with variations in spelling), which is included ~ in most domangs. The middle series occurs in many domangs, but only the ‘ white’ part in most of them. The two other parts are usually contained in Bhutanese domangs. he Lhasa. It is said that good Derge prints of this class of works are much valued. Schiefner has translated the middle-size ‘white’ Lubum. (Since writing the above I have also acquired a Derge print of the larger edition.) LM. ARENRS Aa aysr (80). ‘The prayer of the precious Lama Longdél, Overflowing Wave. Thomas (No. 10, from Peking, No. 311°) quotes a qs eer aay CAy ROC Faacfiageac 12. ana agar (33). Commentary on the word, or the commands. No details. 1922.]_ lf ; In the course of classifying certain coins In the Provincia Museum, Lucknow, I discovered the Nusratabad mint, which I presume 1s ; : by Aurangzeb. From an extract reproduced in - a ee Supplement No. XII, Art. 73, we find that on the “ne 207 1099 A.H. (Dec. 7, 1687), this place viz. Sakkhar or 5ag 36 N. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [NS., XVIII, (Nusratabad) was taken by the Mughals from Peda Naik. caste Dhedh, who was introduced at court on the 2nd Rab‘i II (Feb- ruary 5, 1688). This coin is dated inthe 32nd regnal year (or A.H. 1099- 1100} corresponding to A.D. 1688-89 which is the first year in which the town came under the complete sway of the Mughal Imperial Government. Prayaa DayYaL. 230. Nore on a Sitver Corn oF QUTBU-D-DIN UBARAK I. Mint— Daru-l-Islam. Date—717 A.H. Metal—&. Weight—168°5. Size— 1-2. Obv. | pbs Jy! ae wielal oy dada ent, Liat Obs pret gal Rev. In circle eel St sles Flv. Blt LALIT asl crsbeges! pret ly Margin. Gilease 9 phe gue dee (galled! slay adil! xe oy yd But for the king’s name which appears on the reverse, the obverse legend corresponds with the square piece noticed under I.M.C. 248. The legend inside the circle is the same as that on I.M.C. 245, but suse is written as lS Gjle. The marginal legend is complete and the coin is in a perfect state. t was tound in Kaurala, Pargana Hassanpur, district Moradabad, in 1905, and is now in the Provincial Museum, Lucknow. PrayaGa DayYAL. 231. Tur Epirant usep on Copper Corns By IspRAHiIm DIL Suan II or PisApor. On page 683 of Vol. VI (1910) of the J.A.S.B., Numis- matic Supplement No. XV, Dr. Taylor reads the legend on the copper coins of Ibrahim II of the ‘Adil Shahi Dynasty of Bijapar as— Obv. cht Wy sal Rev, srt yo (gle ple 1922.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXXVI. N. 37 With regard to the epithet used after Lbrahim, he says: “After many attempts to decipher them, the last two words on the obverse of Types III, IV, and V (all having the same leg- end as noted here) still remain doubtful. They may possibly read (,v! s bila athni, ‘without a second,’ ‘the unique,’ but certainly the penultimate letter seems on every specimen to be not nin, but lam.” Now if we turn to Plate XX XIX of the same number, we find Nos. 2, 3 and 4 of the plate! correspond- ing to Types III, IV and V in the above note. Since handling the coins of Ibrahim ‘Adil Shah II and carefully looking at these figures, I have come to the conclusion that the word is not (.b! ty but is most probably ( By N. AnnanpbaLp, D.So., F.A.8.B., Director, Zoological Survey of India. Bibliography compiled by Cepric Dover, F.E.S. Ten vears ago I published in this Journal! a brief account of our knowledge of the freshwater fauna of the Indian Empire. Since then much has been done in both fresh and brackish taken with the aid of the bibliography prepared, mainly under tera or Rhynchota; but references to the first of these groups are given in Mr Brunetti’s ‘‘Catalogue” (Rec. Ind. Mus., XVU, 1920) and in the first volume on the Diptera published by him in the ‘Fauna of British India” (1912) A more recent paper of exceptional interest is Mr. F. W. Edward’s account of an aquatic Dipteron from Kashmir so peculiar as to con- stitute a new family of Nemocera. This insect, to which the name Deuterophlebia mirabilis has been given, is described in Vol. IX (p. 379) of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 1922. Apart from the information contained in the later volumes on the Rhynchota by Mr. W. L. Distant in the ‘‘ Fauna R. J. Tillyard’s account of an extremely archaic larva the same group from the Darjiling hills is one of the mos 1 ** Some Recent Advances in our Knowledge of roe freresia Fauna of India.’”? Journ. As. Soc. Beng. (a s.), VIII, PP- 528 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, i mportant contributions to entomology that pale be seas recently. Itis published in Rec. Ind. Mus., XXII, A glance through Mr. Dover’s bibliography will “aha that most of the recent work on the fresh- and brackish-water fauna of India has been undertaken and published in India, _ and a very large proportion in Calcutta. Ever since Buchan- an’s investigation of the fishes of the Ganges over a century ago Calcutta has been, with brief intervals, a centre of studies ef the kind. The possibility of their existence in India has been denied in England, but litiera scripta manet. The names and the papers of McClelland, Benson, Nevill, Stoliczka, Ander- son, Wood-Mason, and Alcock are there to attest the succes- sion and we of the present generation can only hope to be numbered with these men do not propose to ‘discuss in detail the additious made to our knowledge of purely taxonomic zoology. In this res- pect Mr. Dover’s bibliography speaks for itself. I have, however, given a summary of the more important results ef a general nature arising from investigations of a more eomprehensive kind. Applied zoology is best left to those whose duty it is to apply the results obtained from pure pe a fogs ds and I have not attempted to discuss it 8, however, included in his Sibtonrach references to all ‘appropriate works available on fisheries and medical zoology published in the period under review. In parasitology. however, he has included only those papers which deal with parasites that pass some part or the whole of their life- pee in aquatic animals other than insects. The decade has been prolific in reports on the fauna of particular localities and types of environment in India and neighbouring countries. Two quarto ae neither of which is yet complete, may be mentioned firs They are (i) the report on the fauna of the Chilka take that forms volume V of the Memoirs of the Indian Museum, and, (ii), volume VI of the Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, in which are embodied the zoological results of a tour in the Far Kast. (i.e. in Japan, China, Siam and Malaya) undertaken in the years 1915 to 1916. The report on the Fauna of the Chilka Lake is based pene on setcstientions carried out in 1914 by Dr. 8S. W. Kemp marine origin, but they are avepiet physiologically to endure great and often sudden changes in the composition of the water in which they live. Many groups are represented in the 1922.] Fauna of the Fresh and Brackish Waters of India. 529 groups unknown, though doubtless existing as rarities, in adjacent seas. I may mention in particular the primitive sea- anemone Hdwardsia tinctrix, the congeners of which are mainly found in northern regions but also occur in the extreme south. The direct effects of a lowering of the salinity, and, therefore, of the specific gravity, of the water on a medusa (Acromitus rabanchatu) common in the lake and also in the Bay of Bengal, have been observed, while much other bionomical informa- tion of a like nature has been obtained. The report when complete will be the first detailed account of the fauna of any tropical area of brackish water. We hope to finish it next ear. The chief object of my visit to the Far East in 1915 and 1916 was to obtain material for a comparison between the fauna of the Chilka Lake and of other bodies of water of low salinity in India on the one hand, and that of three lakes situated further East in Asia. These lakes were Lake Biwa on the Main Island of Japan, the Tai-Hu in the Kiangsu province of China and the Talé Sap in Peninsular Siam. The last of these resembles the Chilka Lake very closely in many respects, while the Tai-Hu is situated not far from the coast and has a large rine element in its fauna; but Lake Biwa is a typical alpine lake. he volume in the Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, although it does not deal directly with the Indian fauna, has, therefore, an important indirect connection with our present subject. Like that on the Chilka Lake it contains zoological papers by many specialists. n a separate paper on the fauna of Lake Biwa, to be published shortly in the Annotationes Zoologicae Japonenses', I have compared the fauna of that lake with the fauna of several other inland lakes in India and other parts of Asia. Another volume devoted primarily to an aquatic fauna living on and near the Indian frontiers is volume XVIII of the Records of the Indian Museum, which is concerned with the isolated basin of Seistan in the eastern part of the Persian desert and with certain districts of British Baluchistan. The investigations carried out in these countries by Dr. 8. W. Kemp and myself in the winter of 1918-1919 have provided much interesting material for comparative study. Although Seistan is an inland country and has had no communication with the sea since very ancient times, its lake (the Hamun-i-Helmund) and watercourses have this much in common with the Chilka Lake, that very little of their water is quite fresh. Its salinity, however, is due to purely local causes and the salts it contains ! Now published in Annot. Zool. Jap., X (1922). 530 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, are not sea-salts. Its fauna includes no marine or maritime species and is interesting chiefly because, having been derived necessarily from the highlands of Afghanistan and Baluchistan, it is to a large extent a high-mountain fauna adapted to live in a comparatively low swampy depression. This is note- worthy particularly among the fish, several species of which are identical with, or very closely related to, forms known otherwise from great altitudes in Central Asia. A distinct reduction in the size of the fins may be noted in certain species. The fauna of sponges and polyzoa, on the other hand, is interesting on account of its Indian affinities, while the molluscs belong to what I have called elsewhere the “ Afghan” type. f normal inland lakes within the limits of the Indian Empire by far the most interesting as yet investigated is the Inlé Lake on the limestone plateau of the Southern Shan States. The fauna of this lake was collected by Dr. F. H. Gravely and myself in the early part of 1917. It proved so interesting in many respects that [ paid the lake a second visit in the spring of 1922, accompanied by Dr. Sunder Lal Hora and ‘ H. Srinivasa Rao. The fauna is remarkably distinct, especially in fish and molluscs Many of the former are very small and brightly coloured, with large eyes and poorly developed tactile organs. These characters appear to be correlated with the exceptional clearness and limpidity of the water of the lake and this again is due to its peculiar chemical composition, in which salts of lime and magnesium are abundant. The molluscs, possibly ' in correlation with the presence of these salts, have in some species remarkably sculptured shells and exhibit ex- traordinary plasticity and individual variability. It was chiefly to study these phenomena that I visited the lake for a second time. The results of the second tour are not yet worked out; those of the first are contained in Rec. Ind. Mus., XIV (1918). Other Indian lakes of which the fauna has been studied in the period under review are those of Kashmir and Kumaon in the Himalayas and of Manipur on the Burmese frontier of Assam. The lakes of Kumaon were visited some years ago fish are not distinctive. Although some of the lakes are deep, there does not seem to be any specialized deep-water fauna. ' A recent, detailed, chemical examination of the water and of the shells themselves, undertaken in the Indian Institute of Science at Banga- lore, render this less probable than it formerly appeared. 1922.] Fauna of the Fresh and Brackish Waters of India. 531 See the papers on different groups in volumes VII and XXIV of the Rec. Ind. Mus. , e fauna of the lakes of Kashmir, although of no great importance in itself, is of considerable geographical interest, for it represents an outlying branch of the true Eurasian fauna of Europe and Central Asia. The lakes, belonging as they do to the Indus system, appear to have formed the onl y reservoir for this fauna in Indian territory. They were investigated re- cently by Dr. Baini Prashad and Mr, B. Chopra, whose results have not yet been completely worked out. They will be pub- nd. Mus. lished later in the Rec. Ind. : The isolated valley of Manipur contains a lake of consider- able but variable size which is in direct communication with the Chindwin, the main tributary of the Irrawadi. This lake in many respects resembles the Inlé Lake but has muddy water of much more normal chemical composition on account of the rocks through which its feeders flow being insoluble. Its fauna ‘is by no means rich and its chief faunistic interest lies in the contrast it provides with the Inlé Lake. The fish have been described by Dr Hora, who accompanied me to Manipur in the early part of 1920, in Rec. Ind. Mus., XXII (1921), while the molluses have been discussed by Dr. Baini Prashad, Mr. Amin- -ud-Din and myself in the same volume. In my introduction o our paper I have compared the fauna asa whole with that of the Inlé Lake. It differs mainly in not being at all highly from place to place and in a short visit one cot aionhen imperfect and often distorted view of its characteristic sith The fauna of running water, however, has not been gis neglected in India in the last ten years. In a paper (Rec. Ind. us., XVI.) on that of a small stream in the Bombay Presidency which has been visited at different times by Dr. F. H. peter 3 Prof. S. P. Agharkar and myself, I have attempted to descri the puitoal life i « type of stream very common at the base o otherwise has no very marked peculiarities. Apart from the medusa, its most inter esting t i hans to be Sponges. These, which are attached to rocks liable to desicca- tion, belong partly to the genus Corvospongilla and those that 532 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, do so are remarkable for their almost stony hardness and for the fact that they produce two kinds of gemmules or resting-buds, one kind capable of floating and being carried away by the stream, the other firmly fixed to the rocks. To turn from a small stream to a great river, something has also been done on the fauna of the Ganges. The only comprehensive paper yet published is Dr. Kemp’s account of that cf the Matlah River, which is now little more than a tidal creek running up the delta to the vicinity of Calcutta, but for- merly drained large salt lakes which have now disappeared. Dr. Kemp has shown that the animals, particularly the fish and crustacea, of the lower reaches of this creek have a remarkable resemblance to those of the deep sea. In most species this resemblance is superficial and clearly produced by convergent evolution, but one fish, the Bombay Duck (Harpodon nehereus), is closely related to deep-sea forms. The main resemblances between the fauna and that of the deep-sea lie in colour, dege- in both types of environment. The fauna of the Matlah River is, strictly speaking, marine or rather estuarine, but the presence of a marine element in the fauna of the Ganges itself far above tidal influence has long been known. I have discussed this element at length in a paper to be published shortly in the special volume of the Dutch Bij- dragen tot de Dierkunde ' to be issued in honour of the seventieth birthday of Prof. Max Weber of Amsterdam. The two most interesting regions in tropical river-systems are, from the faun- istic point of view, the mountain torrents and the deltaic efflu- ents. Jn both much still remains to be done in India. So far of the adhesive organs, etc. in a very thorough manner. In one paper, just issued in the Rec. Ind. Mus, Dr. Hora and I have discussed the “communal convergence” that exists between the larvae of so-called Ranae Formosae and the fish of the genus Garra or Discognathus and certain other genera found in mountain torrents. : of the papers cited in the bibliography the geo- graphical distribution of the species, genera or families concerned is discussed at length. The resemblance between the freshwater fauna of the Malabar zone and that of tropical Africa may now be regarded as well established, but it has been shown within ! Now published in Bijdr. t.d. Dierk., Afi. 22 (1922). ° 1922.] Fauna of the Fresh and Brackish Waters of India. 533 the last few years that traces of the common element can be found much further East than western India. Recent investi- “ supposed Chinese element has been found, so far as aquatic ani- so far as the freshwater and brackish-water faunas of India are concerned, are the Chelonia, the Batrachia, the fish, the mol- luses, the Decapod Crustacea, the Oligochaete worms and the cercariae of the parasitic trematodes. s I have already stated, I do not propose to discuss these advances at length, but 1 cannot conclude this brief paper carried out in Lahore by Lt.-Col. J. : cercariae by Major R. B. Seymour Sewell, partly in Calcutta ‘ : large the older malacologists of Calcutta and published to a extent in the early volumes of this Journal. In it I have taken ———_—_—_— The Fresh and Brackish Water Fauna of the ee ee Tesi and Ceylon: A Bibliography for the years 1 : 534 - Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S.. XVIIT, include the titles of papers dealing chiefly with material from outside India, but which have a more or less direct hearing on me papers dealing with widely distributed animals occurring in India and Ceylon, but based on material from outside this region, have had for various reasons to be omitted. For ex ample, the biochemical and physiological papers on the protozoan Paramoectum caudatum and its allies which have re- Protistenkunde, have not been included here. From the s 8yS- tematic point of view, however, it is hoped that this bibliography is fairly complete. oO eco nomise in space papers by more than one author series) and Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal have been abbreviated to R.I.M., M.1.M. ,J.A.S.B. and M.A S.B. C. Dover. GENFRAL. Annandale, N., 1912. ‘‘Some Recent Advances in our Rie ledge of the Freshwater Fauna of British India.” J.A‘S. B., VIII, pp. 39-52. Annandale, N., 1912. “Stray notes on Ceylon Animals.” Spolia Zeylanica, VIII, pp. 133-136. Annandale, N. and Kemp, S., 1912. «Observations on the Invertebrate Fauna of the Kumaon Lakes, with Special Reference to the Sponges and Polyzoa.” - R.1.M., VI, pp. 129-145. Annandale, N., 1914. ‘The African Element in the Fresh- water Fauna of British India.” IXe, Congress Interna- tional de Zoologie tenu & Monaco, Sec. IV, pp. 579-588. Annandale, N. and Kemp, S., 1915. ‘Fauna of the Chilka Lake: Introduction.” M.I.M. » V, pp. 1-20. *Annandale, N., 1915. “The Distribution and Origin of the Fauna of the Jordan System with Special Reference to that of the Lake of Tiberias.” J A.S.B. , XI, pp. 437-476. *Annandale, N.,1916. “ Preliminary Note on the Fauna of the Talé Sap or Inland Sea of Singgora.” Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam, IT, pp. 90-102. *Annandale, N., 1916. “ Zoological Results of a cre in the Far East: Introduction. * MASS. Vi, pod Annandale, N., 1918, Spada) Account of the Inlé Lake.” RL. M., XIV, 1-7. Annandale, N.,1918. “The Fauna of the Inlé Lake : Summary of Results.” R.I.M., XIV, pp. 195-21 Annandale, N., 1919. “ Report on the Aquatic Fauna of 1922.] Fauna of the Fresh and Brackish Waters of India. 535 Seistan : Geographical Introduction.’ R.I.M., XVIII, pp. Annandale, N., 1919. ‘The Fauna of Certain Small Streams in the Bombay Presidency.” R.I,M. XVI, pp. 109-161. Annandale, N., 1921. ‘The Fauna of an Island in the Chilka Lake: Introduction.” R.1.M., XXII, pp. 313-321. Annandale, N. and Hora, S. 1.., 1921. ‘*The Fauna of the ; Loktak Lake in Manipur. * TAS, B., XVII, p. exlvii. nae oe N.. _ 192i. “The Aquatic ‘Fauna of Seistan: A Summary.” R.I.M., XVIII, pp. 235-253. A cnasiels N., 1922. “The Macroscopic Fauna of Lake iwa.” Annot. Zool. Japonenses, X, pp. 127-153. Annandale, N., 1922. ‘The Marine Element in the Fauna of the Ganges.” Bijdragen tot d. Dierkunde, XXII, pp 143-154. Annandale, N. and Hora, S. L., 1922. ‘ Parallel Evolution i in the Fish and Tadpoles of Mountain Torrents.” R. I.M., XXI : Chaudhuri, B. L., 1912. ‘‘ Fish oe eh ate Larvae.” Cal- cutta Medical ee VI, No. Gravely, F. H., 9. **A note on ee Marine Invertebrate Fauna of Ghandi Orissa.” R.1.M., XVI, pp. 395-399. Gravely, F. H., 1921. ‘“‘ Presidential Address, Bice oa Zoo- logy, Eighth Indian Science Congress. (A History of Zoo- logy in India.) J.A.S.B., XVII, pp. exxxii-cxlvi. Kemp, 8., 1912. ‘‘ Zoological Results of a Abor Expedition : ~ Introduction.” R.I.M., VIII, pp. 1 Kemp, S., 1917. ‘‘ Notes on the Fauna = the Matlah River in the Gangetic Delta.” R.I.M., XVII, pp. 233-241. > Kemp, S. and Gravely, F. H., 1919.‘ On the Possible Ree, VI, Schistosomiasis in India. Indian Journ. Med. Res., VI 252-264. Milton, ¥., 1919. ‘‘ Note to aid the Search for Schistosomiasis in India.” Ind. Med. Gazette, LIV, pp. 126-130. i ‘ Milton, F., 1919. ‘Schistosomiasis in India.” Ind. Med. Gazette, LIV, 370. eer SG seh Hit Seasonal Conditions lao eae ibe Pond Life i - ae Punjab.” J.A.S.B., XII, pp. ze 4: Med. Sewell, R. B. S.,1919. ‘Schistosomiasis in India.” In Gazette, Liv, pp. 262, 253. Sewell, R. B. S. and Annandale, N., 1922. — oe - Chilka Lake: The Hydrography he errs e : = Rambha Bay in an Abnormal Year.’ M » PP. 679-710. Sewell, R.B.S., 1922. Cercariae eget Ind. Journ. Med Res., X (8 ecial No. 1-310 and i- Soparker ME Ee, ilo ‘Is Human Pitha?eiosis likely uae ndia?”” Ind. Journ. Med. Res. (Special ] Indian S Congress No., 1919), pp. 207-213. 536 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Southwell, T. and Prashad, B., 1918. ‘‘ Notes from the Bengal Fisheries Laboratory, No. 5. Parasites of Indian Fishes, me a Note on ET ea in the Climbing Perc 1.M., XV, pp. 341-355. Nn ar T., 1920. ‘‘Fish and Mosquito Larvae in Bengal, ihar and Orissa, India.’’ Ann. Trop. Med. and Parasit., Surveyor, N. F., 1919. “Existence of Distoma disease in India.” Ind. . Med. Res. (Special Indian Science Congress No.), pp. 214-216 PROTOZOA. Acton, Hugh. W., 1921. ‘‘On the behaviour of Paramoecium caudatum towards the Cinchona Alkaloids.’’ Ind. Journ. ed. Res., IX, pp. 339-358. Bhatia, B. L., 1916. ‘ Notes on the Ciliate l’rotozoa of Lahore.” M. XII, pp. 177-183. Bhatia, B. is ., 1920. ‘“‘Notes on Freshwater Ciliate Protozoa Bie India, I.” Journ. Roy. Microscop. Soc., 1920, pp. 257- — B. L., 1922. ‘‘ Notes on Freshwater Ciliate Protozoa of 11.” Journ. Roy. Microscop. Soc., 1922, pp. 27-36. Chatteree G.C., 1917. ‘Notes ona Free Living Amoebn of a w Species.” Proc. Ind. Assoc. Cultiv. Sci., ITT, PP. 1-5. Dehomne, A., 1920. “Contribution a I’étude comparée de ‘apparel nucleaire des Infousires Ciliés (Paramaecium caudatum et Colpidium truncatum), des Euglénes et des Cyanophycées.”’ Archiv. Zool. Exper., LX, pp. 47-176. Ghosh. aes a “ Studies on Infusoria, I.”’ R.I.M., XV, pp. 13 Ghosh, E., 1919. ‘On three New Species of Opalina, Purk. et al.” Proc. Ind. Assoc. Cultiv. Sci., IV, pp. 102-108. Sie E., 1919. ‘Studies on Infusoria, Il.” Rd. M., XVI, pp. Ghosh, =< 1921. ‘New ED acedseae in sera —_ Cal- eens 7 Reh. Psat Med. sa Belgatehia, II, pp. RES = 1920. - ‘ year 2 neeneine scalpiformis Ghosh. ”? I, No. Journ. Med. Sronaes, CoRLENTERATES AND PoLYzoa. Agharkar S. P., 1913. “Further Notes on the Habits and Distribution of Limnocnida indica.” R.1.M., IX, pp. 247- Annandale, N., 1912. “ Fauna Symbiotica Indica, No. 3. 1922.] Fauna of the Fresh and Brackish Waters of India. 537 Polyzoa associated with certain Gangetic Tortoises.” R.I.M , VII, pp. 147-150. Annandale, N., 1912. The occurrence of Entoprocta in Indian Waters.” R.I.M., VII, p. 205. Annandale, N., 1912. ‘ Preliminary Description of a Fresh- water Medusa from the Bombay Presidency.” R.1.M., VII, pp. 254-256. Annandale, N., 1912. ‘‘ Note on a era Lge from the Western Ghats.” J.A.S. B:, Vil, pox Annandale, N. . 1912. “The Freshwater * alan of the Mala- bar Zone.”’ R.I.M., VII, pp. 383-397. Annandale, N., 1912. * Zoological Results of the Abor Ex- pedition, 1911- 12. Porifera.”” RI.M., VIII, p. 67. Annandale, N., 1912. ‘* Notes on Freshwater Sponges, aly: The Generic Position of Spongilla ultima.” R.I.M. VII p- *Annandale, N., 1913. ‘The Polyzoa of the Lake of Tiberias.” J. mal, fs 3 pp. 223-228. Annandale, N., 1913. «An account of the Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias, with observations on certain genera of Spongillidae.”’ J.A.S.B., IX, pp. 57-88. Annandale, N., ra “Fauna Symbiotica Indica, No. 5. Some sponges commonly associated. with Oysters and Mussels i Ls Madras Wahoo and the Chilka Lake.” R.I. 49-158. age N., 1915. ‘Fauna of the Chilka Lake: Polyzoa of the Lake and of Brackish Water in the Gangetic Delta.” M.1.M., V, pp. 121-133. ae eer N.. 1915. ‘Fauna of the Chika Lake: Sponges.” mA pp. 23-54. nae tie! N., 1915. ‘Fauna of the Chilka Lake: The Coelenterates of the Lake with an account of the Actinaria of Hookah Water in the Gangetic Delta.” M.1.M., ¥, Rinatdsie, 3 N. a Kemp, S.; 1916, <2 hice of the Chilka Lake: Ctenophora.” M. . es V, pp. 117, 118. x Annandale, a 1915. ‘Notes 1 Breakwaiee Sponges, ve XVI: The Genus Pechispongitla and its allies.” R.I. XVI, 1 sonck¥E Pe. ie “ The Genus Australella and oe Ee species of Phylactolaematous Polyzoa.” R.I.M. pp- 163-169. Annandale, N., 1915. “ Indian Hons Sponges of the Family Clionida ce R.1.M., XI, pp. 1- *Annandale, N., 1916. c Zoological Results of a 7o sapthigs Far East: Polyzoa, Entoprocta, and Ctenosto M.A.S B., VI, 15- *Annandale, N., 1917. " Zoological Results of a Tour in the 538 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Far East: Hydrozoa and Ctenophora.” M.A.S8.B., VI, pp. 103-117. *Annandale, N., 1918. ©“ Zoological Results of a — in the Far East: Sponges.” M.A.8.B., VI, pp. 195-126. Annandale, N., 1918. ‘Sponges, Hydrozon and Polyzoa of the Inlé fake ” R.LM., XIV, pp. 7 *Annandale, N., 1919. “ Sponges, eas and Polyzoa of Seistan.” R.I.M., XVIII, pp. 83-97. Annandale, N., 1922. « alain in the olorbo Waterworks.”’ Spolia Zeylanica, XII, pp. 207-209. Gravely, F. H. and A Agharkar, S. P, 1912. ‘Notes on the ae and Distribation of Limnocnida indica, Annandale.”’ I.M., VII, pp. 389-403. Lloyd, ae E. and A Annandale, N., 1915. ‘On the Hydrozoon tated ceylonensis (Browne). ~ LM. SIL pp. 49- ial: B., 1B15:. Ms short Note on Hydra oligactis Pallas.’ R.1 XY» Rao, H. S, 19 2. - - Note on the Reproduction of the Common Hydra of Bengal (Hydra oligactis Pallas).”’ Journ. mb. Nat. Hist. Soc., XXVIII. pp. 1147-1149. Ritchie, J., 1915. “The "Hydroids of the Indian Museum as Annulella gemmata, a New and Remarkable Brackish- t Hydroid.” R.I.M., XI, pp. 541-568. Robertentt A.; Uzi * Report on a Collection of Bryzoa from the Bay ‘of Bengal and other Eastern Seas.” R.I.M XXVI, pp. 33-65. Stephenson, et ae 1920. “On the Classification of Actiniaria, Part I.—Forms with Acontia and Forms with a Mesoglaeal ne ae, Quart, Journ. Microscop. Sci. (n.s.), LXIV, pp. 425-574. ‘VERMEs.”’ Annandale, N., 1912. “Fauna Symbiotica Indica, No. 4. ’ Cart- inicola, a cits Type of Temnocephaloidea.” R.I.M., Vu, pp. 2 — *Annandale, N., “1912. ‘The Leeches of the Lake of Tiberias.” TASB. = R., 1920. ‘‘Notes on the Two Cichlid Fishes of Malabar, Etroplus suratensis and EH. maculatus.” Bull. Madras Fisheries Dept., XII, pp. 157-166. Pertwee, A. H., 1913. “ Notes on the Freshwater Fishes of eylo on.”’ ones Zeylanica, XVIII, pp. 243-250. Loeaina: B., “On a New Species of Discognathus from the Sse Valley.” R.I.M., XVI, pp. 163-165. Primrose, A. M., 1921. “ Angling for Barbus ert ie< Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., XXVII 957-959. Raj, = S., 1917. ‘On the A of the sige Aas ae oe and their Artificial ~~ agation in the Coleroon J.A.S.B., XIII, p. clxxx Rao, C. R. N., 1917. “Notes < on the Life-History of Ophtoce- us punctatus Bloch.” J.A.S.B., XIV, p. elv. Rao, C. R.N., 1920. “Some New Species of Cyprinoid Fish from ysore.”” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. @), VI, pp. 45-64 Sewell, R. B. S., and Chaudhuri, B. L., 1921. a Fish of Proved Utility as Mosquito Destroyers. (Calcut Regan, C. T., 1919. “ Note on Chaudhuria, a ae Fish 1922.] Fauna of the Fresh and Brackish Waters of India. 551 of es Order Opisthomi.” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (9), III, pt pp. 1 Southwell, t and Sewell, R. B. §., 1913. “Notes on the oe Fauna of Certain Tanks in Fees m Deptl. Ra. Dept. Agric. Bihar and yee No. Southwoll, T. and Prashad, B., 1918. "On Hilsa Investiga- tion in Bengal, Bihar and Crista.” Bull. No. II. Fisheries Beng. Bihar and aie Southwell, T. and Prashad, B., “f ‘ Observations on the ntra- pepe Embryos of eta ite J.A.S.B., —152. South yell, T. and Prashad, B., 1919. ‘ Notes from the Bengal Fisheries Laboratory, No. 6. Embryological and Devel- eee Studies ‘ol Indian Fishes.” R.I.M., XVI, 5-240. Taylens, G. D., 1920. ‘Angling around Bombay.” Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., XXVII. pp. 535-539. Whitehouse, R. H., 1918. “The Evolution of the Caudal Fins of Fishes.*‘ R.I.M., XV, pp. 135-142. Whitehouse, R. H., 1918. ‘‘The Caudal Fin of the Eel Chau- 1.M., XIV, p. 65. Weber, M. and De Beaufort, L. F., 1913-1922. ‘‘ The Fishes of the Indo- Australian Archipelago. Vols. II-IV.” (Leiden.) MamMALS, REPTILES AND BATRACHIA. Ahuja, H. C., 1921. ‘‘ Ona Hitherto Unrecorded Vein and an Artery in the Circulating System of the Common Indian Frog, Rana tigrina.” J.A.S.B., XVII, p. cli. Aenasidalé: Wi; 1912, The Aquatic Chelonia of the Maha- naddi and its Tributaries.” R.1.M. , VII, pp. 261-266. geome N., 1912. <" Phe reer Mud-Turtles (Trionychi- ‘I. M., VII, pp. 151-18 dnicitidals: N., 1912. Zoslocioal Results of the Abor Expedi- tion, 1911-12. Reptilia. ?” R.LM., VIII, pp. 37-59. Annandale, N., 1912. ‘ Zoological Results of the Abor Expedi- tion, 1911-12: Batrachia.” R.1.M., VIII, pp. 7-36. Annandale, N., 1913. “The Tortoises of Chota Nagpur.” mie pp. 63-78 = Annandaie, N:, 1913. “Some New and Interesting Batrachia and Lirards from India, Ceylon and Borneo.” R.1.M., IX, pp. 301-307. Annamiale, N: and Shastri; H.; 1914. ‘‘ Relics of the — of Mud-Turtles (Trionychidae) in India and Burma JiASB.B. X: 1-138. Annandale, N.; wie " Herpetological Notes and Descriptions.” LM., XY 341-34 Amandale; N;; Tos. ® Notes on Some Indian Chelonia.” R.1.M., XI; pp: 189-195: 552 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Annandale, N., 1915. ‘‘ Fauna of the Chilka Lake: Mammals, Reptiles and ‘nengge ” M.I.M:, V; pp. 165-174. *Annandale, N., 1917. “Report on a Collection of Reptiles and at ie from Java.”” Jour. Fed. Malay States Museums, ee pp. 107-111; Amiandale, N., 1917. “ Zoological Results of a Tour in the Far East: "Betraabia.” M:A.8:B., VI; pp. 121-155. Annandale, N., 1918. eet and Batrachia of the Inlé ke. RLM. , XIV; pp. 67-69: Annandale, 5. BA 1918. “« Some Godeebed Bitar from the Hills of Southern — ” R:1:M:, XV, pp: 17-23. Annandale, N. and Rao, C. R. N., 1918. “The Tadpoles of the Family Ranidae and Bufonidae found in the Plains of India.” R.I.M., XV, pp. 25-40. Annandale, N., 1919. “The Tadpoles of Nyetibatrachus pygmeus and Ivalus variabilis: A Correction.’ R.1.M., XVI, p. 313. depeiae N, and Rao, C. R. N., 1917. ‘Indian Tadpoles.” ASB. meh lp. elxxxv. Annandale. N., , 1921. “ The Reptiles and Batrachia of Barkuda land.” ‘R.LM., XXII, pp. 331-333. Bhatia, B. L. and Prashad, B., 1918. ‘Skull of Rana tigrina Daud. ” Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1918, pp. Bhattacharyya, D. R., 1920. “Note on Persistent Oviducts and Abnormal Testes in a male Rana tigrina.” J.AS.B., Peninsula. Reptiles and Batrachia”’ ” London. Boulenger, G. A. and Annandale, N.,1918. ‘‘ Further Observa- tions on Rana tigrina.”’ R.I.M., XV, pp. 51-67. Boulenger, G. A., 1919. “On Aelur urophryne mammata, Gthr., an addition to the Batrachian Fauna of Kashmir RI I.M., XVI, pp, 469-470 Boulenger, G. A., 1919. ‘‘ Descriptions of Three New Batra- chians from the Garo Hills, Assam.” R:I.M., XVI, pp: Boulenger, G. A. , 1920. ‘‘A Monograph of the South pana apuan, Melanesian and Australian Frogs of the Genu Ra > AX, pp: 1-226. Chaudhuri, B. a 191 917. “ Aquatic Tortoises of the Middle anges and Brahmaputra.” R,I.M., VII, pp. 212-214. D’Abreau, E. A., 1915. “ Note on the ‘ Mugger ’ shag hese palustris : Contents of their Stomachs, Folklore, ete _. Journ. Bo mb. Nat. Hist. Soc., XXIII 80. = Rat E. C., “The Habits of Rana semipalmata Boul.” n. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. , XXIV, p. 194. Hora, S. os , 1920. ‘*A Short N. ote on the a “4 the Com- pound. Limb Bones of Rana.” R.I.M., XIX, pp. 183-184 Hora, 8. L., 1921. “Some Observations on the Oral | Apparatus 1922.] Fauna of the Fresh and Brackish Waters of India. 553 of the Tadpoles + _ eda parva Boulenger.”’ J.A.S.B. Pers: pp- 9 Lowis, R. M., 1915. ‘ Gharial, Gavialis gangeticus and Porpoise, imal gangetica catching i inthe Indus.” Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., XXIII, 79. Spanier G. E. , 1915. “Some Notes upon the Anatomy of Rana tigrina.”” Proc, Zool. Soc. Lond., 1915, pp. 603-809. Prashad, B., 1914. ‘“* Notes on Aquatic Chelonia of the Indus System.” R.I.M., X, pp. 267-2 Prashad, B., 1915. “ The re go) of Indian Frogs.”’ R. me pp. 91-103. Proctor, J. B., 1922. “On a New Toad, Cophophryne alticola, collected on the Mt. Everest Reconnaissance Expedition, 921.’ ee ; Boul.” R.I.M., XI. pp. 349-351. Rao, C. R. N., 1915. ‘Notes on Some Indian Batrachia.’’ ., XI, pp. 31-38. : Rao, C. R. 'N., 1917. ‘On the Occurrence of Iridocytes in the Larva of M icrohyla Ornata, Boul.” R.1.M., XIII, pp. 281- 2 Rao, C. R. N., 1918. ‘Notes on the ee of Indian En- ‘nystctnahiden2 R.1.M., XV, pp. 4 Rao, C. R. N., 1920. “Some South pee Batrachians.” Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. RAVE. pp. 119-127. Rao, C. R. N., 1922. ‘Notes on Batrachia.” Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., XXVIII, pp. 489-447. Rooij, N. de, 1915. “« The Reptiles of the Indo-Australian Archi ipelago.” Leyden Schmidt, W. T., 1920. “ Uber schuppenrudimente und Haut- sinnesorgane bei Emyda granosa. Zool. Anz., LI, 0-20. pp- *Schultze, W., 1914. “Notes on a Nesting Place of Crocodrilus palustris Lesson.” Phillipp. Journ. Sci. (D), [X, pp. 314, 5. : Shortt, W. H. 0.,1921. ‘A Few Hints on Crocodile Shooting.” Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. XXIII, pp. 76-84. *Smith, M., 1918. ‘‘On Some Tadpoles from Siam. Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam, IT, pp. 261-275. ee Smith, M., (1919. “ Crocodilus Siamensis.” Journ. Nat. Hist. . 217-221. i $19; 4 * Crovodiles Nesting Habits.” Spolia Zeylanica, XI, pp. 1 Wall, F., 1921. The Date: of pare (Colombo.) Woodland, W. N, F., 1916. “Notes on Some Recent En- quiries Concerning the so-called ‘ Renal Portal’ System in Vertebrates.” J.A.S.B., XII, p. cxili-cxv. M | 5 ° 5 =F 5 O ‘A 554 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] Woodland, W. N. F., 1917. “Recent Experimental En- oo Regarding the so-called ‘Renal Portal’ System.” A.S.B., XITI, pp. clxxx—clxxxii. Woodland, W.N. F., 1920. “On Some Results of Ligaturing the Anterior Abdomin al Vein in the Indian Toad, Bufo stomaticus Lutken.” Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1920, pp. 441- Woodland, W. N. F., 1922. “On the Renal Portal System (Renal Venous Meshwork) and Ridney Excretion in Ver- tebrata.” J.A.S.B., XVIII, pp. 85-193. . : 35. Bivalve Molluscs injuring Brickwork in the Calcutta Docks, By N. Annanpatr, D.Sc., F.A.S.B., CIE. (Zoological Survey of India). of the dock. The damage was not very serious and it was evident that the mollusc had been able to attack only those parts of the wall at which the blue glaze on the bricks had been worn away or abraded. Moreover, all the individuals discovered had died after penetrating to a depth of about half a brick, killed possibly either by some change in the salinity of the water, or more probably by the flowing into the docks of some chemical waste product. Conditions may, however, have been unfavourable for reproduction. Had the activities of the mollusc continued uninterrupted for a long perio outer wall of the entrance had also been attacked, always below the habitual water-level. The brickwork is about thirty years old and showed no sign of more than one attack, which was probably carried out by a single generation of molluscs, or at most by one flourishing and a second more feeble generation. of these were still alive. One of the species (M odiola striatula) has already been reported as doing injury to brickwork in the Calcutta docks by insinuating itself into cracks and joints and there increasing in numbers and bulk. Were large masses 0 this mussel or any other living organism to establish themselves in the Pholad’s holes they would undoubtedly aid in the further disintegration of the bricks by breaking down the thin parti- tions left between the different burrows. Young of the Martesia had evidently been assisted in 556 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, settling on the bricks and commencing their boring operations by ‘an inequality of the surface produced by the falling out from the bricks of small pieces of cinder incorporated in their substance. The burrows were bottle-shaped and penetrated the brick to a depth of about 4 cm. In one, of which a vertical section was obtained, the entrance on the surface was only a little more than 1 mm. in diameter, but the diameter at the base was 17 mm. The diameter increased gradually from above downwards. The shell fitted rather tightly into the base of the burrow and the animal of course could not possibly have emerged. The burrows were closely aggregated and sometimes one penetrated another. The direction of some was straight into the brick, in others slanting. . fluminalis, which is common in the deltas of the Ganges and Irrawadi, usually bores in wood but was originally found in soft argillaceous sandstone. few systematic notes as to the species collected may be given. Scaphula deltae Blanford. 1868. Scaphula deltae, Blanford, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal XXXVI (2), p. 71, pl. xiv, figs. 7-10. Several specimens, living and dead, were found attached _ by their byssus in empty burrows of M. fluminalis in the bricks, so deeply covered by a slimy dark green alga that their presence was not detected until it had dried up. The species, which is doubtfully distinct from §. celox Benson, is common in the lower reaches of both the Ganges and the Irrawadi and also occurs high up the Mahanadi at Sambalpur in the interior of Orissa. Corbula gracilis Preston. 1907. Corbula gracilis, Preston, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) 5 ALA, p. 215, fig. 4. 1911. Corbula chilkaensis, id., Rec. Ind. Mus. VI, p. 39, fig. 2. A single empty shell was found inside one of Martesia fluminalis in a brick. It is rather larger than the type- specimen and both in size and other characters seems exactly intermediate between that specimen and the type-specimen of the same author’s C. chilkaensis, which must be regarded as synonomous with C. gracilis. : les is very near my C. mesopotamica, but apart from slight differences in outline, has the hinge-teeth much less produced. In the Gangetic delta molluscs of this genus frequently make their way into the burrows of Teredinidae in w d also into the exhalent canals of the sponge Spongilla alba. 1922.) Bivalve Molluscs injuring Brickwork. 557 Martesia fluminalis Bianford. 1868. Martesia fluminalis, Blanford, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal XXXVI (2), p. 67, pl. XIV, figs. 1-3. Specimens from the docks are much larger than Blanford’s type-series and exhibit great individual variability in shape. Their surface is also very irregular and often much eroded, 15 mm. to a little over 2:5. That of height to thickness is much more constant. The difference lies mainly in the elongation of the siphonal region in some specimens and its brevity in others. The periostracum, where it has not perished, is very thick and of a dark brown colour. Modiola striatula Hanley. 1916. Modiola striatula, Annandale & Kemp. Mem. Ind. V, p. 360, pl. XV, figs. 7-18; pl. XVI, A single small living shell of straight elongate type and with the longitudinal striae well developed was found anchored hy its byssus in an empty Mariesia burrow. 7 ne er ee eee eee 36. Some Remarks on Mr, C. Stuart Baker’s new volume on the Birds in the “Fauna of British Ind a.” By Hersert C. Roprnson and C. Bonen K toss. In July, 1922, under the authorship of Mr. E. C. Stuart Baker, was published the first volume of the second edition of the ‘‘ Fauna of British India, Birds ” originally by Mr. E. W. Oates and Dr. W. T. Blanford. The format is very similar to that of the earlier work and species have undergone many changes. Several new races are described for the first time. We think the practice a bad one ; with. The plan for the new edition is to issue it in volumes which will follow each other at intervals of two years: it will thus be a considerable time before the work is completed. In that Mr. Baker recognises subspecies and deals with them under trinomial titles, and also cites type localities— thus following the latest developments in systematic zoology— the present volume is an advance on the first edition. Un- fortunately this cannot be said of it in its entirety. e author’s method leads him frequently into an ex- cathedra attitude and he would probably agree that, since his knowledge cannot be complete nor his judgment infallible, this method of dealing with the subject is unsatisfactory to other ornithologists who are unprepared to accept blindly the conclusions of a fellow-worker. because he cannot accept them or because he is ignorant of them (as instances of this :—Dryonastes propinquus Salvad., Ann. Mus. Ciy. Gen., 6, 1915, p. 6: Tenasserim; Garrulax 560 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, putkaicus Reichenow, Journ. Ornith. Leipzig, 61, 1913, p. 557: N. E. am). The compilation of asynonomy is both tedious and dull: it is unlikely that exhaustive research of the kind will be undertaken unless there is strong reason to do so and the fact that no synonomy must be shewn inevitably, we fear, makes for superficiality. e reason given for the absence of lists of references is that it has been possible to devote the space they would have occupied to additional field-notes—in effect, notes on nidi- fication. In a work with the claims and purposes of the present we could well have spared the latter for the former : and the paragraphs on nidification might have been issued in a small and inexpensive companion volume. e result is that the ornithologist who is not ready to accept without question Mr. Baker’s treatment of Indian birds has to turn to a9 dixerunt. _ We feel that, failing a record of all literature dealing with a bird from the “Indian” point of view, one or two alterna- described in the belief that they were new and distinct. It seems advisable to point out some of the errors that have been perpetrated before they become accepted. We have confined ourselves to a scrutiny—and that somewhat hurried— of such species, Malaysian and eastern Indo-Chinese, as we are specially interested in : others, more concerned with them than ky‘ learning names which with few exceptions, will be per- manent’ (p. 3): a little help in this good cause will, however, be found below, where also will be found substantiation for — our statements. While these remarks partake of that form of criticism 1922.) Remarks on Mr. Baker’s new volume on Birds, 561 edition is most welcome and should do much to encourage the practical study of ornithology in the East: especially if Mr. Baker will be guided by the axiom “ Post malam segetem serendum est ’’ and include a list of addenda and corrigenda in the second volume. p. 45. Cissa chinensis. The type locality is given as China : the species doe3 not occur there and we select Southern Siam, whence specimens may well have reached Canton as cage birds Dendrocitia celadina. The two sub-species himalayensis and assimilis must therefore stand as forms of Dendrocitta celadina. p- 141. Add to the distribution of Dryonastes chinensis leucogenys Tenasserim; Nwalabo (Hopwood) and S.W. Siam (Gairdner). Dryonastes chinensis germaini is not a new species of ours, but was described by Oustalet in 1890! pp. 146-8. Garrulax leucolophus. The distributions given for the sub-species belangeri and diardi are obviously incorrect and cross each other. Both forms do not occur in Annam where the latter only is found. peri pp. 150, 1. Tenasserim is omitted from the distribution of Garrulax pectoralis : the race occurring there is probably G. p. meridionalis Robinson and Kloss, (Bull. B. 0. ©. x4; 1919. p.11: Hat Sanuk near Koh Lak, 8S. W. Siam). p. 163. The key to the sub-species of Trochalopterum erythrocephalum is incorrect. T. e. woods, descri on p. 166 as having the back unmarked with black, is placed in the section ‘‘ Back and breast with large black round t: o? spots ”’. . p- 167. T. melanostigma ranges as far south in Tenasserim as Nwalabo (vide Hopwood). : pp 193-4 Twurdoides griseus griseus and aD ook striatus. Oberholser has pointed out that T'urdus griseus Gm., is pre occupied by Turdus griseus Bodd., and since there is no synonym of the former he has proposed T'u polioplocamus nom. nov. These two birds must therefore stand as :— 562 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Turdoides polioplocamus polioplocamus. Turdoides ~polioplocamus Oberholser. (Proc. Biol Soc, ashington 33, 1920, p. 84: (Coromandel Coast.), and Tu seloidcs polioplocamus striatus p. 209. In the southern part of Peanceviin Pomatorhinus olivaceus olivaceus is replaced - P. o. fastidiosus Hartert, (Bull. B.O.C. XXXVI, 1916, 81): Trang, Peninsular Siam (syn. siamensis Baker). 5 uchalis and olivaceus and the forms placed Wis tee should probably all stand as sub-species of «chistic p. 246. Pellorneum (or Divnatapas) nigricapitatum is a subspecies of capistratus. p. 254, 5. The Malayan form of Turdinulus epilepidotus is not davisoni: but grantt Richmond (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus 1900, p. 320: Trang, Peninsular Siam). The latter possibly occurs in Southern Tenasserim. Eggs from ‘near Perak,” therefore, are not those of 7’. e. davisoni. p. 257. Horizillas magna m agna. There : only one race and trinomial momenclature is uncalled fo p. 258, 9. Erythrocichla bicolor certainly scien in peter aes as the sub-species HZ. b. whiteheadi Hartert. The n should therefore stand as Erythrocichla bicolor bicoldt p 259. The continental form of Aethostoma rostrata must stand as Aethostoma rostratum dag ob since in Borneo there is a sub-species A. r. witmeri, Sha For the type locality = Malaya” isa very vague term and Singapore should be substituted. p. 260. The generic name T'urdinus is stated to be pre- occupied and Malacocincla must take its place. The existence of T'urdinus (type Turdinus macrodactylus Blyth) has no effect on Malacocincla the species of which are quite distinct from those contained in Turdinus. The genus Malacocincla was proposed by Blyth in 1845, not by Biittikofer in 1895. Malacocinela sepiaria abbotti should stand as Mala- cocincla abbotti abbotti forthose who regard M. a. olivacea (Strickland: Malacca) of the Malay States as distinct,. while a Bornean bird has also been ranked as a sub-species, i.e., M. buttikoferi Finsch. M. abbotti Blyth, and M. sepiartia (Horsf. ) are two perfectly distinct species though they bear a superficial resemblance to each other, and their ranges overlap. p. 262. Thringorhina guttata should stand as Thringorhina — striolata guttata. p. 267. Slachyris chrysaea Beet gs has type locality in Peninsular Siam, Lat. 7°-8° N. It is difficult therefore to believe that it also occurs in ech when an inter- mediate locality, Karennee, Shan States and E. Central urma, is occupied by S. c. assimilis 1922.) Remarks on Mr. Baker’s new volume on Birds. 563 pp. 271, 2. Cyanoderma erythroptera erylthroptera. ‘Type local- ity not ‘' ene ” but Singapore. This race is not found in Born pp. 272-5. "Morass rubricapilla rubricapilla extends south through Tenasserim to about Tavoy (cf. Hume, Stray Feathers, VI, 1877, p. 266) M. r pileata (type locality Malay Peninsula, not Malay (sic) : restricted to Malacca) ranges north to abo ut Lat. 6°. The area between these two is occupied by M. r. connectens (type locality, Penin- sular Siam, in she: latitude of Victoria Point) which ranges eastward through South Siam to Cochin China and South Ann nam and meets still another form in Central Siam. Vhether this last should be known as M. r. sulphurea (Rippon) or M. r. minor Gyldenstolpe, is a vexed question. ough Mr. Baker has examined such a large series of Mixornis it is. obvious from his conclusions that he has not seen sufficient relevant material. p. 274. For Mizornis rubricapilla pileata read Mixornis rubricapilla connectens (Mixornis rubricapilla connectens Kloss, Ibis, 1918, p. 206: Peninsular Siam, Lat. 10°). p. 280. Aleippe phaeocephala magnirostris. Alcippe magnt- rostris Walden, is preoccupied b cippe magnirostris Moore, 1854 (Turdinus or Horizillas magnirostris) and the Karennee Quaker-Thrush may Bane be known as Alcippe pheocephala karenni nom. p. 325. Delete from the distribution of Hesiotais vantholeuca zantholeuca, the words “ Siam and the N. Malay Peninsula ”’ and add ‘‘ except Tenasserim.”’ p. 326. Add (350a) Erpornis xantholeuca interposita sree 1s xantholeuca interposita. Hartert, Bull. Brit Orn. Club, XX XVIII, 1917, p. 20 (Perak, South Malay Peninsula). Like ‘E. a. zantholeuca but with larger bill and wing, ved Distribution :—Thoungyeen valley south- ards through the Malay Peninsula. p. 333. Pirauhie aeralatus is not a distinct species but a race of Pteruthius flaviscapis (Temm., Pl. Col. No. 589, fig. I) of Java: it oni therefore stand as Pteruthius flaviscapis aeralatu Pp. — ated neulticoior: Gm., based on the “ ages rumped Finch ” of Latham from Ceylon (Syn. II, pt. 4, 1783, p. 20) has page priority over Motacilla zeylanica. m., based on the “Ceylon Blackcap” of Brown (IIT. p. 36, t. re and the Ceylon Iora must be known as githina tiphia multicolor. Pringilla Miss fe Gmelin, Syst. Nat. I, 1788, p. 924 (Ceylon). See also Hume. Stray Feathers, V, 1877, p. 432 564 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, p. 351. The size given for the wing of Chloropsis viridis zosterops is much too small: it should read +7-105 mm. These are the extremes of a topo-typical series, while birds from the Pakchan and other parts of Peninsulsr Siam measure 92-104 mm. The type locality is not Tenas- serim, but Sumatra. Delete Borneo from the distribution: the bird occurring there is C. v. viriditectus Hartert. p. 353. Chloropsis cyanopogon should stand as Chloropsis cyanopogon septentrionalis. Chloropsis cyanopogon septentrionalis, Robinson and Kloss, Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam, ITI, 1918, p. 107 (Ghirbi, Peninsular Siam, Lat. 8° N). Chloropsis cyanopogon Oates (Fauna Brit. Ind., Birds, I, p. 239). Description:—As given by Oates and Baker. 73-81 mm; 2 270-75 mm. Distribution:—The Malay Peninsula northwards from Kedah to S. Tenasserim. p. 354. Mesia argentauris argentauris. Add the Malay Penin- sula to the distribution ; and for“‘ M. a. cunhacei Kloss”’ read “* M. a cunhaci Robinson and Kloss ’”’. p 359-427. In a work purporting to speak with some claims to finality the treatment of the Bulbuls seems to be very superficial and faulty. p. 362. It was needless to designate a type locality for Criniger tephrogenys as in 1902 Hartert selected ‘‘ Malacca ” (Nov. Zool. IX, 1902, p. 558). Overlooking, or more robably not knowing Hartert’s work, Mr. Baker has gutturalis (8. Mill.) a Bornean bird, Oates included both or omitted one: Baker has done the same under C. t. tephroyenys though his description seems to apply to C. ochraceus. The former species is of brighter coloura- tion and smaller size; but we need not elaborate here as Hartert (t.c. pp. 558-560) has fully described both forms, and Hume and Davison in their composite Criniger ochraceus, of birds from Southern Tenasserim, also indicate the differences though they fail to recognise them (Stray the nomenclature of it and the races reconsidered. There should be added also - — 1922.] Remarks on Mr. Baker’s new volume on Birds. 565 Criniger ochraceus ochraceus. Criniger ochraceus Moore, in Horsfield and Moore. (Cat Birds Mas. E. Ind. I, 1854, p. 252, Tenasserim). p. 365. The wing measurements of 100-115 mm. were given by Oustalet for Criniger henrici not for C. pallida. p. 368. Alophoixus phaeocephalus should stand as Alophoixus phaeocephalus phaeocephalus as there is a Bornean race Alophoixus pheeocephalus diardi (Finsch). Delete Java from the distribution. p. 3 4-379. The :genus Hemixus must be replaced by Ixos Temminck, 1825. (Type Ios virescens Temm., Pl. Col., No. 382, fig. I, livr. 64: Java.) Oberholser has shown (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1899, p. 212) that the genus is properly characterised and cannot be disregarded as was done by Sharpe (Cat. Birds Brit. Mus. VI, pp. 120, ee p.379. The statement regarding the genus Alcurus is in- correct. It contains not only A. striatus, but also _ A. leucogrammicus (8. Mill.) of Sumatra. p- 381. Robinson and Kloss have never expressed any joint opinion on forms of Molplastes. Mr. Baker is probably referring to Robinson’s Ms. notes in the Natural History Museum. : p. 382. Molplastes chrysorrhoides klossi is not of Robinson, but of Gyldenstolpe ; and the latter has already corrected (in Bull. B. O.C. XLII, 1921) Mr. Baker’s own and original error. Cee: p. 386. Molplastes haemorrhous nigripileus. No description is given. ; d p- 392. Genus Xanthixus. For Kloss read Robinson an Kloss. Xanthixus flavescens. On this species see the note at the end of this review. ; : p 396,7. To the distribution of Otocompsa emeria peguensts should be added the Malay Peninsula. No type or ty pical locality are given for this new subspecies. p. 402. Trachycomus ochrocephalus must stand as :— Trachycomus zeylanicus. | Sturnus zeylanicus. Gmelin, Syst. Nat. 1, 1788, p. 804 (Java). } i lonese Sturnus zeylanicus, Gm. (I.c.) is based on the Cey “Starling” of Latham (Syn. II, pt. 1, 1783, ) as page priority over 7'urdus ochrocephalus. - att p. 821) based on the “ Yellow-crowned Thrush” of bro (HIT, p. 50, t. 22). p 404. In our opinion Hypsipetes malaccensis Blyth is better included in Ixos (Hemizxus) than in ole. 566 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, aris. p. 418-421. Pycnonotus plumosus. The treatment of the races under this heading is entirely wrong. In the first place P. blanfordi and P. robinsoni are not allied to P. plumosus in the specific sense; but to each cther. P. plumosus is a Malayasian species extending up the Malay Peninsula into Tenasserim; P. blanfordi and its subspecies P. robinsoni is an Indo-Chinese Species extend- ing southwards down the Malay Peninsula to Patani (Lat. 6° 30’ N): there is thus a considerable overlap between the two. - p. plumosus is rightly given trinomially since sub- species exist in the Malay Archipelago. P. p. blanfordi should stand as Pycnonotus blanfordi blanfordi and be followed by Pycnonotus blanfordi robinsoni. The dis- tribution of the last requires correction: it certainly occurs at Bangkok and no doubt at Krabin which is a town fifty miles to the east of that place, and at Ayuthia also near Bangkok ; but since P. b. blanfordi occurs in South Annam the presence of the other race there is scarcely possible. a little yellower. In the case of P. plumosus and P. robinsoni Mr. Baker has violated his own standard for sub- there is absolutely no inter-gradation. Their alliance is ee that of ‘‘ representative species ”. P Pp. 421. Pycnonotus simplex simplex must stand as 1922.) Remarks on Mr. Baker’s new volume on Birds. 567 Pycnonotus brunneus brunneus. Pycnonotus brunneus Blyth, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, XIV, 1845, p. 568 (Malacca). Pycnonotus simplex Oates, Fauna Brit. Ind. Birds, I, p. 292. The distribution of the sub-species is Malay Peninsula, south of Mergui, and Sumatra. Though rightly called ‘‘ Moore’s Olive Bulbul’ by Oates p. 422. Pycnonotus erythropthalmos erythropthalmos. The distribution of this form is omitted: it ranges south through the Malay Peninsula from the extreme south of Tenasserim. In a foot-note it is stated that P. salvadoris is the name of the Sumatran race: this is incorrect. Sharpe based it on a series of five Bornean birds as may be seen by a reference to the Cat. Birds. Brit. Mus. VI, p. 155. It is true that after these an immature skin from Sumatra is mentioned but this cannot possibly be regarded as the type: further, Borneo has already been designated. Sumatran birds have been named P. e. cyanochrus by Oberholser. p. 422. The generic name Microiarsus must be changed to Brachypodius Blyth (Type Lanius melanocephalus Gm..,) now to be known as Brachypodius atriceps Temm. type of Microtarsus Eyton, is M. melanoleucus Eyton, and it is incorrect to characterise Microiarsus as havin barred rump feathers and a glossy head as M. melanoleucus possesses neither feature. ‘The genus is a Malayasian one not entering British India and seems sufficiently distinct on account of its shorter tail coverts and the proportions of the culmen and tarsus: in Brachypodius the tail coverts are abnormally lengthened while the difference in length between culmen and tarsus is much less. : p. 423. The birds placed under Microiarsus melanocezhalus melanocephalus represent two forms and should stand in future as 439. Brachypodius atriceps major. Brachypodius atriceps major Robinson and Kloss, Journ. Fed. Malay States Mus, XI, p. 55, 1923 (Cachar). Micropus melanocephalus Oates and Blanf., 1, p. 294 (part.) Description, etc., as given under M. m. melanocephalus by Baker : but distribution confined to British India and Siam north of the Isthmus of Kra. 439a. Brachypodius atriceps atriceps. Turdus atriceps, Temminck, Pl. Col. No. 147, 1822 (Java). Micropus melanocephalus, Oates and Blanf., 1. p. 294 (part.) 568 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, Like B. a. major but smaller: wings 75-81 Distribution :—Tenasserim ; in the Malay Peninsula south- wards ; Sumatra, Java, Borneo and the Philippines. Both forms occur at the Pakchan where a series has been obtained with wings measuring 78-86 mm. Three ex- amples from Koh Lak, S. W. Siam have wings of 79 mm. and it is therefore probable that the true range of B. a. major does not extend southwards much beyond Tavoy. With regard to the specific name Oberholser has pointed out (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 52, 1917, p. 193 that Lanius melanocephalus Gm. (Syst. Nat. I, 1788, p. 308) is pre- occupied by Lanius melanocephalus Gm. t.c. p. 301, and that the next available name is Turdus atriceps Temm., PI. Col. No. 147, 1822 Java and Sumatra. The following alterations are necessitated :— p. 425. Microtarsus melanocephalus fusciflavescens to Brachy- podius atriceps fusciflavescens. Microtarsus poiocephalus to Brachypodius poiocephalus. p. 426. Microtarsus cinereoventris to Brachypodius cine- ventris. p. 457. In Pnoepyga the sexes are said to differ: this may be the case in the Indian forms but not for the genus as a whole. In Malayasian birds, at any rate, it is impossible to constantly separate males from females (cf. Journ. Fed. Malay States Mus. VIII, pt. 2, 1918, p. 204). Notre on Biytn’s Bunsen (Xanthixus flavescens). By C. Boden Kloss. typical and named sub-specifically the birds inhabiting Northern Burma, the Shan States. Karenne and North Tenasserim which differed from North-Western ones. No doubt specimens from North Arakan, in the neighbourhood of the Chin Hills, are the 1922.] Remarks on Mr. Baker's new volume on Birds. 569 same as Assamese examples; but Arakan extends over some five degrees of latitude and a considerable amount of variation may occur in such an area. The birds collected by Phayre are very distinct from Assam birds and it is practically certain they came from South Arakan, in all probability from the hills between Sandoway and Prome which I select as the type locality of X. /. flavescens. Allowing for age they seem to differ in no respect from brightly-coloured specimens from the South Shan States and North Burma (eight examples). All South Annam no material from Assam was available, but I have now four skins from Hungrum, N. Cachar and one from Manipur. All these differ from X. /. flavescens in being slightly less greenish above perhaps, and much less yellow below, the yellow except of the median lower abdomen, vent and tail- coverts being a slight streaky wash rather than a solid colour: they are paler, less deep olive (Ridgway) above and more yellow-washed, less deep greyish olive (Ridgway) below than X. f. sordidus. 1 propose for them the name Xanthixus flavescens pallens subsp. nov. Type. Male collected by E. C. Stuart Baker at Hungrum, North Cachar on 6th February 1895. Indian Museum No. 22956. The three forms of the species therefore are :— i. X. f. pallens Kloss (syn. X. f. flavescens Baker, nec Blyth) North-Western form. Assam, Manipur, Chin Hills, N. Arakan. = ii. X. f. flavescens (Blyth) (syn. X. f. vivida Baker) Central o orth Burma, Shan States, Karenne, N. Tenasserim,? South Arakan (type locality). _ iii. X. f. sordidus Robinson and Kloss (sy2. X. f. vividus Baker, fide Baker). South-Eastern form. South Annam. The material I have examine Survey of India and I am indebted the opportunity of again seeing it. d belongs to the Zoological to Dr. N. Annandale for lower below than the - " The single Manipur specimen examined Lis yel achar series and is tending towards the typical race. ? Not known from the ‘aay Peninsula, much less the Malay ints as stated by Baker. SURO SOS 37. Observations on the Bat-Flowers of the Mohwa (Bassia latifolia). By Maupe L. Crrauorn, F.LS., F.Z8.. 2.58, As recent books on Indian Botany have not touched on the rather unique floral mechanism of the Mohwa these notes and sketches made in March and April 1914, have been put t observations because the bats appeared to be doing a great deal of damage ; for instead of eating the fruit only, which is usually the case, they were devouring flowers instead. The Mohwa tree is leafless when it starts coming into flower and the flowers have a strong unpleasant odour resembl- ing that of bats. (It was not determined at the time whether are about two to three inches long are borne in dense clusters, near the ends of the rather horizontally placed twigs, just below the tuft of young leaves. The flower and pedicel are tawny and tomentose. The corollas of the older flowers are eream-coloured and fleshy. calyx consists of four coriaceous tawny-coloured sepals about half an inch long. The corolla in the first stage of flowering is not fleshy and remains almost completely covered by the sepals with just the six or eight pointed lobes of the corolla only protruding and closely twisted round the stvle (Fig. 8). It does not open like the corollas of other flowers. In the second stage the corolla is fleshy and enlarged to more than twice its previous size and it still remains closed. There are about twenty-four stamens arranged in three series within the corolla tube, The anthers are subsessile, lanceolate and 572 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, through field glasses. In all the bunches high up on the tree, examined through the glasses, it was found that only those buds which hang down have the styles protruding. Fig. 9 shows the longitudinal section of a flower in the first stage when the anthers are ripe. In this stage when lightly tapped at night a shower of pollen is given off. In Fig. 8a, a flower is t. day or two after the pollen is shed the fleshy part of the corolla thickens. Fig. 11 gives a sketch of the flower in the second stage. Fig. 10 gives a section of the same showing the much enlarged and fleshy corolla. In this the second stage the corolla becomes much enlarged and quite fruit-like in its edibility, but the stamens which are situated on the corolla tube have shed all their pollen before the second stage is reached, otherwise the anthers containing the pollen would be devoured along with the fleshy corollas. As the corolla enlarges the style also grows and is found to be about half an inch longer than it was in the first stage. In this stage the stigma is mature and still sticky. The early stage of the flower is quite bud-like and it could easily be mistaken for a bud as it does not even open. ‘The to be damaged by bats. Pollination is effected by bats while eating the fleshy corolla of the older flowers which have shed their pollen. The bats may be seen hanging upside down scrambling about hooking their half-open wings on to the flower-bearing twigs. In search- ing for the fleshy corollas of the older flowers they wrap their wings round the whole bunch and while doing so their wings may be compared to inverted umbrellas held close under the bunch, forming a ready receptacle for the pollen which is shed by the movements of the bats among the flowers. Cross- pollination appears to take place at this stage. The bats get the under surface of their wings powdered with the pollen from the younger flowers which are not fleshy whilst eating the fleshy corollas of the older flowers and the sticky stigmas of the older flowers rub against the pollen dusted inner surface of the bats’ wings and get smeared with the pollen. os Most pendulous flowers have the loose pollen mechanism 1922.] Bat-Flowers of the Mohwa. 573 and the anthers open by pores to shed the powdery pollen, but in the pendulous flowers of the Mohwa the anthers open laterally in longitudinal slits to shed the pollen into the cavity formed by the unopened corollaand the pollen is shed through the minute pore-like openings of the corolla instead. The mechanism in the Mohwa somewhat resembles that of the common English Heath and also that of the Bruyére of the south of France in having pen dulous flowers with loose pollen mechanism, but in these the anthers open by pores. The Mohwa also resembles that of the heather (Calluna vulgaris) in the rapid growth of the flower in the second stage. Regarding this growth Miiller in his ‘ Fertil- isation of Flowers” states—‘‘ The style, which even in the bud overtops the stamens, grows very markedly after the flower opens as the flower itself does. As a rule, it attains its full length only after the anthers have completely shed their pollen, at which time the four-lobed stigma reaches its full develop- ment, but the stigma, even when the flower first opens, is cap- able of causing pollen-grains to adhere to it, and is not rarely found dusted with pollen at that period.” The floral mechanism of the Mohwa appears to be of a rather extraordinary type and is also quite perfected in its own line Perhaps it should be mentioned that two recent books on Indian Botany, ‘‘ A Manual of Elementary Botany for India ”’ by Achain, and Basu’s “Indian Medicinal Plants” have both given illustrations of the Mohwa flower ‘“‘ open’’, and have not mentioned in the text that the flower never opens. very accurate description, however, was given of the Mohwa tree as far back as 1785 by Hamilton in the first volume of “ Asiatic Researches.” In this he observes that “ the flowers are of a nature very extraordinary, differing essentially from those of any other plant with which I am acquainted, as they have not, in any respect the usual appearance of such but rather resemble berries, and I, like many others, had long conceived them to be the fruit of the Mahwah ; the tree drops its leaves in the month of February, and early in March these flowers egin to come out in clusters of thirty, forty or fifty, from the extremity of every small branchi; and from this period till the later end of April, as the flowers come to maturity (for they never open or expand ) they continue falling off, with their an- therae in the mornings, a little after sun-rise when they are gathered.” : ; The type of floral mechanism found in the Mohwa in which a large portion of the actual flower is edible is 4 rather costly and uncertain one (although it has been wonderfully per- fected in the Mohwa) and on this account appears to be very rare among plants. The only other plant with this type of mecha- nism, recorded so far, is Fraycinclea, a pandanus-like plant of Java, which is pollinated by bats while visiting the flowers for the edible bracts. a 574 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, The flower of the Mohwa is of a high type and it also shows a further advance in its floral mechanism for it ensures cross- pollination by an ingenious and fairly simple method with the flower actually remaining closed. This type of mechanism has probably been derived comparatively recently from open flow- ers, as open flowers are found in all the other genera studied, belonging to the same Natural Order. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate I. The figures illustrating this note are selected from a number of sketches and drawings taken from living specimens either on the tree or immediately after being collected. Few-flowered clusters had to be chosen and not the more typical many-flowered and densely crowded bunches as it was easier to follow the growth of the flower from day to day while still growing on the tree in the less crowded bunches. The time at which the drawing of the flower in the various stages was made and other points of interest are noted in the following descriptions :— Fie, 1.—Rough sketch made from bunch actually grow- ing on the tree, and observed through field-glasses, showing young buds as seen on the morning of the 14th March. Fic. 2.—Rough sketch of the same bunch on the morning of the 16th March, which shows the buds taking up the drooping position but with no styles projecting. Fie. 3.—Sketch of the same bunch in Figs. 1 and 2, drawn on the morning of the 19th March. It shows the buds more pendant, and in two or three of the buds the styles appeared to be protruding slightly as far as could be made out with the glasses. Fic. 4.—Rough sketch of two bunches on the tree with buds older than those shown in Figs. 1, 2, and 3. Sketched on the morning of the 12th March. Three buds on the right bunch had styles protruding. Qn the left bunch one of the flowers was beginning to “ripen.” On the 13th March two more flowers on the left bunch were becoming fleshy. 1G.5.—The same two bunches as shown in Fig. 4, but sketched on the 14th March. The left bunch had four flowers with ripe corollas while the right bunch had two. On the 15th March only one ripe flower was left on the right bunch. On the 19th March two of the younger buds of the bunch on the right had become fleshy and had styles protruding. Fig. 6.—Sketch of two buds on a flowering branch as they appeared on the 2nd April. ; ae Fic. 7.—The same buds sketched on the 5th April. But 1922.] Bat-Flowers of the Mohwa. 575 B which was of the same age as A when cut on the 2nd April was shedding pollen on the evening of the 5th April. The corolla at this stage is almost completely covered by the sepals. Fite. 8.—Bud-like flower in first stage sketched on the evening of the 5th April. When lightly tapped, pollen was shed through the pore-like openings and when the style was touched through the tip of the corolla tube. Fic. 8a.—Slightly enlarged drawing of flower in the first stage with the tip of one of the sepals turned back to show the opening through which the pollen is shed. There were two other openings just under the tip of the opposite sepals but they were not so large. Plate IT. Fig. 9 —Section of flower in the first stage. At this stage the anthers are ripe and the stigma sticky and when tapped or shaken at night it produces a shower of pollen. Sketched at 2 a.m. on the 29th March. Fre. 10.—Section of flower in second stage with much enlarged fleshy corolla, and pollen shed. Natural size. Fie. 11.—Sketch of fully “ripe” flower with the much enlarged and fleshy corolla. In this stage the style is about half an inch longer than it was in the first stage. Natural S1Ze. Fies, 12-17 give sketches of a bud and flowers of different ages. The flowering branch was cut at 6-30 p.m. on the 9th April and the flowers were examined almost immediately after. [In taking the exact measurement of the lengths of the sepals, corollas and styles the sections became slightly distorted and wider. The exact lengths are shown in the drawings. ] Ia. 12.—Sepals much longer than petals, style only a little longer than the sepals. Anthers immature and no pollen shed when tapped. fla still Fig. 13.—Pollen being shed and fleshy part of corolla sti completely hidden under sepals. : 1 IG. i sae oll n eng: shed. Style and petal slightly longer than that of flower shown in Fig. 13. re Fig. 15.—Fleshy part slightly thicker than that in Fig. 13. Appears to be a bit older than that in Fig. 13. fall Fie. 16.—Section of old flower in which corolla has fallen off. The style was much longer than the old style of that in Fig. 15, but the sepals were of the same length. pos Fic. 17.—Section of old flower showing corolla sh os ovary slightly larger. Sepals the same length as that in Fig. 15, but style found to be exactly 1 cm. longer. ahd on Fras. 18-31 give the sections of all the flowers oe 2 a bunch which was examiaed about 8 a.m. Altogether the Were fourteen flowers and none were destroyed by bats. Fie. 18.—Quite a young bud. 576 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] Fig. 19.—Flower in first stage shedding pollen. Fig. 21.—Most of the pollen shed. Fig. 26.—Pollen shed thickly. Figs. 29.-31.—Old flowers which have lost their fleshy corollas. Ig. 32 shows two stamens enlarged about twice the natural size. PLaTe VII wn. AS JOUR Soc. Bene , Von. XVIII, 1922. AD pry sapped --7 bs Nadia La 33> Lt i sBmeiuacdo FY N|+ 40g “VYMHOIW AHL AO SYUAMOTA-LYE ose W yt ‘ Bers yop “Vil-e°¢ “Burn 4oy, 474 FD “ih *Q MPAT HMB 1 Sumiwgy g yee 4 “Bamanyy zg & ™ WARY Y vt “Burs, T Puate VIII, UIT, 1922. \ As. Soc. Brna., Von. X JOURN. “VMHOW WHEL JO SHAMOTA- LYE (ex) Es FS G » 36 4 “oe \ / 7 Pe: oqo ies *3) um — «© wee me ‘2 aN ‘ AN I 38. Ona new species of Cylindrospermum from Bengal— Cylindrospermum doryphorum, Brith! et Biswas. By Pavt Briint anp Katrpapa Biswas. [ Paper read at the meeting of the Asiatic Society of Bengal on the 7th of March 1923. ] The genus Cylindrospermum belongs to the Tribe Ana- baeneae of the family of Nostocaceae. Dr. Forti, in De Toni’s Sylloge Myxophycearum, page 47]. defines the genus as follows :~- a stratum of indefinite outline, the cylindrical form of the cells and particularly of the spores, which, w ere they occur, are placed singly, rarely several in a row, immediately behind the terminal heterocyst. : n our species the heterocysts are found one at either end of the filament. The filaments are, however, brittle, and it can often be observed under the microscope that one or both of the heterocysts, together often with one or two of the adjacent vegetative cells break off, after which the residual filament is left with only one or no heterocyst at either one or both the rounded or pointed ends. As a matter of fact, if a small iari i isti i the he green. A peculiarity which distinguishes b 4 i Nos is the shape our species from those of most of the No acraanecceine “esl which the heterocysts are pear-sh outer end, and in Cylindrospermum Goetzet the heterocysts are 578 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, said to be “ prorsum arcte attenuatae, apice acute rotundatae.”’ The spear-head shape of the heterocysts has induced us to call the new species Cylindrospermum doryphorum, as this character seems to be quite constant. The shines aes are 4-8 p long and 2-4 » in diameter at their widest par The vegetative cells are cylindrical, “dlightly or nee at all constricted at the joints, 4-8 » long and 2-4 » wide, the length always exceeding the diameter but never, eeidestee being more than twice as long as wide. A peripheral zone and the dissepiments are hyaline; within the peripheral zone there lies a zone containing granules which are more or less irregularly aggregated into longitudinal rows, whilst the axial portion is either hyaline or very finely granular. Resting spores are rather scarce. Where they occur they are nearly always single and adjacent to the terminal hetero- cyst, but very rarely they occur in pairs, and sometimes they are soperatee from the heterocysts by one or a few vegetative homogeneous and of a pale bluish green colour, like that of the heterocysts ; usually, however, their contents are rather dense- y an somewhat coarsely granular. They are clothed with a firm, smooth, hyaline membrane, are 8-12» long and 4-6 p wide, and always wider than the vegetative cells. Th aments are aggregated into cloud-like floating colonies of indefinite outline and a verdigris-green colour. the — described by Professor Forti Cylindro- spermum tropicum, a species found in Ceylon, differs in the fila- ments being échiftcioted at the joints, in the ‘heterocysts being twice as wide as the vegetative cells and in the spores being up to 43 » in length; C. Goetzei has minutely punctate ae yellow spores 12-20 p long and 8 » in diameter —~ vegetative cells are 3 to 4 times as long as wide, the heterocysts are subspherical or oblong and up to 16 » long; and the spores reach a length of 30 to 40 »; C. licheniforme, the Kuetzingian figure of which reminds one of our species, has oblong-ellipsoidal, not pee -headed, heterocysts and its spores are 20-30 (—38) » long; C. maius forms a blackish- ly exceed those of our gee and its spores are covered by a papillate um has flexuous filaments, oe a gotehaed heferooyst <3 icacotben brown gre: 1922. ] Cylindrospermum from Bengal, new Species, 579 ) 8, C. muscicola, a widely spread species, are oblong, the spores i 2 Drawn by K. P. Biswas. Cylindrospermum doryphorum, sp. 0. are 10-20 » long and of a golden-brown colour; C. catenatum differs in the spores occuring in a row of two to eight and in the elongate heterocysts, and the heterocysts of C. humicola are globose. "The single filaments can often be seen to move slowly straight onwards, different filaments moving in different directions. 580 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.) We have to thank Mr. V. G. Raju of the Public Health Department for supplying us with the sample in which we discovered the new species The figures in the illustration represent different forms of filaments. 39. Observations on the Luminosity of some Animals in the Gangetic Delta. By B. Prasuap, D.Sc., Zoological Survey of India, Calcutta. (Published by permission of the Director, Zoological Survey of India.) River in the Gangetic Delta,” in which he had recorded some in their favour, that the observations were made on arge numbers of individuals and that the investigations were carried out at practically all hours of the day and night and at differ- ent times of the year. Before going on to the subject proper it may be noted that the Fauna of the various streamlets and creeks in the delta resembles that of the Matlah river, in that it is very rich in individuals though very poor in the number of species repre- sented. This was fortunate for the investigation, as the circle of work was greatly narrowed and I was able to pay greater attention to the few species with which I had to deal. In the case of most of these also my results were negative, but in the case of four:—1l. Harpodon nehereus (Ham. Buch.)—a fish, 2. Leander tenuipes, Henderson—a prawn, 3. a race of Pleurobrachia globosa and 4. Beroe cucumis, Fér.—two rove phores, I was able to observe the production of light. me ; methods of the production of ae hye different in differen cases I will deal with each separately. ; The interesting fish known to the scientists as oes nehereus and popularly known as the ‘‘ Bombay srs ie in ‘ Bummalok”’ is fairly common in the lower reaches ie ee delta. This species along with the only other species of t ee tk a SO Oe a era: 166 (1000 582 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, — depths which periodically comes near the surface.” t its luminosity the same author remarked ‘‘ when newly meets its body is brilliantly phosphorescent.” Kemp, how- ever, was not able to corroborate this statement by his obser- vations. During the course of nearly three years I had the the day and night, but except in the case of a single dead specimen none of them showed any signs of luminosity, nor was I able to distinguish any traces of luminous organs on the body of this fish. The particular a was taken in a beam-trawl in about 5 fathoms of water at Port Canning on : e spe a bowl of estuarine water for nearly six hours on the open deck, when my attention was directed to it by a faint light that was to be seen in the bowl. Ona careful examination it was found that the light was being emitted by the fish that had been left in the bowl. The light was of a faint bluish green colour and was not localized in any particular area rather the whole body of the fish was luminous. I suspected that the luminosity in this case was probably due to bacte- ria, particularly as the fish was already partially decomposed and was emitting a faint smell. Its body was covered with a shiny substance which on examination under the high power of a microscope was found to be teeming with bacteria. Working in an out of the way place like Port Can- ning and with my very limited knowledge of Bacteriology, it was not possible to proceed very far with the identification of the bacterium but on consulting the literature on the subject on my return to Calcutta I was able to decide from my roug sketches and notes that the bacterium belonged to the family Bacteriaceae and was, probably owing to the flagella at one end of te organism, one of the B. pflugeri group. Luminous bacteria have been known for a long time and it will elstly be not out of place to review the sige under which these organisms show phosphorescence :—(1) require a fair abundance of a nutrient medium like the dana bodies of fish, molluscs, etc., in which decay has just started, (ii) fair amount of moisture and a salty medium, (iii) tempera- ure of about 40° C. and (iv) abundant supply of oxygen. Jnder these circumstances the bacteria have been shown by direct experiments to produce a secretion which ignites in the presence of the abundant supply of oxygen and produces a faint peut therefore, clear that the Bombay Duck is not aely ‘phosphorescent for it does not possess any light-pro- ucing organs of the type found in other fishes, which are known to be luminous, but that the phosphorescence, whenever 1922.] Luminosity of some animals in the Gangetic Delta, 583 observed, is due to bacteria which find a suitable medium in this fish and with all other suitable conditions in surroundings, like the Gangetic Delta, form large colonies on the body of the fish and becoming active produce light. thus making the fish phosphorescent. The away the prawns, he found them all glowing, and brought round the dish to me for examination. In the case of these prawns the gills only were emitting a faint bluish-green light of about the same intensity as I had noticed in the case of the Bombay n emp as the race bengalensis. The specimens that collected in the Sunderbans are intermediate to some extent between the two it brought back to Calcutta were identified as Beroe sangre F6rskal a form widely distributed in the East; Pp arg ha the second Ctenophore which was found in the Chilka ’ but no specimens of whic As a result of their wor not show any light when at oe swimming plates accompanl 5 ‘ ; re energy-release are, therefore, not connected, as 4 antamaa Jo | Herdman’s Ceylon Pearl Fisheries, IV, p. 61 (1905). 2 Mem. Ind. Mus., V, PP- 117, 118 (1915). Sy A9i6) 3 The Production of Light by Animals, Pt. IU, p- ; 584 Journal of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, 1922.] motion and heat or of motion and electricity in other animals. In warmer regions the light appears as a strong glow or a flash for a second or so after mechanical stimulation, while in colder waters the light is strong and appears as a steady glow lasting for a minute or more. The light is localised in the region of the swimming plates, and the production of light is at its maximum at the optimium temperature at which the animals usually live; direct sunlight, however. inhibits lumino- sity, while mechanical stimulation accelerates the power to light. The light, as has been noted already, is produced in the region of the swimming plates only, and it has been estab- lished by histological investigations, that it is probably pro- duced in special cells. Underneath the swimming plates are the water vascular canals, and linning these canals are the genital cells; lying distally to the genital cells are rows of arge vacuolated cells. It is most probably in these cells that luciferine is secreted, and stored in the vacuoles. The lucifer- ine produces light by its combustion. Curiously, however, the secretion of luciferine is not begun till the animals have been kept in darkness for some time or are brought into dark- ness, while combustion does not start till some stimulus of a mechanical nature is applied. It may also be noted that the combustion is of an intra-cellular nature. Coming now to my observations on these two forms, it as those summarised above. No light was observed in pieces without the ciliated swimming plates, but in others, where even a small part of the plate was intact, a faint glow, lasting for half a second to a second, was observable at irregular inter- vals. In freshly captured specimens stimulation resulted in the production of light at more regular and shorter intervals. For stimulation gentle shaking of the water was quite enough. summing up the observations it may be noted that in the case of the animals observed in the Delta, true light-pro- ducing organs were found only in the two Ctenophores and that in the fish and prawn, which showed phosphorescence, the phenomenon was due to light-producing Bacteria. 40. Revision of Kobelt’s Nomenclature of the Indian Ampullariidae. By B. PrasHapb, D.Sc., Offg. Superintendent, Zoological Survey of India. cases to understand his interpretations. In view of my pro- posed tour to the various European Museums, I, therefore, post- poned the completion of this work till I had myself examined the collections in the British Museum, London, and had also seen the specimens figured by Kobelt in his recent Monograph in Mart.-Chemn. Conch.-Cab. Having now had the opportunity of examining both these collections and comparing the large Indian collections, which I had taken over with me _ to Europe, I take this opportunity to publish a short revision of Kobelt’s nomenclature of the Indo-Burmese species. e detailed results of my investigations on the Indo-Burmese species will be published later in the ‘‘ Memoirs of the Indian Museum,” Calcutta. . It will not be out of place to remark here on the un- satisfactory nature of the three Monographs on the Indian rs. f these is the Monograph by Kobelt. It was begun in 1911, and completed in 1915; the part dealing with the South Asiatic species, however, was published in 1912. the too great reliance he placed on Sowerby’s work, as also the 1 Sowerby Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, VIII, pp. 354-364 (1909)- IX, pp. 56-64 (1910) and XII, pp. 65-73 (1916). 586 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. ([N.S., XVIII. carelessly named shells that Kobelt received from the same source. Sowerby’s Catalogue, or at least the part dealing with the Indian species, was published prior to Kobelt’s work. It is a very useful vompilation, but is, at least for the Indian species, in no sense critical. The last and the most recent revision of the Indian species is that by Preston published in his volume! on the Freshwater Gastropod and Pelecypod Molluses of India. It is, unfortunately, nothing more than a The author did not avail himself of the recent work of Sower- by, beyond including the latter’s description of his new species Ampullaria (Pila) alucinans, from Ceylon. He entire- ly ignored, Kobelt’s Monograph, and does not even refer to all the literature on the subject. Before going on with the systematic part, I would like here to express my great indebtedness to Mr. G. C. Robson of the British Museum, London, and to Dr. F. Haas of the Senckenberg Museum, Frankfurt-a-Main, for the facilities afforded me for examining the collections under their charge. Pachylabra largillierti (Philippi) var. 1912. Pachylabra largillierti, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 59, Taf. XXxill, fig. 9. specimen from Mousson received as ‘Ampullaria paludinoides, Jan,, Ostindien,’ but which Kobelt had labelled as largillerti, Phil. This specimen is nothing more than a large specimen of the common South Indian species—Pachylabra virens (Lam.). it may also be noted here that P. largillierti is an African Species, occuring in Madagascar and probably in South Africa. Pachylabra globosa (Swainson). 1912. - Pachylabra globosa, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 72, Taf. xxxiv, figs. 1, 2, var. encaustica, p. 95, Taf. xli, fig. 1, In his account of this species, Kobelt was obliged to leave out the discussion of the Synonymy and variation owing to insufficient Material, e, however, included an extract from Nevill’ regarding the various forms considered by the 1 Fauna of British India Series, Mollusca, Gastropoda and Pelecy- rome (Freshwater), London (1915). ine Hand-List Moll. Ind. Mus., Part IT, pp. 1, 2, Calcutta Rs 0) 1922. ] Revision of Kobelt’s Nomenclature. 587 latter author as forms or varieties of this species. Having examined Nevill’s original specimens and the very large series of shells in the Indian Museum, and the type-specimens of the various forms in the British Museum, as also large num- bers of living specimens from different localities, I have come to the conclusion, that the forms encaustica, Reeve ; corrugata, Swainson ; sphaerica, Hanley and Theobald ; fasciata, Hanley and Theobald; incrassatula, Nevill; minor, Nevill and longi- spira, Nevill, are only phases of this variable species, and that it is impossible to distinguish them as distinct owing to the great variation exhibited by specimens from various localities. The question wil! be discussed at length in my detailed paper. Pachylabra layardi (Reeve). 1912. Pachylabra layardi, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 73, Taf. xxxiv, figs. 3, 4 regarded it as a distinct variety of globosa, Swainson. Sowerby included it as a variety of virens, Lam. ; while both Kobelt and Preston treated it as a distinct species. As a result of a care- ful examination of a large series of shells, I am of opinion, that the species, though closely allied to both virens and globosa, is quite distinct, and is confined to the island of Ceylon. Pachylabra layardi (Reeve) var. cinerea (Reeve). 1912. Pachylabra cinerea, P. Tischberni and P. alucinans, Kobelt, op. cit., pp. 89, 100 and 104, Taf. xxxv, are all specimens of the same species ; is nothing more t species P. layardt. s Kobelt aoe publishing his account of these forms had received specimens of the other species from Sowerby and Fulton, and a few notes about these specimens will also be included here. 7 er ree ens received with the label “ Pila globosa var. Two specim be cinerea, pg tes > in Sowerby’s handwriting, belong to two 588 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVIII, species. One is a specimen of cinerea, a variety of P. layardi and not P. globosa ; while the other is a half-grown shell of the other Ceylonese species—P. doliodes. Another shell received from the same source as ‘* Pila tischbeini, Dohrn ”’ belongs to the variety cinerea. A specimen, which Sowerby sent as the cotype of his new Ceylonese species—P. alucinans—is the most interesting of the lot. It is a young shell of a uniform dark- brownish colour, without any colour bands, as are present in Sowerby’s type-shell. The umbilicus is more perforate, and is border. The mouth of the shell has quite a different shape. and the shell is thick with distinct vertical striae. This speci- men, except for being of about the same size as Sowerby’s type of P. alucinans, has nothing in common with it. It is only a young specimen of the Burmese and East Indian species—P. conica (Gray). Pachylabra doliodes (Reeve). 1912. Pachylabra doliodes and P. moesta, Kobelt, op. cit., pp. 74, 75, Taf. xxxiv, figs. 5, 6 and 8. Reeve described this species from a shell in the Cuming Collection with the locality ‘Bombay.’ Nevill, however, thought the species to be Ceylonese, but Sowerby, from one o the three shells mounted on the type-tablet being an American species. was misled, and considered the species to be an American one, belonging to the genus Ampullaria, s. 8. The type-shell, which was figured by Reeve as A. doliodes, corres- ponds exactly with the specimens from Ceylon, which Nevill had assigned to this species. Reeve’s Ampullaria moesta from Ceylon is only based on young shells of this species, and must be included in the synonymy of this species. In Kobelt’s collection there is a young specimen of this species purchased from Sowerby and Fulton, London. This shell, as has already been noted, was received as a specimen of globosa var. cinerea. Pachylabra doliodes (Reeve) var. woodwardi (Dohrn). 1912. Pachylabra woodwardi, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 105, Taf. xliii, fig. 9. This form is only known from Dohrn’s unique type- specimen in the British Museum, London. The typeis a young shell and greatly resembles the young shells of P. doliodes. I was at one time inclined to consider it as only an abnormal Specimen of the same species ; but owing to the very perforate nature of the shell, the very loose winding of the whorls and the much darker colouration, as also the differences in the pro- portionate masurements, I, for the present, propose leaving it as a distinct variety. 1922.] Revision of Kobelt’s Nomenclature. 589 Pachylabra virens (Lamarck). 1912. Pachylabra maura, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 85, Taf. xyxv, fig. 2; and P. paludinoides Kobelt (nec Chr. and Jan.) in part, p. 102, Taf. xl, fig. 6, and xiliii, fig. 3. Kobelt’s account of this species based on Reeve is far from complete. He, as I have pointed out already, mistook one of the shells of this species for P. largillierti; and has altogether missed out the forms virens, Lam., carinata, Swain., and malabarica, Phil., all of which, however, are only synonyms of this species. It is of interest to note here, that the shell from the Miinchen Museum, figured by Kobelt (Taf. xl, fig. 6) as pro- bably the type-form of P. paludinoides (Phil.) is also a speci- men of this species, and so is also the fig. 3 (Taf. xliii) copied from Reeve; only this specimen is a little more globose than is normally the case. The species, however, has a very wide range and varies greatly in the form of the shell. In addition to the specimens of this species noted in accounts of the other species, other are in the Senckenberg Museum two typical specimens from Madras, India, labelled Ampullaria carinata var. malabarica, Phil. Pachylabra theobaldi (Hanley). 1912. Pachylabra theobaldi, Kobelt, op. cit, p. 86, Taf. MxXv., fig. 1. Kobelt had a young specimen of this beautiful species from Boettger’s collection from Moulmein, Burma, lled Ampullaria paludinoides, Christ., but he apparently did not recognize the species. He has included the description from Hanley’s original account of the species, and copied the figure from ‘“ Conchologia Indica.” He does not make any reference to Pilsbry’s Burmese species A. winkleyi, | which, however, seems to have been based on only young shells of this species. Pachylabra conica (Gray). 1912. Pachylabra conica Kobelt, op. cit., p. 93, Taf. xl, figs. 1- ; identification of this species and its varieties has ian a confused by Kobelt, who in his notes has mainly followed Reeve and Sowerby. The figure of the typical form copied from Reeve as fig. 1 (Taf. xl) is a correct representation of the typical form. His figures 2 and 3 are of a Javanese 1 Pilsbry, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, LIIl, p. 189, pl. v, figs. 2, 3 (1901). 590 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [N.S., XVITI, shell in the sf npn Collection; this shell and the one delineated on the e plate as figs. 4 and 5, also from the same collection, are ied ib connecting links to Reeve’s javanica, as Kobelt thought, but specimens of true A. javanica. Kobelt examined the type of this latter form and found that it is much more rounded than is represented in Reeve’s figure. in a recent paper! included Reeve’s javanica in the synonymy of conica, but was not sure as to whether it was a distinct variety. Having now examined a fair series of shells, I am of opinion that the Javanese species deserves to be con- sidered as a distinct variety. elt’s figures 8 and 9, of a shell from Boettger’s collec- tion labelled Ampullaria conica var. orientalis, Phil., which he included here, but was doubtful as to whether it was not a distinct form, is only a young specimen of —: Reeve, which, in my opinion, is only a variety of P. conic Pachylabra conica (Gray) var. compacta (Reeve). 1912. Pachylabra compacta, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 100, Taf. xiii, figs. 3-9. As I have noted already in my notes on the species P. conica, I consider this form to be only a variety of that species. Kobelt’s figures on plate xlii are all correctly referred to this species, but as I have already noted, his figures 8 and 9 on Taf. xl, is also of a young shell of this species, and so is also the figure of paludinoides, copied from ‘“ Conchologia Iconica ” as fig. 3 (Taf. xliii). Pachylabra conica (Gray) var. expansa (Nevill). 1912. Pachylabra “paludinoides, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 102 Taf. xliii, fig. 2. The figure cited above, which Kobelt copied from “ Con- chologia Indica ”’ is, as I have satisfied myself by saat ana of the original specimen in the British Museum, London, specimen of this variety. Pachylabra paludinoides (Philippi). aa Pachylabra paludinoides, Kobelt, op. cit., p. 102. 8 Kobelt rightly remarks, it is quite impossible to sisiontity the species originally designated as such by Christ., and Jan., he, therefore, ee the a as restricted l by 1 Prashad, Reo. Ind. Mus., XXII, p. 477 (1921), 1922.] rere of Kobelt’s Nomenclature. 591 Philippi. As I have remarked already Phillipi’s species is nothing more than P. virens (Lam.). It would under the circumstances be best to shots the name paludinoides, Christ., and Jan., and to include Phillipi’s name in the synonymy of virens (Lam.). Genus Turbinicola, Annandale and Prashad. 1912. Turbinicola, er and Prashad, Rec. Ind. Mus. XXII, p. 9 n the paper cited above Di Annandale and I have given becata for separating the Ampullarid from the hill-streams near Khandalla, Bombay, into a new genus. ‘This species has hitherto been known as Ampullaria. nux, ieee: Unfortu- nately, however, Reeve described shells of this species first as A. saxea and later as A. nux, as was found on examination of the types of the two species. The name of the species, there- - fore, must henceforth be TJ'urbinicola saxea (Reeve). Turbinicola saxea (Reeve). 1912. Pachylabra nux and P. saxea, Pew op. cit., pp. 82, 89, Taf. xxxvii, figs. 5, 6, and XXXV, Kobelt when writing his account of these two species had no specimens of either, and copied the descriptions and figures form Reeve. Later he received from Sowerby two specimens labelled “ Pila saxea, Reeve; Pegu.” The two shells curiously ed It may also be 1 ta here ‘deb the species apellarid heptaria, Reeve (Kobelt, p- begs and A. waned Reeve ph TE the Eastern hile On ee